Mitsubishi m70 руководство по параметрам

  1. Инструкции и руководства
  2. Бренды
  3. Mitsubishi Electronics
  4. M70V
  5. Справочник Пользователя

Автор:

Shershen · Опубликовано: 33 минуты назад

Нулевой радиус в таблице корректоров приводит к меньшему количеству ошибок в обработке. Особенно при постоянных переналадках на единичных деталях. Ноль нельзя забыть поменять.

Ну а касательно NX, вывод точки контакта не всегда можно включить даже в операциях, предусматривающих коррекцию на радиус. Например, попробуйте включить вывод точки контакта в z-level-profile при любом переходе между уровнями по поверхности детали. 

Коррекцию на радиус можно включить в любой операции событием пользователя. Вывода точки контакта и тут не будет, если пост специально не допиливать.

Такчто даже NX какбэ намекает, что правильности тут просто нет.

 

Коррекция же на длину — величина относительная. По определению. Книжки, например, по фануку почитайте повнимательнее. Поэтому работать с отрицательными, с положительными или и с теми и другими корректорами одинаково правильно. 

 

Насчет пяти осей. Любой способ будет работать, если его согласовать с пятиосевыми параметрами стойки.

 

Loading…

MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.

Introduction

This manual is an instruction manual for NAVI MILL for 700/70 (hereafter NAVI MILL).

This manual explains how to operate NAVI MILL, so read this manual thoroughly before use. Be sure to study «Precautions for Safety» on the next page and use the system safely.

Details described in this manual

CAUTION

For items described as «Restrictions» or «Usable State» in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as «not possible».

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before starting to use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

Refer to the following documents. MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series

Instruction Manual ………………………………

IB-1500042

Setup Manual …………………………………….

IB-1500124

Programming Manual (M system) …………

IB-1500072

Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before operation or programming to ensure correct use.

Understand the NAVI MILL, safety items and cautions before using the system.

This manual ranks the safety precautions into «DANGER», «WARNING» and «CAUTION».

DANGER

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major

injuries if handling is mistaken.

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if

WARNING

handling is mistaken.

When the user may be subject to bodily injury or when property

CAUTION

damage may occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as « CAUTION«, may lead to serious consequences depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER

Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING

1. Items related to operation

If the operation start position is set in a block which is in the middle of the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

CAUTION

1. Items related to product and manual

For items described as «Restrictions» or «Usable State» in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as «not possible».

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

(Continued on next page)

CAUTION

2. Items related to installation and assembly

Ground the signal cables to ensure stable system operation. Also ground the NC unit main frame, power distribution panel and machine to one point, so they all have the same potential.

3. Items related to preparation before use

Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.

Always turn the power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the I/O device cable. Failure to do so could damage the I/O device and NC unit.

4. Items related to screen operation

NAVI MILL uses the following variables in order to operate the NC program.

NC program mode

Variables used by NAVI MILL

User macro mode

#150 to #179

MTB macro mode

#450 to #479

When NC program mode is user macro mode, do not use common variables. If those variables are written over, malfunction will be resulted. If mistakenly written them over, turn the NC power OFF after securing your safety. When the power is turned ON again, the system recovers the data.

NC program mode is specified on the Preferences screen.

When either «TOOL REG No.» or «HOLE CYCLE» is input in the hole drilling screen, the feedrate and spindle speed are automatically determined using the data in the tool file screen and the cutting condition file screen. In the same way, when «TOOL REG No.» is input in the face cutting screen, the contour cutting screen and the pocket screen, the feedrate and spindle speed are automatically determined. Note that the feedrate and spindle speed of each process determined once will not be changed by changing the data in the tool file screen and the cutting condition file screen.

5. Items related to operation

Stay out of the moveable range of the machine during automatic operation. During rotation, keep hands, feet and face away from the spindle.

Carry out dry operation before actually machining, and confirm the machining program, tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset.

If the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations.

Program so the mirror image function is turned ON/OFF at the mirror image center. The mirror image center will deviate if the function is turned ON/OFF at a position other than the mirror image center.

(Continued on next page)

CAUTION

6. Items related to faults and abnormalities

If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.

If the axis overruns or emits an abnormal noise, immediately press the emergency stop button and stop the axis movement.

7. Items related to maintenance

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated according to specification on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.

Dispose the spent cooling fan according to local laws.

Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the operation panel I/O unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the control section power supply PCB while the power is ON.

Do not replace the expansion PCB while the power is ON.

Do not replace the memory cassette while the power is ON.

Do not replace the cooling fan while the power is ON.

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.

Be careful that metal cutting chips, etc., do not come into contact with the connector contacts of the memory cassette.

Do not replace the high-speed program server unit while the power is ON.

Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for endusers and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused.

This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows:

Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)

In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators. Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/ recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Contents

1. OUTLINE ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

1

1.1

System Outline ………………………………………………………………………………………………

1

1.2

Input Procedures ……………………………………………………………………………………………

2

1.3

Screen Configuration………………………………………………………………………………………

3

1.4

Starting NAVI MILL…………………………………………………………………………………………

4

1.5

Setting up NAVI MILL ……………………………………………………………………………………..

5

2. FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA …………………………………………………………………….

7

2.1

LIST VIEW Area …………………………………………………………………………………………….

8

2.2 OPERATION VIEW Area……………………………………………………………………………….

10

2.3

Setting Area…………………………………………………………………………………………………

11

2.4

Message Area ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.5

Menu Display Area ……………………………………………………………………………………….

11

3. BASIC OPERATIONS……………………………………………………………………………………

12

3.1

Changing Active View……………………………………………………………………………………

12

3.2

Changing Screen………………………………………………………………………………………….

12

3.3

Setting Data…………………………………………………………………………………………………

14

3.4

Switching Windows……………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.5

Switching Selection Tags ………………………………………………………………………………

17

3.6

Inputting Operations ……………………………………………………………………………………..

18

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………………………………………………….

19

4.1

Starting NAVI MILL……………………………………………………………………………………….

19

4.2

Screen Related to the Program ………………………………………………………………………

20

4.2.1 Program Edit Screen ……………………………………………………………………….

20

4.3

Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions ………………………………………………..

24

4.3.1 Process List Screen…………………………………………………………………………

24

4.3.2 Multiple Parts Screen……………………………………………………………………….

26

4.3.3 Operating Process …………………………………………………………………………..

30

4.3.4 Process Mode Selection Screen………………………………………………………..

36

4.3.5 Initial Condition Setting …………………………………………………………………….

39

4.3.6 Hole Drilling ……………………………………………………………………………………

43

4.3.7 Face Cutting …………………………………………………………………………………..

55

4.3.8 Contour Cutting……………………………………………………………………………….

59

4.3.9 Pocket……………………………………………………………………………………………

69

4.3.10 EIA Screen……………………………………………………………………………………

78

4.4

Screens Related to File Editing ………………………………………………………………………

79

4.4.1 Tool File Screen………………………………………………………………………………

79

4.4.2 Cutting Condition File Screen ……………………………………………………………

81

4.5

Screen Related to the Parameters ………………………………………………………………….

83

4.5.1 Parameter Screen……………………………………………………………………………

83

4.5.2 PREFERENCE Screen…………………………………………………………………….

86

4.6

Screen Related to the Version………………………………………………………………………..

88

4.6.1 Version Screen ……………………………………………………………………………….

88

4.7

Program Checker Screen ………………………………………………………………………………

89

4.8

Guidance Function ……………………………………………………………………………………….

94

4.8.1 Tool Guidance Screen ……………………………………………………………………..

95

5. PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS……………………………………………………………………….

96

5.1

NC Program…………………………………………………………………………………………………

97

5.1.1 Output Method for NC Program…………………………………………………………

97

5.1.2 Restrictions …………………………………………………………………………………..

100

5.2

File Program ………………………………………………………………………………………………

101

5.3

Parameter Program …………………………………………………………………………………….

101

5.4

Macro Program…………………………………………………………………………………………..

101

6. TOOL FUNCTIONS …………………………………………………………………………………….

102

6.1 Tool Change Command (M6) and T-Command ………………………………………………

102

6.2

Editing Tool Number and Next Tool Number…………………………………………………..

103

7. RESTRICTIONS FOR CNC FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS……………………………..

104

8. ALARM MESSAGE……………………………………………………………………………………..

105

8.1

Error Message ……………………………………………………………………………………………

105

8.2

Warning Message……………………………………………………………………………………….

108

8.3

Operation Message …………………………………………………………………………………….

109

APPENDIX 1. VARIABLES USED IN NAVI MILL ………………………………………………..

110

APPENDIX 2. PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ……………………………………………………….

112

Appendix 2.1

Machining Drawing …………………………………………………………………….

112

Appendix 2.2

Process Table ……………………………………………………………………………

113

Appendix 2.3

Condition Setting………………………………………………………………………..

113

Appendix 2.4

Creating Program……………………………………………………………………….

114

1. OUTLINE

1.1 System Outline

1. OUTLINE

1.1 System Outline

This manual is an instruction manual for NAVI MILL for 700/70 (hereafter NAVI MILL).

The part program for the vertical machining center (three axes of X, Y and Z) is created with the NAVI MILL.

(1)The following machining processes can be edited.

Hole drilling (Drilling, pecking, step, boring, tapping, helical boring)

Face cutting (Circle, square)

Contour cutting (Circle, square, free)

Pocket machining (Circle, square, L pattern, U pattern, track)

EIA

(2)The tool file and the cutting condition file are provided and the cutting conditions are determined automatically.

(3)The operation screen consists of the LIST VIEW area and the OPERATION VIEW area. In the LIST VIEW area, the whole part program can be always viewed. In the OPERATION VIEW area, there are the guide drawings related to the input items, and the data can be easily input by using these guide drawings.

[LIST VIEW area]

The object of the NAVI MILL is selected.

[OPERATION VIEW area] The screen is displayed

corresponding to the object selected in the LIST VIEW.

[Cutting conditions automatically determined]

Upon tool registration No. entry, the cutting conditions for each process are automatically determined based on the tool file and cutting condition file.

[Help]

[Guide drawing]

[Menu keys]

(Note) The operation screen size is fixed to 800(width) x 600(length).

(4)Program Checker enables the tool paths of a part program to be graphically traced. With this function, errors in input data can be detected at an earlier stage.

(5)Guidance function provides an operator with error recovery information.

(6)Part program is a macro-program-based NC program. Commands can be added between processes from the edit screen of the standard MELDAS 700/70 Series.

(7)The macro program mentioned above can be customized by the machine tool builder.

1 —

1. OUTLINE

1.2 Input Procedures

1.2 Input Procedures

The input procedure for the NAVI MILL is shown below.

The part is operated on the NAVI MILL’s screen.

Start

File edition

Tool file

Cutting condition file

Parameter setting

Parameter file

(The parameter setting is valid even if the parameter is set after editing the NC program)

NC program selection

Newly create

Read out

Process editing:

Initial conditions Process mode selection Process data input

Hole drilling / Face cutting / Contour cutting / Pocket machining / EIA, etc.

Program check (Note) Set the tool

compensation amount and workpiece coordinate system offset to perform Program Check. This function is realized by using the 700/70 Series graphic check function.

NC program operation

Supplements

Tool file

Cut condition file

(Tool registration No. 1 to 99)

(Work registration No.1 to 8)

99

8

Tool leng. offset

Material

1

1

Tool leng. offset No.

Tool applicable

Tool leng. offset

Material

No.

: rotation rate

Tool diam. ffset

No.

No.

Tool applicable

Tool diam. offset

:

rotation rate

Spindle rotation

:

No.

direction

Spindle rotation

direction

:

Parameter setting

M0 output • M6 output • M19 output •Next tool preparation, etc.

Common parameters for hole drilling process (Z clearance, tap selection)

Common parameters for face cutting process (XYZ clearance, Z approach G code)

Common parameters for contour cutting / pocket machining process

Process editing

The NC program, tool file, cutting condition file and parameter file transferred to the CNC can be edited on Magicpro-NAVI MILL for 60S.

END

— 2 —

1. OUTLINE

1.3 Screen Configuration

1.3 Screen Configuration

The screen configuration for the MILL NAVI is shown below.

Program

Program

edit

screen

Process list

Multiple

parts

screen

screen

Initial

Hole

Machining

condition

drilling

pattem

setting screen

screen

screen

Face

Process

cutting

Cutting

screen

Process

mode select

condition

Contour

screen

screen

cutting

(For a new process,

screen

select the process

Pocket

form the process

screen

mode.)

EIA

Program

screen

checker

Tool file

File

screen

Cutting

condition

file screen

Parameter

Parameter

Preference

screen

screen

Version

Version

screen

— 3 —

1. OUTLINE

1.3 Screen Configuration

Screen name

Details

Title screen

This screen is displayed when the power is turned ON.

Program edit screen

The process program is read out and saved, etc.

Process list screen

Tool information and cutting conditions for each

process of a machining program are listed.

Multiple parts screen

A NC program for the multiple parts machining is

generated.

Process mode select

The process mode (hole drilling, etc.) is selected.

screen

Initial conditions setting

The initial conditions for the process program are set.

screen

Hole drilling screen

The parameters for the hole drilling process are input.

Hole drilling machining

The parameters related to the machining pattern of the

pattern screen

hole drilling process are input.

Cutting condition screen

The cutting conditions by the process are input.

Face cutting screen

The parameters for the face cutting process are input.

Contour cutting screen

The parameters for the contour cutting process are

input.

Contour cutting pattern

The parameters related to the machining pattern of the

screen

contour cutting process are input.

Pocket screen

The parameters of the pocket process are input.

Pocket pattern screen

The parameters related to the machining pattern of the

pocket process are input.

EIA screen

The EIA process is input.

Tool file screen

The tool data by each tool is registered.

Cutting condition file

The cutting conditions (speed rate) by each process are

screen

input.

Parameter screen

The tool code and miscellaneous parameter are set.

Preference screen

The system is set up.

Version screen

The version data of the NAVI MILL is displayed.

Program checker

The tool paths of a NC program is graphically traced.

1.4 Starting NAVI MILL

Select EDIT function, then [NAVI] menu to display NAVI MILL screen.

Program edit screen is displayed once when the power is turned ON. Then, whatever the screen previously selected with NAVI MILL is displayed thereafter.

— 4 —

1. OUTLINE

1.5 Setting up NAVI MILL

1.5 Setting up NAVI MILL

Part program output from NAVI MILL is a macro-program-based NC program. Thus, macro programs have to be registered in the NC system in advance. Also, the destinations where NC programs or NAVI MILL’s reference files are saved, as well as the unit for data input, have to be specified prior to NAVI MILL operations.

NAVI MILL setup items

Item

Details

Standard value

PATH

Path to the folder in which NC program is saved.

MEM:/

PROGRAM

PATH

Path to the folder in which tool file, cutting condition file

In 700 Series:

PARAMETER

and parameter file are saved.

D:/NCFILE/NAVI

In 70 Series:

MEM:/

MACRO

Macro program mode

1 (User Macro)

1: User macro mode

2: MTB macro mode

UNIT

Unit for data input

2 (mm)

1: inch

2: mm

NAVI MILL setup procedures

(1)Open PARAMETER screen.

(2)

Set «999 MAINTE» to 1.

[PREFERENCE] menu is displayed.

(3)

Press [PREFERENCE] menu.

PREFERENCE screen is displayed.

(4)Select the macro type. (1:Uer macro 2:MTB macro)

— 5 —

1.OUTLINE

(5)Press [MACRO ENTRY] menu.

(6)Press [Y] key.

(7)Enter the program path.

(8)Enter the parameter path.

(9)Select the unit. (1:inch, 2:mm)

1.5 Setting up NAVI MILL

«OK?(Y/N)» message is displayed.

Macro program is registered in NC system.

When the unit is changed, turn the power OFF and ON again.

(Addendum)

Always carry out a macro program registration when setting up NAVI MILL or switching «MACRO» types.

Change «PROGRAM PATH» and «PARAMETER PATH» when necessary.

When «UNIT» is changed, turn the power OFF and ON again.

If the tool file, cutting condition file and parameter file do not exist in «PARAMETER PATH» folder when the power is turned ON, those files are created by the system.

— 6 —

mitsubishi M700, M70NAVI Instruction Manual

2.FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

2.FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

The screen of the NAVI MILL is divided into the following five areas.

(1)LIST VIEW area (Refer to «2.1 LIST VIEW Area»)

(2)OPERATION VIEW area (Refer to «2.2 OPERATION VIEW Area»)

(3)Setting area (Refer to «2.3 Setting Area»)

(4)Message area (Refer to «2.4 Message Area»)

(5)Menu display area (Refer to «2.5 Menu Display Area»)

(1) LIST VIEW area

(2) OPERATION VIEW area

(4) Message area

(3) Setting area

(5) Menu display area

<Screen example>

— 7 —

2. FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

2.1 LIST VIEW Area

2.1 LIST VIEW Area

The object of the NAVI MILL is selected in this area.

(1) Area bar

(2) Object

(3) Cursor

(1)Area bar

When the LIST VIEW area is active, the area bar is highlighted.

(2)Objects

The list of objects that can be selected are displayed. The object is composed of the main object and the sub object that the main object is detailed. The details of each object are as follows.

Main object

Sub object

Details

PROGRAM

Newly creates, reads out, and deletes, etc. the NC program.

PROCESS

0 INIT

Displays the currently edited process list.

1 DR-LINE

The settings of the selected process can be displayed and

:

changed.

FILE

TOOL

Displays and changes the tool file.

CUT CONDTN

Displays and changes the cutting conditions for each process

per workpiece material.

PARAMETER

Displays the tool option and the miscellaneous parameter to

be used in each process. Those can be changed.

VERSION

Displays the version data of the NAVI MILL.

(Note) If too many processes are registered and all the objects cannot be displayed, a scroll bar will be displayed. In this case, change display of the list by pressing cursor key or page key down, or by clicking on the scroll bar.

— 8 —

2. FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

2.1 LIST VIEW Area

(3) Cursors

When the LIST VIEW area is active and the object is selected with the cursor, the display in the OPERATION VIEW area and the menu display area will be changed.

<Cursor Movement>

The cursor is moved using the cursor keys or a pointing device.

Key type

Operation of cursor

[↑] Cursor key

Moves the cursor one field up regardless of the main object or sub object.

Note that if the ↑ cursor is pressed when the cursor is at the top, the cursor

does not move.

[↓] Cursor key

Moves the cursor one field down regardless of the main object or sub object.

Note that if the ↓ cursor is pressed when the cursor is at the bottom, the cursor

does not move.

[←] Cursor key

When the cursor is at the sub object, moves the cursor to the previous main

object.

[→] Cursor key

When the cursor is at the sub object, moves the cursor to the next main object.

[Page Up] key

Moves the displayed data toward the top.

[Page Down]

Moves the displayed data toward the bottom.

key

Pointing device

Cursor jumps to the spot where clicked with a pointing device. If an object not

selectable is clicked, cursor does not jump.

— 9 —

2. FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

2.2 OPERATION VIEW Area

2.2 OPERATION VIEW Area

The various data are displayed in this area. Selecting the object in the LIST VIEW area changes the contents displayed in the OPERATION VIEW area.

(1) Area bar

(2) Help

(3) Guide drawing

(4) Sub cursor

(1)Area bar

When the OPERATION VIEW area is active, the area bar is highlighted. The name of the currently edited program is displayed.

(2)Help

Quick reference on the setting items is displayed.

(3)Guide drawing

When the process is edited, a guide drawing according to the currently edited machining mode is displayed.

(4)Sub cursor

Key type

Operation of cursor

[↑] Cursor key

Moves the cursor one field up.

Note that if the ↑ cursor is pressed when the cursor is at the top, the cursor

does not move.

[↓] Cursor key

Moves the cursor one field down.

Note that if the ↓ cursor is pressed when the cursor is at the bottom, the cursor

does not move.

[Page Up] key

Moves the displayed data toward the top.

[Page Down]

Moves the displayed data toward the bottom.

key

— 10 —

2. FUNCTIONS OF DISPLAY AREA

2.3 Setting Area

2.3 Setting Area

The value to be set to data is input.

2.4 Message Area

An error message or operation message, etc. during operation is displayed.

2.5 Menu Display Area

The screen operation is selected, and the screen is changed.

The different menus are displayed in each screen. (Refer to the chapter 4.)

— 11 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.1 Changing Active View

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.1 Changing Active View

To operate NAVI MILL, activate either LIST VIEW area or OPERATION VIEW area. When the VIEW is active, the area bar is highlighted and data can be input. Use menu keys [←] and [→] or a pointing device to change one of the VIEWs to be activated.

3.2 Changing Screen

When the object is selected in the LIST VIEW area, the screen (contents in the OPERATION VIEW area) changes. (Refer to the section 2.1 LIST VIEW Area.)

Note that the screen cannot be changed while the OPERATION VIEW area is active.

In such a case, press the [←] menu key or click «LIST VIEW» with a pointing device to turn the LIST VIEW area active.

Operation example

(1) Open the program edit screen.

The OPERATION VIEW area is active.

(2) Press the [←] menu key.

The LIST VIEW area will turn active.

— 12 —

3.BASIC OPERATIONS

(3)Select the object with the cursor key.

(4) Press the [MODIFY] menu key.

3.2 Changing Screen

The OPERATION VIEW area will change into the screen corresponding to the selected object.

The OPERATION VIEW area will turn active.

— 13 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.3 Setting Data

3.3 Setting Data

After moving the sub cursor, input the data into the setting area and then press the [INPUT] key, and the data will be set. (The sub cursor is displayed only when the OPERATION VIEW area is active.)

Sub-cursor

Setting area

— 14 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.3 Setting Data

Operation method

An example for setting the data on the hole drilling screen is shown below.

(1) Screen selection

Select the object to be changed from the LIST VIEW and press [MODIFY] menu key.

(2) Setting item selection

Move the sub cursor with cursor keys.

The OPERATION VIEW area will turn active.

(Refer to the section 3.2 «Changing screen».)

This is an example of the sub cursor movement on the hole drilling screen.

(3) Data key input

Set data with the numeral keys or

The data is set in the data setting area.

alphabet keys, etc.

18 000

[1][2] [3] [.] [4] [5] [6]

(4)[Input] key input

Press the [input] key.

Data for the selected setting item is set.

The sub cursor moves to the next position.

(Note 1) The contents in the data setting area are only displayed when [INPUT] key is not pressed and will be invalidated if the screen is changed at this time. Data for the currently selected setting item will be set when [INPUT] key is pressed.

(Note 2) If illegal data is set, an error occurs when [Input] is pressed. Set the correct data again.

— 15 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.3 Setting Data

Operations in the data setting area

The key is input at the position where the cursor is displayed. If a cursor is not displayed, the key input is invalid.

When a key is input, the data appears at the cursor position, and the cursor moves one character space to the right.

[→] / [←] keys: Moves the cursor one character to the left or right.

(1) The cursor is at the position shown on

the right.

1 2 3 7 7 7 | 4 5 6

(2) Press the [→] key.

The cursor moves one character space to the right.

1 2 3 7 7 7 4 | 5 6

[DETETE] key: Deletes the character in front of the cursor.

(1)

Move the cursor to the

position where

The cursor moves in the data setting area.

the data is to be deleted.

1 2 3 4

| 5 6

(2)

The character in front of the cursor is

Press the [DETETE] key.

deleted.

1 2 3

| 5 6

— 16 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.4 Switching Windows

3.4 Switching Windows

When a shortcut button on the keyboard is pressed, its corresponding window is displayed.

Button

Application

Displays the tool guidance window.

LIST

?Displays the message guidance window.

Displays the checker window.

3.5 Switching Selection Tags

Menu tag

When a tag button on the keyboard is pressed, the main window and checker window can be switched over.

Button

Application

Selects the tag on the left.

Selects the tag on the right.

(Note 1) Depending on the keyboard specifications, tag button may not be available.

— 17 —

3. BASIC OPERATIONS

3.6 Inputting Operations

3.6 Inputting Operations

In addition to the method of directly inputting numeric data for specific data settings, a method to input the operation results using four rules operators and function symbols can be used.

Input method

Numeric values, function symbols, operators and parentheses ( ) are combined and set in the data setting area.

The operation results appear when the [INPUT] key is pressed. Data for the currently selected setting item will be set when [INPUT] key is pressed again.

The contents in the data setting area are erased.

Examples of operator settings, and results

Operation

Setting

Operation

example

results

Addition

=100+50

150.000

Subtraction

=100−50

50.000

Multiplication

=12.3 4

49.200

Division

=100/3

33.333

Function

=1.2

5.4

(2.5+SQRT(4))

Function symbols, setting examples and results

Function

Function

Setting

Operation

symbol

example

results

Absolute

ABS

=ABS (50−60)

10

value

Square root

SQRT

=SQRT (3)

1.732

Sine

SIN

=SIN

(30)

0.5

Cosine

COS

=COS

(15)

0.966

Tangent

TAN

=TAN

(45)

1

Arc tangent

ATAN

=ATAN (1.3)

52.431

Circle ratio

PAI

=PAI*10

31.415

Inch

INCH

=INCH/10

2.54

Operation examples

(1)Set as shown below, and press the [Input] key.

=12 20 [Input]

(2) Press the [Input] key again.

Notes for using operators and functions

The operation results appear in the data setting area.

240 |

Data for the selected setting item is set. The cursor moves to the next position.

Division

:

Zero division causes an error.

Square root

:

If the value in the parentheses is negative, an error occurs.

Triangle function

:

The unit of angle θ is degree (°).

Arc tangent

:

−90 < operation results < 90.

Restrictions

Always use «=» for the first character.

Do not use the following characters as the second character or last character. Invalid as second character: , /, )

Invalid as last character: , /, (, +, —

Make sure that the left parentheses and right parentheses are balanced.

The 360° limit does not apply on the angle. SIN (500) is interpreted as SIN (140).

— 18 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 Starting NAVI MILL

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 Starting NAVI MILL

When NAVI MILL is started, the program edit screen will be displayed.

Screen layout

At the initial start up of NAVI MILL, the cursor is displayed at the position of [PROGRAM] in the LIST VIEW area, and the program edit screen is displayed in the OPERATION VIEW area.

The LIST VIEW area is active.

The process program is not selected.

— 19 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.2 Screen Related to the Program

4.2 Screen Related to the Program

4.2.1 Program Edit Screen

The NC program is newly created and read out, etc. on this screen. When [PROGRAM] is selected in the LIST VIEW area, this screen is displayed.

Screen layout

The process list of the currently selected program is displayed in the LIST VIEW area.

— 20 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.2 Screen Related to the Program

< Process displays >

Process name

Display

Remarks

character

Hole drilling

Drilling

DR-****

The symbol (abbrev.) which indicates the

machining pattern is applied to the «****» part.

Pecking

PECK-****

● Random : RNDM

● Linear

: LINE

Step

STEP-****

● Arc

: ARC

Boring

BORE-****

● Circle

: CIR

● Square

: SQR

Tapping

(TAP-****)

● Grid

: GRID

Helical boring

HLX-BORE ?

The symbol which indicates the machining

type (rough / finishing) is applied to the «?»

part.

● Rough

: R

● Finishing : F

Face cutting

Square

FACE-SQR ?

The symbol which indicates the machining

Circle

FACE-CIR ?

type (rough / finishing) is applied to the «?»

Contour

Square

CNT-SQR ?

part.

cutting

Circle

CNT-CIR ?

● Rough

: R

Free

CNT-FREE ?

● Finishing : F

Pocket

Square

PKT-SQR ?

Circle

PKT-CIR ?

L pattern

PKT-LPT ?

U pattern

PKT-UPT ?

Track

PKT-TRK ?

EIA

EIA (EIA)

Screen display item

No.

Display item

Details

Setting range

1

PROGRAM LIST

Displays the program number and comment of the

NC program that can be currently read out.

— 21 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.2 Screen Related to the Program

Menus

No.

Menu

Details

1

Turns the LIST VIEW area active.

2

NEW

Newly creates the NC program. (Note 1)

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

) COMMENT(

)

3

OPEN

Reads out the existing NC program. (Note 1) (Note 2)

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

)

When this menu is pressed, the cursor appears at the program list’s name section. When the setting area is empty, select a program with the cursor and press the [INPUT] key to read the program.

Cursor

4

COPY

Copies the existing NC program to another program. (Note 1)

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

) → O(

)

5

COMMENT

Edits the comment in the NC program. (Note 1)

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

) COMMENT(

)

6

RENAME

Renames the existing NC program. (Note 1)

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

) → O(

)

7

DELETE

Deletes the NC program.

< Display in the setting area when pressing the menu >

O(

) to O(

)

8

LIST UPDATE

Updates the list display.

(Note 1) 1 to 7999 or 10000 to 99999999 can be set for the O No, and up to 18 alphanumeric characters can be set for the comment.

(Note 2) NC program mode includes user macro mode and MTB mode. (This is specified in the preferences screen.) When user macro mode is active and an NC program created with MTB mode is opened, the NC program is converted into user macro mode. When MTB mode is active and an NC program created with user macro mode is opened, the NC program is converted into MTB mode.

— 22 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

Operation example (Opening the existing NC program)

(1)Select the [PROGRAM] in the LIST VIEW area.

(2)Press the [OPEN] menu key, and input the NC program No. to be read out.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key.

4.2 Screen Related to the Program

The program edit screen will be displayed. The list of the NC program that can be read out will be displayed.

The [OPEN] menu will be highlighted, and the setting area will be displayed.

The highlight of the [OPEN] menu will turn OFF, and the setting area will disappear. The process of the NC program read out will be displayed in the LIST VIEW area. The NC program No. read out will be displayed on the area bar of the OPERATION VIEW area.

— 23 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

4.3.1 Process List Screen

The tool information and cutting conditions for each process are displayed on this screen. When [PROCESS] is selected in the LIST VIEW area, this screen is displayed.

When the NC program is not selected, this screen is not displayed. Screen layout

— 24 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

Screen display items

No.

Display item

Details

Setting range

1

PCS

The process name is displayed.

(Note) This name is same as the name displayed

in the LIST VIEW area.

2

T NAME

The name of tool to be used is displayed.

3

T

Specify the No. of tool to be used.

0 to 9999

4

NT

Specify the No. of tool to be used in the next

0 to 9999

process. According to the specified tool No., the

tool is determined after the tool change.

(Note) When «1» is set in the parameter «103

NEXT TOOL PREP», this data is valid.

5

H

Specify the tool length offset No.

1 to number of tool

The maximum value for the H is changed

sets

according to the specifications.

6

D

Specify tool diameter offset No.

1 to number of tool

The maximum value for the D is changed

sets

according to the specifications.

7

S

Input the spindle rotation speed.

1 to 99999 rev/min

8

F

Input the feedrate.

0.001 to

When the hole cycle type is «TAP», input the pitch

60000.000 mm/min

(mm/rev).

0.001 to

999.999 mm/rev

Menus

No.

Menu

Details

1

Turns the LIST VIEW area active.

2

NEXT T PRESET

Sets the next tool No. automatically. For the next tool No., the tool No.

of the next process is set.

3

MULTI PT

Multiple Parts screen is displayed.

When using the Multiple Parts function, press “MULTI PT”.

4

SAVE

Saves changes in the process list.

— 25 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

4.3.2 Multiple Parts Screen

Multiple Parts function enables you to generate a NC program that allows one designated machining process to be completed at once for multiple workpieces. This NC program can be generated based on the NC programs generated for a single part machining with the appropriate arrangement of the multiple workpieces.

When working on multiple workpieces, there are two options available to specify their positions:

by identifying the values of the work-coordinate system per each workpiece.

by determining each offset amount from one specific work coordinate.

As for machining pattern, there are two options available:

to have one machining process completed for all workpieces on the table before moving on to the next machining process (the number of times to execute tool-changes can be reduced by choosing this option).

to have entire machining processes completed per each workpiece.

(Note 1) The NC program generated with the Multiple Parts function is differed from its original NC program. (Note 2) The NC program generated with the Multiple Parts function cannot be edited with NAVI MILL. If

editing is attempted, the operation message “No init process, Create OK? (Y/N)” appears.

<Drawing>

90

200

90

160

70

70

35

35

50

50

50

35

0

90

130

3

50

10

35

-R

50

8

9-M8 P=1.25 Depth8

6-Φ6.8 Hole Depth17

4-Φ6.8 Penetration

Prepared hole Φ6.8 Depth12

5

10

15

20

<NAVI MILL base function>

Program for single part

<Layout of workpieces>

Program generater

Program for multiple parts

for multiple parts

— 26 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

To view the “Multiple Parts Screen”, go to the “Process List Screen” and press [MULTI PT] menu.

Screen Layout

— 27 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

Screen Details

No.

Display item

Details

Setting range

1

PROGRAM O

Program No. and comments are input.

Avoid using the same program No. for the Multiple

Parts NC program and the currently editing program. If

a duplicated program No. is used for both programs, an

error message occurs.

2

NUM OF PARTS

Number of parts is input.

2 to 8

3

MACHINING

Machining pattern is selected.

1 to 2

1: A pattern that has one machining process

completed for all workpieces before moving on

to the next machining process

2:A pattern that has entire machining processes completed per one workpiece before moving on to the next workpiece

— 28 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

No.

Display item

Details

Setting range

4

COORDINATE

The method to specify the position of multiple

1 to 2

workpieces is selected.

1: A method that identifies the values of the

work-coordinate system per each workpiece

2:A method that determines each offset amount from

one specific work coordinate

5 X

The value of each workpiece position is input

-99999.999 to

Y

depending on the offset amount from one specific work

99999.999mm

coordinate.

This is valid when selecting «2» in the COORDINATE

screen.

WC

The value of the work-coordinate system per each

54 to 59

workpiece is input.

P1 to P48

This is valid when selecting «1» in the COORDINATE

screen.

(Note) Program No. can be selected from 1 to 7999 or 10000 to 99999999. Comment section allows up to 18 characters/numbers.

Menu

No.

Menu

Details

1

GEN PRGM

Generate a NC program for the Multiple Parts machining.

2

RETURN

Return to the Process List Screen.

— 29 —

4. SCREEN SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Screens Related to the Process Edit Functions

4.3.3 Operating Process

When the cursor is moved to the sub-object of PROCESS in the LIST VIEW area, a menu for editing the process is displayed, and the process can be operated.

Screen layout

Menus

No.

Menu

Details

1

MODIFY

The OPERATION VIEW area turns active, and the process parameters

can be changed.

2

NEW

Adds a new process.

The process will be inserted into the cursor position.

3

MOVE

Changes the process position.

4

DELETE

Deletes the process at the cursor position.

When performing the deletion, the process under the deleted process

will be moved up.

5

COPY

Copies the process at the cursor position.

The copied process will be inserted under the cursor position.

— 30 —

Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User's Manual PDF

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual PDF

Introduction

This manual is a guide for using the MITSUBISHI CNC M700V/M70V Series.

Programming is described in this manual, so read this manual thoroughly before starting programming. Thoroughly study

the «Precautions for Safety» on the following page to ensure safe use of this NC unit.

Details described in this manual

CAUTION For items described as «Restrictions» or «Usable State» in this manual, the instruction manual issued by

the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as «not possible».

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.

Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions

may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

General precautions

(1) Refer to the following documents for details on handling

MITSUBISHI CNC M700V/M70V Series Instruction Manual ………… IB-1500922

Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached documents

before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.

Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.

This manual ranks the safety precautions into «DANGER», «WARNING» and «CAUTION».

Note that even items ranked as » CAUTION», may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case,

important information that must always be observed is described.

The following sings indicate prohibition and compulsory.

The meaning of each pictorial sing is as follows.

DANGER

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

WARNING

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION

When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates «Keep fire away».

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates «it must be grounded».

CAUTION

CAUTION

rotated object

CAUTION HOT

Danger

Electric shock risk

Danger

explosive

Prohibited

Disassembly is

prohibited

KEEP FIRE AWAY

General instruction

Earth ground

Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial

purposes.

Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are

substantially influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or

properties.

Not applicable in this manual.

1. Items related to operation

If the operation start position is set in a block which is in the middle of the program and the program is

started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and

coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B

commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc.

If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of

interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in

breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface

speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed

the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during

machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

For Safe Use

DANGER

WARNING

1. Items related to product and manual

For items described as «Restrictions» or «Usable State» in this manual, the instruction manual issued by

the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as «not possible».

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the specifications

issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions

may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

2. Items related to operation

Before starting actual machining, always carry out graphic check, dry run operation and single block

operation to check the machining program, tool compensation amount, workpiece compensation amount

and etc.

If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop, the new setting will

be valid from the next block.

Turn the mirror image ON and OFF at the mirror image center.

If the tool compensation amount is changed during automatic operation (including during single block

stop), it will be validated from the next block or blocks onwards.

3. Items related to programming

The commands with «no value after G» will be handled as «G00».

«;» «EOB» and «%» «EOR» are expressions used for explanation. The actual codes are: For ISO: «CR, LF», or

«LF» and «%».

Programs created on the Edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a «CR, LF» format, but programs

created with external devices such as the FLD or RS-232C may be stored in an «LF» format.

The actual codes for EIA are: «EOB (End of Block)» and «EOR (End of Record)».

When creating the machining program, select the appropriate machining conditions, and make sure that

the performance, capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not exceeded. The examples do not

consider the machining conditions.

Do not change fixed cycle programs without the prior approval of the machine tool builder.

When programming the multi-part system, take special care to the movements of the programs for other

part systems.

CAUTION

Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-

users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and

components which can be recycled and/or reused.

This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of

separately from your household waste.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the

battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as

follows:

Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)

In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.

Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/

recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT and CC-Link

IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other

countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Microsoft and Windows are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.

Intel and Pentium are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the

respective companies.

( /Japanese)

( A)

Handling of our product

(English)

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the

user may be required to take adequate measures.

( /Korean)

(A )

.

CONTENTS

1 Control Axes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols ………………………………………………………….. 3

2 Least Command Increments ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5

2.1 Input Setting Unit …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold …………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 2.3 Indexing Increment ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8

3 Program Formats ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

3.1 Program Format …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 3.2 File Format ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 14 3.3 Optional Block Skip …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 16

3.3.1 Optional Block Skip; / ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 16 3.3.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ; /n ……………………………………………………………………………………. 18

3.4 G code ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 20 3.4.1 Modal, unmodal ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 20 3.4.2 G Code Lists ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 20

3.5 Precautions Before Starting Machining ………………………………………………………………………………….. 24

4 Pre-read Buffers ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 25

4.1 Pre-read Buffers …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 26

5 Position Commands ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 27

5.1 Position Command Methods ; G90,G91 …………………………………………………………………………………. 28 5.2 Inch/Metric Conversion ; G20,G21…………………………………………………………………………………………. 30 5.3 Decimal Point Input …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 32

6 Interpolation Functions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 37

6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00……………………………………………………………………………………….. 38 6.2 Linear Interpolation ; G01 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 45 6.3 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03 …………………………………………………………………………………………… 47 6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03 ……………………………………………………………………… 52 6.5 Plane Selection ; G17,G18,G19…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 54 6.6 Thread Cutting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 56

6.6.1 Constant Lead Thread Cutting ; G33………………………………………………………………………………. 56 6.6.2 Inch Thread Cutting ; G33…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 61

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03 ………………………………………………………………………….. 63 6.8 Unidirectional Positioning ; G60…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 70 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 72 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113 …………………………………………………….. 79 6.11 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3……………………………………………………………………………….. 86 6.12 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15………………………………………………………………………………… 92 6.13 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1), G02/G03(Type2) ……………………………………….. 99 6.14 3-dimensional Circular Interpolation ; G02.4,G03.4………………………………………………………………. 104 6.15 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 109 6.16 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation ; G07………………………………………………………………………………….. 114

7 Feed Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 117

7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 118 7.2 Cutting Feedrate ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 119 7.3 F1-digit Feed…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 120 7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed) ; G94,G95 ………. 123 7.5 Inverse Time Feed ; G93 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 127 7.6 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes ………………………………………………………………… 132 7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration ………………………………………………. 137

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration ………………………………… 142 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration …………………………………………………… 151 7.10 Exact Stop Check ; G09……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 158 7.11 Exact Stop Check Mode ; G61…………………………………………………………………………………………… 162 7.12 Deceleration Check………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 163

7.12.1 G1 -> G0 Deceleration Check…………………………………………………………………………………….. 165 7.12.2 G1 -> G1 Deceleration Check…………………………………………………………………………………….. 166

7.13 Automatic Corner Override ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 167 7.14 Tapping Mode ; G63 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 172 7.15 Cutting Mode ; G64…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 173

8 Dwell………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 175

8.1 Dwell (Time Designation) ; G04 …………………………………………………………………………………………… 176

9 Miscellaneous Functions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 179

9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits) ……………………………………………………………………………………. 180 9.2 Secondary Miscellaneous Functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits) …………………………………….. 182 9.3 Index Table Indexing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 183

10 Spindle Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 185

10.1 Spindle Functions…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 186 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control ; G96,G97………………………………………………………………………… 187 10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting ; G92 …………………………………………………………………………………… 189 10.4 Spindle/C Axis Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 191 10.5 Multiple-spindle Control…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 194

10.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control II ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 195

11 Tool Functions (T command) ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 197

11.1 Tool Functions (T8-digit BCD) …………………………………………………………………………………………… 198

12 Tool Compensation Functions ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 199

12.1 Tool Compensation………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 200 12.2 Tool Length Compensation/Cancel ; G43/G44 …………………………………………………………………….. 204 12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44…………………………………………. 207 12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42…………………………………………………………… 214

12.4.1 Tool Radius Compensation Operation…………………………………………………………………………. 215 12.4.2 Other Commands and Operations during Tool Radius Compensation……………………………… 224 12.4.3 G41/G42 Commands and I, J, K Designation ………………………………………………………………. 234 12.4.4 Interrupts during Tool Radius Compensation ………………………………………………………………. 240 12.4.5 General Precautions for Tool Radius Compensation……………………………………………………… 243 12.4.6 Changing of Compensation No. during Compensation Mode………………………………………….. 244 12.4.7 Start of Tool Radius Compensation and Z Axis Cut in Operation…………………………………….. 247 12.4.8 Interference Check …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 249 12.4.9 Diameter Designation of Compensation Amount…………………………………………………………… 258 12.4.10 Workpiece Coordinate Changing during Radius Compensation…………………………………….. 260

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42……………………………………………………. 262 12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2 ……………………………………… 273 12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48 ………………………………………………………………………………………. 283 12.8 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10……………………………………………………………………….. 291 12.9 Compensation Data Input to Variable by Program ; G11……………………………………………………….. 296 12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11 ………………………………………………………….. 297

12.10.1 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by G10 L3 Command ; G10 L3,G11 ……………….. 297 12.10.2 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by G10 L30 Command ; G10 L30,G11 ……………. 299 12.10.3 Precautions for Inputting the Tool Life Management Data…………………………………………….. 302

13 Program Support Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 303

13.1 Fixed Cycles……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 304 13.1.1 Drilling, Spot Drilling ; G81…………………………………………………………………………………………. 308 13.1.2 Drilling, Counter Boring ; G82 …………………………………………………………………………………….. 309 13.1.3 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle ; G83 …………………………………………………………………………………… 310

13.1.3.1 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle…………………………………………………………………………………….. 310 13.1.3.2 Small Diameter Deep Hole Drilling Cycle ……………………………………………………………… 311

13.1.4 Tapping Cycle ; G84 …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 313 13.1.5 Boring ; G85…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 324 13.1.6 Boring ; G86…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 325 13.1.7 Back Boring ; G87…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 326 13.1.8 Boring ; G88…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 328 13.1.9 Boring ; G89…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 329 13.1.10 Stepping Cycle ; G73………………………………………………………………………………………………. 330 13.1.11 Reverse Tapping Cycle ; G74…………………………………………………………………………………… 331 13.1.12 Circular Cutting ; G75 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 333 13.1.13 Fine Boring ; G76……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 335 13.1.14 Precautions for Using a Fixed Cycle………………………………………………………………………….. 337 13.1.15 Initial Point and R Point Level Return ; G98,G99…………………………………………………………. 340 13.1.16 Setting of Workpiece Coordinates in Fixed Cycle Mode ………………………………………………. 341 13.1.17 Drilling Cycle with High-Speed Retract ………………………………………………………………………. 342 13.1.18 Acceleration/Deceleration Mode Change in Hole Drilling Cycle …………………………………….. 346

13.2 Special Fixed Cycle; G34, G35, G36, G37 ………………………………………………………………………….. 348 13.2.1 Bolt Hole Cycle ; G34………………………………………………………………………………………………… 349 13.2.2 Line at Angle ; G35 …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 350 13.2.3 Arc ; G36…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 351 13.2.4 Grid ; G37 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 352

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 353 13.3.1 Subprogram Call ; G22,G23 ……………………………………………………………………………………… 353 13.3.2 Figure rotation ; G22 I_J_K_………………………………………………………………………………………. 358

13.4 Variable Commands ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 361 13.5 User Macro …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 366

13.5.1 User Macro Commands; G65, G66, G66.1, G67, G68(G23)…………………………………………… 366 13.5.2 Macro Call Instruction ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 367

13.5.2.1 Simple Macro Calls ; G65 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 367 13.5.2.2 Modal Call A (Movement Command Call) ; G66……………………………………………………. 370 13.5.2.3 Modal Call B (for Each Block) ; G66.1 …………………………………………………………………. 372 13.5.2.4 G Code Macro Call …………………………………………………………………………………………… 373 13.5.2.5 Miscellaneous Command Macro Call (for M, S, T, B Code Macro Call) ……………………. 374 13.5.2.6 Detailed Description for Macro Call Instruction …………………………………………………….. 375

13.5.3 ASCII Code Macro …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 377 13.5.4 Variable…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 381 13.5.5 Types of Variables …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 383

13.5.5.1 Common Variables …………………………………………………………………………………………… 383 13.5.5.2 Local Variables (#1 to #33) ………………………………………………………………………………… 384 13.5.5.3 Macro Interface Inputs/Outputs (#1000 to #1035, #1100 to #1135, #1200 to #1295, #1300 to #1395) ……………………… 388 13.5.5.4 Tool Compensation …………………………………………………………………………………………… 395 13.5.5.5 Workpiece Coordinate System Compensation (#5201 — #532n) ………………………………. 396 13.5.5.6 NC Alarm (#3000) …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 397 13.5.5.7 Integrating Time (#3001, #3002) ………………………………………………………………………… 398 13.5.5.8 Suppression of Single Block Stop and Miscellaneous Function Finish Signal Waiting (#3003) ………………………………………….. 398 13.5.5.9 Feed Hold, Feedrate Override, G09 Valid/Invalid (#3004) ……………………………………… 399 13.5.5.10 Message Display and Stop (#3006) …………………………………………………………………… 399 13.5.5.11 Mirror Image (#3007) ………………………………………………………………………………………. 400 13.5.5.12 G Command Modals (#4001-#4021, #4201-#4221) …………………………………………….. 401 13.5.5.13 Other Modals (#4101 — #4120, #4301 — #4320) …………………………………………………… 402 13.5.5.14 Position Information (#5001 — #5160 + n) …………………………………………………………… 403 13.5.5.15 Number of Workpiece Machining Times (#3901, #3902) ……………………………………… 406 13.5.5.16 Coordinate Rotation Parameter …………………………………………………………………………. 406 13.5.5.17 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters ……………………………………………………………….. 407 13.5.5.18 Reverse Run Information………………………………………………………………………………….. 407 13.5.5.19 Tool Life Management (#60000 — #64700) …………………………………………………………. 408 13.5.5.20 Reading The Parameters (#100000-#100002, #100010) ……………………………………… 413 13.5.5.21 Reading PLC data (#100100-#100103,#100110) ………………………………………………… 416

13.5.5.22 Time Reading Variables (#3001, #3002, #3011, #3012) ………………………………………. 419 13.5.5.23 R Device Access Variables (#50000 — #50749, #51000 — #51749, #52000 — #52749) ………………………………………. 421 13.5.5.24 Read/write of the Workpiece Installation Error Compensation Amounts ………………….. 427

13.5.6 Operation Commands ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 428 13.5.7 Control Commands ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 433 13.5.8 External Output Commands ; POPEN, PCLOS, DPRNT ………………………………………………. 436 13.5.9 Precautions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 440 13.5.10 Actual Examples of Using User Macros……………………………………………………………………… 442

13.6 G Command Mirror Image ; G50.1,G51.1,G62…………………………………………………………………….. 446 13.7 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I …………………………………………………………………………… 450

13.7.1 Corner Chamfering I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,C_ ………………………………………………………………………… 450 13.7.2 Corner Rounding I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,R_ …………………………………………………………………………… 452 13.7.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion ………………………………………….. 454 13.7.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding …………………………….. 456

13.8 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II …………………………………………………………………………. 457 13.8.1 Corner Chamfering II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,C_…………………………………………………………… 458 13.8.2 Corner Rounding II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,R_……………………………………………………………… 460 13.8.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion …………………………………………. 462 13.8.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding ……………………………. 462

13.9 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Y_ A_/,A_……………………………………………………………………….. 463 13.10 Geometric …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 464

13.10.1 Geometric I ; G01 A_ ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 464 13.10.2 Geometric IB …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 466

13.10.2.1 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact) ; G02/G03 P_Q_ /R_………… 467 13.10.2.2 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 P_Q_H_ ……………………………………………………………………………… 469 13.10.2.3 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 R_H_………………………………………………………………………………….. 472

13.11 Circular Cutting ; G12,G13………………………………………………………………………………………………. 475 13.12 Parameter Input by Program ; G10 L70, G11.1 ………………………………………………………………….. 477 13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF……………………………………………………………………………………………. 480 13.14 Tool Change Position Return ; G30.1 — G30.6 ……………………………………………………………………. 488 13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152) …………………………………………….. 491 13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08………………………………………………………………………………….. 510 13.17 High-speed Machining Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………… 525

13.17.1 High-speed Machining Mode I, II ; G05 P1, G05 P2…………………………………………………….. 525 13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1………………………………………………………………… 527

13.18.1 High-speed High-accuracy Control I, II ………………………………………………………………………. 527 13.18.2 SSS Control …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 533

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 539 13.20 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation ; G61.2………………………………………………………………………… 548 13.21 Scaling ; G50/G51………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 550 13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1 …………………………………………………………………. 554 13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_………………………………………………………. 562 13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1 …………………………………………………………. 575 13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5 …………………………………………………………………………… 590 13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………. 618

13.26.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) ; !L……………………………………………………………. 618 13.26.2 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 1) ; G115 ……………… 621 13.26.3 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 2) ; G116 …………….. 623 13.26.4 Timing Synchronization Operation Function Using M codes ; M*** ……………………………….. 625

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3 ……………………………………………………………………….. 629 13.27.1 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Euler Angles…………………………………….. 630 13.27.2 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Roll-Pitch-Yaw angles ……………………….. 632 13.27.3 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Three Points in a Plane……………………… 634 13.27.4 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Two Vectors …………………………………….. 636 13.27.5 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Projection Angles ……………………………… 638 13.27.6 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Tool Axis Direction ……………………………. 640 13.27.7 Tool Axis Direction Control ………………………………………………………………………………………. 642 13.27.8 Details of Operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 648

13.27.9 Rotary Axis Basic Position Selection …………………………………………………………………………. 652 13.27.10 Relation with Other Functions…………………………………………………………………………………. 658 13.27.11 Precautions………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 661

13.28 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121 …………………………………………………………………. 665 13.29 End Point Error Check Cancellation ; G69…………………………………………………………………………. 670 13.30 Coordinate Read Function ; G14 ……………………………………………………………………………………… 672

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions……………………………………………………………………………………. 675

14.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes ………………………………………………………………………………….. 676 14.2 Basic Machine, Workpiece and Local Coordinate Systems……………………………………………………. 677 14.3 Machine Zero Point and 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position (Zero point) …………………………………… 678 14.4 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ………………………………………………………………………………… 679 14.5 Basic Machine Coordinate System Selection ; G53 ……………………………………………………………… 681 14.6 Coordinate System Setting ; G92 ………………………………………………………………………………………. 682 14.7 Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G28,G29……………………………………………………………….. 684 14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G30 …………………………………………….. 688 14.9 Reference Position Check ; G27………………………………………………………………………………………… 691 14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)……………………………….. 692 14.11 Local Coordinate System Setting ; G52……………………………………………………………………………. 703 14.12 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1 ………………………………………………………………….. 707 14.13 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis…………………………………………………………………………………… 712 14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4……………………………………………………………. 715

15 Protection Function ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 729

15.1 Stroke Check Before Travel ; G22.1/G23.1 …………………………………………………………………………. 730

16 Measurement Support Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 733

16.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ; G37.1 ……………………………………………………………………… 734 16.2 Skip Function ; G31 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 738 16.3 Multi-step Skip Function 1 ; G31.n ,G04 …………………………………………………………………………….. 743 16.4 Multi-step Skip Function 2 ; G31 P ……………………………………………………………………………………. 745 16.5 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 747 16.6 Programmable Current Limitation ; G10 L14 ; ……………………………………………………………………… 751

Appendix 1 Program Errors ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 753

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority ……………………………………………………………………. 787

1 Control Axes

MITSUBISHI CNC

2

1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes

Function and purpose

X-Y table

X-Y and rotating table

(a) Direction of table movement

(a) Direction of table movement

(b) Direction of table rotation

+Z

+Z +Y

+X

+X +Y

(a)(a)

+Z +Y

+C

+C +Y

+X +X

(a) (b) (a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols

3

1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols

The basic machine coordinate system is the coordinate system that expresses the position (tool change

position, stroke end position, etc.) that is specific to the machine.

Workpiece coordinate systems are used for workpiece machining.

Upon completion of the dog-type reference position return, the parameters are referred and the basic machine

coordinate system and workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59) are automatically set.

The offset of the basic machine coordinate zero point and reference position is set by a parameter. (Normally,

set by machine manufacturers)

Workpiece coordinate systems can be set with coordinate systems setting functions, workpiece coordinate

offset measurement (additional specification), and etc.

Reference position: A specific position to establish coordinate systems and change tools

Basic machine coordinate zero point: A position specific to machine

Workpiece coordinate zero points (G54 to G59) A coordinate zero point used for workpiece machining

1 Control Axes

MITSUBISHI CNC

4

The local coordinate systems (G52) are valid on the coordinate systems designated by workpiece coordinate

systems 1 to 6.

Using the G92 command, the basic machine coordinate system can be shifted and made into a hypothetical

machine coordinate system. At the same time, workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are also shifted.

Reference position

Basic machine coordinate zero point

Workpiece coordinate zero points

Local coordinate zero point

Offset set by a parameter

Offset set by a program («0» is set when turning the power ON)

G52 Local coordinate system offset (*1)

G54 Workpiece coordinate (G54) system offset (*1)

G55 Workpiece coordinate (G55) system offset

G92 G92 Coordinate system shift

EXT External workpiece coordinate offset

(*1) G52 offset is independently possessed by G 54 to G59 respectively.

G52

G92

G55G54

EXT

G52

5

2

Least Command Increments

2 Least Command Increments

MITSUBISHI CNC

6

2.1 Input Setting Unit

Function and purpose

The input setting units are the units of setting data including tool compensation amounts and workpiece

coordinates compensation.

The program command units are the units of movement amounts in programs.

These are expressed with mm, inch or degree ().

Detailed description

Program command units for each axis and input setting units, common for all axes, are determined by the

setting of parameters as follows.

Precautions

(1) Inch/metric changeover can be handled by either a parameter screen (#1041 I_inch: valid only when the

power is turned ON) or G commands (G20 or G21).

However, the changeover by a G command applies only to the program command units, and not to the

input setting units. Consequently, the tool compensation amounts and other compensation amounts as

well as the variable data should be preset in order to correspond to input setting units.

(2) The millimeter and inch systems cannot be used together.

(3) When performing a circular interpolation between the axes whose program command units are different,

the center command (I, J, K) and the radius command (R) are designated by the input setting units. (Use

a decimal point to avoid confusion.)

Parameter Linear axis Rotary axis

()Millimeter Inch

Input setting unit

#1003 iunit = B 0.001 0.0001 0.001

= C 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001

= D 0.00001 0.000001 0.00001

= E 0.000001 0.0000001 0.000001

Program command unit

#1015 cunit = 0 Follow #1003 iunit

= 1 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001

= 10 0.001 0.0001 0.001

= 100 0.01 0.001 0.01

= 1000 0.1 0.01 0.1

= 10000 1.0 0.1 1.0

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold

7

2.2 Input Command Increment Tenfold

Function and purpose

The program’s command increment can be multiplied by an arbitrary scale with the parameter designation.

This function is valid when a decimal point is not used for the command increment.

The scale is set with the parameter «#8044 UNIT*10».

Detailed description

(1) When running a machining program already created with a 10m input command increment with a CNC

unit for which the command increment is set to 1m and this function’s parameter value is set to «10»,

this function enables the same machining as the original program.

(2) When running a machining program already created with a 1m input command increment with a CNC

unit for which the command increment is set to 0.1m and this function’s parameter value is set to «10»,

this function enables the same machining as the original program.

(3) This function cannot be used for the dwell function G04_X_(P_);.

(4) This function cannot be used for the compensation amount of the tool compensation input.

(5) This function can be used when decimal point type I is valid, but cannot be used when decimal point type

II is valid.

(6) This function cannot be used for a tool shape setting command (in G10L100 format).

Program example (Machining program : programmed with 1=10m)

(CNC unit is 1=1m system)

«UNIT*10» parameter

10 1

X Y X Y

N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0; 0 0 0 0

N2 G91 X-10000 Y-15000; -100.000 -150.000 -10.000 -15.000

N3 G01 X-10000 Y-5000 F500; -200.000 -200.000 -20.000 -20.000

N4 G03 X-10000 Y-10000 J-10000; -300.000 -300.000 -30.000 -30.000

N5 X10000 Y-10000 R10000; -200.000 -400.000 -20.000 -40.000

N6 G01 X20.000 Y20.000 -180.000 -380.000 0.000 -20.000

UNIT*10 ON UNIT*10 OFF

N1

N2

N3

N4

N5

R

-400

-300

-200

-100

W

-100-200-300

N6

N1

N2

N3

N4

N5

R

-40

-30

-20

-10

W

-10-20-30

N6

2 Least Command Increments

MITSUBISHI CNC

8

2.3 Indexing Increment

Function and purpose

This function limits the command value for the rotary axis.

This can be used for indexing the rotary table, etc. It is possible to cause a program error with a program

command other than an indexing increment (parameter setting value).

Detailed description

When the indexing increment (parameter) which limits the command value is set, the rotary axis can only be

positioned with that indexing increment. If a program other than the indexing increment setting value is

commanded, a program error (P20) will occur.

The indexing position will not be checked when the parameter is set to 0.

(Example)When the indexing increment setting value is 2 degrees, the machine coordinate position at the end

point can only be commanded with the 2-degree increment.

G90 G01 C102.000 ; … Moves to the 102 degree angle.

G90 G01 C101.000 ; … Program error

G90 G01 C102 ; … Moves to the 102 degree angle. (Decimal point type II)

The following axis specification parameter is used.

Precautions

(1) When the indexing increment is set, positioning will be conducted in degree unit.

(2) The indexing position is checked with the rotary axis, and is not checked with other axes.

(3) When the indexing increment is set to 2 degrees, the rotary axis is set to the B axis, and the B axis is

moved with JOG to the 1.234 position, an indexing error will occur if «G90B5.» or «G91B2.» is

commanded.

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

2106 Index unit Indexing increment

Set the indexing increment with which the rotary axis can be positioned.

0 to 360()

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

10

3.1 Program Format

A collection of commands assigned to an NC to move a machine is called «program».

A program is a collection of units called «block» which specifies a sequence of machine tool operations.

Blocks are written in the order of the actual movement of a tool.

A block is a collection of units called «word» which constitutes a command to an operation.

A word is a collection of characters (alphabets, numerals, signs) arranged in a specific sequence.

% Block Block Block Block Block Block Block Block Block

%

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.1 Program Format

11

Detailed description

Program

A program format looks as follows.

(1) Program start

Input an End Of Record (EOR, %) at the head of a program.

It is automatically added when writing a program on an NC. When using an external device, do not forget

to input it at the head of a program. For details, refer to the description of the file format.

(2) Program No.

Program Nos. are used to classify programs by main program unit or subprogram unit. They are

designated by the address «L» followed by numbers of up to 8 digits. Program Nos. must be written at the

head of programs. A setting is available to prohibit L8000s and L9000s from editing (edit lock). Refer to

the instruction manual for the edit lock.

(Note) The addresses of the program No. and subprogram call No. differ according to the parameter.

The system must be formatted when this parameter is changed.

This manual describes on the assumption that the parameter is set to «0».

(3) Comment

Data between control out «(» and control in «)» is ignored.

Information including program names and comments can be written in.

(4) Program section

A program is a collection of several blocks.

(5) Program end

Input an end of record (EOR, %) at the end of a program.

It is automatically added when writing a program on an NC.

Setting of «#11009 M2 labelO» Address of the program No. Address to call the subprogram

0 L L

1 O A

% L (COMMENT) Block Block Block Block Block Block Block Block

%

(1)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(3)

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

12

Block and word

[Block]

A block is a least command increment, consisting of words.

It contains the information which is required for a tool machine to execute a specific operation. One block unit

constitutes a complete command.

The end of each block is marked with an End of Block (EOB, expressed as «;» for the sake of convenience).

[Word]

A word consists of a set of an alphabet, which is called an address, and numerals (numerical information).

Meanings of the numerical information and the number of significant digits of words differ according to an

address.

The major contents of a word are described below.

(1) Sequence No.

A «sequence No.» consists of the address «N» followed by numbers of up to 6 digits (Normally 3 or 4

digits). It is used as an index when searching a necessary block in a program (as branch destination and

etc.).

It does not affect the operation of a tool machine.

(2) Preparatory functions (G code, G function)

«Preparatory function (G code, G function)» consists of the address G followed by numbers of 2 or 3

digits (it may include 1 digit after the decimal point). G codes are mainly used to designate functions,

such as axis movements and setting of coordinate systems. For example, G00 executes a positioning

and G01 executes a linear interpolation.

(3) Coordinate words

«Coordinate words» specify the coordinate position and movement amounts of tool machine axes. They

consist of an address which indicates each axis of a tool machine followed by numerical information (+ or

— signs and numerals).

X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B and C are used as address. Coordinate positions and movement amounts are

specified by either «incremental value commands» or «absolute value commands».

(4) Feed Functions (F functions)

«Feed Functions (F functions)» designate the speed of a tool relative to a workpiece. They consist of the

address F followed by numbers.

(a) Alphabet (address) (n) Numerals

EOB

Word Word Word… ;Word

(a) (n)

N___ G__ X__ Z__ F__ ;

( 1) ( 2) ( 3) ( 4) EOB

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.1 Program Format

13

Main program and subprograms

Fixed sequences or repeatedly used parameters can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can

then be called from the main program when required.

If a command is issued to call a subprogram while a main program is being executed, the subprogram will be

executed. And when the subprogram is completed, the main program will be resumed.

Refer to the description of subprogram control for the details of the execution of subprograms.

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram 1 (S2) Subprogram 2

L0010;

G22L1000;

G22L2000;

M02;

L1000;

G23;

(MP) (S1)

L2000;

G23;

(S2)

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

14

3.2 File Format

Function and purpose

Program file can be created using NC edit screen and PC.

It can be input/output between NC memory and an external I/O device. Hard discs stored in NC unit are

regarded as an external I/O device. For the details of input/output method, refer to the instruction manual.

Program file format differs depending on the device which creates the program.

Detailed description

Devices available for input/output

Devices which can input/output program files are as follows.

Program file format

The file format for each external I/O device is as follows.

(1) NC memory (Creates program on NC)

External I/O device M700VW M700VS M70V

NC memory

HD (internal hard disc) — —

Serial

Memory card (front IC card)

DS (NC control unit side compact flash) — —

FD — —

USB memory — —

Ethernet

End of record (EOR, %) The end of record (EOR, %) is automatically added. It does not need to be input purposely.

Program No. (L No.) Not necessary.

File transfer

When multiple programs within the NC memory are transferred to an external device as serial, they will be integrated into one file in the external device. When a file containing multiple programs in an external device is transferred to NC memory as serial, it will be divided into one file per one program.

(COMMENT) ; G28XYZ ;

M02 ; %

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.2 File Format

15

(2) External device (except for serials, such as memory card, DS, FD, USB memory)

(3) External device (serial)

[Single program] [Multiple programs]

End of record (EOR, %)

The first line (from % to LF, or CR LF) will be skipped. Also, the content after the second % will not be transferred. «%» must be included in the first line because if not, the necessary information when transferring a file to an NC memory cannot be transferred.

Program No. (L No.) L No. before (COMMENT) will be ignored and the file name will be given the priority.

File transfer

Transfer and check of multiple programs between external devices, except for serial <_> serial, are not available. When a file containing multiple programs in an external device is transferred to NC memory as serial, it will be divided into one file per one program. When transferring divided programs one by one from an external device, which is not serial, (multiple programs) to an NC memory, the head program name can be omitted like «(COMMENT)» only when the transferring destination file name is designated to the file name field of device B.

Program name Program name should be designated with up to 32 alphanumeric characters (29 characters for a multi-part system program).

End of block (EOB, ;) When the I/O parameter «CR output» is set to «1», EOB becomes CRLF.

End of record (EOR, %)

The first line (from % to LF, or CR LF) will be skipped. Also, the content after the second % will not be transferred. «%» must be included in the first line because if not, the necessary information when transferring a file to an NC memory cannot be transferred.

File transfer

Transfer and check of multiple programs between external devices, except for serial <_> serial, are not available. When transferring a file as serial, the head program name can be omitted like «(COMMENT)» only when the transferring destination file name is designated to the file name field of device B.

Program name Program name should be designated with up to 32 alphanumeric characters (29 characters for a multi-part system program).

End of block (EOB, ;) When the I/O parameter «CR output» is set to «1», EOB becomes CRLF.

CRLF

(COMMENT) CRLF

G28 XYZ CRLF

: : M02 CRLF

% ^Z

CRLF

CRLF

G28 XYZ CRLF

: : M02 CRLF

L101(COMMENT1) CRLF

: M02 CRLF

% ^Z

L100(COMMENT)

LF

L100(COMMENT) LF

G28 XYZ LF

: : M02 LF

%

%

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

16

3.3 Optional Block Skip

3.3.1 Optional Block Skip; /

Function and purpose

This function selectively ignores a section of a machining program from a «/» (slash code) to the end of the

block.

Detailed description

Provided that the optional block skip switch is ON, a section of a machining program from a «/» to the end of

the block are ignored. They are executed if the switch is OFF.

Parity check is valid regardless of whether the optional block skip switch is ON or OFF.

When, for instance, all blocks are to be executed for one workpiece but specific blocks are not to be executed

for another workpiece, one machining program can be used to machine different parts by inserting the «/» into

those specific blocks.

Program example

(1) When the parameter «#1274 ext10/bit4» is set to «0» and the parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» is set to «0»:

A «/» placed in the middle of a block is always interpreted as a division instruction regardless of the

optional block skip signal state being ON or OFF.

(2) When the parameter «#1274 ext10/bit4» is set to «0» and the parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» is set to «1»:

A «/» placed in a bracketed («[ ]») expression is interpreted as a division instruction.

As for a «/» that appears in any other contexts, the section of the block following the «/» will be skipped if

the optional skip signal is ON, and the «/» itself will be ignored if the optional skip signal is OFF.

— Operation example of a case when optional block skip signal is ON:

— Operation example of a case when optional block skip signal is OFF:

G00 X0. Z0.;

#101 = [ 100. / 4 ] ; Sets «25.» to #101. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

G00 Z[ 100. / 4 ] ; Moves Z axis to «25.». (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

#102 = 100. / #101 ; Sets «4.» to #102. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

M30 ;

G00 X0. Z0.;

#101 = [ 100. / 4 ] ; Sets «25.» to #101. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

G00 X100. / Z200. ; Moves X axis to «100. «. No Z axis movements made. (As the result of skipping the section of the block after «/»)

G00 Z[ 100. / 4 ] ; Moves Z axis to «25.». (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

#102 = 100. / #101 ; Sets «100.» to #102. (As the result of skipping the section of the block after «/»)

M30 ;

G00 X0. Z0.;

#101 = [ 100. / 4 ] ; Sets «25.» to #101. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

G00 X100. / Z200. ; Moves X axis to «100.» and Z axis to «200.». (As the result of ignoring «/»)

G00 Z[ 100. / 4 ] ; Moves Z axis to «25.». (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

#102 = 100. / #101 ; Program error «P242 = not defined at vrble set» occurs. (As the result of ignoring «/»)

M30 ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.3 Optional Block Skip

17

(3) When the parameter «#1274 ext10/bit4» is set to «1»:

When a «/» is placed in a bracketed expression or when an expression that includes a «/» is on the right

side of an equation, the «/» is interpreted as a division instruction.

As for a «/» that appears in any other contexts, the section of the block following the «/» will be skipped if

the optional skip signal is ON, and the «/» itself will be ignored if the optional skip signal is OFF.

— Operation example of a case when optional block skip signal is ON:

— Operation example of a case when optional block skip signal is OFF:

Precautions

(1) When the parameter «#1274 ext10/bit4» is set to «0» and parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» is set to «0»», put

the «/» code for optional block skip at the beginning of a block. If it is placed inside the block, it is

assumed as a user macro, a division instruction.

(Example)

N20 G1 X25. /Z25. ; ……….NG (User macro, a division instruction; a program error results.)

/N20 G1 X25. Z25. ; ……….OK

When parameter «#1274 ext10/bit4» = «0» and parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» = «1», a «/» placed in the

middle of a block functions as a starting point of the optional skip. To use a «/» as a division instruction,

bracket (enclose in square brackets) the formula containing a slash code.

(2) A space immediately followed by a «/» at the very beginning of a block is always regarded as equal to a «/

» at the head of a block regardless of the value set in parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1».

(3) The optional block skip is processed immediately before the pre-read buffer.

Consequently, it is not possible to skip up to the block which has been read into the pre-read buffer.

(4) This function is valid even during a sequence No. search.

(5) All blocks with the «/» code are also input and output during tape storing and tape output, regardless of

the position of the optional block skip switch.

G00 X0. Z0.;

#101 = [ 100. / 4 ] ; Sets «25.» to #101. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

G00 X100. / Z200. ; Moves X axis to «100.». No Z axis movements made. (As the result of skipping the section of the block after «/»)

G00 Z[ 100. / 4 ] ; Moves Z axis to «25.». (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

#102 = 100. / #101 ; Sets «4.» to #102. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

M30 ;

G00 X0. Z0.;

#101 = [ 100. / 4 ] ; Sets «25.» to #101. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

G00 X100. / Z200. ; Moves X axis to «100.» and Z axis to «200.». (As the result of ignoring «/»)

G00 Z[ 100. / 4 ] ; Moves Z axis to «25.». (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

#102 = 100. / #101 ; Sets «4.» to #102. (As the result of execution of a division instruction)

M30 ;

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

18

3.3.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ; /n

Function and purpose

Whether the block with «/n (n:1 to 9)» (slash) is executed during automatic operation and searching is

selected.

By using the machining program with «/n» code, different parts can be machined by the same program.

Detailed description

The block with «/n» (slash) code is skipped when the «/n» is programmed to the head of the block and the

optional block skip n signal is turned ON. For a block with the «/n» code inside the block (not at the head of the

block), the program is operated according to the value of the parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» setting.

When the optional block skip n signal is OFF, the block with «/n» is executed.

Program example

(1) When the 2 parts like the figure below are machined, the following program is used. When the optional

block skip 5 signal is ON, the part 1 is created. When the optional block skip 5 signal is OFF, the part 2 is

created.

N1 G54 ;

N2 G90 G81 X50. Z-20. R3. F100 ;

/5 N3 X30. ;

N4 X10. ;

N5 G80 ;

M02 ;

Part 1 Optional block skip 5 signal ON

Part 2 Optional block skip 5 signal OFF

N4 N2 N2N3N4

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.3 Optional Block Skip

19

(2) When two or more «/n» codes are commanded at the head of the same block, the block will be ignored if

either of the optional block skip n signals corresponding to the command is ON.

(3) When the parameter «#1226 aux10/bit1» is «1»and two or more «/n» are commanded inside the same

block, the commands following «/n» in the block are ignored if either of the optional block skip n signals

corresponding to the command is ON.

N01 G90 Z3. M03 S1000 ; (a) Optional block skip 1 signal ON (Optional block skip 2.3 signal OFF) N01 -> N08 -> N09 -> N10 -> N11 -> N12

/1/2 N02 G00 X50. ;

/1/2 N03 G01 Z-20. F100 ;

/1/2 N04 G00 Z3. ;

/1 /3 N05 G00 X30. ; (b) Optional block skip 2 signal ON (Optional block skip 1.3 signal OFF) N01 -> N05 -> N06 -> N07 -> N11 -> N12

/1 /3 N06 G01 Z-20. F100 ;

/1 /3 N07 G00 Z3. ;

/2/3 N08 G00 X10. ; (c) Optional block skip 3 signal ON (Optional block skip 1.2 signal OFF) N01 -> N02 -> N03 -> N04 -> N11 -> N12

/2/3 N09 G01 Z-20. F100 ;

/2/3 N10 G00 Z3. ;

N11 G28 X0 M05 ;

N12 M02 ;

N01 G91 G28 X0.Y0.Z0.; N03 block will operate as follows. (a) Optional block skip 1 signal ON Optional block skip 2 signal OFF «Y1. Z1.» is ignored. (b) Optional block skip 1 signal OFF Optional block skip 2 signal ON «Z1.» is ignored.

N02 G01 F1000;

N03 X1. /1 Y1. /2 Z1.;

N04 M30;

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

20

3.4 G code 3.4.1 Modal, unmodal

G codes define the operation modes of each block in programs.

G codes can be modal or unmodal command.

Modal commands always designate one of the G codes in the group as the NC operation mode. The

operation mode is maintained until a cancel command is issued or other G code among the same group is

commanded.

An unmodal command designates the NC operation mode only when it is issued. It is invalid for the next

block.

3.4.2 G Code Lists

G code Group Function Section

00 01 Positioning 6.1

01 01 Linear interpolation 6.2

02 01

Circular interpolation CW (clockwise) R-specified circular interpolation CW Helical interpolation CW Spiral/Conical interpolation CW (type 2)

6.3 6.4 6.7 6.13

03 01

Circular interpolation CCW (counterclockwise) R-specified circular interpolation CCW Helical interpolation CCW Spiral/Conical interpolation CCW (type 2)

6.3 6.4 6.7 6.13

02.1 01 Spiral/Conical interpolation CW (type1) 6.13

03.1 01 Spiral/Conical interpolation CCW (type1) 6.13

02.3 01 Exponential function interpolation positive rotation 6.11

03.3 01 Exponential function interpolation negative rotation 6.11

02.4 01 3-dimensional circular interpolation 6.14

03.4 01 3-dimensional circular interpolation 6.14

04 00 Dwell 8.1

05 00 High-speed machining mode High-speed high-accuracy control II

13.17 13.18

05.1 00 High-speed high-accuracy control I Spline

13.18 13.19

06.2 01 NURBS interpolation 6.15

07 00 Hypothetical axis interpolation 6.16

07.1 107

21 Cylindrical interpolation 6.9

08 00 High-accuracy control 13.16

09 00 Exact stop check 7.10

10 00 Compensation data input by program Parameter input by program Parameter coordinate rotation input

12.8 13.12 13.23

11.1 00 Cancel (Compensation data input by program, Parameter input by program)

13.12

11.1 00 Program compensation data input to variable 12.9

12 00 Circular cut CW (clockwise) 13.11

13 00 Circular cut CCW (counterclockwise) 13.11

12.1 112

21 Polar coordinate interpolation ON 6.10

* 13.1 113

21 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel 6.10

14 00 Coordinate data read 13.30

* 15 18 Polar coordinate command OFF 6.12

16 18 Polar coordinate command ON 6.12

17 02 Plane selection X-Y 6.5

18 02 Plane selection Z-X 6.5

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.4 G code

21

19 02 Plane selection Y-Z 6.5

20 06 Inch command 5.2

21 06 Metric command 5.2

22 00 Subprogram call / figure rotation ON 13.3

23 00 Subprogram return / figure rotation cancel 13.3

22.1 04 Stroke check before travel ON 15.1

23.1 04 Stroke check before travel cancel 15.1

24

25

26

27 00 Reference position check 14.9

28 00 Reference position return 14.7

29 00 Start position return 14.7

30 00 2nd to 4th reference position return 14.8

30.1 00 Tool change position return 1 13.14

30.2 00 Tool change position return 2 13.14

30.3 00 Tool change position return 3 13.14

30.4 00 Tool change position return 4 13.14

30.5 00 Tool change position return 5 13.14

30.6 00 Tool change position return 6 13.14

31 00 Skip Multi-step skip function 2

16.2 16.4

31.1 00 Multi-step skip function 1-1 16.3

31.2 00 Multi-step skip function 1-2 16.3

31.3 00 Multi-step skip function 1-3 16.3

32

33 01 Thread cutting 6.6

34 00 Special fixed cycle (bolt hole circle) 13.2

35 00 Special fixed cycle (line at angle) 13.2

36 00 Special fixed cycle (arc) 13.2

37 00 Special fixed cycle (grid) 13.2

37.1 00 Automatic tool length measurement 16.1

38 00 Tool radius compensation vector designation 12.4

39 00 Tool radius compensation corner arc 12.4

* 40 07 Tool radius compensation cancel 3-dimentional tool radius compensation cancel Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining cancel

12.4 12.5 12.6

41 07 Tool radius compensation left 3-dimentional tool radius compensation left

12.4 12.5

42 07 Tool radius compensation right 3-dimentional tool radius compensation right

12.4 12.5

* 40.1 150

15 Normal line control cancel 13.15

41.1 151

15 Normal line control left ON 13.15

42.1 152

15 Normal line control right ON 13.15

41.2 07 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining (left) 12.6

42.2 07 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining (right) 12.6

43 08 Tool length compensation 12.2

*44 08 Tool length compensation cancel Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction Tool center point control cancel

12.2 12.3 13.25

43.1 08 Tool length compensation along the tool axis ON 12.3

43.4 08 Tool center point control type 1 13.25

43.5 08 Tool center point control type 2 13.25

G code Group Function Section

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

22

45 00 Tool position offset (extension) 12.7

46 00 Tool position offset (reduction) 12.7

47 00 Tool position offset (double elongation) 12.7

48 00 Tool position offset (double contraction) 12.7

* 50 11 Scaling cancel 13.21

51 11 Scaling ON 13.21

* 50.1 19 G command mirror image cancel 13.6

51.1 19 G command mirror image ON 13.6

52 00 Local coordinate system setting 14.11

53 00 Basic machine coordinate system selection 14.5

53.1 00 Tool axis direction control (type 1) 13.27

53.6 00 Tool axis direction control (type 2) 13.27

* 54 12 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection 14.10

55 12 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection 14.10

56 12 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection 14.10

57 12 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection 14.10

58 12 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection 14.10

59 12 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection 14.10

54.1 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 48 / 96 sets extended 14.10

54.4 27 Workpiece installation error compensation 14.14

60 00 Unidirectional positioning 6.8

61 13 Exact stop check mode 7.11

61.1 13 High-accuracy control 1 ON 13.16

61.2 13 High-accuracy spline interpolation 13.20

62 19 G command mirror image 13.6

63 13 Tapping mode 7.14

* 64 13 Cutting mode 7.15

65 00 User macro call 13.5.1

66 14 User macro modal call A 13.5.1

66.1 14 User macro modal call B 13.5.1

* 67 14 User macro modal call cancel 13.5.1

68 00 Subprogram return 13.5.1

69 00 End point error check cancellation 13.29

68.1 16 Coordinate rotation by program ON / 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode ON

13.22 13.24

68.2 16 Inclined surface machining command 13.27

68.3 16 Inclined surface machining command (Define using tool axis direction)

13.27

* 69.1 16 Coordinate rotation by program cancel / 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode OFF / Inclined surface machining command cancel

13.22 13.24 13.27

70 09 User fixed cycle

71 09 User fixed cycle

72 09 User fixed cycle

73 09 Fixed cycle (step) 13.1.10

74 09 Fixed cycle (reverse tap) 13.1.11

75 09 Fixed cycle (circle cutting cycle) 13.1.12

76 09 Fixed cycle (fine boring) 13.1.13

77 09 User fixed cycle

78 09 User fixed cycle

79 09 User fixed cycle

* 80 09 Fixed cycle cancel 13.1

81 09 Fixed cycle (drill/spot drill) 13.1.1

82 09 Fixed cycle (drill/counter boring) 13.1.2

83 09 Fixed cycle (deep drilling/small-diameter deep-hole drilling) 13.1.3

G code Group Function Section

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

3.4 G code

23

Precautions

(1) Codes marked with * are codes that must be or are selected in the initial state.

The codes marked with are codes that should be or are selected in the initial state by the

parameters.

(2) If two or more G codes from the same code are commanded, the latter G code will be valid.

(3) This G code list is a list of conventional G codes. Depending on the machine, movements that differ

from the conventional G commands may be included when called by the G code macro. Refer to

the Instruction Manual issued by the tool builder.

(4) Whether the modal is initialized or not depends on each reset input.

(a) «Reset 1»

The modal is initialized when the reset initial parameter «#1151 rstinit» turns ON.

(b) «Reset 2» and «Reset & rewind»

The modal is initialized when the signal is input.

(c) Resetting when emergency stop is canceled

Follows «Reset 1».

(d) When modal is automatically reset at the start of individual functions such as reference position

return.

Follows «Reset & rewind».

84 09 Fixed cycle (tapping) 13.1.4

85 09 Fixed cycle (boring) 13.1.5

86 09 Fixed cycle (boring) 13.1.6

87 09 Fixed cycle (back boring) 13.1.7

88 09 Fixed cycle (boring) 13.1.8

89 09 Fixed cycle (boring) 13.1.9

90 03 Absolute value command 5.1

91 03 Incremental command value 5.1

92 00 Coordinate system setting / Spindle clamp speed setting 14.6

92.1 00 Workpiece coordinate system pre-setting 14.12

93 05 Inverse time feed 7.5

94 05 Feed per minute (Asynchronous feed) 7.4

95 05 Feed per revolution (Synchronous feed) 7.4

96 17 Constant surface speed control ON 10.2

97 17 Constant surface speed control OFF 10.2

* 98 10 Fixed cycle Initial level return 13.1.15

99 10 Fixed cycle R point level return 13.1.15

100 — 225 00 User macro (G code call) Max. 10 13.5.2

120.1 00 Machining condition selection I 13.28

121 00 Machining condition selection I cancel 13.28

CAUTION

1. The commands with «no value after G» will be handled as «G00».

G code Group Function Section

3 Program Formats

MITSUBISHI CNC

24

3.5 Precautions Before Starting Machining

CAUTION

1. When creating the machining program, select the appropriate machining conditions, and make sure that the

performance, capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not exceeded. The examples do not consider the

machining conditions.

2. Before starting actual machining, always carry out graphic check, dry run operation and single block operation

to check the machining program, tool compensation amount, workpiece offset amount and etc.

4 Pre-read Buffers

MITSUBISHI CNC

26

4.1 Pre-read Buffers

Function and purpose

During automatic processing, the contents of one block ahead are normally pre-read so that program analysis

processing is conducted smoothly. However, during tool radius compensation, a maximum of 5 blocks are

pre-read for the intersection point calculation including interference check.

Detailed description

The specifications of pre-read buffers in 1 block are as follows:

(1) The data of 1 block is stored in this buffer.

(2) When comments and the optional block skip function is ON, the data extending from the «/» (slash) code

up to the EOB code are not read into the pre-read buffer.

(3) The pre-read buffer contents are cleared with resetting.

(4) When the single block function is ON during continuous operation, the pre-read buffer stores the next

block’s data and then stops operation.

(5) The way to prohibit the M command which operates the external controls from pre-reading, and to make

it to recalculate, is as follows:

Identify the M command which operates the external controls by a PLC, and turn on the «recalculation

request» on PLC output signal. (When the «recalculation request» is turned ON, the program that has

been pre-read is recalculated.)

Precautions

(1) Depending on whether the program is executed continuously or by single blocks, the timing of the

validation/invalidation of the external control signals including optional block skip, differ.

(2) If the external control signal such as optional block skip is turned ON/OFF with the M command, the

external control operation will not be effective for the program pre-read with the buffer register.

5 Position Commands

MITSUBISHI CNC

28

5.1 Position Command Methods ; G90,G91

Function and purpose

By using the G90 and G91 commands, it is possible to execute the next coordinate commands using absolute

values or incremental values.

The R-designated circle radius and the center of the circle determined by I, J, K are always incremental value

commands.

Command format

G90/G91 X__ Y__ Z__ __ ;

G90 Absolute command

G91 Incremental command

X,Y,Z, Coordinate values ( is the additional axis.)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

5.1 Position Command Methods ; G90,G91

29

Detailed description

(1) Regardless of the current position, in the absolute value mode, it is possible to move to the position of

the workpiece coordinate system that was designated in the program.

(2) For the next block, the last G90/G91 command that was given becomes the modal.

(3) Since multiple commands can be issued in the same block, it is possible to command specific addresses

as either absolute values or incremental values.

(4) When the power is turned ON, it is possible to select whether you want absolute value commands or

incremental value commands with the #1073 I_Absm parameter.

(5) Even when commanding with the manual data input (MDI), it will be treated as a modal from that block.

N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ; In the incremental value mode, the current position is the start point (0), and the movement is made only the value determined by the program, and is expressed as an incremental value. N2 G90 G01 X200. Y50. F100 ; N2 G91 G01 X200. Y50. F100 ; Using the command from the 0 point in the workpiece coordinate system, it becomes the same coordinate command value in either the absolute value mode or the incremental value mode.

Tool

(G90) N3 X100. Y100. ;

The axis moves to the workpiece coordinate system X = 100.mm and Y = 100.mm position.

(G91) N3 X-100. Y50. ;

The X axis moves to -100.mm and the Y axis to +50.0mm as an incremental value, and as a result X moves to 100.mm and Y to 100.mm.

N4 G90 X300. G91 Y100. ; The X axis is treated in the absolute value mode, and with G90 is moved to the workpiece coordinate system 300.mm position. The Y axis is moved +100.mm with G91. As a result, Y moves to the 200.mm position. In terms of the next block, G91 remains as the modal and becomes the incremental value mode.

300.200.

200.

100 N1

100. N2

W X

Y

300.200.

200.

100.

N3

W X

Y

100.

300.200.100.

N4

W X

Y

100.

200.

5 Position Commands

MITSUBISHI CNC

30

5.2 Inch/Metric Conversion ; G20,G21

Function and purpose

The commands can be changed between inch and metric with the G20/G21 command.

Command format

Detailed description

The G20 and G21 commands merely select the command units. They do not select the Input units.

G20 and G21 selection is meaningful only for linear axes. It is invalid for rotation axes.

Output unit, command unit and setting unit

The counter, parameter setting and display unit are determined by parameter «#1041 I_inch». The movement/

speed command will be displayed as metric units when «#1041 I_inch» is ON during the G21 command mode.

The internal unit metric data of the movement/speed command will be converted into an inch unit and

displayed when «#1041 I_inch» is OFF during the G20 command mode. The command unit for when the

power is turned ON and reset is decided by combining the parameters «#1041 I_inch», «#1151 rstint» and

«#1210 RstGmd/bit5».

NC axis

PLC axis

G20; … Inch command

G21; … Metric command

Item

Initial inch OFF (metric internal unit)

#1041 I_inch=0

Initial inch ON (inch internal unit)

#1041 I_inch=1

G21 G20 G21 G20

Movement/speed command Metric Inch Metric Inch

Counter display Metric Metric Inch Inch

Speed display Metric Metric Inch Inch

User parameter setting/display Metric Metric Inch Inch

Workpiece/tool offset setting/display Metric Metric Inch Inch

Handle feed command Metric Metric Inch Inch

Item #1042 pcinch=0 (metric) #1042 pcinch=1 (inch)

Movement/speed command Metric Inch

Counter display Metric Inch

User parameter setting/display Metric Inch

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

5.2 Inch/Metric Conversion ; G20,G21

31

Precautions

(1) The parameter and tool data will be input/output with the unit set by «#1041 I_inch».

If «#1041 I_inch» is not found in the parameter input data, the unit will follow the unit currently set to NC.

(2) The unit of read/write used in PLC window is fixed to metric unit regardless of a parameter and G20/G21

command modal.

(3) A program error (P33) will occur if G20/G21 command is issued in the same block as following G codes.

Command in a separate block.

— G05 (High-speed machining mode)

— G7.1 (Cylindrical Interpolation)

— G12.1 (Polar coordinate interpolation)

5 Position Commands

MITSUBISHI CNC

32

5.3 Decimal Point Input

Function and purpose

This function enables to input decimal points. It assigns the decimal point in millimeter or inch units for the

machining program input information that defines the tool paths, distances and speeds.

Use the parameter «#1078 Decpt2» to select whether minimum input command increment (type I) or zero point

(type II) to apply to the least significant digit of data without a decimal point.

Detailed description

(1) The decimal point command is valid for the distances, angles, times, speeds and scaling rate, in

machining programs. (Note, only after G51)

(2) In decimal point input type I and type II, the values of the data commands without the decimal points are

shown in the table below.

(3) The valid addresses for the decimal points are X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, E, F, P, Q, and R.

However, P is valid only during scaling. For details, refer to the list.

(4) In decimal point command, the valid range of command value is as shown below. (Input command unit

cunit = 10)

(5) The decimal point command is valid even for commands defining the variable data used in subprograms.

(6) While the smallest decimal point command is validated, the smallest unit for a command without a

decimal point designation is the smallest command input unit set in the specifications (1m, 10m,

etc.) or mm can be selected. This selection can be made with parameter «#1078 Decpt2».

(7) Decimal point commands for decimal point invalid addresses are processed as integer data only and

everything below the decimal point is ignored. Addresses which are invalid for the decimal point are D, H,

L, M, N, O, S and T. All variable commands, however, are treated as data with decimal points.

(8) «Input command increment tenfold» is applied in the decimal point type I mode, but not in the decimal

point type II mode.

Command Command unit Type I Type II

X1;

cunit=10000 1000

(m, 10-4inch,10-3)

1 (mm, inch, )

cunit= 1000 100 1

cunit= 100 10 1

cunit= 10 1 1

Movement command (linear)

Movement command (rotary)

Feedrate Dwell

Input unit [mm]

-99999.999 to 99999.999 -99999.999 to

99999.999

0.001 to 10000000.000

0 to 99999.999 Input unit

[inch] -9999.9999 to 9999.9999

0.0001 to 1000000.0000

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

5.3 Decimal Point Input

33

Decimal point input I, II and decimal point command validity

Decimal point input I and II will result as follows when decimal points are not used in an address which a

decimal point command is valid. Whether an address is valid or invalid for the decimal point command is

shown in the table below.

Both decimal point input I and II will produce the same result when a command uses a decimal point.

(1) Decimal point input I

The least significant digit of command data matches the command unit.

(Example) When «X1» is commanded in 1m system, the same result occurs as for an «X0.001»

command.

(2) Decimal point input II

The least significant digit of command data matches the command unit.

(Example) When «X1» is commanded in 1m system, the same result occurs as for an «X1.» command.

-Addresses used, validity of decimal point commands-

Address Decimal Point

Command Application Remarks

A

Valid Coordinate position data

Invalid Revolving table

Invalid Miscellaneous function code

Valid Angle data

Invalid Data settings, axis numbers (G10)

Invalid Subprogram call : program No. (label O)

B

Valid Coordinate position data

Invalid Revolving table

Invalid Miscellaneous function code

C

Valid Coordinate position data

Invalid Revolving table

Invalid Miscellaneous function code

Valid Corner chamfering amount ,C

D

Invalid Compensation numbers (tool position, tool radius)

Valid Automatic tool length measurement: deceleration distance d

Invalid Data setting: byte type data

Invalid Subprogram storing device number ,D

E Valid

Inch thread: number of ridges, precision thread: lead

Valid Dwell time at hole bottom of fixed cycle (label L, O)

F

Valid Feedrate, automatic tool length measurement speed

Valid Thread lead

Valid Number of Z axis pitch in synchronous tap

G Valid Preparatory function code

H

Invalid Tool length compensation number

Invalid Sequence numbers in subprograms (label L, O)

Invalid Subprogram return destination sequence No. (label L, O)

Invalid Parameter input by program: bit type data

Invalid Basic spindle selection

I

Valid Arc center coordinates, center of figure rotation (incremental)

Valid Tool radius compensation vector components

Valid Hole pitch in the special fixed cycle

Valid Circle radius of cut circle (increase amount)

Valid G0/G1 imposition width, drilling cycle G0 imposition width ,I

Valid Stroke check before travel: lower limit coordinates

5 Position Commands

MITSUBISHI CNC

34

J

Valid Coordinates for arc center and center of figure rotation (incremental)

Valid Tool radius compensation vector components

Valid Special fixed cycle’s hole pitch or angle

Valid G0/G1 imposition width, drilling cycle G1 imposition width

Valid Stroke check before travel: lower limit coordinates

K

Valid Coordinates for arc center and center of figure rotation (incremental)

Valid Tool radius compensation vector components

Invalid Number of holes of the special fixed cycle

Invalid Number of drilling cycle repetitions

Valid Stroke check before travel: lower limit coordinates

L

Invalid Subprogram call program No. (label L)

Invalid Tool compensation data input by program/workpiece offset input: type selection

L2, L20, L10, L11 L12, L13,

Invalid Parameter input by program: data setting selection L70

Invalid Parameter input by program: 2-word type data 4 bytes

Invalid Program No. (label L)

Invalid Tool life data

M Invalid Miscellaneous function codes

N Invalid Sequence numbers

Invalid Parameter input by program: data numbers

O Invalid Program numbers

P

Invalid/Valid Dwell time Parameter

Invalid Subprogram program call: program No.

Invalid/Valid Dwell at tap cycle hole base Parameter

Invalid Number of holes of the special fixed cycle

Invalid Amount of helical pitch

Invalid Offset number (G10)

Invalid Constant surface speed control axis number

Invalid Parameter input by program: broad classification number

Invalid Multi-step skip function 2 signal command

Invalid Subprogram return destination sequence No.

Invalid 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return number

Valid Scaling magnification

Invalid High-speed mode type

Invalid Type of the coordinate to be read

Invalid Transmission source compensation No. of program compensation data input to variable

Invalid Extended workpiece coordinate system No.

Invalid Tool life data group No.

Invalid Machining purpose

Q

Valid Cut amount of deep hole drill cycle

Valid Shift amount of back boring

Valid Shift amount of fine boring

Invalid Minimum spindle clamp speed

Valid Starting shift angle for screw cutting

Invalid Tool life data management method

Invalid Machining condition

Address Decimal Point

Command Application Remarks

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

5.3 Decimal Point Input

35

(Note 1) Decimal points are all valid in user macro arguments.

Program example

(1) Program example of decimal point valid address

Precautions

(1) If an arithmetic operator is inserted, the data will be handled as data with a decimal point.

(Example1) G00 X123+0 ;

This is the X axis 123mm command. It will not be 123m.

R

Valid R-point in the fixed cycle

Valid R-specified arc radius

Valid Corner R arc radius ,R

Valid Offset amount (G10)

Invalid Synchronous tap/asynchronous tap changeover

Valid Automatic tool length measurement: deceleration distance r

Valid Rotation angle

Invalid Skip acceleration/deceleration time constant

S

Invalid Spindle function codes

Invalid Maximum spindle clamp speed

Invalid Constant surface speed control: surface speed

Invalid Parameter input by program: word type data 2 bytes

T Invalid Tool function codes

U Valid Coordinate position data

V Valid Coordinate position data

W Valid Coordinate position data

X Valid Coordinate position data

Valid Dwell time

Y Valid Coordinate position data

Z Valid Coordinate position data

Program example Decimal point command 1 Decimal point

command 2 When 1 = 1mm When 1 = 1m When 1 = 10m

G0 X123.45 (decimal points are all mm points)

X123.450 mm X123.450 mm X123.450 mm

G0 X12345 X12.345 mm (last digit is 1m unit)

X123.450 mm X12345.000 mm

#111=123 #112=5.55 X#111 Y#112

X123.000 mm Y5.550 mm

X123.000 mm Y5.550 mm

X123.000 mm Y5.550 mm

#113=#111+#112 (addition)

#113=128.550 #113=128.550 #113=128.550

#114=#111-#112 (subtraction)

#114=117.450 #114=117.450 #114=117.450

#115=#111*#112 (multiplication)

#115=682.650 #115=682.650 #115=682.650

#116=#111/#112 #117=#112/#111 (division)

#116=22.162 #117=0.045

#116=22.162 #117=0.045

#116=22.162 #117=0.045

Address Decimal Point

Command Application Remarks

5 Position Commands

MITSUBISHI CNC

36

37

6

Interpolation Functions

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

38

6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00

Function and purpose

This command is accompanied by coordinate words and performs high-speed positioning of a tool, from the

present point (start point) to the end point specified by the coordinate words.

Command format

The command addresses are valid for all additional axes.

Detailed description

(1) Positioning will be performed at the rapid traverse rate set in the parameter «#2001 rapid».

(2) G00 command belongs to the 01 group and is modal. When G00 command is successively issued, the

following blocks can be specified only by the coordinate words.

(3) In the G00 mode, acceleration and deceleration are always carried out at the start point and end point of

the block. Before advancing to the next block, a commanded deceleration or an in-position check is

conducted at the end point to confirm that the movement is completed for all the moving axes in each

part system.

(4) G functions (G72 to G89) in the 09 group are cancelled (G80) by the G00 command.

G00 X__ Y__ Z____,I__ ; … Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

X, Y, Z, Coordinate values ( is the additional axis.) An absolute position or incremental position is indicated based on the state of G90/G91 at that time.

,I In-position width. This is valid only in the commanded block. A block that does not contain this address will follow the parameter «#1193 inpos» settings. 1 to 999999

CAUTION

1. The commands with «no value after G» will be handled as «G00».

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00

39

Tool path

Whether the tool moves along a linear or non-linear path can be selected by the parameter «#1086 G0Intp».

The positioning time does not change according to the path.

(1) Linear path: When the parameter «#1086 G0Intp» is set to «0»

In positioning, a tool follows the shortest path which connects the start point and the end point. The

positioning speed is automatically calculated so that the shortest distribution time is obtained in order

that the commanded speeds for each axis do not exceed the rapid traverse rate.

When, for instance, the X-axis and Y-axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600mm/min;

G91 G00 X-300000 Y200000 ; (With an input setting unit of 0.001mm)

The tool will follow the path shown in the figure below.

(2) Non-linear path: When the parameter «#1086 G0Intp» is set to «1»

In positioning, the tool will move along the path from the start point to the end point at the rapid traverse

rate of each axis.

When, for instance, the X-axis and Y-axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600mm/min;

G91 G00 X-300000 Y200000 ; (With an input setting unit of 0.001mm)

The tool will follow the path shown in the figure below.

(S) Start point (E) End point (fx) Actual X axis rate (fy) Actual Y axis rate

(S) Start point (E) End point (fx) Actual X axis rate (fy) Actual Y axis rate

300

(mm)

(E)

(S)

fy=6400mm/min

Y

X 20

0

fx=9600mm/min

300

(mm)

(E)

(S)

fy=9600mm/min

Y

X

20 0

fx=9600mm/min

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

40

Program example

Precautions for deceleration check

There are two methods for the deceleration check; commanded deceleration method and in-position check

method. Select a method with the parameter «#1193 inpos».

A block with an in-position width command performs an in-position check with a temporarily changed in-

position width. (Programmable in-position width command)

The deceleration check method set in basic specification parameter «#1193 inpos» is used for blocks that do

not have the in-position width command.

During cutting feed and when the error detection is ON, the in-position check is forcibly carried out.

* Following descriptions are for the case of rapid traverse. For G01, interpret the parameters into suitable

ones.

(S) Start point (E) End point

G91 G00 X-270. Y300. Z150. ;

Rapid traverse (G00)

#1193 inpos

0 1

,I command No

Commanded deceleration method (Commanded deceleration check which varies according to the type of acceleration/deceleration, set in «#2003 smgst» bit3-0)

In-position check method (In-position check by «#2077 G0inps», «#2224 SV024»)

Yes In-position check method (In-position check by «,I», «#2077 G0inps», «#2224 SV024»)

Cutting feedrate (G01)

#1193 inpos

0 1

,I command No

Commanded deceleration method (Commanded deceleration check which varies according to the type of acceleration/deceleration, set in «#2003 smgst» bit7-4)

In-position check method (In-position check by «#2078 G1inps», «#2224 SV024»)

Yes In-position check method (In-position check by «,I», «#2078 G1inps», «#2224 SV024»)

mm

( — 120,+200,+300)

(+150, — 100,+150)

X

Z

Y

+300

+150

+200+150

-100 — 120

(S)

(E)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00

41

Commanded deceleration method when «inpos» = «0»

Upon completion of the rapid traverse (G00), the next block will be executed after the deceleration check time

(Td) has elapsed.

The deceleration check time (Td) is as follows, depending on the acceleration/deceleration type set in the

parameter «#2003 smgst».

(1) Linear acceleration/linear deceleration

(2) Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration

(3) Exponential acceleration/exponential deceleration (Primary delay)

The time required for the deceleration check is the longest among the deceleration check times of each axis

determined by the acceleration/deceleration mode and time constants of the axes commanded

simultaneously.

(Ts) Acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Td) Deceleration check time: Td = Ts + (0 to 7ms)

(Ts) Acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Td) Deceleration check time: Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 7ms)

(Ts) Acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Td) Deceleration check time: Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 7ms)

Ts

Td

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

Td Ts

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

2Ts

Ts

Td

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

42

In-position check method when «inpos» = 1

Upon completion of the rapid traverse (G00), the next block will be executed after confirming that the

remaining distances for each axis are below the fixed amounts.

The confirmation of the remaining distance should be done with the imposition width.

The bigger one of the servo parameter «#2224 SV024» or G0 in-position width «#2077 G0inps» (For G01, in-

position width «#2078 G1inps»), will be adapted as the in-position width.

G0 deceleration pattern

The in-position width LR indicates the remaining distance from the previous block at the start of the next block

(shaded area of the figure above).

(TR) Rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time constant

(LR) In-position width

G00 Xx1 ; G00 Xx2 ;

LR

2TR

TR

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00

43

The purpose of the rapid traverse deceleration check is to minimize the positioning time. The bigger the

setting value for the in-position width, the shorter the time is, but the remaining distance of the previous block

at the start of the next block also becomes larger, and this could become an obstacle in the actual processing

work.

The check for the remaining distance is done at set intervals. Accordingly, it may not be possible to get the

effect of time reduction for positioning as in-position width setting value.

(1) In-position check by the G0inps: When SV024 < G0inps (Stop is judged at A in the figure)

(2) In-position check using SV024: When G0inps < SV024 (Stop is judged at A in the figure)

(a) Command to motor (b) Outline of motor movement

(a) Command to motor (b) Outline of motor movement

SV024

(a)

(b)

G0inps

A

G0inps

(a)

(b)

SV024

A

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

44

Programmable in-position width command

This command commands the in-position width for the positioning command from the machining program.

Execution of the next block starts after confirming that the position error amount of the positioning (rapid

traverse: G00) command block is less than the in-position width issued in this command.

The bigger one of in-position width (SV024, G0inps (For G01, G1inps)) with parameter or in-position width

specified by program will be adapted as the in-position width.

When there are several movement axes, the system confirms that the position error amount of each

movement axis in each part system is less than the in-position width issued in this command before executing

the next block.

The differences of In-position check

The differences between the in-position check with parameter and with programmable command are as

follows:

(1) In-position check with parameter

After completing deceleration of the command system (A), the servo system’s position error amount and

the parameter setting value (in-position width) are compared.

(2) In-position check with programmable command («,I» address command)

After starting deceleration of the command system (A), the position error amount and commanded in-

position width are compared.

G00 X_ Y_ Z_ ,I_ ;

X,Y,Z Positioning coordinate value of each axis

,I In-position width

(a) Servo machine position (b) Command (c) In-position width (Servo system position error amount) (Ts) Acceleration/deceleration time constant (Td) Deceleration check time: Td = Ts + (0 to 7ms)

(a) Servo machine position (b) Command (c) In-position width (Error amount between command end point and machine position) (Ts) Acceleration/deceleration time constant (Td) Deceleration check time: Td = Ts + (0 to 7ms)

Ts

Td

(a) (b)

(c)

A

G00 Xx1;

Ts

Td

(a) (b)

(c)

A

G00 Xx1;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.2 Linear Interpolation ; G01

45

6.2 Linear Interpolation ; G01

Function and purpose

This command is accompanied by coordinate words and a feedrate command. It makes the tool move

(interpolate) linearly from its current position to the end point specified by the coordinate words at the speed

specified by address F. In this case, the feedrate specified by address F always acts as a linear speed in the

tool nose center advance direction.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) G01 command is a modal command in the 01 group. When G01 command is issued in succession, it can

only be issued with coordinate words in subsequent blocks.

(2) The feedrate for a rotary axis is commanded by /min (decimal point position unit). (F300=300/min)

(3) The G functions (G72 to G89) in the 09 group are cancelled (G80) by the G01 command.

Programmable in-position width command for linear interpolation

This command commands the in-position width for the linear interpolation command from the machining

program.

The commanded in-position width is valid in the linear interpolation command only when carrying out

deceleration check.

— When the error detection switch is ON.

— When G09 (exact stop check) is commanded in the same block.

— When G61 (exact stop check mode) is selected.

(Note 1) Refer to section «Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00» for details on the in-position check operation.

G01 X__ Y__ Z__ __ F__ ,I__ ; … Linear interpolation

X,Y,Z, Coordinate values ( is the additional axis.) An absolute position or incremental position is indicated based on the state of G90/G91 at that time.

F Feedrate (mm/min or /min)

,I In-position width. This is valid only in the commanded block. A block that does not contain this address will follow the parameter «#1193 inpos» settings. 1 to 999999

G01 X_ Y_ Z_ F_ ,I_ ;

X,Y,Z Linear interpolation coordinate value of each axis

F Feedrate

,I In-position width

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

46

Program example

(Example) Cutting in the sequence of P1 -> P2 -> P3 -> P4 -> P1 at 300mm/min feedrate.

However, P0 -> P1 is for tool positioning.

G91 G00 X20. Y20. ; P0 -> P1

G01 X20. Y30. F300 ; P1 -> P2

X30. ; P2 -> P3

X-20. Y-30. ; P3 -> P4

X-30. ; P4 -> P1

P4 P1

P0

P3P2

20

30

20 20 30

Y

X

(mm)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.3 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

47

6.3 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

Function and purpose

Command format

G02 X__ Y__ I__ J__ F__ ; … Circular interpolation : Clockwise (CW)

G03 X__ Y__ I__ J__ F__ ; … Circular interpolation : Counterclockwise (CCW)

X,Y End point

I,J Arc center

F Feedrate

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

48

Detailed description

(1) For the arc command, the arc end point coordinates are assigned with addresses X, Y (or Z, or parallel

axis X, Y, Z), and the arc center coordinate value is assigned with addresses I, J (or K).

Either an absolute value or incremental value can be used for the arc end point coordinate value

command, but the arc center coordinate value must always be commanded with an incremental value

from the start point.

The arc center coordinate value is commanded with a program command unit. Caution is required for

the circular command of an axis for which the program command unit (#1015 cunit) differs. Command

with a decimal point to avoid confusion.

(2) G02 (G03) is a modal command of the 01 group. When G02 (G03) command is issued continuously, the

next block and after can be commanded with only coordinate words.

The circular rotation direction is distinguished by G02 and G03.

G02 Clockwise (CW)

G03 Counterclockwise (CCW)

(3) An arc which extends for more than one quadrant can be executed with a single block command.

(4) The following information is needed for circular interpolation.

(a) Plane selection : Is there an arc parallel to one of the XY, ZX or YZ planes?

(b) Rotation direction : Clockwise (G02) or counterclockwise (G03)

(c) Circular end point coordinates : Given by addresses X, Y, Z

(d) Circular center coordinates : Given by addresses I, J, K (incremental value commands)

(e) Feedrate : Given by address F

G17(X-Y) plane G18(Z-X) plane G19(Y-Z) plane

X

Z

Y G3

G3 G3

G2 G2

G2

Y

X

G02

G03

G02

G03

X

Z

G02

G03

Y

Z

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.3 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

49

Plane selection

The arc exists in the following three planes (refer to the figure in the Detailed description), and are selected

by the following method.

XY plane

G17; Command with a (plane selection G code)

ZX plane

G18; Command with a (plane selection G code)

YZ plane

G19; Command with a (plane selection G code)

Change into linear interpolation command

Program error (P33) will occur when the center and radius are not designated at circular command.

When the parameter «#11029 Arc to G1 no Cent (Change command from arc to linear when no arc center

designation)» is set, the linear interpolation can be operated up to the end point coordinate value only for that

block. However, a modal is the circular modal.

This function is not applied to a circular command by a geometric function.

(Example) The parameter «#11029 Arc to G1 no Cent (Change command from arc to linear when no arc

center designation)» = «1»

G90 X0 Y0 ; N1 G02 X20. I10. F500 ; … (a) N2 G00 X0 ; N3 G02 X20. F500 ; … (b) M02 ;

(a) The circular interpolation (G02) is executed because there is a center command.

(b) The linear interpolation (G01) is executed because there is no center and radius command.

N1

N3

200

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

50

Program example

(Example 1)

(Example 2)

(S) Start point (E) End point (J) Circle center

G02 J50. F500; Circle command

(S) Start point (E) End point (J) Arc center

G91 G02 X50.Y50. J50. F500; 3/4 command

F = 500mm/min

+Y

+X

J = 50mm

Y

X

(S) / (E)

(J)

F = 500mm/min

+Y

+X

J = 50mm X50Y50mm

(J)

Y

X

(E)

(S)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.3 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

51

Precautions

(1) The terms «clockwise» (G02) and «counterclockwise» (G03) used for circular operations are defined as a

case where, in a right-hand coordinate system, the negative direction is viewed from the positive

direction of the coordinate axis which is at right angles to the plane in question.

(2) If all the end point coordinates are omitted or the end point is at the same position as the start point,

commanding the center using I, J and K is the same as commanding a 360arc (perfect circle).

(3) The following occurs when the start and end point radius do not match in a circular command :

(a) Program error (P70) occurs at the circular start point when error R is greater than parameter «#1084 RadErr».

#1084 RadErr Parameter value 0.100 Start point radius=5.000 End point radius=4.899 ErrorR=0.101 (S) Start point (CP) Center (E) End point (SR) Start point radius (ER) End point radius (AL) Alarm stop

(b) Spiral interpolation in the direction of the commanded end point will be conducted when error R is less than the parameter value.

#1084 RadErr Parameter value 0.100 Start point radius=5.000 End point radius=4.900 ErrorR=0.100 (S) Start point (CP) Center (E) End point (SR) Start point radius (ER) End point radius (SI) Spiral interpolation

(G91) G02 X9.899 I5. ;

R (S)

(AL)

(SR) (ER)

(CP) (E)

(G91) G02 X9.9 I5. ;

R

(SI)

(E)(CP) (S)

(SR) (ER)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

52

6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

Function and purpose

Along with the conventional circular interpolation commands based on the circular center coordinate (I, J, K)

designation, these commands can also be issued by directly designating the circular radius R.

Command format

The arc radius is commanded with a program command unit. Caution is required for the arc command of an

axis for which the program command unit (#1015 cunit) differs. Command with a decimal point to avoid

confusion.

Detailed description

The circular center is on the bisector line which is perpendicular to the line connecting the start and end points

of the circular. The point, where the circular with the specified radius whose start point is the center intersects

the perpendicular bisector line, serves as the center coordinates of the circular command.

If the R sign of the commanded program is plus, the circular is smaller than a semicircular; if it is minus, the

circular is larger than a semicircular.

The following condition must be met with an R-specified arc interpolation command:

Where L is the line from the start point to the end point. If an R specification and I, J, (K) specification are

given at the same time in the same block, the circular command with the R specification takes precedence. In

the case of a full-circle command (where the start and end points coincide), an R specification circular

command will be completed immediately even if it is issued and no operation will be executed. An I, J, (K)

specification circular command should therefore be used in such a case.

G02 X__ Y__ R__ F__ ; … R specification circular interpolation Clockwise (CW)

G03 X__ Y__ R__ F__ ; … R specification circular interpolation Counterclockwise (CCW)

X X axis end point coordinate

Y Y axis end point coordinate

R Arc radius

F Feedrate

(S) Start point (E) End point

When L/2 — r > parameter (#1084 RadErr), an alarm will occur.

L

r

R < 0

(S)

R > 0

(E)

L 12 r

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03

53

Circular center coordinate compensation

When the error margin between the segment connecting the start and end points» and «the commanded

radius 2″ is less than the setting value, «the midpoint of segment connecting the start and end points» is

compensated as the circular center, because the required semicircle is not obtained by calculation error in R

specification circular interpolation.

Set the setting value to the parameter «#11028 Tolerance Arc Cent (Tolerable correction value of arc center

error)».

(Example) «#11028 Tolerance Arc Cent» = «0.000 (mm)»

Calculation error margin compensation allowance value: 0.002 mm

Segment connecting the start and end points: 10.000

N3: Radius 2 = 10.002 «Error 0.002 -> Compensate»

N5: Radius 2 = 10.004 «Error 0.004 -> Do not compensate»

Therefore, this example is shown in the above figure.

Program example

(Example 1)

(Example 2)

(Example 3)

(Example 4)

Setting value Tolerance value

Setting value < 0 0(Center error will not be interpolated)

Setting value = 0 2 minimum setting increment

Setting value > 0 Setting value

G90 X0 Y0 ; N1 G02 X10. R5.000; N2 G0 X0; …(a) N3 G02 X10. R5.001; N4 G0 X0; …(b) N5 G02 X10. R5.002; N6 G0 X0; M02 ;

(a) Compensate the center coordinate: Same as N1 path

(b) Do not compensate the center coordinate: Slightly inside N1 path

G02 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1 ; XY plane R-specified arc

G03 Zz1 Xx1 Rr1 Ff1 ; ZX plane R-specified arc

G02 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1 ; XY plane R-specified arc (When the R specification and I, J, (K) specification are contained in the same block, the circular command with the R specification takes precedence.)

G17 G02 Ii1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1 ; XY plane This is an R-specified arc, but as this is a circle command, it will be completed immediately.

0 10

N1, N3

N5

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

54

6.5 Plane Selection ; G17,G18,G19

Function and purpose

The plane to which the movement of the tool during the circle interpolation (including helical cutting) and tool

radius compensation command belongs is selected.

If the 3 basic axes and the parallel axes corresponding to these basic axes are entered as parameters, the

commands can select the plane composed of any 2 axes which are not parallel axes. If a rotary axis is

registered as a parallel axis, the commands can select the plane containing the rotary axis.

The plane selection is as follows:

— Plane that executes circular interpolation (including helical cutting)

— Plane that executes tool radius compensation

— Plane that executes fixed cycle positioning

Command format

X, Y and Z indicate each coordinate axis or the parallel axis.

Detailed description

Parameter entry

Table 1 Examples of plane selection parameter entry

As shown in the above example, the basic axis and its parallel axis can be registered.

The basic axis can be an axis other than X, Y and Z.

Axes that are not registered are irrelevant to the plane selection.

G17 ; … Plane selection X-Y

G18 ; … Plane selection Z-X

G19 ; … Plane selection Y-Z

#1026-1028base_I,J,K #1029-1031aux_I,J,K

I X U

J Y

K Z V

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.5 Plane Selection ; G17,G18,G19

55

Plane selection system

In Table 1,

I is the horizontal axis for the G17 plane or the vertical axis for the G18 plane

J is the vertical axis for the G17 plane or the horizontal axis for the G19 plane

K is the horizontal axis for the G18 plane or the vertical axis for the G19 plane

In other words,

G17 ….. IJ plane

G18 ….. KI plane

G19 ….. JK plane

(1) Axis addresses assigned in the same block as the plane selection (G17, G18, G19) command determine

which of the basic axes or parallel axes are to be in the actual plane selected.

For the parameter entry example in Table 1.

G17 X__Y__ ; XY plane

G18 X__V__ ; VX plane

G18 U__V__ ; VU plane

G19 Y__Z__ ; YZ plane

G19 Y__V__ ; YV plane

(2) The plane will not changeover at a block where a plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19) is not

commanded.

G17 X__Y__ ; XY plane

Y__Z__ ; XY plane (plane does not change)

(3) If the axis address is omitted in the block where the plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19) is

commanded, it is assumed that the axis addresses of the 3 basic axes have been omitted.

For the parameter entry example in Table 1.

G17 ; XY plane

G17 U__ ; UY plane

G18 U__ ; ZU plane

G18 V__ ; VX plane

G19 Y__ ; YZ plane

G19 V__ ; YV plane

(4) When the axis address is commanded to the same block as the plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19),

the commanded axes will travel.

(5) The axis command that does not exist in the plane determined by the plane selection G code (G17, G18,

G19) is irrelevant to the plane selection.

For the parameter entry example in Table 1.

G17 U__Z__ ;

If the above is commanded, the UY plane will be selected, and Z will move regardless of the plane.

(6) When the basic axes or their parallel axes are duplicated and assigned in the same block as the plane

selection G code (G17, G18, G19), the plane is determined in the order of basic axes, and then parallel

axes.

For the parameter entry example in Table 1.

G17 U__Y__W__ ;

If the above is commanded, the UY plane will be selected, and W will move regardless of the plane.

(Note 1) When the power is turned ON or when the system is reset, the plane set by the parameter «#1025

I_plane» is selected.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

56

6.6 Thread Cutting

6.6.1 Constant Lead Thread Cutting ; G33

Function and purpose

The G33 command exercises feed control over the tool which is synchronized with the spindle rotation and so

this makes it possible to conduct constant-lead straight thread-cutting, and tapered thread-cutting. Multiple

thread screws, etc., can also be machined by designating the thread cutting angle.

Command format

Normal lead thread cutting

Precision lead thread cutting

G33 Z__(X__ Y____ ) F__ Q__ ;

Z (X Y ) Thread end point

F Lead of long axis (axis which moves the most) direction

Q Thread cutting start shift angle (0.001 — 360.000)

G33 Z__(X__ Y____ ) E__ Q__ ;

Z (X Y ) Thread end point

E Lead of long axis (axis which moves most) direction

Q Thread cutting start shift angle (0.001 — 360.000)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.6 Thread Cutting

57

Detailed description

(1) The E command is also used for the number of ridges in inch thread cutting, and whether the number of

ridges or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting.(Parameter «#8156

Fine thread cut E» is set to «1» for precision lead designation.)

(2) The lead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead.

Thread cutting metric input

(t) Tapered thread section When a < 45, lead is in Z-axis direction. When a < 45, lead is in X-axis direction. When a = 45, lead can be in either Z or X-axis direction.

Input setting unit B (0.001mm)

Command address F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.001) (1.=1.000)

1(=0.0001) (1.=1.0000)

1(=1.00) (1.=1.00)

Command range 0.001 — 999.999

0.0001 — 999.9999

0.03 — 999.99

Input setting unit C (0.0001mm)

Command address F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.0001) (1.=1.0000)

1(=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

1(=1.000) (1.=1.000)

Command range 0.0001 — 999.9999

0.00001 — 999.99999

0.026 — 222807.017

Input setting unit D (0.00001mm)

Command address F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

1(=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

1(=1.0000) (1.=1.0000)

Command range 0.00001 — 999.99999

0.000001 — 999.999999

0.0255 — 224580.0000

Input setting unit E (0.000001mm)

Command address F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

1(=0.0000001) (1.=1.0000000)

1(=1.00000) (1.=1.00000)

Command range 0.000001 — 999.999999

0.0000001 — 999.9999999

0.02541 — 224719.00000

LZ

Z

XLX

a

(t)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

58

Thread cutting inch input

(Note 1) It is not possible to assign a lead where the feedrate as converted into feed per minute exceeds the

maximum cutting feedrate.

(3) The constant surface speed control function should not be used for taper thread cutting commands or

scrolled thread cutting commands.

(4) The spindle rotation speed should be kept constant throughout from the rough cutting until the finishing.

(5) If the feed hold function is employed during thread cutting to stop the feed, the thread ridges will lose

their shape. For this reason, feed hold does not function during thread cutting. Note that this is valid from

the time the thread cutting command is executed to the time the axis moves.

If the feed hold switch is pressed during thread cutting, block stop will occur at the end point of the block

following the block in which thread cutting is completed (no longer G33 mode).

(6) The converted cutting feedrate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when thread cutting starts,

and if it is found to exceed the clamp rate, an operation error will occur.

(7) In order to protect the lead during thread cutting, a cutting feedrate which has been converted may

sometimes exceed the cutting feed clamp rate.

(8) An illegal lead is normally produced at the start of the thread and at the end of the cutting because of

servo system delay and other such factors.

Therefore, it is necessary to command a thread length which is determined by adding the illegal lead

lengths to the required thread length.

(9) The spindle rotation speed is subject to the following restriction :

1 <= R <= Maximum feedrate/Thread lead

Where R <= Tolerable speed of encoder (r/min)

R: Spindle rotation speed (r/min)

Thread lead = mm or inches

Maximum feedrate= mm/min or inch/mm (this is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine

specifications.)

(10) A program error (P97) may occur when the result of the expression (9) is R<1 because the thread lead is

very large to the highest cutting feedrate.

Input setting unit B (0.0001inch)

Command address F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.0001) (1.=1.0000)

1(=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

1(=1.000) (1.=1.000)

Command range 0.0001 — 39.3700

0.00001 — 39.37007

0.025 — 9999.999

Input setting unit C (0.00001inch)

Command address F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

1(=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

1(=1.0000) (1.=1.0000)

Command range 0.00001 — 39.37007

0.000001 — 39.370078

0.0255 — 9999.9999

Input setting unit D (0.000001inch)

Command address F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

1(=0.0000001) (1.=1.0000000)

1(=1.00000) (1.=1.00000)

Command range 0.000001 — 39.370078

0.0000001 — 39.3700787

0.02541 — 9999.99999

Input setting unit E (0.0000001inch)

Command address F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)

Least Command Increments 1(=0.0000001) (1.=1.0000000)

1(=0.00000001) (1.=1.00000000)

1(=1.000000) (1.=1.000000)

Command range 0.0000001 — 39.3700787

0.00000001 — 39.37007873

0.025401 — 9999.999999

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.6 Thread Cutting

59

(11) Dry run is valid for thread cutting but the feedrate based on dry run is not synchronized with the spindle

rotation.

The dry run signal is checked at the start of thread cutting and any switching during thread cutting is

ignored.

(12) Synchronous feed applies for the thread cutting commands even with an asynchronous feed command

(G94).

(13) Spindle override and cutting feed override are invalid and the speeds are fixed to 100% during thread

cutting.

(14) When a thread cutting is commanded during tool radius compensation, the compensation is temporarily

canceled and the thread cutting is executed.

(15) When the mode is switched to another automatic mode while G33 is executed, the following block which

does not contain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops.

(16) When the mode is switched to the manual mode while G33 is executed, the following block which does

not contain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. In the

case of a single block, the following block which does not contain a thread cutting command (G33 mode

is cancelled) is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. Note that automatic operation is

stopped until the G33 command axis starts moving.

(17) The thread cutting command waits for the single rotation synchronization signal of the rotary encoder

and starts movement.

Make sure to carry out timing synchronization operation between part systems before issuing a thread

cutting command with multiple part systems. For example, when using the 1-spindle specifications with

two part systems, if one part system issues a thread cutting command during ongoing thread cutting by

another part system, the movement will start without waiting for the rotary encoder single rotation

synchronization signal causing an illegal operation.

(18) The thread cutting start shift angle is not modal. If there is no Q command with G33, this will be handled

as «Q0».

(19) The automatic handle interrupt/interruption is valid during thread cutting.

(20) If a value exceeding 360.000 is command in G33 Q, a program error (P35) will occur.

(21) G33 cuts one row with one cycle. To cut two rows, change the Q value, and issue the same command.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

60

Program example

N110 G90 G0 X-200. Y-200. S50 M3 ; The spindle center is positioned to the workpiece center, and the spindle rotates in the forward direction.N111 Z110. ;

N112 G33 Z40. F6.0 ; The first thread cutting is executed. Thread lead = 6.0mm

N113 M19 ; Spindle orientation is executed with the M19 command.

N114 G0 X-210. ; The tool is evaded in the X axis direction.

N115 Z110. M0 ; The tool rises to the top of the workpiece, and the program stops with M00. Adjust the tool if required.

N116 X-200. ; M3 ;

Preparation for second thread cutting is done.

N117 G04 X5.0 ; Command dwell to stabilize the spindle rotation if necessary.

N118 G33 Z40. ; The second thread cutting is executed.

Z

X Y

X

10 50 10

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.6 Thread Cutting

61

6.6.2 Inch Thread Cutting ; G33

Function and purpose

If the number of ridges per inch in the long axis direction is assigned in the G33 command, the feed of the tool

synchronized with the spindle rotation will be controlled, which means that constant-lead straight thread-

cutting and tapered thread-cutting can be performed.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The number of ridges in the long axis direction is assigned as the number of ridges per inch.

(2) The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length, and whether the number of ridges or

precision lead length is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting. (The number of ridges is

designated by setting the parameter «#8156 Fine thread cut E» to «0».)

(3) The E command value should be set within the lead value range when converted to lead.

(4) See Section «Constant lead thread cutting» for other details.

G33 Z__ (X_ Y_ _) E__ Q__ ; … Inch thread cutting

Z (X Y ) End point of thread cutting

E Number of ridges per inch in direction of long axis (axis which moves most) (decimal point command can also be assigned)

Q Thread cutting start shift angle, 0 to 360

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

62

Program example

Thread lead ….. 3 threads/inch (= 8.46666 …)

When programmed with 1= 10 mm, 2=10 mm using metric input

N210 G90 G0 X-200. Y-200. S50 M3 ;

N211 Z110. ;

N212 G91 G33 Z-70. E3.0 ; (First thread cutting)

N213 M19 ;

N214 G90 G0 X-210. ;

N215 Z110. M0 ;

N216 X-200. ; M3 ;

N217 G04 X2.0 ;

N218 G91 G33 Z-70. ; (Second thread cutting)

Z

XY

X

1 50.0mm

2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03

63

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03

Function and purpose

This function is for circularly interpolating 2 axes on the selected plane and simultaneously interpolating the

other axis linearly in synchronization with the circular motion.

When this interpolation is performed with 3 orthogonal axes, the tool will travel helically.

3-dimentional path XY plane path (projection path)

(a) Program command path

(b) XY plane projection path in command program

(S) Start point

(E) End point

X

Y

Z

(a)

(b)

(S)

(E) j

Y

X

i

(E)

(S)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

64

Command format

Either an absolute value or incremental value can be used for the arc end point coordinate value command

and the linear axis end point coordinate value command, but the arc center coordinate value must always be

commanded with an incremental value from the start point.

The arc center coordinate value and arc radius value are commanded with a program command unit. Caution

is required for the helical interpolation command of an axis for which the program command unit (#1015 cunit)

differs.

Command with a decimal point to avoid confusion.

G17/G18/G19 G02/G03 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ P__ F__ ; … Helical interpolation command (Specify arc center)

G17/G18/G19 G02/G03 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ F__ ; … Helical interpolation command (Specify radius (R))

G17/G18/G19 Arc plane (G17: X-Y plane, G18: Z-X plane, G19: Y-Z plane)

G02/G03 Arc rotation direction (G02: clockwise, G03: counterclockwise)

X, Y Arc end point coordinates

Z Linear axis end point coordinates

I, J Arc center coordinates

P Number of pitches

R Arc radius

F Feedrate

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03

65

Detailed description

Speed designation during the helical interpolation

Normally, the helical interpolation speed is designated with the tangent speed F’ including the 3rd axis

interpolation element as shown in the lower drawing. However, when designating the arc plane element

speed, the tangent speed F on the arc plane is commanded as shown in the upper drawing.

The NC automatically calculates the helical interpolation tangent speed F’ so that the tangent speed on the

arc plane is F.

The arc plane element speed designation and normal speed designation can be selected with the parameter.

(S) Start point

(E) End point

#1235 set07/bit0 Meaning

1 Arc plane element speed designation is selected.

0 Normal speed designation is selected.

Y

Z

X

F’

F

Y

X (S)

(E)

(S)

(E)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

66

Normal speed designation

(1) This command should be issued with a linear axis (multiple axes can be commanded) that does not

contain a circular axis in the circular interpolation command combined.

(2) For feedrate F, command the X, Y and Z axis composite element directions speed.

(3) Pitch L is obtained with the following expression.

xs, ys are the start point coordinates from the arc center

xe, ye are the end point coordinates from the arc center

(4) If pitch No. is 0, address P can be omitted.

(Note) The pitch No. P command range is 0 to 9999.

The pitch No. designation (P command) cannot be made with the R-specified arc.

(S) Start point (E) End point

Y

X

e

s

P

2

1

Z

L

Z

Y

X

(E)

(S)

L =

= e — s = tan — 1 — tan — 1 ( )0 < 2 ysye

xsxe

(2 P + )/2 Z

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03

67

(5) Plane selection

The helical interpolation arc plane selection is determined with the plane selection mode and axis

address as for the circular interpolation. For the helical interpolation command, the plane where circular

interpolation is executed is commanded with the plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19), and the 2

circular interpolation axes and linear interpolation axis (axis that intersects with circular plane) 3 axis

addresses are commanded.

XY plane circular, Z axis linear

Command the X, Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 (G03) and G17 (plane selection G code) mode.

ZX plane circular, Y axis linear

Command the X, Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 (G03) and G18 (plane selection G code) mode.

YZ plane circular, X axis linear

Command the X, Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 (G03) and G19 (plane selection G code) mode.

The plane for an additional axis can be selected as with circular interpolation.

UY plane circular, Z axis linear

Command the U, Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 (G03) and G17 (plane selection G code) mode.

In addition to the basic command methods above, the command methods described in the following

program example can be used. Refer to the section «Plane Selection; G17,G18,G19» for the arc planes

selected with these command methods.

Arc plane element speed designation

If arc plane element speed designation is selected, the F command will be handled as modal data in the same

manner as the normal F command. This will also apply to the following G01, G02 and G03 commands.

(Example)

When the arc plane element speed designation is selected, only the helical interpolation speed command is

converted to the speed commanded with the arc plane element. The other linear and arc commands operate

as normal speed commands.

(1) The actual feedrate display (Fc) indicates the tangent element of the helical interpolation.

(2) The modal value speed display (FA) indicates the command speed.

(3) The speed data acquired with API functions follows the Fc and FA display.

(4) This function is valid only when feed per minute (asynchronous feed:G94) is selected. If feed per

revolution (synchronous feed: G95) is selected, the arc plane element speed will not be designated.

(5) The helical interpolation option is required to use this function.

G17 G91 G02 X10. Y10. Z-4. I10. F100 ; Helical interpolation at speed at which arc plane element is F100

G01 X20. ; Linear interpolation at F100

G02 X10. Y-10. Z4. J10. ; Helical interpolation at speed at which arc plane element is F100

G01 Y-40. F120; Linear interpolation at F120

G02 X-10. Y-10. Z-4. I-10. ; Helical interpolation at speed at which arc plane element is F120

G01 X-20. ; Linear interpolation at F120

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

68

Program example

(Example 1)

(Note) If pitch No. is 0, address P can be omitted.

(Example 2)

(Example 3)

G17 ; XY plane

G03 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 P0 Ff1; XY plane arc, Z axis linear

G17 ; XY plane

G02 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1; XY plane arc, Z axis linear

G17 G03 Uu1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 P2 Ff1; UY plane arc, Z axis linear

z1

Z

Y

X

z1 r1

Z

Y

X

z1

Z

Y

U

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.7 Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03

69

(Example 4)

(Note) If the same system is used, the standard axis will perform circular interpolation and the additional

axis will perform linear interpolation.

(Example 5)

(Note) Two or more axes can be designated for the linear interpolation axis.

G18 G03 Xx1 Uu1 Zz1 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1; ZX plane arc, U axis linear

G18 G02 Xx1 Uu1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Ff1; ZX plane arc, U axis, Y axis linear (The J command is ignored)

u1

z1

x1

Z

XU

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

70

6.8 Unidirectional Positioning ; G60

Function and purpose

The G60 command can position the tool at a high degree of precision without backlash error by locating the

final tool position from a constant direction.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The creep distance for the final positioning as well as the final positioning direction is set by parameter.

(2) After the tool has moved at the rapid traverse rate to the position separated from the final position by an

amount equivalent to the creep distance, it moves to the final position in accordance with the rapid

traverse setting where its positioning is completed.

G60 X__ Y__ Z__ __; … Unidirectional positioning

Additional axis

(S) Start point

(E) End point

(ST) Stop once

(PP) Positioning position

(FD) Final advance direction

(CD) G60 creep distance

G60a

G60 — a

+-

(PP)

(S)

(E)

(ST)

(S)

(FD)

(CD)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.8 Unidirectional Positioning ; G60

71

(3) The above positioning operation is performed even when Z axis commands have been assigned for Z

axis cancel and machine lock. (Display only)

(4) When the mirror image function is ON, the tool will move in the opposite direction as far as the

intermediate position due to the mirror image function but the operation within the creep distance during

its final advance will not be affected by mirror image.

(5) The tool moves to the end point at the dry run speed during dry run when the G0 dry run function is valid.

(6) Feed during creep distance movement with final positioning can be stopped by resetting, emergency

stop, interlock, feed hold and rapid traverse override zero.

The tool moves over the creep distance at the rapid traverse setting. Rapid traverse override is valid.

(7) Unidirectional positioning is not performed for the drilling axis during drilling fixed cycles.

(8) Unidirectional positioning is not performed for shift amount movements during the fine boring or back

boring fixed cycle.

(9) Normal positioning is performed for axes whose creep distance has not been set by parameter.

(10) Unidirectional positioning is always a non-interpolation type of positioning.

(11) When the same position (movement amount of zero) has been commanded, the tool moves back and

forth over the creep distance and is positioned at its original position from the final advance direction.

(12) Program error (P61) will occur when the G60 command is assigned with an NC system which has not

been provided with this particular specification.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

72

6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1

Function and purpose

This function develops a shape on the side of a cylinder (shape in a cylindrical coordinate system) into a

plane. When the developed shape is programmed as the plane coordinates, it will be converted into a linear

axis movement and rotary axis movement in the cylindrical coordinates to conduct a contour control when

machining.

As programming can be carried out to the developed shape of the side of the cylinder, this is effective for

machining cylindrical cams, etc. When programmed with the rotary axis and its orthogonal axis, grooves and

other shapes can be machined on the side of the cylinder.

Command format

G07.1 C__ ; … Cylindrical interpolation mode start/cancel

C Cylinder radius value (When rotary axis name is «C») — Radius value 0: Cylindrical interpolation mode start — Radius value = 0: Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

r

B

Z

X Y

0

360

2 r

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1

73

Detailed description

(1) The coordinate commands in the interval from the start to cancellation of the cylindrical interpolation

mode will be the cylindrical coordinate system.

(2) G107 can be used instead of G07.1.

(3) Command G07.1 is an independent block. A program error (P33) will occur if this command is issued in

the same block as other G codes.

(4) Program the rotary axis with an angle degree.

(5) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be commanded during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

Note that the plane selection command must be issued just before the G07.1 block.

(6) The coordinate commands can be both an absolute command or incremental command.

(7) Tool radius compensation can be applied on the program command. Cylindrical interpolation will be

executed to the path after it has gone through a tool radius compensation.

(8) Command the tangent speed on the developed cylinder by F. F is in mm/min or inch/min unit.

Cylindrical interpolation accuracy

In the cylindrical interpolation mode, the movement amount of the rotary axis commanded with an angle is

converted into distance on a circle periphery, and after calculating the linear and circular interpolation

between the other axes, the amount is converted into an angle again.

Thus, the actual movement amount may differ from the commanded value such as when the cylinder radius is

small. Note that the gap generated by this will not be cumulated.

Related parameters

#1516 mill_ax (Milling axis name)

#8111 Milling Radius

#1267 ext03/bit0 (G code type)

#1270 ext06/bit7 (Handling of C axis coordinate during cylindrical interpolation)

G07.1 C Cylinder radius value; Cylindrical interpolation mode start (Cylindrical interpolation will start)

: : :

(The coordinate commands in this interval will be the cylindrical coordinate system)

G07.1 C0 ; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel (Cylindrical interpolation will be canceled)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

74

Plane selection

The axis used for cylindrical interpolation must be set with the plane selection command. (Note)

Use parameters (#1029, #1030 and #1031) to set which parallel axis corresponds to the rotary axis.

The circular interpolation and tool radius compensation, etc., can be designated on that plane.

The plane selection command is set immediately before or after the G07.1 command. If a movement

command is issued without this command, a program error (P485) will occur.

When the axis address is commanded while selecting the plane, the axis will travel. To prevent the axis from

traveling, command the address with the incremental value.

(Note) Depending on the model or version, the Z-C plane (Y-Z cylindrical plane) will be automatically

selected with G07.1 and G19.

The circular interpolation and tool radius compensation, etc., can be designated on that plane.

(Example)

G19 Z0. C0. ; …………….. Plane selection command for cylindrical interpolation, and 2-axis command of Z axis and C axis for interpolation

G07.1 C100. ; …………….. Cylindrical interpolation start

:

G07.1 C0 ; …………….. Cylindrical interpolation cancel

Basic coordinate system X,Y,Z

Cylindrical coordinate system C , Y , Z (Rotary axis is X axis’ parallel axis) #1029

Cylindrical coordinate system X , C , Z (Rotary axis is Y axis’ parallel axis) #1030

Cylindrical coordinate system X , Y , C (Rotary axis is Z axis’ parallel axis) #1031

Basic coordinate system X,Y,Z

Cylindrical coordinate system

G17

Y

X

G18

Z

X

G19

Y

Z

G18

Z

C

G17

C

Y

G19

C

Z

G17

X

C

G18

C

X

G19

Y

C

G17

Y

X

G18

Z

X

G19

Y

Z

Z

C

G19

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1

75

Program example

#1029 aux_I

#1030 aux_J C

#1031 aux_K

N01 G28 XZC ;

N02 T020 ;

N03 G97 S100 M23 ;

N04 G00 X50. Z0. ;

N05 G94 G01 X40. F100. ;

N06 G19 C0 Z0 ; …………. Plane selection command for cylindrical interpolation and two axes command for interpolation

N07 G07.1 C20. ; …………. Cylindrical interpolation start

N08 G41 ;

N09 G01 Z-10. C80. F150 ;

N10 Z-25. C90. ;

N11 Z-80. C225 ;

N12 G03 Z-75.C270. R55. ;

N13 G01 Z-25 ;

N14 G02 Z-20.C280. R80. ;

N15 G01 C360. ;

N16 G40 ;

N17 G07.1 C0 ; …………. Cylindrical interpolation cancel

N18 G01 X50. ;

N19 G0 X100. Z100. ;

N20 M25 ;

N21 M30 ;

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

-20-40-60-80

C

Z

N09N10

N11

N12 N13

N14

N15

(mm)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

76

Relation with other functions

Circular interpolation

(1) Circular interpolation between the rotary axis and linear axis is possible during the cylindrical

interpolation mode.

(2) An R specification command can be issued with circular interpolation. (I, J and K cannot be designated.)

Tool radius compensation

The tool radius can be compensated during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

(1) Command the plane selection in the same manner as circular interpolation.

When using tool radius compensation, start up/cancel the compensation in the cylindrical interpolation

mode.

(2) A program error (P485) will occur if G07.1 is commanded during tool radius compensation.

(3) If the G07.1 command is issued with no movement command after the tool radius compensation is

canceled, the position of the axis in the G07.1 command block is interpreted as the position applied after

the tool radius compensation is canceled and the following operations are performed.

Cutting feed per minute (asynchronous feed)

(1) The feed per minute (asynchronous) mode is forcibly set when the cylindrical interpolation mode is

started.

(2) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled, the feed per revolution (synchronous) will return to

the state before the cylindrical interpolation mode was started.

Constant surface speed control

(1) A program error (P485) will occur if G07.1 is commanded in the constant surface speed control mode

(G96).

Miscellaneous functions

(1) The miscellaneous function (M) and 2nd miscellaneous function can be issued in the cylindrical

interpolation mode.

(2) The S command in the cylindrical interpolation mode specifies the rotary tool’s rotation speed instead of

the spindle rotation speed.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1

77

Tool length compensation

(1) Program error (P481) will occur if tool length compensation is performed in the cylindrical interpolation

mode.

(2) Complete the tool compensation operation (movement of tool length and wear compensation amount)

before executing the cylindrical interpolation.

If the tool compensation operation is not completed when the cylindrical interpolation start command is

issued, the followings will occur:

— The machine coordinate will not change even if G12.1 is executed.

— The workpiece coordinate will change to that of the post tool length compensation when G07.1 is

executed.

(Even if the cylindrical interpolation is canceled, this workpiece coordinate will not be canceled. )

F command during cylindrical interpolation

As for the F command during cylindrical interpolation mode, whether to use the previous F command depends

on the previous mode of the feed per minute command (G94/G98) or feed per rotation command (G95/G99).

(1) When G94 (G98) is commanded just before G07.1

If there is no F command in the cylindrical interpolation, the previous F command feedrate will be used.

After the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled, the F command feedrate set at the start of the

cylindrical interpolation mode or the last F command feedrate set during cylindrical interpolation will

continue to be the feedrate.

(2) When G95 (G99) is commanded just before G07.1

The previous F command feedrate cannot be used during cylindrical interpolation, thus a new F

command must be issued.

After the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled, the feedrate will return to the state before the

cylindrical interpolation mode was started.

When there is no F command in G07.1

When F is commanded in G07.1

:

:

G43 H12 ; … Tool length compensation before cylindrical interpolation -> Valid

G0 X100. Z0. ;

G19 Z C ;

G07.1 C100. ;

:

G43 H11 ; … Tool length compensation in cylindrical interpolation mode -> Program error

:

G07.1 C0 ;

Previous mode No F command After G07.1 is canceled

G94 (G98) Previous F is used <-

G95 (G99) Program error (P62) F just before G07.1 is used

Previous mode With F command After G07.1 is canceled

G94 (G98) Commanded F is used <-

G95 (G99) Commanded F is used *1 F just before G07.1 is used

*1) Moves with the feed per minute command during G07.1.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

78

Restrictions and precautions

(1) The following G code commands can be used during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

A program error will occur if a G code other than those listed above is commanded during cylindrical

interpolation.

(2) The cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled when the power is turned ON or reset.

(3) A program error (P484) will occur if any axis commanded during cylindrical interpolation has not

completed the reference position return.

(4) Tool radius compensation must be canceled before canceling the cylindrical interpolation mode.

(5) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled and switched to the cutting mode, the plane selected

before the cylindrical interpolation will be restored.

(6) Program cannot be restarted (program restart) when the block is in the cylindrical interpolation.

(7) A program error (P486) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation command is issued during the mirror

image.

(8) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is started or canceled, the deceleration check is performed.

(9) A program error (P481) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation or the polar coordinate interpolation is

commanded during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

G code Details

G00 Positioning

G01 Linear interpolation

G02 Circular interpolation (CW)

G03 Circular interpolation (CWW)

G04 Dwell

G09 Exact stop check

G40-42 Tool radius compensation

G61 Exact stop mode

G64 Cutting mode

G65 Macro call (simple call)

G66 Macro modal call (modal call)

G66.1 Macro modal call (block call per macro)

G67 Macro modal call cancel (modal call cancel)

G80-89 Fixed cycle for drilling

G90/91 Absolute/incremental value command

G94 Asynchronous feed

G98 Hole drilling cycle initial return

G99 Hole drilling cycle R point return

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113

79

6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113

Function and purpose

This function converts the commands programmed with the orthogonal coordinate axis into linear axis

movement (tool movement) and rotary axis movement (workpiece rotation), and controls the contour.

The plane that uses the linear axis as the plane’s 1st orthogonal axis, and the intersecting hypothetical axis as

the plane’s 2nd axis (hereafter «polar coordinate interpolation plane») is selected. Polar coordinate

interpolation is carried out on this plane. The workpiece coordinate system zero point is used as the

coordinate system zero point during polar coordinate interpolation.

This is effective for cutting a notch in a linear line to the external diameter of the workpiece, for cutting cam

shafts and etc.

Command format

(a) Linear axis

(b) Rotation axis (hypothetical axis)

(c) Polar coordinate interpolation plane (G17 plane)

G12.1; … Polar coordinate interpolation mode start

G13.1; … Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel

X

C

Z

(c)

(a)

(b)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

80

Detailed description

(1) The coordinate commands in the interval from the start to cancellation of the polar coordinate

interpolation mode will be the polar coordinate interpolation.

(2) G112 and G113 can be used instead of G12.1 and G13.1.

(3) Command G12.1 and G13.1 in an independent block. A program error (P33) will occur if this command

is issued in the same block as other G codes.

(4) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation

mode.

(5) The coordinate commands can be both an absolute command or incremental command.

(6) Tool radius compensation can be applied on the program command. Polar coordinate interpolation will

be executed to the path after it has gone through a tool radius compensation.

(7) Command the tangent speed in the polar coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal coordinate system)

by F. F is in mm/min or inch/min unit.

(8) When the G12.1/G13.1 command is issued, the deceleration check is executed.

Plane selection

The linear axis and rotary axis used for polar coordinate interpolation must be set beforehand with

parameters.

(1) Determine the deemed plane for carrying out polar coordinate interpolation with the parameter (#1533) of

the linear axis used for polar coordinate interpolation.

(2) A program error (P485) will occur if the plane selection command (G17 to G19) is issued during the polar

coordinate interpolation mode.

(Note) Depending on the model or version, parameter (#1533) may not be provided. In this case, the

operation will be the same as when the parameter (#1533) is blank (no setting).

Related parameters

#1516 mill_ax (Milling axis name)

#1517 mill_c (Milling interpolation hypothetical axis name)

#8111 Milling Radius

#1533 millPax (Pole coordinate linear axis name)

G12.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode start (Polar coordinate interpolation will start)

: : :

(The coordinate commands in this interval will be the polar coordinate interpolation)

G13.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel (Polar coordinate interpolation is canceled)

#1533 setting value Deemed plane

X G17 (XY plane)

Y G19 (YZ plane)

Z G18 (ZX plane)

Blank (no setting) G17 (XY plane)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113

81

Program example

Hypothetical C axis

Hypothetical C axis

Tool

Path after tool radius compensation

Program path

: :

N01 G17 G90 G0 X40.0 C0 Z0; Setting of start position

N02 G12.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode: Start

N03 G1 G42 X20.0 F2000; Actual machining start

N04 C10.0; N05 G3 X10.0 C20.0 R10.0;

N06 G1 X-20.0; Shape program

N07 C-10.0;

N08 G3 X-10.0 C-20.0 I10.0 J0; (Follows orthogonal coordinate values on X-C hypothetical axis plane.)

N09 G1 X20.0; N10 C0; N11 G40 X40.0;

N12 G13.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode: Cancel

: : M30 ;

X

Z

C

N04

N05N06

N07

N08 N09

N10

N01 N02 N11

N03

C

X

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

82

Relation with other functions

Program commands during polar coordinate interpolation

(1) The program commands in the polar coordinate interpolation mode are issued by the orthogonal

coordinate value of the linear axis and rotary axis (hypothetical axis) on the polar coordinate interpolation

plane.

The axis address of the rotary axis (C) is specified as the axis address for the plane’s 2nd axis

(hypothetical axis) command.

The command unit is not deg (degree). The same unit (mm or inch) as used for the command by the axis

address of the plane’s 1st axis (linear axis) will be used.

(2) The hypothetical axis coordinate value will be set to «0» when G12.1 is commanded. In other words, the

position where G12.1 is commanded will be interpreted as angle = 0, and the polar coordinate

interpolation will start.

Circular interpolation on polar coordinate plane

The arc radius address for carrying out circular interpolation during the polar coordinate interpolation mode is

determined with the linear axis parameter (#1533).

The arc radius can also be designated with the R command.

(Note) Depending on the model or version, parameter (#1533) may not be provided. In this case, the

operation will be the same as when the parameter (#1533) is blank (no setting).

Tool radius compensation

The tool radius can be compensated during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

(1) Command the plane selection in the same manner as polar coordinate interpolation.

When conducting tool radius compensation, it must be started up and canceled during the polar

coordinate interpolation mode.

(2) A program error (P485) will occur if polar coordinate interpolation is executed during tool radius

compensation.

(3) If the G12.1 and G13.1 commands are issued with no movement command after the tool radius

compensation is canceled, the position of the axis in the G12.1 and G13.1 commands block is

interpreted as the position applied after the tool radius compensation is canceled and the following

operations are performed.

Cutting asynchronous feed

(1) The asynchronous mode is forcibly set when the polar coordinate interpolation mode is started.

(2) When the polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled, the synchronous mode will return to the state

before the polar coordinate interpolation mode was started.

(3) A program error (P485) will occur if G12.1 is commanded in the constant surface speed control mode

(G96).

#1533 setting value Center designation command

X I, J (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

Y J, K (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as YZ plane)

Z K, I (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as ZX plane)

Blank (no setting) I, J (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113

83

Miscellaneous functions

(1) The miscellaneous function (M) and 2nd miscellaneous function can be issued in the polar coordinate

interpolation mode.

(2) The S command in the polar coordinate interpolation mode specifies the rotary tool’s rotation speed

instead of the spindle rotation speed.

Tool length compensation

(1) Program error (P481) will occur if tool length compensation is performed in the polar coordinate

interpolation mode.

(2) Complete the tool compensation operation (movement of tool length and wear compensation amount)

before executing the polar coordinate interpolation.

If the tool compensation operation is not completed when the polar coordinate interpolation start

command has been issued, the followings will occur:

— Machine coordinate will not change even if G12.1 is executed.

— When G12.1 is executed, the workpiece coordinate will change to that of the post tool length

compensation.

(Even if the polar coordinate interpolation is canceled, this workpiece coordinate will not be canceled. )

:

G43 H12 ; … Tool length compensation before polar coordinate interpolation -> Valid

G0 X100. Z0. ; G12.1; :

G43 H11 ; … Tool length compensation in polar coordinate interpolation mode -> Program error

: G13.1;

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

84

F command during polar coordinate interpolation

As for the F command during polar coordinate interpolation mode, whether to use the previous F command

depends on the previous mode of the feed per minute command (G94/G98) or feed per rotation command

(G95/G99).

(1) When G94 (G98) is commanded just before G12.1

If there is no F command in the polar coordinate interpolation, the previous F command feedrate will be

used.

After the polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled, the F command feedrate set at the start of the

polar coordinate interpolation mode or the last F command feedrate set during polar coordinate

interpolation will continue to be the feedrate.

(2) When G95 (G99) is commanded just before G12.1

The previous F command feedrate cannot be used during polar coordinate interpolation. A new F

command must be issued.

The feedrate after the polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled will return to the state before the

polar coordinate interpolation mode was started.

[When there is no F command in G12.1]

[When F is commanded in G12.1]

Hole drilling axis in the fixed cycle for drilling command

Hole drilling axis in the fixed cycle for drilling command during the polar coordinate interpolation is determined

with the linear axis parameter (# 1533).

Shift amount in the G76 (fine boring) or G87 (back boring) command

Shift amount in the G76 (fine boring) or G87 (back boring) command during the polar coordinate interpolation

is determined with the linear axis parameter (#1533).

Previous mode No F command After G13.1

G94 (G98) Previous F is used <-

G95 (G99) Program error (P62) F just before G12.1 is used

Previous mode With F command After G13.1

G94 (G98) Commanded F is used <-

G95 (G99) Commanded F is used *1 F just before G12.1 is used

*1) Moves with the feed per minute command during G12.1.

#1533 setting value Hole drilling axis

X Z (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

Y X (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as YZ plane)

Z Y (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as ZX plane)

Blank (no setting) Z (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

#1533 setting value Center designation command

X I, J (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

Y J, K (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as YZ plane)

Z K, I (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as ZX plane)

Blank (no setting) I, J (polar coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/G112,G113

85

Restrictions and precautions

(1) The following G code commands can be used during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.

A program error (P481) may occur if a G code other than those listed above is commanded during polar

coordinate interpolation.

(2) Program cannot be restarted (program restart) when the block is in the cylindrical interpolation.

(3) Before commanding polar coordinate interpolation, set the workpiece coordinate system so that the

center of the rotary axis is at the coordinate system zero point. Do not change the coordinate system

during the polar coordinate interpolation mode. (G50, G52, G53, relative coordinate reset, G54 to G59,

etc.)

(4) The feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation will be the interpolation speed on the polar coordinate

interpolation plane (orthogonal coordinate system).

(The relative speed with the tool will vary according to the polar coordinate conversion.)

When passing near the center of the rotary axis on the polar coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal

coordinate system), the rotary axis side feedrate after polar coordinate interpolation will be very high.

(5) The axis movement command outside of the plane during polar coordinate interpolation will move

unrelated to the polar coordinate interpolation.

(6) The current position displays during polar coordinate interpolation will all indicate the actual coordinate

value. However, the «remaining movement amount» indicates the movement amount on the polar

coordinate input plane.

(7) The polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled when the power is turned ON or reset.

(8) A program error (P484) will occur if any axis commanded during polar coordinate interpolation has not

completed the reference position return.

(9) Tool radius compensation must be canceled before canceling the polar coordinate interpolation mode.

(10) When the polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled and switched to the cutting mode, the plane

selected before the polar coordinate interpolation will be restored.

(11) A program error (P486) will occur if the polar coordinate interpolation command is issued during the

mirror image.

(12) A program error (P481) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation or the polar coordinate interpolation is

commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.

(13) During polar coordinate interpolation, if X axis moveable range is controlled in the plus side, X axis has to

be moved to the plus area that includes «0» and above before issuing the polar coordinate interpolation

command. If X axis moveable range is controlled in the minus side, X axis has to be moved to the minus

area that does not include «0» before issuing the polar coordinate interpolation command.

G code Details

G00 Positioning

G01 Linear interpolation

G02 Circular interpolation (CW)

G03 Circular interpolation (CWW)

G04 Dwell

G09 Exact stop check

G40-42 Tool radius compensation

G61 Exact stop mode

G64 Cutting mode

G65 Macro call (simple call)

G66 Macro modal call (modal call)

G66.1 Macro modal call (block call per macro)

G67 Macro modal call cancel (modal call cancel)

G80-89 Fixed cycle for drilling

G90/91 Absolute/incremental value command

G94 Asynchronous feed

G98 Hole drilling cycle initial return

G99 Hole drilling cycle R point return

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

86

6.11 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3

Function and purpose

Exponential function interpolation changes the rotary axis into an exponential function shape in respect to the

linear axis movement.

At this time, the other axes carry out linear interpolation between the linear axis.

This allows a machining of a taper groove with constant torsion angle (helix angle) (uniform helix machining of

taper shape).

This function can be used for slotting or grinding a tool for use in an end mill, etc.

— Uniform helix machining of taper shape

— Relation of linear axis and rotary axis

Torsion angle : J1 = J2 = J3

A : A axis (rotary axis)

X : X axis (linear axis)

A : A axis (rotary axis)

X : X axis (linear axis)

* : {B, C… constant}

J1 J2 J3

(G02.3/G03.3)

(G00)

(G01) (G01)

A

Z

X

X=B(eCA-1)

A

X *

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.11 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3

87

Command format

(Note 1) Designate the end point of the linear axis specified by parameter «#1514 expLinax» and the axis that

carries out linear interpolation between that axis.

If the end point on of the rotary axis designated with parameter «#1515 expRotax» is specified,

linear interpolation without exponential function interpolation will take place.

(Note 2) The command unit is as follows.

The command range is -89 to +89.

A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address I or J command.

A program error (P35) will occur if the address I or J command value is 0.

(Note 3) The command unit is as follows.

The command range is a positive value that does not include 0.

A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address R command.

A program error (P35) will occur if the address R command value is 0.

(Note 4) The command unit and command range is the same as the normal F code. (Command as per

minute feed. )

Command the composite feedrate that includes the rotary axis.

The normal F modal value will not change by the address F command.

A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address F command.

A program error (P35) will occur if the address F command value is 0.

(Note 5) The command unit is as follows.

The command unit and command range is the same as the normal F code.

Command the composite feedrate that includes the rotary axis.

The normal F modal value will not change by the address Q command.

The axis will interpolate between the initial speed (F) and end speed (Q) in the CNC according to

the linear axis.

If there is no address Q command, interpolation will take place with the same value as the initial

feedrate (address F command). (The start point and end point feedrates will be the same.)

A program error (P35) will occur if the address Q command value is 0.

G02.3 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1 Qq1 Kk1 ; … Forward rotation interpolation (modal)

G03.3 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1 Qq1 Kk1 ; … Negative rotation interpolation (modal)

X X axis end point (Note 1)

Y Y axis end point (Note 1)

Z Z axis end point (Note 1)

I Angle i1 (Note 2)

J Angle j1 (Note 2)

R Constant value r1 (Note 3)

F Initial feedrate (Note 4)

Q Feedrate at end point (Note 5)

K Command will be ignored.

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D #1003 = E

(Unit = ) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D #1003 = E Unit

Metric system 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 mm

Inch system 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 inch

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D #1003 = E Unit

Metric system 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 mm

Inch system 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 inch

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

88

— Example of uniform helix machining of taper shape

Detailed description

Relational expression of exponential function

The exponential function relational expression of the linear axis (X) and rotary axis (A) in the G02.3/G03.3

command is defined in the following manner.

X() = r1 * (e/D — 1) / tan(i1) …(linear axis (X) movement (1))

A() = (-1) * 360 * / (2) …(rotary axis (A) movement)

However,

D = tan (j1) / tan (i1)

= 0 during forward rotation (G02.3), and = 1 during reverse rotation (G03.3).

is the rotation angle (radian) from the rotary axis’ start point

The rotary axis’ rotation angle () is as follows according to expression (1).

= D * 1n(X * tan(i1) / r1) + 1

A : A axis (rotary axis)

X : X axis (linear axis)

x0 : linear axis start point

i1

j1 x1x0

r1

ZZ

A X

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.11 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3

89

Machining example

— Uniform helix machining of taper shape

Z() = r1 *(e/D-1)* tan(p1) / tan(i1) + z0 …(1)

X() = r1 *(e/D-1)/ tan(i1) …(2)

A() = (-1) * 360 * / (2)

D = tan (j1) / tan (i1)

Z() : Absolute value from zero point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates with linear axis (X axis))

X() : Absolute value from X axis (linear axis) start point

A() : Absolute value from A axis (rotary axis) start point

r1 : Exponential function interpolation constant value (address R command)

r2 : Workpiece left edge radius

x2 : X axis (linear axis) position at workpiece left edge

x1 : X axis (linear axis) end point (address X command)

x0 : X axis (linear axis) start point (Set as «x0 <= x1» so that workpiece does not interfere with tool)

z1 : End point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates between interval with linear axis (X axis)) (address Z

command)

z0 : Start point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates between interval with linear axis (X axis))

i1 : Taper gradient angle (address I command)

p1 : Slot base gradient angle

j1 : Torsion angle (helix angle) (address J command)

: Torsion direction (0: forward rotation, 1: reverse direction)

: Workpiece rotation angle (radian)

f1 : Initial feedrate (address F command)

q1 : Feedrate at end point (address Q command)

k1 : Insignificant data (address K command)

According to expressions (1) and (2):

Z() = X() * tan(p1) + z0 …(3)

According to expression (3), the slot base gradient angle (p1) is determined from the X axis and Z axis end

point positions (x1, z1).

The Z axis movement amount is determined by the slot base gradient angle (p1) and X axis position.

In the above diagram, the exponential function interpolation’s constant value (r1) is determined with the

following expression using the workpiece left edge radius (r2), X axis start point (x0), X axis position at

workpiece left edge (x2) and taper gradient angle (i1).

r1 = r2 -(x2 — x0) * tan(i1)

The taper gradient angle (i1) and torsion angle (j1) are set by the command address I and J, respectively.

Note that if the shape is a reverse taper shape, the taper gradient angle (i1) is issued as a negative value.

The torsion direction () is changed by the G code. (Forward rotation when G02.3 is commanded, negative

rotation when G03.3 is commanded)

The above settings allow uniform helix machining of a taper shape (or reverse taper shape).

i1

j1 x1x0 x2

p1

r1r2

z1

z2 z0 A

X

Z

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

90

Command and operation

(E) End point

(S) Start point

G2.3(Equivalent to G3.3 if j1<0)

X movement direction > 0 X movement direction < 0

i1 > 0 i1 < 0 i1 > 0 i1 < 0

C o

m m

an d

O p

er at

io n

M ac

h in

in g

p ro

g ra

m ex

am p

le

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X100. Z100.; N30 G2.3 X100. Z100. I50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X100. Z200.; N30 G2.3 X100. Z-100. I-50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z100.; N30 G2.3 X-100. Z100. I50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z200.; N30 G2.3 X-100. Z-100. I-50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

G3.3(Equivalent to G2.3 if j1<0)

X movement direction > 0 X movement direction < 0

i1 > 0 i1 < 0 i1 > 0 i1 < 0

C o

m m

a n

d O

p er

at io

n M

ac h

in in

g p

ro g

ra m

e xa

m p

le

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X100. Z100.; N30 G3.3 X100. Z100. I50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X100. Z200.; N30 G3.3 X100. Z-100. I-50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z100.; N30 G3.3 X-100. Z100. I50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

N10 G28XYZC; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z200.; N30 G3.3 X-100. Z-100. I-50. J80. R105. F500.; N40 M30;

i1

X

Z

j1

r1

(S)

(E) —

X

Z +

j1

i1

r1

(S) (E)

X

Z

j1

i1

r1

(S)

(E)

X

Z+ —

j1

i1

r1

(S) (E)

X

A

X

A

X

A

X

A

X

Z

j1

i1

r1

(S)

(E) —

X

Z +

j1

i1

r1

(S) (E)

X

Z

j1

i1

r1

(S)

(E)

X

Z+ —

j1

i1

r1

(S)

(E)

X

A

X

A

X

A

X

A

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.11 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3

91

Precautions

(1) When G02.3/G03.3 is commanded, interpolation takes place with the exponential function relational

expression using the start position of the linear axis and rotary axis as 0.

(2) Linear interpolation will take place in the following cases, even if in the G02.3/G03.3 mode.

The feedrate for linear interpolation will be the F command in that block. (Note that the normal F modal is

not updated.)

— The linear axis designated with the parameter (#1514 expLinax) is not commanded, or the movement

amount for that axis is 0.

— The rotary axis designated with the parameter (#1515 expRotax) is commanded.

(3) A program error will occur if the following commands are issued during the G02.3/G03.3 mode. A

program error will also occur if G02.3 or G03.3 command is issued in the following modes.

— Tool length compensation (A program error will occur only when the compensation starts at the same

time as the movement by exponential function interpolation. The tool length compensation will operate

normally if it has started before the G02.3/G03.3 mode starts.

— Tool radius compensation

— High-speed high-accuracy control

— High-speed machining

— Scaling

— Tool length compensation along tool axis

— Figure rotation

— Coordinate rotation by program

— Coordinate rotation by parameter

— 3-dimentional coordinate conversion

(4) A program error (P481) will occur if commands are issued during the polar coordinate interpolation,

cylindrical interpolation or milling interpolation modes.

(5) Program error (P612) will occur if commands are issued during the scaling or mirror image.

(6) Program error (P34) will occur if commands are issued during the high-speed high-accuracy control II.

(7) G02.3/G03.3 will function with asynchronous feed even during the synchronous feed mode, and the

synchronous feed mode will be canceled.

(8) If the parameter «#1515 expRota» setting is the same axis name as the initial C axis, the axis selected

with the C axis selection signal will be interpolated as the rotary axis.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

92

6.12 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15

Function and purpose

With this function, the end point coordinate value is commanded with the polar coordinate of the radius and

angle.

Command format

G16 ; … Polar coordinate command mode ON

G15 ; … Polar coordinate command mode OFF

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.12 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15

93

Detailed description

(1) The polar coordinate command is applied in the interval from turning ON to OFF of the polar coordinate

command mode.

(2) The plane selection during the polar coordinate command mode is carried out with G17, G18 and G19.

(3) The polar coordinate command is a modal. The polar coordinate command mode when the power is

turned ON is off (G15). Whether to initialize the modal at reset or not can be selected with the parameter

(#1210 RstGmd/bit 11) setting.

(4) During polar coordinate command mode, command the radius with the 1st axis for the selected plane,

and the angle with the 2nd axis. For example, when the X-Y plane is selected, command the radius with

the address «X», and the angle with the address «Y».

(5) For the angle, the counterclockwise direction of the selected plane is positive and the clockwise direction

is negative.

(6) The radius and angle can be commanded with both the absolute value (G90) and incremental value

(G91).

(7) When the radius is commanded with the absolute value, command the distance from the zero point in the

workpiece coordinate system (note that when the local coordinate system is set, command the distance

in the local coordinate system).

(8) When the radius is commanded with the incremental value command, considering the end point of the

previous block as the polar coordinate center, command the incremental value from that end point. The

angle is commanded with the incremental value of the angle from the previous block.

(9) When the radius is commanded with the negative value, the same operation as the command that the

radius command value is changed to the absolute value and 180 is added to the angle command value.

G1x ; Plane selection for polar coordinate command (G17/G18/G19)

G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON

G9x G01 Xx1 Yy1 F2000 ; :

Polar coordinate command G9x : Center selection for polar coordinate command (G90/G91) G90 : The workpiece coordinate system zero point is the polar coordinate center. G91 : The present position is the polar coordinate center. x1 : 1st axis for the plane : The radius of the polar coordinate commanded y1 : 2nd axis for the plane : The angle of the polar coordinate commanded

G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF

(CP) Current position (IP) Commanded position

For G90/G17 (X-Y plane)

y1

x1

X

Y

(IP)

(CP)

+

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

94

Command position

(1) When the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system is applied to the polar coordinate center

The zero point in the workpiece coordinate system is applied to the polar coordinate center by

commanding the radius value with the absolute value.

Note that the zero point in the local coordinate system is applied to the polar coordinate center if the local

coordinate system (G52) is used.

(2) When the present position is applied to the polar coordinate center

The present position is applied to the polar coordinate center by commanding the radius value with the

incremental value.

When the angle is the absolute value command When the angle is the incremental value command

When the angle is the absolute value command When the angle is the incremental value command

(CP) Current position (IP) Command position (a) Angle (r) Radius

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r) (a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.12 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15

95

(3) When the radius value command is omitted

When the radius value command is omitted, the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system is applied

to the polar coordinate center, and the distance between the polar coordinate center and current position

is regarded as the radius. Note that the zero point in the local coordinate system is applied to the polar

coordinate center if the local coordinate system (G52) is used.

(4) When the angle command is omitted

When the angle command is omitted, the angle of the present position in the workpiece coordinate

system is applied to the angle command.

The zero point in the workpiece coordinate system is applied to the polar coordinate center by

commanding the radius value with the absolute value. Note that the zero point in the local coordinate

system is applied to the polar coordinate center if the local coordinate system (G52) is used.

If the radius value is commanded with the incremental value, the current position is applied to the polar

coordinate center.

When the angle is the absolute value command When the angle is the incremental value command

When the angle is the absolute value command When the angle is the incremental value command

(CP) Current position (IP) Command position (a) Angle (r) Radius

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r) (a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

(IP)

(CP)

(r)

(a)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

96

Axis command not interpreted as polar coordinate command

The axis command with the following command is not interpreted as the polar coordinate command during the

polar coordinate command mode. The movement command that has no axes commands for the 1st axis and

2nd axis in the selected plane mode is also not interpreted as polar coordinate command during the polar

coordinate command mode.

Function G code

Dwell G04

Programmable parameter/Compensation data input G10

Local Coordinate System Setting G52

Machine coordinate system setting G92

Machine coordinate system selection G53

Coordinate rotation by program G68.1

Scaling G51

G command mirror image G62

Reference position check G27

Reference position return G28

Start position return G29

2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return G30

Tool change position return 1 G30.1

Tool change position return 2 G30.2

Tool change position return 3 G30.3

Tool change position return 4 G30.4

Tool change position return 5 G30.5

Tool change position return 6 G30.6

Automatic Tool Length Measurement G37.1

Skip G31

Multi-step skip function 1-1 G31.1

Multi-step skip function 1-2 G31.2

Multi-step skip function 1-3 G31.2

Linear angle command G01 Aa1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.12 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15

97

Program example

When the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system is the polar coordinate zero point

— The polar coordinate zero point is the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system.

— The plane is the X-Y plane.

(1) When the radius and angle are the absolute value command

(2) When the radius is the absolute value command and the angle is the incremental value command

N1 G17 G90 G16 ; Polar coordinate command, X-Y plane selection The polar coordinate zero point is the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system.

N2 G85 X200. Y30. Z-20. F200. ; Radius 200mm, angle 30

N3 Y120. ; Radius 200mm, angle 120

N4 Y270. ; Radius 200mm, angle 270

N5 G15 G80 ; Polar coordinate command cancel

N1 G17 G90 G16 ; Polar coordinate command, X-Y plane selection The polar coordinate zero point is the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system.

N2 G85 X200. Y30. Z-20. F200. ; Radius 200mm, angle 30

N3 G91 Y90. ; Radius 200mm, angle +90

N4 Y150. ; Radius 200mm, angle +150

N5 G15 G80 ; Polar coordinate command cancel

200mm

X

Y

30

120

270

N4

N2

N3

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

98

Precautions

(1) If the following commands are carried out during the polar coordinate command mode, or if the polar

coordinate command is carried out during the following command mode, a program error (P34) will

occur.

(2) When the mirror image (G code/parameter/external signal) is canceled anywhere except at the mirror

image center during the polar coordinate command mode, the absolute value and machine position will

deviate. The mirror center is set with an absolute value, if the mirror center is commanded again in this

state, the center may be set to an unpredictable position. Cancel the mirror image above the mirror

center or, after cancellation, assign a positioning command using absolute value command that the

radius and angle of the polar coordinate command are designated.

Function G code

High-speed high-accuracy control I G05.1 Q1

High speed high accuracy control II G05 P10000

Spline G05.1 Q1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.13 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1), G02/G03(Type2)

99

6.13 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1), G02/G03(Type2)

Function and purpose

This function carries out interpolation that smoothly joins the start and end points in a spiral. This interpolation

is carried out for arc commands in which the start point and end point are not on the same circumference.

There are two types of command formats, and they can be switched with the parameters.

Command format

Circular interpolation operations are carried out at the f1 speed by the commands above.

The path is toward the end point, following a spiral arc path centered at the position designated by distance i

(X axis direction) and distance j (Y axis direction) in respect to the start point.

(1) The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 and G19. (Common for type 1 and 2)

(2) The arc rotation direction is designated by G02.1(G02) or G03.1(G03). (Common for type 1 and 2)

(3) The end point coordinates are designated with XYZ. (Common for type 1 and 2)

(Decimal point command is possible. Use mm (or inch) as the unit.)

When designation of arc plane axes is omitted, the coordinates of the start point are inherited.

If the axis other than arc plane axes is designated, conical interpolation is applied.

G17 G02.1/G03.1 X__ Y__ I__ J__ P__ F__; … Spiral/conical interpolation (Type 1: #1272 ex08/bit2=0)

G17 G02/G03 X__ Y__ I__ J__ Q__/L__/K__ F__; … Spiral/conical interpolation (Type 2: #1272 ex08/ bit2=1)

G17 Arc plane

G02.0/G03.1(Type1) Arc rotation direction (Type 1)

G02/G03(Type2) Arc rotation direction (Type 2)

X Y End point coordinates (Conical Interpolation when the axis other than arc plane axes is included.)

I J Arc center

P (Type 1) Number of pitches (number of spirals) (Type 1)

Q/L/K (Type 2) Incremental-decremental amount of radius /Number of pitches(Number of spirals)/ Increment-decrement amount of height (Type 2)

F Feedrate (tool path direction speed)

G17 XY plane

G18 ZX plane

G19 YZ plane

G02.1/G02 Clockwise (CW)

G03.1/G03 Counterclockwise (CCW)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

100

(4) The arc center is designated with IJK. (Decimal point command is possible. Use mm (or inch) as the

unit.)

I : Incremental designation in the X axis direction from the start point

J : Incremental designation in the Y axis direction from the start point

K : Incremental designation in the Z axis direction from the start point

When either 1 axis of arc plane is omitted, the coordinates of the start point are inherited.

(5) P designates the number of pitches (number of spirals). (Type 1)

The number of pitches and rotations are as shown below.

(6) Q designates the increment/decrement amount of radius per spiral rotation. (Type 2)

The number of spiral rotations when the radius increment/decrement amount is specified can be

calculated with the following expression.

Number of rotations= | (arc end point radius — arc start point radius) | / | increment or decrement amount

of radius |

(7) L designates the number of pitches (number of spirals). (Type 2) (range: 0 to 99)

When omitted, L1 is designated.

The number of pitches and rotations are as shown below.

Q takes precedence over L if both Q and L have been designated at the same time.

(8) K designates the increment or decrement amount of height per spiral rotation in conical interpolation.

(Type 2)

The increment or decrement amount of height is designated with I/J/K for the axis other than arc plane.

The relation between increment or decrement amount of height and the rotation plane is as shown

below.

The number of rotations when the designation of increment or decrement amount of height is specified

can be calculated with the following expression.

Number of rotations = Height / | Increment/decrement amount of height |

If Q, K and L have been designated at the same time, the order of precedence is Q>K>L.

Decimal point command is possible in the range of the increment or decrement amount of radius and

height. Use mm (or inch) as the unit.

Number of pitches (0 to 99) Number of rotations

P0 Less than 1 rotation (Can be omitted.)

P1 1 or more rotation and less than 2 rotations

Pn n or more rotation and less than (n+1) rotations

Number of pitches (0 to 99) Number of rotations

L1 Less than 1 rotation

L2 1 or more rotation and less than 2 rotations

Ln (n-1) or more rotations and less than n rotations

Rotation plane Increment or decrement amount of height

G18 J command

G19 I command

Other than G18/G19 K command

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.13 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1), G02/G03(Type2)

101

Detailed description

(1) The arc rotation direction G02.1 is the same as G02, and G03.1 is the same as G03.

(2) There are no R-designated arcs in spiral interpolation.

(3) Conical cutting, tapered thread-cutting and other such machining operations can be conducted by

changing the start point and end point radius and commanding the linear axis simultaneously.

(4) Normally the spiral interpolation is automatically enabled with the arc commands (G02, G03) when the

difference between the start point radius and the end point radius is less than the parameter setting

value.

(5) The axis combination that can be simultaneously commanded depends on the specifications. The

combination within that range is arbitrary.

(6) The feedrate is the constant tangent speed.

(7) Simultaneous control by combining with tool radius compensation (G41, G42) is not possible.

(8) The arc plane always follows G17, G18 and G19. The plane arc control is carried out by G17, G18 and

G19, even if designated by two addresses that do not match the plane.

(9) Conical interpolation

When an axis designation other than the spiral interpolation plane is simultaneously designated, other

axes are also interpolated in synchronization with the spiral interpolation.

(10) The command such as «G69 G02» or «G69 G03» can be also used for the spiral interpolation.

For details, refer to the section «End point error check cancel; G69».

(11) In the following cases, a program error will occur.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

102

(a) Items common for type 1 and 2

(b) Items for type 2 only

Setting Items Command range (unit) Error

End point coordinates

Range of coordinate command (mm/inch) (Decimal point command is possible.)

— If a value exceeding the command range is issued, a program error (P35) will occur. — If an axis other than one which can be controlled with the command system is commanded, a program error (P33) will occur.

Arc center

Range of coordinate command (mm/inch) (Decimal point command is possible.)

— If a value exceeding the command range is issued, a program error (P35) will occur. — If an axis other than one which can be controlled with the command system is commanded, a program error (P33) will occur. — If rotation plane axis is not designated completely, a program error (P33) will occur.

Number of pitches

0 to 99 — If a value exceeding the command range is issued, a program error (P35) will occur.

Feedrate

Range of speed command (mm/min,inch/min) (Decimal point command is possible.)

— If a value exceeding the command range is issued, a program error (P35) will occur.

Setting Items Command range (unit) Error

Increment or decrement amount of radius

Range of coordinate command (mm/inch) (Decimal point command is possible.)

— If the sign of designated increment or decrement amount is opposite from that of the difference between the start point radius and the end point radius, a program error (P33) will occur. — If the end point position obtained from the speed and increment or decrement amount is larger than «SpiralEndErr (#8075)», a program error (P70) will occur.

Increment or decrement amount of height

Range of coordinate command (mm/inch) (Decimal point command is possible.)

— If the sign of designated increment or decrement amount is opposite from that of the movement direction of height, a program error (P33) will occur. — If the end point position obtained from the speed and increment or decrement amount is larger than «SpiralEndErr (#8075)», a program error (P70) will occur.

G02.1/0G3.1 — Program error (P34) will occur if G02.1/G03.1 are used during type 2.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.13 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1), G02/G03(Type2)

103

Program example

(Example 1)

(Example 2)

(Example 3) In this example, the interpolation is truncated cone interpolation.

Relation with other functions

(1) Items common for type 1 and 2

— As the start point and end point are not on the same arc, a normal line control will not be applied

correctly.

— If there is no center command when geometric is valid, a program error (P33) will occur.

(2) Items for type 2 only

— If the spiral interpolation command is issued during the mirror image, a program error (P34) will occur.

— If the spiral interpolation command is issued during the scaling, a program error (P34) will occur.

— If the spiral interpolation command is issued during the corner chamfering/corner rounding command, a

program error (P33) will occur.

G91 G17 G01 X60. F500 ; Y140. ; G2.1 X60. Y0 I100. P1 F300 ; G01 X-120. ; G90 G17 G01 X60. F500 ; Y140. ; G2.1 X120. Y140. I100. P1 F300 ; G01 X0 ;

(S) Start point (E) End point (C) Center

G91 G17 G01 X60. F500 ;

Y140. ;

G02.1X60.0 Z100.0 I100. P1 F300 ; -> Because this is the G17 plane, arc control is not carried out by X-Z.

G01X-120 ; Arc control is carried out by X-Y.

G17 G91 G02.1 X100.Z150. I150.P3 F500;

XY plane

XZ plane

XW

Y

140.

60. 140.120.

X60.

110.

(S)

(E) (C)

W

Z

Y

X

X

W

Z

X

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

104

6.14 3-dimensional Circular Interpolation ; G02.4,G03.4

Function and purpose

To issue a circular command over a 3-dimensional space, an arbitrary point (intermediate point) must be

designated on the arc in addition to the start point (current position) and end point. By using the 3-dimensional

circular interpolation command, an arc shape determined by the three points (start point, intermediate point,

end point) designated on the 3-dimensional space can be machined.

To use this function, its dedicated option is required. If the option is not provided and the 3-dimensional

circular interpolation command is issued, a program error (P39) will occur.

Command format

(1) The G02.4 and G03.4. operations are the same. (Cannot designate the rotation direction)

(2) The axes used as the reference in 3-dimensional circular interpolation are the three basic axes set with

the parameters.

(3) The X, Y, Z address in the block may be omitted. The intermediate point coordinates omitted in the 1st

block become the start point coordinates, and the end point coordinates omitted in the 2nd block become

the intermediate point coordinates.

(4) When using the 3-dimensional circular interpolation command, an arbitrary axis can be commanded in

addition to the orthogonal coordinate system (X, Y, Z) used as the reference. The arbitrary axis

designated in the intermediate point designating block (1st block) will interpolate to the command point

when moving from the start point to intermediate point. The arbitrary axis designated in the end point

command block (2nd block) will interpolate to the command point when moving from the intermediate

point to the end point. The number of arbitrary axes that can be commanded differs according to the

number of simultaneous contour control axes. The total of the basic three axes used as the reference of

the 3-dimensional circular interpolation and the arbitrary axes commanded simultaneously must be less

than the number of simultaneous contour control axes.

(S) Start point (Current position) (E) End point (C) Intermediate point

G02.4(G03.4) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1 ; Intermediate point designation (1st block) Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 2 ; End point designation (2nd block)

G02.4(G03.4) 3-dimensional circular interpolation command (Cannot designate the rotation direction)

x1, y1, z1 Intermediate point coordinates

x2, y2, z2 End point coordinates

Arbitrary axis other than axis used as the reference (X,Y,Z) in 3-dimensional circular interpolation (Cannot be omitted.)

Z

X

Y

(S)

(C)

(E)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.14 3-dimensional Circular Interpolation ; G02.4,G03.4

105

Detailed description

Designating intermediate point and end point

When using the 3-dimensional circular interpolation command, an arc that exists over the 3-dimensional

space can be determined by designating the intermediate point and end point in addition to the start point

(current position). (Refer to following figure) So according to the command format, it is necessary to designate

an intermediate point in the 1st block and an end point in the 2nd block. If only one block is designated, a

program error (P74) will occur.

Liner interpolation is applied when the end point match the start point in the 3-dimensional circular

interpolation command. (Refer to «When liner interpolation is applied») Thus, a true circle (360-degree

rotation) cannot be designated in the 3-dimensional circular interpolation.

In addition, designate the intermediate point in the middle of a start point and an end point. If the intermediate

point is near the start point or the end point, arc accuracy may fall.

— Designation of arc in 3-dimensional space

As shown in the above figure, when three points (start point, intermediate point, end point) are specified on 3-

dimensional space, arc center coordinates can be obtained. An arc center cannot be obtained if only two

points are specified, and a liner interpolation is applied.

If the intermediate point is near the start point or the end point, an error may occur when calculating arc

center.

(P) Plane including start point, intermediate point and end point (S) Start point (Current position) (E) End point (CP) Intermediate point (C) Center

(E)

(CP)

(S) (C)

(P)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

106

When liner interpolation is applied

In the following case, liner interpolation is applied without executing 3-dimensional circular interpolation.

(1) When the start point, intermediate point, and end point are on the same line (refer to the following figure)

(If the end point exists between the start point and intermediate point, axes move in the order of start

point, intermediate point, and end point.)

(2) When two of the start point, intermediate point and end point match

(Liner interpolation is applied even if the end point matches the start point to command true circle. When

the start point matches the end point, axes move in order of the start point, an intermediate point, and an

end point.)

— When liner interpolation is applied

Modal command

The 3-dimensional circular interpolation command G02.4 (G03.4) is a modal command belonging to 01 group.

Therefore, the command will remain valid until the other G command in the 01 group is issued. When the 3-

dimensional circular interpolation command is carried out continuously, the end point of present command is

the start point of next command.

Start point (Current position)

Intermediate point (Block1)

End point (Block2)

When the three points are on the same line, liner interpolation is applied.

Start point (Current position)

End point (Block2)

Intermediate point (Block1)

Even if the end point exists between the start point and intermediate point, move in the order of start point, intermediate point, and end point.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.14 3-dimensional Circular Interpolation ; G02.4,G03.4

107

Relation with other functions

Commands that cannot be used

G code command which leads to a program error during 3-dimensional circular interpolation modal

G code command which leads to a program error when 3-dimensional circular interpolation is commanded

G code Function name Program error

G05 Pn High speed machining mode P34

G05 P10000 High speed high accuracy control II P34

G05.1 Q0/G05.1 Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I P34

G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation P485

G12/G13 Circular cutting CW/CCW P75

G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation P485

G16 Polar coordinate command P75

G41/G42 Tool radius compensation P75

G41/G42 3-dimensional tool radius compensation P75

G41.1/G42.1 Normal line control P75

G43 Tool length compensation P75

G51 Scaling P75

G51.1, G62 Mirror image on P75

G66/G66.1 User macro P75

G67 User macro P276

G68.1 Coordinate rotation by program P75

G68.1 3-dimensional coordinate conversion P921

G73/G74/G76/G81/G82 G83/G84/G85/G86/G87 G88/G89

Fixed cycle P75

G code modal Function name Program error

G05 Pn High speed machining mode P34

G05 P10000 High speed high accuracy control II P34

G05.1 Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I P34

G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation P481

G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation P481

G16 Polar coordinate command P75

G41/G42 Tool radius compensation P75

G41/G42 3-dimensional tool radius compensation P75

G41.1/G42.1 Normal line control P75

G43 Tool length compensation P75

G51 Scaling P75

G51.1, G62 Mirror image on P75

G66/G66.1 User macro P75

G68.1 Coordinate rotation by program P75

G68.1 3-dimensional coordinate conversion P922

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

108

Functions that cannot be used

If following functions are used in 3-dimensional circular interpolation, alarm will occur.

— Chopping

— Macro interruption

— Mirror image by parameter setting

— Mirror image by external input

— Corner chamfering / corner R

Restrictions may be added for other functions. Refer to explanation of each function.

Precautions

(1) If single block is valid and this command is operated, a block stop is carried out at an intermediate point

and the end point.

(2) The speed command during 3-dimensional circular interpolation is the tangent speed on arc.

(3) When 3-dimensional circular interpolation is commanded while incremental command is valid, the

relative position of the intermediate point in respect to the start point is designated in the intermediate

point designation block, and the relative position of the end point in respect to the intermediate point is

designated in the intermediate point designation block.

(4) The path of 3-dimentional circular interpolation during graphic check is drawn as linear at each range

from start point to intermediate point and from intermediate point to end point.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.15 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2

109

6.15 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2

Function and purpose

This function realizes NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) curve machining by simply commanding

NURBS curve parameters (stage, weight, knot, control point), which is used for the curved surface/line

machining, without replacing the path with minute line segments.

As this function operates only in the high-speed high-accuracy control II mode, the high-speed high-accuracy

control II option is required.

During NURBS interpolation, interpolation takes place at the commanded speed. However, if the curvature is

large, the speed is clamped so that the machine’s tolerable acceleration rate is not exceeded.

Command format

G05 P10000 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control II mode ON

G06.2 Pp Kk1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff;NURBS interpolation ON Kk2 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Rr2; Kk3 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 Rr3; Kk4 Xx4 Yy4 Zz4 Rr4; : Kkn Xxn Yyn Zzn Rrn; Kkn+1; Kkn+2; Kkn+3; Kkn+4;NURBS interpolation OFF

Pp

Set the stage of the NURBS curve. Designate in the same block as G06.2 command. The NURBS curve of the stage p will be (p-1)th curve. When omitted, Pp means the same as P4. (Example) P2: Primary curve (liner)

Kkn

Knot Set the knot for each NURBS interpolation block. Set the same value for the knot in the 1st block to the stage p block. NURBS interpolation is terminated if there is a block exclusively with knot.

Xxn Yyn Zzn Control point coordinate value. Designate the same coordinate value for the 1st block control point as that designated right before NURBS interpolation.

Rrn Control point weight. Set the weight of each NURBS interpolation control point.

Ff Interpolation speed (Can be omitted)

G05 P0 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control II mode OFF

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

110

Detailed description

(1) Designate the stage P for the 1st block of NURBS interpolation.

(2) Designate the same coordinate value for the 1st block control point of NURBS interpolation as that

designated right before NURBS interpolation.

(3) Designate all axes to be used in the subsequent NURBS interpolation blocks for 1st block of NURBS

interpolation.

(4) Set the same value for knot K from the 1st block of NURBS interpolation to setting value block of the

stage P.

(5) Command knot K exclusive block of the same number as the setting value of the stage P for terminating

NURBS interpolation.

At this time, set the same value for knot K setting.

(Note) If an exclusive knot is commanded immediately after NURBS interpolation, NURBS interpolation

mode is active again.

An exclusive knot that is commanded immediately after NURBS interpolation is the same meaning

as following command.

G06.2 Pp Km Xxn Yyn Zzn R1.0

Passes through control point

NURBS interpolation ON

(x3,y3,z3) (x4,y4,z4)

(xn,yn,zn)

(x1,y1,z1)

(x2,y2,z2)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.15 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2

111

Program example

The example of program that has 4 stages (cubic curve) and 11 control points is shown below.

Control point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P 10

Knot 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0

:

:

G05 P10000; High-speed high-accuracy control II mode ON

G90 G01 X0. Y0. Z0. F300 ;

G06.2 P4 X0. Y0. R1. K0 ; P0 NURBS interpolation ON

X1.0 Y2.0 R1. K0 ; P1

X2.5 Y3.5 R1. K0 ; P2

X4.4 Y4.0 R1. K0 ; P3

X6.0 Y0.5 R1. K1 ; P4

X8.0 Y0.0 R1. K2 ; P5

X9.5 Y0.5 R1. K3 ; P6

X11.0 Y2.0 R1. K4 ; P7

X10.5 Y4.5 R1. K5 ; P8

X8.0 Y6.5 R1. K6 ; P9

X9.5 Y8.0 R1. K7 ; P10

K8;

K8;

K8;

K8; NURBS interpolation OFF

G05 P0; High-speed high-accuracy control II mode OFF

:

:

Passes through control point

NURBS interpolation ON

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 P0(0.0,0.0)

P1(1.0,2.0)

P2(2.5,3.5) P3(4.4,4.0)

P4(6.0,0.5) P5(8.0,0.0)

P6(9.5,0.5)

P9(8.0,6.5)

P10(9.5,8.0)

X

Y

P7(11.0,2.0)

P8(10.5,4.5)

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

112

Relation with other functions

G code/Feed/Miscellaneous functions

All the G code, feedrate and MSTB code cannot be set during NURBS interpolation.

However, when the fixed cycle G code is commanded in the same block where G06.2 is commanded, the

fixed cycle G code is ignored.

If a command other than the axis address designated in the 1st block of NURBS interpolation, R and K is

commanded, a program error will occur.

Data format

(1) Optional block skip «/»

Cannot be set in the NURBS interpolation 2nd block or after.

(2) Control IN «(«and Control OUT «)»

Cannot be set in the NURBS interpolation 2nd block or after.

(3) Local variables and common variables

Can be referred but cannot be set in the NURBS interpolation. Setting the variables causes a program

error (P29).

(4) System variables

Cannot be referred nor set in the NURBS interpolation; a program error (P29) will occur.

Interruption/restart

The validity of program interruption/restart is shown below.

(Note 1) A single block stop is carried out at the last control points only.

The single block stop is not applied during NURBS interpolation.

(Note 2) NURBS interpolation mode is canceled with Reset (Reset1/Reset2/Reset&Rewind).

(Note 3) The operation differs according to the manual absolute signal status.

— When the manual absolute signal OFF

NURBS interpolation is carried out in the state where axis-coordinate system is shifted by the

manual absolute movement amount.

— When the manual absolute signal ON

At automatic start after manual interruption, a program error (P554) will occur after moving by the

remaining distance.

Note that the operation can run continually by returning the axis to the original position after manual

interruption.

(Note 4) «Macro interrupt» signal (UIT) is ignored.

(Note 5) «PLC interrupt» signal (PIT) is ignored.

Type During NURBS interpolation

Single block Valid (Note 1)

Feed hold Valid

Reset Valid (Note 2)

Program stop Invalid

Optional stop Invalid

Manual interruption Invalid (Note 3)

MDI interruption Invalid

Restart search Invalid

Macro interruption Invalid (Note 4)

PLC interruption Invalid (Note 5)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.15 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2

113

Graphic check

NURBS interpolation cannot be applied during graphic check (continuous/step check).

Linear interpolation that connects the control points is applied during graphic check.

Precautions

(1) Target axes for NURBS interpolation are 3 basic axes.

(2) Command the control point for all the axes for which NURBS interpolation is carried out in the 1st block

(G06.2 block). A program error (P32) will occur if an axis which was not commanded in the 1st block is

commanded in the 2nd block or after.

(3) The first control point (G06.2 block coordinate value) should be commanded as the start point of the

NURBS curve. Thus, the start point of the NURBS curve should be commanded to match the end point

of the previous block. A program error will occur if the points do not match.

(4) The command range of the weight is 0.0001 to 99.9999. Even if the decimal point is omitted, the value

will be handled as the one with a decimal point. If «1» is commanded, the result will be the same as «1.0».

If more than 5 digits are commanded after the decimal point, a program error (P33) will occur.

(5) The knot command cannot be omitted, and must be commanded in each block. A program error (P33)

will occur if omitted.

(6) As with knot, in the same manner as weight, up to 4 digits can be commanded after the decimal point.

Even if the decimal point is omitted, the value will be handled as the one with a decimal point. If «1» is

commanded, the result will be the same as «1.0».

If more than 5 digits are commanded after the decimal point, a program error (P33) will occur.

(7) As with knot, command the same or greater value than the previous block. If a smaller value than

previous block is set, a program error (P551) will occur.

(8) NURBS interpolation cannot be applied during graphic check (continuous/step check).

Linear interpolation that connects the control points is applied during graphic check.

(9) NURBS interpolation mode is canceled with Reset (Reset1/Reset2/Reset&Rewind).

(10) NURBS interpolation can be commanded in only the following modes. If NURBS interpolation is

commanded in other than the following modes, the program error (P29) will occur.

Type Mode in which NURBS interpolation can be commanded

G group 5 Asynchronous feed (G94)

G group 7 Tool radius compensation cancel (G40)

G group 8 Tool length compensation (G43) Tool length compensation cancel (G44)

G group 9 Fixed cycle cancel (G80)

G group 11 Scaling cancel (G50)

G group 13 High-accuracy control ON (G61.1) Cutting mode (G64)

G group 14 User macro modal call cancel (G67)

G group 15 Normal line control cancel (G40.1)

G group 16 Programmable coordinate rotation mode OFF /3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode OFF (G69.1)

G group 17 Constant surface speed control OFF (G97)

G group 18 Polar coordinate command OFF (G15)

G group 19 G command mirror image cancel (G50.1)

G group 21 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel (G13.1)

— Not during the coordinate rotation by parameter

— Not during the mirror image by parameter setting

— Not during the mirror image by external input

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

114

6.16 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation ; G07

Function and purpose

Take one of the axes of the helical interpolation or spiral interpolation, including a linear axis, as a hypothetical

axis (axis with no actual movement) and perform pulse distribution. With this procedure, an interpolation

equivalent to the helical interpolation or spiral interpolation looked from the side (hypothetical axis), or SIN or

COS interpolation, will be possible.

Normal helical interpolation

Helical interpolation in the hypothetical axis interpolation mode

To perform the SIN interpolation on Z-X plane, execute the helical interpolation (Y-X plane: G17 G02) with Y

axis which is designated as the hypothetical axis. The hypothetical axis does not make any actual movement.

0.

5.

10.

-5.

-10.

20. 40. -10.0.

X X

YZ

0.

5.

10.

-5.

-10.

20. 40. -10.0.

X X

YZ

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

6.16 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation ; G07

115

Command format

Detailed description

(1) During G07 0 ; to G07 1 ;, axis will be the hypothetical axis.

(2) Any axis among the NC axes can be designated as the hypothetical axis.

(3) Multiple axes can be designated as the hypothetical axis.

(4) The number other than 0 (hypothetical axis interpolation mode ON) or 1 (cancel) is commanded, it will

be handled as 1 (cancel). However, when only the axis name is designated with no number, it will be

handled as 0 (mode ON).

G07 0 ; … Hypothetical axis interpolation mode ON

G07 1 ; … Hypothetical axis interpolation mode cancel

Axis name for which hypothetical axis interpolation is performed.

6 Interpolation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

116

Program example

Precautions

(1) Interpolation functions that are used for hypothetical axis interpolation are helical interpolation and spiral

interpolation.

(2) Cancel the hypothetical axis interpolation before the high-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000) is

commanded.

(3) The hypothetical axis interpolation is valid only in the automatic operation. It is invalid in the manual

operation mode. Handle interruption is valid even for the hypothetical axis, that is, axis will move by the

interrupted amount.

(4) Movement command for the hypothetical axis will be ignored. The feedrate will be distributed in the

same manner as actual axis.

(5) The protection functions such as interlock or stored stroke limit are valid for the hypothetical axis.

(6) Even when the hypothetical axis is applied for the hypothetical axis again, no error will occur and the

hypothetical mode will be continued.

(7) When the hypothetical axis cancel is commanded to the actual axis, no error will occur and the axis is

actual as it is.

(8) The hypothetical axis will be canceled by carrying out the reset 2 or reset & rewind.

N01 G07 Y0 ; Y axis is handled as hypothetical axis.

N02 G17 G02 X0. Y0. Z40. I0. J-10. P2 F50; SIN interpolation is executed on X-Z plane.

N03 G07 Y1 ; Y axis is returned to the actual axis.

0.

5.

10.

-5.

-10.

20. 40.

X

Z

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

118

7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate

Function and purpose

The rapid traverse rate can be set with parameters independently for each axis. The available speed ranges

are from 1 mm/min to 10000000 mm/min. The upper limit is subject to the restrictions limited by the machine

specifications.

Refer to the specifications manual of the machine for the rapid traverse rate settings.

The feedrate is valid for the G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60 commands.

Two paths are available for positioning: the interpolation type where the area from the start point to the end

point is linearly interpolated or the non-interpolation type where movement proceeds at the maximum speed

of each axis. The type is selected with parameter «#1086 G0Intp». The positioning time is the same for each

type.

If the high-accuracy control mode’s rapid traverse rate is set, the axis will move at that feedrate during high-

accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control I/II, high-accuracy spline control or SSS control.

— If the value set for the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is 0, the axis will move at the rapid

traverse rate.

— The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis.

— The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate is effective for the G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60

commands.

— Override can be applied on the high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate using the external signal

supplied.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.2 Cutting Feedrate

119

7.2 Cutting Feedrate

Function and purpose

The cutting feedrate is assigned with address F and numerals.

The cutting feedrate is valid for the G01, G02, G03, G02.1 and G03.1 commands.

If the high-accuracy control mode’s cutting clamp speed is set, the cutting feedrate will be clamped at that

feedrate during high-accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control, high-accuracy spline control or SSS

control.

— If the value set for the high-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed is 0, the axis will be clamped at the

cutting feed clamp speed.

— The cutting feedrate is clamped with high-accuracy control mode cutting clamp speed in the parameter.

Examples Feed per minute (asynchronous feed)

Speed range that can be commanded (when input setting unit is 1m)

(Note 1) A program error (P62) will occur when there is no F command in the first cutting command (G01,

G02, G03) after the power has been turned ON.

Feedrate

G1 X100. Y100. F200 ; 200.0mm/min F200 or F200.000 gives the same rate.

G1 X100. Y100. F123.4 ; 123.4mm/min

G1 X100. Y100. F56.789 ; 56.789mm/min

Command mode

Feedrate command range Remarks

mm/min 0.001 to 10000000

inch/min 0.0001 to 1000000

/min 0.001 to 10000000

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

120

7.3 F1-digit Feed

Function and purpose

By setting the F1-digit feed parameter, the feedrate which has been set to correspond to the 1-digit number

following the F address serves as the command value.

When F0 is assigned, the rapid traverse rate is established and the speed is the same as for G00. (G modal

does not change, but the acceleration/deceleration method follows the rapid traverse setting.)

When F1 to F5 is assigned, the feedrate set to correspond to the command serves as the command value.

Detailed description

(1) To validate the F1-digit feed, set the parameter «#1079 F1digit» to «1».

(2) The override function of the feedrate which is set in accordance to the F1-digit is performed by using the

1st manual handle. (Feedrate cannot be changed with the 2nd or 3rd handle.)

The amount by which the feedrate can be increased or reduced is determined by the following formula.

Here, «+» means increase, and «-» means reduction.

Set the corresponding speed of F1 to F5 with the base specification parameters «#1185 spd_F1» to

«#1189 spd_F5» respectively.

The increase/reduction range is from «0» to the set value of the parameter «#1506 F1_FM».

The error «M01 operation error 0104» will occur when the feedrate is 0.

(3) Use of both the F1-digit command and normal cutting feedrate command is possible when the F1-digit is

valid.

(Example 1)

F0 Rapid traverse rate

F1 to F5 F1-digit

F6 or more Normal cutting feedrate command

(4) The F1-digit command is valid in a G01, G02, G03, G02.1 or G03.1 modal.

(5) The F1-digit command can also be used for fixed cycle.

(6) The number of manual handle pulses is 1 pulse per scale unit regardless of the scaling factor.

(7) During a F1-digit command, the F1-digit number and F1-digit command signal are output as the PLC

signals.

K : Operation constant (This is the number of FM divisions, and is the calculated constant of the increment/decrement speed per scale of the manual handle pulse generator.) This is set with the base specification parameter «#1507 F1_K».

FM : This is the clamp speed of F1 to F5 This is set with the base specification parameter «#1506 F1_FM».

P : The number of manual handle pulses

F = (FM K

P)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.3 F1-digit Feed

121

F1-digit and G commands

(1) 01 group G command in same block as F1-digit commands

(2) F1-digit and unmodal commands may be assigned in the same block. In this case, the unmodal

command is executed and at the same time the F1-digit modal command is updated.

Example of arithmetic constant K setting

When the handle scale unit is to be made 10mm/min.

FM is made 15000 mm/min:

Therefore, K is 1500.

The feedrate is made F (1 to 5) 10 (mm/min) by rotating the handle by one scale unit.

The conditions for validation of the speed change with the handle

When all the following conditions are established, the speed change is valid with the handle.

(1) The operation must be automatic (program run, MDI).

(2) The operation must be in automatic start.

(3) The operation must be in cutting feed, and F1-digit feedrate command must be issued.

(4) The F1-digit feed parameter must be ON.

(5) The F1-digit feed switch must be ON.

(6) The operation must not be in machine lock.

(7) The operation must not be in dry run. .

(8) Upper limit of F1-digit feedrate (#1506) and F1-digit feedrate change constant (#1507) are not zero.

Conversion of the F1-digit feedrate changing with handle operation

Once the F1-digit feedrate is changed with manual handle, the changed feedrate is valid until parameter is

changed or the power is turned OFF. Changed feedrate can be checked only during operation. Note that if the

parameter «#1246 set18/bit16″(switchover of the F1-digit feedrate changing method) is set to «1», even after

the power is turned OFF, operation is kept at the changed feedrate by changing to the feedrate after changing

the parameter of F1-digit feedrate. In this case, if the screen is not switched, the changed parameter values

are not reflected to display.

Executed feedrate Modal display rate G modal

G0F0 F0G0

Rapid traverse rate 0 G0

G0F1 F1G0

Rapid traverse rate 1 G0

G1F0 F0G1

Rapid traverse rate 0 G1

G1F1 F1G1

F1 contents 1 G1

F = 10 = 15000 K

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

122

Precautions

(1) If F1-digit feedrate changing valid signal is turned ON when F1-digit feed is commanded and changing

feedrate with the manual handle is valid and applied to the following conditions, it is clamped at the upper

limit of F1-digit feedrate.

F1-digit feedrate > Upper limit of F1-digit feedrate

(2) When the F1-digit feedrate is 0 with the handle operation during the F1-digit feedrate command, the

alarm «0104 F1-digit feed rate zero» will occur. This alarm can be eliminated when the F1-digit feedrate is

set in larger value than 0 with the handle operation.

(3) When K is 0, the speed is not changed.

(4) F1 to F5 are invalid in the G00 mode and the rapid traverse rate is established instead.

(5) If F0 is used in the G02, G03, G02.1 or G03.1 mode, the program error (P121) will occur. The error will

be eliminated if the F0 command is rewritten.

(6) When F1. to F5. (with decimal point) are assigned, the 1mm/min to 5mm/min (direct numerical value

command) are established instead of the F1-digit feed command.

(7) When the commands are used with inch units, one-tenth of the feedrate set correspond to F1 to F5

serves at the assigned speed inch/min.

(8) When the commands are used with the millimeter or degree units, the feedrate set to correspond to F1 to

F5 serves as the assigned speed mm ()/mm.

(9) Even if the F1-digit feed is commanded during feed per revolution (G95), it is executed as a normal F

command (direct numerical value command).

(10) When both the F1-digit feed command and inverse time feed command are present, the inverse time

feed command will have the priority.

(11) When both the F1-digit feedrate changing and the manual speed command are present, the manual

speed command will have the priority.

(12) In the synchronous tapping command, the speed cannot be changed with the handle.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed) ; G94,G95

123

7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/

Synchronous Feed) ; G94,G95

Function and purpose

Feed per minute (asynchronous feed)

By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value

following F as the feedrate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).

Feed per revolution (synchronous feed)

By issuing the G95 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value

following F as the feedrate per spindle revolution (mm/rev, inch/rev).

When this command is used, the rotary encoder must be attached to the spindle.

Command format

G94; … Feed per minute (mm/min) (asynchronous feed)

G95; … Feed per revolution (mm/rev) (synchronous feed)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

124

Detailed description

G94/G95 commands are modal commands.

(Ex.) After the G95 command is assigned, the G95 command is valid until the G94 command or G93

command (inverse time feed) is next assigned.

(1) The F code command range is as follows.

Metric input

Input Setting unit B(0.001mm)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(mm/min) F(mm/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.000) (1.=1.000)

1 (=0.001) (1.=1.000)

Command range 0.001 —

1000000.000 0.001 — 999.999

Input Setting unit C(0.0001mm)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(mm/min) F(mm/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.0000) (1.=1.0000)

1 (=0.0001) (1.=1.0000)

Command range 0.0001 —

1000000.0000 0.0001 — 999.9999

Input Setting unit D(0.00001mm)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(mm/min) F(mm/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.00000) (1.=1.00000)

1 (=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

Command range 0.00001 —

1000000.00000 0.00001 — 999.99999

Input Setting unit E(0.000001mm)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(mm/min) F(mm/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.000000) (1.=1.000000)

1 (=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

Command range 0.000001 —

1000000.000000 0.000001 — 999.999999

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed) ; G94,G95

125

Inch input

(2) The effective rate (actual movement speed of machine) under per-revolution feed conditions is given in

the following formula (Formula 1).

FC = F N OVR …… (Formula 1)

FC : Effective rate (mm/min, inch/min)

F : Commanded feedrate (mm/rev, inch/rev)

N : Spindle rotation speed (r/min)

OVR: Cutting feed override

When a multiple number of axes have been commanded at the same time, the effective rate FC in

formula 1 applies in the vector direction of the command.

Input Setting unit B(0.0001inch)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(inch/min) F(inch/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.0000) (1.=1.0000)

1 (=0.0001) (1.=1.0000)

Command range 0.0001 —

100000.0000 0.0001 — 999.9999

Input Setting unit C(0.00001inch)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(inch/min) F(inch/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.00000) (1.=1.00000)

1 (=0.00001) (1.=1.00000)

Command range 0.00001 —

100000.00000 0.00001 — 999.99999

Input Setting unit D(0.000001inch)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(inch/min) F(inch/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.000000) (1.=1.000000)

1 (=0.000001) (1.=1.000000)

Command range 0.000001 —

100000.000000 0.000001 — 999.999999

Input Setting unit E(0.0000001inch)

Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution

Command Address F(inch/min) F(inch/rev)

Minimum command unit 1 (=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000000)

1 (=0.0000001) (1.=1.0000000)

Command range 0.0000001 —

100000.0000000 0.0000001 — 999.9999999

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

126

Precautions

(1) The effective rate (mm/min or inch/min), which is produced by converting the commanded speed, the

spindle rotation speed and the cutting feed override into the per-minute speed, appears as the FC on the

monitor 1. Screen of the setting and display unit.

(2) When the above effective rate exceeds the cutting feed clamp rate, it is clamped at that clamp rate.

(3) If the spindle rotation speed is zero when feed per revolution is executed, the error «M01 operation erro

0105″ occurs.

(4) Feedrate in the machine lock status is the command speed.

(5) Under dry run conditions, feed per minute applies and movement results at the manual feedrate (mm/min

or inch/min).

(6) The fixed cycle G84 (tapping cycle) and G74 (reverse tapping cycle) are executed according to the feed

mode that is already designated.

(7) Whether feed per minute (G94) or feed per revolution (G95) is to be established when the power is

turned ON or when M02 or M30 is executed can be selected by setting parameter «#1074 I_Sync».

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.5 Inverse Time Feed ; G93

127

7.5 Inverse Time Feed ; G93

Function and purpose

During inside cutting when machining curved shapes with radius compensation applied, the machining speed

on the cutting surface becomes faster than the tool center feedrate. Therefore, problems such as reduced

accuracy may occur.

This reduced accuracy can be prevented with inverse time feed. This function can, in place of normal feed

commands, issue one block of machining time (inverse) in F commands. The machining speed on the cutting

surface is constantly controlled, even if radius compensation is applied to the machining program that

expresses the free curve surface with fine segment lines.

Note that when the calculated machining time exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed, the F command value in

the inverse time feed follows the cutting feed clamp speed.

Regular F command

The speed of tool center is commanded, thus the actual speed at the cutting surface may become larger or smaller.

Inverse time feed

The actual speed at the cutting surface is commanded, thus, the speed will be constant and machining speed can be kept as that was commanded regardless of the tool radius.

(F) F command

(F)

(F)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

128

Command format

Inverse time feed (G93) is a modal command. Once commanded, it will be valid until feed per minute or feed

per revolution is commanded.

In movement blocks, since processing time is commanded to a line segment, command the feedrate «F» each

time.

Detailed description

(1) Inverse time feed (G93) is a modal command. Once commanded, it is valid until feed per minute (G94) or

feed per revolution (G95) is commanded, or until a reset (M02, M30, etc.) is executed.

(2) Command method of F command values in inverse time feed

(3) The initial modal after a restart is G94 (feed per minute) or G95 (feed per revolution).

(4) The feedrate of the block inserted in tool radius compensation and corner R/C is the same speed as the

feedrate of the block immediately before it.

(5) The feedrate of the block inserted in C axis normal line control (normal line control type II) is the same

speed as the feedrate of the movement block after turning.

G93 ; … Inverse time feed

G00 Xx1 Yy1 ;

G93 ; -> Inverse time feed mode ON

G01 Xx2 Yy2 Ff2; -> In inverse time feed mode

G02 Xx3 Yy3 Ii3 Jj3 Ff3; :

G94(G95); -> Inverse time feed mode OFF

Metric command (G21) Inch command (G20)

During linear mode (G01)

Cutting point feedrate (mm/min)

Line segment length (mm)

Cutting point feedrate (inch/min)

Line segment length (inch)

During arc mode (G02, G03)

(G02.1, G03.1)

Cutting point feedrate (mm/min)

Start point arc radius (mm)

Cutting point feedrate (inch/min)

Start point arc radius (inch)

Command range

B 0.001 to 999999.999 (1/min)

C 0.0001 to 999999.9999 (1/min)

D 0.00001 to 999999.99999 (1/min)

E 0.000001 to 999999.999999 (1/min)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.5 Inverse Time Feed ; G93

129

Program example

When using inverse time feed during tool radius compensation

Comparison between feed per minute and inverse time feed (Assuming that tool radius is 10. [mm])

(Unit: mm/min)

Feed per minute

N01 G90 G00 X80. Y-80. ;

N02 G01 G41 X80 Y-80. D11 F500 ;

N03 X180. ;

N04 G02 Y-280. R100. ;

N05 G03 Y-480. R100. ;

N06 G02 Y-680. R100. ;

N07 G01 X80. F500 ;

N08 Y-80. ;

N09 G04 X80. Y-80. ;

N10 M02 ;

Inverse time feed

N01 G90 G00 X80. Y-80. ;

N02 G01 G41 X80 Y-80. D11 F500 ;

N03 X180. ;

N04 G93 G02 Y-280. R100. F5 ;

N05 G03 Y-480. R100. F5 ;

N06 G02 Y-680. R100. F5 ;

N07 G94 G01 X80. F500 ;

N08 Y-80. ;

N09 G04 X80. Y-80. ;

N10 M02 ;

Sequence No. Feed per minute Inverse time feed

Feedrate of tool center Feedrate of cutting point Feedrate of tool center Feedrate of cutting point

N04 F500 F450 F550 F500

N05 F500 F550 F450 F500

N06 F500 F450 F550 F500

The block seam protrudes due to the cutting speed change at the block seam.

The feedrate follows the command regardless of the tool radius.

N4

N6

N5

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

130

Relation with other functions

(1) Scaling (G51)

When using a scaling function, issue a F command for the shape after scaling. For example, if a double-

size scaling is carried out, the machining distance will be twice.

Thus, if executing a cutting at the same speed as that of before scaling, command the value (F)

calculated by dividing F value by the multiples of scaling.

(2) High-speed machining mode II (G05P2)

With the inverse time feed (G93) modal, high-speed machining mode II (G05P2) is operated in the

inverse time feed mode, instead of high-speed machining mode. High-speed machining mode will be

valid when the inverse time feed mode is canceled.

(3) If the speed calculated in the G93 mode exceeds the speed range at the feed per minute, clamping is

performed at the clamp speed set with parameters.

(4) The program error (P125) will occur when the commands below are issued in the inverse time feed

(G93) mode.

(5) The program error (P125) will occur if inverse time feed (G93) is commanded in the following modes.

F = Feedrate (mm/min) / Distance (mm)

Shape after scaling (Double size)

G code Function

G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation

G06.2 NURBS interpolation

G12 Circular cutting CW

G13 Circular cutting CCW

G31 to G31.3 Skip

G33 Thread cutting

G34 to G36, G37 Special Fixed Cycle

G37.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement

G73 to G89 Fixed cycle

G96 Constant surface speed control ON

G code Function

G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation

G33 Thread cutting

G73 to G89 Fixed cycle

G96 Constant surface speed control ON

F F’ =

2

F

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.5 Inverse Time Feed ; G93

131

Precautions

(1) The initial modal after a restart is G94 (feed per minute) or G95 (feed per revolution).

(2) The F command in G93 modal is unmodal. Issue an F command for each block. The program error (P62)

will occur in blocks with no F command.

(3) The program error (P62) will occur when F0 is commanded.

(4) An F command is necessary when changing from G93 to G94 or G95. The program error (P62) will occur

if there is no F command.

(5) The feed function is clamped at the maximum cutting speed. Consequently, the feed may be slower than

the commanded speed.

(6) If an extremely slow speed such as F0.001 is designated, an error will occur in the machining time.

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

132

7.6 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes

Function and purpose

It has already been mentioned that a machine has a number of control axes. These control axes can be

divided into linear axes which control linear movement and rotary axes which control rotary movement. The

feedrate is designed to assign the displacement speed of these axes, and the effect exerted on the tool

movement speed which poses problems during cutting differs according to when control is exercised over the

linear axes or when it is exercised over the rotary axes.

The displacement amount for each axis is assigned separately for each axis by a value corresponding to the

respective axis. The feedrate is not assigned for each axis but assigned as a single value. Therefore, when

two or more axes are to be controlled simultaneously, it is necessary to understand how this will work for each

of the axes involved.

The assignment of the feedrate is described with the following related items.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.6 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes

133

Detailed description

When controlling linear axes

Both when only one machine axis is to be controlled and when there are two or more axes to be controlled

simultaneously, the feedrate which is assigned by the F code functions as a linear speed in the tool advance

direction.

(Example)When the feedrate is designated as «f» and linear axes (X and Y) are to be controlled:

When only linear axes are to be controlled, it is sufficient to designate the cutting feed in the program.

The feedrate for each axis is such that the designated rate is broken down into the components corresponding

to the movement amounts.

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as «f» and the linear axes (X and Y) are to be controlled using the

circular interpolation function:

The rate in the tool advance direction, or in other words the tangential direction, will be the feedrate

designated in the program.

In this case, the feedrate of the X and Y axes will change along with the tool movement. However,

the combined speed will always be maintained at the constant value «f».

(S) Tool start point

(E) Tool end point

(F) Speed in this direction is «f».

fx: Feedrate for X axis

fy: Feedrate for Y axis

(S) Tool start point (E) Tool end point (F) Speed in this direction is «f».

Y

Xx

y = f

x

= f y

x2 + y2

x2 + y2 (E)

(F)

(S)

fx

fy

y

x

Y

Xi

(E)

(F)

(S)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

134

When controlling rotary axes

When rotary axes are to be controlled, the designated feedrate functions as the rotary speed of the rotary

axes or, in other words, as an angular speed.

Consequently, the cutting feed in the tool advance direction, or in other words the linear speed, varies

according to the distance between the center of rotation and the tool.

This distance must be borne in mind when designating the feedrate in the program.

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as «f» and rotary axis (C) is to be controlled

(«f» units = /min)

In this case, in order to make the cutting feed (linear feed) in the tool advance direction «fc» :

Therefore, the feedrate to be designated in the program must be :

(S) Tool start point (E) Tool end point (CP) Center of rotation (F) Angular speed is «f».

(S) c

(E)

r (CP)

(F)

fc

fc = f r 180

f = fc 180 r

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.6 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes

135

When linear and rotary axes are to be controlled at the same time

The controller proceeds in exactly the same way whether linear or rotary axes are to be controlled.

When a rotary axis is to be controlled, the numerical value assigned by the coordinate word (A,B,C) is the

angle and the numerical values assigned by the feedrate (F) are all handled as linear speeds. In other words,

1of the rotary axis is treated as being equivalent to 1mm of the linear axis.

Consequently, when both linear and rotary axes are to be controlled simultaneously, in the components for

each axis of the numerical values assigned by F will be the same as previously described in «When controlling

linear axes». However, although in this case both the size and direction of the speed components based on

linear axis control do not vary, the direction of the speed components based on rotary axis control will change

along with the tool movement (their size will not change). This means, as a result, that the combined tool

advance direction feedrate will vary along with the tool movement.

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as «f» and linear (X) and rotary (C) axes are to be controlled

simultaneously

In the X-axis incremental command value is «x» and the C-axis incremental command values is «c»:

X-axis feedrate (linear speed) «fx» and C-axis feedrate (angular speed) «» are expressed as:

Linear speed «fc» based on C-axis control is expressed as:

(S) Tool start point (E) Tool end point (CP) Center of rotation Size and direction are fixed for fx. Size is fixed for fc but direction varies. Both size and direction vary for ft.

…… (1) …… (2)

…… (3)

(S)

x

fc

c

fc ft

fx

fx

ft r

(E)

(CP)

fx = f x2 + c 2

x = f x2 + c 2

c

fc = 180

r

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

136

If the speed in the tool advance direction at start point (S) is «ft» and the component speeds in the X-axis and

Y-axis directions are «ftx» and «fty», respectively, then these can be expressed as:

r is the distance between center of rotation and tool (in mm units)

is the angle between the (S) point and the X axis at the center of rotation (in units )

The combined speed «ft» according to (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) is:

Consequently, feedrate «f» designated by the program must be as follows:

«ft» in formula (6) is the speed at the (S) point and the value of changes as the C axis rotates, which means

that the value of «ft» will also change. Consequently, in order to keep the cutting feed «ft» as constant as

possible the angle of rotation which is designated in one block must be reduced to as low as possible and the

extent of the change in the value must be minimized.

…… (4)

…… (5)

…… (6)

…… (7)

ftx = — rsin ( ) + fx 180

180

fty = — rcos ( )

180 180

ftx 2 + fty 2 ft =

x2 — x c rsin ( ) + ( ) 2

x2 + c2 = f

90 r c

180

180

x2 — x c rsin( ) + ( ) 2

x2 + c2 f = ft

90 r c

180

180

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

137

7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

Function and purpose

This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant inclination during linear acceleration/

deceleration in the rapid traverse mode. Compared to the method of acceleration /deceleration after

interpolation, the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time.

Detailed description

(1) Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse

command. Also, this function is effective only when the rapid traverse command acceleration/

deceleration mode is linear acceleration and linear deceleration.

(2) The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/

deceleration are performed are as follows.

[When the interpolation distance is long enough for the rapid traverse rate to be achieved]

rapid : Rapid traverse rate

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Td : Command deceleration check time

: Acceleration/deceleration inclination

T : Interpolation time

L : Interpolation distance

L

T

rapid

TsTs Td

T = rapid L

+Ts

Td = Ts + (0 14ms)

= tan — 1 rapid

Ts ( )

G00 Xx1 ;

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

138

[When the interpolation distance is so short that the rapid traverse rate is not achieved]

rapid : Rapid traverse rate (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed

Td : Command deceleration check time

: Acceleration/deceleration inclination

T1 : Interpolation time (time-constant acceleration/deceleration)

T2 : Interpolation time (inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration)

L : Interpolation distance

Ts2Ts1

0 to 14 ms)(2 T2Td +=

rapid LTs12T2 =

+=

) Ts1

rapid(tan 1

=

T1

Td

L

Ts1

rapid

T2 Ts2

Td

L

Ts1

T1

Ts2

rapid

Time

Next block

In case of inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration:

Speed

In case of time-constant acceleration/deceleration:

Speed

Time

Next block

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

139

(3) When 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (linear interpolations) is performed during rapid traverse

constant inclination acceleration and deceleration, the acceleration (deceleration) time is the longest

value of the acceleration (deceleration) times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of

commands executed simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time constant, and

the interpolation distance, respectively. Consequently, linear interpolation is performed even when the

axes have different acceleration and deceleration time constants.

[2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When linear interpolation is used, Tsx < Tsz, Lx Lz)]

Tsx : X axis acceleration/deceleration time

Tsz : Z axis acceleration/deceleration time

Tdx : X axis commanded deceleration check time

Tdz : Z axis commanded deceleration check time

Lx : X axis interpolation distance

Lz : Z axis interpolation distance

Lx

Tdz

Tdx Tsx Tsx

Tsz Tsz

rapid X

rapid Z

Lz

When Tsz is greater than Tsx,

Tdz is also greater than Tdx, and

Td = Tdz in this block.

Time

Next block

Time

Next block

Z axis

X axis

Speed

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

140

(4) If a minimum time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration has been set by the

parameter, acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time

calculated by interpolation distance from going below the minimum time constant.

[When the interpolation distance is so short that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the

minimum time constant for constant inclination acceleration/deceleration]

(5) The program format of G0 (rapid traverse command) when rapid traverse constant inclination

acceleration/deceleration are executed is the same as when this function is invalid (time constant

acceleration/deceleration).

(6) This function is valid only for G0 (rapid traverse).

rapid : Rapid traverse speed (Axis specification parameter #2001 rapid)

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter #2004 G0tL)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the maximum speed

Ts3 : Minimum time for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Axis specification parameter #2198 G0tMin)

Td : Command deceleration check time

T1 : Interpolation time

L : Interpolation distance

Td

L

Ts1

rapid

T

Ts22T =

Td = (0 to 14 ms)2 T +

Ts3

Ts2 Time

Next block

Speed

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

141

Precautions

(1) When «#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes» is set to the soft acceleration/deceleration,

and «#1219 aux03 bit7: Time constant setting changeover for soft acceleration/deceleration» is set to «1:

Accelerating time is obtained by G0tL+G0t1 (G1tL+G1t1)», acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted

to prevent the sum of the 1st step and 2nd step acceleration/deceleration times from going below the

minimum time constant for constant-inclination acceleration/deceleration.

(2) When «#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes» is set to the soft acceleration/deceleration, if

the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than G0tL (or G1tL), the 2nd step time constant will be

reduced by the same rate as the 1st step time constant.

(3) If a commanded travel distance in a block is small, acceleration/deceleration time becomes quite short

when the constant-inclination acceleration/deceleration method is enabled. Although this does contribute

to reducing the cycle time, this can also be a cause of machine vibrations. In such case set the minimum

time constant for constant-inclination acceleration/deceleration in parameter «#2198 G0tMin». By this

setting, the acceleration/deceleration speed is controlled so that the acceleration/deceleration time

should not fall below the preset value.

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

142

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/

Deceleration

Function and purpose

This function carries out the acceleration/deceleration according to the torque characteristic of the motor in

the rapid traverse mode during automatic operation. (This function is not available in manual operation.) The

rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration method makes for improved cycle time

because the positioning time is shortened by using the motor ability to its maximum.

In general, the servomotor has the characteristic that the torque falls in the high-speed rotation range.

(Note) This characteristic is data at input voltage 380VAC.

In the rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration method, the acceleration is treated as

constant because this torque characteristic is not considered. So, It is necessary to use a minimum

acceleration within the used speed range. Therefore, the margin of acceleration must be had in a low-speed

range. Or if the acceleration is used to its maximum, the upper limit of the rotation speed must be slowed.

Then, to use the servomotor ability to its maximum, acceleration/deceleration to which the torque

characteristic is considered is carried out by the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/

deceleration method.

T o

rq ue

[N -m

]

Rotation speed (r/min)

0 1000 3500 0

25

100

125

75

50

2000 3000

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration

143

The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step

acceleration/deceleration are performed are as follows.

[Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration]

[Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration]

Number of steps is automatically adjusted by parameter setting.

It was necessary to slow down the acceleration for high speed rotation.

(f) Speed (t) Time (a) Acceleration

t bt a

(f)

(t)

(f)

(t)

(t)

(t)

(a) (a)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

144

Detailed description

Use conditions

(1) It is necessary to enable this function by setting «2» to the parameter «#1205 G0bdcc».

However, note the following conditions.

(2) To use this function, the following parameters must be set for each axis.

Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate = Acceleration at rapid traverse rate /

Max. acceleration

(3) When either of the following conditions applies, this function is invalid and operates as «rapid traverse

constant inclination acceleration/deceleration». For the axis which the rapid traverse constant inclination

multi-step acceleration/deceleration is not necessary, set «0» to «#2151 rated_spd», «#2152 acc_rate»

and «#2153 G0t_rated».

(a) «2» cannot be set to parameter «#1205 G0bdcc» except the 1st part system. When «2» is set to other than 1st part system, «Y51 parameter error 17» will occur.

(b) When there is no specification for the rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration, «2» cannot be set to parameter «#1205 G0bdcc». Even if the parameter is set to «2», this function is invalid. A normal time constant acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) is applied.

(c) Even if «2» is set to «#1205 G0bdcc» when G00 non-interpolation type («#1086 G00Intp» = «1»), this function is invalid. In this case, a normal time constant acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) is applied.

#2001 rapid Rapid traverse [mm/min]

#2151 rated_spd Rated speed [mm/min]

#2153 G0t_rated Acceleration time to rated speed [ms]

#2152 acc_rate Acceleration at rapid traverse in ratio to the maximum acceleration [%]

Feedrate

rapid

rated_spd

Time

Acceleration

Max. acceleration

Acceleration at rapid traverse rate

Time

(a) When «#2151 rated_spd» (rated speed) is «0» or larger than «#2001 rapid» (rapid traverse)

(b) When «#2152 acc_rate» (Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate) is «0» or «100»

(c) Even if «2» is set to «#1205 G0bdcc» when G00 non-interpolation type («#1086 G00Intp» = «1»), this function is invalid. In this case, a normal time constant acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) is applied.

(G0t_rated)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration

145

(4) The comparison of the acceleration/deceleration patterns by the parameter setting is in the table below.

Mode

Rapid traverse constant inclination

multi-step acceleration/ deceleration

#1086 G00Intp

#1205 G0bdcc

Operation

G00 command

ON

0

0 Time constant acceleration/deceleration (interpolation type)

1 Constant inclination acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

2 Constant inclination multi-step acceleration/ deceleration

1 Arbitrary Time constant acceleration/deceleration (non- interpolation type)

OFF

0

0 Time constant acceleration/deceleration (interpolation type)

1 Constant inclination acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

2 Time constant acceleration/deceleration (interpolation type)

1 Arbitrary Time constant acceleration/deceleration (non- interpolation type)

Manual rapid traverse

Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Time constant acceleration/deceleration (non- interpolation type)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

146

Decision method of steps

For rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration, the number of steps is

automatically adjusted by set parameter.

The acceleration per step is assumed to be a decrease by 10% of the maximum acceleration per step.

Therefore, the number of steps is decided as follows.

The acceleration/deceleration pattern when the parameter setting value is shown below.

«Step» = (100 — «#2152 acc_rate») / 10 + 1 (Discard fractions less than 1)

No. Item Setting value

2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate 36000 [mm/min]

2151 rated_spd Rated speed 16800 [mm/min]

2152 acc_rate Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate

58 [%]

Acceleration

Feedrate

rapid =36000

rated_spd =16800

amax

0.58amax

0.9amax

0.8amax

0.7amax

10

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration

147

Acceleration pattern at two or more axis interpolation

When there are two or more rapid traverse axes with a different acceleration pattern, there are the following

two operation methods.

— Interpolation type (#1086 G0Intp = 0) : Moves from the start point to the end point by straight line

— Non-interpolation type (#1086 G0Intp = 1) : Each axis moves separately at the speed of the parameter

Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration are valid only for an interpolation type.

For the interpolation type, the acceleration pattern operates to the maximum acceleration within the range

where tolerable acceleration of each axis is not exceeded.

[Acceleration pattern of Y axis independently] [Acceleration pattern of X axis independently]

[Acceleration pattern of synthesis direction]

(a) Acceleration (f) Speed

(S) Start point (E) End point

(ac1) Acceleration pattern when the axis moved to synthesis direction at Y axis rapid traverse rate

(ac2) Acceleration pattern when the axis moved to synthesis direction at X axis rapid traverse rate

(ac3) Acceleration pattern of synthesis direction

Y

a y

v y (f)

(a)

4

3 5

(S)

(E)

X

a x

v x (f)

(a)

a x / 0.8

a y / 0.6

vy / 0.6 vx / 0.8

(ac2)

(a)

(f)

(ac3)

(ac1)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

148

S-pattern filter control

With S-pattern filter control, this enables the rapid traverse inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration

fluctuation to further smoothen.

This can be set in the range of 0 to 200 (ms) with the basic specification parameter «#1569 SfiltG0» (G00 soft

acceleration/deceleration filter). With «#1570 Sfilt2» (Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2), this also enables

the acceleration/deceleration fluctuation to further smoothen.

(f) Speed

(t) Time

(p) Parameter setting value = SfiltG0 + Sfilt2

(sf1) No S-pattern filter control

(sf2) S-pattern filter control

(f)

(sf2)

(t)

(sf1)

(p)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration

149

The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate

During high-accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control I/II or high-accuracy spline control, the high-

accuracy control mode’s rapid traverse rate («#2109 Rapid (H-precision)») can be set besides rapid traverse

rate («#2001 rapid»).

Operation when the value is set at the high-accuracy control mode’s rapid traverse rate is as follows.

(1) When «The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate» > «rapid traverse rate»

This function is invalid and operates as «rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration».

(2) When «The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate» < «rapid traverse rate»

«The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate» is applied according to acceleration pattern

calculated from acceleration rate to «rapid traverse», «rated speed», «G0 time constant to rated speed»

and «maximum acceleration».

(f) Speed (t) Time (r) Rapid traverse rate (ac) Acceleration

Larger than the rated speed Smaller than the rated speed

(f) Speed

(f1) Rated speed

(f2) The high-accuracy control mode rapid traverse rate

(t) Time

(t1) Acceleration time to rated speed

(ac) Acceleration

(ac1) Max. Acceleration

(ac2) Acceleration at rapid traverse rate

(r) Rapid traverse rate

#2004 G0tL

(f)

(ac)

(r)

(t)

(t)

(f) (r)

(t)

(f2) (f1)

(t)

(ac) (ac1)

(ac2)

(t1)

(f)

(ac)

(f2) (f1)

(r)

(t)

(t)

(ac1)

(ac2)

(t1)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

150

Precautions

(1) Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse

command. Note that when the manual rapid traverse, rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step

acceleration/deceleration cannot be used.

In this case, a time constant acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) is

applied. So, acceleration/deceleration is decided by the following parameters.

— #2001 rapid : Rapid traverse rate

— #2003 smgst : Acceleration/deceleration mode

— #2004 G0tL : G0 time constant (linear)

— #2005 G0t1 : G0 time constant (primary delay)

The acceleration time (time constant) is different bewteen the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-

step acceleration/deceleration and the manual rapid traverse as shown in figure.

(2) Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration cannot be used in part system

excluding 1st part system. However, even if two or more part systems are used, it is possible to use this

function in case of the 1st part system.

(3) When there is no specification for the rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration, this

function is invalid even if «2» is set to the parameter «#1205 G0bdcc». In this case, a normal time constant

acceleration/deceleration (acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) is applied.

(4) When G00 non-interpolation type («#1086 G0Intp» = «1»), rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step

acceleration/deceleration cannot be used. It is valid at interpolation mode only.

(5) When the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is applied, rapid

traverse acceleration/deceleration types («#2003 smgst» bit0 to bit3) are ignored.

(6) When the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, G0 constant

inclination («#1200 G0_acc») cannot be used. Even if G0 constant inclination is valid («#1200 G0_acc» =

«1»), the setting is ignored.

(7) When the rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, programmable

in-position check cannot be used. The in-position width will be ignored even if commanded.

(8) This function cannot be used during the tool center point control.

(9) For rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration, feed forward control is

invalid.

(f) Speed

(t) Time

(ac) Acceleration

(rm) Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration

(mr) Manual rapid traverse (linear)

(sf) S-pattern filter control

(sac) Soft acceleration/deceleration

(f) (rm)

(t)

(mr)

(sf)

(ac)

(sac)

(f)

(rm)

(mr)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

151

7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

Function and purpose

This function performs linear acceleration/deceleration at a constant inclination in the cutting feed mode. The

inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration method can be more beneficial in reducing cycle time in

comparison to the time-constant acceleration/deceleration method.

Detailed description

(1) Cutting feed constant inclination acceleration/deceleration function is effective only when the

commanded cutting feed acceleration/deceleration mode is linear method or soft method in a linear

interpolation command.

(2) The program format of linear interpolation when cutting feed constant inclination acceleration/

deceleration is executed is the same as when this function is invalid (time constant acceleration/

deceleration).

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

152

(3) The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where cutting feed constant inclination acceleration/

deceleration is performed are as follows.

[When the interpolation distance is long enough for the rapid traverse rate to be achieved]

In case of time-constant acceleration/deceleration:

In case of inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration:

In the case of time-constant acceleration/deceleration, the acceleration/deceleration inclination is determined

by the cutting feed rate. In the case of inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration, it’s determined by the

maximum cutting feed rate; therefore, the cycle time will be shorter than in the former case.

clamp : Maximum cutting feed rate (Axis specification parameter «#2002 clamp»)

F : Cutting feed rate

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»)

1 : Acceleration/deceleration inclination (time-constant acceleration/deceleration)

2 : Acceleration/deceleration inclination (inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration)

T1 : Interpolation time (time-constant acceleration/deceleration)

T2 : Interpolation time (inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration)

L : Interpolation distance

Ts1

L

Ts1

clamp

T1

F

1

21Ts F L

T1 +=

) Ts1 F

(tan-1=1

Ts1

L

Ts1

2

clamp

T2

F clamp FTs1

F L

T2

+=

) Ts1

clamp (tan2 -1=

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

153

[When the interpolation distance is so short that the cutting feed rate is not achieved]

[When the interpolation distance is so short that the maximum cutting feed rate is not achieved and

the override for cutting feed inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration is activated]

clamp : Maximum cutting feed rate (Axis specification parameter «#2002 clamp»)

F : Cutting feed rate

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the cutting feed rate

: Acceleration/deceleration inclination

T : Interpolation time

L : Interpolation distance

clamp : Maximum cutting feed rate (Axis specification parameter «#2002 clamp»)

F : Cutting feed rate

OVR : Maximum override value for cutting feed inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Base Specifications Parameter «#1367 G1AccOVRMax»)

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the cutting feed rate

: Acceleration/deceleration inclination

) Ts1

clamp (tan -1=

L

Ts1

clamp

T

F

Ts2

clamp LTs22T =

L

Ts1

clamp

T

F OVR

Ts2

) Ts1

clamp (tan -1=

2T = clamp

OVRLTs2

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

154

[2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When Tsx < Tsz, Lx Lz)]

When 2-axis simultaneous interpolation is performed during linear interpolation inclination-constant

acceleration/deceleration, the acceleration/deceleration time of each axis will be set to the longest one among

the acceleration/decoration times determined by maximum cutting feed rates (axis specification parameter

«#2002 clamp»), cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant (axis specification parameter «#2007

G1tL»), cutting feed rates (F) and interpolation distances (L) of the simultaneously commanded axes.

Should the acceleration/deceleration time constant of an axis be greater than the cutting feed acceleration/

deceleration time constant (axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»), that axis accelerates/decelerates in

accordance with the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant (axis specification parameter «#2007

G1tL»).

When Tsx < Tsz, the acceleration/deceleration time of the block (Ts) will be equal to the acceleration/

deceleration time Tsz (Z axis acceleration/deceleration time).

Tsx : X axis acceleration/deceleration time

Tsz : Z axis acceleration/deceleration time

Lx : X axis interpolation distance

Lz : Z axis interpolation distance

Fx : X axis feed rate

Fz : Z axis feed rate

Lx

TsxTsx

clampX

X

Z

TszTsz

Lz

clampZ

Fx

Fz

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

155

[When the feed rate is so low that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the minimum time

constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration]

Acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time calculated by the

cutting feed rate from going below the minimum time constant.

clamp : Maximum cutting feed rate (Axis specification parameter «#2002 clamp»)

F : Cutting feed rate

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the cutting feed rate

Ts3 : Minimum time for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Axis specification parameter «#2199 G1tMin»)

T : Interpolation time

L : Interpolation distance

L

Ts1

clamp

T

Ts3

F

Ts2

Ts32 F

L T +=

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

156

[When the interpolation distance is so short that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the

minimum time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration]

Acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time calculated by

interpolation distance from going below the minimum time constant.

clamp : Maximum cutting feed rate (Axis specification parameter «#2002 clamp»)

F : Cutting feed rate

Ts1 : Acceleration/deceleration time (Axis specification parameter «#2007 G1tL»)

Ts2 : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the cutting feed rate

Ts3 : Minimum time for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration (Axis specification parameter «#2199 G1tMin»)

T : Interpolation time

L : Interpolation distance

L

Ts1

clamp

T

Ts3

F

Ts2

Ts32T =

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.9 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration

157

Precautions

(1) If a value greater than 100 (%) is designated for cutting feed override under cutting feed inclination-

constant acceleration/deceleration control, the acceleration/deceleration inclination becomes steeper as

the feedrate increases. To use the cutting feed override function at a rate higher than 100%, set the

parameter «#1367 G1AccOVRMax» accordingly. When the setting of this parameter is between 0 and 99,

the override value is handled as 100% even if the specified cutting feed override is over 100%.

(2) If there are one or more NC control axes that are set to soft acceleration/deceleration for G1, the

parameter «#1367 G1AccOVRMax» setting will be ignored and the cutting feed override value is handled

as 100%.

(3) When «#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes» is set to the soft acceleration/deceleration,

and «#1219 aux03 bit7: Time constant setting changeover for soft acceleration/deceleration» is set to «1:

Accelerating time is obtained by G0tL+G0t1 (G1tL+G1t1)», acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted

to prevent the sum of the 1st step and 2nd step acceleration/deceleration times from going below the

minimum time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration.

(4) When «#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes» is set to the soft acceleration/deceleration, if

the acceleration/deceleration is shorter than G0tL (or G1tL), the 2nd step time constant will be reduced

by the same rate as the 1st step time constant.

(5) If the commanded travel distance in the block is small or the commanded linear interpolation (G1) feed

rate is low, acceleration/deceleration time becomes quite short when the inclination-constant

acceleration/deceleration method is enabled. Although this does contribute to reduce the cycle time, this

can also be a cause of machine vibrations. Such vibrations can be prevented by setting the minimum

time constant for inclination-constant acceleration/deceleration in parameter «#2198 G0tMin». By this

setting, the acceleration/deceleration speed is controlled so that the acceleration/deceleration time

should not fall below the preset value.

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

158

7.10 Exact Stop Check ; G09

Function and purpose

In order to prevent roundness during corner cutting and machine shock when the tool feedrate changes

suddenly, there are times when it is desirable to start the commands in the following block once the in-position

state after the machine has decelerated and stopped has been checked. The exact stop check function is

designed to accomplish this purpose.

A deceleration check is performed when the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the

same block. The G09 command is unmodal.

Either the deceleration check time or in-position state is selected with the parameter «#1193 inpos».

The in-position width is set into parameter the servo parameter «#2224 sv024».

Command format

The exact stop check command G09 has an effect only with the cutting command (G01 — G03) in its particular

block.

G09 ; … Exact stop check

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.10 Exact Stop Check ; G09

159

Detailed description

[With continuous cutting feed]

[With cutting feed in-position check]

As shown in the figure above, the remaining distance (shaded area in the above figure) of the previous block

when the next block is started can be set into the servo parameter «#2224 sv024» as the in-position width «Lc».

The in-position width is designed to reduce the roundness at the workpiece corners to below the constant

value.

To eliminate corner roundness, set the value as small as possible to servo parameter «#2224 sv024» and

perform an in-position check or assign the dwell command (G04) between blocks.

Ts : Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant

Lc : In-position width

Ts

G00 Xx2;G00 Xx1;

Ts Ts

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

Lc

Lc

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

160

With deceleration check

(1) With linear acceleration/deceleration

(2) With exponential acceleration/deceleration

(3) With exponential acceleration/linear deceleration

The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting feed

deceleration check times of each axis determined by the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constants

and by the cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously.

(Note 1) To execute exact stop check in a fixed cycle cutting block, insert command G09 into the fixed cycle

subprogram.

TS: Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Td: Deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0 to 14ms)

TS: Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Td: Deceleration check time Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 14ms)

TS: Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Td: Deceleration check time Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 14ms)

Ts

Td

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

Ts

Td

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

Td Ts

G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2;

2Ts

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.10 Exact Stop Check ; G09

161

Program example

[Exact stop check result]

N001 G09 G01 X100.000 F150 ; The commands in the following block are started once the deceleration check time or in-position state has been checked after the machine has decelerated and stopped.

N002 Y100.000 ;

(a) Tool

(b) With G09

(c) Without G09

f: Commanded speed

t: Time

Solid line indicates speed pattern with G09 command

Broken line indicates speed pattern without G09 command

N002

N001

N001

N002

f

X

Y t

(a)

(b)

(c)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

162

7.11 Exact Stop Check Mode ; G61

Function and purpose

Whereas the G09 exact stop check command checks the in-position status only for the block in which the

command has been assigned, the G61 command functions as a modal. This means that deceleration will

apply at the end points of each block to all the cutting commands (G01 to G03) subsequent to G61 and that

the in-position status will be checked.

The modal command is released by the following commands.

G61.1……….High-accuracy control

G63 ………. Tapping mode

G64 ………. Cutting mode

Command format

In-position check is executed when the G61 command has been selected, and thereafter, the in-position

check is executed at the end of the cutting command block until the check mode is canceled.

G61 ; … Exact stop check mode

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.12 Deceleration Check

163

7.12 Deceleration Check

Function and purpose

The deceleration check is a function that determines the method of the check at the completion of the axis

movement block’s movement.

The deceleration check includes the in-position check and commanded speed check method.

The G0 and G1 deceleration check method combination can be selected. (Refer to section «Deceleration

check combination».)

With this function, the deceleration check in the reverse direction of G1 -> G0 or G1 -> G1 can be changed by

changing the parameter setting.

Detailed description

Types of deceleration check

(1) Command speed check

With the commanded speed check, the completion of deceleration is judged when the command to the

motor is completed.

(2) In-position check

With the in-position check, the completion of deceleration is judged when the motor moves to the in-

position width designated with the parameter.

Command to motor

Movement of motor

Deceleration start point (Judges the stop here)

Command to motor

Movement of motor

G0/G1 in-position width

Deceleration start point (Judges the stop here)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

164

Designating deceleration check

The deceleration check by designating a parameter includes «deceleration check specification type 1» and

«deceleration check specification type 2». The setting is selected with the parameter «#1306 InpsTyp».

(1) Deceleration check specification type 1 («#1306 InpsTyp» = 0)

The G0 and G1 deceleration check method can be selected with the base specification parameter

deceleration check method 1 (#1193 inpos) and deceleration check method 2 (#1223 AUX07/BIT-1).

(Note 1) XX expresses all commands.

(Note 2) «#1223 aux07» is the part system common parameter.

(2) Deceleration check specification type 2 («#1306 InpsTyp» = 1)

Rapid traverse and cutting feed in-position are designated with the «#1193 inpos» parameter.

(Note 1) «#1193 inpos» is the parameter per part system.

(Note 2) «G0» means the rapid traverse, and «G1» means the cutting feed.

Parameter Rapid traverse command Parameter Other than rapid traverse command

(G1: other than G0 command)

inpos (#1193)

G0 -> XX (G0+G9 -> XX)

AUX07/BIT-1 (#1223/BIT-1)

G1+G9 -> XX G1 -> XX

0 Command deceleration check 0 Command deceleration check No deceleration check

1 In-position check 1 In-position check

Parameter Command block

#1193 inpos G0 G1+G9 G1

0 Command deceleration check Command deceleration check No deceleration check

1 In-position check In-position check No deceleration check

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.12 Deceleration Check

165

7.12.1 G1 -> G0 Deceleration Check

Detailed description

In G1 -> G0 continuous blocks, the parameter «#1502 G0Ipfg» can be changed to change the deceleration

check in the reverse direction.

Program example

When there is a deceleration check in the movement of several axes:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Same direction Reverse direction

G0Ipfg:0

(a) The acceleration rate is excessive due to the

composite speed of G1 and G0.

G0Ipfg:1

Command deceleration

G91 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G0 X-100. Y120. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis moves in the reverse direction in the program.

G91 G1 X100. Y-100. F4000 ; G0 X80. Y100. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the Y axis moves in the reverse direction in the program.

G90 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G0 X80. Y100. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis moves in the reverse direction in the program. (When the program start position is X0 Y0)

G91 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G0 X100. Y100. ;

A deceleration check is not carried out, because both the X axis and the Y axis move in the same direction in the program.

G91 G1 X100. Y80. F4000 ; G0 X80. ;

A deceleration check is not carried out, because the X axis moves in the same direction, and there is no Y axis movement command in the program.

G0 G1

G0 G1

(a)

G0 G1

G1 G0

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

166

7.12.2 G1 -> G1 Deceleration Check

Detailed description

In G1 -> G1 continuous blocks, the parameter «#1503 G1Ipfg» can be changed to change the deceleration

check of the reverse direction.

Program example

When there is a deceleration check in the movement of several axes:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Same direction Reverse direction

G1Ipfg:0

G1Ipfg:1

Command deceleration

G91 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G1 X-100. Y120. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis moves in the reverse direction in the program.

G91 G1 X100. Y-100. F4000 ; G1 X80. Y100. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the Y axis moves in the reverse direction in the program.

G90 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G1 X80. Y120. ;

A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis moves in the reverse direction in the program. (When the program start position is X0 Y0)

G91 G1 X100. Y100. F4000 ; G1 X100. Y100. ;

A deceleration check is not carried out, because both the X axis and the Y axis move in the same direction in the program.

G91 G1 X100. Y80. F4000 ; G1 X80. ;

A deceleration check is not carried out, because the X axis moves in the same direction, and there is no Y axis movement command in the program.

G1 G1

G1 G1

G1 G1

G1 G1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.13 Automatic Corner Override

167

7.13 Automatic Corner Override

Function and purpose

With tool radius compensation, this function reduces the load during inside cutting of automatic corner R, or

during inside corner cutting, by automatically applying override to the feedrate.

This function is always valid in the tool radius compensation (G41/G42).

Detailed description

Machining inside corners

When cutting an inside corner, as shown in the figure below, the machining allowance amount increases and

a greater load is applied to the tool. To remedy this, override is applied automatically within the corner set

range, the feedrate is reduced, the increase in the load is reduced and cutting is performed effectively.

However, this function is valid only when finished shapes are programmed.

[Operation]

(1) When automatic corner override is not to be applied :

When the tool moves in the order of P1 -> P2 -> P3 in the above figure, the machining allowance at P3

increase by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so that tool load increases.

(2) When automatic corner override is to be applied :

When the inside corner angle in the above figure is less than the angle set in the parameter, the

override set into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci.

(a) Workpiece (b) Machining allowance (c) Tool

(d) Programmed path (finished shape) (e) Workpiece surface shape

(f) Tool center path

: Max. angle at inside corner

Ci : Deceleration range (IN)

Ci

S

P1

P3

(b)

(b)

(c)

(a) (d)

(e)

(f)

P2

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

168

[Parameter setting]

The following parameters are set into the machining parameters. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details on

the setting method.:

Automatic corner R

(1) The override set in the parameter is automatically applied at the deceleration range Ci and corner R

section for inside offset with automatic corner R. (There is no angle check.)

# Parameter Setting range

#8007 OVERRIDE 0 to 100 [%]

#8008 Max. angle at inside corner 0 to 180 []

#8009 DSC. ZONE 0 to 99999.999 [mm] or 0 to 3937.000 [inch]

(a) Workpiece (b) Machining allowance (c) Corner R center

(d) Corner R section (e) Programmed path (f) Workpiece surface shape

(g) Tool center path

Ci

(a)

(b)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e) (f) (g)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.13 Automatic Corner Override

169

Application example

(1) Linear — linear corner

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(2) Linear — arc (outside offset) corner

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(3) Arc (inside offset) — linear corner

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(Note) The deceleration range Ci where the override is applied is the length of the arc with an arc

command.

(4) Arc (inside offset) — arc (outside offset) corner

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(a) Tool (b) Program (c) Tool center

(a) Tool (b) Program (c) Tool center

(a) Tool (b) Program (c) Tool center

(a) Tool (b) Program (c) Tool center

Ci

(b)

(a)

(c)

Ci

(b) (c)

(a)

Ci

(b)

(a) (a)

(c)

N1

Ci

N2 (b)

(c)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

170

Relation with other functions

Function Override at corner

Cutting feed override

Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override has been applied.

Override cancel

Automatic corner override is not canceled by override cancel.

Speed clamp Valid after automatic corner override

Dry run Automatic corner override is invalid.

Synchronous feed Automatic corner override is applied to the synchronous feedrate.

Thread cutting Automatic corner override is invalid.

G31 skip Program error occurs with G31 command during tool radius compensation.

Machine lock Valid

Machine lock high speed

Automatic corner override is invalid.

G00 Invalid

G01 Valid

G02,G03 Valid

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.13 Automatic Corner Override

171

Precautions

(1) Automatic corner override is valid only in the G01, G02, and G03 modes; it is not effective in the G00

mode. When switching from the G00 mode to the G01 (or G02 or G03) mode at a corner (or vice versa),

automatic corner override will not be applied at that corner in the G00 block.

(2) The automatic corner override will not be applied until the tool radius compensation mode is entered.

(3) Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the tool radius compensation is started

or canceled.

(4) Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the tool radius compensation I, K vector

command is issued.

(5) Automatic corner override will not be applied when intersection calculation cannot be executed.

Intersection calculation cannot be executed in the following case.

-When the movement command block does not continue for four or more times.

(6) The deceleration range with an arc command is the length of the arc.

(7) The inside corner angle, as set by parameter, is the angle on the programmed path.

(8) Automatic corner override will not be applied when the maximum angle in the parameter is set to 0 or

180.

(9) Automatic corner override will not be applied when the override in the parameter is set to 0 or 100.

(a) Start-up block (b) Program

(c)Tool center (d) Cancel block

(e) Automatic corner override will not be applied.

(b) Program (c) Tool center

(e) Automatic corner override will not be applied.

(c) (d)

(e)

(a) (b)

(G41 X_Z_I_K_;)

(c)

(e)

(b)

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

172

7.14 Tapping Mode ; G63

Function and purpose

The G63 command allows the control mode best suited for tapping to be entered, as indicated below:

(1) Cutting override is fixed at 100%.

(2) Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.

(3) Feed hold is invalid.

(4) Single block is invalid.

(5) In-tapping mode signal is output.

G63 is released by the exact stop check mode (G61), high-accuracy control mode (G61.1), or cutting mode

(G64) command.

The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.

Command format

G63; … Tapping mode

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

7.15 Cutting Mode ; G64

173

7.15 Cutting Mode ; G64

Function and purpose

The G64 command allows the cutting mode in which smooth cutting surfaces are obtained to be established.

Unlike the exact stop check mode (G61), the next block is executed continuously with the machine not

decelerating and stopping between cutting feed blocks in this mode.

G64 is released by the exact stop check mode (G61), high-accuracy control mode (G61.1), or tapping mode

(G63).

The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned ON.

Command format

G64; … Cutting mode

7 Feed Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

174

8 Dwell

MITSUBISHI CNC

176

8.1 Dwell (Time Designation) ; G04

Function and purpose

The machine movement is temporarily stopped by the program command to make the waiting time state.

Therefore, the start of the next block can be delayed. The waiting time state can be canceled by inputting the

skip signal.

Command format

The input command unit for the dwell time depends on the parameter.

Detailed description

(1) When designating the dwell time with X, the decimal point command is valid.

(2) When designating the dwell time with P, the availability of the decimal point command can be selected

with the parameter (#8112). When the decimal point command is invalid in the parameter setting, the

command below the decimal point issued with P is ignored.

(3) When the decimal point command is valid or invalid, the dwell time command range is as follows.

(4) The dwell time setting unit applied when there is no decimal point can be made 1s by setting 1 in the

parameter «#1078 Decpt2». This is effective only for X and P for which the decimal command is valid.

(5) When a cutting command is in the previous block, the dwell command starts calculating the dwell time

after the machine has decelerated and stopped. When it is commanded in the same block as an M, S, T

or B command, the calculation starts simultaneously.

(6) The dwell is valid during the interlock.

(7) The dwell is valid even for the machine lock.

(8) The dwell can be canceled by setting the parameter «#1173 dwlskp» beforehand. If the set skip signal is

input during the dwell time, the remaining time is discarded, and the following block will be executed.

G04 X__ /P__ ; … Dwell (Time designation)

X/P Dwell time

Command range when the decimal point command is valid

Command range when the decimal point command is invalid

0 to 99999.999(s) 0 to 99999999 (ms)

(a) Previous block cutting command (b) Dwell command (c) Dwell time (d) Next block

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

8.1 Dwell (Time Designation) ; G04

177

Program example

(Note 1) The above examples are the results under the following conditions.

— Input setting unit 0.001mm or 0.0001inch

— #100 = 1000 ;

(Note 2) «G04P DECIMAL PNT-P» is a control parameter (#8112).

(Note 3) If the input setting unit is 0.0001inch, the X before G04 will be multiplied by 10. For example for

«X5. G04 ;», the dwell time will be 50 seconds.

Precautions and restrictions

(1) When using this function, command X after G04 in order to make sure that the dwell is based on X.

Command

Dwell time [s]

#1078 Decpt2 = 0 #1078 Decpt2 = 1

G04P DECIMAL PNT-N G04P DECIMAL PNT-P G04P DECIMAL PNT-N G04P DECIMAL PNT-P

G04 X500 ; 0.5 500

G04 X5000 ; 5 5000

G04 X5. ; 5 5

G04 X#100 ; 1000 1000

G04 P5000 ; 5 5 5000

G04 P12.345 ; 0.012 12.345 0.012 12.345

G04 P#100 ; 1 1000 1 1000

8 Dwell

MITSUBISHI CNC

178

179

9

Miscellaneous Functions

9 Miscellaneous Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

180

9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits)

Function and purpose

The miscellaneous functions are also known as M functions, and they command auxiliary functions, such as

spindle forward and reverse rotation, operation stop and coolant ON/OFF.

Detailed description

These functions are designated by an 8-digit number (0 to 99999999) following the address M with this

controller, and up to 4 groups can be commanded in a single block.

The number of M commands that can be issued within the same block is determined by the parameter setting

(#12005 Mfig).

(Example) G00 Xx Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;

When five or more commands are issued in a block, only the last four will be valid.

Whether to BCD output or binary output the second miscellaneous function can be selected by a parameter.

The four commands of M00, M01, M02, and M30 are used as auxiliary commands for specific objectives and

so they cannot be used as general auxiliary commands. Therefore, 92 miscellaneous functions are available.

Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine manufacturer for the actual

correspondence between the functions and numerical values.

When the M00, M01, M02, and M30 functions are used, the next block is not read into the pre-read buffer due

to pre-read inhibiting.

If the M function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands may be executed

in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which sequence applies.

(1) The M function is executed after the movement command.

(2) The M function is executed at the same time as the movement command.

Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands. The four M functions

used for specific purposes will now be described.

Program stop : M00

When the NC has read this function, it stops reading the next block. As far as the NC system’s functions are

concerned, it only stops reading the next block. Whether such machine functions as the spindle rotation and

coolant supply are stopped or not differs according to the machine in question.

Re-start is enabled by pressing the automatic start button on the machine operation board.

Whether resetting can be initiated by M00 depends on the machine specifications.

Optional stop : M01

If the M01 command is read when the optional stop switch on the machine operation board is ON, it will stop

reading the next block and perform the same operation as the M00.

If the optional stop switch is OFF, the M01 command is ignored.

(Example) The status and operation of optional stop switch

N10 G00 X1000 ; Stops at N11 when switch is ON

N11 M01 ; Next command (N12) is executed without stopping at N11 when switch is OFF

N12 G01 X2000 Z3000 F600 ;

:

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits)

181

Program end : M02 or M30

This command is normally used in the final block for completing the machining, and so it is primarily used for

cueing up the machining program. Whether the program is actually cued up or not depends on the machine

specifications.

Depending on the machine specifications, the system is reset by the M02 or M30 command upon completion

of cueing up the program and any other commands issued in the same block.

(Although the contents of the command position display counter are not cleared by this reset action, the modal

commands and compensation amounts are canceled.)

The next operation stops when the cueing up operation is completed (the in-automatic operation lamp goes

off). To restart the unit, the automatic start button must be pressed or similar steps must be taken.

When the program is restarted after M02 and M30 are completed, if the first movement command is

designated only with a coordinate word, the interpolation mode will function when the program ends. It is

recommended that a G function always be designated for the movement command designated first.

(Note 1) Independent signals are also output respectively for the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands and

these outputs are each reset by pressing the reset key.

(Note 2) M02 or M30 can be assigned by manual data input (MDI).

At this time, commands can be issued simultaneously with other commands.

Internal processing with M00/M01/M02/M30 commands

Internal processing suspends pre-reading when the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command has been read. Other

machining programs cueing up operations and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according the

machine specifications.

9 Miscellaneous Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

182

9.2 Secondary Miscellaneous Functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits)

Function and purpose

These serve to assign the indexing table positioning and etc. In this controller, they are assigned by an 8-digit

number from 0 to 99999999 following address A, B or C. The machine maker determines which codes

correspond to which positions.

Detailed description

Select the address A, B or C that is used for the secondary miscellaneous function by a parameter «#1170

M2name». (Except the address that is used for the axis name.)

The secondary miscellaneous function can be issued up to 4 sets in a block. The number of M commands to

be issued within a same block is determined by the parameter setting (#12011 Bfig).

Whether to BCD output or binary output the secondary miscellaneous function can be selected by a

parameter.

If the A, B or C function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands may be

executed in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which sequence applies.

(1) The A, B or C function is executed after the movement command.

(2) The A, B or C function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.

Processing and completion sequences are required for all secondary miscellaneous functions.

The table below gives address combinations. It is not possible to use an address which is the same for the

axis name of an additional axis and secondary miscellaneous function.

Precautions

When A has been assigned as the secondary miscellaneous function address, the following commands

cannot be used.

— Linear angle commands (,A can be used.)

— Geometric command

Additional axis name

A B C

Secondary miscellaneous function

A —

B —

C —

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

9.3 Index Table Indexing

183

9.3 Index Table Indexing

Function and purpose

Index table indexing can be carried out by setting the index axis.

The indexing command only requires specifying the indexing angle to the axis set for indexing. It is not

necessary to command special M codes for table clamping and unclamping, thus simplifying the program.

Detailed description

The index table index function carries out following operations.

Command format example

(Example) G00 B90 ;

B: The axis that was designated by the index axis with parameter «#2076 index x».

(1) Set «1» to the «index_x» parameter (#2076) of the axis in which index table indexing will be carried out.

(2) The movement command (either absolute or incremental) for the selected axis is executed with the

program command.

(3) An unclamp operation is carried out before the axis movement.

(4) The commanded axis movement starts after the unclamp operation completes.

(5) The clamp operation is carried out after the movement is completed.

(6) The next block is processed after the clamp operation completes.

[Operation time chart]

Program command

Unclamp command

Unclamp completed

B axis movement

T10 FIN WAIT 0800 T10 FIN WAIT 0800

G0 B90.;

9 Miscellaneous Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

184

Precautions

(1) Several axes can be set as index table indexing axes.

(2) The movement speed of index table indexing axes follows the feedrate of the modal (G0/G1) at that time.

(3) The unclamp command for the indexing axes is also issued when the index table indexing axes are

commanded in the same block as other axes. Thus, the movement of other axes commanded in the

same block is not carried out until the unclamp operation completes.

Note that the movement of other axes commanded in the same block is carried out during a non-

interpolation commands.

(4) Index table indexing axes are used as normal rotation axes, but this function performs an unclamp

operation even for linear axes.

(5) If some error that makes unclamp command OFF occurs during indexing axis movement in automatic

operation, the unclamp state will remain, and the indexing axis will execute a deceleration stop.

Other axes commanded in the same block will also execute a deceleration stop, except during non-

interpolation commands.

(6) If the axis movement is interrupted by an interlock, etc., during indexing axis movement, the unclamp

state will remain.

(7) The clamp and unclamp operations are not executed when the movement commands of the index table

indexing axis are successively issued.

Note that the clamp and unclamp operations are executed even when the movement commands are

continued during single block operation.

(8) Make sure that the command position is at a position where clamping is possible.

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

186

10.1 Spindle Functions

Function and purpose

These functions are assigned with an 8-digit (0 to 99999999) number following the address S, and one group

can be assigned in one block.

The output signal is a 32-bit binary data with sign and start signal.

Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control ; G96,G97

187

10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control ; G96,G97

Function and purpose

These commands automatically control the spindle rotation speed in line with the changes in the radius

coordinate values as cutting proceeds in the diametrical direction, and they serve to keep the cutting point

speed constant during the cutting.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The constant surface speed control axis is set by parameter «#1181 G96_ax».

0: Fixed at 1st axis (P command invalid)

1: 1st axis

2: 2nd axis

3: 3rd axis

(2) When the above-mentioned parameter is not zero, the constant surface speed control axis can be

assigned by address P.

(Example) G96_ax = 1

(3) Example of selection program and operation

G96 S__ P__ ; … Constant surface speed ON

S Surface speed

P Constant surface speed control axis

G97 ; … Constant surface speed cancel

Program Constant surface speed control axis

G96 S100 ; 1st axis

G96 S100 P3 ; 3rd axis

F300;

:

G90 G96 G01 X50. Z100. S200 ; The spindle rotation speed is controlled so that the surface speed is 200m/min.

:

G97 G01 X50. Z100. F300 S500 ; The spindle rotation speed is controlled to 500r/min.

:

M02 ; The modal returns to the initial value.

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

188

Precautions

Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface

speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the

allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during

machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine or may cause damage to the operators. Thus

make sure to use this control while the «spindle speed clamp» is enabled.

When the constant surface speed control is commanded, keep enough distance from the program zero point.

Program example

(1) When the parameter «1146 Sclamp» is set to «0».

(2) When the parameter «1146 Sclamp» is set to «1».

(Note) For safety, issue the rotation command to the spindle after G92.

G96 S200 ; … The spindle rotation speed is controlled so that the surface speed is 200m/min.

G92 S4000 Q200 ; … The spindle rotation speed is clamped up to 4000r/min and down to 200r/min.

M3 ; … The rotation command to the spindle

G92 S4000 Q200 ; … The spindle rotation speed is clamped up to 4000r/min and down to 200r/min.

G96 S200 ; … The spindle rotation speed is controlled so that the surface speed is 200m/min.

M3 ; … The rotation command to the spindle

WARNING

1. Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface

speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the

allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining,

which may result in breakage of tools or machine or may cause damage to the operators.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting ; G92

189

10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting ; G92

Function and purpose

The maximum clamp rotation speed of the spindle can be assigned by address S following G92 and the

minimum clamp rotation speed by address Q.

Use this command when the spindle speed needs to be limited depending on the workpiece to be machined,

the chuck to be mounted on the spindle and the tool specifications, etc.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Besides this command, parameters can be used to set the rotation speed range up to 4 stages in 1 r/min

units to accommodate gear selection between the spindle and spindle motor. The lowest upper limit and

highest lower limit are valid among the rotation speed ranges based on the parameters and based on

«G92 S_ Q_ ;».

(2) Set in the parameters «#1146 Sclamp» and «#1227 aux11/bit5» whether to carry out rotation speed clamp

only in the constant surface speed mode or even when the constant surface speed is canceled.

(Note 1) G92S command and rotation speed clamp operation

(Note2) The address Q following the G92 command is handled as the spindle speed clamp command

regardless of the constant surface mode.

(3) The command value of the spindle clamp speed will be cleared by modal reset (reset 2 or reset &

rewind).

Note that the modal is retained if the parameter «#1210 RstGmd / bit19» is ON.

When the power is turned ON, the setting will be cleared to 0.

G92 S__ Q__ ; … Spindle Clamp Speed Setting

S Maximum clamp rotation speed

Q Minimum clamp rotation speed

Sclamp=0 Sclamp=1

aux11/bit5=0 aux11/bit5=1 aux11/bit5=0 aux11/bit5=1

Command In G96 ROTATION SPEED CLAMP COMMAND ROTATION SPEED CLAMP COMMAND

In G97 SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED COMMAND ROTATION SPEED CLAMP COMMAND

Operation

In G96 ROTATION SPEED CLAMP EXECUTION ROTATION SPEED CLAMP EXECUTION

In G97 NO ROTATION SPEED CLAMP ROTATION SPEED

CLAMP EXECUTION NO ROTATION SPEED

CLAMP

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

190

Precautions

(1) Once the maximum clamp speed and the minimum clamp speed are set using the spindle clamp speed

setting (G92 S_ Q _), the maximum speed clamp will not be cancelled even if the command «G92 S0» is

issued. Even when G92 S0 is commanded, the value of Q_ is kept enabled and Q_ is greater than S0.

(2) Note that if the spindle clamp speed setting (G92 S_ Q_) is not commanded, the speed may increase to

the machine’s maximum specified speed that is set by the parameter.

Especially when the constant surface speed control (G96 S_) is commanded, command the spindle

clamp speed setting as well as the spindle maximum rotation speed. As the tool moves closer to the

spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the

workpiece or chuck, etc.

WARNING

1. The spindle clamp speed setting command is a modal command, but make sure to confirm that the G and F

modal and coordinate values are appropriate if the operation is started from a block in the middle of the

program. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the

start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block

without carrying out these operations, the machine interference may occur or the machine may operate at an

unexpected speed.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

10.4 Spindle/C Axis Control

191

10.4 Spindle/C Axis Control

Function and purpose

This function enables a spindle (MDS-D or later) to also be used as a C axis (rotary axis) by an external

signal.

Detailed description

Spindle/C axis changeover

Changeover between the spindle and C axis is done by the C axis Servo ON signal.

At servo OFF …… Spindle (C axis control not possible)

At servo ON …… C axis (spindle control not possible)

The C axis is in a reference position return incomplete state.

(1) Reference position return state

Reference position return is incomplete when the Z phase has not been passed.

Reference position return is complete when the Z phase has been passed.

(2) C axis position data

The NC’s internal C axis position data is updated even for the spindle rotation during spindle control.

The C axis coordinate value counter is held during spindle control, and is updated according to the

amount moved during spindle control when the C axis servo READY is turned ON. (The C axis position

at servo ON may differ from the position just before the previous servo OFF.)

C axis SpindleSpindle Servo ON

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

192

Changeover timing chart example

(Note 1) For axis commands, the reference position return complete is checked at calculation. Thus, when

the C axis servo ON command and C axis command are continuous, the program error (P430) will

occur as shown above in *2.

In response to this kind of situation, the following two processes must be carried out on user PLC,

as shown above in *1.

— Input the recalculation request signal with a servo ON command.

— Wait for the completion of the servo ON command until the C axis enters a servo READY state.

C axis gain

The C axis gain is changed over (the optimum gain is selected) by the C axis cutting condition. During C axis

cutting feed, cutting gain is applied. During other axis’ cutting feed (C axis face turning), non-cutting stop gain

is applied. Non-cutting gain is applied in all other cases.

(Note 1) The cutting feed of other part systems does not affect the C axis gain selection.

(Note 2) There are 1st to 3rd cutting gains, which are selected with the ladder.

*2

Blocks being calculated

Recalculation request

Blocks being executed

Reference position return complete status

C axis command (automatic operation)

Spindle forward run/ reverse run start

Servo ON

Servo READY

Motor speed C axis movement

Program error (P430 AXIS NOT RET.)

Reference position return complete

Reference position return complete

Orientation Orientation

Spindle reverse run

Reverse run

*2*1

*1

Forward run

Spindle forward run

C axis command

Servo ON C axis command

C axis command recalculation

Servo OFF

Spindle reverse run

C axis command

Spindle forward run Servo ON Servo OFF Spindle reverse run Servo ON

Servo ON

Program error because the reference position return is incomplete at this calculation.

Reference position return complete at recalculation

G1

G1

G1G0

G0

G1

G0

G0

Z axis command (other part system)

X axis command (C axis part system)

Selected gain

C axis command

Non-cutting gain

Non-cutting gainNon-cutting gain Cutting stop gainCutting gain

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

10.4 Spindle/C Axis Control

193

Deceleration check in movement including spindle/C-axis

The deceleration check in a movement command including the spindle/C-axis is as the table described below

when the following condition is fulfilled. When the different values are set for the position loop gain in non-

cutting mode (spindle parameter #3203 PGCO) and the position loop gain in cutting mode (spindle parameter

#3330 PGC1 to #3333 PGC4). That is because a vibration and so on occurs in the machine when the gain is

changed during the axis movement.

(Note 1) When G1 command is issued, the in-position check is performed regardless of the deceleration

check parameter.

(Note 2) XX expresses all commands.

Precautions and restrictions

(1) A reference position return cannot be executed by the orientation when there is no Z phase in the

detector (PLG, ENC, other).

Replace the detector with one having a Z phase, or if using the detector as it is, set the position control

changeover to «After deceleration stop» in the parameters (Spindle parameters, SP129 bitE:1), and set

the axis to «Axis without zero point» (Zero point return parameters, noref:1).

(2) The program error (P430) will occur if a C axis command is issued during servo OFF or during

orientation.

(3) Do not execute a servo OFF during a C axis command.

The remaining C axis commands will be cleared at servo ON.

(If servo OFF is executed during C axis control, the feed will stop and spindle control will occur.)

(4) If servo ON is executed during spindle rotation, the rotation will stop and C axis control will occur.

(5) Dog-type reference position return is not possible for the C axis.

Set the reference position return to the orientation method in the parameters (Spindle parameters,

SP129 bitE: 0), or set the axis to «Axis without reference position (zero point)» (Zero point return

parameters «#2031 noref: 1»).

Parameter Rapid traverse command Parameter Other than rapid traverse command

(G1: other than G0 command)

Inpos (#1193)

G0 -> XX (G0+G9 -> XX)

AUX07/bit1 (#1223/bit1)

G1 -> G0 (G0+G9 -> XX)

G1 -> G1

0 Command deceleration check

0 In-position check (Applicable only to SV024)

No deceleration check

1 In-position check 1

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

194

10.5 Multiple-spindle Control

Function and purpose

Multiple spindle control is a function used to control the sub-spindle in a machine tool that has a main spindle

(1st spindle) and a sub-spindle (2nd spindle to 4th spindle).

Multiple-spindle control II (ext36/bit0 = 1) :

Control following the external signal (spindle command selection signal, spindle selection signal) and

spindle control command ([S***** ;] only), etc.

The spindle selection command [S =*****;] cannot be used.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

10.5 Multiple-spindle Control

195

10.5.1 Multiple-spindle Control II

Function and purpose

Multiple-spindle control II is a function that designates which spindle to select with the signals from PLC. The

command is issued to the spindle with one S command.

Detailed description

(1) Spindle command selection, spindle selection

The S command to the spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the selected spindle when the

spindle selection signal (SWS) from the PLC turns ON. The selected spindle rotates at the output

rotation speed. The spindle whose selection is canceled when the spindle selection signal (SWS) turns

OFF maintains the speed at which it was rotating at before being canceled. This allows each axis to be

simultaneously rotated at differing rotation speeds.

The spindle command selection signal is used to determine which part system each spindle receives the

S command from.

(Note) Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details on each signal.

$2 $1

Y18A8 Y1894

Y1908

Y1968

Y19C8

R6500/6501

R6550/6551 Y18F4

Y1954 R6600/6601

R6650/6651 Y19B4

X18A0

X1900

X1960

X19C0

R7002

R7052

R7102

R7152

$2

$1

R2567

R2767

R7000/7001

R7050/7051

R7100/7101

R7150/7151

SWS

SWS

SWS

SWS

S command S command

1st spindle

2nd spindle

3rd spindle

4th spindle

Encoder input

Encoder input

PLC side

Spindle rotation speed output

Spindle stop

Encoder selection

Spindle command selection

Spindle selection

Spindle enable

Spindle rotation speed input

PLC side

PLC side

PLC side

10 Spindle Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

196

Relation with other functions

(1) Spindle clamp speed setting (G92)

This is valid only on the spindle selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).

The spindle not selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS) maintains the speed at which it was

rotating before being canceled.

(The spindle clamp speed is maintained with the G92 command.)

(2) Constant surface speed control

Constant surface speed control can be applied on all spindles.

The spindle rotation speed is automatically controlled during constant surface speed control, so when

machining with constant surface speed, the spindle selection signal (SWS) for that spindle must be left

ON.

The spindle not selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS) maintains the speed at which it was

rotating before being canceled.

(3) Thread cutting/synchronous feed

The threads are cut with the spindle selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS). The encoder

feedback selected with the encoder selection signal is used.

(4) Synchronous tapping

The synchronous tapping spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).

Select the synchronous tapping spindle before issuing the synchronous tapping command. Do not

change the synchronous tapping spindle selection signal during the synchronous tapping mode.

If a C axis mode command is issued to the synchronous tapping spindle, the «M01 operation error 1026»

will occur. When the C axis command is canceled, the error will be canceled and machining will resume.

If a polygon machining command is issued to the synchronous tapping spindle, the «M01 operation error

1026″ will occur. When the polygon machining command is canceled, the error will be canceled and

machining will resume.

(5) Asynchronous tapping

The asynchronous tapping spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).

Select the asynchronous tapping spindle before issuing the tapping command. Input a calculation

request to change the asynchronous tapping spindle selection. Do not change the asynchronous

tapping spindle selection signal during the asynchronous tapping mode.

(6) Tapping retract

The tapping retract spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).

Select the spindle for which the tapping cycle execution is stopped before turning the tapping retract

signal ON. If tapping retract is executed when a different spindle is selected, the «M01 operation error

1032″ will occur. Do not change the spindle selection signal during tapping retract.

Restrictions

(1) The S manual numerical value command is invalid when multiple-spindle control II is valid.

(2) Setup parameter «#1199 Sselect» is invalid when multiple-spindle control II is valid.

(3) The spindle control mode changeover G code cannot be used when multiple-spindle control II is valid. A

program error (P34) will occur.

(4) The «S1=***» and «S2=***» commands are invalid when multiple-spindle control II is valid. The program

error (P33) will occur.

(5) The spindle gear shift command output signal (GR1/GR2) is not output when multiple-spindle control II is

valid.

197

11

Tool Functions (T command)

11 Tool Functions (T command)

MITSUBISHI CNC

198

11.1 Tool Functions (T8-digit BCD)

Function and purpose

The tool functions are also known as T functions and they assign the tool numbers. They are designated with

an 8-digit number following the address T, and one set can be commanded in one block. The output signal is

an 8-digit BCD signal and start signal.

If the T function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands may be executed

in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which sequence applies.

(1) The T function is executed after completion of the movement.

(2) The T function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.

Processing and completion sequences are required for all T commands.

199

12

Tool Compensation Functions

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

200

12.1 Tool Compensation

Function and purpose

The basic tool compensation function includes the tool length compensation and tool radius compensation.

Each compensation amount is designated with the tool compensation No. Each compensation amount is input

from the setting and display unit or the program.

Tool length compensation

(Side view)

Tool radius compensation

(Plane view)

(a) Reference position

(b) Tool length

(c) Right compensation

(d) Left compensation

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.1 Tool Compensation

201

Tool compensation memory

There are two types of tool compensation memories for I and II, setting and selecting the tool compensation

amount. (The type used is determined by the machine maker specifications.)

The compensation amount settings are preset with the setting and display unit.

Type I is selected when parameter «#1037 cmdtyp» is set to «1», and type II is selected when set to «2».

Type of tool compensation memory Classification of length compensation, radius compensation

Classification of shape compensation, wear compensation

Type I Not applied Not applied

Type II Applied Applied

(a) Reference position

(b) Reference tool

(c) Shape

(d) Tool length compensation

(e) Wear amount

(f) Tool radius compensation

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)(c)

(f)

(e) (e)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

202

Type I

One compensation amount corresponds to one compensation No. as shown on the right. Thus, these

can be used commonly regardless of the tool length compensation amount, tool radius compensation

amount, shape compensation amount and wear compensation amount.

(D1) = a1, (H1) = a1

(D2) = a2 , (H2) = a2

: :

(Dn) = an, (Hn) = an

Type II

The shape compensation amount related to the tool length, wear compensation amount, shape

compensation related to the tool radius and the wear compensation amount can be set independently for

one compensation No. as shown below.

The tool length compensation amount is set with H, and the tool radius compensation amount with D.

(H1) = b1 + c1, (D1) = d1 + e1

(H2) = b2 + c2, (D2) = d2 + e2

: :

(Hn) = bn + cn, (Dn) = dn + en

Compensation No. Compensation amount

1 a1

2 a2

3 a3

: :

: :

n an

Compensation No. Tool length (H) Tool radius (D)/(Position compensation)

Shape compensation amount

Wear compensation amount

Shape compensation amount

Wear compensation amount

1 b1 c1 d1 e1

2 b2 c2 d2 e2

3 b3 c3 d3 e3

: : : : :

: : : : :

n bn cn dn en

CAUTION

1. If the tool compensation amount is changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), it

will be validated from the next block or multiple blocks onwards.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.1 Tool Compensation

203

Tool compensation No. (H/D)

This address designates the tool compensation No.

(1) H is used for the tool length compensation, and D is used for the tool position compensation and tool

radius compensation.

(2) The tool compensation No. that is designated once does not change until a new H or D is designated.

(3) The compensation No. can be commanded once in each block. (If two or more Nos. are commanded, the

latter one will be valid.)

(4) The No. of compensation sets that can be used will differ according to the machine.

For 40 sets: Designate with the H01 to H40 (D01 to D40) numbers.

(5) If a value larger than this is set, the program error (P170) will occur.

(6) The setting value ranges are as follows for each No.

The compensation amount for each compensation No. is preset with the setting and display unit.

Setting Shape compensation amount Wear compensation amount

Metric system Inch system Metric system Inch system

#1003 = B 999.999 (mm) 99.9999 (inch) 999.999 (mm) 99.9999 (inch)

#1003 = C 999.9999 (mm) 99.99999 (inch) 999.9999 (mm) 99.99999 (inch)

#1003 = D 999.99999 (mm) 99.999999 (inch) 999.99999 (mm) 99.999999 (inch)

#1003 = E 999.999999 (mm) 99.9999999 (inch) 999.999999 (mm) 99.9999999 (inch)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

204

12.2 Tool Length Compensation/Cancel ; G43/G44

Function and purpose

The end position of the movement command for each axis can be compensated by the preset amount when

this command is used. A continuity can be applied to the program by setting the actual deviation from the tool

length value decided during programming as the compensation amount using this function.

Command format

Detailed description

Tool length compensation movement amount

The movement amount is calculated with the following expressions when the G43 tool length compensation

command or G44 tool length compensation cancel command is issued.

lh1; Compensation amount for compensation No. h1

lh2; Compensation amount for compensation No. h2 (Negative value)

Regardless of the absolute value command or incremental value command, the actual end point will be the

point compensated by the compensation amount designated for the programmed movement command end

point coordinate value.

The G44 (tool length compensation cancel) mode is entered when the power is turned ON or when M02 has

been executed.

G43 Zz Hh ; … Tool length compensation + start

G44 Zz ; … Tool length compensation cancel

Z axis movement amount

G43 Zz Hh1 ; z +(lh1) Compensation in + direction by tool compensation amount

G43 Zz Hh2 ; z +(lh2) Compensation in — direction by tool compensation amount

G44 Zz ; ; z -(lh1 or lh2) Compensation amount cancel

(Example 1) For absolute value command H01=-100000

N1 G28 Z0 T01 M06 ; N2 G90 G92 Z0 ; N3 G43 Z5000 H01 ; N4 G01 Z-50000 F500 ;

(Example 2) For incremental value command H01=-100000

N1 G28 Z0 T01 M06 ; N2 G91 G92 Z0 ; N3 G43 Z5000 H01 ; N4 G01 Z-55000 F500 ;

Tool length compensation

H01=-100.

R

5.000

0 W

50.000

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.2 Tool Length Compensation/Cancel ; G43/G44

205

Compensation No.

(1) The compensation amount differs according to the compensation type.

(2) The valid range of the compensation No. will differ according to the specifications (No. of compensation

sets).

(3) If the commanded compensation No. exceeds the specification range, the program error (P170) will

occur.

(4) Tool length cancel will be applied when H0 is designated.

(5) The compensation No. commanded in the same block as G43 will be valid for the following modals.

(Example 3)

G43 Zz1 Hh1 ;Tool length compensation is executed with h1.

:

G45 Xx1 Yy1 Hh6 ;

:

G44 Zz2 ; …………………… The tool length compensation is canceled.

:

G43 Zz2 ; …………………… Tool length compensation is executed again with h1.

:

(6) If G43 is commanded in the G43 modal, a compensation of the difference between the compensation

No. data will be executed.

(Example 4)

G43 Zz1 Hh1 ; ………… Becomes the z1 + (lh1) movement.

:

G43 Zz2 Hh2 ; ………… Becomes the z2+(lh2-lh1) movement.

:

Type I

G43 Hh1; When the above is commanded, the compensation amount lh1 commanded with compensation No. h1 will be applied commonly regardless of the tool length compensation amount, tool radius compensation amount, shape compensation amount or wear compensation amount.

Type II

G43 Hh1; When the above is commanded, the compensation amount lh1 commanded with compensation No. h1 will be as follows. lh1: Shape compensation (b) + wear compensation amount (a)

l h1

R

l h1

R

(a)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

206

Axis valid for tool length compensation

(1) When parameter «#1080 Dril_Z» is set to «1», the tool length compensation is always applied on the Z

axis.

(2) When parameter «#1080 Dril_Z» is set to «0», the axis will depend on the axis address commanded in the

same block as G43. The order of priority is shown below.

Zp > Yp > Xp

(Example 5)

G43 Xx1 Hh1 ; ………… + compensation to X axis

:

G44 Xx2 ;

:

G43 Yy1 H-h2 ; ………… -compensation to Y axis

:

G44 Yy2 ;

:

G43 1 Hh3 ;………… + compensation to additional axis

:

G44 1 ;

:

G43 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 ;………… Compensation is applied on Z axis

:

G44 ;

The handling of the additional axis will follow the parameters «#1029 to 1031 aux_I, J and K» settings.

If the tool length compensation is commanded for the rotary axis, set the rotary axis name for one of the

parallel axes.

(3) If H (compensation No.) is not designated in the same block as G43, the Z axis will be valid.

(Example 6)

G43 Hh1 ;………… Compensation and cancel to X axis

:

G44 ;

Movement during other commands in tool length compensation modal

(1) If reference point return is executed with G28 and manual operation, the tool length compensation will be

canceled when the reference point return is completed.

(Example 7)

G43 Zz1 Hh1 ;

:

G28 Zz2 ; ………………. Canceled when reference point is reached. (Same as G44)

:

G43 Zz2 Hh2 ;

:

G44 G28 Zz2 ; ………… The tool length compensation will be included

when positioning the intermediate point.

Canceled when reference point is reached.

(2) The movement is commanded to the G53 machine coordinate system, the axis will move to the machine

position when the tool compensation amount is canceled.

When the G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system is returned to, the position returned to will be the

coordinates shifted by the tool compensation amount.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44

207

12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44

Function and purpose

(1) Changes in the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction and compensation amount

The tool length can be compensated in the tool axis direction even when the rotation axis rotates and the

tool axis direction becomes other than the Z axis direction. By using this function, and setting the

deviation between the tool length amount set in the program and the actual tool length as the

compensation amount, a more flexible program can be created. This is especially valid for programs in

which many rotation axis movement commands are present.

The tool length compensation amount in the tool axis direction can be changed by rotating the manual

pulse generator when the tool length compensation amount in the tool axis direction is being changed

during the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction mode.

(2) Machine configuration

The compensation using the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction function is applied to the

direction of the tool tip axis (rotary axis).

As for the axes that determine the compensation direction, a combination of the C axis (spindle) for Z

axis rotation and the A axis for X axis rotation or B axis for Y axis rotation is designated using a

parameter.

Axis A or B Axis B or C Axis A or B

(d) Rotation center (e) Tool (f) Axis direction (compensation direction) (g) Workpiece

Y

Z

X

A B

C

A

B

C (d)

(e)

(f)

A/B

(g)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

208

Command format

Detailed description

(1) G43 and G43.1 are in the same G code group. Therefore, it is not possible to designate more than one of

these commands simultaneously for compensation. G44 is used to cancel the G43 and G43.1

commands.

(2) If the G43.1 command is designated when the option for the tool length compensation in the tool axis

direction is not provided, the program error (P930) will occur.

(3) If reference position has not been completed for any of the X, Y, Z, A or B and C axes in the G43.1 block,

the program error (P430) will occur. However, the error does not apply to the following cases.

— When mechanical axes have been selected:

The error does not apply to the A, B and C axes.

— When «1» has been set for the «#2031 noref» zero point return parameter:

The error does not apply to the axis for which «noref» is set to «1» because it is considered that the

reference position return of the axis has already completed.

G43.1 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ ; … Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction ON

G44 X__ Y__ Z__ ; … Tool length compensation cancel

X, Y, Z Movement data

H Tool length compensation No. (If the compensation No. exceeds the specification range, a program error (P170) will occur.)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44

209

Changing the amount of tool length compensation in the tool axis direction

(1) When the following conditions have been met, the handle movement amount is added to the tool length

compensation amount in the tool axis direction by rotating the manual pulse generator.

— When the operation mode is MDI, memory or tape operation mode and the state is «during single block

stop», «during feed hold» or «during cutting feed movement». Note that compensation amount cannot be

changed during error or warning.

— During tool length compensation in the tool axis direction (G43.1).

— In the tool length compensation amount in the tool axis direction changing mode (YC92/1).

— In the tool handle feed & interruption mode (YC5E/1).

— The 3rd axis (tool axis) is selected for the handle selection axis.

(2) The change amount is canceled when the compensation No. is changed.

(Note 1) The coordinate value in the tool length compensation amount in the tool axis direction change mode

operates in the same manner as that when the manual ABS is ON, regardless of manual ABS

switch (YC28) or base axis specification parameter «#1061 intabs».

(Note 2) If compensation amount is changed during continuous operation, single block stop, or feed hold,

the compensation amount will be effective immediately in the next block.

(Note 3) When changing compensation amount, the compensation amount corresponding to the actual

compensation No. will be changed. However, when executing the NC reset or tool length

compensation in the direction of tool axis cancel (G44), the compensation amount will be returned

to the original.

(Example) When changing compensation amount during continuous operation.

(Example) When changing compensation amount during single block stop.

(a) Compensation amount before change

(b) Changed compensation amount (c) Path after compensation

(d) Programmed path (e) Single block stop

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a)

(b) (c)

(d)

(b)

(e)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

210

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction vector

The vectors representing the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction are as follows.

(1) When the A and C axes are set as the rotary axes:

Vx = L * sin(A) * sin(C)

Vy = -L * sin(A) * cos(C)

Vz = L * cos(A)

(2) When the B and C axes are set as the rotary axes:

Vx = L * sin(B) * cos(C)

Vy = L * sin(B) * sin(C)

Vz = L * cos(B)

Vx, Vy, Vz : Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction vectors for X, Y and Z axes

L : Tool length compensation amount (1h)

A, B, C : Rotation angle (machine coordinate position) of A, B and C axes

(3) Rotary axis angle command

The value used for the angle of the rotary axis (tool tip axis) differs according to the type of rotary axis

involved.

When servo axes are used:

The machine coordinate position is used for the rotation angles of the A, B and C axes.

When mechanical axes are used:

Instead of the machine coordinate position of the axes, the values read out from the R registers (R2628

to R2631) are used for the rotation angles of the A, B and C axes.

Compensation amount resetting

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction is cleared in the following cases.

(1) When manual reference position return is completed.

(2) When reset 1, reset 2 or reset & rewind has been executed.

(3) When the G44 command has been designated.

(4) When the offset No. 0 command has been executed.

(5) When NC reset has been executed with «1» set for the basic system parameter «#1151 rstint».

(6) When the G53 command is designated while the compensation status is still established, the

compensation is temporarily canceled, and the tool moves to the machine position designated by G53.

(a) Path after tool length compensation in the tool axis direction

(b) G43.1 command (c) Program path (d) G44 command

(c)

(d)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44

211

Program example

Example of arc machining

Shown below is an example of a program for linear -> arc -> arc -> linear machining using the B and C rotary

axes on the ZX plane.

Machining program

N01 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Compensation amount H01 = 50 mm

N02 G28 B0 C0 ;

N03 G90 G54 G00 X400. Y0 ;

N04 Z-150. ;

N05 B90. ; B axis: 90

N06 G18 ;

N07 G43.1 X250. H01 ; Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction ON

N08 G01 Z0 F200 ;

N09 G02 X0 Z250. I-250. K0 B0 ; Top right arc, B axis: 0

N10 G02 X-250. Z0 I0 K-250. B-90. ; Bottom right arc, B axis: -90

N11 G01 Z-150. ;

N12 G00 G44 X-400. ; Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction OFF

N13 G91 G28 B0 C0 ;

N14 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

N15 M02 ;

(a) Tool with no compensation (b) Programmed path (c) Tool length compensation amount (d) Path after compensation

X

Z N10

N08 N09

N11

N12

N07

X

Z N10

N08 N09

N11

N12

N07

(c)

(d)

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

212

Relation with other functions

Relation with 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

(1) A program error (P931) will occur if 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is carried out during tool length

compensation in the tool axis direction.

(2) A program error (P921) will occur if the tool length is compensated in the tool axis direction during 3-

dimensional coordinate conversion.

(3) A program error (P923) will occur if the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction is commanded

in the same block as the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.

Relation with automatic reference position return

(1) A program error (P931) will occur if a command from G27 to G30 is issued during tool length

compensation in the tool axis direction.

Relation with manual reference position return

(1) Reference position return for the orthogonal axis

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction will be canceled, as well as the dog-type reference

position return and the high-speed reference position return.

N1 G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

Positioning to the workpiece origin

N2 G00 A45. ;

Rotating the rotary axis by 45

N3 G43.1 H1 ;

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction ON

N4 G19 G03 Y-5.858 Z-14.142 J14.142 K-14.142 A90. ;

Circular cutting

Manual dog-type reference position return (a)

N5 G00 Y0. ;

N6 Z0. ;

: :

N5 G00 Y0. ; -> Positioning to the position where tool length compensation in the tool axis direction was canceled.

N6 Z0. -> Positioning to the position where tool length compensation in the tool axis direction was canceled.

: :

Z

Y M

N2

N1

N4

N3 W

45

(a)

Z

Y M

W

N6

N5

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.3 Tool Length Compensation in the Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44

213

(2) Reference position return for the rotary axis

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction will be canceled, as well as the dog-type reference

position return and the high-speed reference position return.

Relation with graphic check

(1) Graphic check draws a path after compensation.

N1 G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

Positioning to the workpiece origin

N2 G00 A45. ;

Rotating the rotary axis by 45

N3 G43.1 H1 ;

Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction ON

N4 G19 G03 Y-5.858 Z-14.142 J14.142 K-14.142 A90. ;

Circular cutting

Manual dog-type reference position return (a)

N5 G00 Y0. ;

N6 Z0. ;

: :

N5 G00 Y0. ;

Positioning to the position where tool length compensation in the tool axis direction was canceled.

N6 Z0. ;

Positioning to the position where tool length compensation in the tool axis direction was canceled.

: :

Z

Y M

N2 45

N3 W

N3

N4

90

(a)

N5

N6

Z

M Y

W

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

214

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

Function and purpose

This function compensates the radius of the tool. The compensation can be done in the random vector

direction by the radius amount of the tool selected with the G command (G38 to G42) and the D command.

Command format

Detailed description

The number of sets for the compensation differ according to machine specification. (The No. of sets is the

total of the tool length offset, tool position offset and tool radius compensation sets.)

The H command is ignored during the tool radius compensation, and only the D command is valid.

The compensation will be executed within the plane designated with the plane selection G code or axis

address 2 axis, and axes other than those included in the designated plane and the axes parallel to the

designated plane will not be affected. Refer to the section on plane selection for details on selecting the plane

with the G code.

G40 X__Y__; … Tool radius compensation cancel

G41 X__Y__D__; … Tool radius compensation (left)

G42 X__Y__D__; … Tool radius compensation (right)

G38 I__J__; … Change or hold of compensation vector (Can be commanded only during the radius compensation mode.)

G39 X__Y__; … Corner changeover (Can be commanded only during the radius compensation mode.)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

215

12.4.1 Tool Radius Compensation Operation

Detailed description

Tool radius compensation cancel mode

The tool radius compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions.

(1) After the power has been switched on

(2) After the reset button on the setting and display unit has been pressed

(3) After the M02 or M30 command with reset function has been executed

(4) After a compensation cancel command (G40) is issued

The compensation vectors are zero in the compensation cancel mode, and the tool nose point path coincides

with the programmed path.

Programs including tool radius compensation must be terminated in the compensation cancel mode.

Tool radius compensation start (startup)

Tool radius compensation starts when all the following conditions are met in the compensation cancel mode.

(1) The movement command is issued after G41 or G42.

(2) The tool radius compensation offset No. is 0 < D <= max. offset No.

(3) The movement command of positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) is issued.

Whether in continuous or single block operation, compensation always starts after reading three blocks, or if

the three blocks do not contain any movement command, up to five continuous blocks wil be pre-read.

In compensation mode, too, up to 5 blocks are pre-read and the compensation is arithmetically processed.

There are two ways of starting the compensation operation: type A and type B.

The type can be selected with bit 2 of parameter «#8157 Radius comp type B».

This type is used in common with the compensation cancel type.

[Control state diagram]

After pre-reading G41, start pre-reading Max. 5 blocks

Execution block Pre-read buffer

N16 G02_; N15 G01_; N14 G41_; N13 G00_; N12 S_; N11 T_;

N16 G02_; N15 G01_; N14 G41_; N13 G00_; N12 S_; N11 T_;

N16 G02_; N15 G01_;

N16 G02_; N15 G01_; N14 G41_; N13 G00_; N12 S_; N11 T_;

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

216

Start operation for tool radius compensation

(1) Machining an inside corner

(2) Machining an outside corner (obtuse angle) [90 <= < 180]

Linear -> Linear Linear -> Circular

(S) Start point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

Linear -> Linear (Type A) Linear -> Circular (Type A)

Linear -> Linear (Type B) Linear -> Circular (Type B)

(S) Start point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

G42

s

(S)

r

s

G42

r

(S) (CP)

G41 r

s

(S)

G41

r

s

(S) (CP)

G41

r r

s

(S)

G41

r r

s

(S) (CP)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

217

(3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) [ < 90]

(Note 1) If there is no axis movement command in the same block as G41 or G42, compensation is

performed perpendicularly to the next block’s direction.

Operation in compensation mode

Calculate the tool center path from the linear line/circular arc to perform compensation to the program path

(G00, G01, G02, G03).

Even if the same compensation command (G41, G42) is issued in the compensation mode, the command will

be ignored.

When 4 or more blocks without movement command are continuously specified in the compensation mode,

overcutting or undercutting will occur.

When the M00 command has been issued during tool radius compensation, pre-reading is prohibited.

Linear -> Linear (Type A) Linear -> Circular (Type A)

Linear -> Linear (Type B) Linear -> Circular (Type B)

(S) Start point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

G41

r

s

(S)

G41

r

s

(S)

(CP)

G41

r

r

s

(S) G41

r

r

s

(S)

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

218

(1) Machining an outside corner

Linear -> Linear (90<= < 180) Linear -> Linear (0 < < 90)

Linear -> Circular (90 <= < 180) Linear -> Circular (0 < < 90)

Circular -> Linear (90 <= < 180) Circular -> Linear (0 < < 90)

Circular -> Circular (90 <= < 180) Circular -> Circular (0 < < 90)

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

s

r

r

s

s

r r

(CP)

r

r

s

(CP)

r r

s

(CP)

r

r

s

(CP)

r r

s

(CP)

(CP)

r r

s (CP) (CP)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

219

(2) Machining an inside corner

Linear -> Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear -> Linear (Acute angle)

Linear -> Circular (Obtuse angle) Linear -> Circular (Acute angle)

Circular -> Linear (Obtuse angle) Circular -> Linear (Acute angle)

Circular -> Circular (Obtuse angle) Circular -> Circular (Acute angle)

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

r

s r

r s

r

s

(CP)

r

r

s

(CP)

r s

(CP)

r

s

(CP)

r

s

(CP)(CP) r

s

(CP)

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

220

(3) When the arc end point is not on the arc

For spiral arc

A spiral arc will be interpolated from the start to end point of the arc.

Normal circular command

If the error after compensation is within the parameter value («#1084 RadErr»), it is interpolated as a

spiral arc.

(4) When the inner intersection point does not exist

In cases like the figure below, the intersection point of circulars A and B may not exist depending on the

compensation amount.

In such cases, program error (P152) appears and the tool stops at the end point of the previous block.

In the pattern 1 and 2 in this figure, machining is possible because compensation amount r is small.

In pattern 3, compensation r is so large that an intersection does not exist and program error (P152) will

occur.

(E) End point of circular (CP) Center of circular r: Compensation amount

(CP) Center of circular r: Compensation amount

Program path Tool center path

r

r s

R

(E)

(CP)

r

r

A B

P152 (CP)

3

2 1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

221

Tool radius compensation cancel

If either of the following conditions is met in the tool radius compensation mode, the compensation will be

canceled.

However, this must be any movement command except a circular command.

If the compensation is canceled by a circular command, program error (P151) will occur.

(1) The G40 command has been executed.

(2) Executed the compensation No.D00.

The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read, 5-block pre-reading

is suspended and 1-block pre-reading will be operated.

Tool radius compensation cancel operation

(1) Machining an inside corner

Linear -> Linear Circular -> Linear

(E) End point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

r

s

G40

(E)

G40

r

s

(CP) (E)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

222

(2) Machining an outside corner (obtuse angle) [90 <= < 180]

Linear -> Linear (Type A) Circular -> Linear (Type A)

Linear -> Linear (Type B) Circular -> Linear (Type B)

(E) End point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

r

s

G40

(E)

G40

r

s

(CP) (E)

r

s

G40

r

(E)

G40

r

s

r

(CP) (E)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

223

(3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) [ < 90]

Linear -> Linear (Type A) Circular -> Linear (Type A)

Linear -> Linear (Type B) Circular -> Linear (Type B)

(E) End point

(CP) Center of circular

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

r

s

G40

(E)

s

G40

r

(CP)

(E)

r

s

G40

r

(E)

r

s

G40

r

(E)

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

224

12.4.2 Other Commands and Operations during Tool Radius Compensation

Detailed description

Insertion of corner arc

An arc that uses the compensation amount as the radius is inserted without calculating the point of

intersection at the workpiece corner when G39 (corner arc) is commanded.

(With G39 command) (No G39 command) (With G39 command) (No G39 command)

[For outer side compensation] [For inner side compensation]

(a) Inserted circular

(b) Point of intersection

r: Compensation amount

s: Stop point with single block

N1 G28 X0 Y0 ; N2 G91 G01 G42 X20. Y20. D1 F100 ; N3 G39 X40. ; N4 G39 Y40. ; N5 G39 X-40. ; N6 Y-40. ; N7 G40 X-20. Y-20. ; N8 M02 ;

Program path

Tool center path

s(a) (b)

r s

(a)

(b)

r

N2

N1

D1=5.000

N3

N4

N5

N6

N7

Y

X

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

225

Changing and holding of compensation vector

The compensation vector can be changed or held during tool radius compensation by using the G38

command.

(1) Holding of vector

When G38 is commanded in a block having a movement command, the point of intersection will not be

calculated at the program end point, and instead the vector of the previous block will be held.

G38 Xx Yy;

This can be used for pick feed, etc.

[Holding the inside compensation vector]

N11 G1 Xx11 ; N12 G38 Xx12 Yy12 ; N13 G40 Xx13 ; r1:N11-N12 Vector at N11-N12 block intersection calculation

[Holding the outside compensation acute angle]

N11 G1 Xx11 Yy11 ; N12 G38 Xx12 Yy12 ; N13 G40 Xx13 ; r1: Vector at N11-N12 block intersection calculation

[Holding the outside compensation obtuse angle]

N11 G1 Xx11 Yy11 ; N12 G38 Xx12 Yy12 ; N13 G40 Xx13 ; r1: Vector at N11-N12 block intersection calculation

Program path

Tool center path

N11

N12

N13

r1

r1

N11 N12

N13

r1

r1

N11 N12

N13

r1

r1

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

226

(2) Changing of vector

A new compensation vector direction can be commanded with I, J and K, and a new compensation

amount with D.

(These can be commanded in the same block as the movement command.)

G38 Ii Jj Dd ; (I, J and K will differ according to the selected plane.)

The compensation amount d vector is created in the commanded i and j vector direction.

(Note) If G38 is commanded in the same block as the circular block (G02/G03) I and J commands, I and J

will be handled as the G38 vector, and an error will occur.

N11 G1 Xx11 ; N12 Yy12 ; N13 G38 Xx13 Ii Jj Dd ; N14 G40 Xx14 Yy14 ;

Program path

Tool center path

N13

N12

N11

i

j

N14

d d

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

227

Changing the compensation direction during tool radius compensation

The compensation direction is determined by the tool radius compensation commands (G41, G42) and

compensation amount sign.

The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command during the

compensation mode without canceling the mode.

However, it is impossible to change the direction in the compensation start block and the next block.

(1) Linear -> Linear

(a) When there is a point of intersection (A) when the compensation direction is changed.

(b) When there is no point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed.

(2) Linear <-> Circular

(a) When there is a point of intersection (A) when the compensation direction is changed.

(b) When there is no point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed.

G code Compensation amount sign + Compensation amount sign —

G41 Left-side compensation Right-side compensation

G42 Right-side compensation Left-side compensation

Program path Tool center path

r

G41

r

G41 G42

r

r

(a)

(b)

A

r

G41

r

G41 G42G41G42

r

r

r

r

A

(b)

(a)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

228

(3) Circular -> Circular

(a) When there is a point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed.

(b) When there is no point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed.

(4) Linear return

(5) Arc exceeding 360 due to compensation

In the case below, it is possible that the arc may exceed 360

a. Changing the compensation direction by switching between G41/G42.

If the arc exceeds 360, compensation will be performed as shown in the figure and uncut section will be

left.

(CP) Center of circular

: G42 G01 X_ Y_; G41 G02 X_ Y_ I_ J_; G42 G01 X_ Y_; :

Program path Tool center path

Section left uncut

G42G41G41

G41

G41

G42

(CP)

(CP)

(a)

(b) r

r

r

G41

G42 r

G41

G42

G42

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

229

Command for eliminating compensation vectors temporarily

When the following command is issued in the compensation mode, the compensation vectors are temporarily

eliminated and then, compensation mode will automatically return.

In this case, the compensation is not canceled, and the tool goes directly from the intersection point vector to

the point without vectors, in other words, to the programmed command point. When returning to the

compensation mode, it goes directly to the intersection point.

(1) Reference position return command

Temporarily no compensation vectors at intermediate point. (Reference position when there is no

intermediate point)

(2) The compensation vector will be eliminated temporarily with the G53 command (Basic machine

coordinate system selection).

(Note 1) The compensation vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting (G92) command.

(3) G33 thread cutting command

Tool radius compensation does not apply to the G33 block.

(CP) Intermediate Point

(G41) :

N5 G91 G01 X60. Y30. ;

N6 G28 X50. Y-40. ; <- Temporarily no compensation vectors at intermediate point. (Reference position when there is no intermediate point)

N7 X30. Y-60. ;

N8 X70. Y40. ;

:

(CP)

N6N5

S

S

S

N8 N7

r

G33

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

230

Blocks without movement

The following blocks are known as blocks without movement.

M00, M01, M02 and M30 are handled as pre-read inhibit M codes.

(1) When command is assigned at start of the compensation

Compensation vector cannot be created when there are four or more successive blocks without

movement, or when pre-reading prohibiting M command is issued.

M03 ; M command

S12 ; S command

T45 ; T command

G04 X500 ; Dwell

G22 X200. Y150. Z100 ; Machining prohibited region setting

G10 L10 P01 R50 ; Compensation amount setting

G92 X600. Y400. Z500. ; Coordinate system setting

(G17) Z40. ; Movement outside the compensation plane

G90 ; G code only

G91 X0 ; Movement amount 0

N1 X30.Y60. :

N2 G41 D10 ;

Block without movement

N3 G4 X1000 ;

N4 F100 ;

N5 S500 ;

N6 M3 ;

N7 X20.Y-50. ;

N8 X50.Y-20. ;

N1

N2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N7

N8

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

231

(2) When command is assigned in the compensation mode

Compensation vector will be created as normal when there are not four or more successive blocks

without movement, or when pre-read prohibiting M command is not issued.

Block N7 is executed at N7 in the figure.

Compensation vector will be created perpendicularly to the end point of the previous block when there

are four or more successive blocks without movement, or when pre-read prohibiting M command is

issued.

In this case, a cut may occur.

(3) When commanded together with compensation cancel

Only the compensation vectors are canceled when a block without movement is commanded together

with the G40 command.

N6 G91 X100. Y200. ;

N7 G04 X P1000 ; … Block without movement

N8 X200. ;

N6 X100. Y200. ;

N7 G4 X1000 ;

Block without movement

N8 F100 ;

N9 S500 ;

N10 M4 ;

N11 X100 ;

N6 X100. Y200. ;

N7 G40 M5 ;

N8 X100. Y50. ;

N8N7

N6

N7 N10

N6

N11

N6

N7

N8

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

232

When I, J, K are commanded in G40

(1) If the final movement command block in the four blocks before the G40 block is the G41 or G42 mode, it

will be assumed that the movement is commanded in the vector I, J or K direction from the end point of

the final movement command. After interpolating between the hypothetical tool center path and point of

intersection, it will be canceled. The compensation direction will not change.

In this case, the point of intersection will always be obtained, regardless of the compensation direction,

even when the commanded vector is incorrect as shown below.

[When the I and j symbols in the above program example are incorrect]

If the compensation vector obtained with point of intersection calculation is extremely large, a

perpendicular vector will be created in the block before G40.

N1 (G41) G1 X_ ; N2 G40 Xa Yb Ii Jj ;

Program path

Tool center path

Hypothetical tool center path

r N1

(i,j) N2 A

(a,b)

rG41

rN1

(i,j)

N2

A

(a,b)

r

G41

r

G40

(i,j)

A

(a,b)

r

G41

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

233

(2) If the arc is 360 or more due to the details of I, J and K at G40 after the arc command, an uncut section

will occur.

Corner movement

When a multiple number of compensation vectors are created at the joints between movement command

blocks, the tool will move in a straight line between these vectors. This action is called corner movement.

When the vectors do not coincide, the tool moves in order to machine the corner although this movement is

part and parcel of the joint block.

Consequently, operation in the single block mode will execute the previous block + corner movement as a

single block and the remaining joining movement + following block will be executed as a single block in the

following operation.

N1 (G42,G91) G01 X200. ; N2 G02 J150. ; N3 G40 G1 X150. Y-150. I-100. J100. ;

Program path

Tool center path

Section left uncut

(CP) Center of circular r: Compensation amount s: Stop point with single block

Program path Tool center path

r

N1

(i,j)

N2

r

G42

r

G40 N3

r

N1

N2

r

s

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

234

12.4.3 G41/G42 Commands and I, J, K Designation

Function and purpose

The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by issuing the G41/G42 command and I, J, K in the

same block.

Command format

Assign a linear command (G00, G01) in a movement mode.

Detailed description

I, J type vectors (G17 X-Y plane selection)

This section describes the new I,J type vectors (G17 plane) created by this command. (Similar descriptions

apply to vector K,I for the G18 plane and to J, K for the G19 plane.)

As shown in the following figures, I, J type vectors create compensation vectors which are perpendicular to

the direction designated by I, J and equivalent to the compensation amount, without the intersection point

calculation of the programmed path. The I, J vectors can be commanded even in the mode (G41/G42 mode

in the block before) and even at the compensation start (G40 mode in the block before).

(1) When I, J is commanded at compensation start

G17 (X-Y plane) G41/G42 X__ Y__ I__ J__ ;

G18 (Z-X plane) G41/G42 X__ Z__ I__ K__ ;

G19 (Y-Z plane) G41/G42 Y__ Z__ J__ K__ ;

Program path

Tool center path

(G40)

N100 G91 G41 X100. Y100. I150. D1 ;

N110 G04 X1000 ;

N120 G01 F1000 ;

N130 S500 ;

N140 M03 ;

N150 X150. ;

N150

N100

Y

X

N110 N120 N130 N140

D1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

235

(2) When there are no movement commands at the compensation start.

(3) When I, J has been commanded in the mode (G17 plane)

Program path

Tool center path

(a) I, J type vector (b) Intersection point calculation type vector

Program path

Tool center path

Path after intersection point calculation

(G40)

N1 G41 I150. D1 ;

N2 G91 X100. Y100. ;

N3 X150. ;

N3

N2

Y

X

D1 N1

(G17 G41 G91)

N100 G41 G00 X150. J50. ;

N110 G02 I150. ;

N120 G00 X- 150. ;(N120)

N100

Y

X

N120

( I ,J)N110

D1

(a) (b)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

236

(Reference)

(a) G18 plane

(b) G19 plane

(4) When I, J has been commanded in a block without movement

(G18 G41 G91)

N100 G41 G00 Z150. I50. ;

N110 G02 K50. ;

N120 G00 Z — 150. ;(N120)

N100

Z

X

N120

(K,I) N110

(G19 G41 G91)

N100 G41 G00 Y150. K50. ;

N110 G02 J50. ;

N120 G00 Y — 150. ; (N120)

N100

Z

Y

N120

(J,K) N110

N1 G41 D1 G01 F1000 ;

N2 G91 X100. Y100. ;

N3 G41 I50. ;

N4 X150. ;

N5 G40 ;

N3

N2

D1

N1

N4

(I,J) N5

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

237

Compensation vector direction

(1) In G41 mode

Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I,J by 90 to the left when looking at the zero

point from the forward direction of the Z axis (3rd axis).

(2) In G42 mode

Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by IJ by 90 to the right when looking at the

zero point from the forward direction of the Z axis (3rd axis).

Selection of compensation modal

G41 and G42 modals can be switched over at any time.

(Example 1) With I100. (Example 2) With I-100.

(100, 0) IJ direction (-100, 0) IJ direction

Compensation vector direction Compensation vector direction

(Example 1) With I100. (Example 2) With I-100.

(100, 0) IJ direction (-100, 0) IJ direction

Compensation vector direction Compensation vector direction

N1 G28 X0 Y0 ;

N2 G41 D1 F1000 ;

N3 G01 G91 X100. Y100. ;

N4 G42 X100. I100. J — 100.

D2 ;

N5 X100. Y- 100. ;

N6 G40 ;

N7 M02 ;

%

N3

x

D1 N2

N6

(I,J)

N5

y

N4 D2

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

238

Compensation amount for compensation vectors

The compensation amount is determined by the offset No. (modal) in a block with the IJ designation.

Vector A is the compensation amount registered in offset No. modal D1 of the N100 block.

Vector B is the compensation amount registered in offset No. modal D2 of the N200 block.

Precautions

(1) Issue the I,J type vector in a linear mode (G0, G1). If it is in an arc mode at the start of compensation,

program error (P151) will occur.

When it is in the compensation mode as well as in the arc mode, I,J will be designated at the center of

the circular.

(2) When the I,J type vector is designated, it will not be deleted (Interference avoidance) even if there is

interference. Consequently, overcutting may occur.

In the figure below, cutting will occur in the shaded section.

(G41 D1 G91)

N100 G41 X150. I50. ;

N110 X100. Y- 100. ; X

N110

(I,J)

A

Y N100

D1 D1

(G41 D1 G91)

N200 G41 X150. I50. D2 ;

N210 X100. Y- 100. ;

X N210

(I,J)

B

Y N200

D2

D1

N1 G28 X0 Y0 ;

N2 G42 D1 F1000 ;

N3 G91 X100. ;

N4 G42 X100. Y100. I10. ;

N5 X100. Y — 100. ;

N6 G40 ;

N7 M02 ;

Y

X

N5

(I,J)

N4

N3

N2 N6

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

239

(3) The vectors differ for the G38 I _J_ (K_) command and the G41/G42 I_J_(K_) command.

(4) Refer to the following table for the compensation methods depend on the presence or absence of G41/

G42 command and I, K, (J) command.

During the I, J type vector compensation, the A insertion block will not exist.

G38 G41/G42

E xa

m pl

e

: (G41)

: G38 G91 X100. I50. J50. ;

:

: (G41)

: G41 G91 X100. I50. J50. ;

:

Vector in IJ direction having a compensation amount (a) size

Vector perpendicular in IJ direction and having a compensation amount (b) size

G41/G42 I, J (K) Compensation methods

No No Intersection point calculation type vector

No Yes Intersection point calculation type vector

Yes No Intersection point calculation type vector

Yes Yes I, J, type vector

No insertion block

(I J)

(a)

(I J)

(b)

Y

X N5

(I,J)

N4

N3

N2

N1

N1 G91 G01 G41 X200. D1 F1000 ; N2 X-150. Y150. ; N3 G41 X300. I50. ; N4 X-150. Y-150. ; N5 G40 X-200. ;

(A)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

240

12.4.4 Interrupts during Tool Radius Compensation

Detailed description

MDI interruption

Tool radius compensation is valid in any automatic operation mode — whether tape, memory or MDI mode.

The figure below shows what happens by MDI interruption after stopping the block during tape or memory

mode.

S in the figure indicates the stop position with single block.

(1) Interrupt without movement (tool path does not change)

(2) Interrupt with movement

The compensation vectors are automatically re-calculated in the movement block after interrupt.

With linear interrupt

With circular interruption

Automatic operation MDI interruption

N1 G41 D1;

N2 X20. Y50. ;

<— S1000 M3;

N3 G3 X40. Y-40. R70. ;

Automatic operation MDI interruption

N1 G41 D1;

N2 X20. Y50. ;

<— X50. Y-30. ;

X30. Y50. ;

N3 G3 X40.Y-40. R70. ;

Automatic operation MDI interruption

N1 G41 D1;

N2 X20. Y50. ;

<— G2 X40. Y-40. R70. ;

G1 X40. ;

N3 G3 X40. Y-40. R70. ;

N2

S

N3

S

S

N2

N3

S

S

N2 N3

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

241

Manual interruption

(1) Interrupt with manual absolute OFF.

The tool path will deviate from the compensated path by the interrupt amount.

Program path

Tool path after compensation

Interrupt (A)

Tool path after interrupt

A

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

242

(2) Interrupt with manual absolute ON.

In the incremental value mode, the same operation will be performed as the manual absolute OFF.

In the absolute value mode, however, the tool returns to its original path at the end point of the block

following the interrupted block, as shown in the figure.

Program path

Tool path after compensation

Interrupt (A)

Tool path after interrupt

A

A

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

243

12.4.5 General Precautions for Tool Radius Compensation

Precautions

Assigning the compensation amounts

(1) The offset amounts can be designated with the D code by designating an offset amount No. Once

designated, the D code is valid until another D code is commanded. If an H code is designated, the

program error (P170) No COMP No will occur.

Besides being used to designate the compensation amounts for tool radius compensation, the D codes

are also used to designate the compensation amounts for tool position compensation.

(2) Compensation amounts are normally changed when a different tool has been selected in the

compensation cancel mode. However, when an amount is changed during the compensation mode, the

vectors at the end point of the block are calculated using the compensation amount designated in that

block.

Compensation amount symbols and tool center path

If the compensation amount is negative (-), the figure will be the same as if G41 and G42 are interchanged.

Thus, the axis that was rotating around the outer side of the workpiece will rotate around the inner side, and

vice versa.

An example is shown below. Normally, the compensation amount is programmed as positive (+). However, if

the tool path center is programmed as shown in (a) and the compensation amount is set to be negative (-), the

movement will be as shown in (b). On the other hand, if the program is created as shown in (b) and the offset

amount is set to be negative (-), the movement will be as shown in (a). Thus, only one program is required to

execute machining of both male and female shapes. The tolerance for each shape can be randomly

determined by adequately selecting the offset amount.

(Note that a circle will be divided with type A when compensation is started or canceled.)

G41 offset amount (+) or G42 offset amount (-) (a)

G41 offset amount (-) or G42 offset amount (+) (b)

Tool center path

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

244

12.4.6 Changing of Compensation No. during Compensation Mode

Function and purpose

As a principle, the compensation No. must not be changed during the compensation mode. If changed, the

movement will be as shown below.

When compensation No. (compensation amount) is changed:

G41 G01 …….. Dr1 ;

( = 0,1,2,3)

N101 G0 Xx1 Yy1 ;

N102 G0 Xx2 Yy2 Dr2 ; …….. Compensation No. changed

N103 Xx3 Yy3 ;

During linear -> linear

The compensation amount designated with N101 will be applied.

The compensation amount designated with N102 will be applied.

Program path

Tool center path

N101 r2

r2r1

r1 N102

N103

r1

r1

r1 r1

r2

r2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

245

Linear ->circular

(CP) Arc center

Program path

Tool center path

N101

N102 r1

r2

G02r1

N102

N101

G03

r1

r1

r1 r1

r2

(CP)

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

246

Circular -> circular

(CP) Arc center

Program path

Tool center path

r1 N101

r1 r2

N102

r1 r1

r1 r1

r2

(CP)

(CP)

(CP)

(CP)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

247

12.4.7 Start of Tool Radius Compensation and Z Axis Cut in Operation

Function and purpose

Often when starting cutting, a method of applying a radius compensation (normally the XY plane) beforehand

at a position separated for the workpiece, and then cutting in with the Z axis is often used. When using this

method, create the program so that the Z axis movement is divided into the two steps of rapid traverse and

cutting feed after nearing the workpiece.

Program example

When the following type of program is created:

With this program, at the start of the N1 compensation the program will be read to the N6 block. The relation

of N1 and N6 can be judged, and correct compensation can be executed as shown above.

If the above program’s N4 block is divided into two

In this case, the four blocks N2 to N5 do not have a command in the XY plane, so when the N1 compensation

is started, the program cannot be read to the N6 block.

As a result, the compensation is done based only on the information in the N1 block, and the compensation

vector is not created at the start of compensation. Thus, an excessive cut in occurs as shown above.

N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1 ; N2 S1000 ; N3 M3 ; N4 G01 Z-300. F1 ; N6 Y100. F2 ; : :

N4 Z axis lowers (1 block)

Tool center path

N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1 ; N2 S1000 ; N3 M3 ; N4 Z-250. ; N5 G01 Z-50. F1 ; N6 Y100. F2 ;

(c) Cut in

N1 Y

X

N1 Y

Z

N4 N6 N6

N4

N1

N1

N4

N5N6

XX

Y Z

N6

(c)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

248

In this case, consider the calculation of the inner side, and before the Z axis cutting, issue a command in the

same direction as the direction that the Z axis advances in after lowering, to prevent excessive cutting.

The movement is correctly compensated as the same direction as the N6 advance direction is commanded in

N2.

N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y400. D1 ; N2 Y100. S1000 ; N3 M3 ; N4 Z-250. ; N5 G01 Z-50. F1 ; N6 Y100. F2 ;

N1 Y

Z

N5

N6

N2

N1

N2

Y

X

N6 N6

N4

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

249

12.4.8 Interference Check

Function and purpose

When tool radius is larger than the program path, a tool, compensated by the tool radius compensation

function, may sometimes cut into the workpiece. This is known as interference, and interference check is the

function which prevents this from occurring.

The table below shows the three functions of interference check and each can be selected for use by

parameter.

Detailed description

Conditions viewed as interference

When there is a movement command in three of the five pre-read blocks, and if the compensation calculation

vectors which are created at the contacts of movement commands intersect each other, it will be viewed as

interference.

Function Parameter

Operation#8102 COLL. ALM OFF

#8103 COLL. CHK OFF

(1) Interference check alarm function

0 0 Operation stops with a program error (P153) before executing a block which will cause cutting.

(2) Interference check avoidance function

1 0

The tool path is changed to prevent cutting from occurring. If the path cannot be changed, a program error (P153) occurs and the program will be stopped.

(3) Interference check invalid function

0/1 1 Cutting continues as is, even if the workpiece is cut into. Use in the fine segment program.

r : Compensation amount

(a) Vectors intersect

Program path

Tool center path

N1 N3

N2

r

(a)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

250

(Example 1)When operating a program including a short segment with a tool with a large radius

Cutting will occur in the shaded section.

(1) With alarm function

An alarm is given before N1 is executed. The buffer correction function can thus be used to change N1 to

the following, enabling machining to continue: N1 G1 X20. Y-40.;

(2) With avoidance function

The intersection of N1 and N3 is calculated to create interference avoidance vectors.

Tool center path is (a) -> (e).

(3) With interference check invalid function

The tool passes while cutting the N1 and N3 line.

Tool center path is (a)->(b)->(c)->(d)->(e) .

(G41) N1 G91 G1 X50. Y-100. ; N2 X70. Y-100. ; N3 X120. Y0 ;

N1 N3

N2

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

251

(Example 2) When operating a program including a small circular with a tool with a large radius

Cutting occurs near the start point/end point of the circular in the following figure.

Interference check processing

(1) With alarm function

The alarm occurs before N1 is executed.

(2) With avoidance function

With the above process, the vectors (1), (2), (3)’ and (4)’ will remain as the valid vectors. The tool center

path will follow the path which connects these vectors, as the interference avoidance path.

(3) With interference check invalid function

The tool center path will follow the path which connects (1), (2), (3), (4), (1)’, (2)’, (3)’, (4)’, as the

interference avoidance path while cutting.

Vectors (1) (4)’ check -> No interference

Vectors (2) (3)’ check -> No interference

Vectors (3) (2)’ check -> Interference -> Erase vectors (3) (2)’

Erase vectors (4) (1)’

(Thick broken line path)

(Thin broken line path)

(4)(2)

(1)

N1

N3

N2

(2)

(4) (1)

(3)

(3)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

252

When interference check cannot be executed

(1) When three of the movement command blocks cannot be pre-read

(When there are three or more blocks in the five pre-read blocks that do not have movement)

(2) When there is an interference following the fourth movement block

(a) Interference check is not possible

Program path

Tool center path

N1

N3

N2

N4

N5

N6

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

253

Operation when interference avoidance function is valid

The movement will be as shown below when the interference avoidance check is valid.

(a) Program path

(b) Tool center path

Program path

Tool center path without interference check

Tool center path when interference is avoided (*: Linear movement)

Valid vector

Invalid vector

N1 N3

N2

(b) (a)

N1

N3N2

N1

N3N2

r

r (CP)

*

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

254

If all of the line vectors for the interference avoidance are deleted, create a new avoidance vector as shown in

below to avoid the interference.

In the case of the figure below, the groove will be left uncut.

Tool center path when interference is avoided

Program path

Tool center path when interference is avoided 2

Tool center path when interference is avoided 1

Program path

(a) Avoidance vector

Program path

Tool center path without interference check

Tool center path when interference is avoided

N1

N3

N2

N1

N3

N2

r1

N4

r2

r1 r2

(a)2

(a)1

(a)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

255

Interference check alarm operation

The interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions.

(1) When the interference check alarm function has been selected

When all the vectors at the end of its own block have been deleted.

When, as shown in the figure below, vectors 1 through 4 at the end point of the N1 block have all been

deleted, program error (P153) will occur prior to N1 execution.

(2) When the interference check avoidance function has been selected

(Example 1) When there are valid vectors at the end point of the following blocks even when all the vectors at

the end point of its own block have been deleted.

When, in the figure below, the N2 interference check is conducted, the N2 end point vectors are all

deleted but the N3 end point vectors are regarded as valid.

Program error (P153) now occurs at the N1 end point and the operation stops.

In the case shown in the figure below, the tool will move in the reverse direction at N2.

Program error (P153) now occurs before executing N1 and the operation stops.

N1

P153

2 3

N2 1

N3 4

N1

2 N21

N3 43

N4

P153

N1

P153

N2 N3

N4

1 2 3 4

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

256

(Example 2) When avoidance vectors cannot be created

Even when, as in the figure below, the conditions for creating the avoidance vectors are satisfied, it

may still be impossible to create avoidance vectors, or the interference vectors may interfere with

N3.

Program error (P153) will occur at the N1 end point when the vector intersecting angle is more than

90 and the operation will stop.

N1

N2

N3

N4

P153

N1

N2

N3

N4

P153

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

257

(Example 3) When the program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are reversed

When grooves, narrower than the tool radius with parallel or widening bottom, are programmed, it

will still be regarded as interference even if there is actually no interference.

(Example 4) Command for eliminating compensation vectors temporarily

Interference check will be executed even at the end point of the block right before the command to

eliminate compensation vectors temporarily, as well as when the command is not issued. It may be

regarded as an interference even if there is actually no interference. If regarded as an interference,

program error (P153) will occur.

In the figure below, only vector 1 is left as an end point vector in N2 because of the N3 G53

command to temporarily eliminate compensation vectors. However, the interference check will still

be conducted to vector 1 to 4 and an interference will be detected.

Program error (P153) now occurs at the end point of the previous block and the operation stops.

Program path

Tool center path

Tool center path when the interference check is invalid

Tool center path when the interference check is invalid in N3 due to a command (G01 etc.) not to eliminate compensation vectors.

Valid vector

Invalid vector (Invalid, however, subject to interference check)

P153

N1(G01)

N2(G03)

N3(G53)

1

2

3 4

P153

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

258

12.4.9 Diameter Designation of Compensation Amount

Function and purpose

With this function, the tool radius compensation amount can be designated by tool diameter. When the control

parameter #8117 OFS Diam DESIGN is ON, the compensation amount specified to the commanded tool

No. will be recognized as the diameter compensation amount, and the amount will be converted to the radius

compensation amount when executing the compensation.

Operation example

Operations when designating the compensation amount with diameter

When the tool radius compensation amount D=10.0 is commanded, tool radius compensation amount «d» is

5.0 if the parameter «#8117» is ON (set to «1»).

(Tool radius compensation amount «r» is 10.0 if the parameter «#8117» is OFF (set to «0»).)

(1) Linear -> linear corner (acute angle)

Outside of the corner Inside of the corner

Program path

Tool center path (When #8117 is ON)

Tool center path (When #8117 is OFF)

rd

20 20

d s

r

d

r

d r

d

r

s

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

259

(2) Linear -> arc (obtuse angle)

(3) Arc -> linear (obtuse angle)

Restrictions

(1) If tool radius compensation amount has already been set, the compensation amount is not be changed

even if the parameter «8117» is changed.

(2) Make sure not to change the parameter #8117 during the compensation. When the parameter is

changed using parameter input by program function, the program error (P421) will occur.

(3) If the parameter #8117 is set to ON with the parameter «#1037 cmdtyp» set to 2, the tool radius wear

data is also regarded as the diameter compensation amount, thus, it will be converted to the radius value

and compensation will be performed.

(4) Diameter designation of tool radius compensation amount can be used for the tool life management

data.

(5) There is no effect by #8117 on the tool radius measurement function.

Outside of the corner Inside of the corner

Outside of the corner Inside of the corner

Program path

Tool center path (When #8117 is ON)

Tool center path (When #8117 is OFF)

(CP) Arc center

s

d

r

(CP)

r

s

d

(CP)

d

sr

(CP)

d s

r

d

r

(CP)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

260

12.4.10 Workpiece Coordinate Changing during Radius Compensation

Function and purpose

When the tool radius compensation is executed, the tool center path is calculated based on the position on the

coordinate system. The based coordinate system is different depending on setting of the parameter «#1246/

bit2 Switch coordinate systems for radius compensation».

Detailed description

When the parameter is «0», the tool radius compensation is calculated based on the position on the workpiece

coordinate system.

When the parameter is «1», the tool radius compensation is calculated based on the position on the program

coordinate system.

The program coordinate systems are defined as shown in the figure below.

(R1) 1st reference position

(a) 1st reference position offset

(b) Interrupt amount offset

(c) Extended workpiece coordinate system offset

(d) G92 offset

(e) Workpiece coordinate system offset

(f) Local coordinate system offset

(g) G53 Basic machine coordinate system

(h) Program coordinate system

(i) G54 to G59/G54.1Pn Workpiece coordinate system/Extended workpiece coordinate system

(j) G52 Local coordinate system

(b)

(c)

(e)

(f)

(a)

(h)

(R1)

(i)

(j)

(g)

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.4 Tool Radius Compensation ; G38,G39/G40/G41,G42

261

The coordinate system changed by parameter is as follows.

D3 = 5.000

G54 offset

X15.000

Y15.000

G90 G54 G00 X15. Y20.;

N1 G41 D3 X5. Y10. ;

N2 G01 Y-20. F1000 ;

N3 G40 X30. ;

M30 ;

(1) Parameter = 0

(2) Parameter = 1

Program path (a) Compensation vector

Tool center path (b) Program coordinate system

G54

10.0

5.0

— 20.0

20.0

G53

N2

N3

N1

(a)

(b)

G54

N2

N3

N1

25.0

— 5.0

20.0 35.0

G53

(a)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

262

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

Function and purpose

The three-dimensional tool radius compensation compensates the tool in a three-dimensional space following

the commanded three-dimensional vectors.

As shown above, the tool is moved in the tool center coordinate position (x’, y’, z’) (d) which is compensated

by the tool radius «r» (c) in respect to the program coordinate position (x, y, z) (b) following the plane normal

line vector (I, J, K) (a).

Though two-dimensional tool radius compensation creates the vectors at a right angle to the (I, J, K) direction,

three-dimensional tool radius compensation creates the vector in the (I, J, K) direction. (The vector is created

at the end point of the block.)

The three-dimensional compensation vector (compensation) (e) axis elements are as below.

Thus, the tool center coordinate position (x’, y’, z’) (d) is each expressed as below. Note that (x, y, z) are the

program coordinate position.

(Note 1) Three-dimensional compensation vector (Hx, Hy, Hz) refers to the plane normal line vector whose

direction is same as the plane normal line vector (I, J, K ) and the size equals to the tool radius «r».

(Note 2) When the machining parameter «#8071 3-D CMP» is set to a value other than «0», the value of

«#8071 3-D CMP» will be used as the value. (Refer to the Setup Manual for

details.)

(Note 3) This function is an option. If commanded when the function is not provided, an error will occur.

(x’, y’, z’)

Y (J) X (I)

Z (K)

(x, y, z)

(I, J, K)

(b)

(c)

(a) (d)

(e)

I Hx = r

( I2 + J 2 + K 2 )

J H Y = r

( I2 + J 2 + K 2 )

K HZ = r

( I2 + J 2 + K 2 )

x = x + Hx

y = y + Hy

z = z + Hz

( I2 + J 2 + K 2 )

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

263

Command format

Command the compensation No. D and plane normal line vector (I, J, K) in the same block as the three-

dimensional tool radius compensation command G41 (G42).

If only one or two axes are commanded, the normal tool radius compensation mode will be applied. (When

setting «0» to the axes, this command is valid.)

Detailed description

G41(G42) X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ D__ ; … Three-dimensional tool radius compensation starts.

X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__; … New plane normal line vector is commanded in the compensation mode.

G40; (or D00;) … Three-dimensional tool radius compensation is canceled.

G40 X__ Y__ Z__; (or X__ Y__ Z__ D00;) … Three-dimensional tool radius compensation is canceled.

G41 Three-dimensional tool radius compensation command (+ direction)

G42 Three-dimensional tool radius compensation command (- direction)

G40 Three-dimensional tool radius compensation cancel command

X, Y, Z Movement axis command compensation space

I, J, K Plane normal line vector

D Compensation No. (Note that when «D00» is issued, three dimensional tool radius compensation will be canceled even if G40 is not commanded.)

G code Compensation amount:

D00 + —

G40 Cancel Cancel Cancel

G41 I, J, K direction Reverse direction of

I, J, K Cancel

G42 Reverse direction

of I, J, K I, J, K direction Cancel

The compensation space is determined by the axis address commands (X, Y, Z, U, V, W) of the block where the three-dimensional tool radius compensation starts.

(Example) G17 ; G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y Z space

G17 ; G41 Yy Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y Z space

Here, U, V and W are each the additional axes for the X, Y and Z axis. If the X axis and U axis (Y and V, Z and W) are commanded simultaneously in the three-dimensional tool radius compensation start block, the currently commanded plane selection axis will have the priority. If the axis address is not commanded, it will be interpreted that the X, Y and Z axes are commanded for the coordinate axes.

G17 V ; G41 Xx Vv Zz Ii Jj Kk ;

X V Z space

G17 W ; G41 Ww Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y W space

G17 ; G41 Xx Yy Zz Ww Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y Z space

G17 ; G41 Xx Yy Zz Ww Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y W space

G17 ; G41 Ii Jj Kk ;

X Y Z space

G17 U ; G41 Ii Jj Kk ;

U Y Z space

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

264

Operation example

Compensation start

(1) When there is a movement command

(2) When there is no movement command

Movement during the compensation

(3) When there is a movement command and a plane normal line vector command

(4) When there is no plane normal line vector command

(S) Start point

Tool center path

Program path

Three-dimensional compensation vector

(S) Start point

Tool center path

Three-dimensional compensation vector

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

Tool center path

Program path

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

Tool center path

Program path

G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Dd ;

(S)

G41 Ii Jj Kk Dd ;

(S)

Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ;

(a)

(b)

(S)

Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ;

(a)

(S)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

265

(5) For arc or helical cutting

The I, J, K commands for a circular or helical cutting are regarded as the circular center commands, thus, the

new vector is equivalent to the old vector.

Even for the R-designation method, commanded I, J, K addresses will be ignored, then the new vector will be

equivalent to the old vector.

G02 Xx Yy (Zz) Ii Jj ; I, J(K) means the circular center

or

G02 Xx Yy (Zz) Rr ; R-designated circular

(Note) The center coordinate will not shift during the circular or helical cutting. Thus, when I, J, K are

commanded with the vector as below, the program error (P70) will occur.

G02 Xx Yy (Zz) Ii Jj ; I, J(K) means the circular center

or

G02 Xx Yy (Zz) Rr ; R-designated circular

Movement during the tool radius compensation

(6) When compensation amount is to be changed

(Note) If I, J, K are not commanded in a block where the compensation amount is to be changed, the

vector will be equivalent to the old vector. In this case, the modal will change, however, the

compensation amount will change when I, J, K are commanded.

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

Tool center path

Program path

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

(CP) Arc center

Tool center path

Program path

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

Tool center path

Program path

(a) (b)

(S)

(b)(a)

r

(CP)

r

(S)

G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Dd1 ;

G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Dd2 ;

(b)

(S)

(a)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

266

(7) When compensation direction is to be changed

(Note 1) If I, J and K are not commanded in a block where the compensation direction is to be changed, the

vector will be equivalent to the old vector and the compensation direction will not be changed. In

this case, the modal will change, however, the compensation direction will change when I, J and K

are commanded.

(Note 2) If the compensation direction is changed in an arc (G02/G03) block, I, J will be the center of arc,

thus, the compensation direction will not change.

Even for the R-designation method, commanded I, J and K will be ignored, and the compensation

direction cannot be changed.

(8)When there is a movement command

G40 Xx Yy Zz ; (or Xx Yy Zz D00 ;)

Tool radius compensation cancel

(9) When there is no movement command

G40; (or D00;)

(S) Start point

(a) Old vector

(b) New vector

Tool center path

Program path

(S) Start point

(E) End point

(a) Old vector

Tool center path

Program path

(a) Old vector

Tool center path

Program path

G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Dd1 ;

G42 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ; (b)

(a)

(S)

(S)

(a)

(E)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

267

Relation with other functions

Normal tool radius compensation

If the plane normal line vector (I, J, K) is not commanded for all three axes in the three-dimensional tool radius

compensation start block, the normal tool radius compensation mode will take place.

If G41 (G42) is commanded without commanding the plane normal line vector during three-dimensional tool

radius compensation, the modal will change, however, the old vector will be used.

If G41 (G42) with the plane normal line vector is commanded during tool radius compensation, this command

will be ignored and the normal tool radius compensation will take place.

Tool length compensation

Tool length compensation is applied on the coordinate after three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

Tool position offset

Tool position offset is applied on the coordinate after three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

Fixed cycle

The program error (P155) will occur.

Scaling

Scaling is applied on the coordinate before three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

Scaling is not applied on the plane normal line vector (I, J, K).

D1=10. G90 ; G51 X0 Y0 P0.5 ; N1 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-30. Y-30. Z-20. ; N3 X-50. Y-20. Z-10. ; N4 Y0. ; N1( -5.000, -10.000, -10.000 ) N1( -10.773, -15.773, -15.773 ) N2( -15.000, -15.000, -20.000 ) N2( -20.773, -20.773, -25.773 ) N3( -25.000, -10.000, -10.000 ) N3( -30.773, -15.773, -15.773 ) N4( -25.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) N4( -30.773, -5.773, -15.773 ) *Upper: Program position after scaling Lower: Position after scaling and compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation (c) Plane normal line vector

(d) Program path after scaling (e) Path after scaling and compensation

X

X

Y

Z

— 50. — 30. — 20. — 10.

— 30.

— 20.

— 10.

— 20.

(b)

(c)

(a) (d)

(b)

(c)

(a)

(d)

(e)

(e)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

268

Coordinate rotation by program

Program coordinate rotation is applied on the coordinate before three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

The plane normal line vector (I, J, K) will not rotate.

Coordinate rotation by parameter

Parameter coordinate rotation is applied on the coordinates after three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

The plane normal line vector (I, J, K) rotates.

Mirror image

Mirror image is applied on the coordinates after three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

Mirror image is applied on the plane normal line vector (I, J, K).

Skip

The program error (P608) will occur.

Reference position check

The compensation amount will not be canceled. Thus, if this is commanded during three-dimensional tool

radius compensation, the path will be deviated by the compensation amount, thus the program error (P434)

will occur.

D1=10. G90 ; G68.1 X0 Y0 R45. ; N1 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-30. Y-30. Z-20. ; N3 X-50. Y-20. Z-10. ; N4 Y0. ; N1( 7.071, -21.213, -10.000 ) N1( 1.298, -26.986, -15.773 ) N2( 0.000, -42.426, -20.000 ) N2( -5.773, -48.199, -25.773 ) N3( -21.213, -49.497, -10.000 ) N3( -26.986, -55.270, -15.773 ) N4( -35.355, -35.355, -10.000 ) N4( -41.128, -41.128, -15.773 ) *Upper: Program position after coordinate rotation Lower: Position after coordinate rotation and compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation (c) Plane normal line vector

(d) Program path after coordinate rotation (e) Path after coordinate rotation and compensation

X

Z

— 20.

— 10.

X

Y

— 50. — 30. — 20. — 10.

— 30.

— 20.

(b)

(c)

(a) (d)

(b)

(c)

(a)

(d)

(e)

(e)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

269

Automatic Corner Override

Automatic corner override is invalid during three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

Machine coordinate system selection

(1) For the absolute command, all axes will be temporarily canceled at the commanded coordinate position.

(2) For the incremental command, the axis will move by the amount obtained by subtracting each axis vector

from the incremental movement amount.

(The compensation amount is temporarily canceled.)

D1=10. G90 ; N1 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-30. Y-30. Z-20. ; N3 X-50. Y-20. Z-10. ; N4 G53 Y0 ; N1( -10.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N1( -15.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N2( -30.000, -30.000, -20.000 ) N2( -35.773, -35.773, -25.773 ) N3( -50.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N3( -55.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N4( -50.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) N4( -50.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) *Upper: Program position Lower: Position after compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation

D1=10. G91 ; N1 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-20. Y-10. Z-10. ; N3 X-20. Y10. Z10. ; N4 G53 Y20. ; N1( -10.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N1( -15.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N2( -30.000, -30.000, -20.000 ) N2( -35.773, -35.773, -25.773 ) N3( -50.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N3( -55.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N4( -50.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) N4( -50.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) *Upper: Program position Lower: Position after compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation

X

X

Y

Z

— 50. — 30. — 20. — 10.

— 30.

— 20.

— 10.

— 20.

(b)

(a)

(a)

(b)

X

X

Y

Z

— 50. — 30. — 20. — 10.

— 30.

— 20.

— 10.

— 20.

(b)

(a)

(a)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

270

Coordinate system setting

When commanded in the same block as the coordinate system setting, the coordinate system will be set, and

operation will start up independently with the plane normal line vector (I, J, K).

D1=10. G91 ; N1 G92 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-20. Y-10. Z-10. ; N3 X-30. Y-10. Z10. ; N4 Y20. ; N1( -10.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N1( -15.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N2( -30.000, -30.000, -20.000 ) N2( -35.773, -35.773, -25.773 ) N3( -50.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N3( -55.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N4( -50.000, 0.000, -10.000 ) N4( -55.773, -5.773, -15.773 ) *Upper: Program position Lower: Position after compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation

X

X

Y

Z

— 50. — 30. — 20. — 10.

— 30.

— 20.

— 10.

— 20.

W(0,0)

W(0,0)

G92

G92

(b)

(a)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.5 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/G41,G42

271

Reference position return

All the axes will be temporarily canceled at the intermediate point.

NC reset

Three-dimensional tool radius compensation will be canceled if NC reset is executed during three-

dimensional tool radius compensation.

Emergency stop

Three-dimensional tool radius compensation will be canceled by the emergency stop or emergency stop

cancel during three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

D1=10. G91 ; N1 G41 D1 X-10. Y-20. Z-10. I-5. J-5. K-5. ; N2 X-20. Y-10. Z-10. ; N3 X-20. Y10. Z10. ; N4 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N1( -10.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N1( -15.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N2( -30.000, -30.000, -20.000 ) N2( -35.773, -35.773, -25.773 ) N3( -50.000, -20.000, -10.000 ) N3( -55.773, -25.773, -15.773 ) N4( 0.000, 0.000, 0.000 ) N4( 0.000, 0.000, 0.000 ) N4( 20.000, 10.000, 10.000 ) N4( 20.000, 10.000, 10.000 ) *Upper: Workpiece coordinate position Lower: Position after compensation

(a) Programmed path (b) Path after compensation

X

X

Z

— 30. — 20. — 10.

— 40.

— 20.

— 10.

— 30.

W(0,0)

M(0,0)

— 10.

Y

— 30.

— 20.

M(0,0)

W(0,0)

— 20.

— 10.

— 50.

— 30. — 20.- 70. — 50.

(b)

(a)

(a)

(b)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

272

Restrictions

(1) The compensation No. is selected with the D address, however, the D address is valid only when G41 or

G42 is commanded. If D is not commanded, the number of the previous D address will be valid.

(2) Switch the mode to the compensation mode in the G00 or G01 mode. When changed during the arc

mode, the program error (P150) will occur.

The compensation direction and compensation amount after the mode change will become valid from the

block where I, J and K are commanded in the G00 or G01 mode. If three-dimensional tool radius

compensation is commanded in a block not containing the plane normal line vector (I, J, K) during the arc

mode, only the modal information will be changed.

The plane normal line vector will be validated from the block where I, J and K are commanded next.

(3) During the three-dimensional tool radius compensation mode in a certain space, it is not possible to

switch the space to another one and to execute three-dimensional tool radius compensation. To switch

the compensation space, always cancel the compensation mode with G40 or D00 first.

(Example)

(4) If the compensation No. D is other than the range of 1 to 40 with the standard specifications or 1 to 800

(max.) with the additional specifications, the program error (P170) will occur.

(5) Only the G40 and D00 commands can be used to cancel three-dimensional tool radius compensation.

(6) If the size (I2+J2+K2) of the vector commanded with I, J and K overflows, the program error (P35) will

occur.

G41 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ; Compensation starts in X, Y, Z space.

: :

: :

G41 Uu Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk ; Compensation is carried out in X, Y, Z space, and U axis moves by commanded value.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

273

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

Function and purpose

This function realizes the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machine with 2 rotary axes by calculating the

change in the direction of a workpiece and the inclination of the tool caused by the move of the rotary axes.

Tool radius compensation is carried out by calculating the tool path on the surface of a workpiece from the

program command, and obtaining the compensation vector on a plane perpendicular to the tool direction

(offset plane).

This function is available only for the 5-axis machining and also, requires the option.

If the option is not provided, a program error (P161) will occur.

Command format

(Note) All the G codes in the above command format belong to modal group 7.

r : Compensation amount

: Tool center path

: Program path

(a) Tool direction

(b) Offset plane

G41.2 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_; … Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining left

G42.2 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_; … Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining right

G40 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_; (or X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_D00;) … Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining cancel

X,Y,Z Orthogonal coordinate axis movement command (can be omitted)

A,B,C Rotary axis movement command (can be omitted)

D Compensation No.

r

r

(a) (b)

X

Y

Z

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

274

Detailed description

This function calculates the change in the direction of a workpiece and the inclination of the tool caused by the

move of the rotary axes, and converts the programmed tool path onto the offset plane (perpendicular to the

tool direction at the compensation point) to conduct the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining. (Refer

to «How to calculate the compensation vector» for the details of offset plane.)

The operations at the start/cancel and in compensation mode on the offset plane conform to the normal tool

radius compensation. Refer to the «Tool Radius Compensation» section for the operations which are not

explained in this section.

Tool radius compensation start (startup)

The type of compensation start can be selected from type A and type B by the parameter «#8157 Radius

comp type B», like the conventional tool radius compensation. Refer to «Tool Radius Compensation» for the

descriptions of type A/type B.

The startup must be carried out in the G code modal listed in «Available modes» in «Relation with other

functions». If commanded in an unlisted modal, the program error (P163) will occur.

Tool radius compensation operation

For usable functions during the compensation, refer to «Available commands» in «Relation with other

functions». If an unavailable function is commanded, the program error (P162) will occur. Interference check

is not available for tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining.

Tool radius compensation cancel

When any of the following condition is met, the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining will be

canceled.

(1) After the compensation cancel command (G40) is issued

(2) A command of offset number D00 is issued

(3) NC reset 1 is commanded (Note 1)

(4) Reset 2 and Reset &Rewind is commanded

The type of compensation cancel can be selected from type A and type B by the parameter «#8157 Radius

comp type B», as well as the startup.

(Note 1) The compensation is canceled when «#1151 rstint» is ON.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

275

How to calculate the compensation vector

The compensation vectors for tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is obtained as shown below.

(1) Convert the program command into the path on the surface of the table coordinate system. Table

coordinate system rotates with the workpiece (Fig. 1) as the table rotates. The command path on this

coordinate system is the relative command path of the tool against the workpiece.

(2) Reflect the obtained path on the table coordinate system onto the offset plane (vertical to the tool axis

direction at the compensation point) and calculate the points (A’ and C’ in Fig. 2) on the offset plane.

(3) Perform the conventional tool radius compensation on the offset plane and calculate the compensation

vector on the offset plane.

Fig. 1 Table coordinate system

(a) Tool direction at point A

(b) Tool direction at point B

Offset plane at point A Offset plane at point B Path on the table coordinate system

Fig. 2 Conversion into the points on the offset plane

Path on the table coordinate system on the offset plane

Compensation vector on the offset plane

Fig. 3 Compensation on the offset plane

X X

Y Z Z

Y

A

B(a)

(b)

C

C

B

A

A

X

Z Y

A

C X

C

B

AY Z

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

276

When a block is inserted

When a block is inserted when cutting a corner, the direction of the tool at the single block stop is equal to that

of the previous block. (Like a feedrate and other modal data, the rotation angle of the previous block is kept.)

If the program moves from A, B to C as shown in Fig. 4, the offset plane at point B is Fig. 5.

Point B2-B3 is the inserted block.The tool direction between B2-B3 is same as at point B2 and the tool moves

on the offset plane which is created at point B.

(b) Tool direction at point B

Path on the table coordinate system

Offset plane at point B

Fig. 4 When a block is inserted

Path on the table coordinate system on the offset plane

(S) Single block stop point

Fig. 5 Offset plane at point B

B

X

Y Z

A

A

C

C

B

(b)

C

B

B1

B3 B2

B4

(S)

A

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

277

Program example

(D1 =5.0H1=50.0)

N1 G28 Z

N2 G28 BC

N3 G28 XY

N4 G90 G54 G00 X-60. Y0.

N5 G00 B30.

N6 G43.4 H1 Z-50.

N7 G42.2 G01 X-50. D1

N8 G01 X-49.990 Y-1.000 C 1.15

N9 G01 X-49.960 Y-1.999 C 2.29

N10 G01 X-49.910 Y-2.998 C 3.44

:

:

N200 G01 X50. Y0. C180.

N201 G01 Z0.

N202 G40

N203 G44

N204 G28 Z

N205 G28 BC

N206 G28 X

M30

(a) Compensation amount (P) Program path (C) Tool center path

X

Y

-50.0

50.0

(P)

(a)

G54

(C)

Z

-50.0

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

278

Relation with other functions

Commands which can be issued in a same block

If unlisted commands are issued in a same block with tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the

program error (P163) will occur.

Available commands

(Note) If the inch/metric command switches during tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the

program error (P162) occurs.

Function

G00 Positioning

G01 Linear interpolation

G90 Absolute value command

G91 Incremental value command

F Feedrate command

N : Sequence No.

Function

G00 Positioning

G01 Linear interpolation

G04 Dwell

G05 P0, G05 P1, G05 P2 High speed machining mode

G05 P0, G05 P10000 High speed high accuracy control II

G08 P0, G08 P1 High-accuracy control

G09 Exact stop

G20, G21 Inch/metric command (Note)

G22, G23 Stroke check before travel ON/OFF

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel

G40 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining left/right

G61 Exact stop check mode

G61.1 High-accuracy control I ON

G64 Cutting mode

G65 User macro Simple call

G66 User macro Modal call A

G66.1 User macro Modal call B

G67 User macro Modal call cancel

G90, G91 Absolute value command/incremental value command

G93 Inverse time feed

G94 Feed per minute

G95 Feed per revolution

G96, G97 Constant surface speed control ON/OFF

M98, M99 Subprogram call, main program return

F Feedrate command

M, S, T, B M, S, T, B command

Macro command

Local variable, Common variable, Arithmetic Commands (such as four basic arithmetic rule, trigonometric functions, square root) Control Commands (IF-GOTO- and WHILE-DO-)

N Sequence No.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

279

Available modes

Function

G00, G01 Positioning, Linear Interpolation

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G20, G21 Inch/Metric command

G22, G23 Stroke check before travel ON/OFF

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel

G40.1, G150 Normal line control cancel

G40 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining left/right

G43 Tool length compensation (+/-)

G43.1 Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction

G43.4, G43.5 Tool center point control type I/II

G44 Tool length compensation cancel

G50 Scaling cancel

G50.1 G command mirror image cancel

G54, G55, G56,G57, G58, G59, G54.1

Work coordinate system selection, extended workpiece coordinate system selection

G54.4Pn Workpiece installation error compensation

G61 Exact stop check mode

G61.1 High-accuracy control I ON

G64 Cutting mode

G67 User macro Modal call cancel

G68.2 Inclined surface machining

G68.3 Inclined surface machining command (Define using tool axis direction)

G69 3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel

G80 Fixed cycle cancel

G90,G91 Absolute value command, incremental value command

G93 Inverse time feed

G94 Feed per minute

G95 Feed per revolution

G96, G97 Constant surface speed control ON/OFF

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

G15, G13.1, G113 Polar coordinate command cancel

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

280

Precautions

(1) Interference check is not available for tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining. The parameter

«#8103 COLL. CHK OFF» to turn ON/OFF the interference check, available for conventional tool radius

compensation, is invalid in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining.

(2) Tool radius compensation vector designation (G38), Tool radius compensation corner arc (G39) are not

available. If commanded, the program error (P162) occurs.

(3) Corner Chamfering/Corner Rounding, Linear Angle Command, Geometric Command are not available. If

commanded, the program error (P162) occurs.

(4) Manual interruption, automatic operation handle interruption, manual / automatic simultaneous, manual

speed command, manual reference position return, tool handle feed & interruption, and manual arbitrary

feed mode will cause the alarm «M01 Illegal op in 5 ax tool R comp 0232» when manual mode is ON.

(5) Macro interruption cannot be used. If the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is commanded

when macro interruption is valid, the program error (P163) will occur. If macro interruption valid (ION) is

commanded in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the program error (P162) occurs.

(6) Tool escape and return is not available. Turning ON the tool escape and return transit point designation

signal and the manual mode will cause the alarm «M01 Illegal op in 5 ax tool R comp 0232».

(7) Switching from a mode to MDI mode or from MDI mode to another mode in tool radius compensation for

5-axis machining, will cause the alarm «M01 Illegal op in 5 ax tool R comp 0232».

(8) Turning ON on the PLC interruption signal in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, will cause

the alarm «M01 Illegal op in 5 ax tool R comp 0232».

(9) The external input mirror image cannot be used to axes for 5-axis machining (Note). If commanded in the

tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is commanded, a program error (P162) will occur. Also, if

the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is commanded during the external input mirror image,

the program error (P163) will occur.

(10) If the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is in the reverse run control mode, or if the reverse

run control mode signal is turned ON in the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the program

error (P163) will occur.

(11) The ON/OFF of the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining must be nested in the ON/OFF of the

tool center point control and it must be commanded in the tool center point control. If the tool center point

control is commanded in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the program error (P162)

occurs.

(12) When used with the tool center point control, compensation is applied to the tool center point path.

(13) The restart search from the block in the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is possible while

the restart search from the block concurrently using the tool center point control is impossible.

(Note) Axes for 5-axis machining are the axes designated with parameters «#7900 RCDAX_I», «#7901

RCDAX_J», «#7902 RCDAX_K», «#7922 ROTAXT1», «#7932 ROTAXT2», «#7942 ROTAXW1», and

«#7952 ROTAXW2».

(a) During tool center point control

(b) In tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining

(a) (b)

G44

G40

G41.2 D1

G43.4 H1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ; G40/G41.2,G42.2

281

(14) The ON/OFF of the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining must be nested in the ON/OFF of the

the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction and it must be commanded in the tool length

compensation in the tool axis direction. If the tool length compensation in the tool axis direction is

commanded in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the program error (P162) occurs.

(15) Fairing in high-speed machining mode/high-speed high-accuracy control is not available. The parameter

«#8033 Fairing ON» to turn ON/OFF the fairing function in high-speed machining mode/high-speed high-

accuracy control is invalid in 3-dimensional tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining.

(16) As shown in the below figure, we recommend that the tool approach to the surface of the workpiece at an

angle. Tool radius compensation amount may not be correctly reflected on the cutting when the direction

of the approach is opposite to the cutting direction. So the tool must shift to the surface of the workpiece

at the start of the cutting at an angle to the tool axis direction.

(17) The buffer correction is not available in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining. Pressing the

menu [Prg correct] will display an error message.

(18) Also, if the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is commanded during the mirror image by

parameter setting / external mirror image input, the program error (P163) will occur. If the parameter is

turned on in tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, the program error (P162) occurs.

(a) Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction

(b) In 3-dimensional tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining

:

Tool radius compensation amount may not be correctly reflected because there is no movement on the offset plane and the tool radius compensation amount is not re- calculated.

: Tool radius compensation amount is correctly reflected.

Offset plane (perpendicular to the tool axis direction)

Movement on the offset plane.

(a) (b)

G43.1 H1

G41.2 D1

G40

G44

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

282

(19) Axis configuration of applicable machines is as follows.

(a)This function is applicable to the following three machine configurations.

(b)This function is not applicable to machines as below.

Type Tool tilt type Table tilt type Combined type

Description A machine whose tool head

has two rotary axes A machine whose table has two rotary axes

A machine whose tool head and table has a rotary axis for each

Example of machines

(A) Tool side rotary axis 2 Table side rotary axis 1 Tool-side rotary axis

(B) Tool side rotary axis 1 Table-side 2nd rotary axis Table-side rotary axis

Description Example of machines

A machine whose rotary axiss rotation center axis is not parallel to any orthogonal coordinate axis.

A machine whose direction from the tool tip to the tool base is not parallel to Z axis (Z axis positive direction) when machine positions of

the rotary axes are all 0.

(a) Tool axis direction

A machine in which three linear axes do not form a right-handed orthogonal coordinate system.

(B)

(A) (A)

(B)

(A)

(B)

0

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48

283

12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48

Function and purpose

Using the G45 to G46 commands, the movement distance of the axes specified in the same block can be

extended or reduced by a preset compensation length.

Furthermore, the compensation amount can be similarly doubled (x 2 expansion) or halved (x 2 reduction)

with commands G47 and G48.

The number of sets for the compensation differ according to machine specification. Refer to Specifications

Manual.

D01 to Dn

(The numbers given are the total number of sets for tool length compensation, tool position

compensation and tool radius compensation.)

G45 command

(S) Start point (E) End point (a) Internal arithmetic processing (b) Movement amount

Expansion by compensation amount only

G46 command

Reduction by compensation amount only

G47 command

2 expansion by compensation amount

G48 command

2 reduction by compensation amount

(Program command value)

(compensation amount)

(Movement amount after compensation)

(b)

(S)

(a)

(E)

(b) (S)

(a)

(E)

(b)

(S)

(a)

(E)

(b)

(S)

(a)

(E)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

284

Command format

Detailed description

Details for incremental values are given below.

G45 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ (D__) ; … Expansion of movement amount by compensation amount set in compensation memory

G46 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ (D__) ; … Reduction of movement amount by compensation amount set in compensation memory

G47 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ (D__) ; … Expansion of movement amount by double the compensation amount set in compensation memory

G48 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ (D__) ; … Reduction of movement amount by double the compensation amount set in compensation memory

X, Y, Z Movement amount of each axis

H (D)

Tool compensation No.: Tool compensation type I Tool length compensation and tool radius compensation is not distinguished. Thus, the same compensation amount will be obtained whichever H or D is used. Tool compensation type II: The compensation amount will be obtained as follows. H: Compensation amount designated with tool length compensation No. D: Compensation amount designated with tool radius compensation No.

Command Movement amount of equivalent command

(assigned compensation amount = l) Example

(when X = 1000)

G45 Xx Dd X(x+l) l= 10 X= 1010 l= -10 X= 990

G45 X-x Dd X-(x+l) l= 10 X= -1010 l= -10 X= -990

G46 Xx Dd X(x-l) l= 10 X= 990 l= -10 X= 1010

G46 X-x Dd X-(x-l) l= 10 X= -990 l= -10 X= -1010

G47 Xx Dd X(x+2*l) l= 10 X= 1020 l= -10 X= 980

G47 X-x Dd X-(x+2*l) l= 10 X= -1020 l= -10 X= -980

G48 Xx Dd X(x-2*l) l= 10 X= 980 l= -10 X= 1020

G48 X-x Dd X-(x-2*l) l= 10 X= -980 l= -10 X= -1020

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48

285

Program example

(Example 1)

Tool position compensation with 1/4 arc command

It is assumed that compensation has already been provided in the + X direction by D01 = 200.

Even if the compensation numbers are not assigned in the same block as the G45 to G48 commands,

compensation is provided with the tool position compensation number previously stored in the memory.

If the commanded compensation No. exceeds the specification range, the program error (P170) will occur.

These G codes are unmodal and are effective only in the command block.

Even with an absolute value command, the amount of the movement is extended or reduced for each axis

with respect to the direction of movement from the end point of the preceding block to the position assigned by

the G45 to G48 block.

In other words, even for an absolute value command, compensation can be applied to movement amounts

(incremental values) in the same block.

When a command for «n» number of simultaneous axes is given, the same compensation will be applied to all

axes. It is valid even for the additional axes. (but it must be within the range of the number of axes which can

be controlled simultaneously.)

(S) Start point

(E) End point

(CP) Programmed arc center

(a) Program path

(b) Tool center path

(c) Tool

G91 G45 G03 X -1000 Y1000 I -1000 F1000 D01 ;

(S) Start point (e) End point after compensation (f) Programmed end point

1000 200

X

1000

Y

(b)

(S)

(a)

(E)

(CP)

(c)

110. 50.

220.

50.

270. X

G01 G45 X220. Y60. D20 ; (D20) = +50. 000

60.

Y

(f)(S)

(e)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

286

(Note 1) If compensation is applied to two axes, over-cutting or under-cutting will result, as shown in the

figures below. In cases like this, use the cutter compensation commands (G40 to G42).

(a) Programmed path (b) Tool center path (c) Machined shape

(d) Workpiece (e) Desired shape (f) Under-cutting

(g) Tool l = Compensation amount setting

X

G01 G45 Xx 1 Dd1 ; Xx2 Yy 2 ;

G45 Yy3 ;

Y

l

(b)

(c)

(a)

(d)

(f)

(g)

(e)

G01 Xx1 ; G45 Xx 2 Yy2 Dd 2 ;

Yy3 ;

X

Y

l

(b)

(e)

(a)

(d)

(f)

(g)

(c)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48

287

(Example 2)

(a) Programmed path (b) Tool center path

N1 G46 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ; N2 G45 G01 Yy2 Ff2 ; N3 G45 G03 Xx3 Yy3 Ii3 ; N4 G01 Xx4 ;

N3

X

Y

N4

N1

N2

(b)

(a)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

288

(Example 3)

When the G45 to G48 command is assigned, the compensation amount for each pass is the amount assigned

by the compensation number, and the tool does not move for the difference from the previous compensation

as it would do with the tool length compensation command (G43).

Compensation amount D01 = 10.000mm (Compensation amount of tool radius)

(S) Start point (a) Programmed path (b) Tool center path

N100 G91 G46 G00 X40.0 Y40.0 D01 ;

N101 G45 G01 X100.0 F200 ;

N102 G45 G03 X10.0 Y10.0 J10.0 ;

N103 G45 G01 Y40.0 ;

N104 G46 X0 ;

N105 G46 G02 X-20.0 Y20.0 J20.0 ;

N106 G45 G01 Y0 ;

N107 G47 X-30.0 ;

N108 Y-30.0 ;

N109 G48 X-30.0 ;

N110 Y 30.0 ;

N111 G45 X-30.0 ;

N112 G45 G03 X-10.0 Y-10.0 J-10.0 ;

N113 G45 G01 Y-20.0 ;

N114 X10.0 ;

N115 Y-40.0 ;

N116 G46 X-40.0 Y-40.0 ;

N117 M02 :

%

4030

N101

10

N102

30

30

30

40

40

10

N100

N105N108N110

N103

N115

N114

N116

N113 N109

N112

N104

N106

N107

20R

10R

10R

N111

(b)(a)

(S)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.7 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48

289

Precautions

(1) These commands should be used when operation is not in a canned cycle mode.

(They are ignored even if they are assigned during a canned cycle.)

(2) As a result of the internal arithmetic processing based on the expansion or reduction, the tool will

proceed to move in the opposite direction when the command direction is reversed.

(3) When a zero movement amount has been specified in the incremental value command (G91) mode, the

result is as follows.

When a zero movement amount has been specified with an absolute value command, the operation is

completed immediately and the tool does not move for the compensation amount.

Program command G48 X20.000 D01 ;

Compensation Compensation amount = +15.000

Tool movement Actual movement = X — 10.000

(S) Start point

(E) End point

Compensation No. : D01

Compensation amount corresponding to D01

: 1234

NC command G45 X0 D01 ; G45 X-0 D01 ; G46 X0 D01 ; G46 X-0 D01;

Equivalent command X1234 ; X -1234 ; X -1234 ; X1234 ;

(S)

(E)

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

290

(4) In the case of circular interpolation, tool radius compensation is possible by the G45 to G48 commands

only for one quadrant, two quadrants (semi sphere) or three quadrants when the start and end points are

on the axis.

The commands are assigned as follows depending on whether the compensation is applied for outside

or inside the arc programmed path.

However, in this case, compensation must already be provided in the desired direction at the arc start

point. (If a compensation command is assigned for the arc independently, the arc start point and end

point radius will shift by an amount equivalent to the compensation amount.)

1/4 circle

G45 for compensation outside the circle G46 for compensation inside the circle (a) Programed path

1/2 circle

G47 for compensation outside the circle G48 for compensation inside the circle (a) Programed path

3/4 circle

G45 for compensation outside the circle G46 for compensation inside the circle (a) Programed path

G45

G46

(a)

G47

G48

(a)

G45

G46

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.8 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10

291

12.8 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10

Function and purpose

The tool compensation and workpiece offset can be set or changed by the program using the G10 command.

The commanded values will be set regardless of the absolute value (G90) or incremental value (G91) mode.

Command format

Workpiece offset input

(Note) The compensation amount in the G91 will be an incremental amount and will be cumulated each

time the program is executed. Command G90 or G91 before the G10 as a cautionary means to

prevent this type of error.

Tool compensation input

Type I

Type II

(Note) Type I is selected when the parameter «#1037 cmdtyp» is set to «9», or Type II is selected when set

to «10».

G90 (G91) G10 L2 P__ X__ Y__ Z__ ;

P

0 : External workpiece 1 : G54 2 : G55 3 : G56 4 : G57 5 : G58 6 : G59

G10 L10 P__ R__ ; … For tool compensation memory

P Compensation No.

R Compensation amount

G10 L10 P__ R__ ; … For tool compensation memory Tool length compensation shape compensation

G10 L11 P__ R__ ; … For tool compensation memory Tool length compensation wear compensation

G10 L12 P__ R__ ; … For tool compensation memory Tool radius shape compensation

G10 L13 P__ R__ ; … For tool compensation memory Tool radius wear compensation

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

292

Detailed description

(1) Program error (P171) will occur if this command is input when the specifications are not available.

(2) G10 is an unmodal command and is valid only in the commanded block.

(3) The G10 command does not contain movement, but must not be used with G commands other than G54

to G59, G90 or G91.

(4) Do not command G10 in the same block as the fixed cycle and sub-program call command. This will

cause malfunctioning and program errors.

(5) The workpiece offset input command (L2 or L20) should not be issued in the same block as the tool

compensation input command (L10).

(6) If an illegal L No. or compensation No. is commanded, the program errors (P172 and P170) will occur

respectively.

If the offset amount exceeds the maximum command value, the program error (P35) will occur.

(7) Decimal point inputs can be used for the offset amount.

(8) The offset amounts for the external workpiece coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system

are commanded as distances from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.

(9) The workpiece coordinate system updated by inputting the workpiece coordinate system will follow the

previous modal (G54 to G59) or the modal (G54 to G59) in the same block.

(10) L2 can be omitted when the workpiece offset is input.

(11) When the P command is omitted, it will be handled as the currently selected workpiece compensation

input.

(12) When the «P» to designate the compensation No. is commanded in the same block as G22.1 or G23.1,

the tool compensation data will not be input. «P» will be regarded as the number of repetition of

subprogram call, that will cause an illegal operation.

Program example

(1) Input the compensation amount

H10=-12.345 H05=9.8765 H30=2.468

; G10 L10 P10 R-12.345 ; G10 L10 P05 R9.8765 ; G10 L10 P30 R2.468 ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.8 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10

293

(2) Updating of compensation amount

(Example 1) Assume that H10 = -1000 is already set.

(Example 2) Assume that H10 = -1000 is already set.

Main program

Subprogram L1111

(Note)Final offset amount will be H10= -5000.

(Example 3) The program for Example 2 can also be written as follows.

Main program

Subprogram L1111

N1 G01 G90 G43 Z-100000 H10 F100 ; (Z=-101000)

N2 G28 Z0 ;

N3 G91 G10 L10 P10 R-500 ; (The mode is the G91 mode, so -500 is added.)

N4 G01 G90 G43 Z-100000 H10 ; (Z=-101500)

N1 G00 X100000 ; a

N2 #1=-1000 ;

N3 G22 L1111 P4 ; b1, b2, b3, b4

N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 ; c1, c2, c3, c4

G01 X1000; d1, d2, d3, d4

#1=#1-1000 ;

G90 G10 L10 P10 R#1 ;

G23 ;

N1 G00 X100000 ;

N2 G22 L1111 P4 ;

N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 ;

N2 G01 X1000 ;

N3 G10 L10 P10 R-1000 ;

N4 G23 ;

(a) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4)

1000 1000 1000 1000

10 00

10 00

10 00

10 00c1

d1

c3 d3

c2 d2

c4 d4

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

294

(3) When updating the workpiece coordinate system offset amount

Assume that the previous workpiece coordinate system offset amount is as follows.

X=-10.000 Y=-10.000

(Note 1) Changes of workpiece position display at N101

At N101, the G54 workpiece position display data will change before and after the workpiece

coordinate system is changed with G10.

When workpiece coordinate system offset amount is set in G54 to G59

N100 G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N101 G90 G10 L2 P1 X-15.000 Y-15.000 ;

N102 X0 Y0 ;

M02 ;

Basic machine coordinate system zero point (a) G54 coordinate before change (b) G54 coordinate after change

X=0 Y=0

-> X=+5.000 Y=+5.000

G90 G10 L2 P1 X-10.000 Y-10.000 ;

G90 G10 L2 P2 X-20.000 Y-20.000 ;

G90 G10 L2 P3 X-30.000 Y-30.000 ;

G90 G10 L2 P4 X-40.000 Y-40.000 ;

G90 G10 L2 P5 X-50.000 Y-50.000 ;

G90 G10 L2 P6 X-60.000 Y-60.000 ;

— X — 20. — 10.

— 10.

M

— 20.

— Y

— Y

— Y

— X

— X

N100

N101

N102

(W1)

W1

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.8 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10

295

(4) When using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece coordinate systems

Precautions

(1) Even if this command is displayed on the screen, the offset No. and variable details will not be updated

until actually executed.

N1 G90 G10 L10 P10 R-100 ;

N2 G43 Z-10000 H10 ;

N3 G0 X-10000 Y-10000 ;

N4 G90 G10 L10 P10 R-200 ; …….. The H10 offset amount is updated when the N4 block is executed.

Main program

:

#1=-50. #2=10. ;

G22 L200 P5 ;

M02 ;

%

Subprogram L200

N1 G90 G54 G10 L2 P1 X#1 Y#1 ;

N2 G00 X0 Y0 ;

N3 X-5. F100 ;

N4 X0 Y-5. ;

N5 Y0 ;

N6 #1=#1+#2 ;

N7 G23 ;

%

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

— X — 10.

— 10.

M

— 20.

— Y — 50.

— 30.

— 60.

— 40.

G54» »

W

W

W

W

W

G54» ‘

G54»

G54′

G54

— 50. — 40. — 30. — 20.

1

2

3

5

4

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

296

12.9 Compensation Data Input to Variable by Program ; G11

Function and purpose

Using G11, the compensation amount of the No. commanded as the transmission source can be set into the

arbitrary variable.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) G11 command is unmodal, thus, it is valid only in the block where it is commanded.

(2) G11 must not be used with G codes other than G54 to G59, G90 or G91. If G11 is used with unsuitable

G codes, an illegal operation will result.

(3) When G11 is commanded in the same block as G22 or G23, the tool compensation data will not be input.

(«P» will be regarded as the number of repetition of subprogram call.)

G11 P__ Q__ ; … Compensation data input to variable by program

P Compensation No. of transmission source

Q Variable No. of transmission destination

Tool compensation memory type

Function

Type I Tool compensation amount substituted

Type II

Tool length shape compensation amount Substituted

Tool length wear compensation amount —

Tool radius shape compensation amount —

Tool radius wear compensation amount —

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11

297

12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11

12.10.1 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by G10 L3 Command ; G10 L3,G11

Function and purpose

Using the G10 command (unmodal command), the tool life management data can be registered, changed and

added to, and preregistered groups can be deleted.

Command format

Start of life management data registration

Start of life management data change or addition

Start of life management data deletion

End of life management data registration, change, addition or deletion

G10 L3 ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (First group) T_ H_ D_ ; T_ H_ D_ ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (Next group ) T_ H_ D_;

P Group No.

L Life

Q Control method

T Tool No. The spare tools are selected in the order of the tool Nos. registered here.

H Length compensation No.

D Radius compensation No.

G10 L3 P1; P_ L_ Q_ ; (First group) T_ H_ D_ ; T_ H_ D_ ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (Next group) T_ H_ D_;

P Group No.

L Life

Q Control method

T Tool No.

H Length compensation No.

D Radius compensation No.

G10 L3 P2; P_ ; (First group) P_ ; (Second group)

P Group No.

G11 ;

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

298

Detailed description

Command range

Operation example

Item Command range

Group No. (Pn) 1 to 99999999 (Only group No. 1 can be used for the tool life management III)

Life (Ln) 0 to 65000 times (No. of times control method) 0 to 4000 minutes (time control method)

Control method (Qn)

1 to 3 1: Number of mounts control 2: Time control 3: Number of cutting times control

Tool No. (Tn) 1 to 99999999

Length compensation No. (Hn) 0 to 999

Radius compensation No. (Dn) 0 to 999

Program example Operation

Data registration

G10 L3 ; P10 L10 Q1 ; T10 H10 D10 ; G11 ; M02 ;

1. After deleting all group data, the registration starts. 2. Group No. 10 is registered. 3. Tool No. 10 is registered in group No. 10. 4. The registration ends. 5. The program ends.

Group change, addition

G10 L3 P1 ; P10 L10 Q1 ; T10 H10 D10 ; G11; M02 ;

1. Changing and addition of the group and tool starts. 2. The change and addition operation takes place in the following manner. (1) When group No. 10 has not been registered. — Group No. 10 is additionally registered. — Tool No. 10 is registered in group No. 10. (2) When group No. 10 has been registered, but tool No. 10 has not been registered. — Tool No. 10 is additionally registered in group No. 10 (3) When group No. 10 and tool No. 10 have been both registered. — The tool No. 10 data is changed. 3. The group and tool change and addition ends. 4. The program ends.

Group deletion

G10 L3 P2 ; P10 ; G11 ; M02 ;

1. The group deletion starts. 2. The group No. 10 data is deleted. 3. The group deletion ends. 4. The program ends.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11

299

12.10.2 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by G10 L30 Command ; G10 L30,G11

Function and purpose

Using the G10 command (unmodal command), the tool life management data can be registered, changed and

added to, and preregistered groups can be deleted.

To specify additional compensation amount or direct compensation amount by control method, the length

compensation and diameter compensation can be registered/changed with the tool compensation amount

format.

Command format

Start of life management data registration

Start of life management data change or addition

Start of life management data deletion

End of life management data registration, change, addition or deletion

G10 L30 ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (First group) T_ H_ R_ ; T_ H_ R_ ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (Next group ) T_ H_ R_;

P Group No.

L Life

Q Control method

T Tool No. The spare tools are selected in the order of the tool Nos. registered here.

H Length compensation No. or length compensation amount

R Radius compensation No. or Radius compensation amount

G10 L30 P1; P_ L_ Q_ ; (First group) T_ H_ R_ ; T_ H_ R_ ; P_ L_ Q_ ; (Next group) T_ H_ R_;

P Group No.

L Life

Q Length compensation data format, radius compensation data format, control method

T Tool No.

H Length compensation No. or length compensation amount

D Radius compensation No. or radius compensation amount

G10 L30 P2; P_ ; (First group) P_ ; (Second group)

P Group No.

G11 ;

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

300

Detailed description

Command range

Item Command range

Group No. (Pn) 1 to 99999999 (Only group No. 1 can be used for the tool life management III)

Tool No. (Tn) 1 to 99999999

Control method (Qabc)

abc:Three integer digits a.Tool length compensation data format 0: Compensation No. 1: Incremental value compensation amount 2: Absolute value compensation amount b.Tool radius compensation data format 0: Compensation No. 1: Incremental value compensation amount 2: Absolute value compensation amount c.Tool management method 0: Usage time 1: Number of mounts 2: Number of usages

Life (Ln) 0 to 4000 minutes (usage time) 0 to 65000 times (number of mounts) 0 to 65000 times (number of usages)

Length compensation (No./amount)

(Hn) 0 to 999 (compensation No.) 99999.999 (incremental value compensation amount) 99999.999 (absolute value compensation amount)

Radius compensation (No./amount)

(Rn) 0 to 999 (compensation No.) 99999.999 (incremental value compensation amount) 99999.999 (absolute value compensation amount)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11

301

Operation example

Program example Operation

Data registration

G10 L30 ; P10 L10 Q001 ; T10 H10 R10 ; G11 ; M02 ;

1. After deleting all group data, the registration starts. 2. Group No. 10 is registered. Tool management method is number of mounts Compensation No. method is applied to tool length compensation and tool radius compensation. 3. Tool No. 10 is registered in group No. 10. 4. The registration ends. 5. The program ends.

Group change, addition

G10 L30 P1 ; P10 L10 Q122 ; T10 H10 R0.25 ; G11; M02 ;

1. Changing and addition of the group and tool starts. 2. The change and addition operation takes place in the following manner. (1) When group No. 10 has not been registered. [Group No. 10 is additionally registered. ] About the change and addition tool Tool management method is number of usages Tool length compensation is incremental value compensation amount method Tool radius compensation is absolute value compensation amount method [Tool No. 10 is registered in group No. 10. ] The absolute value compensation amount «0.25» is set to tool radius compensation. (2) When group No. 10 has been registered, but tool No. 10 has not been registered. — Tool No. 10 is additionally registered in group No. 10 (3) When group No. 10 and tool No. 10 have been both registered. — The tool No. 10 data is changed. 3. The group and tool change and addition ends. 4. The program ends.

Group deletion

G10 L30 P2 ; P10 ; G11 ; M02 ;

1. The group deletion starts. 2. The group No. 10 data is deleted. 3. The group deletion ends. 4. The program ends.

12 Tool Compensation Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

302

12.10.3 Precautions for Inputting the Tool Life Management Data

Relation with other functions

(1) During the following operations, the tool usage data will not be counted.

— Machine lock

— Miscellaneous function lock

— Dry run

— Single block

— Skip

Precautions

(1) The tool life data is registered, changed, added to or deleted by executing the program in the memory or

MDI mode.

(2) The group No. and tool No. cannot be commanded in duplicate. The program error (P179) will occur.

(3) When two or more addresses are commanded in one block, the latter address will be valid.

(4) If the life data (L_) is omitted, the life data for that group will be «0».

(5) If the control method (Q_) is omitted, the control method for that group will follow the base specification

parameter «#1106 Tcount».

Note that when carrying out the No. of cutting times control method, command the method from the

program.

(6) If the control method (Q_) is not designated with 3-digit by G10 L30 command, the omitted high-order are

equivalent to «0».

Therefore, «Q1» is equivalent to «Q001», and «Q12» is equivalent to «Q012».

(7) If the length compensation No. (H_) is omitted, the length compensation No. for that group will be «0».

(8) If the radius compensation No. (D_) is omitted, the radius compensation No. for that group will be «0».

(9) Programming with a sequence No. is not possible between G10 L3 or G10 L30 and G11. The program

error (P33) will occur.

(10) If the usage data count valid signal (YC8A) is ON, G10 L3 or G10 L30 cannot be commanded. The

program error (P177) will occur.

(11) The registered data is held even if the power is turned OFF.

(12) When G10 L3 or G10 L30 is commanded, the commanded group and tool will be registered after all of

the registered data is erased.

(13) The change and addition conditions in the G10L3P1 or G10 L30 P1 command are as follows.

(a) Change conditions

Both the commanded group No. and tool No. are registered.

-> Change the commanded tool No. data.

(b) Additional conditions

Neither the commanded group No. nor tool No. is registered.

-> Additionally register the commanded group No. and tool No. data.

The commanded group No. is registered, but the commanded tool No. is not registered.

-> Additionally register the commanded tool No. data to the commanded group No.

(14) The setting range of the tool compensation No. will differ according to options as in the table below.

(15) Only group No. 1 can be used to register, change and add for the tool life management III.

No. of tool offset sets option Setting range

200 sets 1-200

400 sets 1-400

999 sets 1-999

303

13

Program Support Functions

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

304

13.1 Fixed Cycles

Function and purpose

These fixed cycles are used to perform prepared sequences of machining programs, such as positioning, hole

drilling, boring and tapping in a block. The machining sequences available are listed in the table below.

By editing the standard fixed cycle subprograms, the fixed cycle sequences can be changed by the user. The

user can also register and edit an original fixed cycle program. For the standard fixed cycle subprograms,

refer to the list of the fixed cycle subprograms in the appendix of the operation manual. The list of fixed cycle

functions for this control unit is shown below.

A fixed cycle mode can be canceled by G80 command and other hole machining modes or G command in the

01 group. At the same time, various other data will also be cleared to zero.

G code

Hole machining start

Operation at hole bottom

Return operation Retract at

high speed Application

(-Z direction) Dwell Spindle (+Z

direction)

G80 — — — — — Cancel

G81 Cutting feed — — Rapid traverse

Yes Drill, spot drilling cycle

G82 Cutting feed Yes — Rapid traverse

— Drill, counter boring cycle

G83 Intermittent feed — — Rapid traverse

Yes Deep hole drilling cycle

G84 Cutting feed Yes Reverse rotation

Cutting feed — Tapping cycle

G85 Cutting feed — — Cutting feed — Boring cycle

G86 Cutting feed Yes Stop Rapid traverse

— Boring cycle

G87 Rapid traverse — Forward rotation

Cutting feed — Back boring cycle

G88 Cutting feed Yes Stop Rapid traverse

— Boring cycle

G89 Cutting feed Yes — Cutting feed — Boring cycle

G73 Intermittent feed Yes — Rapid traverse

Yes Stepping cycle

G74 Cutting feed Yes Forward rotation

Cutting feed — Reverse tapping cycle

G75 Cutting feed — — Rapid traverse

— Circular cutting cycle

G76 Cutting feed — Oriented spindle

stop

Rapid traverse

— Fine boring cycle

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

305

Detailed description

Basic operations of fixed cycle for drilling

There are 7 actual operations which are each described below.

(1) This indicates the X and Y axes positioning, and executes positioning with G00.

(2) This is an operation done after positioning is completed (at the initial point), and when G87 is

commanded, the M19 command is output from the control unit to the machine. When this M command is

executed and the finish signal (FIN) is received by the control unit, the next operation will start. If the

single block stop switch is ON, the block will stop after positioning.

(3) The tool is positioned to the R point by rapid traverse.

(4) Hole machining is conducted by cutting feed.

(5) This operation takes place at the hole bottom position, and depending on the fixed cycle mode, the

operation can be the spindle stop (M05), the rotary tool reverse rotation (M04), rotary tool forward

rotation (M03), dwell or tool shift.

(6) The tool is retracted to the R point at the cutting feed or the rapid traverse rate, depending on the fixed

cycle mode.

(7) The tool is returned to the initial point at rapid traverse rate.

(Note) Whether the fixed cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by G98/G99 G

commands. (Refer to «Initial point and R point level return; G98, G99»)

Difference between absolute value command and incremental value command

(I) Initial point (R) R point return

For absolute value For incremental value

(R) R point

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(7) (R)

(I)(1)

+r

— z

(R)

-r

— z

(R)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

306

Positioning plane and hole drilling axis

The fixed cycle has basic control elements for the positioning plane and hole drilling axis. The positioning

plane is determined by the G17, G18 and G19 plane selection commands, and the hole drilling axis is the axis

perpendicular (X, Y, Z or their parallel axis) to the above plane.

Xp, Yp and Zp indicate the basic axes X, Y and Z or an axis parallel to the basic axis.

An arbitrary axis other than the hole drilling axis can be commanded for positioning.

The hole drilling axis is determined by the axis address of the hole drilling axis commanded in the same block

as G81 to G89, G73, G74 or G76. The basic axis will be the hole drilling axis if there is no designation.

(Example 1) When G17 (X-Y plane) is selected, and the axis parallel to the Z axis is set as the W axis.

G81 …….Z_ ; The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis.

G81 ……W_ ; The W axis is used as the hole drilling axis.

G81 …… ; (No Z or W) The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis.

(Note 1) The hole drilling axis can be fixed to the Z axis with parameter #1080 Dril_Z.

(Note 2) Change over of the hole drilling axis must be carried out with the fixed cycle canceled.

In the following explanations on the movement in each fixed cycle mode, the XY plane is used for the

positioning plane and the Z axis for the hole drilling axis. Note that all command values will be incremental

values, the positioning plane will be the XY plane and the hole drilling axis will be the Z axis.

Programmable in-position width command in fixed cycle

This commands the in-position width for commanding the fixed cycle from the machining program. The

commanded in-position width is valid only in the eight fixed cycles; G81 (drill, spot drill), G82 (drill, counter

boring), G83 (deep drill cycle), G84 (tap cycle), G85 (boring), G89 (boring), G73 (step cycle) and G74 (reverse

tap cycle). The «, I» address is commanded in respect to the positioning axis, and the «,J» address is

commanded in respect to the drilling axis.

Plane selection Positioning plane Hole drilling axis

G17 (X-Y) Xp-Yp Zp

G18 (Z-X) Zp-Xp Yp

G19 (Y-Z) Yp-Zp Xp

Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks

,I In-position width for positioning axis (position error amount) 0.001 to 999.999 (mm)

If a value exceeding the command range is commanded, a program error (P35) will occur.

,J In-position width for drilling axis (position error amount)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

307

In-position check in fixed cycle

When L (number of repetitions) is designated twice or more times in the fixed cycle, the commanded in-

position width will be valid in the repetition block (5) to (8) below.

:

G91 G81 X-50. Z-50. R-50. L2 F2000 ,I0.2 ,J0.3;

:

In the following machining program, the commanded in-position width is valid for the Fig. 2 block. In the (B)

block, the in-position width (, I) commanded regarding to positioning in the previous block (A) is invalid (5).

However, when returning from the hole bottom, the in-position width (, J) commanded in the previous block

(A) is valid (8).

To validate the in-position width for positioning, command again as shown in block (C) (9).

:

G91 G81 X-50. Z-50. R-50. F2000 ,I0.2 ,J0.3 ; ….. (A)

X-10. ; ……………………………………………………. (B)

X-10.,I0.2 ; ……………………………………………… (C)

Operation pattern ,I ,J

(1) Valid —

(2) — Invalid

(3) — Invalid

(4) — Valid

(5) Valid —

(6) — Invalid

(7) — Invalid

Fig. 1 Operation when number of repetitions L is designated (8) — Valid

Operation pattern ,I ,J

(1) Valid —

(2) — Invalid

(3) — Invalid

(4) — Valid

(5) Invalid —

(6) — Invalid

(7) — Invalid

(8) — Valid

(9) Valid —

(10) — Invalid

(11) — Invalid

Fig. 2 Operation in fixed cycle modal (12) — Valid

(6)

(5)(1)

(8) (7)

(4)

(3)

(2)

— 10.

— 10. — 50.

(6)

(5)(1)

(8)

(7)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(9)

(11)

(10)

(12)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

308

13.1.1 Drilling, Spot Drilling ; G81

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (4) commands during single block operation.

G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Ll1,Ii1,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — Valid G98 mode G0Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0Z — z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

x1 , y1

z1 (4)

r 1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

309

13.1.2 Drilling, Counter Boring ; G82

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (5) commands during single block operation.

G82 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — — G4Pp1(Dwell)

(5) — Valid G98 mode G0Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0Z — z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

x1 , y1

z1 (5)

r 1

(5)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

310

13.1.3 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle ; G83

13.1.3.1 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

Command format

Detailed description

When executing a second and following cuttings in the G83 as shown above, the movement will change from

rapid traverse to cutting feed «m» mm before the position machined last. After reaching the hole bottom, the

axis will return according to the G98 or G99 mode.

«m» will differ according to the parameter «#8013 G83 return». Program so that q1 > m.

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (n) commands during single block operation.

G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Qq1 Cut amount for each cutting pass (incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zq1 Ff1

(4) — Invalid G0 Z-q1

(5) — Invalid G0 Z(q1-m)

(6) — Invalid G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1

(7) — Invalid G0 Z -2*q1

(8) — Invalid G0 Z (2*q1-m)

(9) — Invalid G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1

(10) — Invalid G0 Z-3*q1

:

(n)-1 — Invalid

(n) — Valid G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7) (8)

(9)

(10)

(n) (n)

G98 G99

(n) -1

x1,y1

q1

q1

q1

r 1

z1

m

m

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

311

13.1.3.2 Small Diameter Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

Command format

Detailed description

«i1» follows the parameter «#8085 G83S Forward F» when there is no I command.

«i2» follows the parameter «#8086 G83S Back F» when there is no I command.

G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Ii1 Pp1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Qq1 Cut amount for each cutting pass (incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ii1

Feedrate from R point to the cutting start position, the speed for returning from hole bottom It stores only in the same block as G83, and it is valid until the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle is canceled. (It follows the setting of «#8086 G83S Back F» when omitted.)

Pp1 Dwell time at hole bottom position

c: Parameter «#8084 G83S Clearance»

qs: Small diameter deep hole drilling cycle signal (YCCA)

skip: Small diameter deep hole drilling cycle signal (YCCA) input

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1,Ii1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zq1 Ff1

(4) G1 Z-q1 Fi2

(5) G1 Z(q1-c) Fi1

(6) G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1

(7) G1 Z-2q1 Fi2

(8) G1 Z(2q1-c) Fi1

(9) G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1

(10) G1 Z-(2q1+qs) Fi2

(11) G1 Z(2q1+qs-c) Fi1

(12) G1 Z(z1-q1*n-qs) Ff1

(13) G98 mode G1 Z-(z1+r1) Fi2 G99 mode G1 Z-z1 Fi2

q1

c

x1,y1

r 1

z1

G98

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

(6) (7)

(8)

(9)

skip

(10)

(11)

q1 qS

G99

q1 c

c

(12)

(13) (13)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

312

In deep hole drilling, cutting and retract are repeated and the workpiece is machined multiple times. In

addition, when PLC signals are input during cutting, the cutting for the time concerned is skipped. In this way,

this cycle reduces the load applied to the tool.

The small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle mode is established by designating the M code command which

was set in the parameter.

If the G83 command is designated in this mode, the small-diameter deep-hole drilling cycle is executed.

The mode is canceled by the following conditions.

— Designation of a fixed cycle cancel command (G80, G commands in Group 1)

— Resetting

It is not immediately switched to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode even the small diameter

deep hole drilling cycle switch M command is issued during G83 deep hole drilling cycle modal. Then, when

G83 is commanded, the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode is applied.

When the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle signal (YCCA) is input during the cutting operation (9), the

remaining cutting command is skipped and the axis returns to the R point at the cutting speed i2.

«In small diameter deep hole cycle signal (XCC1)» is output between the positioning to the R point of drilling

axis (2) and the R point/initial point return after finishing the drilling (13).

«c» depends on the parameter «#8084 G83S Clearance».

Program the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle to make it «q1 > c».

The stop position of the single block operation is when the command, (1), (2) or (13), is completed.

If there is no «I» command, or either the parameter «#8085 G83S Forward F» or «#8086 G83S Back F» is set to

«0», a program error (P62) will occur.

Confirm the following related parameters before using the small hole diameter drilling cycle.

— #8083 G83S modeM

— #8084 G83S Clearance

— #8085 G83S Forward F

— #8086 G83S Back F

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

313

13.1.4 Tapping Cycle ; G84

Command format

(Note) ,S command is held as a modal information.

When the value is smaller than the spindle rotation speed (S command), the value of spindle

rotation speed is valid even at the return.

If the spindle rotation speed is not «0» at the return, the tapping return override value («#1172

tapovr») is invalid.

G84 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1,Rr2 Ss1, Ss2, Ii1 ,Jj1 Ll1 (Kk1);

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Qq1 Cut amount for each cutting pass (incremental value)

Ff1 During synchronous tapping: Designation of drilling axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle revolution (modal) During asynchronous tapping: Designation of the feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

,Rr2 Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous) (When omitted, the mode will follow the setting of parameter «#8159 Synchronous tap»)

Ss1

Spindle rotation speed command (Note 1) At a synchronous tapping mode, «Sn = *****» type S command will be ignored. (n:spindle number, *****: rotation speed) (Note 2) If an S command is issued during synchronous tapping modal, a program error (P186) will occur.

,Ss2 Spindle rotation speed during return

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions (0 to 9999). When 0 is set, no execution

Kk1 Number of repetitions (It can be commanded when the parameter «#1271 ext07/bit1» is «1» )

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

314

Detailed description

Normal tapping cycle (When Q is not designated)

When r2 = 1, the synchronous tapping mode will be applied, and when r2 = 0, the asynchronous tapping

mode will be applied. If there is no r2 command, the mode will follow the parameter setting.

When G84 is being executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100%.

Dry run is valid for the positioning command when the control parameter «G00 DRY RUN» is on. If the feed

hold button is pressed during G84 execution, the movement will not stop immediately, and instead, will stop

after (6) during sequences (3) to (6). During the rapid traverse in sequence (1), (2) and (9), the movement will

stop immediately.

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (9) commands during single block operation.

During the G84 modal, the «Tapping» NC output signal will be output.

During the G84 synchronous tapping modal, the M3, M4, M5 and S code will not be output.

When it is interrupted by such as the emergency stop during the tapping cycle, a tool can be taken out from

the workpiece by enabling the «Tap retract» signal (TRV) .

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — — G4 Pp1

(5) — — M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(6) — Invalid G1 Z-z1 Ff1

(7) — — G4 Pp1

(8) — — M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(9) — Valid G98 mode G0 Z-r1 G99 mode No movement

(4)(5)

r 1

z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (6) (6)

(9)

x1 , y1

(8) (7)(8) (7)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

315

Pecking tapping cycle (there is Q command, #1272 ext08/bit4=0)

m : parameter (#8018 G74 RETRACT)

(Note)This program is for the G84 command.

The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are reversed with the G74 command.

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1 ,Ii1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zq1 Ff1

(4) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(5) G1 Z-m Ff1

(6) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(7) G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1

(8) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(9) G1 Z-m Ff1

(10) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(11) G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1

: :

(n1) G1 Z(z1-q1*n) Ff1

(n2) G4 Pp1

(n3) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(n4) G1 Z-z1 Ff1 Ss2

(n5) G4 Pp1

(n6) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(n7) G98 mode G0 Z — r1 ,Jj1 G99 mode No movement

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(n1)

(n2)(n3)

(n4) (n4)

(n5)(n6) (n5)(n6)

(n7) r 1

z1

G98 G99

q1

q1

q1

x1,y 1

m

m

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

316

The load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass (Q) and cutting the

workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.

The amount retracted from the hole bottom is set to the parameter «#8018 G84/G74 return». Select either the

pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter «#1272 ext08/bit4». When «depth of cut

per pass Q» is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command with the pecking tapping cycle

selected, the pecking tapping cycle will be executed.

In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle will be carried out.

— When Q is not designated.

— When the command value of Q is zero.

Deep-hole tapping cycle (there is Q command, #1272 ext08/bit4=1)

(R) R point

(Note)This program is for the G84 command.

The spindle forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are reversed with the G74 command.

(1)

r 1

z1

G98 G99

q1

x1,y 1

(R)

q1

q1

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)(7)

(8)

(10)

(13)

(11)(12)

(9)

(n7)

(n5)(n6)

(n1) (n4) (n4)

(n2)(n3)

(n5)(n6)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

317

(a) In the deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per

pass

and cutting the workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.

Under the deep-hole tapping cycle, the tool is retracted to the R-point every time.

(b) Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter «#1272 ext08/bit4».

When «depth of cut per pass Q» is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the

state where the deep-hole tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the deep-hole tapping cycle is

executed.

In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle will be carried out.

— When Q is not designated

— When the command value of Q is zero

(c) When G84 is executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100%

in cutting operation. And the override set by the parameter «#1172 tapovr» will be also disabled. (When

«#1272 ext08/bit5» = «1», the setting of «#1172 tapovr» will be enabled only during a pulling operation)

(d) Dry run is valid for a positioning command when the parameter «#1085 G00 DRY RUN» is 1 and is valid

for the positioning command. If the feed hold button is pressed during G84 execution, the tool does not

stop immediately during cutting or returning, and it stops after completing an R point return.

(e) During single block operation, the tool does not stop during cutting or returning, but stops after

completing an R point/initial point return.

(f) During the G84 mode, the NC signal «Tapping» will be output.

(g) During the G84 synchronous tapping mode, the M3, M4, M5 or S code will not be output.

(h) If the command value of F becomes extremely small such as around F < 0.01mm/rev during

synchronous tapping, the spindle rotation rotates unsmoothly. So make sure to command a value larger

than «0.01mm/rev». The unit of F can be selected between mm/rev and mm/min.

(i) If the external deceleration signal is turned ON during synchronous or asynchronous tapping, the feed

rate does not change even when deceleration conditions are satisfied.

(j) If the operation is interrupted by a cause such as an emergency stop or reset during the deep-hole

tapping cycle, a tap retract is executed when the tap retract signal is input.

(k) When the reference position return signal is input during the deep-hole tapping cycle, a tap retract is

carried out, and a reference position return will be executed from the end point of the tap retract.

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G9 G1 Zq1 Ff1

(4) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(5) G9 G1 Z-q1 Ff1

(6) G4 Pp1

(7) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(8) G9 G1 Z(2*q1) Ff1

(9) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(10) G9 G1 Z-(2*q1) Ff1

(11) G4 Pp1

(12) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(13) G9 G1 Z(3*q1) Ff1

: :

(n1) G9 G1 Zz1 Ff1

(n2) G4 Pp1

(n3) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(n4) G9 G1 Z-z1 Ff1

(n5) G4 Pp1

(n6) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(n7) G98 mode G0 Z-r1 G99 mode No movement

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

318

Spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern during synchronous tapping

This function enables to make spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern closer to that of the speed loop by

dividing the spindle and drilling axis acceleration/deceleration pattern into up to three stages during

synchronous tapping.

The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set up to three stages for each gear.

When returning from the hole bottom, rapid return is possible at the spindle rotation speed during return. The

spindle rotation speed during return is held as modal information.

(1) When tap rotation speed < spindle rotation speed during return <= synchronous tapping changeover

spindle rotation speed 2

S Command spindle rotation speed

S’ Spindle rotation speed during return

S1 Tapping rotation speed (spindle basic specification parameters #3013 to #3016)

S2 Synchronous tapping changeover spindle rotation speed 2 (spindle basic specification parameters #3037 to #3040)

Smax Maximum rotation speed (spindle basic specification parameters #3005 to #3008)

T1 Tapping time constant (spindle basic specification parameters #3017 to #3020)

T2 Synchronous tapping changeover time constant 2 (spindle basic specification parameters #3041 to #3044)

Smax S2

S(S1)

S1 S’ S2

Smax

T1

T1T1

T1

T2

T2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

319

(2) When synchronous tapping changeover spindle rotation speed 2 < spindle rotation speed during return

S Command spindle rotation speed

S’ Spindle rotation speed during return

S1 Tapping rotation speed (spindle basic specification parameters #3013 to #3016)

S2 Synchronous tapping changeover spindle rotation speed 2 (spindle basic specification parameters #3037 to #3040)

Smax Maximum rotation speed (spindle basic specification parameters #3005 to #3008)

T1 Tapping time constant (spindle basic specification parameters #3017 to #3020)

T2 Synchronous tapping changeover time constant 2 (spindle basic specification parameters #3041 to #3044)

T3 Synchronous tapping changeover time constant 3 (spindle basic specification parameters #3045 to #3048)

Smax S2

S(S1)

S1 S2

S (Smax)

T1

T2 T1T1

T1

T2

T3

T3

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

320

Feedrate for tapping cycle and tapping return

The feedrates for the tapping cycle and tapping return are as shown below.

(1) Selection of synchronous tapping cycle/asynchronous tapping cycle

— is irrelevant to the setting

(2) Selection of asynchronous tapping cycle feedrate

— is irrelevant to the setting

(3) Spindle rotation speed during return of synchronous tapping cycle

M code for forward/reverse rotation command

The M code set with the parameter #3028 sprcmn is output as the M code for spindle forward/reverse

rotation that is output at hole bottom or at R point during asynchronous tapping cycle.

Note that the M code for forward rotation is output as M3 and that for reverse rotation is as M4 if the

parameter «#3028 sprcmm» is set to 0.

Feed per minute command of the synchronous tapping

Enable the feed per minute command of the synchronous tapping by the setting of parameter «#1268 ext04/

bit2″. When this parameter is valid, G94 and G95 modal will be applied.

G84, Rxx

Control parameter Synchronous tapping

Synchronous/asynchronous

,R00 — Asynchronous

,Rxx No designation

OFF

ON Synchronous

,R01 —

G94/G95 Control parameter

F1-digit valid F command value Feed designation

G94

OFF F designation Feed per minute

ON Other than F0 to F8

F0 to F8 (no decimal point) F1-digit feed

G95 — F designation Feed per revolution

Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks

,S Spindle rotation speed

during return 0 to 99999 (r/min)

The data is held as modal information. If the value is smaller than the spindle rotation speed, the spindle rotation speed value will be valid even during return. If the spindle rotation speed is not 0 during return, the tapping retract override value will be invalid.

During G94 modal (feed per minute) During G95 modal (feed per revolution)

#1268/bit2 = ON Feed per minute Feed per revolution

#1268/bit2 = OFF Feed per revolution Feed per revolution

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

321

Parameter setting values and tapping axis

(1) Synchronous tapping in-position check settings

(Note1) The I point refers to the initial point.

#1223 aux07

«P» designation of G84/G74 command

In-position check during synchronous tapping

bit3 bit4 bit5 bit2

In-position check during synchronous

tapping

Hole bottom

R point I point -> R

point

0 — — — — Carry out in-position check at I point -> R point/R point/hole bottom.

1 — — — No «P» designation Example : G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 R-5.

Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check. R point: Do not carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Do not carry out in-position check.

1 1 1 1 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap in-position width. R point: Carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Carry out in-position check.

1 1 0 1 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tapping in-position width. R point: Do not carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Carry out in-position check.

1 0 1 1 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check. R point: Carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Carry out in-position check.

1 0 0 1 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check. R point: Do not carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Carry out in-position check.

1 1 1 0 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tapping in-position width. R point: Carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Do not carry out in-position check.

1 1 0 0 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tapping in-position width. R point: Do not carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Do not carry out in-position check.

1 0 1 0 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check. R point: Carry out in-position check. I point -> R point: Do not carry out in-position check.

1 0 0 0 «P» designation Example: G84 F1. Z-5. S1000 P0 R-5.

Hole bottom : Do not carry out in-position check. R point: Do not carry out in-position check. I point R point: Do not carry out in-position check.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

322

(2) In-position width and tapping axis movement for a synchronous tapping in-position check

(a) In-position completion of the G0 feed from the R point

(b) G1 deceleration start at tapping cut-in

(c) G1 deceleration start at tapping return

(d) Start of G0 feed to the R point

(1) Section in which the in-position check is carried out by G0inps.

(2) Section in which the in-position check is carried out by TapInp.

(3) Section in which the in-position check is carried out by G1inps.

(4) Section in which the in-position check is carried out by sv024.

R point: In-position check by the G1inps

I point: In-position check by the G0inps

Hole bottom: In-position check by the Tapinps

(Z) Hole bottom (R) R point

FIN

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(Z) (R) (d) (c)(b)(a)(F)

(T)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

323

(3) Relation between the parameter setting values and tapping axis movement for a synchronous tapping in-

position check

(Note1) The I point refers to the initial point.

Remarks: The processing time of several 10ms is needed when an in-position check is not carried out at the

hole bottom.

Also, the processing time of between 0 to 14.2ms is required at the R point.

And the spindle gain changeover time at I point -> R point, too.

#1223 aux07

Hole bottom wait time Operation at hole bottom Operation at R point Operation at I point —

> R point

bit3 bit4 bit5 bit2

Synchronous tapping

in-position check

Hole bottom

R point I point -> R

point

0 — — — Time designated by «P». Several 10ms as processing time when no «P».

Operation determined by setting of inpos (#1193) and aux 07 (#1223): bit 1 parameters.

Operation determined by setting of inpos (#1193) and aux 07 (#1223): bit 1 parameters.

Operation determined by setting of inpos (#1193) and aux 07 (#1223): bit 1 parameters.

1 0 0 1

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until time in the left column elapses.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G0inps.

1 0 1 1

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until time in the left column elapses.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G1inps.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G0inps.

1 1 0 1

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until dwell time in the left column elapses after completion of in-position check.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G0inps.

1 1 1 1

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. Several 10ms as processing time when both of them are «0».

Wait until dwell time in the left column elapses after completion of in-position check.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G1inps.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G0inps.

1 0 0 0

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until time in the left column elapses.

1 0 1 0

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until time in the left column elapses.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G1inps.

1 1 0 0

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. No dwell executed if both values are 0.

Wait until dwell time in the left column elapses after completion of in-position check.

1 1 1 0

Larger value of «P» and TapDwl (#1313) is valid. Several 10ms as processing time when both of them are «0».

Wait until dwell time in the left column elapses after completion of in-position check.

Wait until completion of in- position check by G1inps.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

324

13.1.5 Boring ; G85

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (4) or (5) commands during single block operation.

G85 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When «0» is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — Invalid G1 Z-z1 Ff1

(5) — Invalid G98 mode G0Z-r1 G99 mode No movement

r1

z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (4)

(5)

x1 , y1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

325

13.1.6 Boring ; G86

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (7) commands during single block operation.

G86 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) G4 Pp1

(5) M5 (spindle stop)

(6) G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(7) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(4)(5) G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (6)

(7)

x1 , y 1

z1 (6)

r 1

(7)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

326

13.1.7 Back Boring ; G87

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (4), (6) and (11) commands during single block operation.

G87 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Iq1 Jq2 Kq3 Ff1 Ll1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Iq1 Jq2 Kq3

Designation of shift amount (incremental value) (modal) The command addresses for each plane selection are as follow; G17 plane: IJ G18 plane: KI G19 plane: JK Depending on the parameter setting, the shift amount can be designated by Q address. Refer to «Designation of shift amount (I,J,K)».

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) M19 (Spindle orientation)

(3) G0 Xq1 (Yq2) (shift)

(4) G0 Zr1

(5) G1 X-q1(Y-q2)Ff1 (shift)

(6) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(7) G1 Zz1 Ff1

(8) M19 (Spindle orientation)

(9) G0 Xq1 (Yq2) (shift)

(10) G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — (r1+z1)

(11) G0 X-q1(Y-q2) (shift)

(12) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(1)

r 1

Xq1(Yq2)(3)

(2) (12)(11)

(8) (9) (10)

(4)

(7)

(6) (5)

z1

x1 , y1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

327

Designation of shift amount (I,J,K)

When this command is used, high precision drilling machining that does not scratch the machining surface

can be done. Positioning to the hole bottom and the escape (return) after cutting is executed in the state

shifted to the direction opposite of the cutter.

The command addresses to designate the shift amount for each plane selection are as follow;

G17 plane: IJ

G18 plane: KI

G19 plane: JK

The shift amount is executed with linear interpolation, and the feedrate follows the F command.

Command I, J, and K with incremental values in the same block as the hole position data.

I, J and K will be handled as modal during the fixed cycle.

(Note) If the parameter «#1080 Dril_Z» which fixes the hole drilling axis to the Z axis is set, the shift amount

can be designated with address Q instead of I and j. In this case, whether to shift or not and the shift

direction are set with parameter «#8207 G76/87 No shift» and «#8208 G76/87 Shift (-)». The sign for

the Q value is ignored and the value is handled as a positive value. The Q value is a modal during

the fixed cycle, and will also be used as the G83, G73 and G76 cutting amount.

A: Tool position during cutting

B: Tool position when positioning to the hole bottom and,also,when escaping after cutting

A B

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

328

13.1.8 Boring ; G88

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2), (6) and (9) commands during single block operation.

G88 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) G4 Pp1

(5) M5 (Spindle stop)

(6) Stop when single block stop switch is ON

(7) Automatic start switch ON

(8) G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(9) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(4)(5)(6)(7) G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (8)

(9)

x1 , y1

z1 (8)

r 1

(9)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

329

13.1.9 Boring ; G89

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (5) or (6) commands during single block operation.

G89 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — — G4 Pp1

(5) — Invalid G1 Z-z1 Ff1

(6) — Valid G98 mode G0 Z — r1 G99 mode No movement

(4)

r 1

z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (5) (5)

(6)

x1 , y1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

330

13.1.10 Stepping Cycle ; G73

Command format

Detailed description

When executing a second and following cutting in the G73 as shown above, the movement will return several

«m» mm with rapid traverse and then will change to cutting feed. The return amount «m» will differ according to

the parameter «#8012 G73 return».

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (n) commands during single block operation.

G73 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Qq1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Qq1 Cut amount for each cutting pass (incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When «0» is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zq1 Ff1

(4) — — G4 Pp1

(5) — Invalid G0 Z-m

(6) — Invalid G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1

:

(n)-1 — Invalid

(n) — Valid G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

x1 , y1

z1

r 1

(5) (6)

q1

q1

q1

(n)

m

(n) — 1

(n)

G98 G99

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

331

13.1.11 Reverse Tapping Cycle ; G74

Command format

(Note) When asynchronous tapping mode is applied, F address becomes the cutting feed speed.

G74 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 ,Rr2 Ss1 ,Ss2 Ll1 ,Ii1,Jj1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Ff1 Z-axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle rotation (modal)

Pp1 Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be ignored) (modal)

,Rr2 Synchronization method selection (r2=1 synchronous, r2=0 asynchronous) (modal) (When omitted, the mode will follow the setting of parameter «#8159 Synchronous tap»)

Ss1

Spindle rotation speed (Note) At a synchronous tapping mode, «Sn = *****» type S command will be ignored. (n:spindle number, *****: rotation speed) (Note) If an S command is issued during synchronous tapping modal, a program error (P186) will occur.

,Ss2 Spindle rotation speed during return

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

,Ii1 Positioning axis in-position width

,Jj1 Drilling axis in-position width

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

332

Detailed description

When r2 = 1, the synchronous tapping mode will be applied, and when r2 = 0, the asynchronous tapping

mode will be applied. If there is no r2 command, mode will follow the parameter setting.

When G74 is executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100%.

Dry run is valid for the positioning command when the parameter «#1085 G00 Drn» is set to «1».

If the feed hold button is pressed during G74 execution, and the sequence is at (3) to (6), the movement will

not stop immediately, and instead will stop after (6). During the rapid traverse in sequence (1), (2) and (9), the

movement will stop immediately.

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (9) commands during single block operation.

During the G74 and G84 modal, the «Tapping» NC output signal will be output.

During the G74 synchronous tapping modal, the M3, M4, M5 and S code will not be output.

Spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern during synchronous tapping

Refer to «Tapping cycle; G84».

Feedrate for tapping cycle and tapping return

Refer to «Tapping cycle; G84».

M code for forward/reverse rotation command

Refer to «Tapping cycle; G84».

Parameter setting values and tapping axis

Refer to «Tapping cycle; G84».

Operation pattern i1 j1 Program

(1) Valid — G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) — Invalid G0 Zr1

(3) — Invalid G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) — — G4 Pp1

(5) — — M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(6) — Invalid G1 Z-z1 Ff1

(7) — — G4 Pp1

(8) — — M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)

(9) — Valid G98 mode G0 Z-r1 G99 mode No movement

(4)(5)

r 1

z1

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (6) (6)

(9)

x1 ,y1

(8) (7)(8)

(7)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

333

13.1.12 Circular Cutting ; G75

Function and purpose

Circle cutting starts with the X and Y axes positioned at the center of the circle, and the Z axis cuts into the

commanded position. Then, the tool cuts the inner circumference of the circle drawing a true circle and returns

to the center position.

Command format

G75 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Ll1 ;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Qq1 Radius of outer circumference (modal)

Pp1 Tool radius compensation No. (modal)

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When 0 is set, no execution

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

334

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (6) commands during single block operation.

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) Gn X-(q1-r) I-(q1/2) Inner circumference half circle n:q1 >= 0 -> G02 q1 < 0 -> G03 r:Tool radius compensation amount of the No. commanded with p1.

(5) Iq1

(6) X(q1-r) I(q1/2) Inner circumference half circle

(7) G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(4)

G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(7)

x1 , y1

z1

r 1

(5)

(7)

r

q1

Y

X

Z

X

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

335

13.1.13 Fine Boring ; G76

Command format

Detailed description

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (7) commands during single block operation.

G76 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Iq1 Jq2 Kq3 Ff1 Ll1;

Xx1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Yy1 Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)

Zz1 Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Rr1 Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value) (modal)

Iq1 Jq2 Kq3

Designation of shift amount (incremental value) (modal) The command addresses for each plane selection are as follow; G17 plane: IJ G18 plane: KI G19 plane: JK Depending on the parameter setting, the shift amount can be designated by Q address. Refer to «Designation of shift amount (I,J,K)».

Ff1 Designation of feedrate for cutting feed (modal)

Ll1 Designation of number of repetitions. (0 to 9999) When «0» is set, no execution

Operation pattern Program

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1

(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1

(4) M19 (Spindle orientation)

(5) G1 Xq1 (Yq2)Ff1 (shift)

(6) G98 mode G0 Z — (z1+r1) G99 mode G0 Z — z1

(7) G0 X-q1 (Y-q2) (shift)

(8) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)

(4)(5) G98 G99

(1)

(2)

(3) (6)

(7)

x1 , y1

z1(6)

r 1

(7)

(8)

(8)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

336

Designation of shift amount (I,J,K)

When this command is used, high precision drilling machining that does not scratch the machining surface

can be done.

Positioning to the hole bottom and the escape (return) after cutting is executed in the state shifted to the

direction opposite of the cutter.

The command addresses to designate the shift amount for each plane selection are as follow;

G17 plane: IJ

G18 plane: KI

G19 plane: JK

The shift amount is executed with linear interpolation, and the feedrate follows the F command.

Command I, J, and K with incremental values in the same block as the hole position data.

I, J and K will be handled as modal during the fixed cycle.

(Note) If the parameter «#1080 Dril_Z» which fixes the hole drilling axis to the Z axis is set, the shift amount

can be designated with address Q instead of I and j. In this case, whether to shift or not and the shift

direction are set with parameter «#8207 G76/87 IGNR» and «#8208 G76/87 (-)». The sign for the Q

value is ignored and the value is handled as a positive value.

The Q value is a modal during the fixed cycle, and will also be used as the G83, G87 and G73

cutting amount.

A: Tool position during cutting

B: Tool position when escaping after cutting

A B

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

337

13.1.14 Precautions for Using a Fixed Cycle

Precautions

(1) Before the fixed cycle is commanded, the spindle must be rotating in a specific direction with an M

command (M3 ; or M4 ;).

Note that for the G87 (back boring) command, the spindle rotation command is included in the fixed cycle

so only the rotation speed command needs to be commanded beforehand.

(2) If there is a basic axis, additional axis or R data in the block during the fixed cycle mode, the hole drilling

operation will be executed. If there is no data, the hole will not be drilled.

Note that even when the X axis data exists, the hole will not be drilled if the data is a dwell (G04) time

command.

(3) Command the hole machining data (Q, P, I, J, K) in a block where hole drilling is executed (Block

containing a basic axis, additional axis or R data).

(4) The fixed cycle can be canceled by the G00 to G03 or G33 command besides the G80 command. If

these are designated in the same block as the fixed cycle, the following will occur.

Note that for the G02 and G03 commands, R will be handled as the arc radius.

(5) If M00 or M01 is commanded in a same block with a fixed cycle or during a fixed cycle mode, the fixed

cycle will be ignored. Instead, M00 and M01 will be output after positioning. The fixed cycle is executed if

X, Y, Z or R is commanded.

(6) If an M function is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle command, the M code and MF will be

output during the initial positioning. The next operation will be moved to with FIN (finish signal).

If there is a designation of No. of times, the above control will be executed only for the first drilling.

(7) If another control axis (ex. rotary axis, additional axis) is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle

control axis, the fixed cycle will be executed after the other control axis is moved.

(8) If the No. of repetitions L is not designated, L1 will be set. If L0 is designated in the same block as the

fixed cycle G code command, the hole machining data will be recorded, but the hole machining will not

be executed.

(Example) G73 X Y Z R Q P F L0 ;

Memorize only the codes with an execution address

(9) When the fixed cycle is executed, the modal command commanded in the fixed cycle program will be

valid only in the fixed cycle subprogram. The modal of the program that called out the fixed cycle will not

be affected.

m = 00 to 03, 33 n = Fixed cycles

Gm Gn X_Y_Z_R_Q_P_L_F_;

Gm : Execution Gn : Ignore X_Y_Z : Execution R_Q_P_L : Ignore F : Record

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

338

(10) Other subprograms cannot be called from the fixed cycle subprogram.

(11) Decimal points in the movement command will be ignored during the fixed cycle subprogram.

(12) If the No. of repetitions L is 2 or more during the incremental value mode, the positioning will also be

incremental each time.

(Example) G91 G81 X10. Z-50. R-20. F100. L3;

(13) If the spindle rotation speed value during return is smaller than the spindle rotation speed, the spindle

rotation speed value is valid even during return.

(14) If the 2nd and 3rd acceleration/deceleration stage inclinations following the spindle rotation speed and

time constants set in the parameters are each steeper than the previous stage’s inclination, the previous

stage’s inclination will be valid.

(15) If the values set in the spindle base specification parameter «tap rotation speed» and «the synchronous

tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2″ exceed the maximum rotation speed, the spindle rotation

speed will be clamped at the maximum rotation speed.

(16) If the spindle rotation speed during return is not 0, the tap return override value will be invalid.

(17) In a block where the movement direction of any axis reverses as shown below, the servo system load will

greatly increase, so do not command the in-position width in the machining program.

G0 X100. ,I10.0;

X-200.;

(18) If the in-position width commanded with the programmable in-position width command is increased, the

positioning time and linear interpolation time can be reduced. However, the positioning error amount of

the previous block will also increase when the next block starts, so the actual machining could be

obstructed.

(19) The in-position width and the positioning error amount are compared at a set time, so the positioning

error amount at the in-position point will be smaller than the commanded in-position width.

(20) If the in-position width commanded with the programmable in-position command is small, the

commanded deceleration check or in-position check following the parameters may be carried out first.

X Y 10. 10. 10.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

339

(21) Synchronous or asynchronous tapping can be selected with the M function.

Basic specification parameters

Synchronous tapping cannot be selected with the M function when this parameter is OFF.

Basic specification parameters

The synchronous tapping mode is selected with the miscellaneous function code set with this parameter.

The M function can be commanded just before or in the same block as the tapping command.

When using this parameter, validate «#1272 ext08/bit1 M function synchronous tap cycle».

The selection of synchronous or asynchronous tapping will follow the combination shown below.

(Note1) Do not use M00, 01, 02, 30, 98 or 99.

(22) Even when the parameter #1151 rstinit is OFF, the fixed cycle will be canceled if NC reset 1 is carried

out while executing the fixed cycle.

# Item Details Setting range

1272 (PR)

ext08 bit 1 M-function synchronous tapping cycle valid.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

# Item Details Setting range

1513 stapM M code for synchronous tapping selection 0 to 99999999

Combination

Program command (,R0/1) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 No command

#8159 Synchronous tap 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

M function code (M**)

Synchronous/asynchronous selection

A A A A S S S S A S S S

: Does not command A : Asynchronous tap

: Commands S : Synchronous tap

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

340

13.1.15 Initial Point and R Point Level Return ; G98,G99

Function and purpose

Whether to use R point or initial level as the return level in the final sequence of the fixed cycle can be

selected.

Command format

Detailed description

The relation of the G98/G99 mode and the number of repetition designation is as shown below.

(Note) The final return position will be different between label O and L when drilling is executed more than

twice with G99 command.

Label O… R point return

Label L… Initial point return

With label L, R point return can be selected by setting «#1246 set18/bit3 Change final return

position at M2L»

G98 ; … Initial level return

G99 ; … R point level return

No. of hole drilling times

Program example G98

(At power ON, at cancel with M02, M30, and reset button)

G99

Only one execution

G81 X100. Y100. Z-50. R25. F1000 ;

Initial level return is executed. R point level return is executed.

Two or more executions

G81 X100. Y100. Z-50. R25. L5 F1000 ;

Initial level return is always executed.

(a) First time (b) Second time (c) Last time

(I)

(R)

(I)

(R)

(a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (Note)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

341

13.1.16 Setting of Workpiece Coordinates in Fixed Cycle Mode

Function and purpose

The designated axis moves in the workpiece coordinate system set for the axis.

The Z axis becomes valid from the R point positioning after positioning is completed or from Z axis movement.

(Note) When the workpiece coordinates change, re-program the addresses Z and R, even if the values are

the same.

(Example)G54 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1;

G81 Xx1 Yy2 Zz2 Rr2;

G55 Xx3 Yy3 Zz2 Rr2; … Re-command even if Z and R are the same as the previous value.

Xx4 Yy4;

Xx5 Yy5;

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

342

13.1.17 Drilling Cycle with High-Speed Retract

Function and purpose

This function retracts the drill from the hole bottom at high speed in drilling machining. This helps extending

the drill life by reducing the time of drilling in vain at hole bottom.

The drill moves up at high-speed (1) and returns to the initial point or R point in rapid traverse (2).

Command format

The command format is the same as fixed cycle.

(1) (2)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

343

Detailed description

(1) This function is available only when #8123 H-spd retract ON is enabled in the following fixed cycles.

— G81 (Drill spot drilling cycle)

— G83 (Deep whole drilling cycle)

— G73 (Step cycle)

(2) When #8123 H-spd retract ON is ON, the axis is retracted from the hole bottom at high speed with lost

motion compensation.

(a) Set the lost motion compensation type 2 or 3 to the servo parameter. Then set the following

parameters to adjust the retract amount.

— #2170 Lmc1QR (Lost motion compensation gain 1 for high-speed retract)

(correspond to «#2216 SV016 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1»)

— #2171 Lmc2QR (lost motion compensation gain 2 for high-speed retract)

(correspond to «#2241 SV041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2»)

(b) Set the following parameters for lost motion compensation timing or lost motion compensation 3

spring constant/ viscous coefficient in addition to the ordinary lost motion compensations.

— #2172 LmcdQR (Lost motion compensation timing for high-speed retract)

(correspond to «#2239 SV039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing)

— #2173 LmckQR (Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant for high-speed retract)

(correspond to «#2285 SV085 LMCk Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant»)

— #2174 LmccQR (Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient for high-speed retract)

(correspond to «#2286 SV086 LMCc Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient»)

(c) If the drilling axis is synchronously controlled, set the same value in both parameters for primary and

secondary axes.

(3) While G80 (Fixed cycle cancel) command is issued, this function is canceled by issuing any other fixed

cycle of the same group (Group 9) or any Group 1 command.

(4) This function is invalid during the following command modal .

In this case, the drill moves in the ordinary rapid traverse even if «#8123» is enabled.

— G43.1 (Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction)

— G43.4, G43.5 (Tool center point control)

— G68 (3-dimensional coordinate conversion)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

344

Details of Operation

Operation at G81 command

During single block operation, the axis stops after (1), (2) and (5) only.

Operation at G83 command

During single block operation, the axis stops after (1), (2) and (10) only.

(1) Moves from start point to initial point

(2) Moves from initial point to R point

(3) Cutting feed

(4) Retracted at high-speed

(5) Returns to R point or initial point

(I) Initial point

(S) Start point

(R) R point

(1) Moves from start point to initial point

(2) Moves from initial point to R point

(3) Cutting feed

(4) Retracted at high-speed

(5) Returns to R point

(6) Moves to the previous cutting feed position + G83 return amount position

(7) Cutting feed

(8) Repeats (4) to (7)

(9) Retracted at high-speed

(10) Returns to R point or initial point

(I) Initial point

(S) Start point

(R) R point

(m) G83 Return amount

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

(5)

G98

G99

(S)

(R)

(I)

(10)

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(7)

(5) (6)

(9)

(8)

(I)

(R)

(S)

(m)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

345

Operation at G73 command

During single block operation, the axis stops after (1), (2) and (8) only.

If a dwell command is issued, the high-speed retract will be executed after the command.

(1) Moves from start point to initial point

(2) Moves from initial point to R point

(3) Cutting feed

(4) Retracted at high-speed

(5) Moves to the position set with G73 return amount

(6) Repeats (3) to (5)

(7) Retracted at high-speed

(8) Returns to R point or initial point

(I) Initial point

(S) Start point

(R) R point

(n) G73 Return amount

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5) (4)

(3)

(1)

(2)

G98

G99

(I)

(R)

(S)

(n)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

346

13.1.18 Acceleration/Deceleration Mode Change in Hole Drilling Cycle

Function and purpose

This function switches the acceleration/deceleration mode for hole drilling cycle between the inclination-

constant method and the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.

Command format

The command formats are the same as those of the fixed cycles G81,G82,G83 and G73.

Detailed description

With parameter «#1253 set25/bit2 Acceleration/deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle»

enabled,operation will be as follows.

(1) Acceleration/deceleration mode will be either linear or soft method. (Unless soft acceleration/

deceleration is applied, the linear method will always be applied.)

(2) The operation follows the parameter settings that determine whether the inclination-constant or post-

interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied. «#2001 rapid (rapid traverse rate)» and «#2004 G0tL

(G0 time constant (linear))» provide G0 (rapid traverse) acceleration/deceleration inclination, and «#2002

clamp (cutting feedrate for clamp)» and «#2007 G1tL (G1 time constant (linear))» provide G1 (cutting

feed) acceleration/deceleration inclination. Refer to «Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/

Deceleration» for details of constant inclination acceleration/deceleration.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.1 Fixed Cycles

347

Operation example

Operation example of acceleration/deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle» being enabled

The below illustrates the processes of hole-bottom deceleration check of a drilling axis following the

parameter «#19417 Hole dec check 2» settings.

(a) cut point

(b) hole bottom

#19417 G81 G82 G83 G73

0 (a)Cut point Perform deceleration check. Perform no deceleration check.

(b)Hole bottom Perform no deceleration check.

1 (a)Cut point Perform no command deceleration check. Perform command deceleration check.

(b)Hole bottom Perform command deceleration check.

2 (a)Cut point Perform command deceleration check.

erform in-position check (sv024).

(b)Hole bottom Perform in-position check (sv024).

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6)

(7)

(a)

(b)

(9)

(8)

(10)

(11) (12)

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

348

13.2 Special Fixed Cycle; G34, G35, G36, G37

Function and purpose

The special fixed cycle is used with the standard fixed cycle.

Before using the special fixed cycle, record the hole machining data except for the positioning data (except for

X, Y plane) by the standard fixed cycle.

The tool is positioned to the hole drilling position when the special fixed cycle is executed. The drilling

operation is executed with the fixed cycle for drilling.

Even after the special fixed cycle is executed, the recorded standard fixed cycle will be kept until canceled.

If the special fixed cycle is designated when not in the fixed cycle mode, only positioning will be executed, and

the hole drilling operation will not be carried out.

If the special fixed cycle is commanded without commanding the fixed cycle for drilling, positioning will be

executed following the current 01 group modal G code.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.2 Special Fixed Cycle; G34, G35, G36, G37

349

13.2.1 Bolt Hole Cycle ; G34

Function and purpose

This function is to drill «n» holes, dividing the circumference by «n», on the circumference with a radius R

centering the coordinates designated with X and Y. The drilling starts at the point which makes the angle

with X axis. The hole drilling operation at each hole will follow the standard fixed cycle.

The movement between hole positions will all be done in the G00 mode. G34 will not hold the data after the

command is completed.

Command format

Program example

As shown in the example, the tool position after the G34 command is completed is above the final hole. When

moving to the next position, the coordinate value must be calculated to issue the command with an

incremental value. Thus, use of the absolute value mode is handy.

(Note 1) If an address other than the selected plane’s vertical axis, horizontal axis, G, N, I, J, K, H, O, P, F,

M, S or 2nd miscellaneous function is issued in the same block as the G34 command, a program

error (P32) will occur.

G34 Xx1 Yy1 Ir J Kn ;

Xx1,Yy1 Positioning of bolt hole cycle center. This will be affected by G90/G91.

Ir Radius r of the circle. The unit follows the input setting unit, and is given with a positive No.

J Angle of the point to be drilled first. The CCW direction is positive. (The decimal point position will be the degree class. If there is no decimal point, the unit will be 0.001.

Kn No. of holes n to be drilled. 1 to 9999 can be designated, but 0 cannot be designated. When the value is positive, positioning will take place in the CCW direction, and when negative, will take place in the CW direction. If «0» is designated, a program error (P221) occurs.

N001 G91;

N002 G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 L0 F200 ;

N003 G90 G34 X200.000 Y100.000 I100.000 J20.000 K6;

N004 G80 ; ————— (G81 cancel)

N005 G90 G0 X500.000 Y100.000 ;

(a) Position before G34 is executed

(500mm, 100mm)

20

x1=200mm n=6

I=100mmy1=100mm

(a) N005 G0

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

350

13.2.2 Line at Angle ; G35

Function and purpose

Using the position designated by X and Y as the start point, the n holes will be drilled with interval d in the

direction which makes an angle with X axis. The hole drilling operation at each hole will follow the standard

fixed cycle.

The movement between hole positions will all be done in the G00 mode. G35 will not hold the data after the

command is completed.

Command format

Program example

(Note 1) If the K command is K0 or if there is no K command, the program error (P221) will occur.

(Note 2) If the K value is more than four digits, the last four digits will be valid.

(Note 3) If an address other than the selected plane’s vertical axis, horizontal axis, G, N, I, J, K, H, O, P, F,

M, S or 2nd miscellaneous function is issued in the same block as the G35 command, a program

error (P32) will occur.

(Note 4) If G command of group 0 is issued in the same block as the G35 command, the command issued

later has the priority.

(Example)G35 G28 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 ; G35 is ignored G 28 is executed as Xx1 Yy1

(Note 5) If there is G72 to G89 command in the same block as the G35 command, the fixed cycle will be

ignored, and the G35 command will be executed.

G35 Xx1 Yy1 Id J Kn ;

Xx1,Yy1 Designation of start point coordinates. This will be affected by G90/G91.

Id Interval d. The unit follows the input setting unit. If d is negative, the drilling will take place in the direction symmetrical to the center of the start point.

J Angle . The CCW direction is positive. (The decimal point position will be the degree class. If there is no decimal point, the unit will be 0.001.)

Kn No. of holes n to be drilled. 1 to 9999 can be designated, and the start point is included.

G91 ;

G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 L0 F100 ;

G35 X200.000 Y100.000

I100.000 J30.000 K5 ;

(a) Position before G35 is executed

y1=100mm

=30

n=5

d=100mm

x1=200mm (a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.2 Special Fixed Cycle; G34, G35, G36, G37

351

13.2.3 Arc ; G36

Function and purpose

The «n» holes aligned with the angle interval will be drilled starting at the point which makes the angle

with the X axis on the circumference with a radius R centering the coordinates designated with X and Y. The

hole drilling operation at each hole will follow the standard fixed cycle.

The movement between hole positions will all be done in the G00 mode. G36 will not hold the data after the

command is completed.

Command format

Program example

(Note 1) If an address other than the selected plane’s vertical axis, horizontal axis, G, N, I, J, K, H, O, P, F,

M, S or 2nd miscellaneous function is issued in the same block as the G36 command, a program

error (P32) will occur.

G36 Xx1 Yy1 Ir J P Kn ;

Xx1,Yy1 Center coordinates of arc. This will be affected by G90/G91.

Ir Radius r of arc. The unit follows the input setting unit, and is given with a positive No.

J Angle of the point to be drilled first. The CCW direction is positive. (The decimal point position will be the degree class. If there is no decimal point, the unit will be 0.001.

P

Angle interval . When the value is positive, the drilling will take place in the CCW direction, and in the CW direction when negative. (The decimal point position will be the degree class. If there is no decimal point, the unit will be 0.001.)

Kn No. of holes n to be drilled. The setting range is 1 to 9999.

N001 G91 ;

N002 G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 F100 ;

N003 G36 X300.000 Y100.000 I300.000

J10.000 P15000 K 6 ;

(a) Position before G36 is executed

n=6

x1=300mm

=10

= 15

y1=100mm

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

352

13.2.4 Grid ; G37

Function and purpose

The nx points on a grid are drilled with an interval x parallel to the X axis, starting at the position designated

with X, Y. The hole drilling operation at each hole will follow the standard fixed cycle.

The movement between hole positions will all be done in the G00 mode. G37 will not hold the data after the

command is completed.

Command format

Program example

(Note 1) If the P and K commands are P0 or K0, or if there is no P or K command, the program error (P221)

will occur. If the P or K value is more than four digits, the last four digits will be valid.

(Note 2) If an address other than the selected plane’s vertical axis, horizontal axis, G, N, I, J, K, H, O, P, F,

M, S or 2nd miscellaneous function is issued in the same block as the G37 command, a program

error (P32) will occur.

(Note 3) If G command of group 0 is issued in the same block as the G37 command, the command issued

later has the priority.

(Note 4) If there is G72 to G89 command in the same block as the G37 command, the fixed cycle will be

ignored, and the G37 command will be executed.

(Note 5) If the G22.1/G23.1 command is programmed in the same block as the G37 command, the G22.1/

G23.1 command will be ignored, and the G37 command will be executed.

G37 Xx1 Yy1 Ix Pnx Jy Kny ;

Xx1,Yy1 Designation of start point coordinates. This will be affected by G90/G91.

I x Interval x of the X axis. The unit will follow the input setting unit. If x is positive, the interval will be in the forward direction looking from the start point, and when negative, will be in the reverse direction looking from the start point.

Pnx No. of holes nx in the X axis direction. The setting range is 1 to 9999.

J y Interval y of the Y axis. The unit will follow the input setting unit. If y is positive, the interval will be in the forward direction looking from the start point, and when negative, will be in the reverse direction looking from the start point.

Kny No. of holes ny in the Y axis direction. The setting range is 1 to 9999.

G91 ;

G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 F20 ;

G37 X300.000 Y-100.000 I50.000 P10

J100.000 K8 ;

(a) Position before G37 is executed

ny=8

nx=10×1=300mm

y= 100mmy1=100mm

x=50mm

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23

353

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23

13.3.1 Subprogram Call ; G22,G23

Function and purpose

Fixed sequences or repeatedly used parameters can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can

then be called from the main program when required. G22 serves to call subprograms and G23 serves to

return operation from the subprogram to the main program. Furthermore, it is possible to call other

subprograms from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels.

The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape memory/

editing functions, subprogram control functions and fixed cycle functions.

(Note 1) denotes available functions and denotes unavailable functions.

(Note 2) Variables cannot be transferred with the G22 command but variable commands in subprograms

can be used provided that the variable command option is available.

(Note 3) A maximum of 8 nesting levels form the nesting depth.

Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4

1. Tape memory and editing Yes Yes Yes Yes

2. Subprogram control No Yes Yes No

3. Fixed cycles No No Yes Yes

Function

1. Memory mode

2. Tape editing (main memory)

3. Subprogram call

4. Subprogram variable designation (Note 2)

5. Subprogram nesting level call (Note 3)

6. Fixed cycles

7. Editing subprogram for fixed cycle

G22 L1 ;

L1000 L1 L2 L8

G23 ;

G23 ; G23 ;

M02 ;

G22 L2 ;

G22 L3 ;

Main program: Level 0 (L1000)

Subprogram: Level 1 (L1)

Subprogram: Level 2 (L2)

Subprogram: Level 8 (L8)

8- le

ve l n

es tin

g

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

354

Command format

Subprogram call

Return to main program from subprogram

G22 L__ H__ P__ ,D__ ;

G22 H__ P__ ,D__ ;

L A(label O)

Program No. of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted) Note that L(A) can be omitted only during memory mode and MDI mode. (Max. 8 digits)

File name A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets <>. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.) (Example) G22 ;

H Sequence No. in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted) (Max. 5 digits)

P

Number of subprogram repetitions (When omitted, this is interpreted as P1, and is not executed when P0.) (1 to 9999 times depending on the 4-digit value) For instance, For instance, G22 L1 P3 ; is equivalent to the following: G22 L1 ; G22 L1 ; G22 L1 ;

,D

Subprogram device No. (0 to 4). The subprogram is searched according to the setting of parameter «#8890 Subpro srch odr D0» to «#8894 Subpro srch odr D4» when ,D is omitted. The device No. is set to the parameter, such as «#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev».

G23 H__ ;

H Sequence No. of return destination (returned to block that follows the calling block)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23

355

Detailed description

Creating and registering subprograms

Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory mode, except that the

subprogram completion instruction G23 (H_ ) ; must be registered as an independent block in the last block.

(1) The above program is registered by editing operations at the setting and display unit. For further details,

refer to the section on «program editing» in the Instruction Manual.

(2) Only those subprogram Nos. ranging from 1 to 99999999 designated by the optional specifications can

be used. When there are no program Nos. on the tape, they are registered as the setting No. for

«program input.»

(3) Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms and program error (P230) will

occur if this number is exceeded.

(4) Main programs and subprograms are registered in the order they were read without distinction.

Therefore, main programs and subprograms should not be given the same Nos. (If they are, error «E11»

will be displayed at registration.)

(5) Besides the G22 command, subprogram nesting is subject to the following commands:

— G65 : Macro call

— G66 : Modal call

— G66.1 : Modal call

— G code call

— Miscellaneous function call

— MDI interruption

— Automatic tool length measurement

— Macro interruption

— Multiple-step skip function

(6) Subprogram nesting is not subject to the following commands which can be called even beyond the 8th

nesting level.

— Fixed cycles

— Pattern cycles

(7) To repeatedly use the subprogram, it can be repeated p1 times by programming G22 Ll1 Pp1;.

(8) When using the multi-part system, if the subprogram attributed to the part system with the call command

is empty, the subprogram call operation will change according to the parameters.

L******** ; Program No. as subprogram No.

……………………………. ; : ……………………………. ;

Main body of subprogram

G23 ; Subprogram return command

%(EOR) Registration completion code

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit1

Details

0,2,4,6 — The subprogram registered in the common memory of the part systems is called out.

1,3,5,7

OFF The subprogram registered in the memory for the selected part system is called out.

ON The subprogram registered in the memory for the selected part system is called out. If the subprogram in the selected part system is empty, the subprogram with the same No. in the 1st part system is called out.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

356

Program example

Program example 1

When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels)

Sequence of execution : (a)-(b)-(c)-(c’)-(b’)-(a’)

(1) For nesting, the G22 and G23 commands should always be paired off on a 1:1 basis; (a)’ for (a), (b)’ for

(b), etc.

(2) Modal information is rewritten in the order of execution sequence without distinction between main

programs and subprograms. Therefore, after calling a subprogram, attention must be paid to the modal

data status when programming.

Program example 2

The G22 H_ ; G23 H_ ; commands designate the sequence Nos. in a program with a call instruction.

(M) Main program (S1) Subprogram 1

(S2) Subprogram 2

(S3) Subprogram 3

G22L1;

M02;

L1;

G22L10;

G23;

L10;

G22L20;

G23;

L20;

G23;

(a’) (b’) (c’)

(a) (b) (c)

(MP) (S1) (S3)(S2)

G22H3;

N3___;

G23;

G22H__ ;

N100___; G22L123; N200_; N300___; N400___;

L123;

G23H200;

G23H__ ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23

357

Precautions

(1) Program error (P232) will occur when the designated L (program No.) cannot be found.

(2) The G22 L_ ; G23 ; block does not perform a single block stop. If any address except L(O), N, P, L or H

is used, single block stop can be executed. (With «X100. G22 L100 ;, the operation branches to L100

after X100. is executed. )

(3) When G23 is commanded by the main program, operation returns to the head. (This is same for MDI.)

(4) Branching from tape and BTR mode to the subprogram with G22 L_; is possible, but the return

destination sequence No. cannot be designated with G23 H_ ;. (H_ is ignored.)

(5) Note that it takes time to search when the sequence No. is designated by G23 H_ ;.

(6) When using a file name for the subprogram, specify the file name with 32 characters or less, including

the extension. If a file name exceeding 32 characters is specified, a program error (P232) will occur.

(7) All the programs are registered as files. For example, when calling a file «0100» as a subprogram, «0100»

cannot be searched with G22L100 or G22L0100. When numerical values are specified after L, 0 is

ignored. In this case, it is regarded that the program No. (file) «100» is specified. To call a program like

«0100» , specify the file name using the G22<0100> format.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

358

13.3.2 Figure rotation ; G22 I_J_K_

Function and purpose

If the same pattern is used repeatedly on a concentric circle, one of the rotating machining patterns can be

registered as a subprogram. When the subprogram is called from the main program, if the rotation center is

designated, a path similar to the rotary phase can be easily created on the concentric circle. This simplifies

creation of the program.

Command format

G22 I__ J__ K__ L__ H__ P__ ,D__ ; … Subprogram call command

G22 I__ J__ K__ H__ P__ ,D__ ; … Subprogram call command

I, J, K Rotation center coordinates

L

Program No. of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted) Note that L can be omitted only during memory mode and MDI mode. (Max. 8 digits)

A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets < >. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.) (Example) G22 ;

H

Sequence No. in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted)} (Max. 5-digit value)

P

Number of subprogram repetitions (When omitted, this is interpreted as P1, and is not executed when P0.) (1 to 9999 times depending on the 4-digit value)

,D

Subprogram device No. (0 to 4). The subprogram in the memory can be used when ,D is omitted. The device No. is set with the machining parameters.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.3 Subprogram Control; G22, G23

359

Detailed description

(1) The first subprogram called out with subprogram call is executed at 0 rotation angle. The path is created

as commanded.

(2) If the number of repetitions is set to twice or more, the rotation angle is obtained from the called

subprogram’s start point, end point and rotation center coordinate. The path of the first subprogram is

used as the basic figure and is rotated and arranged for the designated number of call repetitions, using

the rotation center coordinates as a reference.

(3) All blocks in the subprogram are rotated.

(4) If the subprogram start point and end point are not on the same circle having the commanded figure

rotation center coordinates as the center, the axis will interpolate using the subprogram’s end point as

the start point, and the end point in the first movement command block in the rotated subprogram as the

end point.

(5) Both absolute values and incremental values can be used in the figure rotation subprogram. Even if

commanded with an absolute value command, the rotation will be the same as when commanded with

an incremental value.

(6) I, J and K are commanded with the incremental amount from the start point.

(7) A subprogram of which figure is rotating cannot be branched to the other subprogram.

(8) The figure is rotated on the workpiece coordinate system, and can be shifted with the G92, G52, G54 to

G59 (workpiece coordinate system shift) command.

(9) Functions (reference position return, uni-direction positioning, etc.) on the machine coordinate system for

the rotary plane axis cannot be used while the figure is rotated. However, the machine coordinate system

functions can be used for axes other than the rotation plane.

(10) Refer to «Calling subprogram; G22,G23» for .

(a) Basic figure (b) Rotation center

J

I

(a)

(b)

P

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

360

Program example

Precautions

(1) A program error will occur if figure rotation is commanded during figure rotation.

(2) Figure rotation and program coordinate rotation cannot be commanded simultaneously. The program

error will occur.

Main program (L1000)

N01 G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 ; N02 G01 G41 X200. Y150. D01 F500 ; N03 G01 Z-50. F300 ; N04 G22 L2200 P5 J-100. ; N05 G90 G01 Z50. F500 ; N06 G40 ; N07 G00 X0 Y0 ;

Subprogram (L2200)

N01 G91 G01 X29.389 Y-59.549 ; N02 X65.717 Y-9.549 ; N03 G23 ;

(a) Basic figure

200.

100. 300.

Y

X

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.4 Variable Commands

361

13.4 Variable Commands

Function and purpose

Programming can be endowed with flexibility and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables,

instead of giving direct numerical values to particular addresses in a program, and by assigning the variable

values depending on the condition of executing the program.

Command format

Detailed description

Variable expressions

(Note 1) The 4 standard operators are +, -, * and /.

(Note 2) Functions cannot be used unless the user macro specifications are available.

(Note 3) Error (P241) will occur when a variable No. is negative.

(Note 4) Examples of incorrect variable expressions are given below.

#*** = ;

#*** = [formula] ;

Example

#m m = value consisting of 0 to 9 #100

# [f]

f = one of the followings in the formula # [-#120]

Numerical value m 123

Variable #543

Formula Operator Formula #110+#119

— (minus) formula -#120

[Formula] [#119]

Function [formula] SIN [#110]

Incorrect Correct

#6/2 # [6/2] (#6/2 is regarded as [#6] /2 )

#—5 # [-[-5]]

#- [#1] # [-#1]

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

362

Types of variables

The following table gives the types of variables.

(Note 1) All common variables are retained even when the power is turned OFF.

(Note 2) When the power is turned OFF or reset, the common variables can be set to by setting the

parameter (#1128 RstVC1, #1129 PwrVC1).

(Note 3) The common variables are divided into the following two types.

Common variables 1 : Used in common through all part systems

Common variables 2 : Used in common in the programs of the part system

(Note 4) #400s of the address common variables can be used only when there are 700 sets or more of

common variables and the parameter «#1336 #400_Valtype» is «1». If address #400s common

variable is used when the set of common variable is less than 700 sets or the parameter «#1336

#400_Valtype» is «0», a program error (P241) will occur.

When common variable address #400s can be used, these can be displayed and set on the

common variable screen.

It also becomes possible to input/output data of common variable address #400s.

Type No. Function

Common variables Common variables 1 Common variables 2

— Can be used in common throughout main, sub and macro programs. — When using common variables in the multi-part system, the number of common variable shared among the part systems can be specified by the parameter «#1052 MemVal». (Note 5)

1 part system

100 sets 500 to 549 100 to 149

200 sets 500 to 599 100 to 199

300 sets 500 to 699 100 to 199

600 sets 500 to 999 100100 to 800199 (Note 7)

100 to 199

700 sets 400 to 999 (Note 4) 100100 to 800199 (Note 7)

100 to 199

8000 sets 400 to 999(Note 4) 100100 to 800199(Note 7) 900000 to 907399

100 to 199

Multi-part system (n = number of part systems)

50 + 50 * n sets 500 to 549 100 to 149 * n

100 + 100 * n sets 500 to 599 100 to 199 * n

200 + 100 * n sets 500 to 699 100 to 199 * n

500 + 100 * n sets 500 to 999 100100 to 800199 (Note 7)

100 to 199 * n

600 + 100 * n sets 400 to 999 (Note 4) 100100 to 800199 (Note 7)

100 to 199 * n

7900+100 sets 400 to 999(Note 4) 100100 to 800199(Note 7) 900000 to 907399

100 to 199 *n

Local variables 1 to 33 Can be used as local variables in macro programs.

System variable From 1000 Application is fixed by system.

Fixed cycle variables 1 to 32 Local variables in fixed cycle programs.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.4 Variable Commands

363

(Note 5) When the parameter «#1052 MemVal» is set to «1» in multi-part system, a part or all of common

variables «#100 to #199» and «#500 to #999» can be shared and used between part systems. Set

the number of common variables by the parameter «#1303 V1comN» (#100 to set value) and

«#1304 V0comN» (#500 to set value).

When the parameter «#1052 MemVal» is set to «0», the common variables #100 to #199 are used for

each part system, and variables #500 to #999 are common for the part systems. Address #400s

and #900000 to #908399 which can be used with the 8000 sets of variable, which can be used as

common variable with 700 sets or more of variable, is common for the part systems regardless of

the setting of parameter «#1052 MemVal».

(Note 6) When inputting the common variable data, if the following illegal variable No. data exist in the input

file, the illegal variable No. data is ignored and only the correct common variable data will be input.

— Variable data which is not common variables such as local variables (#1 to #33) and system

variables (from #1000), etc.

— Variable data with which conditions of number of common variable sets do not match.

(Example)

If the #100 to #199, #500 to #599 exist in the input file when the common variable 100 sets (#100 to

#149, #500 to #549), the #150 to #199, #550 to #599 are ignored, and #100 to #149, #500 to #549

will be input.

(EX) Set «10» to «#1303 V1comN» Set «5» to «#1304 V0comN»

#100 to #109 : Common for the part systems #500 to #504 : Common for the part systems

#110 to #199 : Each part system #505 to #999 : Each part system

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

364

(Note 7) When the parameter «#1316 CrossCom» is set to «1», the common variables #100100 to #800199

can be used as common for the part systems. The part system common variable which can be

used is shown in the table below.

(Example)

<1-part system>

#100100=200 ; Equivalent to #100 = 200 ;

#200105=#100 ; «200» is set to #200105

#300110=#100100 ; «200» is set to #300110

#800199=#500120 ; The variable value of #500120 is set to #800199

Common variables for each part system #100 to #199″ in other part system can be used.

$1

#200100=-100; «-100» is set to #100 of 2nd part system.

#101=#200102 ; The variable value of #102 of 2nd part system is set to #101

#300105=#200103 ; The variable value of #103 of 2nd part system is set to #105 of 3rd part

system

#110=#500107 ; The variable value of #500107 is set to #110

— The PLC data reading function cannot be used, which uses system variables #100100 to #100110, and

variables #100100 to #100110 are used as common variables.

— The setting of number of common variables shared between the part systems (The parameter #1052

MemVal» is set to «1») becomes invalid, thus the movement is the same as «0» is set.

— When the parameters (#1128 RstVC1, #1129 PwrVC1) are set to «1», the operation is as follows.

«#1128 RstVC1» (When reset, variables is empty)

Common variables shared between the part systems equivalent to #100 to #199 of reset part

system are cleared.

(Example) When resetting in 1st part system, #100100 to #100199 are cleared.

When resetting in 2nd part system, #200100 to #200199 are cleared.

«#1129 PwrVC1» (When power-ON, variable is empty)

Common variables shared between the part systems equivalent to #100 to #199 of valid part

system are cleared.

(Example) In 1st part system, #100100 to #100199 are cleared.

In 2nd part system, #100100 to #100199 and #200100 to #200199 are cleared.

— Common variables shared between the part systems #100100 to #800199 can be displayed and set on

the common variable screen.

— If common variables #100100 to #800199 are used when the number of sets of common variables is

less than 600 sets or the parameter «#1316 CrossCom» is «0», a program error (P241) will occur.

Variable sets Common variables 1 (When «#1316 CrossCom» = «1»)

Variable sets specification

600 sets (500 + 100)

#100100 to #100199 (Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 1st part system) #200100 to #200199 (Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 2nd part system) #300100 to #300199 (Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 3rd part system) #400100 to #400199 (Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 4th part system) #500100 to #500199 #600100 to #600199 #700100 to #700199 #800100 to #800199

700 sets (600 + 100)

8000 sets (7900 + 100)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.4 Variable Commands

365

Variable quotations

Variables can be used for all addresses except L(O), N and / (slash).

(1) When the variable value is used directly:

X#1 ………………………….. Value of #1 is used as the X value.

(2) When the complement of the variable value is used:

X-#2 ………………………….. Value with the #2 sign changed is used as the X value.

(3) When defining variables:

#3 = #5 ………………………. Variable #3 uses the equivalent value of variable #5.

#1 = 1000 …………………… Variable #1 uses the equivalent value 1000 (which is treated as 1000.).

(4) When defining the variable arithmetic formula:

#1 = #3 + #2 — 100 ……….. Value of the operation result of #3 + #2 — 100. is used as the #1 value.

X#1 + #3 + 1000 …….. Value of the operation result of #1 + #3 + 1000 is used as the X value.

(Note 1) A variable cannot be defined in the same block as an address. It must be defined in a separate

block.

(Note 2) Up to five sets of square parentheses [ ] may be used.

#543 = -[[[[[#120]/2+15.]*3-#100]/#520+#125+#128]*#130+#132]

(Note 3) There are no restrictions on the number of characters and number of variables for variable

definition.

(Note 4) The variable values should be within the range of 0 to 99999999.

If this range is exceeded, the arithmetic operations may not be conducted properly.

(Note 5) The variable definitions become valid from the next command.

#1 = 100 ; ……………………….. #1 = 100

#1 = 200 #2 = #1 + 200 ; ….. #1 = 200, #2 = 400

#3 = #1 + 300 ; ………………… #3 = 500

(Note 6) Variable quotations are always regarded as having a decimal point at the end.

When #100 = 10

X#100 ; is treated as X10.

Incorrect Correct

X#1 = #3 + 100 ; #1 = #3 + 100 ; X#1 ;

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

366

13.5 User Macro

13.5.1 User Macro Commands; G65, G66, G66.1, G67, G68(G23)

Function and purpose

A group of control and arithmetic instructions can be registered and used as a macro program to make it one

integrated function.

Macro programs use variables, control and arithmetic instructions to create subprograms which function to

provide special-purpose controls.

By combining the user macros with variable commands, it is possible to use the macro program call,

arithmetic operations, data input/output with PLC, control, decision, branch and many other instructions for

measurement and other such applications.

These special-purpose control functions (macro programs) are called by the macro call instructions from the

main program when needed.

Detailed description

(1) When the G66 or G66.1 command is entered, the specified user macro program will be called every time

a block is executed or after a movement command in blocks with a movement command is executed,

until the G67 (cancel) command is entered.

(2) The G66 (G66.1) and G67 commands must be paired in a same program.

(MP) Main program (S1) Macro program (subprogram)

G code Function

G65 User macro Simple call

G66 User macro Modal call A (Movement command call)

G66.1 User macro Modal call B (Per-block call)

G67 User macro Modal call (G66, G66.1) cancel

G68 User macro program termination (same as G23)

;

G68(G23);

;

M30;

(MP) (S1)

G65/G66/G66.1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

367

13.5.2 Macro Call Instruction

Function and purpose

Macro call commands include the simple calls which call only the instructed block and the modal calls (types

A and B) which call a block in the call modal.

13.5.2.1 Simple Macro Calls ; G65

Function and purpose

Command format

G68 or G23 is used to terminate the user macro subprogram.

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

G65 L__(A__) P__ argument ; … Simple macro calls

G65 P__ argument ; … Simple macro calls

L A(label O)

Program No.

File name A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets <>. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.)

P Number of repetitions:

Argument Specify variable data

G65 Ll1 Pp1 ;

Ll1

G68(G23) ;

(MP)

(MP)

(S1)(Ll1)

(S1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

368

Detailed description

When the argument must be transferred as a local variable to a user macro subprogram, the actual value

should be designated after the address.

In this case, regardless of the address, a sign and decimal point can be used in the argument. There are 2

ways in which arguments are designated.

Argument designation I

Format : A_ B_ C_ … X_ Y_ Z_

(1) Arguments can be designated using any address except G, L(A), N, O and P.

(2) I, J and K must be designated in alphabetical order.

I_ J_ K_ …… Correct

J_ I_ K_ …… Incorrect

(3) Except for I, J and K, there is no need for designation in alphabetical order.

(4) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.

(5) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be designated by

argument designation I and the variable numbers in the user macro main body.

: Can be used

: Cannot be used

* : Can be used while G66.1 command is modal

(Note) With the label O type, the address «A» is used as the address for subprogram No., thus, «A» can not

be used as the local variable No.

Address and variable No. correspondence Addresses available for call instructions

Argument designation I address

Variable in macro G65,G66 G66.1

A #1

B #2

C #3

D #7

E #8

F #9

G #10 *

H #11

I #4

J #5

K #6

L #12 *

M #13

N #14 *

O #15

P #16 *

Q #17

R #18

S #19

T #20

U #21

V #22

W #23

X #24

Y #25

Z #26

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

369

Argument designation II

Format : A__ B__ C__ I__ J__ K__ I__ J__ K__ …

(1) In addition to address A, B and C, up to 10 groups of arguments with I, J, K serving as 1 group can be

designated.

(2) When the same address is duplicated, designate the addresses in the specified order.

(3) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.

(4) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be designated by

argument designation II and the variable numbers in the user macro main body.

(Note 1) Subscripts 1 to 10 for I, J, and K indicate the order of the specified command sets. They are not

required to specify instructions.

(Note 2) With the label O type, the address «A» is used as the address for subprogram No., thus, «A» can not

be used as the local variable No.

Using arguments designations I and II together

If addresses corresponding to the same variable are commanded when both types I and II are used to

designate arguments, the latter address will become valid.

(Example 1)

In the above example, I7.7 argument is valid when both arguments D3.3 and I7.7 are commanded for the #7

variable.

Argument specification II address

Variable in macro Argument specification

II address Variable in macro

A #1 J5 #17

B #2 K5 #18

C #3 I6 #19

I1 #4 J6 #20

J1 #5 K6 #21

K1 #6 I7 #22

I2 #7 J7 #23

J2 #8 K7 #24

K2 #9 I8 #25

I3 #10 J8 #26

J3 #11 K8 #27

K3 #12 I9 #28

I4 #13 J9 #29

J4 #14 K9 #30

K4 #15 I10 #31

I5 #16 J10 #32

K10 #33

Call instruction

Variable

G65 A1.1 B-2.2 D3.3 I4.4 I7.7;

#1: 1.1

#2:-2.2

#3:

#4: 4.4

#5:

#6: #7: 3.3 7.7

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

370

13.5.2.2 Modal Call A (Movement Command Call) ; G66

Function and purpose

When the block with a movement command is commanded between G66 and G67, the movement command

is first executed and then the designated user macro subprogram is executed. A number of user macro

subprograms are designated with «P».

The argument is the same as for a simple call.

Command format

Modal call A

Modal call end

Detailed description

(1) When the G66 command is entered, the specified user macro program will be called after the movement

command in a block with the movement commands has been executed, until the G67 (cancel) command

is entered.

(2) The G66 and G67 commands must be paired in a same program.

A program error will occur when G67 is issued without G66.

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

G66 L__(A__) P__ argument ;

G66 P__ argument ;

L A(label O)

Program No.

File name A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets < >. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.)

P Number of repetitions:

Argument Specify variable data

G67 ;

G66 Ll1 Pp1 ;

G67 ;

Ll1

G68(G23) ;

(MP)

(MP)

(S1)

(S1)

(S1)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

371

(Example) Drill cycle

(Note 1) After the axis command is executed in the main program, the subprogram is executed.

(Note 2) The subprogram is not executed in the blocks following G67.

(F) Argument F (R) Argument R (Z) Argument Z

N1 G90 G54 G0 X0 Y0 Z0;

N2 G91 G00 X- 50.Y- 50.Z- 200.;

N3 G66 L9010 R — 10.Z- 30.F100;

N4 X- 50.Y- 50.;

N5 X- 50.;

N6 G67;

X

L 9010

N10 G00 Z #18 M0;

N20 G09 G01 Z #26 F#9;

N30 G00 Z- #18+#26 ;

G68(G23);

W

Y

— 150. — 100. — 50. N1

— 100.

— 50.

N2 N3

N4 N5

N10

N20 N30

(R)

(Z)

(F)

To subprogram after axis command execution

To main program

Main program

Subprogram

To subprogram after axis command execution

SubprogramSubprogram

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

372

13.5.2.3 Modal Call B (for Each Block) ; G66.1

Function and purpose

The specified user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each command block which is assigned

between G66.1 and G67 and the subprogram will be repeated for the number of times specified in P.

The argument is the same as for a simple call.

Command format

Modal call B

Modal call end

Detailed description

(1) In the G66.1 mode, everything except the L(O), N and G codes in the various command blocks which are

read are handled as the argument without being executed. Any G code designated last or any N code

commanded after anything except L(O) and N will function as the argument.

(2) All significant blocks in the G66.1 mode are handled as when G65L__ is assigned at the head of a block.

(Example 1)

In «G66.1 L1000 ; » mode,

N100 G01 G90 X100. Y200. F400 R1000 ; is same as

N100 G65 L1000 G01 G90 X100. Y200. F400 R1000 ;.

(Note 1) The call is performed even in the G66.1 command block in the G66.1 mode and the

correspondence between the argument address and the variable number is the same as for G65

(simple call).

(3) The range of the G and N command values which can be used anew as variables in the G66.1 mode is

subject to the restrictions as normal NC command values.

(4) Program number L(O), sequence numbers N and modal G codes are updated as modal information.

G66.1 L__(A__) P__ argument ;

G66.1 P__ argument ;

L A(label O)

Program No.

File name A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets < >. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.)

P Number of repetitions

Argument Specify variable data

G67 ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

373

13.5.2.4 G Code Macro Call

Function and purpose

User macro subprogram with prescribed program numbers can be called merely by issuing the G code

command.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, however, the correspondence

between M codes and instructions can be set by parameters.

a : G22 L ;

b : G65 L Argument ;

c : G66 L Argument ;

d : G66.1 L Argument ;

When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command (G67) either in

the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the modal call.

(2) The correspondence between the «**» which conducts the macro call and the macro program number L

to be called is set by parameters.

(3) Up to 10 G codes from G100 to G999 can be used with this instruction. (G codes from G01 to G99 used

in the system can also be used with parameter «#1081 Gmac_P»).

(Note 1) G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro I codes, but if the parameters are set as the G

code call codes, the G code call will be the priority, and these codes cannot be used for user macro

I.

(4) These commands cannot be issued in a program which has been called by a G code macro.

If issued in such a program, they will be handled as ordinary G commands.

G** argument ; … G code macro call

G** G code for macro call

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

374

13.5.2.5 Miscellaneous Command Macro Call (for M, S, T, B Code Macro Call)

Function and purpose

The user macro subprogram of the specified program number can be called merely by issuing an M (or S, T,

B) code. (Registered M code and all S, T and B codes.)

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, however, the correspondence

between M codes and instructions can be set by parameters. (Same for S, T and B codes)

When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command (G67) either in

the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the modal call.

(2) The correspondence between the «M**» which conducts the macro call and the macro program number

L**** to be called is set by parameters. Up to 10 M codes from M00 to M9999 can be registered.

Note that the codes to be registered should exclude those basically required for the machine and M0,

M1, M2, M30 and M96 to M99 and M198.

(3) As with G22, it is displayed on the screen display of the setting and display unit but the M codes and MF

are not output.

(4) Even if the registered miscellaneous commands above are issued in a user macro subprogram which

are called by an M code, it will not be regarded as a macro call and will be handled as a normal

miscellaneous command. (Same for S, T and B codes)

(5) All S, T and B codes call the subprograms in the prescribed program numbers of the corresponding S, T

and B functions.

(6) Up to 10 M codes can be set.

(Note) When «1 to 3» is set to «#7002 M[01] type», the macro call will be equivalent call to G65/G66/G66.1.

In this case, the alphabet before the M,S,T,B code macro is not handled as an argument.

For example, commanding the M code and T code in the same block changes the operation

depending on the order of the address.

(Preparation)

Register M06 to M code macro

(Command)

M06 T02 … The value of T is handled as the variable #20 in the macro. The value is entered in the

T code at the same time.

T02 M06 … The value is not entered in the variable#20 in macro. The value is entered in the T

code.

M** ; (or S** ;, T** ;, B** ;) … Miscellaneous command macro call

M** M code for macro call (or S, T, B code)

a:G22 L**** ; b:G65 L**** M** ;

M** is not output.

c:G66 L**** M** ;

d:G66.1 L**** M** ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

375

13.5.2.6 Detailed Description for Macro Call Instruction

Detailed description

Differences between G22 and G65 commands

(1) The argument can be designated for G65 but not for G22.

(2) The sequence number can be designated for G22 but not for G65, G66 and G66.1.

(3) G22 executes subprograms after all the commands except M, P, H and L(A) in the G22 block are

executed, but G65 branches directly to the subprogram without any further operation.

(4) When any address except L(A), N, P, H or L is included in the G22 block, the single block stop will be

conducted, but not for the G65.

(5) The level of the G22 local variables is fixed but it varies in accordance with the nesting depth for G65.

(«#1» before and after G22, for instance, has the same significance, but they have different significance in

G65.)

(6) The G22 nesting depth extends up to 8 levels in combination with G65, G66 and G66.1. The G65 nesting

depth extends up to only 4 levels in combination with G66 and G66.1.

Macro call command nesting depth

Up to 4 nesting levels are available for macro subprogram calls by simple call or modal call.

The argument for a macro call instruction is valid only within the called macro level. Since the nesting depth

for macro calls extends up to 4 levels, the argument can be used as a local variable for the programs of each

macro call of each level.

(Note 1) When a G65, G66, G66.1 G code macro call or miscellaneous command macro call is conducted,

this is regarded as a nesting level and the level of the local variables is also incremented by one.

(Note 2) With modal call A, the designated user macro subprogram is called every time a movement

command is executed. However, when the G66 command is duplicated, the next user macro

subprogram is called to movement commands in the macro every time an axis is moved.

User macro subprograms are called from the one commanded last.

(Example 1)

Main program User macro operation

(a) l1 call

(b) After Z1 execution

(c) l2 call

(d) After Z2 execution

(e) l2 cancel

(f) After Z3 execution

(g) l1 cancel

G66Ll 1 ; Zz1 ;

x1 y1 x2 G68

x1 y1 x2 G68

x1 y1 x2 G68

G66Ll 2 ; Zz2 ;

G67 ;

Zz3 ;

G67 ;

Zz4 ; Zz5 ;

l 1

l 2

l 1

l 1 l 1 l 1

(a)

(c)

(e)

(g)

(d)

(b)

(f)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

376

(Note 3) When G22 command is executed in G66(G66.1) modal, the program designated by G66(G66.1) will

be executed after completing the movement command in the subprogram called by G22 (in case of

G66.1, after completing each block).

(Example 2)

(MP) Main program

(S1),(S2) Subprogram

When the program numbers of l1 and l2 are same, the program numbers of (S1) and (S2) will be same.

G66 Ll1;

G01 Xx1;

G22 Ll2;

G67; G0 Xx3;

G23;

(MP)

(S2)

G0 Xx2;

G23;

(S1)

G0 Xx2;

G23;

(S1)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

377

13.5.3 ASCII Code Macro

Function and purpose

A macro program can be called out by setting the correspondence of a subprogram (macro program)

preregistered with the parameters to codes, and then commanding the ASCII code in the machining program.

This function can be used in addition to the G, M, S, T and B miscellaneous command macro call function.

(Execution example 1)G22 type

After outputting 2000 to common variable #146, the program No. 200 subprogram is called with the G22

subprogram call type.

Parameter

(Execution example 2)G65 type

After outputting 500 to local variable #1, the program No. 3000 subprogram is called out with the G65 macro

call type.

Parameter

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

#7401 (ASCII [01] Valid/Invalid) 1 (Valid)

#7402 (ASCII [01] Code) D

#7403 (ASCII [01] Type) 0 (G22 type)

#7404 (ASCII [01] Program No.) 200

#7405 (ASCII [01] Variable) 146

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

#7411 (ASCII [02] Valid/Invalid) 1 (Valid)

#7412 (ASCII [02] Code) A

#7413 (ASCII [02] Type) 1 (G65 type)

#7414 (ASCII [02] Program No.) 3000

#7415 (ASCII [02] Variable) 100 (Not used)

L0002;

D2000;

M30;

L200

G23;

(MP) (S1)

L0003;

A500;

M30;

L3000

G23;

(MP) (S1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

378

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The command above performs same operations as commands listed below. The correspondence of

commands is set for each ASCII code with the parameters.

0 : G22 L****;

1 : G65 L**** ;

2 : G66 L**** ;

3 : G66.1 L**** ;

When parameters corresponding to 2 and 3 above are set, the modal call will be canceled. Thus,

command the cancel command (G67) after commanding the call code or during the user macro.

(2) The ASCII code for calling the macro and the program No. L**** to be called are set with the parameters.

Up to two ASCII codes can be registered.

(3) The code section is output to the variables, but the output destination differs according to the call type

and address.

(a) For G22 type

The code section is output to a common variable and the variable No. is set with a parameter.

When corresponding to the first address (parameter #7401), the section is output to the common variable

which is indicated by the first variable No. (parameter #7404).

(b) For G65/G66/G66.1 type

The code section is output to a local variable. The variable No. differs according to the address, and

corresponds to the following table.

(Note) The following addresses can be used.

A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T

**** ; … Designates the address and code

ASCII code for calling out a macro (one character)

**** Value or expression output to variable (Setting range: 999999.9999)

Address # Address # Address #

A 1 K 6 U 21

B 2 L 12 V 22

C 3 M 13 W 23

D 7 N 14 X 24

E 8 O 15 Y 25

F 9 P 16 Z 26

G 10 Q 17

H 11 R 18

I 4 S 19

J 5 T 20

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

379

Precautions

Calling a macro with an ASCII code from a macro-called program

A macro cannot be called with an ASCII code from a macro-called program with an ASCII code.

The other patterns are shown below.

If it is judged that a macro cannot be called, the command will be handled as a normal command.

Nest level of macro call command

Up to 4 nesting levels are available for macro subprogram calls using simple call (G65) and modal call (G66/

G66.1).

The macro call command’s argument is valid only in the called macro level.

Since the macro call nest level is four, the argument can be used in the program as a local variable for each

macro call.

Nest level of macro call command

Counting the main program as 0, up to eight levels of subprograms can be called (G22) from a subprogram.

The following commands are used for subprogram nesting.

(1) G22

(2) G65 G66 G66.1

(3) G code call Miscellaneous function call (M/S/T/B)

(4) MDI interruption

(5) Automatic Tool Length Measurement

(6) Multiple-step skip function

The following commands can be issued regardless of nesting.

(7) Fixed cycle

(8) Macro interruption

Called side

ASCII GMSTB macro G65/66/66.1 G22

Calling side

ASCII

GMSTB macro

G65/66/66.1

G22

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

380

Order of command priority

If «M» is designated for the ASCII code address, it may overlap with the codes basically necessary for that

machine. In this case, commands will be identified with the following priority using code values.

(1) M00 (program stop command), M01 (optional stop command)

M02,M30 (end command)

(2) When corresponding to miscellaneous code (M) call macro command

(3) When corresponding to ASCII code macro command

(4) Used as normal command

If «S», «T» and «B» are designated for the ASCII code address, commands will be identified with the

following priority using code values.

(a) When corresponding to miscellaneous code (S, T, B) call macro command

(b) When corresponding to ASCII code macro command

(c) Used as normal command

If the other addresses do not correspond to the ASCII code macro command, they will be identified as

normal commands. If the command to be used, overlaps with an ASCII code macro command, it must

be commanded in the macro-called program with the ASCII code.

Note that there are cases where the command will be unconditionally handled as a normal command, as

explained in below.

Conditions where the address set is handled as a normal command

(1) When there is a data setting command (G10) in the same block.

(2) When ASCII code macro call is executed after the G code macro call command in the same block (also

applies for M, S, T, B and ASCII)

(Example) When address «D» (G65 type) is set in the ASCII code macro, and M50 is set in the macro call

(G65 type).

(3) When inputting parameters

(4) When there is a comma (,) before the address. Example) ,D ,R, etc.

(5) When commanded in fixed cycle

(6) When commanded in macro subprogram called with G code macro call

(Also applies when macro is called with M, S, T, B or ASCII)

M50 D200 ; Execute M code macro with argument (200 set in #7)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

381

13.5.4 Variable

Function and purpose

Both the variable specifications and user macro specifications are required for the variables which are used

with the user macros.

The compensation amounts of the local, common and system variables among the variables for this NC

system except #33 are retained even when the unit’s power is switched off. (Common variables can also be

cleared by parameter «#1129 PwrVC1».)

Detailed description

Use of multiple variable

When the user macro specifications are applied, variable Nos. can be turned into variables (multiple uses of

variables) or replaced by .

Only one of the four basic arithmetic rule (+, -, * , / ) operations can be conducted with .

(Example 1) Multiple uses of variables

(Example 2) Example of multiple designations of variables

(Example 3) Replacing variable Nos. with

#1=10 #10=20 #20=30 ;

#5=# [#[#1]] ; # [# [#1] ] = # [#10] from #1 = 10. # [#10] = #20 from #10 = 20. Therefore, #5 = #20 or #5 = 30.

#1=10 #10 =20 #20=30 #5=1000;

#[#[#1]]=#5; # [# [#1] ] = # [#10] from #1 = 10. # [#10] = #20 from #10 = 20. Therefore, #20 = #5 or #20 = 1000.

#10=5; ##10 = 100; is handled in the same manner as # [#10] = 100.

##10=100 ; In which case, #5 = 100.

#10=5 ;

#[#10 + 1] = 1000 ; In which case, #6 = 1000.

#[#10 — 1] = -1000 ; In which case, #4 = -1000.

#[#10 * 3] = 100 ; In which case, #15 = 100.

#[#10/2] = -100 ; In which case, #2 = -100.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

382

Undefined variables

When applying the user macro specifications, variables which have not been used even once after the power

was switched on or local variables which were not specified by the G65, G66 or G66.1 commands, can be

used as . Also, variables can forcibly be set to .

Variable #0 is always used as the and cannot be defined in the left-side member.

(1) Arithmetic expressions

#1 = #0 ; ………………..#1 =

#2 = #0 + 1; ………. #2 = 1

#3 = 1 + #0; ………. #3 = 1

#4 = #0 * 10; ………. #4 = 0

#5 = #0 + #0; ………. #5 = 0

Note that in an arithmetic expression is handled in the same way as 0.

+ = 0

+ = Constant

+ = Constant

(2) Variable quotations

When only the undefined variables are quoted, they are ignored including the address itself.

When #1 =

G0 X#1 Y1000 ; …………………….Equivalent to G0 Y1000 ;

G0 X#1 + 10 Y1000 ;……………… Equivalent to G0 X10 Y1000 ;

(3) Conditional expressions

differs from «0», only for EQ and NE. (#0 is .)

(Note 1) EQ and NE should be used only for integers. For comparison of numeric values with decimals, GE,

GT, LE, and LT should be used.

When #101 = When #101 = 0

#101EQ#0 = established

#101EQ#0 0 = not established

#101NE0 0 established

#101NE0 0 0 not established

#101GE#0 >= 0 established

#101GE#0 0 >= established

#101GT0 > 0 not established

#101GT0 0 > 0 not established

#101LE#0 <= established

#101LE#0 0 <= established

#101LT0 < 0 not established

#101LT0 0 < 0 not established

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

383

13.5.5 Types of Variables

13.5.5.1 Common Variables

Detailed description

Common variables can be used commonly from any position. Number of the common variables sets depends

on the specifications.

Refer to the explanation about Variable Commands for details.

Variable name setting and quotation

Any name (variable name) can be given to common variables #500 to #519. It must be composed of not more

than 7 alphanumerics and it must begin with a letter. Do not use «#» in variable names. It causes an alarm

when the program is executed.

Variable names are separated by a comma (,).

(1) Once variable names have been set, they will not be cleared even when the power is turned off.

(2) Variables in programs can be quoted by their variable names. In this case, the variables should be

enclosed in square parentheses [ ].

(Example 1) G01X [#POINT1] ;

[#NUMBER] =25 ;

(3) The variable Nos., data and variable names are displayed on the screen of the setting and display unit.

(Example 2)

Program… SETVN500 [A234567, DIST, TOOL25] ;

(Note) Do not use characters (SIN, COS, etc.) predetermined by the NC and used for operation

commands at the head of a variable name.

SETVNn [ NAME1,NAME2, …..] ;

n Head No. of variable to be named

NAME1 #n name (variable name)

NAME2 #n + 1 name (variable name)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

384

13.5.5.2 Local Variables (#1 to #33)

Detailed description

Local variables can be defined as an when a macro subprogram is called, and also used locally

within main programs and subprograms. They can be duplicated because there is no relationship between

macros. (up to 4 levels)

The is assumed to be Aa1 Bb1 Cc1…… Zz1.

The following table shows the correspondences between the addresses designated by and the

local variable numbers used in the user macro main bodies.

[Argument designation I]

«» in the above table denotes argument addresses which cannot be used. However, provided that the G66.1

mode has been established, an argument address denoted by the asterisk can be added for use.

The hyphen (-) mark indicates that there is no corresponding address.

(Note) With the label O type, the address «A» is used as the address for subprogram No., thus, «A» can not

be used as the argument address.

G65 L__P __ ;

L Program No.

P Number of repetitions

Call command Argument address

Local variable No.

Call command Argument address

Local variable No. G65

G66 G66.1

G65 G66

G66.1

A #1 Q #17

B #2 R #18

C #3 S #19

D #7 T #20

E #8 U #21

F #9 V #22

* G #10 W #23

H #11 X #24

I #4 Y #25

J #5 Z #26

K #6 — #27

* L #12 — #28

M #13 — #29

* N #14 — #30

O #15 — #31

* P #16 — #32

— #33

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

385

[Argument designation II]

(Note 1) The numbers 1 to 10 accompanying I, J and K indicate the sequence of the commanded sets, and

are not required in the actual command.

(1) Local variables in subprograms can be defined by means of the designation during macro

call. (Local variables can be used freely in those subprograms.)

Argument designation II address

Variable in macro Argument designation II

address Variable in macro

A #1 J5 #17

B #2 K5 #18

C #3 I6 #19

I1 #4 J6 #20

J1 #5 K6 #21

K1 #6 I7 #22

I2 #7 J7 #23

J2 #8 K7 #24

K2 #9 I8 #25

I3 #10 J8 #26

J3 #11 K8 #27

K3 #12 I9 #28

I4 #13 J9 #29

J4 #14 K9 #30

K4 #15 I10 #31

I5 #16 J10 #32

K10 #33

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

(a) Local variables set by argument (b) Refer to the local variables and control the movement, etc.

(c) Local variable data table

G65 L9900 A60. S100. F800;

M02;

G91 G01 X #19*COS #1 Y #19*SIN #1 F#9;

G68;

A(#1)= 60.000

F(#9)= 800

S(#19)= 100.000

(MP)

(S1)

(a)

(b)

(S1) L9900

(c)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

386

(2) The local variables can be used freely in that subprogram.

In the front surface milling example, argument J is programmed as the milling pitch 10.mm. However, this

is changed to 8.333mm to create an equal interval pitch.

The results of the No. of reciprocation data calculation is set in local variable #30.

(MP) Main program (S1) Subprogram

(a)Local variables set by argument (b) The local variables can be changed in the subprogram.

(c) Local variable data table (d) Example of front surface milling

G65 L1 A100. B50. J10. F500; #30=FUP #2/#5/2 ;

#5=#2/#30/2 ;

G22 H100 P#30 ;

X#1 ;

G23 ;

N100 G1 X#1 F#9 ;

Y#5 ;

X- #1 ;

Y#5 ;

G23 ;

A(#1) 100.000

B(#2) 50.000

F(#9) 500

J(#5) 10.000 8.333

(#30) 3

J

A

B

(S1)

(MP)

(a)

(S1)

(d)

(c)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

387

(3) Local variables can be used independently on each of the macro call levels (4 levels).

Local variables are also provided independently for the main program (macro level 0).

Arguments cannot be used for the level 0 local variables.

The status of the local variables is displayed on the setting and display unit.

Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.

(MP) Main program (L) Local variables

(LV0 — 3) Macro level 0 — 3

#1=0.1 #2=0.2 #3=0.3;

G65 L1A1. B2. C3.;

M02;

G65 L10A10. B20. C30.;

G68;

G65 L100A100. B200.;

G68; G68;

#1 0.100 #2 0.200 #3 0.300

#32

A (#1) 1.000 B (#2) 2.000 C (#3) 3.000 D (#7)

Z(#26)

#32

A (#1) 10.000 B (#2) 20.000 C (#3) 30.000 D (#7)

Z(#26)

#32

A (#1) 100.000 B (#2) 200.000 C (#3)

Z(#26)

#32

(MP) (LV0) L1 (LV1) L10 (LV2) L100 (LV3)

(L) (0) (L) (1) (L) (2) (L) (3)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

388

13.5.5.3 Macro Interface Inputs/Outputs (#1000 to #1035, #1100 to #1135, #1200 to #1295, #1300

to #1395)

Function and purpose

The status of the interface input signals can be ascertained by reading out the values of variable numbers

#1000 to #1035, #1200 to #1295.

The interface output signals can be sent by substituting values in variable Nos. #1100 to #1135, #1300 to

#1395.

Example of 1st part system

(a) Input signal (b) Output signal (c) Macro instructions

#1000

#1031

#1032 (R6436, R6437)

#1200

#1231

#1033 (R6438, R6439)

#1232

#1263

#1034 (R6440, R6441)

#1264

#1295

#1035 (R6442, R6443)

#1132 (R6372, R6373)

#1133 (R6374, R6375)

#1134 (R6376, R6377)

#1135 (R6378, R6379)

#1300

#1331

#1332

#1363

#1364

#1395

#1100

#1131

(c)

(a) (b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

389

Detailed description

Macro interface inputs (#1000 to #1035, #1200 to #1295) : PLC -> NC

A variable value which has been read out can be only 1 or 0 (1:contact closed, 0:contact open). All the input

signals from #1000 to #1031 can be read at once by reading out the value of variable No. #1032. Similarly, the

input signals #1200 to #1231, #1232 to #1263, and #1264 to #1295 can be read by reading the values of the

variable Nos. #1033 to #1035.

Variable Nos. #1000 to #1035, #1200 to #1295 are for readout only, and nothing can be placed in the left side

member of their operation formula.

Input here refers to input to the control unit.

Whether it is per part system or common among part systems depends on the setting of the base specification

parameter «#1230 set02/bit7».

Following correspondence tables are example of the 1st part system.

$1 $2 $3 $4

R6436,7 R6444,5 R6452,3 R6460,1

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

#1000 1 Register R6436 bit 0 #1016 1 Register R6437 bit 0

#1001 1 Register R6436 bit 1 #1017 1 Register R6437 bit 1

#1002 1 Register R6436 bit 2 #1018 1 Register R6437 bit 2

#1003 1 Register R6436 bit 3 #1019 1 Register R6437 bit 3

#1004 1 Register R6436 bit 4 #1020 1 Register R6437 bit 4

#1005 1 Register R6436 bit 5 #1021 1 Register R6437 bit 5

#1006 1 Register R6436 bit 6 #1022 1 Register R6437 bit 6

#1007 1 Register R6436 bit 7 #1023 1 Register R6437 bit 7

#1008 1 Register R6436 bit 8 #1024 1 Register R6437 bit 8

#1009 1 Register R6436 bit 9 #1025 1 Register R6437 bit 9

#1010 1 Register R6436 bit 10 #1026 1 Register R6437 bit 10

#1011 1 Register R6436 bit 11 #1027 1 Register R6437 bit 11

#1012 1 Register R6436 bit 12 #1028 1 Register R6437 bit 12

#1013 1 Register R6436 bit 13 #1029 1 Register R6437 bit 13

#1014 1 Register R6436 bit 14 #1030 1 Register R6437 bit 14

#1015 1 Register R6436 bit 15 #1031 1 Register R6437 bit 15

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

#1032 32 Register R6436, R6437

#1033 32 Register R6438, R6439

#1034 32 Register R6440, R6441

#1035 32 Register R6442, R6443

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

390

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

#1200 1 Register R6438 bit 0 #1216 1 Register R6439 bit 0

#1201 1 Register R6438 bit 1 #1217 1 Register R6439 bit 1

#1202 1 Register R6438 bit 2 #1218 1 Register R6439 bit 2

#1203 1 Register R6438 bit 3 #1219 1 Register R6439 bit 3

#1204 1 Register R6438 bit 4 #1220 1 Register R6439 bit 4

#1205 1 Register R6438 bit 5 #1221 1 Register R6439 bit 5

#1206 1 Register R6438 bit 6 #1222 1 Register R6439 bit 6

#1207 1 Register R6438 bit 7 #1223 1 Register R6439 bit 7

#1208 1 Register R6438 bit 8 #1224 1 Register R6439 bit 8

#1209 1 Register R6438 bit 9 #1225 1 Register R6439 bit 9

#1210 1 Register R6438 bit 10 #1226 1 Register R6439 bit 10

#1211 1 Register R6438 bit 11 #1227 1 Register R6439 bit 11

#1212 1 Register R6438 bit 12 #1228 1 Register R6439 bit 12

#1213 1 Register R6438 bit 13 #1229 1 Register R6439 bit 13

#1214 1 Register R6438 bit 14 #1230 1 Register R6439 bit 14

#1215 1 Register R6438 bit 15 #1231 1 Register R6439 bit 15

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

#1232 1 Register R6440 bit 0 #1248 1 Register R6441 bit 0

#1233 1 Register R6440 bit 1 #1249 1 Register R6441 bit 1

#1234 1 Register R6440 bit 2 #1250 1 Register R6441 bit 2

#1235 1 Register R6440 bit 3 #1251 1 Register R6441 bit 3

#1236 1 Register R6440 bit 4 #1252 1 Register R6441 bit 4

#1237 1 Register R6440 bit 5 #1253 1 Register R6441 bit 5

#1238 1 Register R6440 bit 6 #1254 1 Register R6441 bit 6

#1239 1 Register R6440 bit 7 #1255 1 Register R6441 bit 7

#1240 1 Register R6440 bit 8 #1256 1 Register R6441 bit 8

#1241 1 Register R6440 bit 9 #1257 1 Register R6441 bit 9

#1242 1 Register R6440 bit 10 #1258 1 Register R6441 bit 10

#1243 1 Register R6440 bit 11 #1259 1 Register R6441 bit 11

#1244 1 Register R6440 bit 12 #1260 1 Register R6441 bit 12

#1245 1 Register R6440 bit 13 #1261 1 Register R6441 bit 13

#1246 1 Register R6440 bit 14 #1262 1 Register R6441 bit 14

#1247 1 Register R6440 bit 15 #1263 1 Register R6441 bit 15

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

391

System variable No. of points

Interface input signal System variable No. of points

Interface input signal

#1264 1 Register R6442 bit 0 #1280 1 Register R6443 bit 0

#1265 1 Register R6442 bit 1 #1281 1 Register R6443 bit 1

#1266 1 Register R6442 bit 2 #1282 1 Register R6443 bit 2

#1267 1 Register R6442 bit 3 #1283 1 Register R6443 bit 3

#1268 1 Register R6442 bit 4 #1284 1 Register R6443 bit 4

#1269 1 Register R6442 bit 5 #1285 1 Register R6443 bit 5

#1270 1 Register R6442 bit 6 #1286 1 Register R6443 bit 6

#1271 1 Register R6442 bit 7 #1287 1 Register R6443 bit 7

#1272 1 Register R6442 bit 8 #1288 1 Register R6442 bit 8

#1273 1 Register R6442 bit 9 #1289 1 Register R6443 bit 9

#1274 1 Register R6442 bit 10 #1290 1 Register R6443 bit 10

#1275 1 Register R6442 bit 11 #1291 1 Register R6443 bit 11

#1276 1 Register R6442 bit 12 #1292 1 Register R6443 bit 12

#1277 1 Register R6442 bit 13 #1293 1 Register R6443 bit 13

#1278 1 Register R6442 bit 14 #1294 1 Register R6443 bit 14

#1279 1 Register R6442 bit 15 #1295 1 Register R6443 bit 15

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

392

Macro interface outputs (#1100 to #1135, #1300 to #1395) : NC -> PLC

Output signals can only be 0 or 1.

All the output Nos. from #1100 to #1131 can be sent at once by substituting a value in variable No. #1132.

Similarly, the output signals #1300 to #1311, #1332 to #1363, and #1364 to #1395 can be sent by substituting

values to the variable Nos. #1133 to #1135. (20 to 231)

The status of the writing and output signals can be read in order to compensate the #1100 to #1135, #1300 to

#1395 output signals.

Output here refers to the output from the NC side.

Whether it is per part system or common among part systems depends on the setting of the base specification

parameter «#1230 set02/bit7».

The following correspondence tables are examples of the 1st part system.

$1 $2 $3 $4

R6372,3 R6380,1 R6388,9 R6396,7

System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal

#1100 1 Register R6372 bit 0 #1116 1 Register R6373 bit 0

#1101 1 Register R6372 bit 1 #1117 1 Register R6373 bit 1

#1102 1 Register R6372 bit 2 #1118 1 Register R6373 bit 2

#1103 1 Register R6372 bit 3 #1119 1 Register R6373 bit 3

#1104 1 Register R6372 bit 4 #1120 1 Register R6373 bit 4

#1105 1 Register R6372 bit 5 #1121 1 Register R6373 bit 5

#1106 1 Register R6372 bit 6 #1122 1 Register R6373 bit 6

#1107 1 Register R6372 bit 7 #1123 1 Register R6373 bit 7

#1108 1 Register R6372 bit 8 #1124 1 Register R6373 bit 8

#1109 1 Register R6372 bit 9 #1125 1 Register R6373 bit 9

#1110 1 Register R6372 bit 10 #1126 1 Register R6373 bit 10

#1111 1 Register R6372 bit 11 #1127 1 Register R6373 bit 11

#1112 1 Register R6372 bit 12 #1128 1 Register R6373 bit 12

#1113 1 Register R6372 bit 13 #1129 1 Register R6373 bit 13

#1114 1 Register R6372 bit 14 #1130 1 Register R6373 bit 14

#1115 1 Register R6372 bit 15 #1131 1 Register R6373 bit 15

System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal

#1132 32 Register R6372, R6373

#1133 32 Register R6374, R6375

#1134 32 Register R6376, R6377

#1135 32 Register R6378, R6379

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

393

System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal

#1300 1 Register R6374 bit 0 #1316 1 Register R6375 bit 0

#1301 1 Register R6374 bit 1 #1317 1 Register R6375 bit1

#1302 1 Register R6374 bit 2 #1318 1 Register R6375 bit 2

#1303 1 Register R6374 bit 3 #1319 1 Register R6375 bit 3

#1304 1 Register R6374 bit 4 #1320 1 Register R6375 bit 4

#1305 1 Register R6374 bit 5 #1321 1 Register R6375 bit 5

#1306 1 Register R6374 bit 6 #1322 1 Register R6375 bit 6

#1307 1 Register R6374 bit 7 #1323 1 Register R6375 bit 7

#1308 1 Register R6374 bit 8 #1324 1 Register R6375 bit 8

#1309 1 Register R6374 bit 9 #1325 1 Register R6375 bit 9

#1310 1 Register R6374 bit 10 #1326 1 Register R6375 bit 10

#1311 1 Register R6374 bit 11 #1327 1 Register R6375 bit 11

#1312 1 Register R6374 bit 12 #1328 1 Register R6375 bit 12

#1313 1 Register R6374 bit 13 #1329 1 Register R6375 bit 13

#1314 1 Register R6374 bit 14 #1330 1 Register R6375 bit 14

#1315 1 Register R6374 bit 15 #1331 1 Register R6375 bit 15

System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal

#1332 1 Register R6376 bit 0 #1348 1 Register R6377 bit 0

#1333 1 Register R6376 bit 1 #1349 1 Register R6377 bit 1

#1334 1 Register R6376 bit 2 #1350 1 Register R6377 bit 2

#1335 1 Register R6376 bit 3 #1351 1 Register R6377 bit 3

#1336 1 Register R6376 bit 4 #1352 1 Register R6377 bit 4

#1337 1 Register R6376 bit 5 #1353 1 Register R6377 bit 5

#1338 1 Register R6376 bit 6 #1354 1 Register R6377 bit 6

#1339 1 Register R6376 bit 7 #1355 1 Register R6377 bit 7

#1340 1 Register R6376 bit 8 #1356 1 Register R6377 bit 8

#1341 1 Register R6376 bit 9 #1357 1 Register R6377 bit 9

#1342 1 Register R6376 bit 10 #1358 1 Register R6377 bit 10

#1343 1 Register R6376 bit 11 #1359 1 Register R6377 bit 11

#1344 1 Register R6376 bit 12 #1360 1 Register R6377 bit 12

#1345 1 Register R6376 bit 13 #1361 1 Register R6377 bit 13

#1346 1 Register R6376 bit 14 #1362 1 Register R6377 bit 14

#1347 1 Register R6376 bit 15 #1363 1 Register R6377 bit 15

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

394

(Note 1) The last values of the system variables #1100 to #1135, #1300 to #1395 sent are retained as 1 or 0.

(They are not cleared even with resetting.)

(Note 2) The following applies when any number except 1 or 0 is substituted into #1100 to #1131, #1300 to

#1395.

is treated as 0.

Any number except 0 and is treated as 1.

Any value less than 0.00000001 is indefinite.

System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal System variable

No. of points

Interface output signal

#1364 1 Register R6378 bit 0 #1380 1 Register R6379 bit 0

#1365 1 Register R6378 bit 1 #1381 1 Register R6379 bit 1

#1366 1 Register R6378 bit 2 #1382 1 Register R6379 bit 2

#1367 1 Register R6378 bit 3 #1383 1 Register R6379 bit 3

#1368 1 Register R6378 bit 4 #1384 1 Register R6379 bit 4

#1369 1 Register R6378 bit 5 #1385 1 Register R6379 bit 5

#1370 1 Register R6378 bit 6 #1386 1 Register R6379 bit 6

#1371 1 Register R6378 bit 7 #1387 1 Register R6379 bit 7

#1372 1 Register R6378 bit 8 #1388 1 Register R6379 bit 8

#1373 1 Register R6378 bit 9 #1389 1 Register R6379 bit 9

#1374 1 Register R6378 bit 10 #1390 1 Register R6379 bit 10

#1375 1 Register R6378 bit 11 #1391 1 Register R6379 bit 11

#1376 1 Register R6378 bit 12 #1392 1 Register R6379 bit 12

#1377 1 Register R6378 bit 13 #1393 1 Register R6379 bit 13

#1378 1 Register R6378 bit 14 #1394 1 Register R6379 bit 14

#1379 1 Register R6378 bit 15 #1395 1 Register R6379 bit 15

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

395

13.5.5.4 Tool Compensation

Detailed description

Tool compensation data can be read and set using the variable numbers.

«n» in the table corresponds to the tool No. Maximum «n» value is the number of tool compensation sets.

The #10000s and #2000s are equivalent functions, however, the maximum value of «n» for #2000 order is

«200».

When the number of tool offset sets is larger than «200», use the variables of #10000s.

The tool compensation data is configured as data with a decimal point in the same way as other variables.

When «# 10001=1000;» is programmed, 1000.000 is set in tool compensation data.

(Example 1) Calculation and tool offset data setting

(Note 1) In (Example 1), no consideration is given to the delay in the skip sensor signal.

#5003 is the Z axis start point position and #5063 indicates the position at which the skip signal is

input while G31 is being executed in the Z axis skip coordinates.

Variable number range Type 1 Type 2

#10001 to #10000+n #2001 to #2000+n (Length dimension)

#11001 to #11000+n #2201 to #2200+n (Length wear)

#16001 to #16000+n #2401 to #2400+n (Radius dimension)

#17001 to #17000+n #2601 to #2600+n (Radius wear)

Programming example Common variables Tool compensation data

G28 Z0 T01 ; Reference position return

M06; Tool change (T0101)

#1=#5003 ; Start point memory

G00 Z-500. ; Rapid traverse to safe position

G31 Z-100. F100; Skip measurement

#10001=#5063-#1 ; Measurement distance calculation and tool compensation data setting

Sensor

#101=1000; #10001=#101; #102=#10001;

#101=1000.0

#102=1000.0 H1=1000.000

# 1

H 1

#5063 G31

G00

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

396

13.5.5.5 Workpiece Coordinate System Compensation (#5201 — #532n)

Detailed description

By using variable Nos #5201 to #532n, it is possible to read out the workpiece coordinate system

compensation data or to substitute values.

(Note) The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the specifications.

The last digit of the variable No. corresponds to the control axis No.

This is an example where the external workpiece compensation values are added to the workpiece coordinate

(G54, G55) system compensation values without changing the position of the workpiece coordinate systems.

Coordinate name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis ….. nth axis Remarks

External workpiece offset

#5201 #5202 #5203 #5204 ….. #520n External workpiece offset specifications are required.

G54 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224 ….. #522n

G55 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 ….. #524n

G56 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 ….. #526n Workpiece coordinate system offset specifications are required. G57 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 ….. #528n

G58 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 ….. #530n

G59 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 ….. #532n

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 #5221=-20. #5222=-20. ; N3 G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N10 #5221=-90. #5222=-10. ; N11 G90 G00 G54 X0Y0 ;

M02 ;

N100 #5221=#5221+#5201 ; #5222=#5222+#5202 ; #5241=#5241+#5201 ;

#5242=#5242+#5202 ; #5201=0 #5202=0;

— 90. — 20.

— 20.

— 10.

N1

N3

W1 W1 N11

W1 (G54) W2 (G55)

G55 G54

W2 (G55) W1 (G54)

M

G54 G55

Y

X

G54 workpiece coordinate system defined by N10

Coordinate system after change

Coordinate system before change

(Example 1)

(Example 2)

G54 workpiece coordinate system defined by N2

Basic machine coordinate External workpiece offset

Basic machine coordinate system

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

397

13.5.5.6 NC Alarm (#3000)

Detailed description

The NC unit can be forcibly set to the alarm state by using variable No. #3000.

Any alarm number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.

The alarm message must be written in 31 or less characters.

NC alarm 3 signal (program error) is output.

The «P277: MACRO ALM MESG» appears in the column on «DIAG 1.» screen and the alarm

message «(CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530)» and alarm No. (70) will appear in the .

(Note 1) If the numerical value «0» or larger than «9999» is commanded as an alarm No., the alarm No. will be

invalid and cannot be displayed. However, it will be set as the alarm state and the commanded

alarm message will be displayed.

(Note 2) An alarm message can be commanded by enclosing the message that exists right after the alarm

No. with round parentheses. If other character strings are commanded between the alarm No. and

the alarm message enclosed by the parentheses, the alarm message will be invalid and not

displayed. However, it turns to the alarm state and the commanded alarm No. is displayed.

(Note 3) If a character string with 32 or more is commanded, the character string of 32th or after is not

displayed.

(Note 4) The space in character strings of the alarm message is ignored and not displayed on the screen. To

separate character strings, insert a character such as «.» (period) instead.

#3000= 70 (CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530) ;

70 Alarm No.

CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 Alarm message

Example of program (alarm when #1 = 0)

P277:

CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 70

IF[#1 NE 0]GOTO 100 ; #3000=70 ( CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 );

N100

DIAG 1.

MACRO ALM MESG

Stops with NC alarm

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

398

13.5.5.7 Integrating Time (#3001, #3002)

Detailed description

The integrating time during the power is turned ON or the automatic start is running, can be read or values can

be substituted by using variable Nos. #3001 and #3002.

The integrating time returns to zero in about 2.44 1011 ms (approximately 7.7 years).

13.5.5.8 Suppression of Single Block Stop and Miscellaneous Function Finish Signal Waiting

(#3003)

Detailed description

By substituting the values below in variable No. #3003, it is possible to suppress single block stop in the

subsequent blocks or to advance to the next block without waiting for the miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B)

finish (FIN) signal.

(Note 1) Variable No. #3003 is set to zero by NC reset.

Type Variable No. Unit Contents when power

is switched on Initialization of

contents Count condition

Power ON 3001 1ms

Same as when power is switched off

Substitute values to variables

At all times while power is ON

Automatic start 3002 In-automatic start

#3003 Single block stop Miscellaneous function finish signal

0 Not suppressed Wait

1 Suppressed Wait

2 Not suppressed Not wait

3 Suppressed Not wait

G65P9010T( ) ms ;

T#20

#3001=0 ; WHILE #3001LE#20 DO1 ;

END1 :

M99 ;

O9010

allowable time

Allowable time portion: DO1 to END1 is repeated and when allowable time is reached, operations jumps to M99.

Local variable

Entered in local variable #20

To sub-program

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

399

13.5.5.9 Feed Hold, Feedrate Override, G09 Valid/Invalid (#3004)

Detailed description

By substituting the values below in variable No. #3004, it is possible to make the feed hold, feedrate override

and G09 functions either valid or invalid in the subsequent blocks.

(Note 1) Variable No. #3004 is set to zero by NC reset.

(Note 2) The functions are valid when the above bits are 0, and invalid when they are 1.

(Note 3) When the feed hold is set to invalid with #3004, the following will occur when the feed hold switch is

pressed.

— During thread cutting, block stop will be carried out at the end of the next block of the block where

thread cutting is completed.

— During tapping with tap cycle, block stop will be carried out after the operation of R point return.

— In the case other than above, block stop will be carried out after the termination of the currently

executing block.

13.5.5.10 Message Display and Stop (#3006)

Detailed description

By using variable No. #3006, the operation stops after the previous block is executed and, if message display

data is commanded, the corresponding message and the stop No. will be indicated on the operator message

area.

The message should be written in 31 or less characters and should be enclosed by round parentheses.

Contents (value)

#3004

bit 0 bit 1 bit 2

Feed hold Feedrate override G09 check

0 Valid Valid Valid

1 Invalid Valid Valid

2 Valid Invalid Valid

3 Invalid Invalid Valid

4 Valid Valid Invalid

5 Invalid Valid Invalid

6 Valid Invalid Invalid

7 Invalid Invalid Invalid

#3006 = 1( TAKE FIVE );

1 to 9999 Stop No. (When Nos. other than 1 — 9999 are set, the command will be invalidated.)

TAKE FIVE Message (Nothing will be displayed if no message is designated.)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

400

13.5.5.11 Mirror Image (#3007)

Detailed description

By reading variable No. #3007, it is possible to ascertain the status of mirror image of the each axis at the

point.

Each axis corresponds to a bit of #3007.

When the bits are 0, the mirror image function is invalid.

When the bits are 1, the mirror image function is valid.

#3007

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

nth axis 6 5 4 3 2 1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

401

13.5.5.12 G Command Modals (#4001-#4021, #4201-#4221)

Detailed description

Using variable Nos. #4001 to #4021, it is possible to read the modal commands which have been issued in

previous blocks.

Similarly, it is possible to read the modals in the block being executed with variable Nos. #4201 to #4221.

(Example)

G28 X0 Y0 Z0;

G90 G1 X100. F1000 ;

G91 G65 L300 X100. Y100. ;

M02 ;

L300

#1 = #4003 ; = -> Group 03 G modal (pre-read) #1 = 91.0

#2 = #4203 ; = -> Group 03 G modal (now being executed) #2 = 90.0

G#1 X#24 Y#25 ;

G68 ;

%

Variable No. Function Pre-read

block Execution

block

#4001 #4201 Interpolation mode G00 : 0, G01 : 1,G 02 : 2, G03 : 3, G33 : 33

#4002 #4202 Plane selection G17 : 17, G18 : 18, G19 : 19

#4003 #4203 Absolute/incremental G90 : 90, G91 : 91

#4004 #4204 No variable No.

#4005 #4205 Feed designation G94 : 94, G95 : 95

#4006 #4206 Inch/metric G20 : 20, G21 : 21

#4007 #4207 Tool radius compensation G40 : 40, G41 : 41, G42 : 42

#4008 #4208 Tool length compensation G43:43, G44:44

#4009 #4209 Fixed cycle G80 : 80, G73-74 : 73-74, G76 : 76, G81-89 : 81-89

#4010 #4210 Return level G98 : 98, G99 : 99

#4011 #4211

#4012 #4212 Workpiece coordinate system G54-G59 : 54-59

#4013 #4213 Acceleration/deceleration G61-G64 : 61-64, G61.1 : 61.1

#4014 #4214 Macro modal call G66 : 66, G66.1 : 66.1, G67 : 67

#4015 #4215

#4016 #4216

#4017 #4217 Constant surface speed control G96 : 96, G97 : 97

#4018 #4218 No variable No.

#4019 #4219 Mirror image G50.1:50.1, G51.1:51.1

#4020 #4220

#4021 #4221 No variable No.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

402

13.5.5.13 Other Modals (#4101 — #4120, #4301 — #4320)

Detailed description

Using variable Nos. #4101 to #4120, it is possible to read the modal commands which have been issued in

previous blocks.

Similarly, it is possible to read the modals in the block being executed with variable Nos. #4301 to #4320.

(Note 1) The programs are registered as files. When the program No. (file name) is read with #4115, #4315,

the character string will be converted to a value.

(Example 1) The file name «123» is the character string 031, 032, 033, so the value will be

(031-030)*100 + (032-030)*10 + (033-030) = 123.0. Note that if the file name contains

characters other than numbers, it will be «blank».

(Example 2) If the file name is «123ABC», it contains characters other than numbers; so, the result

will be «blank».

Variable No. Modal information

Variable No. Modal information

Pre-read Execution Pre-read Execution

#4101 #4301 #4111 #4311 Tool length compensation No. H

#4102 #4302 #4112 #4312

#4103 #4303 #4113 #4313 Miscellaneous function M

#4104 #4304 #4114 #4314 Sequence number N

#4105 #4305 #4115 #4315 Program number L(O) (Note 1)

#4106 #4306 #4116 #4316

#4107 #4307 Tool radius compensation No. D

#4117 #4317

#4108 #4308 #4118 #4318

#4109 #4309 Feedrate F #4119 #4319 Spindle function S

#4110 #4310 #4120 #4320 Tool function T

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

403

13.5.5.14 Position Information (#5001 — #5160 + n)

Detailed description

Using variable Nos. #5001 to #5160, it is possible to read the end point coordinates, machine coordinates,

workpiece coordinates, skip coordinates, tool position compensation amount and servo deviation amounts in

the last block.

(Note) The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the specifications.

The last digit of the variable No. corresponds to the control axis No.

Position information Axis No. Reading during

movement 1 2 3 … n

End point coordinate of the last block #5001 #5002 #5003 … #5000+n Yes

Machine coordinate #5021 #5022 #5023 … #5020+n No

Workpiece coordinate #5041 #5042 #5043 … #5040+n No

Skip coordinate

Parameter #8713

0 Workpiece coordinate

system

#5061 #5062 #5063 … #5060+n

Yes 1 Feature coordinate/

Workpiece installation coordinate

Feature coordinate/ Workpiece installation coordinate

#5161 #5162 #5163 … #5161+n

Tool position compensation amount

#5081 #5082 #5083 … #5080+n No

Servo deviation amount #5101 #5102 #5103 … #5100+n Yes

Macro interruption stop Start point coordinates #5121 #5122 #5123 … #5120+n Yes

Macro interruption stop End point coordinates #5141 #5142 #5143 … #5140+n Yes

W

M

M

W

G01

G00

Read command

Basic machine coordinate system

[Workpiece coordinates]

[End point coordinates]

Workpiece coordinate system

Workpiece coordinate system

Machine coordinate system[Machine

coordinates]

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

404

(1) The position of the end point coordinates is position in the workpiece coordinate system.

(2) The end point coordinates, skip coordinates and servo deviation amounts can be read even during

movement. However, it must first be checked that movement has stopped before reading the machine

coordinates and the workpiece coordinates.

(3) The skip coordinates indicates the position where the skip signal is turned ON in the G31 block. If the

skip signal does not turn ON. they will be the end point position.

(For further details, refer to the section on Automatic Tool Length Measurement.)

(4) The end point coordinates indicate the tool nose position regardless of the tool compensation and other

such factors. On the other hand, the machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates and skip coordinates

indicate the tool reference point position with consideration given to tool compensation.

For » «, check stop and then proceed to read.

For » «, reading is possible during movement.

Skip coordinate value is the position on the workpiece coordinate system, feature coordinate system, or

workpiece installation coordinate system.

For #5061 to #5060+n, when the parameter «#8713 Skip coord. Switch» is set to «0», it is the position on

the workpiece coordinate system, and when set to «1», it is the position on the feature coordinate system

or workpiece installation coordinate system.

For #5161 to #5160+n, it is the position on the workpiece coordinate system while the inclined surface

machining command or workpiece installation compensation is OFF.

For feature coordinate system, the skip coordinate value is on «the actual position where the tool length

compensation is included» regardless of the setting of the parameter «#1287 ext23/bit1, bit2 (inclined

surface coordinate display).

The coordinate value in variable Nos. #5061 to #5060+n or #5161 to #5160+n memorize the moments

when the skip input signal during movement was input and so they can be read at any subsequent time.

For further details, refer to the section on «Skip Function».

Read Command

Skip coordinates value

Gauge, etc.

F G31

W

M

(feedrate)

Skip signal

Machine coordinate system

[Workpiece coordinates]

[Machine coordinates]

[Input coordinates of skip signal]

Workpiece coordinate system

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

405

(Example 1) Example of workpiece position measurement

An example to measure the distance from the measured reference position to the workpiece edge is

shown below.

(Example 2) Reading of skip input coordinates

is the error caused by response delay. (Refer to the section on the skip function for details.)

#122 is the N4 skip signal input coordinates as there is no Y command at N7.

#101 X axis measurement amount N1 G90/G91 modal recording

#102 Y axis measurement amount N2 X, Y start point recording

#103 Measurement linear segment amount

N3 Z axis entry amount

N4 X, Y measurement (Stop at skip input)

#5001 X axis measurement start point

N5 Return to X, Y start point

#5002 Y axis measurement start point

N6 X, Y measurement incremental value calculation

N7 Measurement linear segment calculation

#5061 X axis skip input point N8 Z axis escape

#5062 Y axis skip input point N9,N10 G90/G91 modal return

N11 Main program return

(a) Skip signal

#111=-75.+ #112=-75.+

#121=-25.+ #122=-75.+

G65 L9031 X100. Y100. Z-10. F200;

F(#9) 200 X(#24)100.000 Y(#25)100.000 Z(#26) — 10.000

#101 87.245 #102 87.245 #103 123.383

N1 #180=#4003; N2 #30=#5001 #31=#5002; N3 G91 G01 Z#26 F#9; N4 G31 X#24 Y#25 F#9; N5 G90 G00 X#30 Y#31; N6 #101=#30- #5061 #102=#31- #5062; N7 #103=SQR #101*#101+#102*#102 ; N8 G91 G01Z- #26; N9 IF #180 EQ 91 GOTO 11; N10 G90; N11 G23;

L9031

N3 N4

N5N8 #103 #102

#101 X

Z

Y

To subprogram

Main program

Argument

Start point

Skip input

N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0; N2 G90 G00 X0 Y0; N3 X0 Y- 100.; N4 G31 X- 150. Y- 50. F80; N5 #111=#5061#112=#5062; N6 G00 Y0; N7 G31 X0; N8 #121=#5061#122=#5062; N9 M02;

— Y

— 150

— 50

— 75

— 100

— 75 — 25 Y X- X

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

406

13.5.5.15 Number of Workpiece Machining Times (#3901, #3902)

Detailed description

The number of workpiece machining times can be read using variables #3901 and #3902.

By substituting a value in these variable Nos., the number of workpiece machining times can be changed.

(Note) The number of workpiece machining times must be a positive value.

13.5.5.16 Coordinate Rotation Parameter

Detailed description

The following variables can be read by the system variables of the variable command.

Note that writing is not possible onto these variables.

Type Variable No. Data setting range

Number of workpiece machining times

#3901

0 to 999999 Maximum workpiece

value #3902

Variable No. Description

#30060 Control axis No. on the coordinate rotation plane (horizontal axis)

#30061 Control axis No. on the coordinate rotation plane (vertical axis)

#30062 Coordinate rotation center (horizontal axis)

#30063 Coordinate rotation center (vertical axis)

#30064 Coordinate rotation angle

#30065 SIN data for the coordinate rotation angle [SIN(Coordinate rotation angle)]

#30066 COS data for the coordinate rotation angle [COS(Coordinate rotation angle)]

#30067 Coordinate rotation vector (horizontal axis)

#30068 Coordinate rotation vector (vertical axis)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

407

13.5.5.17 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

Detailed description

The following rotary axis configuration parameters can be read by the system variables of the variable

command.

By substituting a value in these variables, the setting value of rotary axis configuration parameter can be

changed.

13.5.5.18 Reverse Run Information

Detailed description

Variable number Parameter

#31001 #7903 G92_CRD Origin zero set coordinate selection

#31002 #7904 NO_TIP Tool handle feed function selection

#31003 #7920 SLCT_T1 Rotary axis selection (Tool rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31004 #7923 DIR_T1 Rotation direction (The tool rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31005 #7924 COFST1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset (The tool rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31006 #7925 COFST1V Vertical axis rotation center offset (The tool rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31007 #7926 COFST1T Height axis rotation center offset (The tool rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31008 #7930 SLCT_T2 Rotary axis selection (The tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis)

#31009 #7933 DIR_T2 Rotation direction (The tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis)

#31010 #7934 COFST2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset(The tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis)

#31011 #7935 COFST2V Vertical axis rotation center offset (The tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis)

#31012 #7936 COFST2T Height axis rotation center offset (The tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis)

#31013 #7940 SLCT_W1 Rotary axis selection (The table rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31014 #7943 DIR_ W1 Rotation direction (The table rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31015 #7944 COFSW1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31016 #7945 COFSW1V Vertical axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31017 #7946 COFSW1T Height axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type base-side rotary axis)

#31018 #7950 SLCT_W2 Rotary axis selection (The table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis)

#31019 #7953 DIR_W2 Rotation direction (The table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis)

#31020 #7954 COFSW2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis)

#31021 #7955 COFSW2V Vertical axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis)

#31022 #7956 COFSW2T Height axis rotation center offset (The table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis)

#31023 #7912 NO_MANUAL Selection of manual feed for 5-axis machining

Variable number

Usage Description Range

#31100 Number of available blocks for reverse run

+1 added number of the blocks that retained the reverse run information while the «Reverse run control mode» signal was ON

0 to 201

#31101 Counter of available blocks for reverse run

Number of available blocks for reverse run (value of #31100) when the «Reverse run» signal turned ON to start. Turns «0» when the forward run has been executed for all the blocks. Shows «0» in the normal operation.

0 to 201

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

408

13.5.5.19 Tool Life Management (#60000 — #64700)

Detailed description

Definition of variable Nos.

(1) Designation of group No.

#60000

The tool life management data group No. to be read with #60001 to #64700 is designated by substituting

a value in this variable No. If a group No. is not designated, the data of the group registered first is read.

This is valid until reset. When the tool life management III are provided, the group No. other than 1

cannot be used.

(2) Tool life management system variable No. (Read)

#60001 to #64700

# | a | b | c | d | e |

| a | : «6» Fix (Tool life management)

| b | c | : Details of data classification

The group No. and life data are common for the group.

| d | e | : Registration No. or data type

Registration No.

Data type

Data class Details Remarks

00 For control Refer by data types

05 Group No. Refer by registration No.

10 Tool No. Refer by registration No.

15 Tool data flag Refer by registration No.

20 Tool status Refer by registration No.

25 Life data Refer by registration No.

30 Usage data Refer by registration No.

35 Tool length compensation data Refer by registration No.

40 Tool radius compensation data Refer by registration No.

45 Auxiliary data Refer by registration No.

M 1 to 200

Type Details

1 Number of registered tools

2 Life current value

3 Tool selected No.

4 Number of remaining registered tools

5 Signal being executed

6 Cutting time cumulative value (minute)

7 Life end signal

8 Life prediction signal

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

409

List of variables

Variable No.

Item Type Details Data range

60001 Number of registered tools

Common to system Total number of tools registered in each group. 0 to 200

60002 Life current value

For each group (Designate Group No. #60000)

Usage time/No. of uses of tool being used. Spindle tool usage data or usage data for tool in use (#60003).

0 to 4000 min 0 to 65000 times

60003 Tool selection No.

Registration No. of tool being used. Designated group’s selected tool registration No. (If a tool is not selected, the first tool of ST:1, or if ST:1 is not used, the first tool of ST:0. When all tools have reached their lives, the last tool).

0 to 200

60004 Number of remaining registered tools

No. of first registered tool that has not reached its life.

0 to 200

60005 Execution signal

«1» when this group is used in program being executed. «1» when spindle tool data group No. and designated group No. match.

0/1

60006 Cutting time cumulative value (min)

Indicates the time that this group is used in the program being executed.

(Not used)

60007 Life end signal

«1» when lives of all tools in this group have expired. «1» when all registered tools in the designated group reach lives.

0/1

60008 Life prediction signal

«1» when selecting a new tool with the next command in this group. «1» when there are no tools in use (ST: 1) while there is an unused tool (ST: 0) in the specified group.

0/1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

410

Variable No.

Item Type Details Data range

60500 +***

Group No.

Each group/ registration No. (Group No. #60000/ registration No. *** is designated.) Note that the group No./ method and life are common for the groups.

This group’s No. 1 to 99999999

61000 +***

Tool No. Tool No. 1 to 99999999

61500 +***

Tool data flag

Parameters such as usage data count method, length compensation method, and radius compensation method. bit 0, 1 Tool length compensation data format bit 2, 3 Tool radius compensation data format 0: Compensation No. method 1: Incremental value compensation amount method 2: Absolute value compensation amount method bit 4, 5 Tool life management method 0: Usage time 1: No. of mounts 2: No. of usages

0 to FF (H)

62000 +***

Tool status

Tool usage state 0 : Tool not used 1 : Tool in use 2 : Normal life tool 3 : Tool error 1 4 : Tool error 2

0 to 4

62500 +***

Life data Life time or No. of lives for each tool 0 to 4000 minutes 0 to 65000 times

63000 +***

Usage data Usage time or No. of uses for each tool 0 to 4000 minutes 0 to 65000 times

63500 +***

Tool length compensation data

Length compensation data set as compensation No., absolute value compensation amount or increment value compensation amount method.

Compensation No.: 0 to No. of tool compensation sets Absolute value compensation amount 99999.999 Increment value compensation amount 99999.999

64000 +***

Tool radius compensation data

Radius compensation data set as compensation No., absolute value compensation amount or increment value compensation amount method.

Compensation No.: 0 to No. of tool compensation sets Absolute value compensation amount 99999.999 Increment value compensation amount 99999.999

64500 +***

Auxiliary data Spare data 0 to 65535

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

411

Program example

(1) Normal commands

(2) When group No. is not designated.

#104 = #60004 ; …… Reads the remaining number of registered tools in the group registered first.

#111 = #61001 ; …… Reads the #1 tool No. in the group registered first.

%

(3) When non-registered group No. is designated. (Group 9999 does not exist.)

#60000 = 9999 ; …… Designates the group No.

#104 = #60004 ; …… #104 =-1

(4) When registration No. not used is designated. (Group 10 has 15 tools)

#60000 = 10 ; …… Designates the group No.

#111 = #61016 ; …… #111 =-1

(5) When registration No. out of the specifications is designated.

#60000 = 10 ;

#111 = #61017 ; …… Program error (P241)

(6) When tool life management data is registered with G10 command after group No. is designated.

#101 = #60001 ; …… Reads the number of registered tools.

#102 = #60002 ; …… Reads the life current value.

#103 = #60003 ; …… Reads the tool selection No.

#60000 = 10 ; …… Designates the group No. of the life data to be read.

Designated program No. is valid until reset.

#104 = #60004 ; …… Reads the remaining number of registered tools in group 10.

#105 = #60005 ; …… Reads the signal being executed in group 10.

#111 = #61001 ; …… Reads the group 10, #1 tool No.

#112 = #62001 ; …… Reads the group 10, #1 status.

#113 = #61002 ; …… Reads the group 10, #2 tool No.

%

#60000 = 10 ; ….. Designates the group No.

G10 L3 ; ….. Starts the life management data registration.

The group 10 life data is registered through the commands from G10 to G11.1.

P10 LLn NNn ; ….. 10 is the group No., Ln is the life per tool, Nn is the method.

TTn ; ….. Tn is the tool No.

:

G11.1 ; ….. Registers the life data with the G10 command.

#111 = #61001 ; ….. Reads the group 10, #1 tool No.

G10 L3 ; ….. Starts the life management data registration.

The group 10 life data is registered through the commands from G10 to G11.1.

P1 LLn NNn ; ….. .

1 is the group No., Ln is the life per tool, Nn is the method.

TTn ; ….. Tn is the tool No.

:

G11.1 ; ….. Registers the life data with the G10 command.

(The registered data is deleted.)

#111 = #61001 ; ….. Group 10 does not exist. #111 = -1.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

412

Precautions

(1) If the tool life management system variable is commanded without designating a group No., the data of

the group registered at the head of the registered data will be read.

(2) If a non-registered group No. is designated and the tool life management system variable is commanded,

«-1» will be read as the data.

(3) If an unused registration No. tool life management system variable is commanded, «-1» will be read as

the data.

(4) Once commanded, the group No. is valid until NC reset.

(5) When the tool life management III are provided, the group No. other than 1 cannot be used.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

413

13.5.5.20 Reading The Parameters (#100000-#100002, #100010)

Function and purpose

Parameter data can be read in with the system variables.

Detailed description

The parameter values are read in with the following four blocks using these four system variables.

Parameter No. designation (#100000)

The parameter to be read in is designated by substituting the parameter No. in this system variable.

If the parameters are read without designating this No., the parameters will be read in the same manner as if

the minimum parameter No. (#1) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the parameter No.

is designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent parameter No. is set.

Part system No. designation (#100001)

(1) System variable for part system No. designation

The part system No. of the parameter to be read in is designated by substituting an index value in this

system variable. This designation will be ignored when reading in parameters that are not in a specific

part system.

If the parameters are read without designating this No., the parameters will be read in the same manner

as if the index value 0 (system in running program) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held

until the parameter No. is designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent part system No. is set.

(2) Index values

Variable No. Application

#100000 Parameter No. designation

#100001 Part system No. designation

#100002 Axis No./spindle No. designation

#100010 Parameter value read

#100000 = 1001; ……….. Designates the parameter No.

#100001 = 0; ……….. Designates the part system No. (Always set 0)

#100002 = 1; ……….. Designates the axis No./spindle No.

#100 = #100010; ……….. Reads the parameter value.

Index values Parameters per part system

0 Running part system

1 1st part system

2 2nd part system

3 —

: —

9 —

10 PLC axis

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

414

Axis No./spindle No. designation (#100002)

(1) System variable for axis No./spindle No. designation

The axis No./spindle No. of the parameter to be read in is designated by substituting an index value in

this system variable. This designation will be ignored when reading in parameters that are neither for a

specific axis nor spindle.

If the parameters are read without designating this number, the parameters will be read in the same

manner as when the index value 1 (1st axis/1st spindle) is designated. Once designated, the setting is

held until the index value is designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent axis/spindle No. is set.

(2) Index values

Reading the parameters (#100010)

The designated parameter data is read with this system variable.

Data to be read as follows, depending on the parameter type.

Index values Axis parameter Spindle parameter

1 1st axis 1st spindle

2 2nd axis 2nd spindle

3 3rd axis 3rd spindle

4 4th axis 4th spindle

5 5th axis —

6 6th axis —

Type Read in data

Value The values displayed on the Parameter screen are output.

Text ASCII codes are converted into decimal values.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

415

Program example

(1) To read the parameter per part system [#1002 axisno (Number of axes)]

(2) To read the axis parameter [#2037 G53ofs (#1 reference point)]

[Conditions]

<1st axis> <2nd axis>

#2037 G53ofs 100.000 200.000

[1st part system program]

(3) To read each parameter for each part system, axis and spindle

Precautions

(1) The number of axes and spindles is set at the maximum number specified by the model.

(2) The inch/metric changeover function for the setting and display is valid for the readout data.

#100000 = 1002; ……….. Designates [#1002].

#100001 = 0; ………..

#101 = #100010; ……….. Reads the number of axes

#100001 = 5; ……….. Designates [5th part system]. (Program error (P39) occurs.)

#100001 = 10; ……….. Designates [PLC axis].

#110 = #100010; ……….. Reads the number of PLC axes.

#100002 = 1; ……….. Designates [1st axis].

#100000 = 2037; ……….. Designates [#2037].

#101 = #100010; ……….. Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 1st axis. (#101=100.000)

#100002 = 2; ……….. Designates [2nd axis].

#102 = #100010; ……….. Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 2nd axis. (#102=200.000)

#100002 = 1; ……….. Designates [1st spindle].

#100000 = 3001; ……….. Designates [#3001].

#101 = #100010; ……….. Reads the [#3001 slimt1 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00))] for 1st spindle.

#100000 = 3002; ……….. Designates [#3002].

#102 = #100010; ……….. Reads the [#3002 slimt2 (Number of limit rotation (Gear: 01))] for 1st spindle.

#100002 = 2; ……….. Designates [2nd spindle].

#100000 = 3001; ……….. Designates [#3001].

#201 = #100010 ; ……….. Reads the [#3001 slimt1 (Number of limit rotation (Gear: 00))] for 2nd spindle.

#100000 = 3002; ……….. Designates [#3002].

#202 = #100010; ……….. Reads the [#3002 slimt2 (Number of limit rotation (Gear: 00))] for 2nd spindle.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

416

13.5.5.21 Reading PLC data (#100100-#100103,#100110)

Function and purpose

PLC data can be read in with the system variables.

(Note 1) These can be used only with some models.

(Note 2) The readable devices are limited.

Detailed description

The PLC data is read in with the following five blocks using these five system variables.

Device designation (#100100)

(1) System variable for device designation

The type of device to be read in can be designated by substituting the device designation value in this

system variable.

If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same manner as when the

minimum device designation value (0: M device) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held

until the device is designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent device is set.

(2) Device designation value

The unit indicates the amount of data per device No. «Word» is 16 bits, and «Bit» is one bit.

* is a device that expresses the device No. as a hexadecimal.

Variable No. Application

#100100 Device type designation

#100101 Device No. designation

#100102 Number of read bytes designation

#100103 Read bit designation

#100110 Reading PLC data

#100100 = 1; ……….. Designates the device type.

#100101 = 0; ……….. Designates the device No.

#100102 = 1; ……….. Designates the number of bytes.

#100103 = 2; ……….. Designates the bit. (Valid only when reading word device bits.)

#100=#100110; ……….. Reads in the PLC data.

Device designation

value Device Unit Device No.

Device designation

value Device Unit Device No.

0 M Bit M0 to M10239 10 F Bit F0 to F1023

1 D Word D0 to D2047 13 L Bit L0 to L511

2 C Bit C0 to C255 18 V Bit V0 to V255

4 X * Bit X0 to X1FFF 19 ST Bit ST0 to ST63

5 Y * Bit Y0 to Y1FFF 20 SD Word SD0 to SD127

6 R Word R0 to R32767 21 SB * Bit SB0 to SB1FF

7 T Bit T0 to T703 22 SW * Word SW0 to SW1FF

9 SM Bit SM0 to SM127 23 B * Bit B0 to B1FFF

24 W * Word W0 to W1FFF

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

417

Device No. designation (#100101)

The device to be read in is designated by substituting the device No. in this system variable.

Convert a device expressed as a hexadecimal into a decimal when designating.

If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same manner as when the

minimum device No. (0) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the device No. is designated

again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent device No. is set.

Number of bytes designation (#100102)

(1) System variable for number of bytes designation

The reading size is designated by substituting the number of bytes designation value in this system

variable.

If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same manner as when the

minimum device designation value (0: M device) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held

until the number of bytes is designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a number of bytes that does not exist in the specifications is set.

(2) Number of bytes designation value

0 to 4 are designated without a sign, and 101 to 104 are designated with a sign.

Bit designation (#100103)

(1) System variable for bit designation

The bit to be read in is designated by substituting the bit designation value in this system variable.

This designation is valid only when reading the bits for a 16-bit device, and is invalid for the others.

If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same manner as if the

minimum bit designation value (0: bit 0) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the bit is

designated again or until it is reset.

A program error (P39) will occur if a nonexistent bit is set.

(2) Bit designation value

Number of bytes

designation value

Read in data Operation

Size Sign Range Word device Bit device

0 1 bit — 0 to 1 The number of bits designated is read in.

The bits for the designated device No. are read in.

1 1 byte No 0 to 255 The low-order byte is read in.

8 bits are read in from the designated device No. 101 Yes -128 to 127

2 2 byte No 0 to 65535 Two bytes are read in.

16 bits are read in from the designated device No. 102 Yes -32768 to 32767

4 4 byte No 0 to 4294967295 The designated device (L) and next device (H) are read in.

32 bits are read in from the designated device No. 104 Yes

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Bit designation value Read in bit

0 Bit 0

1 Bit 1

: :

15 Bit 15

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

418

Reading PLC data (#100110)

The data for the designated device is read in with this system variable.

Refer to the table for number of bytes designation for details on the range of data read in.

Program example

(1) To read a bit device

(2) To read a word device

Precautions

(1) As the PLC data is read asynchronously from the ladder execution, the data is not necessarily the one

which was gained when the program was executed. Be careful when reading devices which are

changing.

(2) If reading of a nonexistent device is attempted by designating the device No. and number of bytes, the 0

value will be read in only for the nonexistent section.

#100100 = 0; ……….. Designates [M device].

#100101 = 0; ……….. Designates [Device No. 0].

#100102 = 0; ……….. Designates [Bit].

#100 = #100110; ……….. Reads M0 (one bit).

#100102 = 1; ……….. Designates [1 bytes].

#101 = #100110; ……….. Reads M0 to M7 (8 bits). (If M7 to M0 is 0001 0010, this will be #102 = 18 (0x12).)

#100102 = 102; ……….. Designates [Signed two bytes].

#102 = #100110; ……….. Reads M0 to M15 (16 bits). (If M15 to M0 is 1111 1110 1101 1100, this will be #102 = -292 (0xFEDC).)

#100102 = 4; ……….. Designates [4 bytes].

#104 = #100110; ……….. Reads M0 to M31 (32 bits). (If M31 to M0 is 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000, #104 = 305419896 (0x12345678).)

#100100 = 1; ……….. Designates [D device].

#100101 = 0; ……….. Designates [Device No. 0].

#100102 = 0; ……….. Designates [Bit].

#100103 = 1; ……….. Designates [Bit 1].

#100 = #100110; ……….. Reads the D0 bit 1. (If D0 = 0x0102, #101 =1.)

#100102 = 1; ……….. Designates [1 bytes].

#101 = #100110; ……….. Reads the low-order byte of D0. (If D0 = 0x0102, #101 =2.)

#100102 = 2; ……….. Designates [2 bytes].

#102 = #100110; ……….. Reads D0. (If D0 = 0x0102, #102 =258.)

#100102 = 104; ……….. Designates [Signed four bytes].

#104 = #100110; ……….. Reads D0 and D1. (If D0 = 0xFFFE and D1 = 0xFFFF, #104 =-2.)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

419

13.5.5.22 Time Reading Variables (#3001, #3002, #3011, #3012)

Detailed description

The following operations can be carried out using the system variable extension for the user macro time.

(1) By adding time information system variable #3011 and #3012, the current date (#3011) and current time

(#3012) can be read and written.

(2) By adding parameter #1273/bit1, the unit (millisecond unit/hour unit) of the cumulative time during

system variable #3002 automatic start, can be changed.

(3) The cumulative time returns to 0 at approx. 2.44 1011 milliseconds (approx. 7.7 years).

(4) If a negative value or a value exceeding 244335917226 milliseconds (67871.08811851 hours for #3002

time designation) is set for the cumulative time, a program error (P35) will occur.

(5) If a value exceeding the command range is set for the date or time, a program error (P35) will occur.

(6) Always set the month/date/hour/minute/second as a two-digit value when setting the date and time.

If the value only has one digit, always add 0. (February 14, 2001 => #3001= 20010214 ;, etc.)

Variable No. Details

#3001 The cumulative time during power ON can be read and the value can be substituted. The unit is millisecond.

#3002 The cumulative time during automatic start can be read and the value can be substituted. The unit can be changed between millisecond and hour with parameter #1273/bit1.

#3011

The current date can be read and written. YYYY/MM/DD is read as a YYYYMMDD value. Command range for year/month/date setting Year (YYYY) : 2000 to 2099 Month (MM) : 1 to 12 Date (DD) : 1 to maximum number of days in month

#3012

The current time can be read and written. HH/MM/SS is read as a value «HHMMSS». When a value «HHMMSS» is written in, it will be set as HH/MM/DD. Command range for hour/minute/second setting Hour (HH) : 0 to 23 (24-hour system) Minute (MM) : 0 to 59 Second (SS) : 0 to 59

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

420

Program example

Example of use (#3011, #3012)

(Example 1) To read the current date (February 14, 2001) in common variable #100

#100 = #3011 ; (20010214 is inserted in #100)

(Example 2) To write current time (18 hours, 13 minutes, 6 seconds) into system variable #3012

#3012 = 181306 ; (The command value cumulative time #2: time is set to 18:13:06.)

(Example 3) By setting the following program example, the machining start/end time (year/month/date/hour/

minute/second) can be viewed.

Precautions

Limits and precautions for using time reading variable

(1) #3011 reads the date as an eight-digit value, so the difference between the two dates read in will not be

the difference of days.

(2) #3012 reads the time as a six-digit value, so the difference between the two times read in will not be the

difference of hours.

#100=#3011 ; => Machining start year/month/date #101=#3012 ; => Machining start hour/minute/second G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; G92 ; G0 X50. ; : : : #102=#3011 ; …. Machining end year/month/date #103=#3012 ; …. Machining end hour/minute/second M30 ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

421

13.5.5.23 R Device Access Variables (#50000 — #50749, #51000 — #51749, #52000 — #52749)

Function and purpose

By using variable Nos. #50000 to #50749, #51000 to #51749, #52000 to #52749, it is possible to read data

(R8300 to R9799, R18300 to R19799, R28300 to R29799) and substitute value in the R device user backup

area.

Detailed description

These variables read and write the two words of R device.

Data range of these variables is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

Depending on the setting of the PLC bit selection parameter «#6455/ bit0 to 2», these variables can be

changed between decimal point valid or invalid for each user backup area.

The position of the decimal point when decimal point valid is selected, varies according to the parameters

«#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch).

These variables are retained even when the power is off.

These are common among part systems.

Variable No. R device

#50000 R8300,R8301

User backup area (1500 points) #50001 R8302,R8303

:

#50749 R9798,R9799

Variable No. R device

#51000 R18300,R18301

User backup area (1500 points) #51001 R18302,R18303

:

#51749 R19798,R19799

Variable No. R device

#52000 R28300,R28301

User backup area (1500 points) #52001 R28302,R28303

:

#52749 R29798,R29799

#1041 I_inch #1003 iunit

B C D E

0 : Metric Three digits after the

decimal point Four digits after

the decimal point Five digits after

the decimal point Six digits after

the decimal point

1 : Inch Four digits after

the decimal point Five digits after

the decimal point Six digits after

the decimal point Seven digits after the decimal point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

422

Access from a machining program to R device

[Reading variables]

When the variable #50000 is used in a machining program as shown below, the data set in device R8300 and

R8301 will be referred.

(1) When decimal point invalid is selected

Regardless of the setting of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial

inch), the data set in the R device will be the command value.

In case of the above example, the command value will be «X123456.».

(2) When decimal point valid is selected

The data set in the R device will be read as a data with a decimal point.

The position of the decimal point will be as follows, according to the settings of the parameters «#1003

iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch).

[Substitution into variables]

When substituting a value to the variable #50000 in a machining program as shown below, data will be set in

the device R8302 and R8303.

(1) When decimal point invalid is selected

Regardless of the setting of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial

inch), substituted value will be set in the R device.

When a value with a decimal point is substituted to a variable like «#50001 = 123.456 ;», the numbers

after the decimal point will be truncated and «123» will be set.

Device Value #50000

R8301 0x0001 0x1e240 (hexadecimal)

= 123456 (decimal) R8300 0xe240

#1041 I_inch #1003 iunit

B C D E

0: Metric X123.456 X12.3456 X1.23456 X0.123456

1: Inch X12.3456 X1.23456 X0.123456 X0.0123456

#50001 Device Value

123 (decimal) = 0x7b (hexadecimal)

R8303 0x0000

R8302 0x007b

G0 X#50000 ;

R8300,R8301

#50001 = 123 ;

R8302,R8303

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

423

(2) When decimal point valid is selected

According to the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch),

values which are shifted for the number of decimals will be set in the R device, as shown below.

When a value with a decimal point is substituted to a variable like «#50001 = 123.456 ;», the value will

directly be set.

If the number of decimals of the substituted data exceeds the number of significant figures, the value will

be rounded off to the number of significant figures and will be set.

When «#50001 = 123.4567899 ;».

#1041 I_inch 0 : Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 123000 (decimal) = 0x1e078 (hexadecimal)

1230000 (decimal) = 0x12c4b0 (hexadecimal)

12300000 (decimal) = 0xbbaee0 (hexadecimal)

123000000 (decimal) = 0x754d4c0 (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0001 0x0012 0x00bb 0x0754

R8302 0xe078 0xc4b0 0xaee0 0xd4c0

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 1230000 (decimal) = 0x12c4b0 (hexadecimal)

12300000 (decimal) = 0xbbaee0 (hexadecimal)

123000000 (decimal) = 0x754d4c0 (hexadecimal)

1230000000 (decimal) = 0x49504f80 (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0012 0x00bb 0x0754 0x4950

R8302 0xc4b0 0xaee0 0xd4c0 0x4f80

#1041 I_inch 0 : Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 123456 (decimal) = 0x1e240 (hexadecimal)

1234560 (decimal) = 0x12d680 (hexadecimal)

12345600 (decimal) = 0xbc6100 (hexadecimal)

123456000 (decimal) = 0x75bca00 (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0001 0x0012 0x00bc 0x075b

R8302 0xe240 0xd680 0x6100 0xca00

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 1234560 (decimal) = 0x12d680 (hexadecimal)

12345600 (decimal) = 0xbc6100 (hexadecimal)

123456000 (decimal) = 0x75bca00 (hexadecimal)

1234560000 (decimal) = 0x4995e400 (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0012 0x00bc 0x075b 0x4998

R8302 0xd680 0x6100 0xca00 0xe400

#1041 I_inch 0 : Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 123457 (decimal) = 0x1e241 (hexadecimal)

1234568 (decimal) = 0x12d688 (hexadecimal)

12345679 (decimal) = 0xbc614f (hexadecimal)

123456790 (decimal) = 0x75bcd16 (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0001 0x0012 0x00bc 0x075b

R8302 0xe241 0xd688 0x614f 0xcd16

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50001 1234568 (decimal) = 0x12d688 (hexadecimal)

12345679 (decimal) = 0xbc614f (hexadecimal)

123456790 (decimal) = 0x75bcd16 (hexadecimal)

1234567899 (decimal) = 0x499602db (hexadecimal)

Device R8303 0x0012 0x00bc 0x075b 0x4996

R8302 0xd688 0x614f 0xcd16 0x02db

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

424

Use of R device access variables in control command

These variables can be used in control command.

However, note that the variable value and the condition of true/false differ between decimal point valid

variables and invalid variables.

(1) When decimal point invalid is selected

Regardless of the setting of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial

inch), R device value of #50003 whose condition is true, will be «1».

(2) When decimal point valid is selected

The condition is true when #50003 is «1». So the R device value of #50003 will be as follows depending

on the setting of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch).

IF [#50003 EQ 1] GOTO 30 ; G00 X100 ; N30

#50003 Device Value

1 (decimal) = 0x01 (hexadecimal)

R8307 0x0000

R8306 0x0001

#1041 I_inch 0 : Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50003 1000 (decimal) = 0x3e8 (hexadecimal)

10000 (decimal) = 0x2710 (hexadecimal)

100000 (decimal) = 0x186a0 (hexadecimal)

1000000 (decimal) = 0xf4240 (hexadecimal)

Device R8307 0x0000 0x0000 0x0001 0x000f

R8306 0x03e8 0x2710 0x86a0 0x4240

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50003 10000 (decimal) = 0x2710 (hexadecimal)

100000 (decimal) = 0x186a0 (hexadecimal)

1000000 (decimal) = 0xf4240 (hexadecimal)

10000000 (decimal) = 0x989680 (hexadecimal)

Device R8307 0x0000 0x0001 0x000f 0x0098

R8306 0x2710 0x86a0 0x4240 0x9680

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

425

Substitution between R device access variable and other variables.

[Substitution into R device access variables]

Common variables and coordinates variables can be substituted to the R device access variables.

(Example 1) Common variables

(Example 2) #5063 : Skip coordinates #5063

(1) When decimal point invalid is selected

Regardless of the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial

inch), the value which is rounded off will be set.

— When the common variable and coordinate variable in the above example are «-123.456»

(2) When decimal point valid is selected

Substitution will be as follows according to the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit)

and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch).

#101 = -123.456 ; #50004 = #101 ;

#50004 = #5063 ;

#50004 Device Value

-123 (decimal) = 0xffffff85 (hexadecimal)

R8309 0xffff

R8308 0x0085

#1041 I_inch 0 : Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50004 -123456 (decimal) = 0xfffe1dc0 (hexadecimal)

-1234560 (decimal) = 0xffed2980 (hexadecimal)

-12345600 (decimal) = 0xff439f00 (hexadecimal)

-123456000 (decimal) = 0xf8a43600 (hexadecimal)

Device R8309 0xfffe 0xffed 0xff43 0xf8a4

R8308 0x1dc0 0x2980 0x9f00 0x3600

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#50004 -1234560 (decimal) = 0xffed2980 (hexadecimal)

-12345600 (decimal) = 0xff439f00 (hexadecimal)

-123456000 (decimal) = 0xf8a43600 (hexadecimal)

-1234560000 (decimal) = 0xb66a1c00 (hexadecimal)

Device R8309 0xffed 0xff43 0xf8a4 0xb66a

R8308 0x2980 0x9f00 0x3600 0x1c00

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

426

[Substitution of R device access variables]

(1) When decimal point invalid is selected

Regardless of the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial

inch), #102 will be «123».

(2) When decimal point valid is selected

Substitution will be as follows according to the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt setting unit)

and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch).

Precautions

(1) The position of a decimal point changes depending on the settings of the parameter «#1003 iunit»(inupt

setting unit) and «#1041 I_inch»(initial inch). Fix the decimal point position while considering these

parameter settings when setting a number to an R device.

(2) These variables do not handle . If #0 is substituted, it will be converted into «0».

Therefore, when comparing this variable after substituting #0 #0 and #0 #0 with a

conditional expression (EQ), it will not be formed.

(3) A program error (P35) will occur when a value exceeding an effective range is substituted into these

variables.

(4) When these values are used as decimal point invalid, the settings of «#1078 Decpt2» (Decimal point type

2) and «#8044 UNIT*10» will not be applied.

(5) When a graphic is being checked, writing into R device will not be executed even if a value is substituted

into these variables.

The reading of these variables (reference to the R device value) during a graphic check will be as follows

depending on the model.

M700VW : «0» is always read.

M700VS/M70V : The currently set R device value is read.

#50005 = 123.456789 ; #102 = #50005

#1041 I_inch 0: Metric

#1003 iunit B C D E

#102 123.4570 123.4568 123.4568 123.4568

#1041 I_inch 1 : Inch

#1003 iunit B C D E

#102 123.4568 123.4568 123.4568 123.4568

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

427

13.5.5.24 Read/write of the Workpiece Installation Error Compensation Amounts

Detailed description

Using the system variables below, read/write of the workpiece installation error compensation amounts is

enabled.

(Note 1) The primary rotary axis position corresponds with the axis set by the parameter #7942, and the

secondary rotary axis position corresponds with the axis set by the parameter #7952.

(Note 2) If the primary and secondary rotary axis positions are not of the table side rotary axes, the set

values are ignored.

(Note 3) The setting ranges are the same as those set in the workpiece installation error setting screen.

(Note 4) If the system variables #26000 to #26077 are written during workpiece installation error

compensation, the program erro (P545) will occur.

Common No.01 No.02 No.03 No.04 No.05 No.06 No.07

Workpiece installation error compensation amount x

#26000 #26010 #26020 #26030 #26040 #26050 #26060 #26070

Workpiece installation error compensation amount y

#26001 #26011 #26021 #26031 #26041 #26051 #26061 #26071

Workpiece installation error compensation amount z

#26002 #26012 #26022 #26032 #26042 #26052 #26062 #26072

Workpiece installation error compensation amount a

— #26013 #26023 #26033 #26043 #26053 #26063 #26073

Workpiece installation error compensation amount b

— #26014 #26024 #26034 #26044 #26054 #26064 #26074

Workpiece installation error compensation amount c

— #26015 #26025 #26035 #26045 #26055 #26065 #26075

Primary rotary axis position #26006 #26016 #26026 #26036 #26046 #26056 #26066 #26076

Secondary rotary axis position

#26007 #26017 #26027 #26037 #26047 #26057 #26067 #26077

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

428

13.5.6 Operation Commands

Function and purpose

A variety of operations can be performed between variables.

Command format

is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators.

Constants can be used instead of #j and #k below.

(Note 1) A value without a decimal point is basically treated as a value with a decimal point at the end (1 =

1.000).

(Note 2) Compensation amounts from #10001 and workpiece coordinate system compensation values from

#5201 are handled as data with a decimal point. Consequently, data with a decimal point will be

produced even when data without a decimal point have been defined in the variable numbers.

(Example)

(Note 3) The after a function must be enclosed in the square parentheses [ ].

#i = ;

(1) Definition and substitution of variables

#i = #j Definition, substitution

(2) Addition operation

#i = #j + #k Addition

#i = #j — #k Subtraction

#i = #j OR #k Logical sum (at every bit of 32 bits)

#i = #j XOR #k Exclusive OR (at every bit of 32 bits)

(3) Multiplication operation

#i = #j * #k Multiplication

#i = #j / #k Division

#i = #j MOD #k Remainder

#i = #j AND #k Logical product (at every bit of 32 bits)

(4) Functions

#i = SIN [#k] Sine

#i = COS [#k] Cosine

#i = TAN [#k] Tangent tan uses sin/cos.

#i = ASIN [#k] Arcsine

#i = ATAN [#k] Arctangent (ATAN or ATN may be used)

#i = ACOS [#k] Arccosine

#i = SQRT [#k] Square root (SQRT or SQR may be used)

#i = ABS [#k] Absolute value

#i = BIN [#k] Conversion from BCD to BIN

#i = BCD [#k] Conversion from BIN to BCD

#i = ROUND[#k] Rounding off (ROUND or RND may be used)

#i = FIX [#k] Discard fractions less than 1

#i = FUP [#k] Add for fractions less than 1

#i = LN [#k] Natural logarithm

#i = EXP [#k] Exponent with e (=2.718 …..) as bottom

Operation Commands Common variables after execution

#101 =1000 ; #10001 =#101 ; #102 =#10001 ;

#101 1000.000 #102 1000.000

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

429

Detailed description

Sequence of operations

(1) The sequence of the operations (a) to (c) is performed in the following order; the function, the

multiplication operation and the addition operation.

(2) The part to be given priority in the operation sequence should be enclosed in square parentheses [ ]. Up

to 5 pairs of such parentheses, including those for the functions, may be used.

(a) Function

(b) Multiplication operation

(c) Addition operation

#101=#111+#112*SIN #113

#101=SQRT #111- #112 *SIN #113 +#114 *#115 ; First pair of brackets

Second pair of brackets

Third pair of brackets

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

430

Examples of operation commands

(1) Main program and argument designation

G65 P100 A10 B20. ; #101 = 100.000 #102 = 200.000 ;

#1 10.000 #2 20.000 #101 100.000 #102 200.000

(2) Definition and substitution =

#1 = 1000 #2 = 1000.

#1 1000.000 #2 1000.000

#3 = #101 #4 = #102

#3 100.000 #4 200.000

From common variables

#5 = #10001 (#10001 = -10.) #5 -10.000 From compensation amount

(3) Addition and subtraction + —

#11 = #1 + 1000 #12 = #2 — 50. #13 = #101 + #1 #14 = #10001 — 3. (#10001 = -10.) #15 = #10001 + #102

#11 2000.000 #12 950.000 #13 1100.000 #14 -13.000 #15 190.000

(4) Multiplication and division * /

#21 = 100 * 100 #22 = 100. * 100 #23 = 100 * 100. #24 = 100. * 100. #25 = 100 / 100 #26 = 100. / 100 #27 = 100 / 100. #28 = 100. / 100. #29 = #10001 * #101 (#10001 = -10.) #30 = #10001 / #102

#21 10000.000 #22 10000.000 #23 10000.000 #24 10000.000 #25 1.000 #26 1.000 #27 1.000 #28 1.000 #29 -1000.000 #30 -0.050

(5) Remainder MOD

#19 = 48 #20 = 9 #31 = #19 MOD #20

#19/#20 = 48/9 = 5 with 3 over #31 = 3

(6) Logical sum OR

#3 = 100 #4 = #3 OR 14

#3 = 01100100 (binary) 14 = 00001110 (binary)

#4 = 01101110 = 110

(7) Exclusive OR XOR

#3 = 100 #4 = #3 XOR 14

#3 = 01100100 (binary) 14 = 00001110 (binary)

#4 = 01101010 = 106

(8) Logical product AND

#9 = 100 #10 = #9 AND 15

#9 = 01100100 (binary) 15 = 00001111 (binary)

#10 = 00000100 = 4

(9) Sin SIN

#501 = SIN [60] #502 = SIN [60.] #503 = 1000 * SIN [60] #504 = 1000 * SIN [60.] #505 = 1000. * SIN [60] #506 = 1000. * SIN [60.] (Note) SIN [60] is equivalent to SIN [60.]

#501 #502 #503 #504 #505 #506

0.866 0.866 866.025 866.025 866.025 866.025

(10) Cosine COS

#541 = COS [45] #542 = COS [45.] #543 = 1000 * COS [45] #544 = 1000 * COS [45.] #545 = 1000. * COS [45] #546 = 1000. * COS [45.] (Note) COS [45] is equivalent to COS [45.]

#541 #542 #543 #544 #545 #546

0.707 0.707 707.107 707.107 707.107 707.107

(11) Tangent TAN

#551 = TAN [60] #552 = TAN [60.] #553 = 1000 * TAN [60] #554 = 1000 * TAN [60.] #555 = 1000. * TAN [60] #556 = 1000. * TAN [60.] (Note) TAN [60] is equivalent to TAN [60.]

#551 #552 #553 #554 #555 #556

1.732 1.732 1732.051 1732.051 1732.051 1732.051

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

431

(12) Arcsine ASIN

#531 = ASIN [100.500 / 201.] #532 = ASIN [100.500 / 201] #533 = ASIN [0.500] #534 = ASIN [-0.500]

#531 #532 #533 #534

30.000 30.000 30.000 -30.000

(Note) When #1273/bit 0 is set to 1, #534 will be 330 .

(13) Arctangent ATN or ATAN

#561 = ATAN [173205 / 100000] #562 = ATAN [173205 / 100000.] #563 = ATAN [173.205 / 100] #564 = ATAN [173.205 / 100.] #565 = ATAN [1.73205]

#561 #562 #563 #564 #565

60.000 60.000 60.000 60.000 60.000

(14) Arccosine ACOS

#521 = ACOS [100 / 141.421] #522 = ACOS [100. / 141.421]

#521 #522

45.000 45.000

(15) Square root SQR or SQRT

#571 = SQRT [1000] #572 = SQRT [1000.] #573 = SQRT [10. * 10. + 20. * 20] (Note) In order to increase the accuracy, proceed with the operation inside parentheses as much as possible.

#571 #572 #573

31.623 31.623 22.360

(16) Absolute value ABS

#576 = -1000 #577 = ABS [#576] #3 = 70. #4 = -50. #580 = ABS [#4 — #3]

#576 #577 #580

-1000.000 1000.000 120.000

(17) BIN, BCD

#1 = 100 #11 = BIN [#1] #12 = BCD [#1]

#11 #12

64 256

(18) Rounding off RND or ROUND

#21 = ROUND [14 / 3] #22 = ROUND [14. / 3] #23 = ROUND [14 / 3.] #24 = ROUND [14. / 3.] #25 = ROUND [-14 / 3] #26 = ROUND [-14. / 3] #27 = ROUND [-14 / 3.] #28 = ROUND [-14. / 3.]

#21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28

5 5 5 5 -5 -5 -5 -5

(19) Discarding fractions below decimal point FIX

#21 = FIX [14 / 3] #22 = FIX [14. / 3] #23 = FIX [14 / 3.] #24 = FIX [14. / 3.] #25 = FIX [-14 / 3] #26 = FIX [-14. / 3] #27 = FIX [-14 / 3.] #28 = FIX [-14. / 3.]

#21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28

4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 -4.000 -4.000 -4.000 -4.000

(20) Adding fractions less than 1 FUP

#21 = FUP [14 / 3] #22 = FUP [14. / 3] #23 = FUP [14 / 3.] #24 = FUP [14. / 3.] #25 = FUP [-14 / 3] #26 = FUP [-14. / 3] #27 = FUP [-14 / 3.] #28 = FUP [-14. / 3.]

#21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28

5.000 5.000 5.000 5.000 -5.000 -5.000 -5.000 -5.000

(21) Natural logarithms LN

#10 = LN [5] #102 = LN [0.5] #103 = LN [-5]

#101 #102 Error

1.609 -0.693 «P282»

(22) Exponents EXP

#104 = EXP [2] #105 = EXP [1] #106 = EXP [-2]

#104 #105 #106

7.389 2.718 0.135

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

432

Precautions

(1) Notes on logical relation

EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE conduct the same calculation as addition and subtraction. Pay careful

attention to errors. For example, to determine whether or not #10 and #20 are equal in the following

example, it is not always possible to judge correctly because of the error.

IF [#10 EQ #20]

Therefore when the difference between #10 and #20 falls within the designated error range, both values

should be considered equal.

IF [ABS [#10 — #20] LT 200000]

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

433

13.5.7 Control Commands

Function and purpose

The flow of programs can be controlled by IF-GOTO- and WHILE-DO-END.

Detailed description

Branching

When the condition is satisfied, control branches to «n» and when it is not satisfied, the next block is executed.

IF [conditional expression] can be omitted and, when it is, control branches to «n» unconditionally.

The following types of [conditional expressions] are available.

«n» of «GOTO n» must always be in the same program. If not, program error (P231) will occur. A formula or

variable can be used instead of #i, #j and «n».

In the block with sequence number «n» which will be executed after a «GOTO n» command, the sequence

number «Nn» must always be at the head of the block. Otherwise, program error (P231) will occur.

If «/» is at the head of the block and «Nn» follows, control can be branched to the sequence number.

(Note 1) When searching the sequence number of the branch destination, the search is conducted up to the

end of the program (% code) from the block following IF…………; and if it is not found, it is then

conducted from the top of the program to the block before IF…………;. Therefore, branch searches

in the opposite direction to the program flow will take longer time compared with branch searches in

the forward direction.

(Note 2) EQ and NE should be compared only for integers. For comparison of numeric values with

decimals, GE, GT, LE, and LT should be used.

IF [conditional expression] GOTO n; (n = sequence number in the program)

#i EQ #j = When #i and #j are equal

#i NE #j When #i and #j are not equal

#i GT #j > When #i is greater than #j

#i LT #j < When #i is less than #j

#i GE #j >= When #i is #j or more

#i LE #j <= When #i is #j or less

N100

N10 #22=#20 ; IF #2 EQ1 GOTO100 ; #22=#20 — #3 ;

N100 X#22 ; #1=#1+1 ;

With N10

Branch search

Branch search

To head

Branching to N100 when content of #2 is 1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

434

Repetitions

While the conditional expression is established, the blocks from the following block to ENDm are repeatedly

executed; when it is not established, execution moves to the block following ENDm. DOm may come before

WHILE.

«WHILE [conditional expression] DOm» and «ENDm» must be used as a pair. If «WHILE [conditional

expression]» is omitted, these blocks will be repeatedly ad infinitum. The repeating identification Nos. range

from 1 to 127. (DO1, DO2, DO3, ….. DO127) Up to 27 nesting levels can be used.

WHILE [conditional expression] DOm ; (m =1, 2, 3 ….. 127) : END m ;

(1) Same identification No. can be used any number of times.

(2) Any number may be used as the WHILE-DOm identification No.

(3) Up to 27 nesting levels can be used for WHILE-DOm. «m» is any number from 1 to 127 for the nesting depth.

(Note) For nesting, «m» which has been used once cannot be used.

(4) The number of WHILE-DOm nesting levels cannot exceed 27.

(5) WHILE — DOm must be designated first and ENDm last.

(6) WHILE — DOm and ENDm must correspond on a 1:1 (pairing) basis in a same program.

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END3;

WHILE DO3;

END2;

WHILE DO2;

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END2;

WHILE DO2;

END27;

WHILE DO27;

DO1

DO2

DO27

END1;

WHILE DO1;

END2;

WHILE DO2;

END3;

WHILE DO3;

END28;

WHILE DO28; Not possible

WHILE DO1;

END 1;

Not possible

END1;

WHILE DO1;

WHILE DO1;Not possible

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

435

(Note) As the canned cycles G73 and G83 and the special canned cycle G34 use WHILE, these will be

added multiple times.

(7) Two WHILE — DOm’s must not overlap.

(8) Branching externally out of the WHILE — DOm range, is possible.

(9) No branching into WHILE — DOm, is possible.

(10) Subprograms can be called by G22, G65 or G66 between WHILE — DOm’s.

(11) Calls can be initiated by G65 or G66 between WHILE — DOm’s and commands can be issued again from 1. Up to 27 nesting levels are possible for the main program and subprograms.

(12) A program error will occur in G23 if WHILE and END are not paired in the subprogram (including macro subprogram).

(MP) Main program (SP) Subprogram

END1;

END2;

WHILE DO1;

WHILE DO2;Not possible

WHILE DO1;

END1;

IF GOTOn;

Nn;

END1;

IF GOTOn;

END1;

IF GOTOn;

Nn;

END1;

WHILE DO1;

WHILE DO1;

Nn;

WHILE DO1; Not possible

Not possible

G65 L100;

END1;

WHILE DO1; WHILE DO02;

END2;

G23;M02;

(MP) (SP)

G65 L100;

END1;

WHILE DO1; WHILE DO1;

END1;

G23;M02;

(MP) (SP)(100)

WHILE DO1;

G23;

G22 L100;

M02;

(MP) (SP)

DOn ENDn illegal usage.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

436

13.5.8 External Output Commands ; POPEN, PCLOS, DPRNT

Function and purpose

Besides the standard user macro commands, the following macro instructions are also available as external

output commands. They are designed to output the variable values or characters to external devices. The

data output port can be chosen from RS-232C interface or memory card.

Command format

Command sequence

Detailed description

Open command : POPEN

(1) The command is issued before the series of data output commands.

(2) The DC2 control code and % code are output from the NC system to the external output device.

(3) Once POPEN; is issued, it will remain valid until PCLOS; is issued.

POPEN … Open command

PCLOS … Closed command

DPRNT … Data output command

POPEN For preparing the data outputs

PCLOS For terminating the data outputs

DPRNT For character output and digit-by-digit variable numerical output

… Open command … Data output command … Closed command

POPEN

PCLOS

DPRNT

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

437

Close command : PCLOS

(1) This command is issued when all the data outputs are completed.

(2) The DC4 control code and % code are output from the NC system to the external output device.

(3) This command is used together with the open command and it should not be issued unless the open

mode has been established.

(4) Issue the close command at the end of the program even when the operation is suspended by resetting

or some other operation during data output.

Data output command : DPRNT

(1) The character output and decimal output of the variable values are done with ISO codes.

(2) The commanded character string is output as it is by the ISO code.

Alphanumerics (A to Z, 0 to 9) and special characters (+, -, *, /) can be used.

Note that asterisk (*) is output as a space code.

(3) The required significant digits above and below the decimal point of the variable values are each

commanded within square parentheses. As a result, the commanded number of digits of variable values

are output in ISO code in decimal notation from the high-order digits including the decimal point. In this

case, trailing zeroes are not omitted.

(4) Leading zeroes are omitted.

The omitted leading zero can be replaced by a space by the setting of a parameter.

This can justify the last digit of the data output to the printer.

(5) Linefeed (LF) code will be output to the end of the output data.

And by setting the parameter «#9112 to #9512 DEV0 — 4 CR OUTPUT» to «1», (CR) code will be written in

just before EOB (LF) code.

(Note) A data output command can be issued even in two-part system mode. In this case, however, note

that the output channel is shared by both part systems. So, be careful not to execute data output by

both part systems simultaneously.

Data output port

(1) The output port can be selected by the parameter «#9007 MACRO PRINT PORT».

(2) When the port is a memory card, the file name of the port can be designated by the parameter «#9054

MACRO PRINT FILE».

(3) When the port is a memory card, the port directory is fixed to root directory.

DPRNT [l1#v1 [d1 c1] l2#v2 [d2 c2] …… ] ;

l1 Character string

v1 Variable No.

d1 Significant digits above decimal point c + d <= 8

c1 Significant digits after decimal point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

438

Example of use

(Note) Designate a blank line when opening an output file on an edit screen. If not, it will be regarded that

no information is provided in the head line of the file on the NC edit screen.

#1127 DPRINT (DPRINT alignment)

= 1 (Align the minimum digit and output)

#9007 MACRO PRINT PORT = 9 (Output to a memory card by an external output command)

#9008 MACRO PRINT DEV. = 0 (Device 0 is selected for an external output command)

#9054 MACRO PRINT FILE = DPRNT_OUT (File name to store output data of an external output command)

#9112 DEV0 CR OUTPUT = 1 (Insert the CR code just before the LF code)

#1=12.34;

#2=#0

#100=-123456789.;

#500=-0.123456789;

POPEN;

DPRNT[]; (Note)

DPRNT[VAL-CHECK];

DPRNT[1234567890];

DPRNT[#1[44]];

DPRNT[#2[44]];

DPRNT[#100[80]];

DPRNT[#500[80]];

DPRNT[#100[08]];

DPRNT[#500[08]];

PCLOS;

M30;

%

Blank Linefeed code

Values above the number of significant figures are rounded down

Values below the number of significant figures are rounded off

(CR) (LF)

V A L — C H E C K (CR) (LF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (CR) (LF)

1 2 . 3 4 0 0 (CR) (LF)

0 . 0 0 0 0 (CR) (LF)

— 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (CR) (LF)

— 0 (CR) (LF)

— . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (CR) (LF)

— . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 (CR) (LF)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

439

Precautions

(1) An external output command during restart-searching is ignored.

After using the restart-search type 2 to restart-search between a POPEN command and a PCLOS

command, execute a POPEN command by such as an MDI interruption before restarting the program.

(2) An external output command during graphic check is ignored.

(3) A program error (P460) will occur if an external output command is issued when the output device is

unable to output due to a lack of connection, a low free space etc.

(4) The NC automatically conducts a closing processing when it is reset between a POPEN command and a

PCLOS command. So, execute a POPEN command by such as an MDI interruption before executing the

rest of the machining program.

(5) If a program error occurs between a POPEN command and a PCLOS command, NC will not

automatically conduct a closing processing. So, there is no need to execute a POPEN command by such

as an MDI interruption before executing the rest of the machining program.

(6) If a program error occurs to the output port due to the setting of the memory card, execute an NC reset

and close the output file before demounting the card.

(7) When the output port is a memory card, the output file may be destroyed if the card is dismounted or the

power is turned off without issuing a PCLOS command or NC reset after a POPEN command is issued.

(8) As for M700VW series, output data of an external output command can be output to a memory card only

when the drive name of the card is «E:» or «F:». Drive name «E» is given the priority. A program error

(P460) will occur if the output port executes the external output command of the memory card when the

drive name is neither «E:» nor «F:».

(9) When the data is output to a memory card, the maximum number of files that can be created is

determined by the FAT16 format.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

440

13.5.9 Precautions

Precautions

When the user macro commands are employed, it is possible to use the M, S, T and other NC control

commands together with the arithmetic, decision, branching and other macro commands for preparing the

machining programs. When the former commands are made into executable statements and the latter

commands into macro statements, the macro statement processing should be accomplished as quickly as

possible in order to minimize the machining time, because such processing is not directly related to machine

control.

By setting the parameter «#8101 macro single», the macro statements can be processed concurrently with the

execution of the executable statement.

(During normal machining, set the parameter OFF to process all the macro statements together, and during a

program check, set it ON to execute the macro statements block by block. Setting can be chosen depending

on the purpose. )

Program example

Macro statements are:

(a) Arithmetic commands (block including =)

(b) Control commands (block including GOTO, DO-END, etc.)

(c) Macro call commands (including macro calls based on G codes and cancel commands (G65, G66,

G66.1, G67))

Execution statements refer to statements other than macro statements.

N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0 ; ……(1)

N2 G92 X0 Y0 ; ……(2)

N3 G00 X-100. Y-100. ; ……(3)

N4 #101 = 100. * COS[210.] ; ……(4) (4),(5) Macro statements

N5 #103 = 100. * SIN[210.] ; ……(5)

N6 G01 X#101 Y#103 F800 ; ……(6)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

441

Flow of processing by the Program Example in the previous page

N4, N5 and N6 are processed in parallel with the control of the executable statement of N3. If the N4, N5 and

N6 analysis is in time during N3 control, the machine movement will be continuously controlled.

N4 is processed in parallel with the control of the executable statement of N3. After N3 is finished, N5 and N6

are analyzed, and then N6 is executed. So the machine control is held on standby during the N5 and N6

analysis time.

Program analysis

Block executing

Program analysis

Block executing

(1) (2) (4)(5)(6)(3)

(1) (2) (4)(5)(6)(3)

(1) (2) (3)

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

(4) (5) (6)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

442

13.5.10 Actual Examples of Using User Macros

Program example

The following three examples will be described.

(Example 1) SIN curve

(Example 2) Bolt hole circle

(Example 3) Grid

(Example 1) SIN curve

G65 Ll1 Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 Ff1; a1; Initial value 0 b1; Final value 360 c1; R of R*SIN

f1; Feedrate

(SIN ) Y

X

100.

— 100.

0 90. 270. 360.180.

G65 L9910 A0 B360.C100.F100;

#1=0

#2=360.000

#3=100.000 #9=100.000

WHILE #1LE#2 DO1;

#101=#3*SIN #1 ;

G90 G01 X#1 Y#10 F#9;

#1=#1+10.;

END1; G23;

L9910

To subprogram

Main Program (Subprogram)

Commanding with one block is possbiel when G90G01X#1Y[#3*SIN[#1]] F#9; is issued.

Local variables set by argument

( 1)

(Note 1)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

443

(Example 2) Bolt hole circle

After defining the hole data with fixed cycle (G72 to G89), the macro command is issued as the hole position

command.

— Y

y1

W x1- X

a1; b1; r1; x1; y1;

a1

L9920

0 #101 G90,G91

#102

X #103 Y #104

#111

*COS [#111] + #120

*SIN #111 + #121 #120 #122 #121 #123

#120- #103 #122 #121- #104 #123 #120 #103 #121 #104

#101+1 #101 360 *#101/

+#1 #111

N100 X#122 Y#123

END#101

#102=90

N

Y

N

Y

#101=

#102=

#103= #104= #111=

#120=

#121=

#122= #123=

#122= #123=

#111=

G81 Z- 100.R50.F300L0 G65 L9920 Aa1 Bb1 Rr1 Xx1 Yy1;

L9920

#101=0; #102=#4003; #103=#5001; #104=#5002; #111=#1;

WHILE #101LT#2 DO1;

#120=#24+#18*COS #111 ; #121=#25+#18*SIN #111 ;

#122=#120 #123=#121; IF #102EQ90 GOTO100;

#122=#120- #103; #123=#121- #104;

#103=#120; #104=#121;

N100 X#122 Y#123; #101=#101+1; #111=#1+360.*#101/#2;

END1; G23;

Start angle No. of holes Radius X axis center position Y axis center position

To subprogram

Main program

(Subprogram)

(Note 1) The processing time can be shortened by programming in one block.

Hole position angle

Drilling command

No.of holes counter up

X axis current position update Y axis current position update

X axis incremental value Y axis incremental value

Judgment of G90, G91 mode

X axis absolute value Y axis absolute value

Hole position X coordinates

Hole position Y coordinates

(Note 1)

(Note 1) No. of holes

mode Read in

Read previous coordinates

Start angle

X axis current position Y axis current position Start angle

No. of hole count

G90 or G91(Note 1)

Radius Center coordinates X

Radius Center coordinates Y

(Note 1)

No. of holes

(Note 1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

444

(Example 3) Grid

After defining the hole data with the fixed cycle (G72 to G89), macro call is commanded as a hole position

command.

— Y

— 500.

W- 500.- X

300R

100R

200R

G28 X0 Y0 Z0; T1 M06; G90 G43 Z100.H01; G54 G00 X0 Y0; G81 Z- 100.R3.F100 L0 M03; G65 L9920 X — 500.Y- 500.A0 B8 R100.; G65 L9920 X — 500.Y- 500.A0 B8 R200.; G65 L9920 X — 500.Y- 500.A0 B8 R300.;

To subprogram

To subprogram

To subprogram

— Y

y1

W

x1- X

i1

G81 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1; G65 Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Aa1 Bb1;

x1; y1; i1; j1; a1; b1;

j1

Subprogram is on next page

X axis hole position Y axis hole position X axis interval Y axis interval No. of holes in X direction

No. of holes in Y direction

— Y

W

— X

— X

— Z

G28 X0 Y0 Z0; T1 M06; G90 G43 Z100.H01; G54 G00 X0 Y0; G81 Z- 100.R3.F100 L0 M03; G65 L9930 X0 Y0 I — 100. J- 75. A5B3;

G84 Z- 90. R3. F250 M03; G65 L9930 X0 I — 100. J-75. A5B3;

— 75.

— 75.

— 100.

100. 100.100.

To subprogram

To subprogram

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.5 User Macro

445

#101=#24;

#102=#25;

#103=#4;

#104=#5;

#106=#2;

WHILE #106GT0 DO1;

#105=#1;

WHILE #105GT0 DO2;

G90 X#101 Y#102;

#101=#101+#103;

#105=#105- 1;

END2;

#101=#101- #103;

#102=#102+#104;

#103=- #103;

#106=#106- 1;

END1;

G23;

L9930 L9930

:x 1 #101 :y 1 #102 :i 1 #103 :j 1 #104 :b 1 #106

END

#106>0

#105>0

X#101 Y#102

#101+#103 #101

#105- 1 #105

#101- #103 #101 #102+#104 #102

— #103 #103

#106-1 #106

N Y

1

Y direction drilling completion check

#101=X axis start point #102=Y axis start point #103=X direction interval #104=Y direction interval #106=No. of holes in Y direction

(Subprogram)

(Note 1)

Start point X coordinates

Start point Y coordinates

X axis interval

No. of holes in Y direction

No. of holes in X direction: a #105 No. of holes in X direction set

No. of holes in Y direction check

Positioning, drilling

X coordinates update

No. of holes in X direction 1

X coordinates revision Y coordinates update

X axis drilling direction reversal

No. of holes in Y direction 1

(Note 1)

(Note 1)

Y axis interval

(Note 1) The processing time can be shortened by programming in one block.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

446

13.6 G Command Mirror Image ; G50.1,G51.1,G62

Function and purpose

When cutting a shape that is symmetrical on the left and right, programming time can be shortened by

machining the one side and then using the same program to machine the other side. The mirror image

function is effective for this.

For example, when using a program as shown below to machine the shape on the left side (A), a symmetrical

shape (B) can be machined on the right side by applying mirror image and executing the program.

Command format

Mirror image ON

Mirror image OFF

Mirror image ON

Mirror image OFF

Mirror axis

G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1

x1, y1, z1 Mirror image center coordinates (Mirror image will be applied regarding this position as a center)

G50.1 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2

x2, y2, z2 Mirror image cancel axis (The values of x2, y2, z2 will be ignored.)

G62 X1 Y1 Z1

X1, Y1, Z1 Mirror image applied with the position where the command is issued as a center.

G62 X0 Y0 Z0

X0, Y0, Z0 Set «0» to the axis that mirror image is to be canceled.

Y

X

(A) (B)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.6 G Command Mirror Image ; G50.1,G51.1,G62

447

Detailed description

(1) At G51.1, command the mirror image axis and the coordinate to be a center of mirror image with the

absolute command or incremental command.

(2) At G50.1, command the axis for which mirror image is to be turned OFF.

The values of x2, y2, and z2 will be ignored.

(3) If mirror image is applied on only one axis of the designated plane, the rotation direction and

compensation direction will be reversed for the arc or tool radius compensation and coordinate rotation,

etc.

(4) This function is processed on the local coordinate system, so the center of the mirror image will change

when the counter is preset or when the workpiece coordinates are changed.

(5) Reference point return during mirror image

If the reference point return command (G28, G30) is executed during the mirror image, the mirror image

will be valid during the movement to the intermediate point, but will not be applied on the movement to

the reference point after the intermediate point.

(6) Return from zero point during mirror image

If the return command (G29) from the zero point is commanded during the mirror image, the mirror will be

applied on the intermediate point.

(7) The mirror image will not be applied on the G53 command.

(8) For G62, mirror image ON/OFF will be applied on all the axes commanded in the same block.

The position where G62 is executed is regarded as the center of the mirror image.

(9) For G62, command «0» or «1» following to the axis name basically.

The value other than «0» will be regarded as «1»

In addition, mirror image axis ON/OFF can be commanded together.

(a) Intermediate point when mirror is applied (b) Path on which mirror is applied (c) Mirror center

(d) Intermediate point (e) Programmed path

(a)

(e)

(c)

(d)

(b)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

448

Relation with other functions

(1) Combination with radius compensation

The mirror image (G51.1) will be processed after the radius compensation (G41, G42) is applied, so the

following type of cutting will take place.

(a) Programmed path (b) When only radius compensation is applied

(c) When only mirror image is applied (d) When both mirror image and radius compensation are applied

(e) Mirror center

(a)(b) (d)

(c)

(e)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.6 G Command Mirror Image ; G50.1,G51.1,G62

449

Precautions

If mirror image is not canceled at the mirror center, the absolute value and machine position will deviate as

shown below. (This state will last until an absolute value command (positioning with G90 mode) is issued, or a

reference point return with G28 or G30 is executed.) The mirror center is set with an absolute value, so if the

mirror center is commanded again in this state, the center may be set to an unpredictable position.

Cancel the mirror at the mirror center or position with the absolute value command after canceling.

CAUTION

1. Turn the mirror image ON and OFF at the mirror image center.

(a) Absolute value (position commanded in program) (b) Machine position

(c) When moved with the incremental command after mirror cancel (d) Mirror cancel command

(e) Mirror axis command (f) Mirror center

(a) (b)

(d) (c)

(f)

(e)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

450

13.7 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I

Function and purpose

Chamfering at any angle or corner rounding is performed automatically by adding «,C_» or «,R_» to the end of

the block to be commanded first among those command blocks which shape the corner with lines only.

13.7.1 Corner Chamfering I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,C_

Function and purpose

This chamfers a corner by connecting the both side of the hypothetical corner which would appear as if

chamfering is not performed, by the amount commanded by «,C_».

Command format

Chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Detailed description

(1) The start point of the block following the corner chamfering is the hypothetical corner intersection point.

(2) If there are multiple or duplicate corner chamfering commands in a same block, the last command will be

valid.

(3) When both the corner chamfer and corner rounding commands exist in the same block, the latter

command is valid.

(4) Tool compensation is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering.

(5) When the block following a command with corner chamfering does not contain a linear command, a

corner chamfering/corner rounding II command will be executed.

(6) Program error (P383) will occur when the movement amount in the corner chamfering block is less than

the chamfering amount.

(7) Program error (P384) will occur when the movement amount in the block following the corner chamfering

block is less than the chamfering amount.

(8) Program error (P382) will occur when a movement command is not issued in the block following the

corner chamfering I command.

N100 G01 X__ Y__ ,C__ ; N200 G01 X__ Y__ ;

,C Length up to chamfering starting point or end point from imaginary corner

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.7 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I

451

Program example

(1) G91 G01 X100. ,C10.;

(2) X100. Y100.;

(a) Chamfering start point

(b) Hypothetical corner intersection point

(c) Chamfering end point

X100.0 X100.0

10.0

10.0

X

Y

Y100.0

(1)

(2)

(a) (b)

(c)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

452

13.7.2 Corner Rounding I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,R_

Function and purpose

The hypothetical corner, which would exist if the corner were not to be rounded, is rounded with the arc having

the radius which is commanded by «,R_» only when configured of linear lines.

Command format

Corner rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Detailed description

(1) The start point of the block following the corner rounding is the hypothetical corner intersection point.

(2) When both the corner chamfer and corner rounding commands exist in the same block, the latter

command is valid.

(3) Tool compensation is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.

(4) When the block following a command with corner rounding does not contain a linear command, a corner

chamfering/corner rounding II command will be executed.

(5) Program error (P383) will occur when the movement amount in the corner rounding block is less than the

R value.

(6) Program error (P384) will occur when the movement amount in the block following the corner rounding

block is less than the R value.

(7) Program error (P382) will occur if a movement command is not issued in the block following the corner

rounding.

N100 G01 X__ Y__ ,R__ ; N200 G01 X__ Y__ ;

,R Circular radius of corner rounding

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.7 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I

453

Program example

(1) G91 G01 X100. ,R10.;

(2) X100. Y100.;

(a) Corner rounding start point

(b) Corner rounding end point

(c) Hypothetical corner intersection point

X100.0 X100.0

X

Y

Y100.0

(1)

(2)

R10.0(a)

(b)

(c)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

454

13.7.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion

Function and purpose

Using an E command, the feedrate can be designated for the corner chamfering and corner rounding

section.In this way, the corner section can be cut into a correct shape.

Example

F200.

E100.

F200.

F200.

Y F200.

(G94) G01Y70.,C30. F200.E100.; X-110.;

(G94) G01Y70.,R30. F200.E100.; X-110.;

X

E100.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.7 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I

455

Detailed description

(1) The E command is modal. It is also valid for the feed in the next corner chamfering/corner rounding

section.

Example

(2) E command modal has separate asynchronous feedrate modal and synchronous feedrate modal

functions.

Which one is validated depends on the asynchronous/synchronous mode (G94/G95).

(3) When the E command is 0, or when there has not been an E command up to now, the corner

chamfering/corner rounding section feedrate will be the same as the F command feedrate.

Example

(4) E command modal is not cleared even if the reset button is pressed.

It is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (In the same manner as F commands.)

(5) All E commands except those shown below are at the corner chamfering/corner rounding section

feedrate.

— E commands during thread cutting modal

— E commands during thread cutting cycle modal

(G94) G01Y30.,C10. F100.E50.; X-50.,C10.; Y50.,C10.; X-50.;

F100.

F100.

F100.

E50.

E50.

E50.

F100.

Y

X

F100. F100.

F100.

F100.

F100.

F100.

F100.

F100. F100. F100.

F100.

E50.

E50. E50.

Y

X

(G94) G01Y30.,C10. F100.E50.; X-50.,C10.; Y50.,C10. E0; X-50.;

(G94) G01Y30.,C10. F100.; X-50.,C10.; Y50.,C10. E50; X-50.;

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

456

13.7.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding

Detailed description

(1) Shown below are the operations of manual interruption during corner chamfering or corner rounding.

(2) With a single block during corner chamfering or corner rounding, the tool stops after these operations are

executed.

With an absolute value command and manual absolute switch ON.

N1 G28 XY; N2 G00 X120.Y20. ; N3 G03 X70. Y70.I-50. ,R20. F100 ; N4 G01 X20. Y20. ; :

With an incremental value command and manual absolute switch OFF

N1 G28 XY; N2 G00 X120. Y20. ; N3 G03 X-50. Y50. I-50. ,R20. F100 ; N4 G01 X-50. Y-50.; :

(a) When interrupt is not applied

(b) When interrupt is applied

(c) X-axis interrupt (d) Z-axis interrupt

20.

Y

20.

70.

X

N4 N3

70. 120. (mm)

(d)

(c)

(b)

(a)

20.

Y

20.

70.

X 70. 120.

N4 N3

(mm)

(d)

(c)

(b)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.8 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II

457

13.8 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II

Function and purpose

Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be performed by adding «,C» or «,R» to the end of the block which

is commanded first among the block that forms a corner with continuous arbitrary angle lines or arcs.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

458

13.8.1 Corner Chamfering II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,C_

Function and purpose

The corner is chamfered by commanding «,C» in the 1st block of the two continuous blocks containing an arc.

For an arc, this will be the chord length.

Command format

Corner chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Detailed description

(1) The corner chamfering and corner rounding options are required to use this function. A program error

(P381) will occur if the function is commanded without the option.

(2) The start point of the block following the corner chamfering is the hypothetical corner intersection point.

(3) If there are multiple or duplicate corner chamfering commands in a same block, the last command will be

valid.

(4) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in the same block, the latter

command will be valid.

(5) Tool compensation is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering.

(6) Program error (P385) will occur when positioning or thread cutting is commanded in the corner

chamfering command block or in the next block.

(7) Program error (P382) will occur when the block following corner chamfering contains a G command

other than group 01 or another command.

(8) Program error (P383) will occur when the movement amount in the block, commanding corner

chamfering, is less than the chamfering amount.

(9) Program error (P384) will occur when the movement amount is less than the chamfering amount in the

block following the block commanding corner chamfering.

(10) Even if a diameter is commanded, it will be handled as a radial command value during corner

chamfering.

(11) Program error (P382) will occur when a movement command is not issued in the block following the

corner chamfering II command.

N100 G03 X__ Y__ I__ J__ ,C__ ; N200 G01 X__ Y__ ;

,C Length up to chamfering starting point or end point from hypothetical corner

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.8 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II

459

Program example

(1) Linear — arc

(2) Arc — arc

Absolute value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G90 G00 X100. Y100.; N3 G01 X50.Y150.,C20. F100; N4 G02 X0 Y100. I-50. J0; : Relative value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G91 G00 X100. Y100.; N3 G01 X-50.Y50.,C20. F100; N4 G02 X-50. Y-50. I-50. J0; :

(a) Hypothetical corner intersection point

Absolute value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G91 G00 X140. Y10.; N3 G02 X60.Y50.I0 J100. ,C20. F100; N4 X0 Y30.I-60.J80.; : Relative value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G91 G00 X140. Y10.; N3 G02 X-80.Y40. R100. ,C20. F100; N4 X-60. Y-20. I-60. J80.; :

(a) Hypothetical corner intersection point

Y

150.

100.

X 100.50.

N4

C20. C20.

N3

(a)

(mm)

Y

130.

110.

50.

30.

10. X

140.60.

N4 C20.

C20.

N3

(a)

(mm)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

460

13.8.2 Corner Rounding II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,R_

Function and purpose

The corner is rounded by commanding «,R_» in the 1st block of the two continuous blocks containing an arc.

Command format

Corner rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Detailed description

(1) The corner chamfering and corner rounding options are required to use this function. Program error

(P381) will occur if the function is commanded without the option.

(2) The start point of the block following the corner rounding is the hypothetical corner intersection point.

(3) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in a same block, the latter command

will be valid.

(4) Tool compensation is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.

(5) Program error (P385) will occur when positioning or thread cutting is commanded in the corner rounding

command block or in the next block.

(6) Program error (P382) will occur when the block following corner rounding contains a G command other

than group 01 or another command.

(7) Program error (P383) will occur when the movement amount in the corner rounding block is less than the

R value.

(8) Program error (P384) will occur when the movement amount is less than the R value in the block

following the corner rounding.

(9) Even if a diameter is commanded, it will be handled as a radial command value during corner rounding.

(10) A program error (P382) will occur if a movement command is not issued in the block following corner

rounding.

N100 G03 X__ Y__ I__ J__ ,R__ ; N200 G01 X__ Y__ ;

,R Arc radius of corner rounding

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.8 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II

461

Program example

(1) Linear — arc

(2) Arc — arc

Absolute value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G90 G00 X100. Y30.; N3 G01 X50.Y80.,R10. F100; N4 G02 X0 Y30. I-50.J0; : Relative value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G91 G00 X100. Y30.; N3 G01 X-50.Y50.,R10. F100; N4 G02 X-50. Y-50. I-50.J0; :

(a) Hypothetical corner intersection point

Absolute value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G90 G00 X100. Y30.; N3 G02 X50.Y80. R50.,R10.F100; N4 X0 Y30. R50.; : Relative value command N1 G28 XY; N2 G91 G00 X100. Y30.; N3 G02 X-50.Y50. I0 J50.,R10.F100; N4 X-50. Y-50. I-50. J0; :

(a) Hypothetical corner intersection point

Y

80.

30.

X 100.50.

N4 N3

(a)

(mm)

R10.

Y

80.

30.

X 100.50.

N4 N3

(a)

(mm)

R10.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

462

13.8.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion

For details, refer to «Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I: Corner Chamfering Expansion / Corner

Rounding Expansion».

13.8.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding

For details, refer to «Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I: Interrupt during Corner Chamfering Interrupt

during / Corner Rounding».

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.9 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Y_ A_/,A_

463

13.9 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Y_ A_/,A_

Function and purpose

The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by commanding the linear angle and one of the end

point coordinate axes.

Command format

This designates the angle and the X or Y axis coordinates.

Select the command plane with G17 to G19.

Detailed description

(1) As seen from the + direction of the horizontal axis of the selected plane, the counterclockwise (CCW)

direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW) -.

(2) Either of the axes on the selected plane is commanded for the end point.

(3) The angle is ignored when the angle and the coordinates of both axes are commanded.

(4) When only the angle has been commanded, this is treated as a geometric command.

(5) The angle of either the start point (a1) or end point (a2) may be used.

(6) This function is valid only for the G01 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or positioning

commands.

(7) The range of slope «a» is between -360.000 and 360.000.

When a value outside this range is commanded, it will be divided by 360 (degrees) and the remainder will

be commanded.

(Example) If 400 is commanded, 40 (remainder of 400/360) will become the command angle.

(8) If an address A is used for the axis name or the 2nd miscellaneous function, use «,A» as the angle.

(9) If «A» and «,A» are commanded in a same block, «,A» will be interpreted as the angle.

(Note) A program error (P33) will occur if this function is commanded during the high-speed machining

mode or high-speed high-accuracy mode.

N1 G01 Xx1(Yy1) Aa1; N2 G01 Xx2(Yy2) A-a2; (A-a2 can also be set as Aa 3. )

N1 G01 Xx1(Yy1) ,Aa1; N2 G01 Xx2(Yy2) ,A-a2;

Y

y2

y1 ( x1,y1)

N1

X

N2

a1

a2

a3

( x2,y2)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

464

13.10 Geometric

13.10.1 Geometric I ; G01 A_

Function and purpose

When it is difficult to calculate the intersection point of two straight lines in a continuous linear interpolation

command, the end point of the first straight line will be automatically calculated inside the CNC and the

movement command will be controlled, provided that the slope of the first straight line as well as the end point

coordinates and slope of the second straight line are commanded.

(Note) If the parameter (#1082 Geomet) is set to 0, geometric I will not function.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Program error (P396) will occur when the geometric command is not on the selected plane.

(2) As seen from the + direction of the horizontal axis of the selected plane, the counterclockwise (CCW)

direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW) -.

(3) The range of slope «a» is -360.000 a 360.000.

When a value outside this range is commanded, it will be divided by 360 (degrees) and the remainder will

be commanded.

(Example) If 400. is commanded, 40(remainder of 400/360) will become the command angle.

(4) The slope of the line can be commanded on either the start or end point side. Whether the commanded

slope is on the start or end point side is identified automatically inside the NC unit.

(5) The end point coordinates of the second block should be commanded with absolute values. If

incremental values are used, program error (P393) will occur.

(6) The feedrate can be commanded for each block.

(7) When the angle where the two straight lines intersect is less than 1, program error (P392) will occur.

(8) Program error (P396) will occur when the plane is changed in the 1st block and 2nd block.

(9) This function is ignored when address A is used for the axis name or as the 2nd miscellaneous function.

(10) Single block stop is possible at the end point of the 1st block.

(11) Program error (P394) will occur when the 1st and 2nd blocks do not contain the G01 or G33 command.

N1 G01 Aa1 (A-a2) Ff1; N2 Xx2 Yy2 A-a4 (A-a3) Ff2;

Aa1, A-a2, A-a3, Aa4 Angle

Ff1, Ff2 Feedrate

Xx2, Yy2 Next block end point coordinates

(C) Current position

a1

Y

X N1 N2a2

a3

a4

(x2,y2)

?

(C)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.10 Geometric

465

Relation with other functions

(1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded after the angle command in the 1st block.

(2) The geometric command I can be issued after the corner chamfering or corner rounding command.

(3) The geometric command I can be issued after the linear angle command.

(Example 1) N1 Aa1 ,Cc1 ; N2 Xx2 Yy2 Aa2 ;

(Example 2) N1 Aa1 ,Rr1 ; N2 Xx2 Yy2 Aa2 ;

(Example 3) N1 Xx2 Yy2 ,Cc1 ; N2 Aa1 ; N3 Xx3 Yy3 Aa2 ;

(Example 4) N1 Xx2 Aa1 ; N2 Aa2 ; N3 Xx3 Yy3 Aa3 ;

?

N2

N1

(x2,y2)

a2

a1

c1

c1

(x1,y1)

N2

N1

(x2,y2)

a1

a2

r1

?

(x1,y1)

N2

N1(x2,y2)

(x3,y3) a2

a1

c1

c1

(x1,y1)

N3

?

N2

N1(x2,y2)

(x3,y3) a3

a2

(x1,y1)

N3

a1

?

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

466

13.10.2 Geometric IB

Function and purpose

With the geometric IB function, the contact and intersection are calculated by commanding a arc center point

or linear angle in the movement commands of two continuous blocks (only blocks with arc commands),

instead of commanding the first block end point.

(Note) If the parameter (#1082 Geomet) is not set to 2, geometric IB will not function.

Two-arc contact

Linear — arc (arc — linear) intersection

Linear — arc (arc — linear) contact

N2

N1

r2

r1 (??)

Y

X

N2

N2 N1

N1

(??)

(??) Y

X

r1

r1

N2

N2

N1 N1

r1 r1

(??)

Y

X

(??)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.10 Geometric

467

13.10.2.1 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact) ; G02/G03 P_Q_ /R_

Function and purpose

When the contact of two continuous contacting arcs is not indicated in the drawing, it can be automatically

calculated by commanding the 1st circular center coordinate value or radius, and the 2nd arc end point

absolute value and center coordinate value or radius.

Command format

* I and J (X and Y axes arc center coordinate incremental value) commands can be issued instead of P and Q.

1st block arc : Incremental amount from the start point to the center

2nd block arc : Incremental amount from the end point to the center

N1 G02(G03) Pp1 Qq1 Ff1; N2 G03(G02) Xx2 Yy2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2;

N1 G02(G03) Pp1 Qq1 Ff1; N2 G03(G02) Xx2 Yy2 Rr2 Ff2;

N1 G02(G03) Rr1 Ff1; N2 G03(G02) Xx2 Yy2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2;

P,Q X and Y axes circular center coordinate absolute value (diameter/radius value command) The center address for the 3rd axis is commanded with A.

R Arc radius (when a (-) sign is attached, the arc is judged to be 180 or more)

r2

r1

(x2,y2)

Y

X

(p2,q2)

(p1,q1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

468

Detailed description

(1) Program error (P393) will occur before the 1st block if the 2nd block is not a coordinate absolute value

command.

(2) Program error (P398) will occur before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification.

(3) Program error (P395) will occur before the 1st block if there is no R (here, the 1st block is designated

with P, Q (I, J)) or P, Q (I, J) designation in the 2nd block.

(4) Program error (P396) will occur before the 1st block if another plane selection command (G17 to G19) is

issued in the 2nd block.

(5) Program error (P397) will occur before the 1st block if two arcs that do not contact are commanded.

(6) The contact calculation accuracy is 1m (fractions rounded up).

(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.

(8) When I or J is omitted, the values are regarded as I0 and J0. P and Q cannot be omitted.

(9) The error range in which the contact is obtained is set in parameter «#1084 RadErr».

(10) For an arc block perfect circle command (arc block start point = arc block end point), the R designation

arc command finishes immediately, and there is no operation. Thus, use a PQ (IJ) designation arc

command.

(11) G codes of the G modal group 1 in the 1st/2nd block can be omitted.

(12) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for arc center coordinates

or arc radius.

(13) When the 2nd block arc inscribes the 1st block arc and the 2nd block is an R designation arc, the R+ sign

becomes the inward turning arc command, and the R- sign becomes the outward turning arc command.

Tool path

«Arc error»

R-

R+

N2

N1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.10 Geometric

469

13.10.2.2 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03

P_Q_H_

Function and purpose

When the contact point of a shape in which a line and arc contact is not indicated in the drawing, it can be

automatically calculated by commanding the following program.

Command format

* I and J (X and Y axes arc center coordinate incremental value) commands can be issued instead of P and Q.

1st block arc : Incremental amount from the start point to the center

2nd block arc : Incremental amount from the end point to the center

N1 G01 Aa1(A-a2) Ff1 ; N2 G02(G03) Xx2 Yy2 Pp2 Qq2 Hh2 Ff2 ;

N1 G02(G03) Pp1 Qq1 Hh1 (,Hh1) Ff1 ; N2 G1 Xx2 Yy2 Aa3 (A-a4) Ff2 ;

A Linear angle (-360.000 to 360.000)

P,Q X and Y axes circular center coordinate absolute value (diameter/radius value command) The center address for the 3rd axis is commanded with A.

H (,H) Selection of linear — arc intersection 0: Intersection of the shorter line 1: Intersection of the longer line

H=1 H=1

H=0

N2 N1

H=0

N1 a1

N2 a3

— a4 — a2

(??)

(??)

(??) (??) (p2,q2)

(x2,y2) (p1,q1)

(x2,y2) Y

X

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

470

Detailed description

(1) When the 2nd miscellaneous function address is A, the 2nd miscellaneous function is validated and this

function is invalidated.

(2) Program error (P393) will occur before the 1st block if the 2nd block is not a coordinate absolute value

command.

(3) Program error (P398) will occur before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification.

(4) In case of the 2nd block arc, a program error (P395) will occur before the 1st block if there is no P, Q (I,

J) designation. A program error (P395) will also occur if there is no A designation for the line.

(5) Program error (P396) will occur before the 1st block if another plane selection command (G17 to G19) is

issued in the 2nd block.

(6) Program error (P397) will occur before the 1st block if a straight line and arc that do not contact or

intersect are commanded.

(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.

(8) When I or J is omitted, the values are regarded as I0 and J0. P and Q cannot be omitted.

(9) When H is omitted, the value is regarded as H0.

(10) The linear — arc contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P, Q (I, J).

(11) The error range in which the intersect is obtained is set in parameter «#1084 RadErr».

(12) As seen from the + direction of the horizontal axis of the selected plane, the counterclockwise (CCW)

direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW) -.

(13) The slope of the line can be commanded on either the start or end point side. Whether designated slope

is the starting point or the end point will be automatically identified.

(14) When the distance to the intersection from the line and arc is same (as in the figure below), the control by

address H (short/long distance selection) is invalidated. In this case, the judgment is carried out based

on the angle of the line.

(15) The intersect calculation accuracy is 1m (fractions rounded up).

(16) In linear — arc intersections, the arc command can only be PQ (IJ) command. When the arc block start

point and arc block end point are the same point, the arc is a perfect circle.

(17) G codes of the G modal group in the 1st/2nd block can be omitted.

(18) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for angles, arc center

coordinates or intersection selections.

(19) When geometric IB is commanded, two blocks are pre-read.

Tool path

Arc error

N2 G2 Xx2 Yy2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ; N1 G1 A a1 Ff1;

N1 G1 A a2 Ff1; N2 G2 Xx2 Yy2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ;

(p2,q2)

-a2

a1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.10 Geometric

471

Relation with other functions

Command Tool path

Geometric IB + corner chamfering N1 G02 P_ Q_ H_ ; N2 G01 X_ Y_ A_ ,C_ ; G01 X_ Y_ ;

N2

N1 X

Y

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

472

13.10.2.3 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03

R_H_

Function and purpose

When the intersection of a shape in which a line and arc intersect is not indicated in the drawing, it can be

automatically calculated by commanding the following program.

Command format (For G18 plane)

N1 G01 Aa1(A-a2) Ff1; N2 G03(G02) Xx2 Yy2 Rr2 Ff2;

N1 G03(G02) Rr1 Ff1; N2 G01 Xx2 Yy2 Aa3(A-a4) Ff2;

A Linear angle (-360.000 to 360.000)

R Arc radius

Y

X

N1

(x2,y2)

(??) N1N2

N2

(x2,y2)

(??)

a3

— a4

— a2 r2 r1

a1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.10 Geometric

473

Detailed description

(1) When the 2nd miscellaneous function address is A, the 2nd miscellaneous function is validated and this

function is invalidated.

(2) Program error (P393) will occur before the 1st block if the 2nd block is not a coordinate absolute value

command.

(3) Program error (P398) will occur before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification.

(4) Program error (P396) will occur before the 1st block if another plane selection command (G17 to G19) is

issued in the 2nd block.

(5) A program error (P397) will occur before the 1st block if a straight line and arc that do not contact are

commanded.

(6) In case of the 2nd block arc, a program error (P395) will occur before the 1st block if there is no R

designation. A program error (P395) will also occur if there is no A designation for the line.

(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.

(8) The linear — arc contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P, Q (I, J).

(9) The error range in which the contact is obtained is set in parameter «#1084 RadErr».

(10) The line slope is the angle to the positive (+) direction of its horizontal axis. Counterclockwise (CCW) is

positive (+). Clockwise (CW) is negative (-).

(11) The slope of the line can be commanded on either the start or end point side. Whether the commanded

slope is on the start or end point side is identified automatically inside the NC unit.

(12) The intersect calculation accuracy is 1m (fractions rounded up).

(13) In linear — arc contact, the arc command can only be an R command. Thus, when the arc block start point

= arc block end point, the arc command finishes immediately, and there will be no operation.(Perfect

circle command is impossible. )

(14) G codes of the G modal group 1 in the 1st block can be omitted.

(15) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for angles or arc radius.

(16) When geometric IB is commanded, two blocks are pre-read.

Tool path

Arc error

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

474

Relation with other functions

Command Tool path

Geometric IB + corner chamfering N1 G03 R_ ; N2 G01 X_ Y_ A_ ,C_ ; G01 X_ Y_ ;

Geometric IB + corner rounding II N1 G03 R_ ; N2 G01 X_ Y_ A_ ,R_ ; G01 X_ Y_ ;

X

Y

N1

N2

X

Y

N1

N2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.11 Circular Cutting ; G12,G13

475

13.11 Circular Cutting ; G12,G13

Function and purpose

Circle cutting starts the tool from the center of the circle, and cuts the inner circumference of the circle. The

tool continues cutting while drawing a circle and returns to the center position.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The sign + for the offset amount indicates reduction, and — indicates enlargement.

(2) The circle cutting is executed on the plane G17, G18 or G19 currently selected.

For G12 (tool center path) 0->1->2->3->4->5->6->7->0

For G13 (tool center path) 0->7->6->5->4->3->2->1->0

G12 I__ D__ F__ ; … Circular cutting Clockwise (CW)

G13 I__ D__ F__ ; … Circular cutting Counterclockwise (CCW)

I Radius of circle (incremental value), the sign is ignored

D Offset No. (The offset No. and offset data are not displayed on the setting and display unit.)

F Feedrate

Compensation amount sign +

Compensation amount sign —

(a) Circle radius (b) d1 offset amount +

(c) d1 offset amount —

5

2

1

7

64

3

i 1

X

Y

0

(a)

(c)

(b)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

476

Program example

(Example 1) G12 I50.000 D01 F100 ;

When compensation amount is +10.000mm

Precautions

(1) If the offset No. «D» is not issued or if the offset No. is illegal, the program error (P170) will occur.

(2) If [Radius (I) — offset amount] is 0 or negative, the program error (P233) will occur.

(3) If G12 or G13 is commanded during radius compensation (G41, G42), the radius compensation will be

validated on the path after compensated with the D, commanded with G12 or G13.

(4) If an address not included in the format is commanded in the same block as G12 and G13, the program

error (P32) will occur.

But when the parameter «#11034» is set to «1», it operates as follows;

(a)Program error will not occur except for an «H» command.

(b)Only «D»,»F»,»I» and «M»,»S»,»T»,»B» will be valid.

Tool

Compensation amount

Radius 50.000

10.000

X

Y

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.12 Parameter Input by Program ; G10 L70, G11.1

477

13.12 Parameter Input by Program ; G10 L70, G11.1

Function and purpose

The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs.

The function has three command formats.

G10 L70 … For commanding data with decimal point, and character string data.

The data’s command range conforms to the parameter setting range described in Setup

Manual.

G10 L100 … For setting/changing the tool shape for 3D solid program check.

Command format

(Note 1) The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above.

When an address is commanded two or more times, the last command will be valid.

(Note 2) The part system No. is set in the following manner. «1» for the 1st part system, «2» for 2nd part

system, and so forth.

If the address S is omitted, the part system of the executing program will be applied.

As for the parameters common to part systems, the command of part system No. will be ignored.

(Note 3) The axis No. is set in the following manner. «1» for 1st axis, «2» for 2nd axis, and so forth.

If the address A is omitted, the 1st axis will be applied.

As for the parameters common to axes, the command of axis No. will be ignored.

(Note 4) Address H is commanded with the combination of setting data (0 or 1) and the bit designation (0

to 7).

(Note 5) Only the decimal number can be commanded with the address D.

The value that is smaller than the input setting increment (#1003 iunit) will be round off to the

nearest increment.

(Note 6) The character string must be put in angled brackets «<» and «>».

If these brackets are not provided, the program error (P33) will occur.

Up to 63 characters can be set.

(Note 7) Command G10 L70, G11.1 in independent blocks. A program error (P33, P421) will occur if not

commanded in independent blocks.

(Note 8) The following data cannot be changed with the G10 L70 command.

Tool compensation data, workpierce coordinate data, PLC switch, and PLC axis parameter.

(Note 9) The settings of the parameters with (PR) in the parameter list will be enabled after the power is

turned OFF and ON. Refer to the parameter list in your manual.

G10 L70 ;…Data setting start command P__ S__ A__ H __ ; ………. Bit parameter P__ S__ A__ D__ ; …………… Numerical value parameter P__ S__ A__ ; …… Character string parameter …

P Parameter No.

S Part system No.

A Axis No.

H Data

D Data

character string Data

G11.1 ; … Data setting end command

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

478

(Note 1) Line No. corresponds with a line No.in the tool shape set area (tool shape set screen).

(Note 2) The setting of #8117 OFS Diam DESIGN determines tool diameter or tool radius.

(Note 3) The available integer range can be changed by the parameter «#11050 T-ofs digit type».

(Note 4) For details of the data, refer to the explanation of M700V/M70V Series Instruction Manual (IB-

1500922) «Program Check (3D)».

(Note 5) Omitted addresses cannot be set or changed.

(Note 6) When address T is set to 0, the designated line is deleted.

(Note 7) In the following cases, Program Errors (P421) occurs and the parameter in the block is not

changed.

When a block contains an address whose data are out of range

When there is an illegal address

When P or T is omitted

(Note 8) Command G10L100, G11.1 in independent blocks. The program error Program Errors (P421) will

occur if not commanded in independent blocks.

(Note 9) The parameter #1078 Decimal point type 2 is enabled.

(Note 10) The parameter #8044 Unit*10 is disabled.

(Note 11) For M70V Series, the tool shape data will be rewritten during graphic check.

(Note 12) For M700VW Series, this change is reflected on the graphic check drawing. The tool shape data is

not rewritten.

(Note 13) For M700VS Series, graphic check operation varies depending on the display unit type:

For the 10.4-type this change is reflected on the graphic check drawing alone. The tool shape data

is not rewritten.

For the 15-type the tool shape data is rewritten.

G10 L100 ;…Data setting start command P__ T__ K__ D__ H__ I__ J__ C__ ; …

P Line No. of the tool set area 1 to 80 (Required to command) (Note 1)

T Tool No. 0 to 99999999 (Required to command)

K

Command the tool type using a numerical value. 0: Default tool (3: Drill is set) 1: Ball end mill 2: Flat end mill 3: Drill 4: Bull nose end mill 5: Chamfer 6: Tap 7: Face mill

D Tool diameter/radius (Decimal point input available) (Note 2)(Note 3)

H Tool length (Decimal point input available) (Note 3)

I Tool shape data 1 (Decimal point input available)

J Tool shape data 2 (Decimal point input available)

C

Command the tool color using a numerical value. 0: Default color (2: Red is set) 1: Grey 2: Red 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Green 6: Light blue 7: Purple 8: Pink

G11.1 ; … Data setting mode cancel

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.12 Parameter Input by Program ; G10 L70, G11.1

479

Program example

(1) When G40 L70 command

(2) When G10 L100 command

G10 L70;

P6401 H71 ; Sets «1» to «#6401 bit7».

P8204 S1 A2 D1.234 ; Sets «1.234» to «#8204 of the 1st part system 2nd axis».

P8621 ; Sets «X» to «#8621».

G11.1 ;

G10 L100;

P1 T1 K3 D5. H20. I0 J0 C2 ; Set the data of Line 1

P2 T10 D10. ; Set 10. for the tool diameter/radius of Line 2

P8 T0 ; Clear the data of Line 8

G11.1 ;

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

480

13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF

Function and purpose

A user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input from the machine to interrupt the program being currently executed

and instead call another program and execute it. This is called the user macro interrupt function.

Use of this function allows the program to operate flexibly enough to meet varying conditions.

Command format

User macro interruption enable

User macro interruption disable

Detailed description

The user macro interrupt function is enabled and disabled by the ION and IOF commands programmed to

make the user macro interrupt signal (UIT) valid or invalid. That is, if an interrupt signal (UIT) is input from the

machine side in a user macro interrupt enable period from when ION is issued to when IOF is issued or the

NC is reset, a user macro interrupt is caused to execute the program specified following to IOF instead of the

one being executed currently.

Another interrupt signal (UIT) is ignored while one user macro interrupt is being in service. It is also ignored in

a user macro interrupt disable state such as after an IOF command is issued or the system is reset.

ION and IOF are processed internally as user macro interrupt control M codes.

ION P__ H__ ;

ION H__ ;

P Interrupt program No.

File name A file name can be specified instead of a program No. In this case, enclose the file name with brackets <>. (The file name can have up to 32 characters including the extension.)

H Interrupt sequence No.

IOF ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF

481

Interrupt enable conditions

A user macro interruption is enabled only during execution of a program.

The requirements for the user macro interrupt are as follows:

(1) An automatic operation mode or MDI has been selected.

(2) The system is running in automatic mode.

(3) No user macro interruption is being processed.

(Note 1) A macro interruption is disabled in manual operation mode (JOG, STEP, HANDLE, etc.)

Outline of operation

(1) When a user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input after an ION a1 ; command is issued by the current

program, interrupt program La1 is executed. When an G23; command is issued by the interrupt program,

control returns to the main program.

(2) If G23 Hh1 ; is specified, the blocks from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one are

searched for the block with sequence number Nh1;. Control thus returns to the block with sequence

number Nh1 that is found first in the above search.

ION a1;

Nh1 ;

IOF ;

Nh1 ;

La1 ;

G23(Hh1) ;

M30 ;

(If Hh1 is specified)

User macro interrupt signal (UIT)

Current program

Interrupt program

Interrupt signal (UIT) not acceptable within a user macro program

«User macro interruption» signal is acceptable.

«User macro interruption» signal is not acceptable.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

482

Interrupt type

Interrupt types 1 and 2 can be selected by the parameter «#1113 INT_2».

[Type 1]

(1) When an interrupt signal (UIT) is input, the system immediately stops moving the tool and interrupts

dwell, then permits the interrupt program to run.

(2) If the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the commands in

the interrupted block are lost. After the interrupt program completes, the main program resumes

operation from the block next to the interrupted one.

(3) If the interrupted program contains no move and miscellaneous (MSTB) commands, it resumes

operation, after completion of the interrupt program, from the point in the block where the interrupt was

caused.

If an interrupt signal (UIT) is input during execution of a miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the NC

system waits for a completion signal (FIN). The system thus executes a move or miscellaneous function

command (MSTB) in the interrupt program only after input of FIN.

[Type 2]

(1) When an interrupt signal (UIT) is input, the interrupt program will be executed without interrupting

execution of the current block in parallel with the executing block.

(2) If the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the commands in

the interrupted block are completed, then, these commands will be executed.

(3) If the interrupt program contains no move and miscellaneous function (MSTB) commands, the interrupt

program is executed without interrupting execution of the current block.

However, if the interrupt program has not ended even after the execution of the original block is completed,

the system may stop machining temporarily.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF

483

block

block block

block block block

block block

block block

block block block

block

block

block

block

block

block

User macro interruption signal

Main program

Interrupt program

Executing

Interrupt program

If the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function command, the reset of block (2) is lost.

If the interrupted program contains no move and miscellaneous commands, it resumes operation from where it left in block (2), that is, all the reset commands.

[Type 1]

Main program

The move or miscellaneous command in the interrupt program is executed after completion of the current block.

If the interrupted program contains no move and miscellaneous commands, the interrupted program is kept executed in parallel to execution of the current program.

[Type 2] User macro interruption signal

Interrupt program

Interrupt program

User macro interruption signal

User macro interruption signal

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

484

Calling method

User macro interruption is classified into the following two types depending on the way an interrupt program is

called. These two types of interrupt are selected by parameter «#8155 Sub-pro interrupt».

Both types of interrupt are added to the calculation of the nest level. The subprograms and user macros

called in the interrupt program are also added to the calculation of the nest level.

Acceptance of user macro interruption signal (UIT)

A user macro interruption signal (UIT) is accepted in the following two modes: These two modes are selected

by a parameter «#1112 S_TRG».

Returning from user macro interruption

G23 (H__) ;

An G23 command is issued in the interrupt program to return to the main program.

Address H is used to specify the sequence number of the return destination in the main program.

The blocks from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one in the main program are first searched for

the block with designated sequence No. If it is not found, all the blocks before the interrupted one are then

searched. Control thus returns to the block with sequence No. that is found first in the above search.

(This is equivalent to G23H__ used after G22 calling.)

Subprogram type interrupt

The user macro interruption program is called as a subprogram. As with calling by G22, the local variable level remains unchanged before and after an interrupt.

Macro type interruption The user macro interpretation program is called as a user macro. As with calling by G65, the local variable level changes before and after an interrupt. No arguments in the main program can be passed to the interrupt program.

Status trigger mode

The user macro interruption signal (UIT) is accepted as valid when it is ON. If the interrupt signal (UIT) is ON when the user macro interrupt function is enabled by ION, the interrupt program is activated. By keeping the interrupt signal (UIT) ON, the interrupt program can be executed repeatedly.

Edge trigger mode The user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is accepted as valid at its rising edge, that is, at the instance it turns ON. This mode is useful to execute an interrupt program once.

ON

OFF

(Status trigger mode)

User macro interruption

(Edge trigger mode)

User macro interruption signal (UIT)

User macro interruption signal (UIT)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF

485

Modal information affected by user macro interruption

If modal information is changed by the interrupt program, it is handled as follows after control returns from the

interrupt program to the main program.

Returning with G23;

The change of modal information by the interrupt program is invalidated and the original modal information is restored. With interrupt type 1, however, if the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the original modal information is not restored.

Returning with G23Hh1 ; The original modal information is updated by the change in the interrupt program even after returning to the main program. This is the same as in returning with G23Hh1; from a program called by G22, etc.

ION a1 ; La1 ;

G23(Hh1) ;

Nh1 ;

Modal modified by interrupt program remains effective.

User macro interruption signal (UIT)

Interrupt program

(Modal change)

Modal before interrupt is restored.

Main program being executed

(With Hh1 specified)

Modal information affected by user macro interruption

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

486

Modal information variables (#4401 to #4520)

Modal information when control passes to the user macro interruption program can be known by reading

system variables #4401 to #4520.

The unit specified with a command applies.

The above system variables are available only in the user macro interrupt program.

If they are used in other programs, program error (P241) will occur.

(Note 1) The programs are registered as files. When the program No. (file name) is read with #4515, the

character string will be converted to a value.

(Example 1)

The file name «123» is the character string 0x31, 0x32, 0x33, so the value will be (0x31-0x30)*100 +

(0x32-0x30)*10 + (0x33-0x30) = 123.0.

Note that if the file name contains characters other than numbers, it will be «blank».

(Example 2)

If the file name is «123ABC», it contains characters other than numbers, so the result will be «blank».

System variable Modal information

#4401 : #4421

G code (group01) : G code (group21)

Some groups are not used.

#4507 D code

#4509 F code

#4511 H code

#4513 M code

#4514 Sequence No.

#4515 Program No. (Note 1)

#4519 S code

#4520 T code

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.13 Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF

487

Parameters

(1) Subprogram call validity «#8155 Sub-pro interrupt»

1: Subprogram type user macro interruption

0: Macro type user macro interruption

(2) Status trigger mode validity «#1112 S_TRG»

1: Status trigger mode

0: Edge trigger mode

(3) Interrupt type 2 validity «#1113 INT_2»

1: The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed after completion of execution of the

current block. (Type 2)

0: The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed before completion of execution of

the current block. (Type 1)

(4) Validity of alternate M code for user macro interruption control «#1109 subs_M»

1: Valid

0: Invalid

Precautions

(1) If the user macro interruption program uses system variables #5001 and after (position information) to

read coordinates, the coordinates pre-read in the buffer are used.

(2) If an interrupt is caused during execution of the tool radius compensation, a sequence No. (G23H__;)

must be specified with a command to return from the user macro interrupt program. If no sequence No.

is specified, control cannot return to the main program normally.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

488

13.14 Tool Change Position Return ; G30.1 — G30.6

Function and purpose

By specifying the tool change position in a parameter «#8206 tool change» and also specifying a tool change

position return command in a machining program, the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position.

The axes that are going to return to the tool change position and the order in which the axes begin to return

can be changed by commands.

Command format

Detailed description

Commands and return order are given below.

(Note 1) An arrow ( ->) indicates the order of axes that begin to return. A hyphen ( — ) indicates that the axes

begin to return simultaneously. (Example: «Z axis -> X axis — Y axis» indicates that the Z axis returns

to the tool change position, then the X axis and Y axis do at the same time.)

(1) The tool change position return on/off for the additional axis can be set with parameter «#1092 Tchg_A»

for the additional axis.

For the order for returning to the tool change position, the axes return after the standard axis completes

the return to the tool change position (refer to above table).

The additional axis alone cannot return to the tool change position.

(2) If the axis address is commanded in the same block as the tool change position return command, a

program error (P33) will occur.

G30.n ; … Tool change position return

n = 1 to 6: Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which they return.

Command Return order

G30.1 Z axis -> X axis — Y axis (-> additional axis)

G30.2 Z axis -> X axis -> Y axis (-> additional axis)

G30.3 Z axis -> Y axis -> X axis (-> additional axis)

G30.4 X axis -> Y axis — Z axis (-> additional axis)

G30.5 Y axis -> X axis — Z axis (-> additional axis)

G30.6 X axis — Y axis — Z axis (-> additional axis)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.14 Tool Change Position Return ; G30.1 — G30.6

489

Operation example

The figure below shows an example of how the tool operates during the tool change position return command.

(Only operations of X and Y axes in G30.1 to G30.3 are figured.)

(1) G30.1 command: The Z axis returns to the tool changing position, then the X and Y axes simultaneously

do the same thing. (If tool changing position return is on for an added axis, the added axis also returns to

the tool changing position after the X, Y and Z axes reach the tool changing position.)

(2) G30.2 command: The Z axis returns to the tool changing position, then the X axis does the same thing.

After that, the Y axis returns to the tool changing position. (If tool changing position return is on for an

added axis, the added axis also returns to the tool changing position after the X, Y and Z axes reach the

tool changing position.)

(3) G30.3 command : The Z axis returns to the tool changing position, then the X axis does the same thing.

After that, the X axis returns to the tool changing position. (If tool changing position return is on for an

added axis, the added axis also returns to the tool changing position after the X and Z axes reach the tool

changing position.)

(4) G30.4 command : The X axis returns to the tool changing position, then the Y axis and Z axis

simultaneously do the same thing. (If tool changing position return is on for an added axis, the added axis

also return to the tool changing position after the X, Y and X axes reach the tool changing position.)

(5) G30.5 command : The Y axis returns to the tool changing position, then the X and Z axes return to the

tool changing position simultaneously. (If tool changing position return is on for an added axis, the added

axis also returns to the tool changing position after the X, Y and Z axes reach the tool changing position.)

(6) G30.6command :The X, Y and Z axes return to the tool changing position simultaneously. (If tool

changing position return is on for an added axis, the added axis also returns to the tool changing position

after the X, Y and Z axes reach the tool changing position.)

TCP : Tool change position

G30.3

G30.2

G30.1

Y

X

(TCP)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

490

(7) After all necessary tool changing position return is completed by a G30.n command, tool changing

position return complete signal TCP (XC93) is turned ON. When an axis out of those having returned to

the tool changing position by a G30.n command leaves the tool changing position, the TCP signal is

turned OFF.

With a G30.1 command, for example, the TCP signal is turned on when the Z axis has reached the tool

changing position after the X and Y axes did (after the additional axis did if additional axis tool change

position return is valid). The TCP signal is then turned OFF when the X or Y axis leaves the position. If

tool changing position return for added axes is on with parameter «#1092 Tchg_A», the TCP signal is

turned ON when the added axis or axes have reached the tool changing position after the standard axes

did. It is then turned OFF when one of the X, Y, Z, and added axes leaves the position.

[TCP signal output timing chart] (G30.1 command with tool change position return for additional axes set

ON)

(8) When a tool changing position return command is issued, tool offset data such as for tool length offset

and tool radius compensation for the axis that moved is canceled.

(9) This command is executed by dividing blocks for every axis. If this command is issued during single-

block operation, therefore, a block stop occurs each time one axis returns to the tool change position. To

make the next axis tool change position return, therefore, a cycle start needs to be specified.

Machining program

Arrival of Z axis to tool change position

Arrival of X and Y axis to tool change position

Arrival of additional axis to tool change position

Tool change position return complete signal (TCP)

G30.1; G00X — 100.T02;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

491

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

Function and purpose

The C axis (rotation axis) turning will be controlled so that the tool constantly faces the normal line direction in

respect to the movement of the axes in the selected plane during program operation.

At the block seams, the C axis turning is controlled so that the tool faces the normal line direction at the next

block’s start point.

During arc interpolation, the rotation axis turning is controlled in synchronization with the operation of arc

interpolation.

The normal line control I and II can be used according to the C axis turning direction during normal line

control. This is set by the parameters.

C axis center (rotation axis)

Tool end position

C axis turning

Rotation axis center (C axis)

Tool end position

Normal line control type

Turning direction Turning speed Turning speed in arc

interpolation

Type I (#1524 C_type=0)

Direction that is 180 or less (shortcut direction)

Parameter speed (#1523 C_feed)

Speed when the program path follows the F command

Type II (#1524 C_type=1)

As a principle, the commanded direction

Feedrate Speed when the tool nose follows the F command

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

492

Command format

The axis No. for the normal line control axis is designated with the parameter (#1522 C_axis).

Normal line control is carried out in respect to the movement direction of the axis which is selecting the plane.

G17 plane X-Y axes

G18 plane Z-X axes

G19 plane Y-Z axes

To cancel the normal line control by resetting or not can be selected by the parameter (#1210 RstGmd/ bitE).

0: Cancel 1: Keep this status

G40.1 (G150) X__ Y__ F__ ; … Normal line control cancel

G41.1 (G151) X__ Y__ F__ ; … Normal line control left ON

G42.1 (G152) X__ Y__ F__ ; … Normal line control right ON

X X axis end point coordinate

Y Y axis end point coordinate

F Feedrate

G41.1 Normal line control left side G42.1 Normal line control right side

(a) Center of rotation

(b) Tool end(b) Tool end

Programmed path

Tool end path

(a)

(b)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

493

Detailed description

Definition of the normal line control angle

The normal line control angle is 0 (degree) when the tool is facing the horizontal axis (+ direction) direction.

The counterclockwise direction turning is + (plus), and the clockwise direction turning is — (minus).

G17 plane (I — J axes) … The axis angle is 0(degree) when the tool is facing the +I direction.

G18 plane (K — I axes) …The axis angle is 0(degree) when the tool is facing the +K direction.

G19 plane (J — K axes) … The axis angle is 0(degree) when the tool is facing the +J direction.

0 I+

J+

90

180

270

0 K+

I+

90

180

270

0 J+

K+

90

180

270

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

494

Normal line control turning operation in respect to movement command

(1) Start up

After the normal line control axis turns to the right angle of the advance direction at the start point of the

normal line control command block, the axis which is selecting the plane is moves. Note that the normal

line control axis at the start up turns in the direction that is 180 or less (shortcut direction) in both the

normal line control type I and II.

(2) During normal line control mode

(a) Block seam

(b) During block movement

The normal line control axis angle is kept unchanged during the linear command, and the normal line

control axis does not turn.

During the arc command, the normal line control axis turns in synchronization with the operation of the

arc interpolation.

: N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1 ;

N2 G41.1 ; … Independent block

N3 Xx2 Yy2 ; :

N2 is fixed

: N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1 ;

N2 G41.1 Xx2 Yy2 ; … Same block

:

No tool radius compensation

After the normal line control axis is turned to be at the right angle of the plane selecting movement in the next block, the operation moves to the next block.

Liner — Liner Liner — Arc Arc — Arc

Programmed path

Tool end path

With tool radius compensation

If tool radius compensation is applied, normal line control is carried out along the path to which the tool radius compensation is applied.

Liner — Liner Liner — Arc Arc — Arc

Programmed path

Tool radius compensation path

Tool end path

(x2,y2)

(x1,y1) N3

N3

N1

G41.1

(x2,y2)

(x1,y1) N2

N2

N1

G41.1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

495

(3) Cancel

The normal line control axis will not turn, and the plane selecting axis will be moved by the program

command.

: N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1 ;

N2 G40.1 ; … Independent block

N3 Xx2 Yy2 ; :

N2 is fixed

: N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1 ;

N2 G40.1 Xx2 Yy2 ; … Same block

:

(x2,y2)

(x1,y1) N3

N1

G40.1

(x2,y2)

(x1,y1) N2

N1

G40.1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

496

Normal line control temporary cancel

During normal line control, the turning operation for the normal line control axis is not carried out at the seam

between a block and the next block, in which the movement amount is smaller than that set with the

parameter (#1535 C_leng).

(1) For liner block;

When the movement amount of the N2 block is smaller than the parameter(#1535 C_leng), the normal

line control axis is not turned at the seam between the N1 block and N2 block. It stays the same direction

as the N1 block.

(2) For arc block;

When the diameter value of the N2 block is smaller than the parameter(#1535 C_leng), the normal line

control axis is not turned at the seam between the N1 block and N2 block. It stays the same direction as

the N1 block.

During arc interpolation of the N2 block, the normal line control axis does not turn in synchronization with

the operation of arc interpolation.

(Note) Since operation fractions are created by calculating the intersection point of two segments, the

turning operation may or may not be carried out when the parameter (#1535 C_leng) and the

segment length are equal.

N2 block movement amount < Parameter(#1535 C_leng)

N2 block diameter value < Parameter (#1535 C_leng)

(a) Diameter value

N3N1 N2

N3N1

N2

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

497

Normal line control axis turning direction at block seam

The normal line control axis turning direction at block seam differs according to the normal line control type I

or II. The turning angle is limited by the angle set with the parameter (#1521 C_min).

Item Normal line control type I Normal line control type II

Normal line control axis turning direction at block seam

Direction that is 180 or less. (shortcut direction)

G41.1 : — direction (CW) G42.1 : + direction (CCW)

Normal line control axis turning angle at block seam

When — | | < , turning is not performed. : Turning angle : Parameter (#1521 C_min) — When the turning angle is 180, the turning direction is indefinite regardless of the command mode. [G41.1/G42.1 When the normal line control axis is at 0]

(a) Normal line control axis turning (CCW) (b) Normal line control axis turning (CW) (c) No turning

When — | | < , turning is not performed. : Turning angle : Parameter (#1521 C_min) In the following cases, an operation error (0118) will occur. <= < 180 — 180 + < <= 360 — [G41.1 When the normal line control axis is at 0]

[G42.1 When the normal line control axis is at 0]

(c) No turning (d) Normal line control axis turning (e) Operation error (0118)

0180

270

90 (a)

(b) (c)

0180

270

90

180 —

(c) (d)

(e)

0180

270

90

180 +

(c)

(d)

(e)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

498

(1) Normal line control type I

Normal line control axis turning angle at block seam:

G41.1 G42.1

1. — < <

No turning

No turning

2. <= < 180

3. 180 <= <= 360-

Shortcut direction

Shortcut direction

0180

270 (-90 )

90

0180

270 (-90 )

90

360 —

0180

270 (-90 )

90

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

499

(2) Normal line control type II

(Note) If the axis turns into the command direction, it turns inside the workpiece. Therefore, an operation

error will occur.

Normal line control axis turning angle at block seam:

G41.1 G42.1

1. — < <

No turning

No turning

2. <= < 180-

Operation error 0118 (Note)

3. 180 — <= <= 180 +

4. 180 + < <= 360 —

Operation error 0118 (Note)

0180

270 (-90 )

90

0180

270 (-90 )

90

180 —

180 —

0180

270 (-90 )

90

180 +

360 —

0180

270 (-90 )

90

180 +

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

500

Normal line control axis turning speed

Turning speed at block seam (select from type I or type II)

(1) Normal line control axis turning speed at block seam

(a) Rapid traverse

Normal line control type I Normal line control type II

— Dry run OFF The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = Rapid traverse rate * (Rapid traverse override) ( /min) — Dry run ON The manual feedrate is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = Manual feedrate * (Cutting feed override) ( /min) (Note 1) When the manual override valid is ON, the cutting feed override is valid. (Note 2) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed (#2002 clamp), the cutting feed clamp speed will be applied. (Note 3) When the rapid traverse is ON, the dry run is invalid.

— Dry run OFF Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * 180 / ( * R) * (Rapid traverse override) ( /min) For R=0, the following expression is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * (Rapid traverse override) ( /min) F: Rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) (mm/min) R: Parameter (#8041 C-rot.R) (mm) (Length from normal line control axis center to tool nose) (Note 1) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid), the rapid traverse rate will be applied. — Dry run ON Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * 180 / ( * R) * (Cutting feed override) ( /min) For R=0, the following expression is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * (Cutting feed override) ( /min) F: Manual feedrate (mm/min) R: Parameter (#8041 C-rot.R) (mm) (Length from normal line control axis center to tool nose) (Note 1) When the manual override valid is ON, the cutting feed override is valid. (Note 2) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid), the rapid traverse rate will be applied. (Note 3) When the rapid traverse is ON, the dry run is invalid.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

501

(b) Cutting feed

Normal line control type I Normal line control type II

— Dry run OFF The normal line control axis turning speed set with the parameter (#1523 C_feed) is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = Parameter (#1523 C_feed) * (Cutting feed override) ( / min) — Dry run ON (Rapid traverse ON) The cutting feed clamp speed (#2002 clamp) is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = Cutting feed clamp speed (/min) — Dry run ON (Rapid traverse OFF) The manual feedrate is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = Manual feedrate * (Cutting feed override) ( /min) (Note 1) When the manual override valid is ON, the cutting feed override is valid. (Note 2) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed (#2002 clamp), the cutting feed clamp speed will be applied.

F: Feedrate command f: Normal line control axis turning speed

The feedrate at the tool nose is the F command. The normal line control axis turning speed is the normal line control axis speed that follows this F command. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * 180 / ( * R) * (Cutting feed override) ( /min) For R=0, the following expression is applied. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F ( /min) F: Feedrate command (mm/min) R: Parameter (#8041 C-rot.R) (mm) (Length from normal line control axis center to tool nose) (Note 1) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed (#2002 clamp), the cutting feed clamp speed will be applied. (Note 2) When the dry run is ON, the normal line control axis turning speed is obtained by the same expression as the rapid traverse.

F: Feedrate command f: Normal line control axis turning speed R: Parameter (#8041 C-rot.R)

(F)

(f)

=F*180/( *R)

(F)

(f)

(R)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

502

(2) Normal line control axis turning speed during circular interpolation

(Note 1) If the normal line control axis turning speed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed (#2002 clamp),

the speed will be as follows;

— Normal line control axis turning speed = Cutting feed clamp speed.

— Moving speed during arc interpolation = The speed according to the normal line control axis

turning speed

Normal line control type I Normal line control type II

The normal line control axis turning speed is the rotation speed obtained by feedrate F. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * 180 / ( * r) ( /min) F : Feed command speed (mm/min) r : Arc radius (mm)

The feedrate at the tool nose is the F command. The normal line control axis turning speed is the rotation speed that follows this F command. Normal line control axis turning speed f = F * 180 / ( * (R + r)) ( /min) F : Feed command speed (mm/min) R : Parameter (#8041 C-rot. R) (mm) Length from normal line control axis center to tool nose r : Arc radius (mm)

=F*180/( *r)

(F)

(r)

(f)

=F*180/( *(R+r))

(F)

(R) (r)

(f)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

503

Automatic corner arc insertion function

During normal line control, an arc is automatically inserted at the corner in the axis movement of the plane

selection. This function is for the normal line control type I.

The radius of the arc to be inserted is set with the parameter (#8042 C-ins.R).

This parameter can be read and written using the macro variable #1901.

Normal line control is performed also during the interpolation for the arc to be inserted.

— The corner arc is not inserted in the following cases:linear and arc, arc and arc, linear and moveless or

moveless and linear blocks or when a line is shorter than the radius of arc to insert.

— During the radius compensation, the radius compensation is applied to the path that the corner arc is

inserted.

Parameter (#8042 C-rot. R)

Corner R is not inserted.

Radius compensation path

Parameter (#8042 C-rot. R)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

504

— The stop point of the single block and block start interlock is as follows.

The stop point of the cutting start interlock is as follows.

Stop point

Stop point

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

505

Program example

Normal line control type I

Main program L500

Sub-program L501

G91X0Y0; G28C0; G90G92G53X0Y0; G00G54X25.Y-10.; G03G41.1X35.Y0.R10.F10.; #10=10; WHILE[#10NE0]DO1; G22L501; #10=#10-1; END1; G03X25.Y10.R10.; G40.1; G28X0Y0; M02;

G03X8.Y9.R15.; G02X-8.R10.; G03Y-9.R-15.; G02X8.R10.; G03X35.Y0.R15.; G23;

(0,0)

R10

R10R15

20.20.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

506

Normal line control type II

(Example 1)

Main program L500

Sub-program L1001

G91X0Y0; G28Z0; G28C0; G90G92G53X0Y0Z0; G00G54G43X35.Y0.Z100.H1; G00Z3.; G01Z0.1F6000; G42.1; G22L1001P510; G22L1002P2; G91G01Y10.Z0.05; G40.1; G90G00Z100.; G28X0Y0Z0; M02;

G17G91G01Y20.,R10.Z-0.01; (Corner chamfering/Corner R specifications are required)

X-70.,R10.; Y-40.,R10.; X70.,R10.; Y20.; G23;

L1002

G17G91G01Y20.,R10.; (Corner chamfering/Corner R specifications are required)

X-70.,R10.; Y-40.,R10.; X70.,R10.; Y20.; G23;

(a) C-axis (b) Tool

5.

(b)

0.1

10.

(a)

20.

(0,0)

R10

20.

35. 35.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

507

(Example 2)

Main program L2000

Sub-program L2001

G91G28Z0; G28X0Y0; G28C0; G90G92G53X0Y0Z0; G00G54X30.Y0.; G00Z3.; G41.1G01Z0.1F5000; G22L2001P510; G22L2002P2; G91G01X-30.Z0.05; G40.1; G90G00Z100.; G28X0Y0Z0; M02;

G17G91G01X-60.Z-0.01; X60.; G23;

L2002

G17G91G01X-60.; X60.; G23;

(a) C-axis (b) Tool

5.

(b)

0.1

(a)

(0,0)

30. 30.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

508

Relation with other functions

Function name Notes

Unidirectional positioning Normal line control is not applied.

Helical cutting Normal line control is applied normally.

Spiral interpolation The start point and end point are not on the same arc, so normal line control is not applied correctly.

Exact stop check The operation will not decelerate and stop for the turning movement of the normal line control axis.

Error detect Error detect is not applied on the turning movement of the normal line control axis.

Override Override is applied on the turning movement by normal line control axis.

Program coordinate rotation Normal line control is applied to the shape after coordinate rotation.

Scaling Normal line control is applied to the shape after scaling.

Mirror image Normal line control is applied to the shape after mirror image.

Thread cutting Normal line control is not applied.

Automatic reference point return Normal line control is not applied.

Start position return Normal line control is not applied on the movement to the intermediate point position. If the base specification parameter «#1086 G0Intp» is OFF, normal line control is applied to the movement from the intermediate point to a position designated in the program.

High-accuracy control This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P29) will occur. The normal line control command during high-accuracy control cannot be issued, either. A program error (P29) will occur.

Spline This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P29) will occur. The normal line control command during spline cannot be issued, either. A program error (P29) will occur.

High-speed High-accuracy control I/II

This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P29) will occur. The normal line control command during high-speed High-accuracy control I/II cannot be issued either. A program error (P29) will occur.

Cylindrical interpolation This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P486) will occur. The normal line control command during cylindrical interpolation cannot be issued, either. A program error (P481) will occur.

Workpiece coordinate system offset The workpiece coordinate system cannot be changed during normal line control. A program error (P29) will occur. The program parameter input (G10L2) cannot be commanded either. A program error (P29) will occur.

Local coordinate system offset The local coordinate system cannot be changed during normal line control. A program error (P29) will occur.

Program restart The program including the normal line control command cannot be restarted. «E98 CAN’T RESEARCH» will occur.

Dry run The feedrate is changed by the dry run signal even in respect to the turning movement of the normal line control axis.

Chopping The axis cannot be used as the normal line control axis during the chopping command.

Graphic check The section turned by normal line control is not drawn. The axes subject to prog0801013000_ check are drawn.

G00 non-interpolation Normal line control is not applied.

Polar coordinate interpolation This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P486) will occur. The normal line control command during pole coordinate interpolation cannot be issued either. A program error (P481) will occur.

Exponential Interpolation If the normal line control axis is the same as the rotation axis of exponential interpolation, a program error (P612) will occur. If they are different, an error will not occur, but normal line control is not applied.

Plane selection This cannot be commanded during normal line control. A program error (P903) will occur.

System variable The block end coordinate (#5001 — ) for the normal line control axis during normal line control cannot obtain a correct axis position.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.15 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/G151/G152)

509

Precautions

(1) During normal line control, the program coordinates are updated following the normal line control axis

movement. Thus, program the normal line control on the program coordinate system.

(2) The normal line control axis will stop at the turning start position for the single block, cutting block start

interlock and block start interlock.

(3) The C axis movement command is ignored during normal line control.

(4) During C axis normal line control (during the G41.1 and G42.1 modal), the C axis workpiece offset

rewrite command (G92C_;) cannot be issued. The program error (P901) will occur if commanded.

(5) If mirror image is applied to either the 1-axis or 2-axis, the normal line control direction will be reversed.

(6) Designate the rotation axis as the normal line control axis (parameter (#1522 C_axis)). Designate so that

the axis is not duplicated with the axis on the plane where normal line control is to be carried out. If an

illegal axis is designated, the program error (P902) will occur when the program (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) is

commanded.

The program error (P902) will also occur if the parameter (#1522 C_axis) is «0» when commanding a

program.

(7) This function may not be usable, depending on the model.

(8) The movement of the normal line control axis is counted as one axis of number of simultaneous

contouring control axes.

If the number of simultaneous contouring control axes exceeds the specification range by movement of

the normal line control axis, the program error (P10) will occur.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

510

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

Function and purpose

This function aims to reduce the error caused by the accuracy of the control system during machining. The

parameter method and G code command method, which turn initial high-accuracy ON, are used to enter the

high-accuracy control mode.

The following troubles occurred when using normal control:

(1) Corner rounding occurred at linear and linear-connected corners because the next command movement

started before the previous command finished. (Fig. 1)

(2) When cutting circle commands, an error occurred further inside the commanded path, and the resulting

cutting path was smaller than the commanded path.

(Fig. 2)

This function uses the following six functions to minimize the increase in machining time while reducing the

shape error.

(1) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration (linear acceleration/deceleration)

(2) Optimum speed control

(3) Vector accuracy interpolation

(4) Feed forward

(5) Arc entrance/exit speed control

(6) S-pattern filter control

Fig. 1 Rounding at linear corners

Fig. 2 Radius reduction error in circle commands

(a) Commanded path (b) Actual path

(a)

(b)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

511

Command format

High-accuracy control mode ON (G61.1 command method)

The high-accuracy control mode is validated from the block containing the G61.1 command. This function is

valid only for the first part system.

The «G61.1» high-accuracy control mode is canceled with one of the functions of G code group 13.

— G61 (Exact stop check mode)

— G63 (Tapping mode)

— G64 (Cutting mode)

— G08 P1 (High-accuracy control mode)

High-accuracy control mode ON (G08 command method)

The «G08 P1» high-accuracy control mode is canceled with P0.

Command G08P_ in an independent block.

The decimal places below the decimal point are ignored for P address.

(Note ) G08 belongs to the code group «0», and given the priority over the functions of the G code group 13.

After «G08 P1» is commanded, G code group 13 is automatically changed to G64 (cutting) mode.

Other commands of G code group 13 result in error.

Even if high-accuracy control mode is canceled by «G08 P0» command, G64 (cutting) mode will not

be changed.

To return to the function of G code group 13 when «G08 P1» has been commanded, command it

again after canceling the high-accuracy control mode.

G61.1 F__ ; … High-accuracy control mode ON

F Feedrate command

G08 P1 ; … High-accuracy control mode start

G08 P0 ; … High-accuracy control mode cancel

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

512

Detailed description

(1) Feedrate command (F) is clamped with the «#2110 Clamp (H-precision)» (Cutting feed clamp speed for

high-accuracy control mode) set with parameter.

(2) Rapid traverse rate conforms to «#2109 Rapid(H-precision)» (Rapid traverse rate during high-accuracy

control mode) set by the parameter.

(3) When the #2109 Rapid(H-precision) is set to 0, the move will conform to 2001 rapid (rapid

traverse rate) set by the parameter. Also, when «#2110 Clamp (H-precision)» is set to «0», the speed will

be clamped with «#2002 clamp» (Cutting clamp speed) set with parameter.

(4) The modal holding state of the high-accuracy control mode differs according to the combination of the

base specification parameter «#1151 rstint» (reset initial) and «#1148 I_G611» (initial high-accuracy).

H (hold): Modal hold

ON: Switches to high-accuracy mode

As for G61.1, the mode is switched to the high-accuracy mode, even if the other modes (G61 to G64) are

valid.

OFF: The status of the high-accuracy mode is OFF.

Parameter Default state Resetting

Reset initial

(#1151)

Initial high accuracy

(#1148) Power ON Reset 1 Reset 2

Reset & rewind

OFF OFF OFF

Hold OFF

ON OFF

OFF ON ON

Hold ON

ON ON

Parameter Emergency stop Emergency stop cancel

Reset initial

(#1151)

Initial high accuracy

(#1148)

Emergency stop switch, External emergency stop

Emergency stop switch, External emergency stop

OFF OFF Hold

Hold

ON OFF

OFF ON Hold

Hold

ON ON

Parameter Block interruption Block stop NC alarm OT

Reset initial

(#1151)

Initial high accuracy

(#1148)

Mode changeover (automatic/manual), or

Feed hold Single block Servo alarm H/W OT

OFF OFF

Hold ON

OFF ON

ON

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

513

Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

Acceleration/deceleration control is carried out for the movement commands to suppress the impact when the

machine starts or stops moving. However, with conventional post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration, the

corners at the block seams are rounded, and path errors occur regarding the command shape.

In the high-accuracy control function mode, acceleration/deceleration is carried out before interpolation to

solve the above problems. This pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration enables machining on a machining

path that more closely follows the command.

The acceleration/deceleration time can be reduced because constant inclination acceleration/deceleration is

carried out.

(1) Basic patterns of acceleration/deceleration control in linear interpolation commands

Acceleration/deceleration waveform pattern

N o

rm al

m o

d e

(F) Speed of each axis (T) Time

(a) Because of the constant time constant acceleration/deceleration, the rising edge/falling edge of the waveform becomes more gentle as the command speed becomes slower. (b) The acceleration/deceleration time constant can be independently set for each axis. Linear type, exponential function type, or both can be selected. Note that if the time constant of each axis is not set to the same value, an error will occur in the path course. #2002 clamp : G01 clamp speed #2007 G1tL : Linear type acceleration/deceleration time constant #2008 G1t1 : Exponential type acceleration/ deceleration time constant

H ig

h -a

cc u

ra cy

c o

n tr

o l m

o d

e

(f) Combined speed (T) Time

(a) Because of the constant inclination type linear acceleration/deceleration, the acceleration/ deceleration time is reduced as the command speed becomes slower. (b) Only one acceleration/deceleration time constant (common for each axis) exists in a system. #2002 clamp : G01 clamp speed #1206 G1bF : Target speed #1207 G1btL : Acceleration/deceleration time to target speed (Note) G1bF and G1btL are values for specifying the inclination of the acceleration/deceleration time. The actual cutting feed maximum speed is clamped by the «#2002 clamp» value.

clamp

G1tLG1tL

clamp

G1t1G1t1

(F)

(T)

(F)

(T)

clamp

G1btLG1btL

G1btL/2 G1btL/2

G1bF

G1bF/2

(f)

(T)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

514

(2) Path control in circular interpolation commands

When commanding circular interpolation with the conventional post-interpolation acceleration/

deceleration control method, the path itself that is output from the CNC to the servo runs further inside

the commanded path, and the circle radius becomes smaller than that of the commanded circle. This is

due to the influence of the smoothing course droop amount for CNC internal acceleration/deceleration.

With the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method, the path error is eliminated and a

circular path faithful to the command results, because interpolation is carried out after the acceleration/

deceleration control. Note that the tracking lag due to the position loop control in the servo system is not

the target here.

The following shows a comparison of the circle radius reduction error amounts for the conventional post-

interpolation acceleration/deceleration control and pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control in

the high-accuracy control mode.

The compensation amount of the circle radius reduction error (R) is theoretically calculated as shown

in the following table.

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant in the CNC (s)

Tp : Servo system position loop time constant (s)

Kf : Feed forward coefficient

(Note) When a speed is set to #2110 Clamp (H-precision), which is the cutting clamp speed parameter

for the high-accuracy control mode, clamping will be carried out at that speed.

R : Commanded radius (mm) R : Radius error (mm) F : Cutting feedrate (mm/min)

Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control (normal mode)

Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control(high-accuracy control mode)

Linear acceleration/deceleration

Exponential function acceleration/deceleration

Linear acceleration/deceleration

(a) Because the item Ts can be ignored by using the pre- interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method, the radius reduction error amount can be reduced. (b) Item Tp can be negated by making Kf = 1.

R

R

F

F

R = Ts 2 + Tp2 1 12

1 2R

F 60

2

R = Ts2 + Tp2 1 2R

F 60

2

R = Tp2 (1 — 1 2R

F 60

2 Fwd_g 100

2 ) + 1

12 Sfilt2 1000

2 (1 — Ks )

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

515

Optimum speed control

(1) Optimum corner deceleration

By calculating the angle of the seam between blocks, and carrying out acceleration/ deceleration control

in which the corner is passed at the optimum speed, highly accurate edge machining can be realized.

When entering in a corner, optimum speed for the corner (optimum corner speed) is calculated from the

angle with the next block. The machine decelerates to the speed in advance, and then accelerates back

to the command speed after passing the corner.

Corner deceleration is not carried out when blocks are smoothly connected. In this case, the criteria for

whether the connection is smooth or not can be designated by the machining parameter «#8020 DCC

ANGLE».

When the corner angle is larger than the parameter «DCC ANGLE» for a linear-linear connection, or for a

circle, etc., the acceleration V occurs due to the change in the direction of progress after passing the

corner at the speed V.

The corner speed V is controlled so that V becomes less than the pre-interpolation acceleration/

deceleration tolerable value set in the parameters («#1206 G1bF», «#1207 G1btL»).

In this case the speed pattern is as follows.

V : Speed before entering the corner V : Speed change at the corner V1 : Speed after passing the corner

The optimum corner speed is represented by V0. V0 is obtained from the pre- interpolation acceleration/deceleration tolerable value (V’) and the corner angle (outside angle) .

V’ = G1bF/G1btL

Combined speed pattern

To further reduce the corner speed V0 (to further improve the edge accuracy), the V0 value can be reduced in the machining parameter «#8019 R COMPEN».

V0′ = V0*(100 — Ks) / 100 (Ks : R COMPEN)

X axis speed pattern

(Note 1) In this case, the cycle time may increase due to the increase in the time required for acceleration/deceleration.

(Note 2) V0 can be increased by setting a negative value for the accuracy coefficient.

Y axis speed pattern

(F) Speed

(T) Time

V1

V

V

N01 G01X100.Y1.F500 ; N02 G01X100.Y- 1.F500 ;

V0

V0x

V0y

V0= V0x +V0y2 2

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

516

The accuracy coefficient differs according to parameter «#8201 COMP CHANGE».

The corner speed V0 can be maintained at more than a certain speed so that the corner speed does not

drop too far.

Set «#2096 crncsp (corner deceleration minimum speed)» for each axis, and make a combined speed so

that the moving axis does not exceed this setting.

Note that the speed is controlled with the optimum corner deceleration speed in the following cases.

— When the combined corner deceleration speed is less than the optimum corner deceleration speed.

— When the corner deceleration minimum speed parameter setting for the moving axes is set to «0» for

even one axis.

#8201 COMP CHANGE Accuracy coefficient used

0 #8019 R COMPEN

1 #8022 CORNER COMP

Speed is not clamped Speed is clamped

(a) Corner deceleration speed (b) Clamp value according to X axis

(c) Y axis setting value (d) X axis setting value

V

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a)

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

517

(2) Arc speed clamp

During circular interpolation, even when moving at a constant speed, acceleration is generated as the

advance direction constantly changes. When the arc radius is large enough in relation to the

commanded speed, control is carried out at the commanded speed. However, when the arc radius is

relatively small, the speed is clamped so that the generated acceleration does not exceed the tolerable

acceleration/deceleration speed before interpolation, calculated with the parameters.

This allows arc cutting to be carried out at an optimum speed for the arc radius.

When the above F’ expression is substituted in the expression for the maximum logical arc radius

reduction error amount R, explained in the section «Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration», the

commanded radius R is eliminated, and R does not rely on R.

In other words, with the arc command in the high-accuracy control mode, in logical terms regardless of

the commanded speed F or commanded radius R, machining can be carried out with a radius reduction

error amount within a constant value.

To further lower the arc clamp speed (to further improve the roundness), the arc clamp speed can be

lowered with the machining parameter «#8019 R COMPEN». In this case, speed control is carried out to

improve the maximum arc radius reduction error amount R by the set percentage.

After setting the «R COMPEN», the above R’ will appear on the parameter screen.

(Note 1) The maximum arc radius reduction error amount R can be increased by setting a negative value

for the «accuracy coefficient».

(Note 2) When the «R COMPEN» is set with positive value, the arc clamp speed will drop, so in a machining

program with many arc commands, the machining time will take longer.

(Note 3) The «R COMPEN» is valid only when the arc speed clamp is applied. To reduce the radius reduction

error when not using the arc speed clamp, the commanded speed F must be lowered.

(Note 4) If the «accuracy coefficient» is not set (0), arc speed clamping will not be applied.

(Note 5) The accuracy coefficient differs according to parameter.

F : Commanded speed (mm/min) R : Commanded arc radius (mm) : Angle change per interpolation unit V : Speed change per interpolation unit

The tool is fed with the arc clamp speed F so that V does not exceed the tolerable acceleration/deceleration speed before interpolation V.

R : Arc radius reduction error amount Tp : Position loop gain time constant of servo system Kf : Feed forward coefficient F : Cutting feedrate

R’ : Maximum arc radius reduction error amount Ks : R COMPEN (%)

#8201 COMP CHANGE Accuracy coefficient used

0 #8019 R COMPEN

1 #8023 CURVE COMP

F

F

F

F

V

F’ R * V’ * 60 * 1000(mm/min)

V’ = G1bF( mm/min)

G1btL(ms)

R Tp2 1 — Kf 2 1 2R

F 60

2

Tp2 1 — Kf 2 1 2

V’ * 1000 60

R’ = (mm) R * (100 — Ks)

100

#8019 R COMPEN (0.078) 50

Accuracy coefficient setting value

R

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

518

Vector accuracy interpolation

When a fine segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small (when not using

optimum corner deceleration), interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the vector accuracy

interpolation.

Feed forward control

With this function, the constant speed error caused by the position loop control of the servo system can be

greatly reduced. However, as machine vibration is induced by the feed forward control, there are cases when

the coefficient cannot be increased. In this case, use this function together with the smooth high gain (SHG)

control function and stably compensate the delay by the servo system’s position loop to realize a high

accuracy. As the response is smoother during acceleration/deceleration, the position loop gain can be

increased.

(1) Feed forward control

(a) Commanded path (b) Vector accuracy interpolation

Kp : Position loop gain Kv : Speed loop gain M : Motor S : Segment

(a) Command during pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

(b) Command during post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

(c) Feed forward control

(d) Machine error compensation amount

(e) Detector

(a)

(b)

Kp

S

Kv M+ + —

+ —

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

519

(2) Reduction of arc radius reduction error amount using feed forward control

With the high-accuracy control, the arc radius reduction error amount can be greatly reduced by

combining the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method above-mentioned and the feed

forward control/SHG control.

The theoretical radius reduction error amount R in the high-accuracy control mode is obtained with the

following expression and it will be displayed under the parameters «#8019 R COMP» and «#8023 CURVE

COMP».

The method to calculate the feed forward gain is different between «Feed forward control» and «SHG

control + Feed forward control».

The feed forward gain can be set independently for G00 and G01.

The values used in the calculation of theoretical radius reduction error amount

(1) Feed forward (fwd_g) uses the axis specification parameter «#2010 fwd_g» set for the first axis of the

part system.

(2) Position loop gain for the position loop time constant uses the servo parameter «#2203 SV003(PGN)»

set for the first axis of the part system.

(3) Soft acceleration/deceleration 2 (sfilt2) uses the value of the basic system parameter «#1570 sfukt2».

(4) For calculating the equivalent feed forward gain under SHG control + Feed forward control, «SV003»

is used when all the servo parameters «#2203 SV003(PGN1)», «#2204 SV004(PGN2)», and «#2257

SV057″ are set for the 1st axis of the part system.

(Note 1) If the machine vibrates when Kf is set to 1, Kf must be lowered or the servo system must be

adjusted.

(Note 2) If the theoretical radius reduction error amount is unable to display due to the number of fraction,

the digit after the decimal point will be displayed as «…».

R : Arc radius (mm) F : Cutting feedrate (mm/min) Tp : Position loop time constant (sec) = Inverse number to position loop gain fwd_g Feed forward gain Sfilt2Soft acceleration/deceleration 2 (msec) KAccuracy coefficient (or curve accuracy coefficient)/100

Feed forward control SHG control + Feed forward control

Fwd_g = fwd_g

The equivalent feed forward gain can be obtained with the following expression.

Path for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method (Kf = 1)

Path for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method (Kf = 0)

Path for post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control method

R = Tp2 (1 — 1 2R

F 60

2 Fwd_g 100

2 ) + 1

12 Sfilt2 1000

2 (1 — Ks )

100 1 — 1 — 50

2 2f wd_g 2 * PGN1 for SHG control

fwd_g’= PGN1 for conventional control

R

R

F

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

520

Arc entrance/exit speed control

There are cases when the speed fluctuates and the machine vibrates at the joint from the straight line to arc or

from the arc to straight line.

This function decelerates to the deceleration speed before entering the arc and after exiting the arc to reduce

the machine vibration. If this is overlapped with corner deceleration, the function with the slower deceleration

speed is valid.

The validity of this control can be changed with the base specification parameter «#1149 cireft». The

deceleration speed is designated with the base specification parameter «#1209 cirdcc».

(Example 1)When not using corner deceleration

G61.1 ; . . N1 G91 G01 X-10. F3000 ; N2 G03 X-5. Y-5. J-2.5 ; N3 G01 Y-10. ; . .

Commanded speed

Arc clamp speed

Arc deceleration speed

(F) Speed

(T) Time

N1 N2

N3

N1 N2 N3

(F)

(T)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

521

(Example 2)When using corner deceleration

S-pattern filter control

This control interpolates the fluctuations in the segments further smoothly, when they are distributed to each

axis element with vector accuracy interpolation. With this, the fluctuation amplified by feed forward control is

reduced and the effect onto the machine is reduced.

This can be set in the range of 0 to 200(ms) with the base specification parameter #1568 SfiltG1 and #1569

SfiltG0. With #1570 Sfilt2, the acceleration/deceleration fluctuation can be further smoothened.

G61.1 ; . . N1 G91 G01 X-10. F3000 ; N2 G03 X5. Y-5. I2.5 ; N3 G01 X10. ; . .

Commanded speed

Arc clamp speed

Arc deceleration speed

Corner deceleration speed

(F) Speed

(T) Time

(R) Parameter setting value

Command to drive unit

N1

N2 N3

N1 N2 N3

(F)

(T)

F

T T

F

(R)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

522

Circular error radius compensation control for each axis

When the roundness at the machine end is, compared to the reference circle, expanded at an axis creating an

ellipsis state, compensation is carried out for each axis to make a perfect circle.

The validity of this control can be changed with control parameter «#8108 R COMP Select». Note that «#8108

R COMP Select» is valid only when «#8107 R COMPENSATION» is set to «1».

The compensation coefficient for each axis is designated with the axis specification parameter «#2069

Rcoeff».

(1) Compensation in each axis direction of arc

(a) Machine end path (b) Commanded path

(b)

(a)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.16 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08

523

(2) Smooth compensation at entrance and exit

The compensation amount is gradually increased from the arc start point to the 90 position, and achieves

100% compensation at the 90 position. The compensation is gradually decreased from 90 before the end

point, and 0% compensation is reached at the end point.

Relation with other functions

(1) The modal must be set as shown below when commanding G08 P1.

(2) An alarm will occur if high-accuracy control is commanded in the following modes.

— During milling Program error (P481)

— During cylindrical interpolation Program error (P481)

— During polar coordinate interpolation Program error (P481)

— During normal line control Program error (P29)

(3) A program error (P29) will occur if the following commands are issued during the high-accuracy control

mode.

— Milling

— Cylindrical interpolation

— Polar coordinate interpolation

— Normal line control

(a) Machine end path (b) Commanded path

Function G code

High-speed high-accuracy control II, High-speed machining cancel

G05 P0

Cylindrical interpolation cancel G07.1

High-accuracy control cancel G08 P0

Polar coordinate interpolation cancel G15

Tool radius compensation mode cancel G40

Normal line control cancel G40.1

Tool length compensation cancel G44

Programmable mirror image OFF G50.1

Mirror image with settings cancel

Mirror image with signals cancel

No macro modal call G67

Feed per revolution cancel G94

Constant surface speed control mode cancel G97

Interruption type macro mode IOF

(b)

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

524

Precautions

(1) The «high-accuracy control» specifications are required to use this function

If G61.1 is commanded when there are no specifications, a program error (P123) will occur.

(2) Command G61.1 in an independent block.

(3) The command format is changed by the basic parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0».

If G8 is commanded when the parameter is set to «0», a program error (P34) will occur.

If G61.1 is commanded when the parameter is set to «1», a program error (P34) will occur.

(4) This function may not be usable, depending on the model.

(5) The #1205 G0bdcc (G0 pre-interpolation) can be used with only one part system.

If the 2nd or later part system is set to the G0 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration, a program error

will occur.

(6) «#1568 SfiltG1», «#1569 SfiltG0» and «#1570 Sfilt2» cannot be changed from the screen during program

mode.

If these parameters is changed by «parameter input by program», these parameters become valid after

the axes stop.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.17 High-speed Machining Mode

525

13.17 High-speed Machining Mode

13.17.1 High-speed Machining Mode I, II ; G05 P1, G05 P2

Function and purpose

This function runs a machining program for which a freely curved surface has been approximated by fine

segments at high speed.

This is effective in increasing the speed of machining dies of a freely curved surface.

G1 block fine segment capacity for 1mm segment

The above performance is available under the following conditions.

— 6-axis system (including spindle) or less

— 1-part system

— 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01

— Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Macro and variable command are not

included.)

— During G61.1 high-accuracy control mode, or during cutting mode (G64)

— During tool radius compensation cancel (G40) (Only in the high-speed machining mode II)

When the above conditions are not satisfied, the given feedrate may not be secured.

Command format

In addition to the G05 P0 command, the high-speed machining mode I is canceled when the high-speed

machining mode II (G05 P2) is commanded.

In reverse, the high-speed machining mode II is canceled when the high-speed machining mode I (G05 P1) is

commanded.

Mode Command

Maximum feedrate when 1mm segment G1 block is executed

M720V M750V/M730V M70V

TypeB TypeA

Standard mode G05 P0 16.8m/min 16.8m/min 8.4m/min 16.8m/min

High-speed machining mode I

G05 P1 16.8m/min 16.8m/min 8.4m/min 16.8m/min

High-speed machining mode II

G05 P2 67.5m/min 168.0m/min — 33.7m/min

G05 P1 ; … High-speed machining mode I ON

G05 P2 ; … High-speed machining mode II ON

G05 P0 ; … High-speed machining mode I/II OFF

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

526

Detailed description

(1) The override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, manual interruption and

graphic trace and high-accuracy control mode are valid even during the high-speed machining mode I/II.

(2) When using the high-speed machining mode II mode, set «bit1» of the parameter «#1572 Cirorp» to «1» to

eliminate the speed fluctuation at the seams between an arc and straight line or arc and arc.

Program example

High-speed machining mode I

Precautions

(1) If «G05 P1(P2)» is commanded when the option for high-speed machining mode I/(II) is not provided, a

program error (P39) will occur.

(2) The automatic operation process has the priority in the high-speed machining mode I/II , so the screen

display may be slowed down.

(3) The speed will decelerate once at the G05 command block, so turn ON and OFF when the tool separates

from the workpiece.

(4) When carrying out operation in the high-speed machining mode I/II by communication or tape mode, the

machining speed may be suppressed depending on the program transmission speed limit.

(5) Command the G05 command in an independent block.

(6) A decimal point is invalid for the P address in the G05 command block.

(7) The P addresses which are valid in the G05 command block are P0, P1 and P2 only.

If other P addresses are commanded in the G05 block, a program error (P35) will occur.

If there is no P command, a program error (P33) will occur.

(8) The machining speed may be suppressed depending on the number of characters in a designated block.

G28 X0. Y0. Z0. ;

G91 G00 X-100. Y-100. ;

G01 F10000 ;

G05 P1 ; ———- High-speed machining mode I ON

:

X0.1 Y0.01 ;

X0.1 Y0.02 ;

X0.1 Y0.03 ;

:

G05 P0 ; ———- High-speed machining mode I OFF

M30 ;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

527

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

13.18.1 High-speed High-accuracy Control I, II

Function and purpose

This function runs a machining program that approximates a freely curved surface with fine segments at high

speed and high accuracy. This is effective in increasing the speed of machining dies of a freely curved

surface. High-speed high-accuracy control I is valid only for the first part system and High-speed high-

accuracy control II for one part system only.

Simultaneous 3-axis fine segment capacity for 1mm segment

(Note 1) When the fairing is valid (When the parameter «#8033» is set to «1»), and the fairing is executed

successively, depending on machining programs, the performance of fine segment execution may

decelerate more than the value described in the above table. In the network connection, the value

described in the above table may not be guaranteed depending on the state.

(Note 2) The above performance applies under the following conditions.

— 6-axis system (including spindle) or less

— 1-part system

— 3 axes or less commanded simultaneously in G01

— Block containing only axis name and movement amount (Macro and variable command are not

included.)

— Tool radius compensation cancel mode (G40)

When the above conditions are not satisfied, the given feedrate may not be secured.

(Note 3) The performance of the fine segment execution during the tool center point control (G43.4/G43.5) is

100m/min.

(Note 4) The performance of the fine segment execution during the Inclined surface machining command

(G68.2/G68.3) and the workpiece installation error compensation (G54.4 P1 to 7) is 100m/min.

Command format

(Note 1) The high-speed high-accuracy mode l and II can not be used at the same time.

(Note 2) G05.1 Q1 (high-speed high-accuracy mode I) and G05 P10000 (high-speed high-accuracy mode II)

are valid when the parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0» is ON.

Performance of the fine segment execution (1mm-long segment)

Restriction in the program M720V M750V/M730V

M70V

TypeB TypeA

Standard mode 16.8m/min 16.8m/min 8.4m/min 16.8m/min No

High-speed high-accuracy control I mode

16.8m/min 33.7m/min 16.8m/min 16.8m/min Yes

High-speed high-accuracy control II mode

67.5 m/min 168.0m/min

(Note 3) (Note 4)

— 33.7m/min Yes

G05.1 Q1 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control I ON

G05.1 Q0 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF

G05 P10000 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control II ON

G05 P0 ; … High-speed high-accuracy control II OFF

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

528

Detailed description

(1) The high-speed high-accuracy control I / II can be used during computer link, tape, MDI, IC card or

memory modes.

(2) The override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, handle interrupt and

graphic trace are valid even during the high-speed high-accuracy control I / II modal.

(3) The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.

(4) The high-speed high-accuracy control I / II function automatically turns the high-accuracy control mode

ON.

For high-accuracy control function, refer to «High-accuracy control».

(5) Turn the tool radius compensation command ON and OFF during the high-speed high-accuracy control I

/ II mode.

If the high-speed high-accuracy control I / II mode is turned OFF without turning the tool radius

compensation OFF, program error (P34) will occur.

(6) Turn the high-speed high-accuracy control I / II mode OFF before commanding data other than those

which can be commanded.

(7) When using the high-speed high-accuracy control II mode, set parameter «#1572 Cirorp» to «1» to

eliminate the speed fluctuation at the seams between arc and straight line or arc and arc.

(8) Feedrate command F is clamped with the «#2110 Clamp (H-precision)» (Cutting feed clamp speed for

high-accuracy control mode) set with parameter.

(9) Rapid traverse rate enables «#2109 Rapid(H-precision)» (Rapid traverse rate during high-accuracy

control mode) set by the parameter.

(10) When the «#2109 Rapid(H-precision)» is set to «0», the movement follows «#2001 rapid» (rapid traverse

rate) set by the parameter. Also, when «#2110 Clamp (H-precision)» is set to «0», the speed will be

clamped with «#2002 clamp» (Cutting clamp speed) set with parameter.

Additional functions when high-speed high-accuracy control II mode is ON

(1) Fairing

If there is a protrusion in a path (zigzagging path) in a machining program generated with a CAM, etc., this

function can be used to eliminate the protruding path smaller than the setting value so that the protruding path

is smoothly connected with the previous and the next paths.

This function is valid only for continuous linear commands (G1).

If there is any protruding path after fairing, fairing is repeated.

Related parameters Details

#8033 Fairing ON 0 : Fairing invalid 1 : Execute fairing for the protruding block

#8029 Fairing L Execute fairing for the shorter block than this setting value

Before fairing After fairing

Path before/after fairing execution

Before fairing

After first fairing

After final fairing

Path in repetitive fairing executions

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

529

(2) Acceleration clamp speed

The cutting feed clamp speed during the high-speed high-accuracy control II mode, when the following

parameter is set to «1», is clamped so that the acceleration generated by each block movement does not

exceed the tolerable value. This function clamps the speed optimally even at a section where «angle change

at each block is small but entire curvature is large» such as shown below.

The tolerable acceleration value is calculated from the parameter «#1206 G1bF» and «#1207 G1btL» setting

values. (Tolerable acceleration = #1206/#1207)

(Note 1) When a speed is set in «#2109 Clamp(H-precision)», clamp is executed at that speed. When the

setting value is «0», clamp is executed with «#2002 clamp».

(3) Corner deceleration in high-speed mode

During high-accuracy control, if the angle between the adjacent blocks in the machining program is large, this

function, conventionally, automatically decelerates the machining so that the acceleration generated when

passing through the corner is maintained within the tolerable value.

If a fine block is inserted at the corner section in the machining program generated with the CAM, etc., the

corner passing speed will not match the periphery. This can affect the machining surface.

In the corner deceleration in the high-speed mode, even when this type of fine block is inserted, the corner will

be judged from a vantage point by setting the below parameter.

The fine block is excluded at the judgment of an angle, but is not excluded from the actual movement

command.

(a) When»#8036 CordecJudge» is set to «1», corner deceleration is realized without an influence of fine

blocks.

Related parameters Details

#8034 AccClampt ON

0 : Clamp the cutting speed with parameter «#2002 clamp» (Note 1) or the corner deceleration function. 1: Cutting speed clamp determined by acceleration reference is also executed.

Speed control by curvature

If the tool moves along the large curvature section without deceleration, a large acceleration is generated resulting in a path error by curving inward.

Related parameters Details

#8036 CordecJudge 0 : Judge the corner from the angle of the neighboring block. 1 : Judge the corner from the angle of the neighboring block, excluding the minute blocks.

#8027 CorJudgeL Exclude shorter block than this setting value.

High-speed mode corner deceleration

R

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

530

Relation with other functions

The modal state must be as shown below when commanding G05.1 Q1 and G05 P10000.

A program error (P34) will occur if these conditions are not satisfied.

When commanding the SSS control, refer to «SSS control» for details.

Although «G05.1 Q1» can be commanded in the modal listed below, correct movement may not be

guaranteed.

Function G code

Tool radius compensation cancel G40

Tool length compensation cancel G44 <- High-speed high-accuracy mode I only

G command mirror image cancel G50.1

Mirror image cancel with parameter settings cancel

Mirror image cancel with signals cancel

Cutting mode G64

User macro modal call cancel G67

Programmable coordinate rotation mode OFF G69.1

Fixed cycle cancel G80

Feed per minute G94

Constant surface speed control OFF G97

User macro interrupt cancel IOF

Function G code

Exact stop check mode G61

Automatic corner override —

Tapping mode G63

Feed per revolution G95

Constant surface speed G96

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

531

(2) The following data can be commanded while the high-speed high-accuracy control I/II mode is ON.

Program error will occur if other data is commanded.

(Note 1) Macro interruption cannot be used. (High-speed high-accuracy control II only)

Function

High-speed high-accuracy

mode G code

I II

Positioning G00

Cutting feed G01 G02 G03

Helical interpolation G02 G03

Plane selection G17 G18 G19

Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42

Tool length compensation G43 G44

Programmable mirror image G50.1 G51.1 G62

Mirror image with parameter settings — — —

Mirror image with signals — — —

Absolute command G90

Incremental command G91

Workpiece coordinate system setting G92

Workpiece coordinate system selection G54 to G59

Machine coordinate system command G53

Subprogram call G22

Parameter input by program G10 L50

Programmable compensation amount input G10 L10

High-speed high-accuracy control I cancel — G05.1 Q0

High-speed high-accuracy control II cancel — G05 P0

Spline control — G05.1 Q2 G05.1 Q0

F code command Fxxx

Sequence No. command Nxxx

Comment command ( )

Optional Block Skip /

Miscellaneous function (Note 1) Mxxx Sxxx Txxx Bxxx

I, J, K, R command for circular interpolation I J K R

Axis movement data X Y Z etc.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

532

Precautions

(1) High-speed high-accuracy control I and II are optional functions.

If «G05.1 Q1» or «G05 P10000» is commanded when the option is not provided, a program error (P39) will

occur.

(2) The automatic operation processing has the priority in the high-speed high-accuracy control I/II modal,

so the screen display, etc., may be delayed.

(3) The speed will decelerate once at the «G05.1 Q1», «G05.1 Q0» and the «G05 P10000″/»P05 P0»

command blocks, so turn ON and OFF when the tool separates from the workpiece.

(4) If an address other than G/Q or P/N is commanded in the «G05.1 Q1», «G05.1 Q0» and «G05 P10000»,

«G05 P0» command blocks, a program error (P33) will occur.

(5) Command the «G05.1 Q1», «G05.1 Q0» and the «G05 P10000», «G05 P0» command in an independent

block.

(6) When carrying out high-speed high-accuracy control I/II operation during tape mode, the machining

speed may be suppressed depending on the program transmission speed and the number of characters

in one block.

(7) If there is no Q or P command in the G05.1 or G05 command block, a program error (P33) will occur.

(8) A decimal point is invalid in the Q or P command.

(9) If the high-speed high-accuracy control I command is issued in the high-speed high-accuracy control II

modal, a program error (P34) will occur.

(10) If the high-speed high-accuracy control II command is issued in the high-speed high-accuracy control I

modal, a program error (P34) will occur.

(11) Variable commands and user macros cannot be used in the high-speed high-accuracy control II modal.

(12) Fairing function is valid for the continuous linear command (G1). Fairing is not possible in the case

below.

(13) In a single block mode, operation stops at the end point of each block.

(14) The G codes for this function are valid when the parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0» is set to «0».

If «G05.1 Q1» is commanded when this setting value is «0», a program error (P34) will occur.

(15) If the polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1) and the cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) are commanded

during the high-speed high-accuracy control II, a program error (P34) will occur.

(16) A program error (P481) will occur if the high-speed high-accuracy control II is commanded during the

polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1) and the cylindrical interpolation (G07.1).

(17) A program error (P33) will occur if the geometric command is issued during the high-speed high-

accuracy control II.

(18) GMSBT macro is not operated during the high-speed high-accuracy control II.

G02 G01G02

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

533

13.18.2 SSS Control

Function and purpose

With conventional high-accuracy control, the angle between two blocks is compared with the corner

deceleration angle to determine whether to execute corner deceleration between the blocks. This can cause

the speed to suddenly change between the blocks with an angle close to the corner deceleration angle,

resulting in scratches or streaks.

With SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control, the user can predict the optimum machining speed, using the large

area of path information. Comparing to the conventional high-accuracy control function, SSS control has more

advanced features listed below so that smoother workpiece cutting surface can be realized.

(1) Speed fluctuation caused by the machining-disturbing blocks (minute stepping or waviness) is

suppressed. Thus, scratches caused by these blocks are reduced.

(2) Even if corner deceleration is not required, the speed is clamped if the predicted acceleration is high.

Furthermore, the machining time can be reduced in machining a program with many corners.

The length of the path direction recognized with SSS control can be adjusted with the machining parameter

«#8091 reference length». The range is increased as the setting value increases, and the effect of the error is

reduced.

(Note) This function is an option. The high-speed high-accuracy control II option is required to use this

function.

Conventional optimum corner deceleration

SSS Control

When corner deceleration angle is or less

When corner deceleration angle is or more

(F) Feedrate (T) Time (a) Do not decelerate (b) Decelerate according to angle

(F)

(T)

(a)

(F)

(T)

(b)

(F)

(T)

(F)

(T)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

534

Detailed description

(1) Following the below procedure to use SSS control.

(a) Turn the following parameters ON beforehand.

Base specification parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0»

Machining parameter «#8090 SSS ON»

(b) Command «G05 P10000 ;» (high-speed high-accuracy control II ON).

-> SSS control is valid until «G05 P0 ;» (high-speed high-accuracy control II OFF) is commanded.

(2) The SSS control can be used during computer link, tape, MDI, IC card or memory modes.

(3) The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.

(4) To command data other than the valid command data, turn the SSS control mode OFF first.

(5) SSS control is valid only for the first part system.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

535

Parameter standard values

The standard values of the parameters related to SSS control are shown below.

(1) Machining parameters

(Note) Reference items for adjusting the parameter

The relation of each parameter, the accuracy and the speed is shown below.

The accuracy and speed required for machining can be adjusted with these settings.

When setting the parameters, adjust the values within the range in which the machine does not

vibrate.

(2) Base specification parameters

(3) Axis specification parameters

# Item Standard value

8019 R COMP 0

8020 DCC ANGLE 10

8021 COMP CHANGE 1

8022 CORNER COMP 0

8023 R COMPEN -20

8029 Fairing L 0

8033 Fairing ON 0

8034 AccClampt ON 0

8036 CordecJudge 0

8037 CorJudgeL 0

Parameter Adjustment target Effect

#8022 CORNER COMP Accuracy at corner section

Large setting = Accuracy increases, speed drops

#8023 R COMPEN Accuracy at curve section

Large setting = Accuracy increases, speed drops

#8092 ClampCoeff Accuracy at curve section

Large setting = Accuracy drops, speed increases (Note) Usually use the standard value and adjust with «#8023».

# Item Standard value

1148 I_G611 Initial high accuracy 0

1205 G0bdcc G0 before interpolation 0

1206 G1bf Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Maximum speed

1207 G1btL Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Time constant

1209 Cirdcc Arc deceleration speed —

1267 ext03/bit0 G code type 1

1572 Cirorp Arc command overlap 0

1568 SfiltG1 G1 soft acceleration/deceleration filter 0

1569 SfiltG0 G0 soft acceleration/deceleration filter 0

1570 Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2 0

# Item Standard value

2010 fwd_g Feed forward gain 70

2068 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain 70

2096 crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed 0

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

536

Relation with other functions

(1) The modal must be set as shown below when SSS control starts.

A program error (P34) will occur if these conditions are not satisfied.

Modal state

Status other than modal

Function Mode

Tool radius compensation mode G40

Programmable mirror image G50.1

Cutting mode G64

Macro modal call mode G67

Program coordinate rotation ON G69.1

Fixed cycle mode G80

Feed per revolution G94

Constant surface speed control mode G97

Interrupt type macro mode IOF

Function Status

Mirror image by parameter setting OFF

Mirror image by external input OFF

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.18 High-speed High-accuracy Control ; G05, G05.1

537

(2) The following functions can be commanded during the SSS control mode.

A program error will occur if any other function is commanded.

— During G code command: Program error (P34)

— Other cases: Program error (P33)

(3) The F1-digit command function cannot be used.

(4) Macro interruption cannot be used.

(5) The override, maximum cutting speed clamp, signal block operation and graphic trace are valid even

during the SSS control mode.

(6) The tool radius compensation command should not be used during the SSS control mode.

(7) Turn the tool radius compensation command ON and OFF during the SSS control mode.

If the SSS control mode is turned OFF before the tool radius compensation is turned OFF, a program

error (P34) will occur.

(8) The geometric IB command is invalid during SSS control, and will be handled as a normal arc command.

Function Command

Positioning G00

Cutting feed G01 G02 G03

Helical interpolation G02 G03

Spiral interpolation G02.1 G03.1

Plane selection G17 G18 G19

Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42

Programmable mirror image G50.1 G51.1 G62

Absolute command G90

Incremental command G91

Subprogram call G22

High-speed high-accuracy control II cancel G05 P0

Spline control G05.1 Q2 G05.1 Q0

F code command Fxxx

Sequence No. command Nxxx

Comment command ( )

Optional Block Skip /

Miscellaneous function (Note 1) Mxxx Sxxx Txxx Bxxx

I, J, K, R command for circular interpolation I J K R

Axis movement data X Y Z etc.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

538

Precautions

(1) Pre-reading is executed during SSS control, so a program error could occur before the block containing

the error is executed.

(2) Buffer correction is not guaranteed during SSS control.

(3) If automatic/manual simultaneous or automatic handle interrupt are used during SSS control, the

machining accuracy will not be guaranteed.

(4) During SSS control, if override is set to «0» in the single block stop state, the «M01 operation error 0102

override zero» will occur.

(5) If a fine arc command is issued during SSS control, it may take longer to machine.

(6) A program error (P33) will occur if the external input mirror image is applied during SSS control.

(7) The same path as single block operation will be used during graphic check.

(8) The line under the cutting feedrate and arc command block are subjected to the speed control in the SSS

control. The command blocks that are not subjected to speed control, decelerate first and automatically

switch the SSS control ON and OFF.

(9) SSS control is temporally disabled in the following modal:

— NURBS interpolation

— Polar coordinate interpolation

— Cylindrical interpolation

— User macro interruption enable (ION)

— Feed per revolution (synchronous feed)

— Inverse time feed

— Constant surface speed control

— Fixed cycle

— 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

— Hypothetical axis interpolation

(10) There are some restrictions for each high-accuracy control. Refer to each section for restrictions.

— «High-accuracy control; G61.1, G08»

— «High-speed high-accuracy control ; G05, G05.1»

(11) Fairing is disabled during the SSS control.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

539

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

Function and purpose

This function automatically generates a spline curve that passes through a sequence of points commanded by

the fine segment machining program, and interpolates the path along this curve. This allows highly accurate

machining at a high speed.

The spline function can be commanded when the machining parameter «#8025 SPLINE ON» is set to «1» in

the high-speed high-accuracy control function II mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The following

explanation is limited to the spline function in the high-speed high-accuracy control function II mode.

Command format

G05.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0 ; … Spline mode ON

G05.1 Q0; … Spline mode OFF

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

540

Detailed description

Temporary cancellation of spline interpolation

Normally, once the spline function is activated, one curve is generated by smoothly connecting all points until

it is canceled. However, if a corner edge should be created, or if the segment length is long and spline

interpolation should not to be carried out, the function can be canceled temporarily with the parameters.

(1) Cancel angle

If the angle of two consecutive blocks exceeds the value set in parameter «#8026 CANCEL ANG.», the

spline function will be temporarily canceled, and optimum corner deceleration will be applied. When this

parameter is not set (=0), the spline interpolation will be constantly applied. The parameter of the high-

accuracy control function «#8020 DCC ANGLE» is valid during the temporary cancellation, and the

optimum corner deceleration will be applied.

(Example 1) Cancel angle = 60

(Example 2) Cancel angle = 0

(Note 1) If the section to be a corner is smooth when actual machining is carried out, lower the «#8026

CANCEL ANG.». If a smooth section becomes a corner, increase the «#8026 CANCEL ANG.».

(Note 2) If «#8026 CANCEL ANG.» >= «#8020″ DCC ANGLE», the axis will decelerate at all corners where

the angle is larger than the «#8026 CANCEL ANG.» .

(Note 3) If the «#8026 CANCEL ANG.» < «#8020″ DCC ANGLE», corner deceleration will not be applied if the

corner angle is equal to or less than «#8020″ DCC ANGLE» even if the spline interpolation is

canceled.

Program command Spline interpolation path

Program command Spline interpolation path

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

541

(2) Fine segment length

If the movement amount in a block is longer than the parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH», the spline

function will be temporarily canceled, and the linear interpolation will be executed. When this parameter

is not set (= 0), the fine segment length will be 1mm.

When the segment length in a block > fine segment length (#8030 MINUTE LENGTH), the linear

interpolation will be executed.

If #8030 is set to «-1», the spline interpolation will not be canceled according to the block length.

(3) When a block without movement exists

If a block without movement exists during the spline function is operating, the spline interpolation will be

canceled temporarily. Note that blocks containing only «;» will not be viewed as a block without

movement.

(a) Linear interpolation

(b) Block without movement

(a)

(b)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

542

(4) When a block markedly longer than other blocks exists in spline function

Given that the i-th block length is Li in the spline interpolation mode and if the following condition is met,

«Li > Li — 1 8» or «Li > Li + 1 8»

the block will be interpreted as a linear section, and the spline mode will be temporarily canceled.

However, if the parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH» is set to «-1», the mode will not be canceled.

Spline interpolation curve shape correction

Normally, once the spline function is enabled, one curve is generated by connecting all points smoothly until

the function is canceled. But if the spline curve shape should be corrected, the spline curve shape can be

corrected with the parameters.

(1) Chord error of block containing inflection point

When changing the CAD curve data into fine segments with the CAM, normally, the tolerance (chord

error) of the curve is approximated in segments that are approx. 10m. If there is an inflection point in

the curve, the length of the block containing the inflection point may lengthen. (Because the tolerance is

applied at both ends near the inflection

point.) If the block lengths with this block and the previous and subsequent blocks are unbalanced, the

spline curve in this block may have a large error in respect to the original curve.

At sections where the tolerance (chord error) of the fine segment block and spline curve in a block

containing this type of inflection point, if the chord error in the corresponding section is larger than the

value set in parameter (#8027 Toler-1), the spline curve shape is automatically corrected so that the

error is within the designated value. However, if the maximum chord error of the corresponding section is

more than five times larger than the parameter «Toler-1» setting value, the spline function will be

temporarily canceled.

The curve is corrected only in the corresponding block.

The corrections are carried out under the following conditions for each block in the spline interpolation

mode.

Li > Li-1 8 or Li > Li + 1 8

There is an inflection point in the spline curve, and the maximum error of the spline curve and linear block is larger than parameter «Toler-1». (Distance between P3-P4 in Fig. 1)

Li+1Li — 1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

543

When the above conditions are satisfied, the spline curve will be corrected so that the error between

P3-P4 in Fig. 2 is within the designated value.

In parameter «Toler-1», set the tolerance when developed into fine segments with the CAM. Set a smaller

value if the expansion (indentation) is apparent due to the relation with the adjacent cutting paths.

(a) Tolerance (chord error) (b) Spline curve (c) Inflection point (d) Fine segment

Fig. 1 Spline curve before error correction

(e) Chord error designated in the parameter «Toler-1» (f) Spline curve before correction (g) Spline curve after correction

Fig. 2 Spline curve after error correction

P0

P1

P2 P3

P4

P5 P6

P7

(a) (b)

(d)

(c)

P3

P4

(e)

(f)

(g)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

544

(2) Chord error of block not containing inflection point

Even in blocks that do not contain an inflection point, if the block lengths are not matched, the tolerance

of the spline curve may increase. The curve may also expand due to the effect of relatively short blocks.

At sections where the tolerance (chord error) between the fine segment block and spline curve in a block

without an inflection point becomes large, if the chord error in the corresponding section is larger than the

value set in parameter (#8028 Toler-2), the spline curve shape is automatically corrected so that the

error is within the designated value. However, if the maximum chord error of the corresponding section is

more than five times larger than the parameter «Toler-2» setting value, the spline function will be

temporarily canceled.

The curve is corrected only in the corresponding block.

The corrections are carried out under the following conditions for each block in the spline interpolation

mode.

When the above conditions are satisfied, the spline curve will be corrected so that the error between

P2-P3 in Fig. 4 is within the designated value.

In parameter «Toler-2», set the tolerance when developed into fine segments with the CAM.

There is no inflection point in the spline curve, and the maximum error of the spline curve and linear block is larger than parameter «Toler-2».(Distance between P2-P3 in Fig. 3)

(a) Tolerance (chord error) (b) Spline curve (d) Fine segment

Fig. 3 Spline curve before error correction

(e) Chord error designation parameter «Toler-2» (f) Spline curve before correction (g) Spline curve after correction

Fig. 4 Spline curve after error correction

P3P2

P4

P1

P5

(a)

(b)

(d)

P3P2

P4

P1

P5

(e) (f)

(g)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

545

Curvature speed clamp

The commanded speed F for the spline function during a segment linear arc will be the speed commanded in

the previously set modal. However, if the axis is fed with the same speed, excessive acceleration may occur

at the sections where the curvature is large (where curvature radius is small) as shown below. Thus, the

speed clamp will be applied.

With the spline function, the high-accuracy control function is always valid. Thus, even if the curvature

changes such as in this curve, the speed will be clamped so that the tolerable value for pre-interpolation

acceleration/deceleration, which is calculated with the parameters, is not exceeded.

The clamp speed is set for each block, and the smaller of the curvature radius Rs at the curve block start point

and the curvature radius Re at the end point of the block will be used as the main curvature radius R. Using

this main curvature radius R, the clamp speed F’ will be calculated with expression (1).

The smaller of this clamp speed F’ and the commanded speed F will be incorporated for the actual feedrate.

This allows cutting with an adequate feedrate corresponding the curvature radius along the entire curve.

Acceleration and curvature

(a) Curvature small (b) Acceleration small (c) Acceleration large

(d) Curvature large F: Feed command speed (mm/min)

Rs : Block start point curvature radius (mm)

Re : Block end point curvature radius (mm)

R : Block main curvature radius (mm) (smaller one of Rs and Re)

V : Tolerable value of pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

F’ : Clamp speed (mm/min)

G1bF : Target pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

G1btL : Acceleration/deceleration time to reach the target speed

Ks : #8019 R COMP (Accuracy coefficient)

F

F(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Rs

Re

F’

V = G1bF(mm/min)

G1btL(ms)

F’ = R V 60 1000 (1) 100- Ks

100

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

546

Program example

(1) The spline function carries out spline interpolation when the following conditions are all satisfied. If the

following conditions are not satisfied, the spline function will be canceled once, and the judgment

whether to carry out new spline from the next block will be made.

— When the block length is shorter than the machining parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH».

— When the movement amount is not 0.

— When one of the following modes is entered.

G01: Linear interpolation, G40: Tool compensation cancel, G64: Cutting mode,

G80: Fixed cycle cancel, G94: Per minute feed

— When only an axis commanded with G05.1Q2 is commanded.

— Graphic check is not being carried out.

— A single block is not being executed.

(2) During the spline function mode, the command to the axis must be issued after G05.1 Q2 in the same

block. For example, if the X axis and Y axis are to be commanded in the spline function mode, command

«G05.1 Q2 X0 Y0;». The command block containing an axis not designated with this command (G05.1

Q2 X0 Y0) in the spline function mode will carry out linear interpolation instead of spline interpolation.

(3) If G05.1 Q2 is commanded when not in the high-speed high-accuracy control function II mode (between

G05 P10000 and G05 P0), the program error (P34) will occur.

(4) If the machining parameter «#8025 SPLINE ON» is «0» in the high-speed high-accuracy control function II

mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0) and G05.1 Q2 is commanded, the program error (P34) will

occur.

(5) Up to three axes set as the basic axes I, J and K can be commanded for the spline function.

:

G91;

G05 P10000; ———- High-accuracy control mode ON

:

G05.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0; ———- Spline mode ON

G01 X1000 Z-300 F1000;

X1000 Z-200;

Y1000;

X-1000 Z-50;

X-1000 Z-300;

G05.1 Q0; ———- Spline mode OFF

:

G05 P0 ; ———- High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF

:

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.19 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0

547

Precautions

(1) The spline function will be canceled during graphic check.

(2) This function is valid when the base specification parameters «#1267 ext03/bit0» is set to «1». If «G05.1

Q2″ is set to «0», the program error (P34) will occur.

(3) If this function are not provided and «G05.1 Q2» is commanded, the program error (P39) will occur.

(4) Even if «-1» is set for parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH», the spline function will be temporarily

canceled by the cancel conditions (cancel angle, non-movement block, excessive chord error, etc.) other

than the block length.

(5) Command «G05.1 Q2» and «G05.1 Q0» commands in independent blocks.

The program error (P33) will occur if these are not commanded in independent blocks.

(6) The program error (P33) will occur if the G05.1 command block does not contain a Q command.

(7) The program error (P33) will occur if the number of axis in the part system does not exceed 3.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

548

13.20 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation ; G61.2

Function and purpose

This function automatically generates a spline curve that passes through a sequence of points commanded by

the fine segment machining program, and interpolates the path along this curve. This allows highly accurate

machining at a high speed.

This function has two functions; fairing function to delete unnecessary fine blocks, and spline interpolation

function to connect smoothly a sequence of points commanded by the program.

The high-accuracy control function G61.1 is also valid.

The high-accuracy spline Interpolation is valid only for the first part system.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Fairing

Refer to «Additional functions when high-speed high-accuracy control II mode is ON» in «High-speed

high-accuracy control».

(2) Spline interpolation

Refer to «Detailed description» of «Spline».

Function Details

Fairing Super-fine blocks often included in the data generated with CAM are deleted. Such a super-fine block may scratch the machining surface, and increase machining time because of acceleration/ deceleration. This function avoids these troubles.

Spline interpolation

The spline interpolation connects smoothly a sequence of points commanded by program. As a result, the glossy machining surface can be obtained, and the machining time can be reduced because the frequency of the corner deceleration decreases compared with conventional linear interpolation.

G61.2 X__ Y__ Z__ F__ ; or G61.2 ; … Spline mode ON

X X axis end point coordinate

Y Y axis end point coordinate

Z Z axis end point coordinate

F Feedrate

G64 ; … Spline mode OFF

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.20 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation ; G61.2

549

Program example

(1) The spline interpolation is available when the following conditions are all satisfied. If the following

conditions are not satisfied, the spline function will be canceled once, and the judgment whether to carry

out new spline from the next block will be made.

— It is the movement only of three axes set to the basic axes I, J and K.

— When the block length is shorter than the machining parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH».

— When the movement amount is not 0.

— The group 1 command is G01 (linear interpolation).

— Operation in fixed cycle modal

— It is not during hypothetical axis interpolation mode.

— It is not during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal.

— It is not in a single block mode.

(2) The spline function is a modal command of group 13. This function is valid from G61.2 command block.

(3) The spline function is canceled by group 13 commands (G61 to G64).

(4) The spline function is canceled by NC reset 2, reset & rewind, NC reset 1 (the setting which does not

hold modal when NC is reset) or power ON/OFF.

Precautions

(1) This function is valid when the base specification parameters «#1267 ext03/bit0» is set to «0». If «G61.2» is

commanded when «1» is set, program error (P34) will occur.

(2) If this function are not provided and G61.2 is commanded, the program error (P39) will occur.

(3) Even if «-1» is set for parameter «#8030 MINUTE LENGTH», the spline function will be temporarily

canceled by the cancel conditions (cancel angle, non-movement block, excessive chord error, etc.) other

than the block length.

(4) Graphic check will draw the shape of when the spline interpolation OFF.

(5) A program error (P34) will occur if the number of axis in part system does not exceed 3.

: G91 ; G61.2 ; …………………. High-accuracy spline interpolation mode ON G01 X0.1 Z0.1 F1000 ; X0.1 Z-0.2 ; Y0.1 ; X-0.1 Z-0.05 ; X-0.1 Z-0.3 ; G64 ; ……………………. High-accuracy spline interpolation mode OFF :

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

550

13.21 Scaling ; G50/G51

Function and purpose

By multiplying the moving axis command values within the range specified under this command by the factor,

the shape commanded by the program can be enlarged or reduced to the desired size.

Command format

Scaling ON (set the common scaling factor to the three basic axes)

Scaling ON (When setting the scaling factor to each of the three basic axes)

Scaling cancel

G51 X__ Y__ Z__ P__ ;

X,Y,Z Scaling center coordinates

P Scaling factor

sc : Scaling center

p1,p2,p3: Program shape s1,s2,s3: Shape after scaling

G51 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ ;

X,Y,Z Scaling center coordinates

I Scaling factor of basic 1st axis

J Scaling factor of basic 2nd axis

K Scaling factor of basic 3rd axis

G50 ;

sc s1

s3s2

p2

p1

p3

Y

Xx1

y1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.21 Scaling ; G50/G51

551

Detailed description

Specifying the scaling axis, scaling center and its factor

Commanding G51 selects the scaling mode. The G51 command only specifies the scaling axis, its center and

factor, and does not move the axis.

Though the scaling mode is selected by the G51 command, the axis actually valid for scaling is the axis where

the scaling center has been specified.

(1) Scaling center

— Specify the scaling center in accordance with the then absolute/incremental mode (G90/G91).

— The scaling center must be specified also when the current position is defined as a center.

— As described above, the axis valid for scaling is only the axis whose center has been specified.

(2) Scaling factor

— Use the address P or I, J, K to specify the scaling factor.

— Minimum command unit : 0.000001

— Command range: Both -99999999 to 99999999 (-99.999999 to 99.999999 times) and -99.999999 to

99.999999 is valid, but the decimal point command is valid only after the G51 command.

— When the factor is not specified in the same block as G51, the factor set with the parameter «#8072

SCALING P» is used.

— When the address P and the address I, J, K are commanded in a same block, a factor specified by the

address I, J, K is applied for the basic three axes. And a factor specified by the address P is applied for

other axes.

— If changed during the scaling mode, the value of this parameter will not become valid. Scaling is

performed with the setting value that was used when G51 was commanded.

— When the factor is not specified in either the program nor parameter, it is calculated as 1.

(3) A program error will occur in the following cases.

— Scaling was commanded though there was no scaling specification. (P350)

— The upper limit of the factor command range was exceeded in the same block as G51. (P35)

(When using the machining parameter scaling factor, the factor is calculated as 1,

when -0.000001 < factor < 0.000001, or the factor is more than 99.999999 or less than -99.999999. )

Scaling cancel

When G50 is commanded, scaling is canceled.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

552

Program example

(Example 1)

(a) Scaling center

(b) Program path after 1/2 scaling (c) Tool path after 1/2 scaling

(d) Program path when scaling is not applied (e) Tool path when scaling is not applied

N01 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; N02 G90 G51 X-100. Y-100. P0.5; N03 G00 G43 Z-200. H02; N04 G41 X-50. Y-50. D01; N05 G01 Z-250. F1000; N06 Y-150. F200; N07 X-150.; N08 G02 Y-50. J50.; N09 G01 X-50.; N10 G00 G44 Z0; N11 G40 G50 X0 Y0; N12 M02;

— 50.- 100.- 150.- 200.

— 50.

— 100.

— 150.

N06

N07

N08

N09 N03 N11

D01=25.000

Y

X

(a)

(b) (c)

(e) (d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.21 Scaling ; G50/G51

553

Relation with other functions

(1) G27 reference position check command

When G27 is commanded during scaling, scaling is canceled at completion of the command.

(2) Reference position return command (G28, G29, G30)

When the G28, G30 or reference position return command is issued during scaling, scaling is canceled

at the midpoint and the axis returns to the reference position. When the midpoint is to be ignored, the

axis returns to the reference point directly.

When G29 is commanded during scaling, scaling is applied to the movement after the midpoint.

(3) G60 (unidirectional positioning) command

If the G60 (unidirectional positioning) command is given during scaling, scaling is applied to the final

positioning point and is not applied to the creep amount. Namely, the creep amount is uniform

regardless of scaling.

(4) Workpiece coordinate system switching

When the workpiece coordinate system is switched during scaling, the scaling center is shifted by the

difference between the offset amounts of the new and old workpiece coordinate systems.

(5) During figure rotation

When figure rotation is commanded during scaling, scaling is applied to the center of the figure rotation

and the rotation radius.

(6) Scaling command in figure rotation subprogram

By commanding the scaling in the subprogram of the figure rotation, scaling can be applied only to the

shape designated by the subprogram, not to the rotation radius of the figure rotation.

(7) During coordinate rotation

When scaling is commanded during coordinate rotation, the scaling center rotates. Scaling is executed at

that rotated scaling center.

(8) G51 command

When the G51 command is issued during the scaling mode, the axis whose center was newly specified

is also made valid for scaling. Also, the factor under the latest G51 command is made valid.

Precautions

(1) Scaling is not applied to the compensation amounts of tool radius compensation, tool position

compensation, tool length compensation and the like. (Compensation is calculated for the shape after

scaling.)

(2) Scaling is valid for only the movement command in automatic operation. It is invalid for manual

movement.

(3) For X, Y and Z, scaling is valid for only the specified axes and is not applied to unspecified axes.

(4) When an arc is commanded and scaling is valid for one of the two axes configuring the arc plane, a

program error (P70) will occur.

(5) When M02 or M30 is commanded, or when NC reset is carried out during the scaling mode, the mode

switches to a cancel mode.

(6) When the coordinate system is shifted (G92, G52 command) during scaling, the scaling center is also

shifted by the difference amount.

(7) If manual interruption is made during scaling, manual ABS selection is ignored for the movement

followed by an incremental value command and operation performed is the same as in manual ABS

OFF.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

554

13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1

Function and purpose

When machining a complicated shape located in a rotated position in respect to the coordinate system, this

function enables to machine the rotated shape with the program for the shape before rotation on the local

coordinate system and with the rotation angle designated by the program coordinate rotation command.

Command format

Select the command plane with G17 to G19.

G68.1 X__ Y__ R__; … Coordinate rotation ON

X,Y Rotation center coordinates Two axes (X,Y or Z) corresponding to the selected plane are designated with absolute positions.

R Rotation angle The counterclockwise direction is +.

G69.1 ; … Coordinate rotation cancel

W : Original local coordinate W’ : Rotated local coordinate system r1 : Rotation angle (x1, y1) Rotation center

r1 (x1,y1)

W

W’

x1

X’

X

Y’

Y

y1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1

555

Detailed description

(1) Always command the rotation center coordinate (x1, y1) with an absolute value. Even if commanded with

an incremental address, it will not be handled as an incremental value. The rotation angle «r1» depends

on the G90/G91 modal.

(2) If the rotation center coordinates (x1, y1) are omitted, the position where the G68.1 command was

executed will be the rotation center.

(3) The rotation takes place in the counterclockwise direction by the angle designated in rotation angle r1.

(4) The rotation angle r1 setting range is -360.000 to 360.000. If a command exceeding 360 degrees is

issued, the remainder divided by 360 degrees will be the command.

(5) Since the rotation angle «r1» is modal data, if once commanded, it will not be changed until the new angle

is commanded. Thus, the command of rotation angle «r1″can be omitted.

If the rotation angle is omitted in spite that G68.1 is commanded for the first time, «r1» will be regarded as

0.

(6) The program coordinate rotation is a function used on the local coordinate system. The relation of the

rotated coordinate system, workpiece coordinate system and basic machine coordinate system is shown

below.

(7) The coordinate rotation command during coordinate rotation is processed as the changes of center

coordinates and rotation angle.

(8) If M02 or M30 is commanded or the reset signal is input during the coordinate rotation mode, the

coordinate rotation mode will be canceled.

(9) G68.1 is displayed on the modal information screen during the coordinate rotation mode. When the

mode is canceled, the display changes to G69.1. (The modal value is not displayed for the rotation angle

command R.)

(10) The program coordinate rotation function is valid only in the automatic operation mode.

(R) Rotation angle

(L) Local coordinate system

(W) Workpiece coordinate system

(M) Basic machine coordinate system

(x1,y1)=(0,0)

(R)

(L)

(W)

(M)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

556

Program example

Program coordinate rotation by absolute command

N01 G28 X0. Y0.;

N02 G54 G52 X200. Y100. ; Local coordinate designation

N03 T10 ;

N04 G68.1 X-100. Y0. R60. ; Coordinate rotation ON

N05 G22 H101 ; Subprogram execution

N06 G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel

N07 G54 G52 X0 Y0 ; Local coordinate system cancel

N08 M02 ; End

Subprogram (Shape programmed with original coordinate system) N101 G00 X-100. Y-40.; N102 G83 X-150. R-20. Q-10. F100 ; N103 G00 Y40. ; N104 G83 X-150. R-20. Q-10. F100 ; N105 G23

(a) Actual machining shape (b) Program coordinate (W) Local coordinates (before rotation)

— 100.

— 100.

100.

Y

X

100. 200.- 100. N101

N102

N103

N104

Y’ X’

60(a)

(b)

(W)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1

557

Operation when only one axis was commanded by the first movement command

Command basically two axes in the rotation plane by an absolute value immediately after the coordinate

rotation command.

When commanding one axis only, the following two kinds of operations can be selected by the parameter

«#19003 PRG coord rot type».

(1) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «1», the operation is the same as when «N04» is «X50.Y0.». The

end point is calculated on the assumption that the start point rotates along with the coordinates’ rotation.

(2) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «0», only axis commanded in N04 (X’ Axis) is moved. The start

point does not rotate along with the coordinate rotation; therefore the end position is calculated based on

the current position on local coordinate system before rotation.

N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

N02 G90 G92 G53 X0. Y0.;

N03 G68.1 X40. Y0. R90.; Coordinate rotation ON

N04 X50.;G04 X5. ;

N05 Y50.;

N06 G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel

N07 M02 ; End

Machine movement path (S) Start point

(a) Rotation center (b) The start point is rotated virtually

(W) Local coordinate system before rotation (W’) Local coordinate system after rotation

N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

N02 G90 G92 G53 X0. Y0.;

N03 G68.1 X40. Y0. R90.; Coordinate rotation ON

N04 X50.;G04 X5. ;

N05 Y50.;

N06 G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel

N07 M02 ; End

Machine movement path (S) Start point

(a) Rotation center

(W) Local coordinate system before rotation (W’) Local coordinate system after rotation

N04

Y

X

X

Y

N05

X=-10

Y=10(X,Y)=(50,50)

(X ,Y)=(0,0)

X=50

Y=50

(X,Y)=(40,40)

(a)

(S)

(b)

(W)

(W1)

N04

Y

X

X’

Y’

N05

X=-10

Y=10 X’ =50

Y’=50

(X ,Y )=(40,40)

(X’,Y’)=(0,0)

(X,Y)=(50,50) (a)

(S)

(W)

(W1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

558

Local coordinate designation during program coordinate rotation

(1) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «0», the position commanded on the rotated coordinate system is

set as the local coordinate zero point.

(2) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «1», the position commanded on the coordinate system before it is

rotated, is set as the local coordinate zero point and the local coordinate will be rotated.

N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

N02 G90 G92 G53 X0. Y0.;

N03 G68.1 X20. Y0. R90.; Coordinate rotation ON

N04 G52 X10. Y10.; Local coordinate designation

N05 X20.;

N06 Y10.;

N07 G69.1 ; Coordinate rotation cancel W : Workpiece coordinate system

N08 M02 ; End L : Local coordinate system

(1) Operation of #19003 = 0 (2) Operation of #19003 = 1

N03

Workpiece coordinate system is rotated virtually. Workpiece coordinate system is not rotated.

N04

The workpiece coordinate zero point after rotation is considered as (X,Y)=(0,0). The position after shifted by 10 each in the X and Y direction is set as the local coordinate zero point. * The direction of the shift is not the direction of X’ and Y’.

Designate the local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system.

N05

The commanded axis moves on the rotation coordinate system. * Axis without movement command does not move.

The commanded axis moves on the rotation coordinate system. * Axis without movement command moves to the position on rotation coordinate system.

N06

Y

X

Y’ Y=- 20

X=20

W

X’

W ‘

(Rotation center)

(Workpiece coordinate systm after rotation)

(Workpiece coordinate system is rotated virtually.)

Y,Y’

X,X’W,W ‘

Y

X

Y’

X=30

Y=- 10

X’ X»

W

L

(X,Y)=(10,10) (X,Y)=(0,0) (Local coordinate

designation)

Y,Y’

X,X’

X=30

Y=- 10

W,W’

L (Rotation center) (Local coordinate designation)

Y

X

(X» ,Y» )=(10,30)

(X» ,Y» )=(20,30)

Y=10

L

W

Start point: Y

X

(X» ,Y» )=( — 10, — 10)

(X» ,Y» )=(20, — 10)(X» ,Y» )=(10,30) Y=10

X=40

L

W

(Rotation center)

(The start point is rotated virtually.) Start point:

Y

X

(X» ,Y» )=(20,30) (X» ,Y» )=(20,10)Y=10

X=30

L

W

(Local coordinate system)

Y

X

(X» ,Y» )=(20, — 10)

(X» ,Y» )=(20,10) Y=10

X=40X=20

L

W

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1

559

Coordinate system designation during program coordinate rotation

When the coordinate system setting (G92) is executed during program coordinate rotation (G68.1), this

program operates same as «Local coordinate designation during program coordinate rotation».

(1) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «0», the position is preset to the current position commanded on

the rotated coordinate system.

(Ex.) Designation on the coordinate system (X’-Y’) after rotation

(2) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «1», the position is preset to the current position commanded on

the coordinate system before rotation. The coordinate system is rotated after the position is

commanded.

(Ex.) Setting on the coordinate system (X-Y) after rotation

(Note 1) When «#19003 PRG coord rot type» is «1»and the coordinate system setting (G92) is executed

during coordinate rotation mode, the rotation center of program coordinate rotation is not shifted.

(The same position in respect to the basic machine coordinate system)

(a) Position after rotation (b) Commanded position (c) G92 shift amount

(a) Position after rotation (b) Commanded position (c) G92 shift amount

G54(0, 0) X

Y

X’

Y’

10.

10.

G68.1 X0 Y0 R30. G0 X10. Y10. G92 X0. Y0.

G54(0, 0) X

Y

X’

Y’

10. 10.

(a)

(b)

(c)

G54(0, 0) X

Y

X’

Y’

10.

10.

G68.1 X0 Y0 R30. G0 X10. Y10. G92 X0. Y0.

G54(0, 0) X

Y

X’

Y’

10.

10.

(a)

(b)

(c)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

560

Relation with other functions

(1) Program error (P111) will occur if the plane selection code is commanded during the coordinate rotation

mode.

(2) Program error (P485) will occur if pole coordinate interpolation is commanded during the coordinate

rotation mode.

(3) Program error (P481) will occur if coordinate rotation is commanded during the pole coordinate

interpolation mode.

(4) Program error (P485) will occur if cylindrical interpolation is commanded during the coordinate rotation

mode.

(5) Program error (P481) will occur if coordinate rotation is commanded during the cylindrical interpolation

mode.

(6) Program error (P34) will occur if the workpiece coordinate system preset (G92.1) is commanded during

the coordinate rotation mode.

(7) Program error (P34) will occur if high-accuracy control mode, high-speed machining mode, high-speed

high-accuracy I or II is commanded during the coordinate rotation mode.

(8) Program coordinate rotation and figure rotation cannot be carried out simultaneously. If the coordinate

rotation is commanded during the figure rotation and vice versa, a program error (P252) will occur.

(9) If the tool position offset is commanded during the coordinate rotation mode, a program error (P141) will

occur.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.22 Coordinate Rotation by Program ; G68.1/G69.1

561

Precautions

(1) Always command an absolute value for the movement command immediately after G68.1 and G69.1.

(2) If the manual absolute is ON and interrupted the coordinate rotation axis, then, do not use automatic

operation for the following absolute value command.

(3) The intermediate point during reference point return is the position after the coordinates are rotated.

(4) If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during the coordinate rotation mode, the

rotation center for the program coordinate rotation will be shifted. (The center will follow the coordinate

system.)

(5) If the workpiece coordinates are changed during the coordinate rotation mode (ex. from G54 to G55), the

rotation center of the program coordinate rotation will be the position on the coordinate system which the

command was issured. (The same position in respect to the basic machine coordinate system)

(6) If coordinate rotation is executed to the G00 command for only one axis, two axes will move. If G00 non-

interpolation (parameter «#1086 G0Intp» = 1) is set, each axis will move independently at the respective

rapid traverse rates. If the axis must be moved linearly (interpolated) from the start point to the end point

(such as during the hole machining cycle), always turn G00 non-interpolation OFF (parameter «#1086

GOIntp» = 0). The feedrate in this case is the composite speed of each axis’ rapid traverse rate, so the

movement speed will be faster than when moving only one axis (before coordinate rotation).

(7) If the coordinate rotation specifications are not provided, a program error (P260) will occur when

coordinate rotation is commanded.

(8) The compensation during the coordinate rotation mode is carried out to the local coordinate system after

coordinate rotation. The compensation direction is the coordinate system before rotation.

(9) Mirror image during the coordinate rotation mode is applied on the local coordinate system after

coordinate rotation.

(10) On the display, the positions after rotation is always displayed on the local coordinate system before

rotation.

(11) When the coordinate value variables are read, the positions are all on the coordinate system before

rotation.

(12) The coordinates can also be rotated for the parallel axis. Select the plane that contains the parallel axis

before issuing the G68.1 command. The plane cannot be selected in the same block as the G68.1

command.

(13) The coordinates can be rotated for the rotation axis. The angle will be interpreted as the length when

rotating.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

562

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

Function and purpose

If a deviation occurs between the workpiece alignment line and machine coordinate system’s coordinate axis

when the workpiece is mounted, the machine can be controlled by rotating the machining program

coordinates according to the workpiece alignment line deviation. The coordinate rotation amount is set with

the parameters. The parameter can be set on the parameter setting screen or with the G10 command.

Note that when the G10 command is used, the optional specification «parameter input by program» is

required.

(a) Center of rotation (b) Rotation angle

Ym

Xm

G56

G54

G55

G57

W1′

W2′

W3′

W4′

M

W1

W2

(a) (b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

563

Command format

Parameters specified in the parameter setting screen can be changed from the machining program.

Refer to «M700V/M70V Series Instruction Manual(IB-1500922)» for setting and contents of the parameter.

Detailed description

(1) As for the rotation center coordinate position, designate the position on the machine coordinate system.

(2) All workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59, G54.1 rotate with the rotation command.

While the machine coordinate system does not rotate, it can be understood that there is a hypothetical

machine coordinate system in the coordinate system after rotation.

(3) The coordinate value counter does not rotate. The position in the original workpiece coordinate system

(non-rotated) is displayed.

(4) If the setting is made on the parameter setting screen, the setting is validated with the cycle start after the

parameter is set. If set with the G10 command, settings are immediately validated.

G10 I__ J__ ;

G10 K__ ;

I

Horizontal vector. Command a value corresponding to Coord rot vctr (H) which is set in the parameter input screen. Command range: -999999.999 to 999999.999 Coordinate rotation angle is automatically calculated when commanding vector contents.

J

Vertical vector. Command a value corresponding to Coord rot vctr (V) which is set in the parameter input screen. Command range: -999999.999 to 999999.999 Coordinate rotation angle is automatically calculated when commanding vector contents.

K

Rotation angle Command a value corresponding to Coord rot angle which is set in the parameter input screen. Command range: -360.000 to 360.000 Set the vector contents to 0 when commanding coordinate rotation angle.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

564

Coordinate rotation start

The coordinate rotation starts when the following parameters are changed. (When the same value is reset to

the parameter, it is not considered as change)

When the parameter «#8116 coordinate rotation parameter invalid» is «1» or the parameter «#8627 coordinate

rotation angle» is «0», coordinate rotation will not start.

#8621 Coord rot plane(H)

#8622 Coord rot plane(V)

#8623 Coord rot centr(H)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V)

#8625 Coord rot vctr(H)

#8626 Coord rot vctr(V)

#8627 Coord rot angle

#8116 CoordRotPara invd

First movement command after coordinate rotation

When programming the fist movement command after the coordinate rotation, use the two axes of the rotated

plane by absolute value in G00 or G01 mode.

When the following commands are executed, the motion differs by setting of the parameter «#19008 PRM

coord rot type».

— Command to an axis the configuring rotation plane by the absolute value

— Command by incremental value

— Command by circular interpolation

The operation will be the same when the first movement command after reset is executed.

Coordinate rotation temporary cancel

The coordinate rotation by parameter is temporarily canceled when in (1) or (2) as follows.

(1) Reference position return command (G28, G30)

If reference position return is performed on any of the axes in the rotated coordinate system (horizontal

axis or vertical axis), both of the two axes will temporarily cancel the coordinate rotation.

However moving to the intermediate point will not be temporarily canceled, but it will keep operating.

(2) Basic machine coordinate system selection (G53)

Only the commanded axis of basic machine coordinate system selection (G53) will be temporarily cancel

the coordinate rotation.

When programming the first movement command after the temporary cancel , use the two axes of the rotated

plane by absolute value in G00 or G01 mode.

The operation of the first movement command after the temporary cancel is the same as when the parameter

«#19008 PRM coord rot type» is set to «0» in «First movement command after coordinate rotation»

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

565

First movement command after coordinate rotation cancel

When rotation angle «0» is commanded during coordinate rotation, it will be canceled by next movement

command regardless of G90 and G91.

The calculation of the end point will be different by setting of the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type».

(1) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «0».

The end point is calculated on the assumption that the start point rotates along with the coordinate

rotation cancel.

Program the first movement command after coordinate rotation cancel either G00 or G01 mode.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G54 G90 X50.Y50.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K0.; (Coordinate rotation cancel)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G91 G00 X20. Y10.;(Incremental value command to two axes)

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): Actual axis position

(c): Start point rotated virtually along with the coordinate rotation cancel

(d): N04 Commanded path

(e): N04 Actual movement path

(f): N04 End point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

566

(2) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «1».

The start point does not rotate along with the coordinate rotation cancel; therefore the end point position

is calculated based on the current position on local coordinate system before rotation.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G54 G90 X50.Y50.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K0.; (Coordinate rotation cancel)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G91 G00 X20. Y10.;(Incremental value command to two axes)

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): The actual axis position and start point position are the same

(d): N04 Commanded path

(e): N04 Actual movement path

(f): N04 End point

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

567

Operation example

Operation when two axes configuring the rotation plane are commanded by absolute value

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation cancel)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G54 G90 G00 X20. Y10.;(Absolute value command to two axes)

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): Actual axis position

(c): Workpiece coordinate zero point after rotation

(d): N04 Commanded path

(e): N04 Actual movement path

(f): N04 End point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

568

Operation when an axis configuring the rotation plane is commanded by the absolute value

The operation can be selected from following 2 types by setting of the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot

type».

(1) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «0».

The end point is calculated on the assumption that the start point rotates along with the coordinates’

rotation. For that reason, the operation is the same as when «N04» is «G00 X20. Y0.» in the following

example.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation cancel)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G54 G90 G00 X20.;(Absolute value command to an axis)

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): Actual axis position

(c): Start point rotated virtually along with the coordinate rotation.

(d): N04 Commanded path

(e): N04 Actual movement path

(f): N04 End point

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

569

(2) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «1».

The start point does not rotate along with the coordinate rotation; therefore the end position is calculated

based on the current position on local coordinate system before rotation.

For that reason, only the axis commanded in N04 (X’ axis) is moved.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation start)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G54 G90 G00 X20.;(Absolute value command to an axis)

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): The actual axis position and start point position are the same

(d): N04 Actual movement path

(e): N04 Commanded path

(f): N04 End point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

570

Operation when incremental value commands are given

The operation can be selected from the following 2 types by setting of the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot

type».

(1) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «0».

The end point is calculated on the assumption that the start point rotates along with the coordinates’

rotation. For that reason, the commanded path and actual movement path differs in N04.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation start)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G54 G91 G00 X20. Y10.;(Absolute value command to two axes )

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): Actual axis position

(c): Start point rotated virtually along with the coordinate rotation

(d): N04 Commanded path

(e): N04 Actual movement path

(f): N04 End point

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

571

(2) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «1».

The start point does not rotate along with the coordinate rotation; therefore the end point position is

calculated based on the current position on local coordinate system before rotation.

For that reason, the commanded path and actual movement path are the same in N04.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation start)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 N04 G54 G91 G00 X20. Y10.;(Absolute value command to two axes )

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0 :

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): The actual axis position and start point position are the same

(d): N04 Actual movement path

(e): N04 Commanded path

(f): N04 End point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

572

Operation when circular interpolation is commanded

The operation can be selected from the following 2 types by setting of the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot

type».

(1) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «0».

The end point of an arc is calculated on the assumption that the start point virtually rotates along with the

coordinates’ rotation.

In this case, the start point of an arc is not rotating but the end point of an arc is rotating, so it may cause

«P70: Arc end point deviation large» due to the difference in radius between the start and end points.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#1084 Arc error = 0.1 N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation start)

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N04 G54 G91 G03 X20. R10. F500;(Circular interpolation command)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 :

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): Actual axis position

(c): Start point rotated virtually along with the coordinate rotation

(d): N04 Commanded path

(f): End point calculated from the virtually rotated start point

(g): Start point radius

(h): End point radius

As the difference in radius between the start and end points is bigger than «#1084 Rad Err», it causes «P70: Arc end point deviation large».

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.23 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ; G10 I_ J_/K_

573

(2) When the parameter «#19008 PRM coord rot type» is «1».

The start point and end point of an arc are calculated from the current position on the workpiece

coordinate system before the coordinate rotation and the circular interpolation is performed from the

current position to the end point.

[Parameter] [Machining program]

#1084 Arc error = 0.1 N01 G17 G28 X0. Y0.;

#8621 Coord rot plane(H) = X N02 G54 G90 X0. Y0.;

#8622 Coord rot plane(V) = Y N03 G10 K90.; (Coordinate rotation start)

#8623 Coord rot centr(H) = 30.0 N04 G54 G91 G03 X20. R10. F500;(Circular interpolation command)

#8624 Coord rot centr(V) = 60.0 :

#8627 Coord rot angle = 0.0

[G54 workpiece coordinate system offset]

X = 10.0

Y = 10.0

(W): Workpiece coordinate system before rotation

(W1): Workpiece coordinate system after rotation

(a): Rotation center

(b): The actual axis position and start point position are the same.

(d): N04 Actual movement path

(e): N04 Commanded path

(f): N04 End point

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

574

Program example

(1) When used for compensating positional deviation of pallet changer

Precautions

(1) If rotation angle zero is commanded while carrying out coordinate rotation, it will be canceled at the next

movement command regardless of the G90 or G91.

(2) Command the first movement after this command with the G00 or G01 mode. If an arc command is

issued, the arc start point will not be rotated. However, only the arc end point will rotate. This will cause

the start point radius and end point radius to differ, and the program error (P70) will occur.

(3) When data is input with the data input/output function, coordinate rotation angle is considered to exist,

and automatic calculation from the vector component will not be executed.

(4) Do not use this command with G54 to G59 and G90, G91. If used, the command will not be reflected

correctly.

(5) If both vertical / horizontal vectors (I,J) and rotation angle are commanded, the rotation angle will be

given the priority

(6) To use any of the following functions together with the coordinate rotation by parameter, start the

coordinate rotation by parameter first and command the following function later.

— Tool radius compensation

— Mirror image

(7) The coordinate rotation by parameter and the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion cannot be used at

the same time. If they are used at the same time the coordinate position will not be calculated right.

(a) Rotation movement (15 degree)

N01 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N02 G22 L9000 ; Pallet deviation measurement N03 G90 G53 X0 Y0 ; Parallel movement amount shift N04 G92 X0 Y0 ; Parallel movement amount definition N05 G10 K15. ; Rotation amount definition N06 G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 ; G54 workpiece machining N07 G22 H101 ; N08 G90 G55 G00 X0 Y0 ; G55 workpiece machining N09 G22 H101 ; N10 G90 G56 G00 X0 Y0 ; G56 workpiece machining N11 G22 H101 ;

N12 G90 G57 G00 X0 Y0 ; G57 workpiece machining N13 G22 H101 ; N14 G27 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N15 M02 ; Machining shape program N101 G91 G01 G42 D01 F300 ; N102 X100 ; N103 G03 Y50. R25. ; N104 G01 X-100. ; N105 G03 Y-50. R25. ; N106 G01 G40 ; N107 G23 ;

Y

X M

+

+

+

+

G56

G57

G54

G55 (a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

575

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

Function and purpose

With the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion function, a new coordinate system can be defined by shifting

the zero point and rotating in respect to the X, Y and Z axes of the currently set workpiece coordinate system.

By using this function, an arbitrary spatial plane can be defined, and machining on that plane can be carried

out with normal program commands.

To use this function, the optional specification is required. If the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is

commanded when the option is not available, a program error will occur.

When the G68.1 command is issued, the zero point is shifted by the command value (x, y, z) in respect to the

current local coordinate system. A new G68.1 program coordinate system rotated by the designated rotation

angle «r» in respect to the commanded rotation center direction (i, j, k) is created.

The local coordinate system is the same as the workpiece coordinate system when the local coordinate

system offset is not ON.

Command format

(M) Machine coordinate system (P) G68.1 Program coordinate system (W) Workpiece coordinate system

G68.1 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ R__ ; … 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode command

X,Y,Z Rotation center coordinates Designate with the absolute position of the local coordinate system.

I,J,K Rotation center axis direction (1: Designated 0: Not designated) Note that «1» is designated for only one of the three axes. «0» is designated for the other two axes.

R

Rotation angle The counterclockwise direction looking at the rotation center from the rotation center axis direction is positive (+). The setting range is -360 to 360, and the unit follows the minimum command unit.

G69.1 ; … 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode cancel command

Y’

X’

X

Y

Z’

Z (M)

(P)

(W)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

576

Detailed description

(1) Command the rotation center coordinates with absolute values.

(2) If the rotation center coordinates are omitted, the zero point of the currently set coordinate system will be

the rotation center coordinates.

(3) Designate values for all of I, J and K.

If any of the I, J, K is not designated, program coordinate rotation command will be valid.

(4) Set «1» in only one of I, J and K, and set «0» for the other two.

The program error (P33) will occur if «1» is set in two or more.

(5) The program error (P33) will also occur if «0» is set for all I, J and K.

(6) When addresses I, J and K are not designated, this will be handled as the program coordinate rotation.

(7) If a number other than «0» (including numbers of two or more digits) is designated for addresses I, J and

K, this will be handled as «1».

If a blank is designated, this will be handled as «0».

(8) If a G code that cannot be commanded in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal is issued, the

program error (P921) will occur.

When the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is commanded during the modal where 3-dimensional

coordinate conversion cannot be carried out, the program error (P922) will also occur.

Furthermore, the G codes that cannot be commanded together with G68.1 are commanded in the same

block as G68.1, the program error (P923) will occur.

(9) The 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command for the rotary axis will result in the program error

(P32).

(10) If a 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command is issued when there is no specifications for 3-

dimensional coordinate conversion, the program error (P920) will occur.

Coordinate system

(1) By issuing the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command, a new coordinate system (G68.1

program coordinate system) will be created on the local coordinate system.

(2) The coordinate system for the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion rotation center coordinates is the

local coordinate system.

Thus, these coordinate systems are affected by the following coordinate system offset and coordinate

system shift amount.

— Local coordinate system offset by G52 command

— G92 shift amount by G92 command

— Coordinate system offset corresponding to workpiece coordinate system selected by the command

— External workpiece coordinate offset

— Manual interruption amount or manual feed amount when manual ABS is OFF

(3) If 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is commanded again during the 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion modal, a G68.1 program coordinate system is created on the current G68.1 program

coordinate system, and is used as a new G68.1 program coordinate system.

(4) The local coordinate system cannot be created (G52) on the G68.1 program coordinate system.

(If G52 is issued, the program error (P921) will occur.)

(5) G68.1 program coordinate system can be reset either by G69.1 command or reset inputting. (Exclude

reset 1 when «0» is set to the parameter «#1151 rsint»)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

577

Rotation angle

(1) For the rotation angle, the counterclockwise direction looking at the rotation center from the plus direction

of the rotation center axis is the plus (+) direction.

(2) The rotation angle command unit with no decimal point depends on the parameter «#1078 Decpt»

(Decimal point type 2).

(3) If the rotation angle is omitted, the rotation angle will be handled as 0.

Rotation center coordinates

(1) The G68.1 rotation center coordinate system is commanded with the local coordinate system (G68.1

program coordinate system during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal).

(2) The rotation center coordinate designation is handled as an absolute value command whether or not an

absolute/incremental modal (G90/G91) is currently being executed.

(3) If the rotation center coordinate is omitted, it will be handled as if the zero point of the current local

coordinate (G68.1 program coordinate system during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal) is

designated for the omitted address’s axis. (The same as when «0» is just set.)

G68.1 multiple commands

By commanding 3-dimensional coordinate conversion during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal,

two or more multiple commands can be issued.

(1) The 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal is

combined with the conversion in the modal.

(2) If the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is overlapped during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

modal, the overlapped 3-dimensional coordinate conversion will be created on the coordinate system

(G68.1 program coordinate system) created with the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion in the modal.

Thus, the rotary axis and coordinates must be designated with this G68.1 program coordinate system.

If creating a 90 rotated coordinate system for X axis and Y axis each, commands must be issued as in

Example 2, not Example 1.

G68.1 X0.Y0.Z0.I1J0K0 R90.; X axis rotation 90 G68.1 X0.Y0.Z0.I0J1K0 R90.; Y axis rotation 90 (The Y axis designated here is the same as the Z axis in the original coordinate system.)

G68.1 X0.Y0.Z0.I1J0K0 R90.; X axis rotation 90 G68.1 X0.Y0.Z0.I0J0K1 R-90.; Z axis rotation -90 (The Z axis -90 rotation designated here is the same as the Y axis +90 rotation in the original coordinate system.)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

578

Conversion method for 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

The coordinate values (Xp, Yp, Zp) in the newly set G68.1 program coordinate system and the coordinate

values (Xm, Ym, Zm) in the reference workpiece coordinate system are converted as shown below.

R1, R2 : Rotation row calculated from first and second G68.1 parameter

T1, T2 : Movement row calculated from first and second G68.1 parameter

The conversion rows Rn and Tn (n = 1, 2) are as follow.

Rn conversion row

Tn conversion row

First G68.1 command

[Xm, Ym, Zm, 1] = [Xp, Yp, Zp, 1] R1 T1 …………………. (Forward row)

[Xp, Yp, Zp, 1] = [Xm, Ym, Zm, 1] (T1-1) (R1-1) …………. (Reverse row)

Second G68.1 command

[Xm, Ym, Zm, 1]=[Xp, Yp, Zp, 1]R2 T2 R1 T1

[Xp, Yp, Zp, 1]=[Xm, Ym, Zm, 1](T1-1)(R1-1)(T2-1)(R2-1)

I designation (rotation around X axis)

J designation (rotation around Y axis)

K designation (rotation around Z axis)

x, y, z : Rotation center coordinates (parallel movement amount) I, J, K : Rotation axis selection R : Rotation angle

1 0 0 0

0 cosR sinR 0

0 — sinR cosR 0

0 0 0 1

cosR 0 — sinR 0

0 1 0 0

sinR 0 cosR 0

0 0 0 1

cosR sinR 0 0

— sinR cosR 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0

x y z 1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

579

Program example

Program example 1

(1) With N1, the zero point is shifted by (x, y, z) = (10., 0, 0) in respect to the currently set local coordinate

system. The new G68.1 program coordinate system (A) rotated -30 in the counterclockwise direction

using the Y axis as the center, is set.

(2) With N2, the zero point is shifted by (x, y, z) = (0, 10., 0) in respect to the newly set G68.1 program

coordinate system (A). The new G68.1 program coordinate system (B) rotated +45 in the

counterclockwise direction using the X axis as the center, is set.

(3) With N3, the G68.1 program coordinate systems that have been set are all canceled, and the state prior

to where the first G68.1 has been commanded is resumed.

N1 G68.1 X10.Y0. Z0. I0 J1 K0 R-30.;

N2 G68.1 X0. Y10. Z0. I1 J0 K0 R45.;

:

N3 G69.1;

P'(10,0,0)

+Z +Y

+X

+X’

+Z»

+Y»

+Y’

+X»

45

P(0,0,0)

— 30

P»(0,10,0)

(L)

(A)

(B)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

580

Program example 2

This is only a sample program to explain about the operations. (To actually proceed with the machining by

using this program, the dedicated tools and the tool change functions are required.)

(1) Example of machining program using arc cutting

In the following program example, the arc cutting (N3 block) carried out on the top of the workpiece is

also carried out on the side of the workpiece. By using 3-dimensional coordinate conversion, the side can

be cut with the same process (N8 block).

N01 G17 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0; Position to the workpiece zero point P.

N02 G00 X100. Y200. Z200.; Move to (100, 200, 200) with rapid traverse.

N03 G02 X100. Y400. J100. F1000; Carry out arc cutting on workpiece top.

N04 G00 Z300.; Escape +100 in +Z direction at rapid traverse rate.

N05 G68.1 X0 Y0 Z200. I0 J1 K0 R90.; Set the G68.1 program coordinate system (XYZ) which has been rotated +90in the Y axis direction around the (0,0,200).

N06 G17 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0; Position to the new program zero point P’.

N07 G00 X100. Y200. Z200.; Move to G68.1 program coordinate system (100, 200, 200) and workpiece coordinate system (200, 200, 100) at rapid traverse rate.

N08 G02 X100. Y400. J100. F1000; Carry out arc cutting on workpiece side.

N09 G00 Z300.; Move +100 in + Z’ direction of G68.1 program coordinate system at rapid traverse rate.

N10 G69.1;

N11 M02;

+X’

+X

N1

P (0,0,0)

N2

N3

N4

N6

P (0,0,200)

+Z

+Z’

N7 N9

+Y’

+Y

N8

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

581

(2) Example of machining program using fixed cycle

In the following program, the bolt hole circle (N08 block) executed on the top of the workpiece is also

carried out on the side of the workpiece. By using 3-dimensional coordinate conversion, the side can be

cut with the same process (N18 block).

N01 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0; Position to the workpiece coordinate system’s 1st workpiece zero point.

N02 F2000;

N03 G00 X100. Y100. Z-600.; Move to (100, 100, -600) at rapid traverse rate.

N04 G52 X100. Y100. Z-600.; Set the local coordinate system (X’Y’Z’) to the (100, 100, -600).

N05 G00 X100. Y10. Z 200.; Move to (100, 10, 200) position in G68 program coordinate system at rapid traverse rate.

N06 G91; Incremental value command

N07 G81 Z-10. R5. L0 F2000; Drilling

N08 G34 X100. Y200. I90. J270. K10.; Bolt hole circle

N09 G80; Drilling cancel

N10 G91 G00 X-200.; Move -200 from machining end point in X axis direction at rapid traverse rate.

N11 G90 G52 X0 Y0 Z0; Cancel local coordinate system.

N12 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0; Position to workpiece zero point.

N13 G00 X100. Y100. Z-400.; Move to (100, 100, -400) with rapid traverse.

N14 G68.1 X100. Y100. Z-400. I0 J1 K0 R90.; Set G68.1 program coordinate system (X»,Y»,Z») rotated +90 in Y axis direction using (100, 100, -400) position as center.

N15 G00 X100.Y10. Z200.; Move to (100, 10, 200) position in G68.1 program coordinate system at rapid traverse rate.

N16 G91; Incremental value command

N17 G81 Z-10. R5. L0 F200; Drilling

N18 G34 X100.Y200. I90. J270. K10.; Bolt hole circle

N19 G80; Drilling cancel

N20 G91 G00 X-200.; Move -200 from machining end point in X axis direction at rapid traverse rate.

N21 G69.1; Cancel 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal.

N22 M02; End program.

-Z

(0,0,0)

N1

+Y

+X

N3

+Z

(100,100, — 600)

+X

N5

N10

N12

N13

(100,100, — 400)

N15

N20

N7 N9

N17 N19

+Y

+X

+Z

+Y

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

582

Relation with other functions

(1) Circular interpolation in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal operates according to the

coordinate value resulted by the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion. With G17, G18 and G19

commands, circular interpolation functions normally for all the planes in which 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion has been executed.

(2) Fine spline

Designation of a spline axis should be done to the movement axis after the 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion. When a movement occurs to the axis in which spline cannot be designated, spline will be in

the pause status.

(3) Reference position check

The 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is applied for the positioning commanded by G27 in the 3-

dimensional coordinate conversion modal.

(4) The 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is applied for the mid-point commanded by G28 and G30 in the

3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal. However, reference position return will be carried out

without the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.

(5) Tool position return

3-dimensional coordinate conversion is not carried out for the tool change position even if a command

from G30.1 to G30.6 is issued in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal. The returning order

and position will be on the machine coordinate system.

(6) Tool compensation

When executing the tool length/radius/position compensation in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

modal, the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is carried out after the compensation value has been

applied.

(7) Machine coordinate system selection

Coordinate conversion will not be carried out for the machine coordinate system even if G53 command is

issued in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal.

(8) Mirror image

When issuing the mirror image command in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal, as well as

when executing the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion in the mirror image modal, 3-dimensional

coordinate conversion will be executed for the coordinate value, which is calculated by the mirror image.

(9) User macro

When a user macro call command is issued in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal, the 3-

dimensional coordinate conversion will be valid after the macro execution.

(10) Fixed cycle for drilling

The fixed cycle in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion can be executed in an oblique direction for

the orthogonal coordinate system. In the same manner, synchronous tapping cycle can also be

executed.

However, the mode for the fixed cycle for hole drilling will be changed from the rapid traverse to the

cutting feed at the speed set with the parameter «#1564 3Dspd». (Excluding during the synchronous

tapping cycle.)

[Operation]

(1) Position to the initial position at the rapid traverse rate.

(2) Position to the R point at the rapid traverse rate.

(3) Hole machining is conducted by cutting feed.

(4) Escape to the R point. Cutting feed or rapid traverse depending on the fixed cycle mode.

(5) The tool is returned to the initial point at the rapid traverse rate.

(I) Initial point

(R) R point

(R)

(I) (1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

583

(11) The Synchronous tapping cycle in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal will not function even

if «#1223 BIT3 (synchronous tapping in-position check expansion valid)» is valid. Set the synchronous

tapping cycle to invalid.

(12) Geometric command

Geometric command can be issued in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal. However, if the

geometric command is issued in the same block as in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

command (G68.1, G69.1), «the program error (P32) will occur.

(13) Initial constant surface speed

When the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command is issued while the parameter initial constant

surface speed is valid, the program error (P922) will occur.

This is the same consequence as in the case where the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command

is issued in the constant surface speed (G96) modal.

(14) Machine lock

The machine lock in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal will be valid for the movement axis

for the coordinate value after executing the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.

(15) Interlock

The interlock in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal will be valid for the movement axis for

the coordinate value after executing the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.

(16) When reading the workpiece coordinate system/skip coordinate system during the 3-dimensional

coordinate system conversion modal, local coordinate system and G68.1 program coordinate system

can be switched with the parameter «#1563 3Dcdrc».

(17) Manual operation

Manual operation in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal will not execute the 3-dimensional

conversion. Manual operation will be executed in the machine coordinate system.

Also, when the manual ABS is OFF, G68.1 program coordinate system will move as much as the manual

interruption or manual feed amount.

(18) Workpiece coordinate display

Whether to display the workpiece coordinate system position in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

modal, in the workpiece coordinate system or in the G68.1 program coordinate system can be switched

with the parameter «#1561 3Dcdc». In the same manner, absolute value can be displayed on the special

display.

(Note) 1um of display deviation may occur during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion; however,

this is normal.

(19) Remaining command display

Whether to display the remaining commands in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal, in the

workpiece coordinate system or in the G68.1 program coordinate system can be switched with the

parameter «#1562 3Dremc».

(Note) 1um of display deviation may occur during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion; however,

this is normal.

(20) G41, G42, and the fixed cycle commands G73 to G89 have to be nested inside the G68.1/G69.1

commands.

For the block next to G68.1, a movement command in the G90 (Absolute value command) mode has to

be issued.

— G00 command during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal is the interpolation type

regardless of settings of the basic parameter «#1086 G0Intp (G00 non-interpolation)»

— Origin zero cannot be executed during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal.

(Example)

G68.1 X50. Y100. Z150. I1 J0 K0 R60. ; G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ; G41 D01 ;

G40 ; G69.1 ;

Issuance of G90 mode movement commands

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

584

Relation with other G codes

Pxxx in the list indicates the program error Nos.

Format Function

When this command is designated during

3-dimensional coordinate

conversions

When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is designated in this modal

status

When 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion is designated in the

same block

G00 Positioning P923

G01 Linear interpolation P923

G02 Circular interpolation CW P923

Helical interpolation CW P921 P922 P923

G03 Circular interpolation CCW P923

Helical interpolation CCW P921 P922 P923

G02.3 Exponential interpolation CW

P921 P922 P923

G02.4 3-dimensional circular interpolation CW

P921 P922 P923

G03.3 Exponential interpolation CCW

P921 P922 P923

G03.4 3-dimensional circular interpolation CCW

P921 P922 P923

G04 Dwell — G04 valid, G68.1 ignored

G05 P0 High-speed machining mode cancel — P923

G05 P1,2 High-speed machining mode I, II

P34 Illegal G code P34 Illegal G code P923

G05 P10000 High speed high accuracy control II

P34 Illegal G code P34 Illegal G code P923

G05.1 Q0 High-speed machining mode/High-speed high- accuracy control cancel

P923

G05.1 Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I P923

G05.1 Q2 Fine spline P34 Illegal G code P34 Illegal G code P923

G07.1/G107 Cylindrical interpolation P921 P481 Illegal G code (mill) P923

G09 Exact stop check — P923

G10

Parameter input by program P421 Parameter input error P923

Program tool compensation input —

G10 valid, G68.1 ignored

G11.1 Parameter input by program cancel — P923

G12 Circular cutting CW — P923

G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation

P921 P481 Illegal G code (mill) P923

G13 Circular cutting CCW — P923

G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel — P923

G15 Polar coordinate command cancel — P923

G16 Polar coordinate command P923

G17 Plane selection X-Y

G18 Plane selection Z-X

G19 Plane selection Y-Z

G20 Inch command

G21 Metric command

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

585

Format Function

When this command is designated during

3-dimensional coordinate

conversions

When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is

designated in the left modal status

When 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion is designated in the

same block

G27 Reference position check — G27 valid, G68.1 ignored

G28 Reference position return — G28 valid, G68.1 ignored

G29 Start position return — G29 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30 2nd to 4th reference position return —

G30 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.1 Tool change position return 1 —

G30.1 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.2 Tool change position return 2 —

G30.2 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.3 Tool change position return 3 —

G30.3 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.4 Tool change position return 4 —

G30.4 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.5 Tool change position return 5 —

G30.5 valid, G68.1 ignored

G30.6 Tool change position return 6 —

G30.6 valid, G68.1 ignored

G31 Skip — P923

G31.1 Multi-step skip 1 — P923

G31.2 Multi-step skip 2 — P923

G31.3 Multi-step skip 3 — P923

G33 Thread cutting P921 P922 P923

G34 Special fixed cycle (bolt hole circle) — P923

G35 Special fixed cycle (line at angle) — P923

G36 Special fixed cycle (arc) — P923

G37 Special fixed cycle (grid) — P923

G37.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement

P921 — G37 valid, G68.1 ignored

G38 Tool radius compensation (vector designation) — P923

G39 Tool radius compensation (corner arc) — P923

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel —

G41

Tool radius compensation P922 P923

3-dimensional tool radius compensation P922 P923

G42

Tool radius compensation P922 P923

3-dimensional tool radius compensation P922 P923

G40.1/G150 Normal line control cancel P921 — P923

G41.1/G151 Normal line control (left) P921 P922 P923

G42.1/G152 Normal line control (right) P921 P922 P923

G43 Tool length compensation P923

G44 Tool length compensation cancel — P923

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

586

Format Function

When this command is designated during

3-dimensional coordinate

conversions

When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is

designated in the left modal status

When 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion is designated in the

same block

G45 Tool position compensation increase — P923

G46 Tool position compensation decrease — P923

G47 Tool position compensation 2-fold increase — P923

G48 Tool position compensation 2-fold decrease — P923

G43.1 Tool length compensation along the tool axis

P927 P931 P923

G43.4 Tool center point control type1 ON

P941 P922 P923

G43.5 Tool center point control type2 ON

P941 P922 P923

G50 Scaling cancel P921 — P923

G51 Scaling ON P921 P923

G51.1 Mirror image ON P923

G52 Local Coordinate System Setting

P921 — G52 valid, G68.1 ignored

G53 Machine coordinate system setting —

G53 valid, G68.1 ignored

G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

P921 P923

G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection

P921 P923

G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection

P921 P923

G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection

P921 P923

G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection

P921 P923

G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection

P921 P923

G54.1 Extended workpiece coordinate system selection

P921 P923

G60

Unidirectional positioning P921 — G60 valid, G68.1 ignored

Unidirectional positioning (Modal designation)

P921 P922 P923

G61 Exact stop check mode P923

G61.1 High-accuracy control P923

G62 Mirror image cancel — P923

G63 Tapping mode P921 P922 P923

G64 Cutting mode

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

587

(Note) All the G codes not listed above cannot be used.

Format Function

When this command is designated during

3-dimensional coordinate

conversions

When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is

designated in the left modal status

When 3-dimensional coordinate

conversion is designated in the

same block

G65 User macro Simple call —

Update modal only (Coordinate rotation by program)

G66 User macro Modal call A

Update modal only (Coordinate rotation by program)

G66.1 User macro Modal call B

Update modal only (Coordinate rotation by program)

Update modal only (Coordinate rotation by program)

G67 User macro Modal call cancel

Update modal only after macro (Coordinate rotation by program)

G68.1

Coordinate rotation by program ON

P921 P922 —

3-dimensional coordinate conversion ON —

G69.1

Coordinate rotation by program cancel

(3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel)

— —

3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel — —

G73 Fixed cycle (step) P922 P923

G74 Fixed cycle (reverse tapping) *incl: Synchronous tapping

P922 P923

G76 Fixed cycle (Fine boring) P922 P923

G80 Fixed cycle cancel — P923

G81 Fixed cycle (drill/spot drill) P922 P923

G82 Fixed cycle (drill/counter boring) P922 P923

G83 Fixed cycle (deep drilling) P922 P923

G84 Fixed cycle (tapping) *incl: Synchronous tapping P922 P923

G85 Fixed cycle (boring) P922 P923

G86 Fixed cycle (boring) P922 P923

G87 Fixed cycle (back boring) P922 P923

G88 Fixed cycle (boring) P922 P923

G89 Fixed cycle (boring) P922 P923

G90 Absolute value command

G91 Incremental value command

G92 Coordinate system setting P921 — P923

G94 Asynchronous feed (feed per minute )

G95 Synchronous feed (feed per revolution)

G96 Constant surface speed control ON

P921 P922 P923

G97 Constant surface speed control OFF

P921 — P923

G98 Fixed cycle (Initial level return)

G99 Fixed cycle (R point level return)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

588

Precautions

Precautions related to arc command

If the first command after the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command is an arc shape, and the center

of the arc did not change before and after the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion, an arc is drawn. However,

an error will occur in the following cases:

(1) For the arc in which the arc center is specified with I and J, if the center coordinate has been deviated

followed by the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion, a program error (P70 Major arc end position

deviation) will occur.

Example in which program error (P70) occurs

G90 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

F3000 G17 ;

G68.1 X100. Y0. Z0. I0 J0 K1 R0. ;

G02 X100. I50. ;

No 3-dimensional coordinate conversion In 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

(a) Arc center (C) Current position (E) End point (Err.) Program error

Y

X

(X100, Y0) (X50, Y0)

(a)

(C) (E)

Y Y’

(X100, Y0)

(X’50, Y’0)

(X’100, Y’0) X’ X

(C)

(Err.)

(E)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.24 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1

589

(2) For the arc in which the arc radius is specified with R, If the center coordinate has been deviated by the

3-dimensional coordinate conversion, a program error (P71 Arc center calculation disabled) will occur.

Example in which program error (P71) occurs

G90 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

F3000 G17 ;

G68.1 X100. Y0. Z0. I0 J0 K1 R0. ;

G02 X100. R50. ;

No 3-dimensional coordinate conversion In 3-dimensional coordinate conversion

(a) Arc center (C) Current position (E) End point (r) Radius (Err.) Program error

Y

X (X100, Y0)

= 50(r)

(C) (E)

Y Y’

(X100, Y0) (X’100, Y’0)

X

50

X’ (C)

(Err.)

(E)

(r)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

590

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

Function and purpose

The tool center point control function controls a commanded position described in the machining program to

be the tool center point in the coordinate system that rotates together with a workpiece (table coordinate

system). This function can be applied for 5-axis machining, including a tool tilt type (Fig. 1 (a)) with two rotary

axes set on the head, table tilt type (Fig. 1 (b)) with two rotary axes set on the table, or combined type (Fig. 1

(c)) with a rotary axis set on each tool and table.

With this function, in the case of using tool tilt type, the tool center point is controlled so that it moves on the

programmed path specified on the workpiece coordinate system. In the case of using the table tilt type, the

tool center point is controlled so that it moves on the programmed path specified on the table coordinate

system (a coordinate system which rotates together with a workpiece).

Tool center point control OFF and tool length compensation along the tool axis ON

Tool Center Point Control ON

Rotation center Program path Rotation center

Path of the tool center point

Controls so that the path of the tool holder center point draws a straight line.

Fig.1(a) Controls so that the tool center point draws a straight line.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

591

To use this function, the optional specification is required. Without the option, a program error (P940) occurs

upon executing the tool center point control command.

And, 3 orthogonal axes must be commanded first and 2 rotary axes alter.

Tool center point control OFF and tool length compensation along the tool axis ON

Tool Center Point Control ON

Path of the tool center point

Rotation center

Rotation center

Controls so that the tool holder center point positions on the workpiece coordinate system.

Fig.1(b) Controls so that the tool center point positions on the table coordinate system.

Tool center point control OFF and tool length compensation along the tool axis ON

Tool Center Point Control ON

Path of the tool center point

Rotation center Rotation center

Controls so that the tool holder center point positions on the workpiece coordinate system.

Fig.1(c) Controls so that the tool center point positions on the table coordinate system.

Z(+)

X(+)

B(- ) B(- )

Z(+)

X(+)

X'(+) Z»(+)

X»(+)

Z(+)

X(+)

B(- ) B(- )

Z(+)

X(+)

X'(+) Z»(+)

X»(+)

Z'(+)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

592

Command format

Tool center point control ON

(Note 1) When orthogonal coordinate axis movement command or rotary axis movement command is not

issued in the same block, start-up wil be without axis movement (No movement for the offset

amount).

(Note 2) Commands to I, J, and K will be ignored during the tool center point control type1.

(Note 3) Rotary axis movement command cannot be issued during the tool center point control type2. If

issued, a program error (P33) occurs.

(Note 4) If I, J, or K is omitted when issuing the tool center point control type2 command, the omitted

address will be considered as «0».

Tool center point control cancel

There are two command formats: , where tool angle is commanded by the rotary axis; and ,

where tool angle is commanded by the vectors of the workpiece surface, I, J, and K.

(Note 1) Instead of using G44, the following G codes in the G group 8 can be used for canceling.

G43(tool length compensation in the forward direction) / G43.1 (tool length compensation along the

tool axis)

(Note 2) If orthogonal coordinate axis command and rotary axis command are issued in the same block as

G44, the tool center point control modal will be canceled on the spot. Then, commanded axis

movement will be performed. If G44 is issued alone, the tool center point control modal will be

canceled on the spot, and yet no axis movement (movement for the compensation amount) will be

performed.

G43.4 (X__ Y__ Z__ A__ C__) H__ ; … Type1 ON

G43.5 (X__ Y__ Z__) I__ J__ K__ H__ ; … Type2 ON

X,Y,Z Orthogonal coordinate axis movement command

A,C Rotary axis movement command

I,J,K Workpiece surface angle vector

H Tool length offset number

G44 (X__ Y__ Z__ A__ C__)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

593

Detailed description

Programming coordinate system

The end position of each block looking from the programming coordinate system is specified in the tool center

point control mode. In the program, specify the position of the tool center point.

The programming coordinate system is a coordinate system used for the tool center point control, and either

the table coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system will be specified by the parameter.

(1) Table coordinate system

When 0 is set to the programming coordinate system selection parameter, the table coordinate system,

which is the valid workpiece coordinate system at that time fixed to the table, is specified as the

programming coordinate system. Table coordinate system rotates along the table rotation. And it does

not rotate along the tool axis rotation. The X,Y,Z addresses are considered to have been issued on the

table coordinate system.

When a rotary axis movement is commanded in a block prior to G43.4/G43.5 command, the angle

generated by rotary axis movement is regarded as an initial setting at G43.4/G43.5

command.

(2) Workpiece coordinate system

When 1 is set to the programming coordinate system selection parameter, the programming coordinate

system will be the valid workpiece coordinate system at that time. The coordinate system in this case

does not rotate along the table rotation. A linear movement is carried out for the table (workpiece) when

the X,Y,Z addresses are issued. The end position looking from the workpiece coordinate system after

table rotation is specified to the X, Y and Z.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

594

Rotary axis standard position selection

When the table coordinate system (the workpiece coordinate system fixed to the table) is to be defined as the

programming coordinate system, use the parameter to decide at what angle the workpiece coordinate system

is to be fixed to the table.

Rotary axis standard selection

Start position standard (#7911=1) 0 position standard (#7911=0)

The timing to be fixed to the table

The position of rotary axis holding the workpiece at the start of tool center point control

When the position of rotary axis holding the workpiece is at 0 degree on the workpiece coordinate system

Operation example 1 (Workpiece

coordinate offset 0)

Machine coordinate

system

: G90G54G0C0 C-15. ; G43.4 Hh ; : C90. ; :

Workpiece coordinate 0

: G90G54C0 C-15. ; G43.4 Hh ; : C90. ; :

Workpiece coordinate 0

Machine coordinate position fixed at -15

Machine coordinate position 75 by C90. command

Machine coordinate position -15 by C-15. command

Machine coordinate position 90 by C90. command

Operation example 2 (Workpiece

coordinate offset 45 )

Machine coordinate system

: G90G54G0C0 C-15. ; G43.4 Hh ; : C90. ; :

Workpiece coordinate 0

: G90G54C0 C-15. ; G43.4 Hh ; : C90. ; :

Workpiece coordinate 0

Machine coordinate position fixed at 30

Machine coordinate position 120 by C90. command

Machine coordinate position 30 by C-15. command

Machine coordinate position 135 by C90. command

Y

X

0

Y

X

Y

X 0

Y

X

-15

Y

X -75

X

Y

-15

X 90

Y

Y

X

X

Y

45

X

Y

45

X

Y

30 X 120

Y X

Y

30 X 135

Y

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

595

Start up

(1) Start-up without movement command

(a) Tool center point control type1, type2

When the tool center point control is ON, no axis movement is performed (including movement for the

compensation amount).

(b) Tool center point control type2

«G43.5 Ii Jj Kk Hh ; » performs the same movement as the tool center point control type1 in (2).

(2) Start-up with movement command (When orthogonal coordinate axis command is issued in the same

block)

(a) Tool center point control type1, type2

When the tool center point control is ON, the tool center point moves only as much as it is ordered under

the incremental value command.

: G43.4 Hh ;

: or :

G43.5 Hh ;

: G43.4 Hh ;

: or :

G43.5 Hh ;

: G91 ;

(Incremental value)

G43.4 Yy Zz Hh; :

or :

G43.5 Yy Zz Hh ; :

: G91 ;

(Incremental value)

G43.4 Yy Zz Hh; :

or :

G43.5 Yy Zz Hh ; :

Y

Z

A (+)

Y

Z

A (+)

Y

Z

A (+)

Y

Z

Y

Z

A (+)

Y

Z

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

596

Under the absolute value command, the tool center point moves to y1, z1.

(b) Tool center point control type2

The rotary axis moves toward the commanded workpiece surface vector (I,J,K) direction along the

movement command issued.

(3) Start-up with movement command (When rotary axis command is issued in the same block)

(a) Tool center point control type1

In the case of using the tool tilt type, the orthogonal axis moves according to the rotary axis angle while

fixing the tool center point to the center. In the case of using the table tilt type, the orthogonal axis moves

so that the tool center point locates on the rotated table workpiece coordinate system.

(b) Tool center point control type2

A program error (P33) will occur.

: G91 ;

(Incremental value)

G43.4 Yy Zz Hh; :

or :

G43.5 Yy Zz Hh ; :

: G90 ; (Absolute

value) G00 Yy0 Zz0;

G43.4 Yy Zz Hh; :

or :

G43.5 Yy Zz Hh ; :

: G91 ;

(Incremental value)

G43.5 Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Hh;

:

: G91 ;

(Incremental value)

G43.5 Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Hh;

:

: G43.4 Aa Hh;

:

: G43.4 Aa Hh;

:

Y

Z

A (+)

y1- y0

(y1,z1) h

(y0,z0)

z1- z0

Y

Z

A (+)

(y1,z1) h

y1- y0 z1- z0

(y0,z0)

z y

(i,j,k)

Y

Z

A (+)

z

y

Y

Z

A (+)

(i,j,k)

z

a

Y

Z

A (+)

a Y

Z A (+)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

597

Cancel

(1) Cancellation without movement command

— Tool center point control type1, type2

Cancellation movement for the compensation amount is not performed regardless of absolute/

incremental value command.

On the other hand, the tool center point control modal will be canceled.

The tool will not move.

(2) Cancellation with movement command (When orthogonal coordinate axis command is issued in the

same block)

— Tool center point control type1, type2

Cancellation movement for the compensation amount is not performed regardless of absolute/

incremental value command.

Orthogonal coordinate axis movement command is executed upon cancellation of the tool center point

control modal.

: G44;

:

: G44;

:

: G91;

(Incremental value)

G44 Yy Zz ; :

: G91;

(Incremental value)

G44 Yy Zz ; :

Y

Z

A (+)

Y

Z A (+)

z

y

Y

Z

A (+)

z y

Y

Z

A (+)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

598

(3) Cancellation with movement command (When rotary axis command is issued in the same block)

— Tool center point control type1, type2

Cancellation movement for the compensation amount is not performed regardless of absolute/

incremental value command.

Rotary axis movement command is executed upon cancellation of the tool center point control modal

: G44 Aa

Hh; :

: G44 Aa

Hh; :

aY

Z

A (+)

a

Y

Z

A (+)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

599

During tool center point control

(1) Tool center point control type1

(a) When executing movement command to the orthogonal coordinate axis and rotary axis.

(b) When executing movement command to the rotary axis only.

(2) Tool center point control type2

(a) When executing movement command to the orthogonal coordinate axis and workpiece surface angle

vector command.

(b) When executing workpiece surface angle vector command only.

: G90 ; G43.4 Yy1 Zz1 Aa1 Hh ; Yy2 Aa2 ; Yy3 Aa3 ; :

Tool center point moves along the program path.

: G90 ; G43.4 Yy1 Zz1 Aa1 Hh ; Yy2 ; Aa2 ; Yy3 Aa3 ; :

When executing movement command to the rotary axis only, the orthogonal axis moves without moving the tool center point.

: G43.5 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Hh ; Yy2 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 ; Yy3 Ii3 Jj3 Kk3 ; :

Tool center point moves along the program path.

: G43.5 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Hh ; Yy2 ; Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 ; Yy3 Ii3 Jj3 Kk3 ; :

When executing workpiece surface angle vector command only, the orthogonal axis moves without moving the tool center point.

Z A (+)

a1

z1

y1 y2 y3

a2=0 a3

Y

z1

a1

A (+)

a2 a3

y1 y3y2

Z A (+)

z1

y1 y2 y3

(i1,j1,k1)

Y

(i2,j2,k2)

(i3,j3,k3)

z1

(i1, j1, k1)

A (+)

a3

y1 y3y2

(i3, j3, k3)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

600

Feedrate during tool center point control

Feedrate during the tool center point control is controlled so that the tool center point moves according to the

commanded speed.

Interpolation mode

There are two modes of interpolation: single axis rotation interpolation and joint interpolation. You can select

one of them by parameter.

(1) Single axis rotation interpolation

When transforming from a start-point angle vector «r1» into an end-point angle vector «r2», interpolate so

that the angular rate of the rotary around the vector k axis, which is vertical to r1-r2 plane, will be

constant.

(a) Features

Tool angle vector always exists on the plane consisting of O, r1 and r2.

— The angular rates of each rotary axis will not be constant.

(b) Operations

(Example) Current position Aa C0

When commanding G90 Yy A-a. C45. ; or G90 Yy Ii Jj Kk ;

(r1) Start-point command vector «r1» (r2) End-point command vector «r2» (k) Unit vector vertical to r1-r2 plane

Z( — ) Z( — )

Y(- )

Y( — ) O (r1)

(k)

(r2)

Y(- )

Z(- )

Y(+)

Z(+)

Z(+)

Z(+) Z(+)

Y(+)

Y(+)

Y(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

Y(+)

Z(+) Z(+)

Z(+)

Y (+)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

601

(2) Joint interpolation

A movement from a start-point angle vector «r1» to an end-point angle vector «r2» is interpolated to keep

the angular rates of each axis constant.

(a) Features

— The angular rates of each rotary axis become constant.

— As this control aims to keep the angular rates of each rotary axis constant, a tool angle vector may not

exist on the plane consisting of O, r1 and r2.

Passing singular point

When passing the singular point (singular position*1), there are two kinds of movements to be followed from

the singular point.

When using an A-C axis tilt type machinery, there are two different movements (Fig. b, c) to be followed. In

those movements, the rotation angles of the A axis are the same absolute value but different in signs (+/-).

The rotation angles of the C axis corresponding the two movements are differed by 180 degrees one another.

Determine which one of the two movements are to be selected with parameter.

The figures below are the example of movements seen during tool center point control type 2. When the tool

center-point-side rotary axis moves in the sign (+) direction from the starting position (Fig. a), (Fig. b) is

representing «passing singular point type1». When the tool center-point-side rotary axis moves in the sign (-)

direction from the starting position (Fig. a), (Fig. c) is representing «passing singular point type2».

*1 The position in which the tool-center-point side rotary axis or the table base-side rotary axis is 0.

(r1) Start-point command vector «r1» (r2) End-point command vector «r2»

Movement in sign(+)

Movement in sign(-

)

Y(- ) C(+)

A(+)

Z(- )

O

(r1)

(r2)

Y(- )

Z(- )

C0

(a)

Y(- )

Z(- )

C0

(b)

Y(- )

Z(- ) —

C0

(c)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

602

(1) Passing singular point type1

Select the same direction as the start point of the tool base-side rotary axis or table workpiece-side rotary

axis in the block where a singular point passing is carried out. When the rotation angle of the start point is

0, select the wider stroke limit. When the stroke limits are the same, select the one with a minus-coded

rotation angle.

(a) Singular point

(b) When passing the neighborhood of the singular point, C axis rotates 180 within the parameter «#7907 CHK_ANG» (Judging angle for the singular point neighborhood.).

(c) C axis rotates 180

X(- ) Y(- )

Z(- )

(a)

(b)

(c)

Z(+) Z'(+)

Y(+) Y'( — )

Z»(+)

Y»( — )

(a)

(b)

(c)

Z(+)

Y(- ) Y(+)

Z(+) Z(+)

Y(- )

(a)

(b)

(c)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

603

(2) Passing singular point type 2

Select the one with the smaller rotary movement amount of the tool base-side rotary axis or the table

workpiece-side rotary axis on the singular point. When the tool base-side rotary axis and the table

workpiece have the same rotary movement amount, select the one with the tool base-side rotary axis or

the table workpiece-side rotary axis that are to be rotated in the minus-coded direction.

(a) C axis does not rotate 180 when passing the neighborhood of the singular point.

X(- ) Y(- )

Z(- )

(a)

Z(+) Z'(+)

Y(+) Y'(+) Y»(+)

Z»(+)

(a)

Z(+)

Y(+)Y(+)

Z(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

604

(3) Movement in the singular point neighborhood in each interpolation mode

Interpolat ion mode

Command Type of passing

singular point

Command from a singular point to a non-singular point

Command to pass a singular point

Single axis rotation interpolati on

G43.4 (Rotation axis commands)

Type 1 Value as commanded. However, in the case where the signs at the start point and end point of either tool center-point-side rotary axis or table base-side rotary axis differ, if tool base-side rotary axis or table workpiece-side rotary axis rotates in the same block, the tool will not pass the singular point, resulting in a program error (P943).

Type 2

G43.5 (I,J,K command)

Type 1

Select the one with the wider stroke range. When the stroke range is the same, select a minus direction of the tool center-point-side rotary axis or the table base-side rotary axis.

Select the one whose end point has the same sign as the start point of the tool center-point-side rotary axis or the table base-side rotary axis.

Type 2 Select the one with the smaller movement amount of the tool base-side rotary axis or the table workpiece-side rotary axis.

Joint interpolati on

G43.4 (Rotation axis commands)

Type 1 Value as commanded.

Type 2

G43.5 (I,J,K command)

Type 1

Select the one with the wider stroke range. When the stroke range is the same, select a minus direction of the tool center-point-side rotary axis or the table base-side rotary axis.

Select the one with the same-coded end point as the start point of the tool center-point-side rotary axis or the table base-side rotary axis.

Type 2 Select the one with the smaller movement amount of the tool base-side rotary axis or the table workpiece-side rotary axis.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

605

Machine Speed Fluctuation Suppression During High-Accuracy Control

In tool center point control during high-accuracy control, if there is no change in a center point speed

command (F command), and also if a rotary axis moves with each blocks segment length short, the machine

end speed (speed of a motor that drives the tool/table) may fluctuate sharply. By enabling the parameter

#7913 MCHN_SPEED_CTRL Machine speed fluctuation suppression, the fluctuation can be suppressed.

(1) When #7913 = 0, the machine end speed is awaited to decelerate down to the machine end speed

command (Note).

Select this setting when a machining is desired to closely follow movement commands.

(2) When #7913 = 1, the next block movement command is output to the machine immediately after a

movement command output of the currently processed block is completed.

Select this setting in such a case as an execution of a machining program with noncontinuous rotary axis

movement commands, where a smooth movement is desired preventing a sudden deceleration of the

machine end speed between blocks.

Nevertheless, if any of the conditions below is satisfied, deceleration is awaited regardless of the

parameter setting.

— When judged to be a corner

— When the machining programs F command is changed

— When the speed is clamped

— When the override is changed

(Note) A machine end speed command value means a speed command value that is output to the

machine end so that the center point speed becomes the F command value.

Nevertheless, depending on the machining program, enabling the parameter #7913 MCHN_SPEED_CTRL

Machine speed fluctuation suppression may generate a machine vibration without deceleration.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

606

Discontinuous rotary axis movement commands (a block is skipped between the movement commands)

(1) Speed when #7913 = 0

Awaited to decelerate down to the machine end speed of the next block. Thus, the speed changes sharply.

(2) Speed when #7913 = 1

Not awaited to decelerate down to the machine end command speed of the next block. Thus, the speed does

not change sharply, and the movement is smooth.

In (2), because the speed is not awaited to decelerate down to the machine end command speed of the next

block, the actual center point speed exceeds the command speed. In such a case, by adjusting (increasing)

the setting value of #1570 Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2, a range of the excess of the center

point speed can be suppressed even when it exceeds the command speed.

:

G61.1;

G43.4 Hh;

G1 Ff;

:

N10 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Aa1; (Note 1) Center point block lengths are even.

N20 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2; (Note 2) A machine end block length is longer when it has a rotary axis movement command. (In this case, the machine end speed is faster in a block with rotary axis movement than in a block without rotary axis movement.)

N30 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 Aa3;

N40 Xx4 Yy4 Zz4;

: (Note 3) When SSS control is enabled, a machine speed fluctuation suppression is disabled.

Tool center point speed

Machine end speed

Center point command speed

Machine end command speed

(F) Actual speed

(T) Time

Tool center point speed

Machine end speed

Center point command speed

Machine end command speed

(F) Actual speed

(T) Time

N10

N10 N20 N30 N40

N20 N30 N40

(F)

(T)

(T)

(F)

N10

N10 N20 N30 N40

N20 N30 N40

(F)

(T)

(T)

(F)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

607

Rotary Axis Prefiltering

Rotary axis prefiltering means smoothing (prefiltering) the rotary axis command (tool angle shift) process,

which moves the rotary axis smoothly and produces smoother cutting surface. Tool center point moves on the

tracks as programmed by the rotary axis command while the command process is smoothed with this

function.

This function is available for the programs which have intermittent rotary axis commands (tool angle shifts) or

the programs with inconstant shift amount of rotary axis angle (or tool angle) per unit time.

Set the filter time constant for this function with parameters.

When the rotary axis prefiltering is disabled, the tool center point shift speed may be sharply fluctuated due to

the intermitted rotary axis command. See the following image.

As shown below, the rotary axis prefiltering reduces speed fluctuation of tool center point by smoothing the

rotary axis command process.

(Note 1) This function is available only when SSS control is enabled. (Not available together with a machine

speed fluctuation suppression.)

(Note 2) This function is disabled at G00 command.

(Note 3) The actual angle of the tool may be deviated from the commanded one in the program.

(Note 4) Even if a rotary axis prefiltering is enabled for a program without an angle shift, it does not affect the

machining quality. However, it may extend cycle time, so when executing such a machining, it is

recommended that the rotary axis prefiltering is disabled.

(a) Without tool angle shift (b) With tool angle shift (c) Machine position (rotation center)

(d) Tool center point needs to be shifted at constant speed in spite of the tool angle shift.

(e) Tool center point

(a) Tool angle before smoothing (b) Tool angle after smoothing (c) With tool angle shift

(d) Machine position (rotation center) (e) Without tool angle shift

(f) Tool center point needs to be shifted at constant speed (g) Tool center point

(a)

(c)

(b)

(e)(d)

P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

Q9 Q10

(a) (c) (b)

(e)

(d)

(f) (g)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

608

Arc command in tool center point control (G43.4/G43.5)

When the following conditions are met, arc command will be executed on the selected plane in tool center

point control.

(Note) A program error (P942) will occur in the following cases.

— During tool center point control type2 (G43.5)

— Rotary axis command is issued in the same block

— During the inclined surface machining and the workpiece installation error compensation

Programming coordinate system

Rotary axis standard position selection

Start position standard (#7911=1)

0 position standard (#7911=0)

Table coordinate system (#7908=0)

Rotary axis machine coordinate position in arc command is at 0. (1)(2) Workpiece coordinate system

(#7908=1)

Programming coordinate system

Rotary axis standard position selection

Start position standard (#7911=1)

0 position standard (#7911=0)

Table coordinate system (#7908=0)

Rotary axis workpiece coordinate position at the start of tool center point control coincides with that of the arc command. (4)

Rotary axis workpiece coordinate position in arc command is at 0. (3)

Workpiece coordinate system (#7908=1)

Rotary axis about the I/J/K axis workpiece coordinate position in arc command is at 0 . (5)

Programming coordinate system

Rotary axis standard position selection

Start position standard (#7911=1)

0 position standard (#7911=0)

Table coordinate system (#7908=0)

Table side rotary axis workpiece coordinate position at the start of tool center point control coincides with that of the arc command, and also, tool side rotary axis machine coordinate position in arc command is at 0.

Table side rotary axis workpiece coordinate position in arc command is at 0 and tool side rotary axis machine coordinate position is at 0.

Workpiece coordinate system (#7908=1)

Tool side rotary axis machine coordinate position in arc command is at 0 and table side rotary axis workpiece coordinate position is at 0.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

609

(1) Tool tilt type (Rotary axis machine coordinate 0)

(2) Tool tilt type (Rotary axis machine coordinate -30)

(3) Table tilt type (0 position standard)

: G18 G43.4 H1 : G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk :

: G18 G43.4 H1 A-30. : G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk :

: G18 G43.4 H1 : G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk :

(a) Arc operations (P) Program error

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+) (a)

X(+)

Y(+) X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

A(-)

A0

Z(+)

A-30

(P)

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

A(+)

(a)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

610

(4) Table tilt type (Start position standard)

(5) Table tilt type (Programming coordinate system = workpiece coordinate system)

: G19 A-45. G43.4 H1 : G02 Xx Yy Ii Jj :

: G18 G43.4 H1 : G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk :

(a) Arc operations (s) Start position (I) About I axis

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

Z(+)

Y(+)

X(+) A(+)

A0

(a) A-45:(s)

Y(+)

Z(+)

X(+)

Y(+)

Z(+)

:(s)A0

(I)

X(+)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

611

Relation with other functions

(1) F1-digit Feed

Controls so that the tool center point moves at the commanded speed. Note that speed cannot be

changed with the manual handle.

(2) Buffer correction

Buffer correction cannot be performed during tool center point control.

(3) Miscellaneous function (MSTB)

Miscellaneous function (MSTB) command can be executed during tool center point control.

(When passing the singular point, strobe signal is output at the block start and the completion wait at the

block end.)

(4) Spindle/C axis control

Axes unrelated to the tool tilt or table tilt can be controlled.

(5) Manual reference position return

Do not perform manual reference position return during tool center point control. If performed, the tool

moves off the programmed track.

(6) Machining time calculation

Machining time calculation is not performed accurately on the machining program in which the tool

center point control mode is commanded.

(7) Graphic trace

Graphic trace during the tool center point control is always traced with the tool center point.

(8) Graphic check

Graphic check during the tool center point control is always check the graphic with the tool center point.

(9) Program restart

Restart search cannot be performed during the tool center point control. If attempted, a program error

(P49) occurs.

(10) Rest modal retention

Canceled during the tool center point control.

(11) Collation stop

Position in the tool center point control can be collated and stopped.

(12) Automatic operation handle interruption

Do not perform the automatic operation handle interruption during the tool center point control. If

performed, the tool moves off the programmed track.

(13) Manual / Automatic simultaneous

Manual / Automatic simultaneous cannot be executed to the axes related to the tool center point control

during the tool center point control.

(Example) : G90 Aa1 ; G43.4 Yy1 Aa2 Mm Hh ; :

(a) M strobe output (b) Passing singular point (c) M completion wait

Y

Z (+)

a

y1

(+)

a2

A

C

(a) (c) (b)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

612

(14) Tool handle feed & interruption

Do not perform the tool handle feed & interruption during the tool center point control. If performed, the

tool moves off the programmed track.

(15) Corner chamfering/Corner R

When the corner chamfering/corner R is performed during the tool center point control, the tool center

point control becomes valid to the track after the corner chamfering/corner R.

(16) Mirror image by parameter setting / external mirror image input

When the tool center point control command is issued during the mirror image by parameter/external

Input, a program error (P941) occurs. Also, do not turn the mirror image by parameter/external input ON

during the tool center point control.

(17) Linear angle command

When A axis is used as a rotary axis, the linear angle command cannot be executed. When A axis is not

used as a rotary axis, tool center point control becomes valid to the shape after the linear angle

command.

(18) Geometric command

When A axis is used as a rotary axis, the geometric command cannot be executed. When A axis is not

used as a rotary axis, tool center point control becomes valid to the shape after the geometric command.

(19) Figure rotation

The tool center point control becomes valid to the shape after the figure rotation.

(20) Coordinate rotation by parameter

When the tool center point control command is issued during the coordinate rotation by parameter, a

program error (P941) occurs. Also, do not turn the coordinate rotation by parameter ON during the tool

center point control.

(21) Chopping

Chopping operation for the 3 orthogonal axes and 2 rotary axes cannot be performed during the tool

center point control.

(22) Macro interruption

If the macro interruption command is executed during the tool center point control, a program error

(P942) occurs.

(23) Tool life management

The compensation amount of the tool center point control during the tool life management is equal to the

compensation amount of the tool subjected to the tool life management.

(24) G00 non-interpolation

Functions as «G00 interpolation».

(25) Actual feedrate display

The final combined feedrate is displayed here.

(26) Manual interruption

When the manual interruption is executed during the feed hold or single block stop, the movement will be

the one to be observed when the manual ABS is OFF when rebooting regardless of whether an absolute/

incremental value command is selected.

(27) Machine lock

The each axis Machine Lock becomes valid to the motor axis.

(28) Remaining distance counter

Remaining distance at the tool center point on the programming coordinate system is displayed.

(29) Interlock

Interlock is applied for the motor axis.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

613

(30) Cutting feed / Rapid traverse override

Override is applied to the feedrate at the tool center point. When the federate is clamped, the override is

applied to the clamp speed.

(31) Manual reference position return

If the manual reference position return is performed during the tool center point control, the tool moves

off the programmed track after that.

(32) Dry run

Dry run is applied to the speed at the tool center point.

(33) NC reset

Immediately decelerates to stop when the NC reset is executed during the tool center point control. The

tool center point control will be canceled even if NC reset 1 and the modal retention.

(34) Emergency stop

Immediately stops if the emergency stop is applied during the tool center point control.

(35) Stored stroke limit

Stored stroke limit will be valid at the motor axis for all IB, IIB and IC.

(36) MDI interruption

When the MDI interruption is performed during the tool center point control, an operation error (O170)

occurs.

(37) High-accuracy Control function

The acceleration at rapid traverse (G00) during the high-accuracy control is same as that at cutting

feedrate (G01).

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

614

Relation with other G codes

Pxxx in the list indicates the program error Nos.

(Note) All the G codes not listed cannot be used.

(Note 1) It is valid when the parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0» is OFF. If it is commanded when this parameter is

ON, the program error (P34) will occur.

(Note 2) It is valid when the parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0» is ON. If it is commanded when the parameter is

OFF, the program error (P34) will occur.

Format Function When the function on the left is commanded in the

modal of this function

When this function is commanded in the modal

on the left

When this function is commanded in the same

block

G00 Positioning Switched to a rapid traverse feedrate, and then perform tool center point control.

Perform tool center point control at a rapid traverse feedrate.

Perform tool center point control at a rapid traverse feedrate.

G01 Linear interpolation Switched to a cutting feedrate, and then perform tool center point control.

Perform tool center point control at a cutting feedrate.

Perform tool center point control at a cutting feedrate.

G02/G03

Circular interpolation

Available when some conditions are met. Refer to «Tool Center Point Control; G43.4/G43.5».

P941 P941

Helical interpolation

P942 P941 P941

G02.1/G03.1 Spiral Interpolation P942 P941 P941

G02.3/G03.3 Exponential Interpolation

P942 P941 P941

G04 Dwell Dwelling is performed. —

Tool center point control is ignored as dwell function takes precedence over the tool center point control function.

G05

P1 (Note 1)

High speed machining mode

Max. feedrate is 16.8m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

Max. feedrate is 16.8m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

P 33

P2 (Note 1)

Max. feedrate is 100m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

Max. feedrate is 100m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

P 33

P10000 (Note 2)

High speed high accuracy control II

Max. feedrate is 100m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

Max. feedrate is 100m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

P 33

G05.1 (Note 2) High-speed high- accuracy control I

Max. feedrate is 33.7m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

Max. feedrate is 33.7m/min when 1mm segment G1 block is commanded with 5 axes simultaneously

P 33

G06.2 NURBS interpolation

P942 P*** NURBS general error P941

G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation (Not implemented)

P942 — P941

G07.1 G107

Cylindrical interpolation

P942 P941 P941

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

615

(Note) It is valid when the parameter «#1267 ext03/bit0» is ON. If it is commanded when the parameter is

OFF, the program error (P34) will occur.

Format Function When the function on the left is commanded in the

modal of this function

When this function is commanded in the modal

on the left

When this function is commanded in the same

block

G08 (Note)

P0

High-accuracy control

Tool center point control is performed in the cutting mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the cutting mode.

P 33

P1 Tool center point control is performed in the high accuracy control mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the high accuracy control mode.

P 33

G09 Exact stop check Deceleration check is performed at the block end.

— Deceleration check is performed at the block end.

G10/G11.1 Parameter input by program

P942 — P941

G10 Compensation Data Input by Program

P942 — P941

G12/G13 Circular cutting P942 —

Tool center point control is ignored as the circular cutting takes precedence over the tool center point control function.

G12.1/G13.1 G112/G113

Polar coordinate interpolation

P942 P941 P941

G15/G16 Polar coordinate command

P942 P941 P941

G17 to G19 Plane selection The modal is switched to the specified plane.

— The modal is switched to the specified plane.

G20/G21 Inch/metric P942 Tool center point control is performed according to the inch / metric modal.

P941

G22.1/G23.1 Stroke check before travel

P942 P941 P941

G27 Reference position check

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the reference position check becomes valid.

G28 Reference position return

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the reference position return becomes valid.

G29 Start position return

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the start position return becomes valid.

G30 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return becomes valid.

G30.1 to G30.6 Tool change position return 1 to 6

P942 — P941

G31 Skip P942 — P941

G31.1 to G31.3 Multi-step skip function

P942 — P941

G33 Thread cutting P942 P941 P941

G34 to G36/ G37.1

Special fixed cycle P942 — P941

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

616

Format Function When the function on the left is commanded in the

modal of this function

When this function is commanded in the modal

on the left

When this function is commanded in the same

block

G37 Automatic tool length measurement

P942 — P941

G38 Tool radius compensation vector specification

P942 — P941

G39

Tool radius compensation corner circular command

P942 — P941

G40/G41/G42 Tool radius compensation

P942 P941 P941

G40.1/G41.1/ G41.2 G150/G151/ G152

Normal line control P942 P941 P941

G43/G44 Tool length compensation

Tool length compensation can be performed upon tool center point control cancellation.

Tool center point control can be performed upon tool length compensation cancellation.

The subsequently commanded modal takes precedence.

G43.1/G44 Tool length compensation along the tool axis

Tool length compensation along the tool axis can be performed upon tool center point control cancellation.

Tool center point control can be performed upon tool length compensation along the tool axis cancellation.

The subsequently commanded modal takes precedence.

G45/G46/ G47/G48

Tool position offset P942 — P941

G50/G51 Scaling P942 P941 P942

G52 Local Coordinate System Setting

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the local coordinate system setting becomes valid.

G53 Machine coordinate system selection

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the machine coordinate system selection becomes valid.

G54 to G59/ G54.1

Workpiece coordinate system selection

P942

Tool center point control is performed in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system.

P941

G60 Unidirectional positioning

P942 —

The tool center point control is ignored as the unidirectional positioning becomes valid.

G61 Exact stop check mode

Deceleration check is performed at the block end.

Deceleration check is performed at the block end.

Deceleration check is performed at the block end.

G61.1 High-accuracy control

Tool center point control is performed in the high accuracy control mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the high accuracy control mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the high accuracy control mode.

G61.2 High-accuracy spline interpolation 1

P942 P941 P941

G62 Mirror image P942 P941 P941

G63 Tapping mode P942 P941 P941

G64 Cutting mode Tool center point control is performed in the cutting mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the cutting mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the cutting mode.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.25 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5

617

Format Function When the function on the left is commanded in the

modal of this function

When this function is commanded in the modal

on the left

When this function is commanded in the same

block

G65 to G67/ G66.1

User macro Tool center point control becomes valid even in the user macro program.

Tool center point control becomes valid even in the user macro program.

Tool center point control is ignored as the user macro takes precedence over the tool center point control function.

G68 User macro subprogram termination

User macro subprogram is terminated.

— Tool center point control will be ignored.

G69 End position error check cancellation

The end position error check cancellation becomes valid.

— The end position error check cancellation, too, becomes valid.

G68.1/G69.1 Coordinate rotation P942 P941 P941

G68.1 IiJjKk/ G69.1

3-dimensional coordinate conversion

P922 P941 P923

G70 to G89 Fixed cycle P942 The tool center point control is ignored as the start fixed cycle becomes valid.

The tool center point control is ignored as the start fixed cycle becomes valid.

G90/G91 Absolute/ Incremental value command

The modal is switched to the specified absolute / incremental value command, and then tool center point control is performed.

Tool center point control is performed following the absolute / incremental modal.

Tool center point control is performed under the specified absolute / incremental value command.

G92 Machine coordinate system setting

P942 — P941

G94 Feed per minute Tool center point control is performed in the feed-per- minute mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the feed-per- minute mode.

Tool center point control is performed in the feed-per- minute mode.

G95 Feed per revolution P942 P941 P941

G96/G97 Constant surface speed control

P942 P941 P941

G98 Fixed cycle initial level return

The modal is switched to G98 and tool center point control is performed.

The modal is switched to G98 and tool center point control is performed.

The modal is switched to G98 and tool center point control is performed.

G99 Fixed cycle R point level return

The modal is switched to G99 and tool center point control becomes valid.

The modal is switched to G99 and tool center point control becomes valid.

The modal is switched to G99 and tool center point control becomes valid.

G114.1 Spindle synchronization

P942 P941 P941

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

618

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

13.26.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) ; !L

Function and purpose

The multi-part system control NC system can simultaneously run multiple machining programs independently.

The synchronization-between-part systems function is used in cases when, at some particular point during

operation, the operations of 1st and 2nd part systems are to be synchronized or in cases when the operation

of only one part system is required.

Command format

CAUTION

1. When programming a multi-part system, carefully observe the movements caused by other part systems’

programs.

(a) Simultaneous and independent operation (b) Timing synchronization operation (c) 2nd part system operation only; 1st part system waiting

!L__ ;

L Timing Synchronization Operation No. 1 to 9999

$1 $2

(a)

(a)

(c)

(b)

(b)

(b)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

619

Detailed description

(1) If !L1__ is commanded from one part system, operation of the first part system’s program will wait until

!L1__ is commanded from the other part system’s program.

When !L__ is commanded, the programs for the two part systems will start simultaneously.

(2) The timing synchronization command is normally issued in a single block. However, if a movement

command or M, S or T command is issued in the same block, whether to synchronize after the

movement command or M, S or T command or to execute the movement command or M, S or T

command after synchronization will depend on the parameter (#1093 Wmvfin).

#1093 Wmvfin

0 : Wait before executing movement command.

1 : Wait after executing movement command.

(3) If there is no movement command in the same block as the timing synchronization operation, when the

next block movement starts, synchronization may not be secured between the part systems. To

synchronize the part systems when movement starts after waiting, issue the movement command in the

same block as the timing synchronization operation.

(4) Timing synchronization operation is done only while the part system to be waited is operating

automatically. If this is not possible, the timing synchronization operation will be ignored and operation

will advance to the next block.

(5) The L command is the timing synchronization identification No. The same Nos. are waited but when they

are omitted, the Nos. are handled as L0.

(6) «SYN» will appear in the operation status section during timing synchronization operation. The timing

synchronization operation signal will be output to the PLC I/F.

(a) Timing synchronization operation (b) Waiting (c) Simultaneous start

!L __ ;

!L __ ;

Pi2 Pn 2

Pi1 Pn 1

Pi Pi21

Pn1 Pn2

$1

(a)

$2

$1

$2

(c)

(b)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

620

Operation example

Example of timing synchronization operation between part systems

The above programs are executed as follows:

$1 $2

!L1;

!L1;

P11 P21

P13

P12 P22

P23

!L2;

P24

!L2;

$1

$2 P23 P24P22

L1 L2

P21

P11 P12 P13

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

621

13.26.2 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 1) ; G115

Function and purpose

The part system can wait for the other part system to reach the start point before starting itself.

The start point can be set in the middle of a block.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the other part system (ex. $2).

(2) The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G115.

(Example) !L2 G115 X100. ;

Once the other part system reaches X100., the own part system will start. The other axes are not

checked.

(3) The other part system starts first when timing synchronization operation is executed.

(4) The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated start point, and

then starts.

!L__ G115 X__ Y__ Z__ ;

!L Timing synchronization operation

G115 G command

X Y Z Start point (Command by axis and workpiece coordinate value.)

Timing synchronization operation Designated start point

$1 ! G115

$2 !

!

! G115$1

$2

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

622

(5) When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other part

system, the own part system starts once all the designated axis of the other part system has reach the

designated start point.

(6) The timing synchronization status continues when the G115 command has been duplicated between

part systems.

(7) The single block stop function does not apply for the G115 block.

(8) A program error (P32) will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G115 command block.

Movement Designated start point Actual start point

Timing synchronizing

!L1 G115

!L1 G115

$1

$2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

623

13.26.3 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 2) ; G116

Function and purpose

The own part system can make the other part system to wait until it reaches the start point.

The start point can be set in the middle of a block.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the own part system (ex. $1).

(2) The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G116.

(Example) !L1 G116 X100. ;

Once the own part system reaches X100., the other part system (ex. $2) will start. The other axes are not

checked.

(3) The own part system starts first when timing synchronization operation is executed.

(4) The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated start point, and

then starts.

!L__ G116 X__ Y__ Z__ ;

!L Timing synchronization operation

G116 G command

X Y Z Start point (Command by axis and workpiece coordinate value.)

Timing synchronization operation Designated start point

$1

$2

$1

$2

! G116

!

!

! G116

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

624

(5) When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of own part system, the

other part system starts once all the designated axes of the own part system has reach the designated

start point.

(6) The timing synchronization status continues when the G116 command has been duplicated between

part systems.

(7) The single block stop function does not apply for the G116 block.

(8) A program error (P32) will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G116 command block.

Movement Designated start point Actual start point

Timing synchronizing

!L1 G116

!L1 G116

$1

$2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

625

13.26.4 Timing Synchronization Operation Function Using M codes ; M***

Function and purpose

The timing synchronization operation function between part systems is conventionally commanded with the «!»

code, but by using this function, the part systems can be waited with the M code commanded in the machining

program.

If the timing synchronization operation M code is commanded in either part system during automatic

operation, the system will wait for the same M code to be commanded in the other part system before

executing the next block.

The timing synchronization operation M code is used to control the timing synchronization operation between

the 1st part system and 2nd part system. Whether the timing synchronization operation M code can be used is

determined with the parameter settings.

Command format

Set the timing synchronization operation M code within the setting range of the parameter.

The minimum value is set in the parameter «#1310 WtMmin», and the maximum value is set in the parameter

«#1311 WtMmax».

M*** ;

*** Timing synchronization operation M code

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

626

Detailed description

(1) When the timing synchronization operation M code is commanded in the machining program, the two

part systems will be waited and operation will start in the commanded block. If the timing synchronization

operation M code is commanded in either part system during automatic operation, the system will wait for

the same M code to be commanded in the other part system before executing the next block.

(2) When the timing synchronization operation M code has been commanded in one part system, and the

part system is standing by for waiting, an alarm will occur if a different M code is commanded in the other

part system.

(a) Simultaneous and independent operation (b) Timing synchronization operation (c) 2nd part system operation only; 1st part system waiting (d) M102 Waiting (e) M101 Waiting

(a) M100 Waiting (b) Simultaneous and independent operation

(c) Alarm (Operation stops)

P11 P21

M100 ; M100 ;

P12 P22

M101 ;

M101 ; M102 ;

P23

M102 ;

P14 P24

M30 ; M30 ;

(e)

(d)

$2

(a)

(a)

(c)

(a)

(b)

(b)

(b)

$1

P11 P12 P14

P21 P22 P24P23

(d)

(e)

$1

$2

P11 P21

M100 ;

M101 ;

P12 P22

(a)

$1 $2

(b)

(c)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.26 Timing Synchronization Operation

627

(3) The part systems are waited with the M code following the parameters below.

(a) M code range designation parameter (M code minimum value <= M code <= M code maximum value)

Timing synchronization operation between part systems using the M code is valid when both of the

above parameters are set to a value other than «0». (This function is invalid if either parameter is set to

«0».)

The timing synchronization operation M code cannot be used if the M code maximum value is smaller

than the minimum value.

When the timing synchronization operation M code is valid, both the M code and ! code can be used for

timing synchronization operation.

(b) Timing synchronization operation method parameters

Depending on the timing synchronization operation method selection parameter and timing

synchronization operation ignore signal combination, the timing synchronization operation will be

determined by the parameters, regardless of the command format («!» code and M code).

This parameter requires the CNC to be turned OFF after the settings. Turn the power OFF and ON to

enable the parameter settings.

# Item Details Setting range

1310 WtMmin

Minimum value for timing synchronization operation M code

The minimum value of the M code is set. If the setting value is «0», the the timing synchronization operation M code will be ignored.

0, 100 to 99999999

1311 WtMmax

Maximum value for timing synchronization operation M code

The maximum value of the M code is set. If the setting value is «0», the the timing synchronization operation M code will be ignored.

0, 100 to 99999999

# Item Details Setting range

1279 (PR)

ext15 (bit0)

Method for timing synchronization operation between part systems

Select an operation for timing synchronization operation between part systems. 0: If one of the part systems is not in automatic operation, ignore the timing synchronization operation and execute the next block. 1: Operate according to the timing synchronization operation ignore signal. If the timing synchronization operation ignore signal is «1», the timing synchronization operation will be ignored. If «0», the part systems will be waited.

0 / 1

# Item Details Setting range

1093 Wmvfin

Method for timing synchronization operation between part systems

Designate the timing synchronization operation between part systems method when using multi-part systems. When there is a movement command in the timing synchronization operation (!, M) block: 0: Waiting before executing movement command 1: Waiting after executing movement command

0 / 1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

628

Precautions

(1) When timing synchronization operation with the M code, always command the M code in an independent

block.

(2) When standing by after commanding the timing synchronization operation M code in one part system, an

alarm will occur if a different M code is commanded in the other part system. Operation will stop in both

part systems.

(3) The M code in the machining program can be ignored with the timing synchronization operation ignore

signal. Operation with a single part system is possible without deleting the M code in the machining

program.

(4) When the M code can be used, both the M code and ! code can be used.

(5) While the timing synchronization operation M code is valid, if one part system is standing by with an M

code, an alarm will occur if there is a ! code timing synchronization operation command in the other part

system.

(6) While the timing synchronization operation M code is valid, if one part system is standing by with a !

code, an alarm will occur if there is an M code timing synchronization operation command in the other

part system.

(7) The G115 and G116 commands cannot be used when waiting with the M code.

(8) If the M code command Nos. are overlapped, the order of priority will be M code macro, M command

synchronous tapping, timing synchronization operation M code and normal M code.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

629

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

Function and purpose

Inclined surface machining function enables defining a new coordinate system (called «Feature coordinate

system») which is obtained by rotating and parallel translating the origin of the present coordinate system (X,

Y, Z) (a coordinate system before inclined surface machining command). With this function, you can define an

arbitrary plane in a space and issue normal program commands to this plane in machining.

It’s possible to automatically control the tool axis to be in the + Z direction of the newly defined feature

coordinate system. The feature coordinate system is redefined in accordance with the tool axis direction, thus

there is no need to mind the feature coordinate system’s direction and tool axis’ rotation direction in making

machining programs.

This function is available only for the 5-axis machining and also, the option is required.

If the option is not provided and the inclined surface machining command is issued, a program error (P950)

will occur.

The feature coordinate system is defined in the following method.

Original coordinate system

Feature coordinate system

G code Command method

G68.2 P0 Define using Euler angles

G68.2 P1 Define using roll-pitch-yaw angles

G68.2 P2 Define using three points in a plane

G68.2 P3 Define using two vectors

G68.2 P4 Define using projection angles

G68.3 Define using tool axis direction

G69.1 Cancel inclined surface machining command

Z

Y

X

ZY

X

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

630

13.27.1 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Euler Angles

Command format

(Note 1) If the address X, Y or Z is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

When x, y and z are all 0, the feature coordinate system’s origin will be the same as of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

(Note 2) If the address I, J or K is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

(Note 3) If any address other than P, X, Y, Z, I, J and K is included, a program error (P954) will occur.

G68.2 P0 Xx Yy Zz Ia Jb Kc; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using Euler angles) (P0 can be omitted.)

x, y, z Feature coordinate system’s zero point Command the zero point by the absolute values with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

a, b, c Euler angles (-360.0 to 360.0)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

631

Detailed description

By commanding G68.2 P0 (define using Euler angles), the feature coordinate system (a coordinate system

made by rotating and shifting the origin of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining) is

defined.

Coordinate system rotation is commanded using the Euler angles.

When G68.2 Xx Yy Zz Ia Jb Kc is commanded, the feature coordinate system is established as below.

(a) Define a point (x, y, z) in the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command, as the

feature coordinate system’s origin.

(b) Rotate the coordinate system, which was defined by shifting the origin in (a), by angle a about its Z axis.

(c) Rotate the coordinate system, which was defined by rotation in (b), by angle b about its X axis.

(d) Rotate the coordinate system, which was defined by rotation in (c), by angle c about its Z axis.

(e) The coordinate system made in the above steps is feature coordinate system.

If coordinate system’s rotation is counter clockwise when viewing from the positive ends of the rotation center

axis, this rotation will be considered as forward rotation. Relationship between the coordinate system before

inclined surface machining command and the feature coordinate system is as shown below.

WZ

WX

WY

WZ

WX

WY

FZ

FX

FYa

c

b

(b)

x

y

z

(a) (c)

Z

X

Y Z

X

Y

(d)

Z X

Y

x y

z

(e)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

632

13.27.2 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Roll-Pitch-Yaw angles

Command format

(Note 1) If the address X, Y or Z is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

When x, y and z are all 0, the feature coordinate system’s origin will be the same as of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

(Note 2) If the address I, J or K is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

(Note 3) If any address other than P, Q, X, Y, Z, I, J and K is included, a program error (P954) will occur.

(Note 4) A program error (P954) will occur if «q» is a value other than those listed above.

G68.2 P1 Qq Xx Yy Zz Ia Jb Kc; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using roll-pitch-yaw angles)

x, y, z Feature coordinate system’s zero point Command the zero point by the absolute values with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

q Rotation order q First Second Third 123 X Y Z 132 X Z Y 213 Y X Z 231 Y Z X 312 Z X Y 321 Z Y X If the address Q is omitted, «q» will be handled as «123».

a Rotation angle about X axis (roll angle) (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

b Rotation angle about Y axis (pitch angle) (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

c Rotation angle about Z axis (yaw angle) (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

633

Detailed description

(a) Designate the feature coordinate system’s origin by x, y and z (coordinates before inclined surface

machining command).

(b) Rotate the shifted coordinate system by a angle about the X axis of the coordinate system before

inclined surface machining command. (Roll angle)

(c) Rotate the coordinate system, which was defined after rotation in (b), by b angle about the Y axis of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command. (Pitch angle)

(d) Rotate the coordinate system, which was defined after rotation in (c), by c angle about the Y axis of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command. (Yaw angle)

(e) The coordinate system made in the above steps is feature coordinate system.

(Example) G68.2 P1 Q123 Xx Yy Zz Ia Jb Kc;(When q=123 [rotations in the order of WX, WY and WZ])

(a) (b)

(c) (d) (e)

FX

FZ

FY

WX

WZ

WY

a FY FX

FZ

FX b

FY

FZ

c FY FX

FZ

(x, y, z)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

634

13.27.3 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Three Points in a Plane

Command format

(Note 1) If the address Q is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

(Note 2) If the address X, Y or Z in Q0 to Q3 is omitted, the address will be handled as zero.

(Note 3) If the address R is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

(Note 4) If any address other than P, Q, X, Y, Z and R is included, a program error (P954) will occur.

(Note 5) A program error (P954) will occur in the following cases.

— When any other command is included among G68.2 P2 Q0 to Q3.

— When any of G68.2 P2 Q1 to Q3 is lacked.

— When G68.2 P2 Q0 to Q3 are overlapped.

— When a value other than 0 to 3 is commanded in the address Q.

— When R is commanded in more than one block.

(Note 6) A program error (P955) will occur in the following cases.

— When the same point was designated for two or more points among the 1st to the 3rd points.

— When the three points exist on a straight line.

— The distance between one of the three points and the straight line connecting the other two points

is shorter than 0.1[mm].

G68.2 P2 Q0 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ra; G68.2 P2 Q1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ; G68.2 P2 Q2 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 ; G68.2 P2 Q3 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 ; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using three points in a plane)

Q

Designate the points Designate from the 1st to the 3rd points, or specify by the shift distance. 0: Shift distance 1: The 1st point 2: The 2nd point 3: The 3rd point

x0, y0, z0 Shift distance between the 1st point and the feature coordinate system’s origin Command by the incremental value with respect to the feature coordinate system before parallel shift.

a The angle to rotate the feature coordinate system about Z axis (the setting range is from — 360.0 to 360.0)

x1, y1, z1 The 1st point Designate the feature coordinate system’s origin with the workpiece coordinate system’s position.

x2, y2, z2 The 2nd point Designate a point on the feature coordinate system’s X axis (+ direction) with the workpiece coordinate system’s position.

x3, y3, z3 The 3rd point Designate a point on the feature coordinate system’s Y axis with the workpiece coordinate system’s position.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

635

Detailed description

(1) Designate the points Q1, Q2 and Q3 with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface

machining command. The point Q1 will be the origin of the feature coordinate system.

(2) An axis in the direction from Q1 to Q2 is X axis.

Normally, designate a point on Y axis (+ direction) as Q3. (If the commanded X axis and Y axis are not at

perfect right angles, Y axis will be automatically compensated to be at a right angle to X axis.)

(Note 1) Feature coordinate system’s Z axis is in the direction of the cross product of (Q2-Q1)(Q3-Q1).

(Note 2) Feature coordinate system’s Y axis is determined with respect to the right-handed system.

(3) When shift distance (x0, y0, z0) of the feature coordinate system’s origin is commanded, the feature

coordinate system’s origin is further parallel translated by (x0, y0, z0). Command the parallel translation

distance with respect to the feature coordinate system before parallel translation. Always specify x0, y0

and z0 by incremental value.

(4) When the rotation angle a is commanded in the address R, the feature coordinate system is rotated by

the angle a about the Z axis of the feature coordinate system.

(Example) G68.2 P2 Q0 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ra ;

G68.2 P2 Q1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G68.2 P2 Q2 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 ;

G68.2 P2 Q3 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 ;

(x0,y0,z0) Q1

Q3

Q2

a

WZ

FZ (=FZ1)

WY

WX

FX

FY FZ1

FX1

FY1

a

(x1,y1,z1)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

636

13.27.4 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Two Vectors

Command format

(Note 1) If the address X, Y or Z is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

When x, y and z are all 0, the feature coordinate system’s origin will be the same as of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

(Note 2) If the address I, J or K in G68.2 P3 Q1 and Q2 is omitted, the omitted value will be handled as zero.

(Note 3) If any address other than P, Q, I, J and K is included, a program error (P954) will occur. (X, Y and Z

are possible to command in G68.2 P3 Q1)

(Note 4) A program error (P954) will occur in the following cases.

— When any other command is included between G68.2P3 Q1 and Q2.

— When either G68.2 P3 Q1 or Q2 is lacked.

— When G68.2 P3 Q1 and Q2 are overlapped.

— When a value other than 1 to 2 is commanded in the address Q.

— When the address Q is omitted

(Note 5) A program error (P955) will occur in the following cases.

— When the values ix, jx and kx are all zero.

— When the values iz, jz and kz are all zero.

— When the angle formed by the feature coordinate system’s X and Z vectors is not a right angle,

and the deviation is 5 degrees or bigger.

G68.2 P3 Q1 Xx Yy Zz Iix Jjx Kkx ; G68.2 P3 Q2 Iiz Jjz Kkz ; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using two vectors)

Q

Designate vectors Select X axis direction vector or Z axis direction vector. 1: X axis direction vector 2: Z axis direction vector

x, y, z Feature coordinate system’s origin Command by the absolute values with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

ix, jx, kx

Feature coordinate system’s X axis direction vector Command the direction with respect to the ordinate system before inclined surface machining command. The setting range is the same as the axis setting range, and the unit is dimensionless.

iz, jz, kz

Feature coordinate system’s Z axis direction vector Command the direction with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command. The setting range is the same as the axis setting range, and the unit is dimensionless.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

637

Detailed description

(1) Designate the feature coordinate system’s origin by x, y and z (coordinates before inclined surface

machining command).

(2) Define the X, Y and Z axes’ directions of the feature coordinate system in the following procedure.

— Feature coordinate system’s X axis positive direction is rx = (ix, jx, kx).

— Feature coordinate system’s Y axis positive direction is that of the cross product of (iz, jz, kz)(ix, jx,

kx).

— Feature coordinate system’s Z axis is determined with respect to the right-handed system.

The direction of rx=(ix, jx, kx) is the X axis of the feature coordinate system.

Normally, the direction of rz=(iz, jz, kz) is the Z axis (positive direction) of the feature coordinate system.

(If the commanded X axis and Y axis are not at perfect right angles, it will be automatically compensated

to be at a right angle to X axis.)

Example G68.2 P3 Q1 Xx Yy Zz Iix Jjx Kkx ;

G68.2 P3 Q2 Iiz Jjz Kkz ;

FZ

FY FX

rz=(iz,jz,kz) rx=(ix,jx,kx)

(x,y,z) XY

Z WX

WZ

WY

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

638

13.27.5 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Projection Angles

Command format

(Note 1) If the address X, Y or Z is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

When x, y and z are all 0, the feature coordinate system’s origin will be the same as of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

(Note 2) If the address I, J or K is omitted, the omitted value will be handled as zero.

(Note 3) If any address other than P, X, Y, Z, I, J and K is included, a program error (P954) will occur.

(Note 4) Program error (P954) will occur when the angle formed by the X axis after rotating by angle a about

Y axis, and the Y axis after rotating by angle b about X axis is 1 degree or less.

G68.2 P4 Xx Yy Zz Ia Jb Kc ; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using projection angles)

x, y, z Feature coordinate system’s origin Command by the absolute values with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

a The angle to rotate the X axis about the Y axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

b The angle to rotate the X axis about the Y axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

c The rotation angle about the Z axis of the feature coordinate system (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

639

Detailed description

(1) Designate the feature coordinate system’s origin by x, y and z (coordinates before inclined surface

machining command).

(2) Define the X, Y and Z axes’ directions of the feature coordinate system in the following procedure.

— The direction in which the X axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command

is rotated by the angle a about Y axis is defined as «ra».

— The direction in which the Y axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command

is rotated by the angle b about X axis is defined as «rb».

— Feature coordinate system’s Z axis is in the direction of the cross product of (ra rb).

— Feature coordinate system’s X axis is in the direction determined by rotating «ra» by the angle c about

the feature coordinate system’s Z axis.

— Feature coordinate system’s Z axis is determined with respect to the right-handed system.

(Note 1) If «ra» and «rb» are considered to be parallel (or if the angle formed by the two vectors is 1 degree or

less), a program error (P955) will occur.

(Note 2) Except XZ and YZ plane, it is not possible to designate a plane that is in parallel with Z axis.

Example G68.2 P4 Xx Yy Zy Ia Jb Kc ;

FZ

FY FX a

b

XY

Z

ra

rb

WXWZ

WY

FY FX

c

FZ

(x, y, z)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

640

13.27.6 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Tool Axis Direction

Command format

(Note 1) If the address X, Y or Z is omitted, the address will be regarded as zero.

When x, y and z are all 0, the feature coordinate system’s origin will be the same as of the

coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

(Note 2) If the address R is omitted, the omitted value will be handled as zero.

(Note 3) If any address other than X, Y, Z and R is included, a program error (P954) will occur.

G68.3 Xx Yy Zz Ra; … Inclined surface machining mode ON (define using tool axis direction)

x, y, z Feature coordinate system’s origin Command by the absolute values with respect to the coordinate system before inclined surface machining command.

a The angle to rotate the feature coordinate system about Z axis (the setting range is from -360.0 to 360.0)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

641

Detailed description

(1) Designate the feature coordinate system’s origin by x, y and z (coordinates before inclined surface

machining command).

(2) Define the X, Y and Z axes’ directions of the feature coordinate system in the following procedure.

— Feature coordinate system’s Z axis is in the tool axis direction.

— Feature coordinate system’s X axis is in the direction of the X axis of the coordinate system before

inclined surface machining command after rotating with the tool. (When all the tool side rotary axes are at

0 degree (machine value), the feature coordinate system’s X axis will be in the same direction as the X

axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface machining.)

— Feature coordinate system’s Y axis is in the direction of the Y axis of the coordinate system before

inclined surface machining command after rotating with the tool. (When all the tool side rotary axes are at

0 degree (machine value), the feature coordinate system’s Y axis will be in the same direction as the Y

axis in the coordinate system before inclined surface machining.)

— Feature coordinate system is finally established by rotating by the angle a about the Z axis.

Example G68.3 Xx Yy Zy Ra;

WY

WZ

WX

FY

FXa

aFZ

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

642

13.27.7 Tool Axis Direction Control

Function and purpose

When G53.1 is commanded, a rotary axis is automatically moved so that the tool axis direction (direction from

the tool’s tip to the bottom) will be the feature coordinate system’s +Z direction.

For table tilt type and composite type machines, feature coordinate system may change in accordance with

the rotation of the table rotation axis. There are two types of tool axis direction control: G53.1 command (type

I) which moves only the rotation axis, and G53.6 command (type II) which moves the rotation axis and the

orthogonal axis by fixing the tool center point position in the view from workpiece.

Below is an example of composite type machine configuration to explain the operation when G53.1 is

commanded.

Tool-side rotary axis is regarded as B axis and table-side rotary axis as C axis in this case. For composite type

machines, when G53.1 is commanded, C axis rotates so that the feature coordinate system’s Z axis (1st

feature coordinate system) lies on the X-Z plane of the workpiece coordinate system. And also B axis rotates

so that the tool axis direction will be the + Z direction of the 2nd feature coordinate system, which is defined

after C axis’ rotation. (X, Y and Z axes will not move.)

The current position counter shows the coordinates of the 2nd feature coordinate system. The travel speed of

the rotary axes at G53.1 is determined based on the current modal (G00/G01).

Z

X

Y Z

X

Y

G53.1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

643

Command format

G53.1/G53.6 are group 00.

(Note 1) Command G53.1/G53.6 during inclined surface machining mode. If commanded in any other mode,

a program error (P953) will occur.

(Note 2) Make sure to command G53.1/G53.6 sorely in a block. If this command is issued in the same block

as of other G codes or travel command etc., a program error (P953) will occur.

(Note 3) The travel speed when G53.1 is commanded follows the G group 1 modal (such as G00/G01) during

the tool axis direction control command.

(Note 4) The travel speed on the feature coordinate system when G53.6 is commanded follows G group 1

modal (such as G00/G01). The travel speed of each axis may exceed the command speed as the

tool tip position is fixed in the view from workpiece. However, rapid traverse (G00) is clamped by the

parameter «#2001 rapid», and the cutting feed (G01) is clamped by the parameter «#2002 clamp».

(Note 5) If the address P is omitted, the omitted value will be handled as zero. If any other value than 0, 1,

and 2 is command, a program error (P35) will occur.

(Note 6) If any address other than P/N is commanded while commanding G53.1, a program error (P953) will

occur.

(Note 7) If any address other than P/H/N is commanded while commanding G53.6, a program error (P953)

will occur.

(Note 8) When the address H is omitted, H modal commanded before G53.6 command will be applied. If H

modal is not commanded, a program error (P953) will occur.

(Note 9) If the tool length offset No. is changed by address H command, a program error (P953) will occur.

G53.1 Pp ; … Tool axis direction control (type 1): only the rotation axis moves

G53.6 Pp Hh … Tool axis direction control (type 2); move the rotation axis and the orthogonal axis by fixing the tool center point position in the view from workpiece

p Select a solution for each machine type 0: Select a default solution for each machine type. 1: Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is positive. 2: Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is negative.

H Tool length offset No.

(Example 1) (Example 2)

: G43 H1 : G53.6 <- Use H1 :

: G53.6 <-Error (P953) :

(Example 1)

:

G43 H1 <- Command the tool offset No.1

:

G53.6 H2 <- If tool length offset No.2 is commanded, a program error (P953) will occur.

:

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

644

(Note 10) If the offset amount for the tool No. that the address H is commanded is «0», a program error (P957)

will occur.

(Example 1) When «H1 = 0»

:

G43 H1

:

G53.6 <- Error (P957)

:

(Example 2) When «H1 0»

:

G43 H1

:

H0 <- Tool length offset is «0» while it remains G43 modal.

:

G53.6 <- Error (P957)

:

(Example 3) When «0» is commaned to address H

:

G53.6 <- Error (P957)

:

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

645

Detailed description

The operation of type 1 (G53.1)

(1) Composite type B-C axes

As for the composite type machine, B axis/C axis rotates to make the tool axis direction to +Z direction on

the feature coordinate system by G53.1 command. In this case, X axis, Y axis, and Z axis do not travel.

(2) Table tilt type A-C axes

As for the table tilt type machine, A axis/C axis rotates to make the tool axis direction to +Z direction on

the feature coordinate system by G53.1 command. In this case, X axis, Y axis, and Z axis do not travel.

(3) Tool tilt type B-C axes

As for the tool tilt type machine, B axis/C axis rotates to make the tool axis direction to +Z direction on the

feature coordinate system by G53.1 command. In this case, X axis, Y axis, and Z axis do not travel.

wZ

fy G53.1

wY wX

fx

fz

wZ wY wX

fz fy

fx

G53.1

wZ

G53.1

wY wX

fxfz

fy

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

646

Type 2 (G53.6) command

(1) Composite type B-C axes

As for the composite type machine, the tool tip position is fixed in the view from the workpiece, and X

axis/Y axis/Z axis/B axis/C axis travel to make the tool axis direction +Z on the feature coordinate system

by G53.6 command.

(2) Table tilt type A-C axes

As for the table tilt type machine, the tool tip position is fixed in the view from the workpiece, and X axis/

Y axis/Z axis/A axis/C axis travel to make the tool axis direction +Z on the feature coordinate system by

G53.6 command.

(3) Tool tilt type B-C axes

As for the tool tilt type machine, the tool tip position is fixed in the view from the workpiece, and X axis/Y

axis/Z axis/B axis/C axis travel to make the tool axis direction +Z on the feature coordinate system by

G53.6 command.

wZ

fy G53.6

wY wX

fx

fz

fz fy

fx

wZ wY wX

G53.6

wZ

G53.1

wY wX

fxfz

fy

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

647

Select rotary axis’ solution

When G53.1 is commanded, there are normally two types of solutions for the rotary axis’ calculated angle;

one is to rotate the primary rotary axis positively, and the other negatively. Use the address P (P=0, 1 or 2) in

G53.1 to select either one of the solutions.

These are the default solutions for each machine type.

When P is «0»: Select a default solution for each machine type

When P is «1»: Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is positive

When P is «2»: Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is negative

When the address P is omitted, P will be regarded as zero, so the default solution for each machine type is

selected. If any other value than 0,1, and 2 is command, a program error (P35) will occur.

These are the default solutions for each machine type.

Primary rotary axis is the rotary axis which serves as the criteria for selecting the solution in G53.1 command.

Machine type Primary rotary axis Solution selected by default

Tool tilt Tool-side 2nd rotary axis Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is positive (same as when P is «1»)

Table tilt Table-side 2nd rotary axis Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is negative (same as when P is «2»)

Composite Tool-side rotary axis Select a solution so that the primary rotary axis rotation is positive (same as when P is «1»)

B > 0

C

G53.1 P2

C

B < 0

G53.1 P0 G53.1 P1

wY

wZ

wX

fY fZ

fX

fY fZ

fX

fY fZ

fX

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

648

13.27.8 Details of Operation

Detailed description

(1) Operation during inclined surface machining mode

When inclined surface machining is commanded, the above-mentioned feature coordinate system is

defined. By setting the parameters #8901 to #8906 to «23», you can display the coordinates of the feature

coordinate system on the counter (no machine motion). The travel commands during inclined surface

machining mode are handled with respect to the feature coordinate system.

In the counter display of the feature coordinate system, the machining position on the program command

which does not include the tool length compensation/tool radius compensation can be selected by setting

of the parameter «#1287 ext23/bit1, bit2 (inclined surface coordinate display)».

(2) Tool Axis Direction Control

When G53.1 is commanded, the rotary axis moves so that the tool axis direction will be + Z direction of

the feature coordinate system. At this time, the rotary axis moves, but X, Y and Z axes won’t move. The

rotary axis’ travel speed is determined based on the modal when G53.1 is commanded.

(3) Cancel inclined surface machining mode

The command G69.1 cancels the inclined surface machining. When this mode is canceled, the feature

coordinate system setting will be canceled, the coordinate system will change back to the workpiece

coordinate system when inclined surface machining was commanded, and workpiece coordinate

position counter will change back to the previous workpiece coordinate system’s coordinates (no

machine motion). By inputting Reset, the inclined surface machining is also canceled.

(If the parameter «#1151 rstint» is set to «0», however, the inclined surface machining mode is kept even

when Reset 1 is input.)

CAUTION

1. Depending on the feature coordinate system setting, rotary axis may move greatly in response to G53.1

command. Thus, before commanding G53.1, move the tool far enough from the table.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

649

Program example

Program example 1

The machining program #10 is for machining an identical shape on each face of the hexagonal column using

a composite type machine. Feature coordinate systems on each face are defined in the blocks N1 to N6, and

then same machining is performed using the subprogram (Machining program #100). The workpiece origin is

deemed to be at the center of the hexagonal column’s end-face.

Machining program #10

Machining program #100

G53.1

G90 G0 X0. Y0. Z5.;

G1 Z-5. F500;

G1 Y20. F1000;

G2 X20. Y0. R20. F1000;

G1 X0. F1000;

G23 ;

G: Feature coordinate system’s origin

N1 G68.2 X86.6025 Y50. Z0. I-90. J-45. K0. G22L100; G69.1; G0 Z200.;

Machining on the face (1)

N2 G68.2 X86.6025 Y-50. Z0. I-150. J-45. K0.; G22L100; G69.1; G0 Z200.;

Machining on the face (2)

N3 G68.2 X0. Y-100. Z0. I-210. J-45. K0.; G22L100; G69.1; G0 Z200.;

Machining on the face (3)

N4 G68.2 X-86.6025 Y-50. I-270. J-45. K0.; G22L100; G69.1; G0Z200. ;

Machining on the face (4)

N5 G68.2 X-86.6025 Y50. I-330. J-45. K0; G22L100; G69.1; G0Z200.;

Machining on the face (5)

N6 G68.2 X0. Y100. I-30. J-45. K0.; G22L100; G69.1; G0 Z200.;

Machining on the face (6)

M30

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(5)

50. 86.6025

G WY

FY

WX

FY FZ FX

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

650

Program example 2

The machining program #10 to #15 are for machining a shape on an inclined surface of the cube as shown in

the figure next page. The feature coordinate system is defined by designating the inclined surface in each

main program, and then same machining is done using the subprogram (Machining program #100).

Machining program #10 Euler angles

N1 G28XYZBC;

G54X0Y0Z0;

M200;

G68.2 X33.3333 Y 33.3333 Z66.6666 I-45 J54.7356 K0;

G22L100;

G69.1;

Machining program #11 Roll-pitch-yaw angles

N2 G28XYZBC;

M200;

G68.2 P1 Q321 X33.3333 Y 33.3333 Z66.6666 I45 J-35.2644 K-30;

G22L100;

G69.1;

M30;

Machining program #12 Three points in a plane

N3 G28XYZBC;

G54X0Y0Z;

M200;

G68.2 P2 Q0 X0 Y-18.7503 Z0 R0;

G68.2 P2 Q1 X50 Y50 Z100

G68.2 P2 Q2 X50 Y0 Z50;

G68.2 P2 Q3 X50 Y50 Z100;

G22L100;

G69.1;

M30;

Machining program #13 Two vectors

N4 G28XYZBC;

G54X0Y0Z0;

M200;

G68.2 P3 Q1 X33.3333 Y 33.3333 Z66.6666 J-100 K0;

G68.2 P3 Q2 I-100 J-100 K100;

G22L100;

G69.1;

M30;

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

651

G: Feature coordinate system’s origin

Machining program #14 Projection angles

N5 G28XYZBC;

G54X0Y0Z0;

M200;

G68.2 P4 X33.3333 Y 33.3333 Z66.6666 I-45 J45 K-60;

G22L100;

G69.1;

M30;

Machining program #15 Tool axis direction basis

N6 G28XYZBC;

G54X0Y0Z0;

M200;

B-45. C45.;

G68.3 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 R0.;

G22L100;

G69.1;

M30;

Machining program #100

G53.1

G90G0.X0.Y0.Z0.B0.C0.;

G0X0Y0Z0;

G1 Y50. F1000;

G2 X50. Y0. R50. F1000;

G1 X0. F1000;

G23;

A

B C

A

B C

(X0, Y0, Z0) = (33.3333, 33.3333, 66.6667)

G

100 100

100

WY

WZ

WX

FY

FZ

FX

FY

FX

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

652

13.27.9 Rotary Axis Basic Position Selection

Detailed description

When inclined surface machining is commanded, the basic position for establishing the feature coordinate

system’s origin can be set with the parameter (#7915 Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface

machining). There are two types of basic position selection. One is to set the feature coordinate system in

view from the workpiece coordinate system independently of the rotary axis’ position when inclined surface

machining is commanded (Start position basis), and the other is to set the feature coordinate system in view

from a workpiece coordinate system which is determined regardless of the rotary axis position when inclined

surface machining is commanded (Zero degree position basis).

Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machining

Start position basis (#7915=1)

Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machining

Zero degree position basis (#7915=0)

When workpiece is placed in the workpiece coordinate system direction: Workpiece coordinate offset A0. C0.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a coordinate system which is determined based on the workpiece coordinate system.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

WZ

WY

WX C0

G90 G54 A0. C0. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C0

FX

FY

FZ WZ

WY

WX

C0

G90 G54 A0. C0. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C0

FX

FY

FZ WZ

WY

WX

C0

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

653

Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machining

Start position basis (#7915=1)

Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machining

Zero degree position basis (#7915=0)

When workpiece is placed deviated from the workpiece coordinate system: Workpiece coordinate offset A0. C30.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction does not match the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2 command.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

Example) Polygon machining: Machining an identical shape on each of the six surfaces.

(Subprogram) : G68.2 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk G53.1 G01 Xx Ff : G69.1 G23 Create a machining shape in the subprogram using inclined surface machining and tool axis direction control. Need to consider the rotary axis’ angle before calling the subprogram.

(Main program) : G68.2 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk G53.1 G22Ll G69.1 : (Subprogram) G01 Xx Ff : G23 Carry out inclined surface machining and tool axis direction control in the main program and create a machining shape in the subprogram. No need to consider the rotary axis’ angle before calling the subprogram.

WZ

30

WY

WX C0

G90 G54 A0. C30. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1

30

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C0

FX

FZ

FY WZ

WY

WX

C0

G90 G54 A0. C30. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1

30 FX

FY FZ

WZ

WY

WX C0

FX

FZ

FY WZ

WY

WX

C0

WZ

WY

WX (1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

654

Combination with tool center point (TCP) control

When inclined surface machining control is commanded together with the TCP control, define the table-

interlocked feature coordinate system by setting the parameter (#7911 Rotary axis basic position selection)

for TCP control. When zero degree position basis (#7911=0) is selected, it is possible to define the table-

interlocked feature coordinate system at an arbitrary rotary axis angle. For the start position basis (#7911=1),

the table-interlocked feature coordinate system can be defined on an inclined surface only when the TCP

control is commanded at the same rotary axis angle as of the inclined surface machining command (G68.2) or

tool axis direction control command (G53.1).

When workpiece is placed in the workpiece coordinate system direction:

Rotary axis basic position selection Workpiece coordinate zero point for a basis

(#7911 = 0)

Rotary axis basic position selection The position when the tool center point is

commanded for a basis (#7911 = 1)

Inclined surface machining Zero degree position basis (#7915 =0) Workpiece coordinate offset A 0. C0.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at 0 degree of the coordinate system.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

WZ

WY

WX C0

G90 G54 A0. C0. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1 G43.4

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C0

FX

FY

FZ WZ

WY

WX

C0

*FX

*FY

*FZ WZ

WY

WX

C0

*FX

*FY

*FZ WZ

WY

WX

C0

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

655

When workpiece is placed deviated from workpiece coordinate system

(1) When TCPcontrol (G43.4) is commanded at the same angle as of tool axis direction control (G53.1)

Rotary axis basic position selection Workpiece coordinate zero point for a basis

(#7911 = 0)

Rotary axis basic position selection The position when the tool center point is

commanded for a basis (#7911 = 1)

Inclined surface machining Zero degree position basis (#7915 =0) Workpiece coordinate offset A 0. C30.

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis angle.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at the position of the present feature coordinate system.

WZ

30

WY

WX C0

G90 G54 A0. C0. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1 G43.4

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C-30

FX

FY

FZ WZ

WY

WX

C-30

*FX

*FY

*FZ WZ

WY

WX

C-30

*FX

*FY

*FZ WZ

WY

WX

C-30

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

656

When TCP control (G43.4) is commanded at a different angle from tool axis direction control (G53.1).

Rotary axis basic position selection Workpiece coordinate zero point for a basis

(#7911 = 0)

Rotary axis basic position selection The position when the tool center point is

commanded for a basis (#7911 = 1)

Inclined surface machining Zero degree position basis (#7915 =0) Workpiece coordinate offset A 0. C30. Rotary axis is rotated before tool center point control command

When G68.2 is commanded Feature coordinate system is defined at a position in view from a workpiece coordinate system regardless of rotary axis position.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction matches the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2.

When G53.1 is commanded The tool axis direction does not match the Z axis direction of the feature coordinate system, which has been defined with G68.2 command.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at 0 degree of the coordinate system that is determined based on the rotary axis position.

When G43.4 is commanded Feature coordinate system is fixed to the table at the position of the present feature coordinate system.

WZ

30

WY

WX C0

G90 G54 A0. C0. G68.2XxYyZz G53.1 G0 A30. G43.4

FX

FY

FZ

WZ

WY

WX C-30

FX

FY

FZ WZ

WY

WX

C-30

FX

WZ

WY

WX

FY

FZ

C-30

*FX

WZ

WY

WX

*FY

*FZ C-30

FX

WZ

WY

WX

FY

FZ

C-30

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

657

Start position based inclined surface machining command (#7915=1)

If the Z axis of the feature coordinate system defined on an inclined surface matches the tool axis direction,

the table-interlocked feature coordinate system can be defined by commanding the tool center point (TCP)

control.

However, if the TCP control start position basis is selected (#7911=1), the table-interlocked feature coordinate

system can be defined on an inclined surface only when TCP control is commanded at the same angle as of

the inclined surface machining command (G68.2) or tool axis direction control command (G53.1).

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

658

13.27.10 Relation with Other Functions

Relation with other functions

Commands Available in Inclined Surface Machining Mode

If commanded in any other mode, a program error (P951) will occur.

Command Function

G00, G01 G02, G03

G02.1, G03.1

Positioning, Linear interpolation Circular interpolation, Helical interpolation Spiral interpolation

G04 Dwell

G05 P0, P1, P2, P10000 High-speed machining mode, High-speed high- accuracy control II

G05.1 Q0, Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G08 P1 High-accuracy control

G09 Exact stop check

G10, G11 Program data input/cancel, compensation data input

G12, G13 Circular cut

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G22/G23 Stroke check before travel ON/cancel

G28 Automatic 1st reference position return

G29 Start position return

G30 2nd to 4th reference position return

G30.1 to G30.6 Tool exchange position return

G34, G35, G36, G37.1 Special fixed cycle

G40, G41, G42 Tool radius compensation cancel/left/right

G43, G44 G43.1

G43.4, G43.5

Tool length compensation plus/minus/cancel Tool length compensation along the tool axis Tool center point control I/II

G45,G46,G47,G48 Tool position offset

G50,G51 Scaling cancel/ON

G50.1, G51.1, G62 G command mirror image cancel/ON

G53 Machine coordinate system selection

G53.1 Tool axis direction control

G61 G61.1 G64

Exact stop check mode High-accuracy control mode I ON Cutting mode

G65 User macro simple call

G66, G66.1, G67 User macro modal call A/B/cancel

G69.1 Coordinate rotation cancel, Inclined surface machining cancel

G70 to G76, G80 to G89 Fixed cycle for hole drilling * Including synchronous tapping

G90, G91 Absolute command, Incremental command

G93 G94 G95

Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

M98, M99 Subprogram call, main program return

F Feedrate command

M,S,T,B M, S, T, B command

Macro command

Local variable, Common variable, Arithmetic Commands (Four basic arithmetic rule, Trigonometric functions, Square root, etc.) Control Commands (IF-GOTO- and WHILE-DO-)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

659

Modes where inclined surface machining (including cancel command) is available

If inclined surface machining (G68.2 or G68.3) is commanded in a mode other than those listed below, a

program error (P952) will occur.

Mode Function

G00, G01 Positioning, Linear Interpolation

G05 P0, P1, P2 High speed machining mode

G05.1 Q0, Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G08 P1 High-accuracy control

G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel

G15 Polar coordinate command cancel

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G20, G21 Inch command, Metric command

G22/G23 Stroke check before travel ON/cancel

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel

G40.1 Normal line control cancel

G43 G44

Tool length compensation Tool length compensation cancel

G50 Scaling cancel

G50.1 G command mirror image OFF

G54 to G59, G54.1 Workpiece coordinate system selection, Extended workpiece coordinate system selection

G54.4 Pn Workpiece installation error compensation

G61 G61.1 G64

Exact stop check mode High-accuracy control mode I ON Cutting mode

G67 User macro modal call OFF

G69.1 Coordinate rotation cancel, 3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel

G80 Fixed cycle cancel

G90, G91 Absolute command, Incremental command

G93 G94 G95

Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution

G97 Constant surface speed control OFF

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

660

Modes where tool axis direction control (G53.1) is available

If tool axis direction control is commanded in a mode other than those listed below, a program error (P953) will

occur.

Mode Function

G00, G01 Positioning, Linear Interpolation

G05 P0, P1, P2 High speed machining mode

G05.1 Q0, Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G08 High-accuracy control

G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel

G15 Polar coordinate command cancel

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G20, G21 Inch command, Metric command

G23 Stroke check before travel OFF

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel

G40.1 Normal line control cancel

G43 G44

Tool length compensation Tool length compensation cancel

G50 Scaling cancel

G50.1 G command mirror image OFF

G50.2 Polygon machining mode OFF

G54 to G59, G54.1 Workpiece coordinate system selection, Extended workpiece coordinate system selection

G54.4 Pp Workpiece installation error compensation

G61 G61.1/G08P1

G64

Exact stop check mode High-accuracy control mode I ON Cutting mode

G67 User macro modal call OFF

G68.2 to G68.3 Inclined surface machining

G80 Fixed cycle cancel

G90, G91 Absolute command, Incremental command

G93 G94 G95

Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution

G97 Constant surface speed control OFF

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

661

13.27.11 Precautions

Precautions

(1) A rotary axis moves at G53.1 command. Thus, move the tool far enough from the table before

commanding G53.1.

(2) When inclined surface machining is commanded, the coordinates of the feature coordinate system are

set in the system variables #5001 to #5100+n (excluding #5021 to #5021+n), which are used for reading

the position information. But, the coordinates of the machine coordinate system are set in the variables

#5021 to #5021+n (machine coordinate values) even when inclined surface machining is commanded.

n: varies depending on the number of control axes.

(3) When Reset signal is input during inclined surface machining, the inclined surface machining mode will

be canceled, and the modal G code will be G69.1 (or G69.5 for lathe). (But when the parameter #1151

rsint is «0», the inclined surface machining mode will be kept even if Reset 1 is input.)

(4) When external deceleration signal is input, the signal is not input to the axes of the feature coordinate

system, but to the axes of actually operating machine coordinate system.

(5) If G28 or G30 is commanded during inclined surface machining, the control is done with respect to the

inclined surface coordinate system until the interim point.

(6) Tool radius compensation, G command mirror image, fixed cycle command, tool center point control,

scaling and tool length compensation along tool axis should be nested in inclined surface machining

command. Thus, these commands need to be commanded between the inclined surface machining

command (G68.2, etc) and G69.

(a) In inclined surface machining

(b) In tool radius compensation

G68.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_

G41 D1

G40

G69

(a) (b)

:

:

:

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

662

(7) If inclined surface machining (G68.2) is commanded while tool length compensation is active, the actual

tool tip position does not match with the current position. In such case, command G53.1 to align the tool

axis direction with the Z axis of the feature coordinate system, which will make the tool tip position the

same as the current position.

(8) Coordinate conversion is not carried out at manual interruption, so a travel by the manual interruption

amount is made with respect to the machine coordinate system. When manual interruption with ABS ON,

or tool center point control has been performed during inclined surface machining, return to the position

before interruption, and then restart automatic operation. If you restart automatic operation in a position

different from the one before interruption, an error » M01 Illegal OP in tilted face cut 0185″ will occur. An

interruption to a rotary axis during inclined surface machining will also cause an error «M01 Illegal OP in

tilted face cut 0185″. If automatic handle interruption is attempted during inclined surface machining, an

error «M01 Illegal OP in tilted face cut 0185» will occur.

(9) MDI interruption, PLC interruption and macro interruption are disabled during inclined surface machining.

If MDI interruption or PLC interruption is attempted during inclined surface machining, «M01 Illegal OP in

tilted face cut 0185″ will occur. If macro interruption is enabled during inclined surface machining, a

program error (P951) will occur. Also when inclined surface machining is commanded while macro

interruption is active, a program error (P952) will occur.

(10) When inclined surface machining is commanded during MDI interruption, PLC interruption, or macro

interruption, a program error (P952) will occur.

(11) When a circular command is graphically traced under the inclined surface machining control, circular

tracing is performed if the feature coordinate system matches the machine coordinate system. If the

systems are unmatched, a linear tracing is performed instead.

(12) Tracing is done using the machine coordinate values.

(13) When this function is used together with tool center point control or workpiece installation error

compensation function, inclined surface machining is subject to the restraints of each function. Refer to

each chapter.

Before commanding G68.2, the current position and actual tool tip are the same.

When feature coordinate system is defined in G68.2, a point obtained by compensating the tool length direction to be in the feature coordinate axis’ Z direction is deemed as the current position. Thus, the current position doesn’t match with the actual tool tip position.

The actual tool tip point becomes the same as the current position by commanding G53.1 to align the tool axis direction with the feature coordinate system’s Z direction.

X

Z

X

Z

Z

X

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.27 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3

663

(14) Program restart from the block after inclined surface machining command is not possible. If commanded,

a program error (P49) occurs.

(15) If you want to display the coordinates on the position screen during inclined surface machining, enter

«23» in the parameters #8901 to #8906. Then, the corresponding counter is shown with respect to the

feature coordinate system.

The inclined surface coordinate counter can select the machining position on the program command

which includes the tool length compensation/tool radius compensation by setting the parameter «#1287

ext23/bit1, bit2 (inclined surface coordinate display)».

When tool tip coordinate display is enabled, inclined surface coordinates’ counter can be displayed on

the window by selecting the inclined surface for the counter selections 1, 2 and 3.

(16) A movement in response to G0 command is always interpolation type. (Non-interpolation type is not

available.)

(17) In the case of table rotation type machines, tool axis direction is not changed in G68.3. Thus, a feature

coordinate system is defined with respect to the Z axis of the coordinate system before inclined surface

machining command. But, designation of feature coordinate system’s origin, and the rotation R about Z

axis are enabled.

(18) When inclined surface machining is commanded during inclined surface machining, a program error

(P951) will occur.

(19) In the parameters #7900 to #7902, #7922, #7932, #7942, and #7952, designate the axes of the first part

system. If you command inclined surface machining in a part system where any of the designated axes is

not ready, a program error (P932) will occur.

(20) Feature coordinate system is defined with respect to the coordinate system (workpiece coordinate

system), which is independent of the table rotation axis’ rotation angle, so it is dependent on the table

rotation axis’ angle before inclined surface machining command.

(21) A linear axis command during inclined surface machining is done using the coordinates of the feature

coordinate system. And a rotary axis command is done using the coordinates (machine values) of the

workpiece coordinate system.

(22) If the address R, I, J or K has exceeded the setting range, a program error (P35) will occur.

(23) Buffer correction is not possible during inclined surface machining command. If you attempt buffer

correction, a message notifying that buffer correction is disabled will appear.

(24) If the operation mode is switched to «reference position return» during inclined surface machining

command, an error «M01 Illegal OP in tilted face cut 0185» will occur.

(25) If a linear angle command, geometric command or figure rotation command is issued during inclined

surface machining command, a program error (P951) will occur.

Program example

Restart from the block N10 or N11 is possible. N10 G00 X_Y_Z_;

N11 G00 X_Y_Z_B_C;

:

Restart from the block N20 or later is not possible. N20 G68.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K;

Attempting to do so will cause an alarm. N21 G01 X_Y_Z_F_;

N22 G01 X_Y_Z_F_;

N23 G69.1

N30 G90 G00 X_Y_;

N31 G90 G00 Z_;

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

664

(26) Axis configuration of applicable machines is as follows.

(a) This function applies to three types of machine configuration as below.

In this manual, the following axes are called as primary rotary axis: the ttool-side 2nd rotary axis (tool tile

type), the table-side 1st rotary axis (table tile type), and the tool side rotary axis (combined type).

(b) This function is not applicable to machines as below.

Type Tool tilt Table tilt Composite

Description Two rotary axes on tool head side

Two rotary axes on table side One rotary axis each on tool head side and table side

Machine example

Primary rotary axis (A)

Tool-side 2nd rotary axis Table-side rotary axis 1st Tool-side rotary axis

(B) Tool-side 1st rotary axis Table-side 2nd rotary axis Table-side 2nd rotary axis

Description Machine example

A machine whose rotary axiss rotation center axis is not parallel to any orthogonal coordinate axis.

A machine whose direction from the tool tip to the tool base is not parallel to Z axis (Z axis positive direction) when machine positions of the rotary axes are all 0.

(a) Tool axis direction

A machine in which three linear axes do not form a right- handed orthogonal coordinate system.

(B)

(A) (A)

(B)

(A)

(B)

0

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.28 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121

665

13.28 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121

Function and purpose

After initializing the machining condition parameter groups with the machining condition selection I function,

the machining condition parameter groups can be switched by G code command.

Command format

G120.1 Pp Qq ; … Machining condition selection I

P

Machining usage 0: Reference parameter 1: Usage 1 2: Usage 2 3: Usage 3

Q

Condition 1: Condition 1 2: Condition 2 3: Condition 3 When omitted, Q1 is applied.

G121; … Machining condition selection I cancel

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

666

Detailed description

(1) G120.1 and G121 commands are unmodal commands of G code group 0.

(2) G120.1 and G121 can be commanded to 1st part system only. If they are commanded to other part

system, a program error (P34) will occur.

(3) Command G120.1 and G121 in an independent block. If not, a program error (P33) will occur.

(4) Address P in G120.1 command cannot be omitted. If omitted, a program error (P33) will occur.

(5) Address Q in G120.1 command can be omitted. If omitted, it will be handled as «Q1 (condition 1)» is

commanded.

(6) When address P and Q in G120.1 command is commanded with a decimal point, the digit after the

decimal point is ignored.

(7) If other than «0 to 3» is set to address P in G120.1 command or other than «1 to 3» is set to address Q, a

program error (P35) will occur.

(8) When address P is set to «0» and address Q is omitted or set between «1» and «3» in G120.1 command, it

will be switched to the reference parameter.

(9) It will be switched to the machining condition parameter group selected in «Machining cond» screen by

G121 command.

(10) When the emergency stop and reset (reset 1, reset 2, and reset & rewind) are performed while running

the machining program whose machining condition parameter group is switched by G120.1 command, it

will be switched to the selected condition parameter group machining in «Machining cond».

(11) Because the parameters are switched after being decelerated by G120.1 and G121 commands, the

workpiece may be damaged. Make sure to keep the tool away from the workpiece when commanding

G120.1 and G121.

(12) When the machining condition parameter group is switched by G120.1 command more than once, the

parameter group commanded last becomes valid.

(13) It is switched to the selected machining condition parameter group in the «Machining cond» screen by

program end (M02 and M30).

(14) If G120.1 and G121 are commanded without initializing the machining condition parameter group, a

program error (P128) will occur.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.28 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121

667

(15) G code modals which cause the program error when commanding G120.1 and G121.1 are listed below.

G code Function Program error when G120.1 and G121 are commanded

G2.3, G3.3 Exponential function interpolation P128

G06.2 NURBS interpolation P32

G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation P128

G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation P128

G10 Parameter input by program

P421 Tool compensation input by program

G33 Thread cutting P128

G38 Tool radius compensation (vector designation) P128

G39 Tool radius compensation (corner arc) P128

G41, G42 Tool radius compensation

P128 3-dimentional tool radius compensation

G41.1/G151 Normal line control Left P128

G42.1/G152 Normal line control Right P128

G43 Tool length compensation (+) P128

G44 Tool length compensation (-) P128

G43.1 Tool length compensation in the tool axis direction P128

G43.4, G43.5 Tool center point control P942

G66, G66.1 User macro (modal call A, B) P128

G68.2, G68.3 Inclined surface machining P951

G73/G74/G76/G81/G82/G83/ G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G89

Fixed cycle

P33 (When G120.1 command is issued)

P128 (When G121 command is issued)

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

668

Program example

«Machining cond» screen

(1) When «machin usage 1» and «condition 1» from the machining condition parameter group are selected in

«Machining cond» screen before running the program.

N1 G91 G28 Z0; Operate with the machining condition parameter group (machining usage 1/condition 1)N2 G28 X0 Y0;

N3 G90 G54 G0 X2. Y2.;

N4 G43 H1 Z50.;

N5 G90 G1 Z-5. F3000;

N6 M3 S10000;

N7 F2000;

N8 G05 P10000;

N9 G01 X2.099 Y1.99;

N10 X2.199 Y1.990;

:

N1499 G05 P0;

N1500 G91 G28 Z0;

N1501 G28 X0 Y0;

N1502 M5;

N1503 G120.1 P1 Q3; The machining condition parameter groups are switched. Operate with the machining condition parameter group (machining usage 1/condition 3)

N1504 G90 G54 G0 X2. Y2.;

N1505 G43 H1 Z50.;

N1506 G90 G1 Z-8. F3000;

N1507 M3 S10000;

N1508 F1200;

N1509 G05 P10000;

N1510 G01 X2.099 Y1.997;

N1511 X2.199 Y1.990;

:

N2999 G05 P0;

N3000 G91 G28 Z0;

N3001 G28 X0 Y0;

N3002 M5;

N3003 M30; Return to the selected machining condition parameter group in «Machining cond» screen at the program end.

High-speed setting (for rough cutting machining)

Standard setting (for medium nishing machining)

High-accuracy setting (for nishing machining)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.28 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121

669

Precautions

(1) SSS control mode will not turn OFF by switching to the machining condition parameter group whose

parameter corresponding to «#8090 SSS ON» is set to «0» (disable) during SSS control mode. SSS

control mode will not turn ON by switching to the machining condition parameter group whose parameter

corresponding to «#8090 SSS ON» is set to «1» (enable) during high-speed high-accuracy control II.

(2) During automatic operation, the machining condition parameter group can neither be switched nor be set

from «Machining cond» screen.

(3) It is switched to the reference parameter by turning the power ON again.

(4) While displaying «machining cond» screen, the selected machining condition parameter group in the

screen cannot be switched by G120.1 command in the machining program. Change to the other screen

to switch it.

(5) When G120.1 and G121 are commanded in 1st part system while running the program in 2nd part

system, parameters are switched when smoothing for all NC axes in 1st part system and 2nd part

system become «0».

(6) The machining condition parameter group neither set the parameter setting from the program by G10

command nor read the parameters by system variables (from #100000).

(7) When the machining condition parameter group is switched, the same values are used for all NC axes

which belong to 1st part system to the parameter «#2010 Feed forward gain».

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

670

13.29 End Point Error Check Cancellation ; G69

Function and purpose

If an illegal program is given to NC, a program error will occur.

However, the error point check cancellation command G69 can be used to escape a program error only in the

following conditions.

(1) The end point does not exist on the circumference of a circle in circular interpolation

(containing helical cutting).

(2) With tool radius compensation, the compensation amount is changed during circular interpolation modal.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) Circular cutting (including helical interpolation)

If the end point does not exist on the circumference of a circle and G69 command is given in circular

interpolation, the circular radius changes linearly together with the angle after movement as shown

below:

Although the speed of the outer circumference is slightly faster than the commanded speed, the angular

speed is constant.

G69(G03) X__ Y__ Z__ ; … End point error check cancellation

G69 End point error check cancellation (G69 command is unmodal.)

G03 Commands such as circular command

X,Y,Z End point of the circular commands

Though this point is illegal at usual, it will not be regarded as the error point by using G69.

s e

Rs

Re

e

Rs

Re

s 0

R

R

End point

Outer circumference

Radius

Start point

Start point

Angle

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.29 End Point Error Check Cancellation ; G69

671

(Ex.1) Heart cum cutting

Displacement is the radius difference at the start and end points ((b — a) in the illustration below).

The example program is separated into two blocks of the right and left sides.

(Ex.2) Conical cutting

Conical cutting is taper thread cutting application, and its start or end point exists on the center line.

Taper can be carried out by incrementing or decrementing the circular radius. The pitch is

determined by z1/p1.

(2) Tool radius compensation

When some changes such as the compensation amount occur in the circular interpolation modal, use

this command (G69).

(Ex.1) Tool radius compensation during circular mode

G69 G03 Ya+b Jb Ff1 ; (right side) G69 G03 Y-a-b J-a ; (left side)

G69 G02 X-x1 Y0 Zz1 I-x1 Pp1 Ff1 ; x1 : Bottom radius z1 : Height p1 : Number of pitches f1 : Feedrate

G69 G41 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Ff1 Hh1 Tool radius compensation amount change

G69 G40 G02 Xx2 Yy2 Ii2 Jj2 Tool radius compensation cancel

Y

X0 a b

Y

X0

Z

x1

p1

z1

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

672

13.30 Coordinate Read Function ; G14

Function and purpose

The G14 command is used to read the end point coordinates of the immediately preceding block, the machine

coordinates, the workpiece coordinates, the TLM coordinates, or the skip coordinates.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The type of coordinates to be read is specified in p. The coordinates that can be read are listed below:

(2) The end point position will be read instead of the skip coordinates when the skip signal is not turned ON

in a G31 block.

(3) G14 command is unmodal, thus, it is valid only in the block where it is commanded.

(4) The end point and skip coordinates can be read even while moving. Always confirm that the movement

has stopped before reading the machine, workpiece, and TLM coordinates.

(Note) To stop the movement, stop the axis movement with the dwell command and so forth.

(5) The program error (P241) will occur if an illegal variable No. is commanded.

G14 X__ Y__ Z__A__P__ ; … Coordinate read command

X,Y,Z,A Each axis and the variable No. where the axiss coordinates data will be stored. (Aa means the additional axis.)

P Type of the coordinates to be read

«P» command value

Contents Compensation

amount

Read during moving

No p command is given or

a value other than 1 to 4 is specified

End point position of the immediately preceding block (The absolute coordinate system set by G92)

Not contained Enabled

1 Machine coordinates (Basic machine coordinate system)

Contained Disabled

2 Zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system (Workpiece coordinate system)

Contained Disabled

3

TLM coordinates (The point where TLM switch is turned OFF to ON at machine stop is used as the zero point of the TLM coordinate system.)

Contained Disabled

4 Skip singnal input coordinates (Workpiece coordinate system)

Contained Enabled

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

13.30 Coordinate Read Function ; G14

673

Example of program

(1) An example of p1 command value and reading coordinates are given.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

N2 G90 G00 X-200. Y-100. G53 ;

N3 M60 ; (TLM switch is turned from OFF to ON.)

N4 G00 G54 X-100. Y-100. ;

N5 G92 X0 Y0 Y-50. ;

N6 G00 G43 X-100. H10 ;

N7 G14 X100 Y101 Pp1 ;

( G54 : X-50. H10 : 50.)

( Y-75. )

Coordinates «P» command value Read coordinates Compensation

amount

End point position of the immediately preceding block

No p command is given or a value other than 1 to 4 is specified

#100 = -100. #101 = -50.

Not contained

Machine coordinates

1 #100 = -200. #101 = -175.

Contained

Workpiece coordinates

2 #100 = -50. #101 = -50.

Contained

TLM coordinates 3 #100 = -0

#101 = -75. Contained

-50-150

-50

-100 G92

N2

N4

N3

Y

X

-150

-200

N5N10

-100-200-250

Basic machine coordinate system

Coordinate system after execution of N4.

Workpiece coordinate system after execution of N5.

TLM coordinate system (TLM switch ON)

Position after execution of N5.

13 Program Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

674

(2) An example of reading skip coordinates are given.

The coordinates read by the above program is as follows.

(Note1) «» is an error caused by response delay. (For details, see the section of skip function.)

(Note2) The skip signal input coordinates of N4 block will be read to #111 because there is no Y command

in the N7 block

Precautions and Restrictions

(1) The program error (P241) will occur if an illegal variable No. is commanded.

N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ; N3 X0 Y-100. ; N4 G31 X-150. Y-50. F80 ; N5 G14 X100 Y101 P4 ; N6 G00 Y0 ; N7 G31 X0 ; N8 G14 X110 Y111 P4 ; N9 M02 ;

#100 = 75. + #101 = 75. +

#110 = 25. + #111 = 75. +

Y

X-X

-75 -25-150

-50

-75

-100 N3

N7

N4

N6

Skip signal input

675

14

Coordinate System Setting Functions

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

676

14.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes

Function and purpose

X-Y table

X-Y and rotating table

(a) Direction of table movement

(a) Direction of table movement

(b) Direction of table rotation

+Z

+Z +Y

+X

+X +Y

(a)(a)

+Z +Y

+C

+C +Y

+X +X

(a) (b) (a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.2 Basic Machine, Workpiece and Local Coordinate Systems

677

14.2 Basic Machine, Workpiece and Local Coordinate Systems

Function and purpose

The basic machine coordinate system is fixed in the machine and it denotes that position which is determined

inherently by the machine.

The workpiece coordinate systems are used for programming and in these systems the basic point on the

workpiece is set as the coordinate zero point.

The local coordinate systems are created on the workpiece coordinate systems and they are designed to

facilitate the programs for parts machining.

Upon completion of the reference position return, the basic machine coordinate system and workpiece

coordinate systems (G54 to G59) are automatically set with reference to the parameters.

The basic machine coordinate system is set so that the first reference position is brought to the position

specified by the parameter from the basic machine coordinate zero point (machine zero point).

The local coordinate systems (G52) are valid on the coordinate systems designated by workpiece coordinate

systems 1 to 6.

The hypothetical machine coordinate system can be set on the basic machine coordinate system using a G92

command. At this time, the workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 is also simultaneously shifted.

Also refer to «Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point symbols».

M: Basic machine coordinate system

W: Workpiece coordinate system

L: Local coordinate system

W1 W2

W4

R#1

Y

X

Y1

X1

W3

W2 W1 L

Z

X

M

R#1

Z1

X1 M

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

678

14.3 Machine Zero Point and 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position (Zero point)

Function and purpose

The machine zero point serves as the reference for the basic machine coordinate system. It is inherent to the

machine and is determined by the reference (zero) point return.

2nd, 3rd and 4th reference positions relate to the position of the coordinates which have been set beforehand

by parameter from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system.

(M) Basic machine coordinate system

(G52) Local coordinate system

(R1) 1st reference position

(R2) 2nd reference position

(R3) 3rd reference position

(R4) 4th reference position

(W) Workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59)

(W)

(X1,Y1)

G52

x

y

x

y

x

y (X2,Y2)

(M)

(R1)

(R4)

(R3)

(R2)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.4 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

679

14.4 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

Function and purpose

This function creates each coordinate system according to the parameter values input beforehand from the

setting and display unit when the first manual reference position return or the reference position is reached

with the dog-type reference position return when the NC power is turned ON.

The actual machining program is programmed over the coordinate systems which have been set above.

(M) Basic machine coordinate system

(R1) 1st reference position

(G54) Workpiece coordinate system 1

(G55) Workpiece coordinate system 2

(G56) Workpiece coordinate system 3

(G57) Workpiece coordinate system 4

(G58) Workpiece coordinate system 5

(G59) Workpiece coordinate system 6

(G54)

y1

x1

(G55)(G56)

(G57)(G58)(G59)

y2

x2

y3

x3

y4

x4

(R1)

(M)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

680

Detailed description

(1) The coordinate systems created by this function are as follow:

(a) Basic machine coordinate system

(b) Workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59)

(2) The parameters related to the coordinate system all provide the distance from the zero point of the basic

machine coordinate system. Therefore, after deciding at which position the first reference position

should be set in the basic machine coordinate system and then set the zero point positions of the

workpiece coordinate systems.

(3) When the automatic coordinate system setting function is executed, shifting of the workpiece coordinate

system with G92, setting of the local coordinate system with G52, shifting of the workpiece coordinate

system with origin set, and shifting of the workpiece coordinate system with manual interrupt will be

canceled.

(4) The dog-type reference position return will be executed when the first time manual reference position

return or the first time automatic reference position return is executed after the power has been turned

ON. It will be also executed when the dog-type is selected by the parameter for the manual reference

position return or the automatic reference position return for the second time onwards.

CAUTION

1. If the workpiece coordinate offset amount is changed during automatic operation (including during single block

operation), it will be validated from the next block or after multiple blocks of the command.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.5 Basic Machine Coordinate System Selection ; G53

681

14.5 Basic Machine Coordinate System Selection ; G53

Function and purpose

The basic machine coordinate system is the coordinate system that expresses the position (tool change

position, stroke end position, etc.) that is characteristic to the machine.

The tool is moved to the position commanded on the basic machine coordinate system with the G53

command and the coordinate command that follows.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) When the power is switched on, the basic machine coordinate system is automatically set as referenced

to the reference (zero) position return position, which is determined by the automatic or manual

reference (zero) position return.

(2) The basic machine coordinate system is not changed by the G92 command.

(3) The G53 command is valid only in the block in which it has been designated.

(4) In the incremental value command mode (G91), the G53 command provides movement with the

incremental value in the coordinate system being selected.

(5) Even if G53 is commanded, the tool radius compensation amount for the commanded axis will not be

canceled.

(6) The 1st reference position coordinate value indicates the distance from the basic machine coordinate

system 0 point to the reference position (zero point) return position.

(7) The G53 command will move with cutting feedrate or rapid traverse following command modal.

(8) If the G53 command and G28 command (reference position return) are issued in the same block, the

command issued last will be valid.

1st reference position coordinate value: X=+500 and Y=+500

(G90)G53 X__ Y__ Z__ __ ;

Additional axis

(M) Basic machine coordinate system (R1) 1st reference position

(500,500)

-Y

— X R1(M)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

682

14.6 Coordinate System Setting ; G92

Function and purpose

By commanding G92, the absolute value (workpiece) coordinate system and current position display value

can be preset in the command value without moving the machine.

Command format

Detailed description

After the power is turned on, the first reference position return will be done with dog-type, and when

completed, the coordinate system will be set automatically. (Automatic coordinate system setting)

(2)By commanding G92, the absolute value (workpiece) coordinate system and current position display value

can be preset in the command value without moving the machine.

(Note) If the workpiece coordinate system deviated because the axis is moved manually when the manual

absolute position switch is OFF, etc., the workpiece coordinate system can be corrected with the

following steps.

(1) Execute reference position return while the coordinate system is deviated.

(2) After that, command G92G53X0Y0Z0;. With this command, the workpiece coordinate position

and current position will be displayed, and the workpiece coordinate system will be preset to the

offset value.

G92 X__ Y__ Z__ __ ;

Additional axis

Reference position return completed

The basic machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system are created at the preset position. (a) Power ON position (b) Basic machine coordinate system (c) Workpiece coordinate system

[Position] X 0.000 Y 0.000

[Workpiece] X 300.000 Y 200.000

Coordinate system setting

For example, if G92X 0 Y 0; is commanded, the workpiece coordinate system will be newly created. (d) Tool position

[Position] X -200.000 Y -150.000

[Workpiece] X 100.000 Y 50.000

[Position] X 0.000 Y 0.000

[Workpiece] X 0.000 Y 0.000

R

(a)

WG54 100. 200.

100.

R,M

(a)

(b)

(c)

WG54 100. 200. 300.

200.

100.

50.

R,M

(d)

WG54′ 100. 200.

100.

-100.

— 50. WG54

R,M

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.6 Coordinate System Setting ; G92

683

Precautions

(1) When the parameter «#1279 ext15/bit5» is set to «1», the shift amount set with the coordinate system

setting (G92) will be cleared when the axis reaches to the manual reference position.

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

684

14.7 Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G28,G29

Function and purpose

After the commanded axes have been positioned by G0, they are returned respectively at rapid traverse to the

first reference position when G28 is commanded.

By commanding G29, the axes are first positioned independently at high speed to the G28 or G30

intermediate point and then positioned by G0 to the commanded position.

Command format

(CP) Intermediate point

(S) Start point

(R1) 1st reference position

(R2) 2nd reference position

(R3) 3rd reference position

(R4) 4th reference position

G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1; … Automatic reference position return

X, Y, Z, Coordinate value of the intermediate point ( is an additional axis)

G29 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 2; … Start point return

X, Y, Z, Coordinate value of the end point ( is an additional axis)

(0,0,0,0)

G28 G28

G29

G29

G30

G30P3 G30P4

G30P2

(x1,y 1,z 1, 1)

(x2,y 2,z 2, 2)

(x3,y 3,z 3, 3)

(R1)

(R3)

(R2)

(S)

(R4)

(CP)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.7 Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G28,G29

685

Detailed description

(1) The G28 command is equivalent to the following:

G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1;

G00 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 3;

In this case, Xx3, Yy3, Zz3 and 3 are the reference position coordinates and they are set by parameter

«#2037 G53ofs» as the distance from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.

(2) After the power has been switched on, the axes which have not been subject to manual reference

position return are returned by the dog type of return just as with the manual type. In this case, the return

direction is regarded as the command sign direction. If the return type is straight-type return, the return

direction will not be checked.For the second and subsequence returns, the return is made at high speed

to the reference (zero) position which was stored at the first time and the direction is not checked.

(3) When reference position return is completed, the zero point arrival output signal is output and also #1

appears at the axis name line on the setting and display unit screen.

(4) The G29 command is equivalent to the following:

G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1;

G00 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 2

Rapid traverse (non-interpolation type) applies independently for each axis for the positioning from the

reference position to the intermediate point.

In this case, x1 y1 z1 and 1 are the coordinate value of the G28 or G30 intermediate point.

(5) Program error (P430) occurs when G29 is executed without executing automatic reference position (zero

point) return (G28) after the power has been turned ON.

(6) When the Z axis is canceled, the movement of the Z axis to the intermediate point will be ignored, and

only the position display for the following positioning will be executed. (The machine itself will not move.)

(7) The intermediate point coordinates (x1, y1, z1, 1) of the positioning point are assigned by the position

command modal. (G90, G91).

(8) G29 is valid for either G28 or G30 but the commanded axes are positioned after a return has been made

to the latest intermediate point.

(9) The tool compensation will be canceled during reference position return unless it is already canceled,

and the compensation amount will be cleared.

(10) The intermediate point can be ignored by parameter «#1091 Ignore intermediate point» setting.

(11) Control from the intermediate point to the reference position is ignored for reference position return in the

machine lock status. The next block is executed when the commanded axis reaches as far as the

intermediate point.

(12) Mirror image is valid from the start point to the intermediate point during reference position return in the

mirror image mode and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of the command. However,

mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference position and the tool will move to the

reference position.

(13) When G28/G29/G30 is commanded in single block mode, if «#1279 ext15/bit6 Enable single block stop

at middle point» is set to «1», single block stop at middle point will be performed; single block stop at

middle point will not be performed if set to «0».

(14) If the mode is switched to MDI mode or reference point return mode while in a single block stop at

middle point, «M01 Operation Error 0013» occurs.

(15) If the NC is reset while in a single block stop at middle point, the interim position for G29 start position

return will not be updated.

(16) If a miscellaneous function is commanded in the same block as G28/G29, the miscellaneous function

completion waiting point will be the end of commanded movement, instead of the interim position.

(17) When PLC interruption is operated while in a single block stop at intermediate point, «M01 Operation

Error 0129″ occurs.

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

686

Program example

(Example 1) G28 Xx1 Zz1 ;

(a) 1st operation after power has been turned ON

(b) 2nd and subsequent operations

(d) Return start position

(e) Near-point dog

(F) Rapid traverse rate

(CP) Intermediate point

(R1) Reference position (#1)

(x1,z1)

(R1)

G0Xx3 Zz3;

G0Xx1 Zz1;

(F)

(e) (R1)

(a)

(b)

(CP)

(a)

(b)

(d)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.7 Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G28,G29

687

(Example 2) G29 Xx2, Zz2 ;

(Example 3) G28 Xx1 Zz1 ;

: (From point A to 1st reference position)

:

G30 Xx2 Zz2 ;

: (From point B to 2nd reference position)

:

G29 Xx3 Zz3 ;

(From point C to point D)

(C) Current position (CP) G28, G30 Intermediate point

(CP1) Old intermediate point

(CP2) New intermediate point

(R1) Reference position (#1)

(R2) 2nd reference position (#2)

R

(G0)Xx1 Zz1;

(x1,z1)

(G0)Xx2 Zz2;

(x2,z2)

(C)

(CP)

(x1,z1)

C

G29 B

G28

A

D

G30 (x2,z2)

(x3,z3)

(R1)

(R2)(CP1)

(CP2)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

688

14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G30

Function and purpose

The tool can return to the second, third, or fourth reference position by specifying G30 P2 (P3 or P4).

Command format

(S) Start point

(CP) Intermediate point

(R2) 2nd reference position

(R3) 3rd reference position

(R4) 4th reference position

G30 P2(P3,P4)Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1;

X, Y, Z, Coordinate value of the intermediate point ( is an additional axis)

P

Reference position No. P2: 2nd reference position return P3: 3rd reference position return P4: 4th reference position return

G28

G29

G29

G30

G30P3 G30P4

G30P2

(x1,y1,z1, 1)

G28

(R2)

(R4) (R3)

(CP) (S)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G30

689

Detailed description

(1) The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return is specified by P2, P3, or P4.

A command without P or with other designation method will return the tool to the 2nd reference position.

(2) In the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return mode, as in the 1st reference position return mode, the

tool returns to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position via the intermediate point specified by G30.

(3) The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position coordinates refer to the positions specific to the machine, and

these can be checked with the setting and display unit.

(4) If G29 is commanded after completion of returning to the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position, the

intermediate position used last is used as the intermediate position for returning by G29.

(5) With reference position return on a plane during compensation, the tool moves without tool radius

compensation from the intermediate point as far as the reference position. With a subsequent G29

command, the tool move without tool radius compensation from the reference position to the

intermediate point and it moves with such compensation until the G29 command from the intermediate

point.

(CP) Intermediate point

(R1) 1st reference position (R2) 2nd reference position

(CP) Intermediate point

(a) Tool nose center path (b) Program path

(R1) 1st reference position (R2) 2nd reference position

(R2) (x2,y2)

G29 Xx2 Yy2;

(R1)

G30 Xx1 Yy1;

— X

-Y

(CP) (x1,y1)

(R2)

(x2,y2)

G29 Xx2Yy2;

(x1,y1)

-Y

— X

G30 Xx1Yy1;

(CP)

(b)

(a)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

690

(6) The tool length compensation amount for the axis involved is canceled after the 2nd, 3rd and 4th

reference position return.

(7) With second, third and fourth reference point returns in the machine lock status, control from the

intermediate point to the reference point will be ignored. When the designated axis reaches as far as the

intermediate point, the next block will be executed.

(8) With second, third and fourth reference position returns in the mirror image mode, mirror image will be

valid from the start point to the intermediate point and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of

the command. However, mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference position

and the tool moves to the reference position.

(9) If the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference position is changed while G30 zero point return operation is in pause due

to an interlock, «M01 Operation Error» occurs.

(10) When G28/G29/G30 is commanded in single block mode, if «#1279 ext15/bit6 Enable single block stop

at middle point» is set to «1», single block stop at middle point will be performed; single block stop at

middle point will not be performed if set to «0».

(11) If the mode is switched to MDI mode or reference point return mode while in a single block stop at middle

point, «M01 Operation Error 0013» occurs.

(12) If the NC is reset while in a single block stop at middle point, the interim position for G29 start position

return will not be updated.

(13) If a miscellaneous function is commanded in the same block as G30, the miscellaneous function

completion waiting point will be the end of commanded movement, instead of the interim position.

(14) When PLC interruption is operated while while in a single block stop at intermediate point, «M01

Operation Error 0129″ occurs.

(a) X-axis mirror image (b) No mirror image

(R2) 2nd reference position

(R2)

-Y

— X

G30 P2 Xx1Yy1; (b)

(a)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.9 Reference Position Check ; G27

691

14.9 Reference Position Check ; G27

Function and purpose

This command first positions the tool at the position assigned by the program and then, if that positioning point

is the 1st reference position, it outputs the reference position arrival signal to the machine in the same way as

with the G28 command. Therefore, when a machining program is prepared so that the tool will depart from the

1st reference position and return to the 1st reference position, it is possible to check whether the tool has

returned to the reference position after the program has been run.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) If the P command has been omitted, the 1st reference position will be checked.

(2) The number of axes whose reference positions can be checked simultaneously depends on the number

of axes which can be controlled simultaneously.

Note that the display shows one axis at a time from the final axis.

(3) An alarm will occur if the reference position is not reached after the command is completed.

X__ Y__ Z__ P__ ; … Check command

X Y Z Return control axis

P

Check No. P1: 1st reference position check P2: 2nd reference position check P3: 3rd reference position check P4: 4th reference position check

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

692

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59

(G54.1)

Function and purpose

(1) The workpiece coordinate systems facilitate the programming on the workpiece, serving the reference

position of the machining workpiece as the zero point.

(2) These commands enable the tool to move to the positions in the workpiece coordinate system. There are

48 or 96 sets of added workpiece coordinate systems, as well as 6 workpiece coordinate systems, which

are used by the programmer for programming (G54 to G59). (The 48 sets and 96 sets are options.)

(3) Among the workpiece coordinate systems currently selected by these commands, any workpiece

coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the current position of the tool is

reset. (The «present position of the tool» includes the compensation amounts for tool radius, tool length

and tool position.)

(4) A hypothetical machine coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the current

position of the tool is set by this command.

(The «present position of the tool» includes the compensation amounts for tool radius, tool length and tool

position compensation.) (G54,G92)

Command format

When the designated extended workpiece coordinate system offset amount is rewritten

When the extended workpiece coordinate system is selected, and the offset amount is rewritten

(G90) G54 to G59 … Workpiece coordinate system selection

(G54 to G59) G92 X__ Y__ Z__ __ ; … Workpiece coordinate system setting

Additional axis

G54.1 Pn ; … Workpiece coordinate system selection (P1 to P48, P1 to P96)

G54.1 Pn ; G92 X__ Y__ Z__ ; … Workpiece coordinate system setting (P1 to P48, P1 to P96)

G10 L20 Pn X__ Y__ Z__ ; … Workpiece coordinate system offset amount setting (P1 to P48, P1 to P96)

G10 G54.1 Pn X__ Y__ Z__ ; … Workpiece coordinate system offset amount setting (P1 to P48, P1 to P96)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)

693

Detailed description

(1) With any of the G54 through G59 commands or G54.1P1 through G54.1P96 commands, the tool radius

compensation amounts for the commanded axes will not be canceled even if workpiece coordinate

system selection is commanded.

(2) The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is turned ON.

(3) Commands G54 through G59 and G54.1P1 through G54.1P96 are modal commands (group 12).

(4) The coordinate system will move with G92 in a workpiece coordinate system.

(5) The offset setting amount in a workpiece coordinate system denotes the distance from the basic

machine coordinate system zero point.

(6) The offset settings of workpiece coordinate systems can be changed any number of times. (They can

also be changed by G10 L2 Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1.)

[Handling when L or P is omitted]

(#1)Reference position (zero point) return position

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

G54 reference position (zero point)

G55 reference position (zero point)

G54 X = -500 Y = -500 G55 X = -2000 Y = -1000

G10 L2 Pn Xx Yy Zz ; n=0 : Set the offset amount in the external workpiece coordinate system. n=1 to 6: Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece coordinate system. Others : The program error (P35) will occur.

G10 L2 Xx Yy Zz ; Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system. When in G54.1 modal, the program error (P33) will occur.

G10 L20 Pn Xx Yy Zz ; n=1 to 96 : Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece coordinate system. Others : The program error (P35) will occur.

G10 L20 Xx Yy Zz ; Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system. When in G54 to G59 modal, the program error (P33) will occur.

G10 Pn Xx Yy Zz ;

Set the offset amount in the designated coordinate system No. by P code. When the currently selected coordinate system is G54 to G59, P1 to P6 corresponds to G54 to G59 respectively. When the external coordinate system is selected, P No. corresponds to G54.1 P1 to P96. If other values are set, the program error (P35) will occur.

G10 Xx Yy Zz ; Set the offset amount in the currently selected coordinate system.

G10 G54.1 Xx Yy Zz ; When there is no P code in the same block as G54.1, the program error (P33) will occur.

R#1

— X

— Y

— X(G54)(- 500, — 500)

— X(G55)(- 2000, — 1000)

W2

— Y(G55)

W1 — Y (G54)

M

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

694

(7) A new workpiece coordinate system 1 is set by issuing the G92 command in the G54 (workpiece

coordinate system 1) mode. At the same time, the other workpiece coordinate systems 2 to 6 (G55 to

G59) will move in parallel and new workpiece coordinate systems 2 to 6 will be set.

(8) A hypothetical machine coordinate system is formed at the position which deviates from the new

workpiece reference position (zero point) by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate system

offset amount.

After the power has been switched on, the hypothetical machine coordinate system is matched with the

basic machine coordinate system by the first automatic (G28) or manual reference position (zero point)

return.

(9) By setting the hypothetical machine coordinate system, the new workpiece coordinate system will be set

at a position which deviates from that hypothetical machine coordinate system by an amount equivalent

to the workpiece coordinate system offset amount.

(10) When the first automatic (G28) or manual reference position (zero point) return is completed after the

power has been turned ON, the basic machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate systems are

set automatically in accordance with the parameter settings.

(11) If G54 X- Y-; is commanded after the reference position return (both automatic or manual) executed after

the power is turned ON, the program error (P62) will occur. (A speed command is required as the

movement will be controlled with the G01 speed.)

(12) Do not command a G code for which a P code is used in the same block as G54.1. The P code will be

used in the prioritized G command.

(13) When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added, the program error (P39) will

occur when the G54.1 command is executed. This error will also occur when one of P49 to P96 is

commanded although the specifications allow up to the 48 sets.

(14) When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added, the program error (P172)

will occur when the G10 L20 command is executed.

(15) The local coordinate system cannot be used during G54.1 modal. The program error (P438) will occur

when the G52 command is executed during G54.1 modal.

(R1) Reference position 1 (a) Hypothetical machine coordinate system based on G92

(b) Old workpiece 1 (G54) coordinate system (c) Old workpiece 2 (G55) coordinate system

(d) New workpiece 1 (G54) coordinate system (e) New workpiece 2 (G55) coordinate system

(R1)

— X

— X(G54)

— X

— X(G54′ )

— X(G55)

— X(G55′ ) — Y(G54)

— Y

— Y(G55)

— Y

— Y(G54 ‘ )

— Y(G55 ‘ )

W2

W1

W2

W1

M

M (a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)

695

(16) A new workpiece coordinate system P1 can be set by commanding G92 in the G54.1 P1 mode.

However, the workpiece coordinate system of the other workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59,

G54.1, and P2 to P96 will move in parallel with it, and a new workpiece coordinate system will be set.

(17) The offset amount of the extended workpiece coordinate system is assigned to the variable number as

shown in Table 1.

[Variable Nos. of the extended workpiece coordinate offset system]

(18) When the parameter «#1151 Reset ini» is OFF, the modal of G54.1 command will be retained even if the

reset 1 is carried out.

(19) P address (coordinate system selection) of G54.1 cannot be commanded alone even in G54.1 modal.

Even if commanded, the designated extended workpiece coordinate system cannot be selected.

(Ex)

P54.1 P5 ; Changed to P5 workpiece coordinate system.

P3 ; Ignored.

G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; The current position becomes the zero point of P5 workpiece coordinate system.

(20) When G92 is commanded in the extended workpiece coordinate system, the coordinate system will be

sifted.

1st axis to nth axis

1st axis to nth axis

1st axis to nth axis

1st axis to nth axis

P1 #7001 to #700n P25 #7481 to #748n P49 #7961 to #796n P73 #8441 to #844n

P2 #7021 to #702n P26 #7501 to #750n P50 #7981 to #798n P74 #8461 to #846n

P3 #7041 to #704n P27 #7521 to #752n P51 #8001 to #800n P75 #8481 to #848n

P4 #7061 to #706n P28 #7541 to #754n P52 #8021 to #802n P76 #8501 to #850n

P5 #7081 to #708n P29 #7561 to #756n P53 #8041 to #804n P77 #8521 to #852n

P6 #7101 to #710n P30 #7581 to #758n P54 #8061 to #806n P78 #8541 to #854n

P7 #7121 to #712n P31 #7601 to #760n P55 #8081 to #808n P79 #8561 to #856n

P8 #7141 to #714n P32 #7621 to #762n P56 #8101 to #810n P80 #8581 to #858n

P9 #7161 to #716n P33 #7641 to #764n P57 #8121 to #812n P81 #8601 to #860n

P10 #7181 to #718n P34 #7661 to #766n P58 #8141 to #814n P82 #8621 to #862n

P11 #7201 to #720n P35 #7681 to #768n P59 #8161 to #816n P83 #8641 to #864n

P12 #7221 to #722n P36 #7701 to #770n P60 #8181 to #818n P84 #8661 to #866n

P13 #7241 to #724n P37 #7721 to #772n P61 #8201 to #820n P85 #8681 to #868n

P14 #7261 to #726n P38 #7741 to #774n P62 #8221 to #822n P86 #8701 to #870n

P15 #7281 to #728n P39 #7761 to #776n P63 #8241 to #824n P87 #8721 to #872n

P16 #7301 to #730n P40 #7781 to #778n P64 #8261 to #826n P88 #8741 to #874n

P17 #7321 to #732n P41 #7801 to #780n P65 #8281 to #828n P89 #8761 to #876n

P18 #7341 to #734n P42 #7821 to #782n P66 #8301 to #830n P90 #8781 to #878n

P19 #7361 to #736n P43 #7841 to #784n P67 #8321 to #832n P91 #8801 to #880n

P20 #7381 to #738n P44 #7861 to #786n P68 #8341 to #834n P92 #8821 to #882n

P21 #7401 to #740n P45 #7881 to #788n P69 #8361 to #836n P93 #8841 to #884n

P22 #7421 to #742n P46 #7901 to #790n P70 #8381 to #838n P94 #8861 to #886n

P23 #7441 to #744n P47 #7921 to #792n P71 #8401 to #840n P95 #8881 to #888n

P24 #7461 to #746n P48 #7941 to #794n P72 #8421 to #842n P96 #8901 to #890n

CAUTION

1. If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop, the new setting will be

valid from the next block.

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

696

Program example

(Example 1)

When the 1st reference position coordinate position is zero, the basic machine coordinate system

zero point and reference position (zero point) return position (#1) will coincide.

(Example 2)

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ;

(2) G53 X-1000 Y-500 ;

(3) G53 X0 Y0 ;

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ;

(2) G90 G00 G53 X0 Y0 ;

(3) G54 X-500 Y-500 ;

(4) G01 G91 X-500 F100 ;

(5) Y-500 ;

(6) X+500 ;

(7) Y+500 ;

(8) G90 G00 G55 X0 Y0 ;

(9) G01 X-500 F200 ;

(10) X0 Y-500 ;

(11) G90 G28 X0 Y0 ;

(R1)

(1)

M(2) (3)

M

(G55)

(G54) — 1000 — 500

(G54)(G55)

W2 W1 -500

(11) (6)

(5) (4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(10) (7)

(8)(9)

(R1)

-1000

-500

-1000

-1500

-X

-X

-Y -Y

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)

697

(Example 3) When workpiece coordinate system G54 (-500, -500) has deviated in Example 2. (It is assumed

that (3) to (10) in Example 2 have been entered in subprogram 1111.)

(Note) The workpiece coordinate system will deviate each time when steps (3) to (5) are repeated. The

reference position return (G28) command should therefore be issued upon completion of the

program.

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ;

(2) G90 G00 G53 X0 Y0 ; (This is not required when there is no G53 offset.)

(3) G54 X-500 Y-500 ; Amount by which workpiece coordinate system deviates

(4) G92 X0 Y0 ; New workpiece coordinate system is set.

(5) G22 L1111 ;

(a) Old G54 coordinate system (b) New G54 coordinate system

(c) Old G55 coordinate system (d) New G55 coordinate system

(R1) Reference position return position

M

— X(G55) — X (G54′)

— Y (G54)

— Y (G55)

— X(G55′)

— Y (G54′)

— Y(G55′)

— Y

— X

— X(G54)

W2

W1 (4)

(3)

(2) (1)

(R1)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

698

(Example 4)When six workpieces are placed on the same coordinate system of G54 to G59, and each is to be

machined with the same machining.

(1) Setting of workpiece offset data

(2) Machining program (subprogram)

(3) Positioning program (main)

Workpiece 1 X=-100.000 Y=-100.000…..G54 Workpiece 2 X=-100.000 Y=-500.000…..G55 Workpiece 3 X=-500.000 Y=-100.000…..G56 Workpiece 4 X=-500.000 Y=-500.000…..G57 Workpiece 5 X=-900.000 Y=-100.000…..G58 Workpiece 6 X=-900.000 Y=-500.000…..G59

L100;

N1 G90 G0 G43 X-50. Y-50. Z-100. H10 ; …..Positioning

N2 G01 X-200. F50 ; …..Surface cutting

Y-200. ; …..Surface cutting

X-50. ; …..Surface cutting

Y-50. ; …..Surface cutting

N3 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

: : :

N4 G98 G81 X-125. Y-75. Z-150. R-100. F40 ; ….. Drilling 1

X-175. Y-125. ; ….. Drilling 2

X-125. Y-175. ; ….. Drilling 3

X- 75. Y-125. ; ….. Drilling 4

G80 ;

N5 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

:

N6 G98 G84 X-125. Y-75. Z-150. R-100. F40 ; ….. Tapping 1

X-175. Y-125. ; ….. Tapping 2

X-125. Y-175. ; ….. Tapping 3

X- 75. Y-125. ; ….. Tapping 4

G80 ;

G23 ;

G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; ….. When power is turned ON

N1 G90 G54 G22L100 ; N2 G55 G22L100 ; N3 G57 G22L100 ; N4 G56 G22L100 ; N5 G58 G22L100 ; N6 G59 G22L100 ; N7 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N8 M02 ; %

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)

699

75

W 2

-X

-Y

G 55

W 4

-X

-Y

G 57

W 6

-X

-Y

G 59

W 3

-X

-Y

G 56

W 5

-X

-Y

G 58

W 1

-X

-Y

G 54

12 5

20 0m

m

17 5

50 m

m 12

5 17

5

50 0m

m

10 0m

m

10 0m

m 50

0m m

90 0m

m

-X

-Y0 M

4 3

2 1

20 0m

m

50 75

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

700

(Example 5)Program example when continuously using 48 sets of added workpiece coordinate system

offsets.

In this example, the offsets for each workpiece are set beforehand in P1 to P48 when 48

workpieces are fixed on a table, as shown in the drawing below.

L1000 L1001

G28 XYZ ; Reference position return G43 X-10.Y-10.Z-100.H10.; Contour

#100=1 ; Initialize added workpiece coordinate system subprogram No.

G01 X-30.;

G90 ; Absolute value mode Y-30.;

WHILE [#100LE48]D01 ; Repeat subprogram No. to 48 X-10.;

G54.1 P#100 ; Set workpiece coordinate system Y-10.;

G22 L1001 ; Call sub-program G00 G40 Z10.;

#100=#100+1 ; Subprogram No. +1 G98 G81 X-20.Y-15.Z-150.R5.F40; Drilling

END1 ; X-25.Y-20.;

G28 Z ; Return to reference position X-20.Y-25.;

G28 XY ; X-15.Y-20.;

M02 ; G80 ;

G23 ;

P8 P7 P1

P2 P3

P4 P5

P6

P9 P10 P16

P15 P14

P13 P12

P11

P24 P23 P17

P18 P19

P20 P21

P22

P25 P26 P32

P31 P30

P29 P28

P27

P40 P39 P33

P34 P35

P36 P37

P38

P41 P42 P48

P47 P46

P45 P44

P43

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ; G54 to G59 (G54.1)

701

(Example 6)Program example when the added workpiece coordinate system offsets are transferred to the

standard workpiece coordinate system offsets and used.

In this example, the workpiece coordinate system offsets for each workpiece are set beforehand in

P1 to P24 when the workpiece is fixed on a rotating table, as shown in the drawing below.

L20000 (Main)

G28 XYZB ; Reference position return

G90 ; Absolute value mode

G00 B0 ; Position table to face 1

G65 L2001 A1 ; Load workpiece offsets

G22 L2002 ; Drilling

G00 B90. ; Position table to face 2

G65 L2001 A7 ;

G22 L2002 ;

G00 B180. ; Position table to face 3

G65 L2001 A13 ;

G22 L2002 ;

G00 B270. ; Position table to face 4

G65 L2001 A19 ;

G22 L2002 ;

G28 XYB ; Return to reference position

M02 ;

%

B

X

P19 Z

YP20

P21 P22 P23

P24

P1 P2

P3

P4 P5 P6

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

702

L2001 (Transmission of workpiece offsets)

#2=5221 ; Leading No. of workpiece coordinate system variables

#3=[#1-1]*20+7001 ; Leading No. of added workpiece coordinate system variables

#5=0 ; No. of sets counter clear

WHILE [#5 LT 6] DO1 ; Check No. of sets

#6=#6+1 ; Set transmission source 1st axis variable No.

#7=#7+1 ; Set transmission destination 1st axis variable No.

#4=#4+1 ; Clear No. of axes counter

WHILE [#4 LT 6] DO2 ; Check No. of axes

#[#6]=#[#7] ; Transmit variable data

#6=#6+1 ; Set transmission source next axis

#7=#7+1 ; Set transmission destination next axis

#4=#4+1 ; No. of axes counter +1

END2 ;

#2=#2+20 ; Transmission source Set lead of next variable set.

#3=#3+20 ; Transmission destination Set lead of next variable set.

#5=#5+1 ; No. of sets counter +1

END1 ;

G23 ;

%

L2002 (Drilling)

G54 G22 H100 ; Drilling in G54 coordinate system

G55 G22 H100 ; In G55

G56 G22 H100 ; In G56

G57 G22 H100 ; In G57

G58 G22 H100 ; In G58

G59 G22 H100 ; In G59

G28 Z0 ;

G23 ;

N100 G98 G81 X-20. Y-15. Z-150. R5. F40 ; Fixed cycle for drilling call

X-25. Y-20. ;

X-20. Y-25. ;

X-15. Y-20. ;

G80 ;

G28 Z ;

G23 ;

%

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.11 Local Coordinate System Setting ; G52

703

14.11 Local Coordinate System Setting ; G52

Function and purpose

The local coordinate systems can be set on the G54 through G59 workpiece coordinate systems using the

G52 command so that the commanded position serves as the programmed zero point.

The G52 command can also be used instead of the G92 command to change the deviation between the zero

point in the machining program and the machining workpiece zero point.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) The G52 command is valid until a new G52 command is issued, and the tool does not move. This

command comes in handy for employing another coordinate system without changing the zero point

positions of the workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59).

(2) The local coordinate system offset will be cleared by the dog-type manual reference (zero) point return or

reference (zero) point return performed after the power has been switched ON.

(3) The local coordinate system is canceled by (G54 to G59) G52 X0 Y0 Z0 0;.

(4) Coordinate commands in the absolute value (G90) cause the tool to move to the local coordinate system

position.

(Note) If the program is executed repeatedly, the workpiece coordinate system will deviate each time.

Thus, when the program is completed, the reference position return operation must be

commanded.

G54(G54 to G59) G52 X__ Y__ Z__ __ ;

Additional axis

Ln

Ln

Ln G52X_Z_;

R

M

G52U_W_;

Wn(n=1 6)

Reference position Workpiece coordinate system offset (Screen setting, G10 G54 X__ Z__ ; )

External workpiece coordinate system offset (Screen setting, G10 P0 X__ Z__ ; ) Machine coordinate

system

Local coordinate system

Workpiece coordinate system

Absolute value

Absolute value

Incremental value

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

704

(Example 1) Local coordinates for absolute value mode (The local coordinate system offset is not cumulated)

The local coordinate system is created by (5), canceled (9) and matched with the coordinate system for

(3).

(Note) If the program is executed repeatedly, the workpiece coordinate system will deviate each time.

Thus, when the program is completed, the reference position return operation must be

commanded.

(Example 2) Local coordinates for incremental value mode (The local coordinate system offset is cumulated.)

The local coordinate system X’Y’ is created at the XY coordinate system (500,500) position by (3).

The local coordinate system X»Y» is created at the X’Y’ coordinate system (1000,1000) position by (5).

The local coordinate system is created at the X»Y» coordinate system (-1500, -1500) position by (7). In

other words, the same occurs as when the local coordinate system and XY coordinate system are

matched and the local coordinate system is canceled.

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ;

(2) G00 G90 X1. Y1. ;

(3) G92 X0 Y0 ;

(4) G00 X500 Y500 ;

(5) G52 X1. Y1. ;

(6) G00 X0 Y0 ;

(7) G01 X500 F100 ;

(8) Y500 ;

(9) G52 X0 Y0 ;

(10) G00 X0 Y0 ;

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ;

(2) G92 X0 Y0 ;

(3) G91 G52 X500 Y500 ;

(4) G22 L100 ;

(5) G52 X1. Y1. ;

(6) G22 L100 ;

(7) G52 X-1.5 Y-1.5 ;

(8) G00 G90 X0 Y0 ;

M02 ;

(A) L100 ;

(B) G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;

(C) G01 X500 ;

(D) Y500 ;

(E) G91 ;

(F) G23 ;

(3) (2)

(6)

R#1 W1

W1 (10)

X

(5) (4)

(8) (9)

(7)

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

W1 L1

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

(1)

(New coordinate system created by (3) Matched with local coordinate system by (9).

Current position

Local coordinate system created by (5).

(4)

(C)

(D)

R#1 W1

W1 L2

X

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

W1 L1

2500

2000

1500

1000

500 X’

Y»Y’ Y

(1) (2) (3)

(6)

(B)

(8)

(B)

(C)

(D)

Current position (Matched with local coordinate system by (7).

Local coordinate system created by (5).

Local coordinate system created by (3).

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.11 Local Coordinate System Setting ; G52

705

(Example 3) When used together with workpiece coordinate system

The local coordinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system (500,500) position by (3), but the

local coordinate system is not created for the G55 coordinate system.

During the movement for (7), the axis moves to the G54 local coordinate system’s reference position

(zero point).

The local coordinate system is canceled by G90G54G52X0Y0;.

(1) G28 X0 Y0 ; G54 G55

(2) G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ; X 1000 1000 Workpiece coordinate system (parameter setting value)(3) G52 X500 Y500 ; Y 500 2000

(4) G22 L200 ;

(5) G00 G90 G55 X0 Y0 ;

(6) G22 L200 ;

(7) G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

:

M02 ;

(A) L200 ;

(B) G00 X0 Y0 ;

(C) G01 X500 F100 ;

(D) Y500 ;

(E) G23 ; %

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

R#1

W1

W1 L1 G54

X

Y

G55

(B)

(2)

(5) W2

(7)

(1)

(3)

(B)

(D)

(D)

(C)

(C)

Local coordinate system created by (3)

Current position

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

706

(Example 4) Combination of workpiece coordinate system G54 and multiple local coordinate systems

The local coordinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system (1000,1000) position by (4).

The local coordinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system (2000,2000) by (6).

The G54 coordinate system and local coordinate system are matched by (8).

(1) G28 X 0 Y0 ; G54

(2) G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ; X 500 Workpiece coordinate offset (parameter setting value)(3) G22 L300; Y 500

(4) G52 X1. Y1. ;

(5) G22 L300 ;

(6) G52 X2. Y2. ;

(7) G22 L300 ;

(8) G52 X0 Y0 ;

:

M02 ;

(A) L300 ;

(B) G00 X0 Y0 ;

(C) G01 X500 F100 ;

(D) Y500 ;

(E) X0 Y0 ;

(F) G23 ;

%

(3)

W1 L2

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

(D)

(C)(E)

(B)

W1 L1

(8) (2)

R#1

G54

W1

(5)

(7)

Local coordinate system created by (4)

Local coordinate system created by (6)

Current position

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.12 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1

707

14.12 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1

Function and purpose

This function presets the workpiece coordinate system shifted with the program command during manual

operation to the workpiece coordinate system offset from the machine zero point by the workpiece coordinate

offset amount by the program command (G92.1).

The workpiece coordinate system, which is set when the following type of operation or program command is

executed, will be shifted from the machine coordinate system.

— When manual interrupt is executed while manual absolute is OFF

— When movement command is issued in machine lock state

— When axis is moved with handle interrupt

— When operation is carried out with mirror image

— When local coordinate system is set with G52

— Shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92

This function presets the shifted workpiece coordinate system to the workpiece coordinate system offset from

the machine zero point by the workpiece coordinate offset amount. This takes place in the same manner as

manual reference position return. Whether to preset the relative coordinates or not can be selected with the

parameters.

Command format

G92.1 X0 Y0 Z0 0 ;

0 Additional axis

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

708

Detailed description

(1) Command the address of the axis to be preset. The axis will not be preset unless commanded.

(2) A program error (P35) will occur if a value other than «0» is commanded.

(3) When manual operation is carried out when manual absolute is set to OFF, or if the axis is moved with

handle interrupt.

If manual operation is carried out when manual absolute is set to OFF, or if the axis is moved with handle

interrupt, the workpiece coordinate system will be shifted by the manual movement amount.

This function returns the shifted workpiece coordinate zero point W1′ to the original workpiece coordinate

zero point W1, and sets the distance from W1 to the current position as the workpiece coordinate

system’s current position.

(a) Manual movement amount

(C) Current position

(Wx) Workpiece coordinate x after preset

(Wy) Workpiece coordinate y after preset

X

Y

X

Y

W1

W1

W1

M

(a)

(C) (Wx)

(C)

(Wy)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.12 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1

709

(4) When movement command is issued in machine lock state

If the movement command is issued in the machine lock state, the current position will not move, and

only the workpiece coordinates will move.

This function returns the moved workpiece coordinates to the original current position, and sets the

distance from W1 to the current position as the workpiece coordinate system’s current position.

(5) When operation is carried out with mirror image

If operation is carried out with mirror image, only the NC internal coordinates are used as the program

command coordinates. The other coordinates are the current position coordinates.

This function sets the NC internal coordinates as the current position coordinates.

(a) Movement amount during machine lock

(b) Workpiece coordinate system coordinate value

(C) Current position

(d) Workpiece coordinate x after preset

(e) Workpiece coordinate y after preset

(W1) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(a) Actual operation

(b) Program command

(C) Current position

(d) Mirror image center

(e) Workpiece coordinate x after preset

(g) Workpiece coordinate y after preset

(W1) Workpiece coordinate zero point

X

Y

X

Y

(W1) (W1)

(a)

(C)

(d)

(C)

(e)

(b)

X

Y

X

Y

(W1) (W1)

(e)

(b) (g)

(d)

(a)

(C) (C)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

710

(6) Setting local coordinate system with G52

The local coordinate system is set with the G52 command, and the program commands, etc., are issued

with the local coordinate system.

With this function, the set local coordinate system is canceled, and the program commands, etc., use the

workpiece coordinate system which has W1 as the zero point. The canceled local coordinate system is

only the selected workpiece coordinate system.

(7) Shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92

The workpiece coordinate system shifts with the G92 command, and the distance between W1′ and the

current position is set as the current position of the workpiece coordinate system.

This function returns the shifted workpiece coordinate zero point to W1, and sets the distance from W1 to

the current position as the workpiece coordinate system’s present position. This is valid for all workpiece

coordinate systems.

(a) Local coordinates x

(b) Local coordinates y

(C) Current position

(d) Workpiece coordinate x after preset

(e) Workpiece coordinate y after preset

(L1) Local coordinate zero point

(W1) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(a) Local coordinates x

(b) Local coordinates y

(C) Current position

(d) Workpiece coordinate x after preset

(e) Workpiece coordinate y after preset

(W1) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(W1′) Workpiece zero point after G92 command

X

Y

X

Y

(W1)

(L1)

(W1)

(C) (d) (C)

(e)

(a)

(b)

X

Y

X

Y

(W1)

(W1′)

(W1)

(C) (d) (C)

(e)

(a)

(b)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.12 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1

711

Program example

The workpiece coordinate system shifted with G92 is preset with G92.1.

(W1) Workpiece coordinate zero point

(W1′) Workpiece zero point after G92 command

(Example)

G28 X0 Y0 ; … (1)

G00 G90 X1. Y1. ; … (2)

G92 X0 Y0 … (3)

G00 X500 Y500 ; … (4)

G92.1 X0 Y0 ; … (5)

Precautions

(1) Cancel tool radius compensation, tool length compensation and tool position offset before using this

function. If this function is executed without canceling them, the workpiece coordinates will be at a

position obtained by subtracting the workpiece coordinate offset amount from the machine value. Thus,

the compensation vector will be temporarily canceled.

(2) This function cannot be executed while the program is being resumed.

(3) Do not command this function during the scaling, coordinate rotation or program mirror image modes.

A program error (P34) will occur if commanded.

X

Y

X

Y

(W1)

(1)

(W1)

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

500

1000

1500

500 1000 1500

500

1000

1500

500 1000 1500 (mm) (mm)

(W1′)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

712

14.13 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis

Function and purpose

The axis designated as the rotary axis with the parameters is controlled with the rotary axis’ coordinate

system.

The rotary axis includes the rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) and linear type (workpiece coordinate

position linear type and all coordinate position linear type).

The workpiece coordinate position range is 0 to 359.999 for the rotating type, and 0 to 99999.999 for the

linear type.

The machine coordinate value and relative position differ according to the parameters.

The rotary axis is commanded with a degree () unit regardless of the inch or metric designation.

The rotary axis type can be set with the parameter «#8213 rotation axis type» for each axis.

Rotary axis

Linear axis Rotating type rotary axis Linear type rotary axis

Short-cut invalid Short-cut valid Workpiece

coordinate position linear type

All-coordinate position

linear type

#8213 setting value 0 1 2 3 —

Workpiece coordinate

position Displayed in the range of 0 to 359.999. Displayed in the range of 0 to 99999.999.

Machine coordinate position/relative

position Displayed in the range of 0 to 359.999.

Displayed in the range of 0 to 99999.999.

ABS command

The incremental amount from the end point to the current position is divided by 360 degrees, and the axis moves by the remainder amount according to the sign.

Moves with a short- cut to the end point.

In the same manner as the normal linear axis, it moves according to the sign by the amount obtained by subtracting the current position from the end point (without rounding up to 360 degrees).

INC command Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded incremental amount starting at the current position.

Reference position return

Depends on the absolute command or the incremental command during the movement to the intermediate point.

Returns with movement within 360 degrees. Moves and returns in the R point direction for the difference from the current position to the R point.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.13 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis

713

Operation example

Examples of differences in the operation and counter displays according to the type of rotation coordinate are

given below.

(The workpiece offset is set as 0.)

Rotary type (short-cut invalid)

(1) The machine coordinate position, workpiece coordinate position and relative position are displayed in the

range of 0 to 359.999.

(2) For the absolute position command, the axis moves according to the sign by the remainder amount

obtained by dividing by 360.

Rotary type (short-cut valid)

(1) The machine coordinate position, workpiece coordinate position and relative position are displayed in the

range of 0 to 359.999.

(2) For the absolute position command, the axis rotates to the direction having less amount of movement to

the end point.

Program Workpiece Machine

G28 C0.

N1 G90 C-270. 90.000 90.000

N2 C405. 45.000 45.000

N3 G91 C180. 225.000 225.000

Program Workpiece Machine

G28 C0.

N1 G90 C-270. 90.000 90.000

N2 C405. 45.000 45.000

N3 G91 C180. 225.000 225.000

90

45

0

N3

N2

N1

90

45

0

N3 N2

N1

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

714

Linear type (workpiece coordinate position linear type)

(1) The coordinate position counter other than the workpiece coordinate position is displayed in the range of

0 to 359.999.

The workpiece coordinate position is displayed in the range of 0 to 99999.999.

(2) The movement is the same as the linear axis.

(3) During reference position return, the axis moves in the same manner as the linear axis until the

intermediate point is reached. The axis returns with a rotation within 360 from the intermediate point to

the reference position.

(4) During absolute position detection, even if the workpiece coordinate position is not within the range of 0

to 359.999, the system will start up in the range of 0 to 359.999 when the power is turned ON again.

Linear type (all coordinate position linear type)

(1) The workpiece coordinate position counter is displayed in the range of 0 to 99999.999.

(2) The movement is the same as the linear axis.

(3) During reference position return, the axis moves in the same manner as the linear axis until the

intermediate point is reached.

The axis rotates by the difference from the intermediate point to the reference position and returns to

the reference position.

(4) During absolute position detection, the system starts up at the position where the power was turned OFF

when the power is turned ON again.

Program Workpiece Machine Relative position

G28 C0.

N1 G90 C-270. -270.000 90.000 90.000

N2 C405. 405.000 45.000 45.000

N3 G91 C180. 585.000 225.000 225.000

After the power is turned ON again

Workpiece Machine

225.000 225.000

Program Workpiece Machine Relative position

G28 C0.

N1 G90 C-270. -270.000 -270.000 -270.000

N2 C405. 405.000 405.000 405.000

N3 G91 C180. 585.000 585.000 585.000

After the power is turned ON again

Workpiece Machine

585.000 585.000

90

45

0

N3

N2

N1

90

45

0

N3

N2

N1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

715

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

Function and purpose

This function is for the 5-axis machine. This compensates the error when a workpiece is placed off the

workpiece coordinate system to enable machining according to the program. In this function, a new

coordinate system with the workpiece as its reference position will be defined (called «workpiece installation

coordinate system») and the program will be executed in this new coordinate system.

(a) Error at the workpiece installation

According to the workpiece installation error, the coordinate system is automatially shifted.

This function is available only for the 5-axis machining and also, the option is required.

If the option is not provided and the workpiece installation error compensation command is issued, a program

error (P544) will occur.

Command format

(1) Make sure to command G54.4 independently. If it is commanded together with another G code, travel

command, or miscellaneous command in the same block, a program error (P546) will occur.

(2) If any address P is not commanded, a program error (P33) will occur. If any other value than 0 to 7 is

command, a program error (P35) will occur.

G54.4 Pn ; … Workpiece installation error compensation

P

Workpiece installation error compensation number (n = 0 to 7) 0: Workpiece installation error compensation is canceled 1 to 7: A compensation is carried out using a corresponding workpiece installation error compensation amount

(a)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

716

Detailed description

Definition of workpiece installation coordinate system

A workpiece installation coordinate system is defined based on the following three workpiece installation error

data.

(1) Errors in the XYZ directions (x, y, z)

Set the origin of the workpiece installation coordinate system seen from the original workpiece

coordinate system.

(2) Error in the rotation direction of each axis (a, b, c)

Set a, b, and c to determine the XYZ directions of the workpiece installation coordinate system.

Compared to the original workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece installation coordinate systems X

axis is rotated by the angle a, Y axis is rotated by the angle b, and Z axis is rotated by the angle c.

The positive direction of the rotational angle is the right-handed rotation.

(3) Table rotary axis position when measuring the errors

Set the machine coordinate values of the table rotary axis when x, y, z, a, b, and c are

measured.

— In the case of tool tilt type, this setting is not required.

— In the case of table tilt type, set the both two axes.

— In the case of composit type, set only the table side rotary axis.

Workpiece which is installed off the original position

Original workpiece installation position

(W) Workpiece coordinate system (w1) Workpiece installation coordinate system

x

y

c

X

Y

X

Y

(W) (X Y Z) (W1) (X Y Z )

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

717

Setting a workpiece installation error

For workpiece installation errors, it is possible to set seven sets of error compensation amounts (workpiece

installation error compensation amount No.01 to No.07) corresponding to compensation numbers

commanded by address P.

The common workpiece installation error compensation amounts are added commonly to seven workpiece

installation error compensation amount sets.

It is possible to set errors in XYZ directions (x, y, z) and the table side rotary axis position when these

errors were measured, however, it is not possible to set an error in rotation direction of each axis (a, b,

c).

Carry out these settings in the workpiece installation error setting screen, or using system variables.

System variable

Using the system variables, read/write of the workpiece installation error compensation amounts is enabled.

Refer to «Types of Variables» for details.

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

718

Addition of error compensation amounts

If the rotary axis positions are different between the common workpiece installation error compensation

amount and the workpiece installation error compensation amount from No.01 to No.07, the total error

compensation amounts are converted to those of a position of 0, then they are added.

(Note) Even if C axis rotates, errors in the rotation directions (a, b, c) do not change.

Example) In the case of a composit type machine with a table side rotary axis (C axis), if error compensation amounts are set in Common (A) and No.01 as right, the error amounts to be compensated are as below.

Error at C=45 of common Error at C=0 of common

Error amounts to be actually compensated (C=0)

Error at C=-90 of No.01 Error at C=0 of No.01

(a) Convert to the error at C = 0 (b) The errors of Common (A) and No.01 are added

(c) Convert to the error at C = 0

B 45.0 C

c b a 0.0 z 0.0 y

10.0 x

B — 90.0 C

45.0 c 0.0 b 0.0 a 0.0 z 5.0 y 0.0 x

(A) No.01

45

x0 X

Y

c0 b0 a0

0.0 z0 0.0 y0 10.0 x0

(a)

X

Y

x0

y0

c0 b0 a0

0.0 z0 7.071 y0 7.071 x0

(b)

X Y

x

y

45.0 c 0.0 b 0.0 a

0.0 z 7.071 y

12.071 x

c

— 90

XY

y1 c1

45.0 c1 0.0 b1 0.0 a1

0.0 z1 5.0 y1

0.0 x1 (c)

X Y

x1

c1

45.0 c1 0.0 b1 0.0 a1

0.0 z1 0.0 y1

5.0 x1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

719

Explanation of operation

(1) Operations in the mode

— Workpiece installation error compensation start

With a command G54.4 Pn (n = 1 to 7), the workpiece installation error compensation mode is started.

The workpiece installation coordinate system is set according to the workpiece installation error

compensation No. (between No.01 and No.07) selected by n and the rotary axis position at the

command, and the workpiece installation error counter changes to indicate the coordinate values of the

workpiece installation coordinate system. (The machine does not make any movement.) Travel

commands during the workpiece installation error compensation mode are dealt as those on the

workpiece installation coordinate system.

— Workpiece installation error compensation cancel

With a command G54.4 P0, the workpiece installation error compensation mode is canceled. The setting

of the workpiece installation coordinate system is canceled, the original workpiece coordinate system is

validated, and the workpiece installation error counter changes to indicate the coordinate values of the

original workpiece coordinate system. (The machine does not make any movement.) The workpiece

installation error compensation is canceled also at resetting.

When attempting to execute the program (A), the workpiece is placed 3mm off the original position in the X

direction, 5mm off in the Y direction, and -10 off the Z axis angle. In this case, set the compensation amounts

below as the workpiece installation error compensation amounts, and command a workpiece installation error

compensation. The machining is carried out as intended by the original program.

(W1) Workpiece installation coordinate system

Program (A) G90 G0 X5. Y5. G1 X15. Y5. F500 G3 X5. Y15. R10. F500 G1 X5. Y5. F500

Workpiece installation error compensation No.01 x = 3. y = 5. z = 0. a = 0. b = 0. c = -10. Rotary axis position 1 = 0 Rotary axis position 2 = 0

G54.4P1 G90 G0 X5. Y5. G1 X15.Y5. F500 G3 X5. Y15. R10. F500 G1 X5. Y5. F500 G54.4P0

X

Y

5 15

15

5

X’

Y’

X

Y

x=3

c = -10

(W1)

y=5

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

720

[Precautions in commanding and canceling G54.4]

In the first travel command immediately after commanding G54.4, make sure to issue an absolute value

command. In the G54.4 command block, the machine does not make any movement. Therefore, if an

incremental value command is issued immediately after having commanded G54.4, the operation may result

in what is not intended by the program. (Once an absolute value command is issued, the operations of blocks

thereafter will be as intended by the program even with incremental value commands.)

This precaution also applies to a cancel operation, so make sure to issue an absolute value command

immediately after commanding G54.4P0.

Operation with no installation error

If an incremental value command is issued immediately after having commanded G54.4

G54.4 P1 N1 G91 G0 X5. Y5. N2 G91 G1 Y15. F500

If an incremental value is commanded in the next block of G54.4, an incremental travel is made from the current machine position. The operation does not result in what is intended by the program.

(Incremental value command) N1 G91 G0 X5. Y5. N2 G91 G1 Y15. (Absolute value command) N1 G90 G0 X5. Y5. N2 G90 G1 Y20.

If an absolute value command is issued immediately after having commanded G54.4

G54.4 P1 N1 G90 G0 X5. Y5. N2 G90 G1 Y20. F500

If an absolute value is commanded in the next block of G54.4, the operation results in what is intended by the program.

X

Y

N1

N2

20

5

X’

Y’

X

Y

N1

N2

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

721

(2) Compensation of the tool direction

In a workpiece installation error compensation, in addition to position compensations of XYZ, the tool

angle against the workpiece is also compensated compared to the rotary axis position so that it is as

intended by the program.

Generally there are two types of combinations of rotary axis angles after compensation.

(Example) Composit type (The tool side rotary axis is B, the table side rotary axis is C)

Workpiece installation error compensation ON

In addition to XYZ, the rotary axis position is also compensated.

Position after tool direction compensation

Sign of B=Positive Sign of B=Negative

(Program command) (Program command) (Program command)

B = 0 B = 30 B = -30

C = 0 C = 0 C = 180

(A) Original workpiece installation position

(Current position) (Machine position)

(Current position) (Machine position)

(B) Ideal position B 0. B 30. B 0. B -30.

(D) Error of Y axis angle b = 30 C 0. C 0. C 0. C 180.

(Note) The workpiece installation error counter indicates the program command position, and the machine position counter indicates the actual machine position.

X

Z

Y

(B)(A)

(D)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

722

Select one of these above according to the rules below.

— In a G54.4 command block

Select the combination whose travel distance of the secondary rotary axis is shorter than in the other

combination.

When selecting this, the machine does not move, and the workpiece installation error counter is updated.

— Not in a G54.4 command block

Select the combination according to the parameter «#7906 PASSTYP».

(This parameter is the same parameter as Singular point passage type of tool center point control.)

Type Type 1 Type 2

Parameter #7906 = 0 #7906 = 1

Operation Select the combination whose primary rotary axis sign is the same as of the block start point.

Select the combination whose travel distance of the secondary rotary axis is shorter.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

723

Relation with other functions

Commands Issuable during workpiece installation error compensation

If a command other than those listed below is issued, a program error (P545) will occur.

(Note 1) If inch and metric are changed over during workpiece installation error compensation, an alarm will

occur.

(Note 2) If the workpiece coordinate system is changed during workpiece installation error compensation, an

alarm will occur.

Command Function

G00, G01 G02, G03

Positioning, Linear interpolation Circular interpolation, Helical interpolation

G04 Dwell

G05 P0, P1, P2, P10000 High-speed machining mode, High-speed high-accuracy control II

G05.1 Q0, Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G08 P0 P1 High-accuracy control

G09 Exact stop check

G10, G11 Parameter input by program cancel, Compensation data input by program

G12, G13 Circular cut

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G20, G21 Inch command, Metric command (Note 1)

G28 Automatic 1st reference position return

G29 Start position return

G30 2nd to 4th reference position return

G30.1 to G30.6 Tool exchange position return

G34, G35, G36, G37.1 Special fixed cycle

G40, G41, G42 Tool radius compensation cancel/left/right

G41.2, G42.2 3-dimensional tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining left/right

G43, G44 G43.1, G43.5

Tool length compensatio, Tool length compensation along the tool axis +/cancel/- Tool center point control type I/II

G45,G46,G47,G48 Tool position offset

G50,G51 Scaling cancel/ON

G50.1, G51.1, G62 G command mirror image cancel/ON

G53 Machine coordinate system selection

G53.1 Tool axis direction control

G54 to G59, G54.1 Pn Workpiece coordinate system selection (Note 2), Extended workpiece coordinate system selection

G54.4 P0 Workpiece installation error compensation cancel

G61 G61.1 G64

Exact stop check mode High-accuracy control mode I ON Cutting mode

G65 User macro Simple call

G66, G66.1, G67 User macro modal call A/B/cancel

G68.2, G68.3, G69 Inclined surface machining, Coordinate rotation/Inclined surface machining cancel

G73 to G76, G80 to G89 Fixed cycle for hole drilling * Including synchronous tapping

G90, G91 Absolute value command/incremental value command

G93 G94 G95

Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

M98, M99 Subprogram call, main program return

M,S,T,B M, S, T, B command

Macro command Local variable, Common variable, Arithmetic Commands (Four basic arithmetic rule, Trigonometric functions, Square root, etc.) Control Commands (IF-GOTO- and WHILE-DO-)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

724

Modes in which workpiece installation error compensation is commandable

If workpiece installation error compensation (including the cancel command) is commanded in a mode other

than those listed below, a program error (P546) will occur.

Workpiece installation error compensation is not commandable

When the following functions are enabled, workpiece installation error compensation cannot be commanded.

If it is commanded, a program error (P546) will occur.

Mode Function

G00, G01 Positioning, Linear Interpolation

G05 P0, P1, P2, P10000 High speed machining mode

G05.1 Q0, Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G08 P0 P1 High-accuracy control

G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel

G15 Polar coordinate command cancel

G17, G18, G19 Plane selection

G20, G21 Inch command, Metric command

G23 Stroke check before travel OFF

G40 Tool radius compensation cancel

G40.1 Normal line control cancel

G44 Tool length compensation cancel

G50 Scaling cancel

G50.1 Mirror image by G code OFF

G54 to G59, G54.1 Workpiece coordinate system selection, Extended workpiece coordinate system selection

G54.4 P0 Workpiece installation error compensation cancel

G61 G61.1 G64

Exact stop check mode High-accuracy control mode I ON Cutting mode

G67 User macro modal call OFF

G69 Coordinate rotation cancel, 3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel

G80 Fixed cycle cancel

G90, G91 Absolute value command/incremental value command

G93 G94 G95

Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution

G97 Constant surface speed control OFF

G98, G99 Fixed cycle initial level return, R point level return

Function name Related parameter Related PLC signal

Coordinate rotation by parameter

#8621 to #8627 —

Mirror image by parameter setting

#8211 —

Mirror image by external input

— Y7C0 to Y7DF

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

725

Precautions

(1) In the system variables to read the position information (#5001 to #5116, excluding #5021 to #5036 and

#5101 to #5116), the coordinate values of the workpiece installation coordinate system are set during

workpiece installation error compensation. In the variables #5021 to #5036 and #5101 to #5116, the

coordinate values of the machine coordinate system are set even during workpiece installation error

compensation.

(2) Workpiece installation error compensation will be canceled if reset is executed during workpiece

installation error compensation.

(3) In order to enable machine lock, interlock, and external deceleration, input their signals not to the axes of

the workpiece installation coordinate system but to the axes of the machine coordinate system which are

in actual operation.

(4) Tool radius compensation, 3-dimensional tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, tool length

compensation, tool center point control, mirror image by G code, scaling, inclined surface machining, and

fixed cycle command must be nested in workpiece installation error compensation. When commanding

them, they must be commanded during workpiece installation error compensation mode.

(a) In workpiece installation error compensation (b) In tool radius compensation

(5) A coordinate conversion is not applied to a manual interruption, it is operated on the machine coordinate

system. During workpiece installation error compensation, if a manual interruption or tool center point

control is executed with the manual absolute switch ON, make sure to return to the position before the

interruption to restart an automatic operation. If you restart automatic operation in a position different

from the one before interruption, an error » M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070″ will occur. An

interruption to a rotary axis during workpiece installation error compensation will also cause an error

«M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070». In addition, if an automatic operation handle interruption is

executed during workpiece installation error compensation, the alarm M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp

0070 will occur.

(6) It is not possible to execute an MDI interruption, PLC interruption, or macro interruption during workpiece

installation error compensation. If any of these is executed during workpiece installation error

compensation, an error M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070 will occur. If macro interruption is

enabled during workpiece installation error compensation, a program error (P545) will occur. Also when

workpiece installation error compensation is commanded while macro interruption is active, a program

error (P546) will occur.

(7) When workpiece installation error compensation is commanded during MDI interruption, PLC

interruption, or macro interruption, a program error (P546) will occur.

(8) In graphic check, the path of the original workpiece coordinate system is displayed.

(9) Tracing is done using the machine coordinate values.

(10) A program restart cannot be applied to a block after workpiece installation error compensation has been

enabled. If commanded, a program error (P49) occurs.

(11) G0 commands during workpiece installation error compensation are always interpolation type. (Non-

interpolation type is not available.)

(12) During workpiece installation error compensation, a buffer correction is not possible. If you attempt buffer

correction, a message notifying that buffer correction is disabled will appear.

G54.4P1

G41 D1

G40

G54.4P0

(a) (b)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

726

(13) In the parameters #7900 to #7902, #7922, #7932, #7942, and #7952, designate the axes of the 1st part

system. If you command workpiece installation error compensation in a part system where any of the

designated axes is not ready, a program error (P932) will occur.

(14) If an arbitrary feed in manual mode is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, an

error M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070 will occur.

(15) If a manual speed command is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, an error M01

Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070 will occur.

(16) If a figure rotation is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, a program error (P545)

will occur. In addition, if workpiece installation error compensation is commanded during figure rotation, a

program error (P546) will occur.

(17) If a coordinate rotation by parameter is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, a

program error (P545) will occur. In addition, if workpiece installation error compensation is commanded

during coordinate rotation by parameter, a program error (P546) will occur.

(18) If a linear angle command is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, a program error

(P545) will occur.

(19) If a geometric command is executed during workpiece installation error compensation, a program error

(P545) will occur.

(20) Chopping is not possible while an axis in workpiece installation error compensation is moving. In

addition, if a movement command of workpiece installation error compensation is issued during

chopping, an error M01 Command axis chopping axis 0151 will occur.

(21) If a command to rotate a rotary axis by over 180 in a block is issued, a program error (P547) will occur.

In such a case, divide the block into multiple blocks so that a movement less than 180 is commanded in

each block.

(22) If workpiece installation error compensation is commanded during user macro modal call B (G66.1), a

program error (P33) will occur.

(23) Do not change the workpiece offset amounts during workpiece installation error compensation.

(24) Even if the workpiece installation error compensation amounts are changed during workpiece installation

error compensation, the offset at startup will be enabled.

(25) Axis configuration of applicable machines is as follows.

(a) This function applies to three types of machine configuration as below.

In this manual, the following axes are called as primary rotary axis: the tool-side 2nd rotary axis (tool tile type),

the table-side 1st rotary axis (table tile type), and the tool side rotary axis (combined type). The other rotary

axes are called secondary rotary axis.

Type Tool tilt Table tilt Composite

Description Two rotary axes on tool head side

Two rotary axes on table side One rotary axis each on tool head side and table side

Machine example

Primary rotary axis (A)

Tool-side 2nd rotary axis Table-side 1st rotary axis Tool-side rotary axis

Secondary rotary axis position (B)

Tool-side 1st rotary axis Table-side 2nd rotary axis Table-side rotary axis

(B)

(A) (A)

(B)

(A)

(B)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ; G54.4

727

(b) This function is not applicable to machines as below.

Description Machine example

A machine whose rotary axis rotation center axis is not parallel to any orthogonal coordinate axis.

A machine whose direction from the tool tip to the tool base is not parallel to Z axis (Z axis positive direction) when machine positions of the rotary axes are all 0.

(a) Tool axis direction

A machine in which three linear axes do not form a right- handed orthogonal coordinate system.

0

(a)

14 Coordinate System Setting Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

728

729

15

Protection Function

15 Protection Function

MITSUBISHI CNC

730

15.1 Stroke Check Before Travel ; G22.1/G23.1

Function and purpose

By commanding the boundaries from the program with coordinate values on the machine coordinate system,

machine entry into that boundary can be prohibited. This can be set only for the three basic axes.

While the normal stored stroke limit stops entry before the prohibited area, this function causes a program

error before movement to the block if a command exceeding the valid movement area is issued.

Command format

(Note) In the following command format, the basic axes are X, Y and Z. If the basic axis name differs,

issue the command address of upper position coordinates with the basic axis name.

Detailed description

(1) The inner side of the boundary commanded with the upper position coordinate and the lower position

coordinate is the prohibited area.

(2) If the command is omitted, «0» will be set for the address.

(3) The area designated with this function is different from the area designated with the stored stroke limit.

However, the area enabled by both functions will be the actual valid movement range.

(Note) The upper point and lower point are commanded with coordinate on the machine coordinate

system.

G22.1 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ ; … Stroke check before travel ON

G23.1 ; … Stroke check before travel cancel

X Y Z Coordinates of upper point (basic axis name and its coordinate position)

I J K Coordinates of lower point (I,J,K address and its coordinate position)

(x, y, z): Upper point designated coordinate (i, j, k): Lower point designated coordinate

Shaded area: Prohibited area

X

Z Y

(x, y, z)

(i, j, k)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

15.1 Stroke Check Before Travel ; G22.1/G23.1

731

Precautions

(1) This function is valid only when starting the automatic operation. When interrupted with manual absolute

OFF, the prohibited area will also be shifted by the interrupted amount.

(2) An error will occur if the start point or end point is in the prohibited area.

(3) Stroke check will not be carried out for the axes having the same coordinates set for the upper point and

the lower point.

(4) The stroke check is carried out with the tool center coordinate values.

(5) If G23.1 X_Y_Z_; etc., is commanded, the command will be interpreted as G23.1;X_Y_Z;(2 blocks) .

Thus, the stroke check before travel will be canceled, then movement will take place with the previous

movement modal.

(6) During automatic reference position return, the check will not be carried out from the intermediate point

to the reference position. With G29, when moving from the start point to intermediate point, the check will

not be carried out.

(7) If there is an address not used in one block, a program error will occur.

(8) When the rotary-type rotary axis is set as a basic axis, the prohibited area will be converted to the range

of from 0 to 360 in the same manner as the movement command.

If the setting extends over «0», the side containing «0» will be the check area.

(Example)

(a) G22.1 Z45. K315. Stroke check area 45. <= Z <= 315.

(b) G22.1 Z-115. K-45. Stroke check area 225. <= Z <= 315.

(c) G22.1 Z45. K-45. Stroke check area 0. <= Z <=45., 315. <= Z <= 360.

Shaded area: check area

0 360

— 45 315

— 115 225

0 360

— 45 315

315

4545 (a) (b) (C)

15 Protection Function

MITSUBISHI CNC

732

733

16

Measurement Support Functions

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

734

16.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ; G37.1

Function and purpose

These functions issue the command values from the measuring start position as far as the measurement

position, move the tool in the direction of the measurement position, stop the machine once the tool has

arrived at the sensor, cause the NC system to calculate automatically the difference between the coordinate

values at that time and the coordinate values of the commanded measurement position and provide this

difference as the tool offset amount.

When offset is already being applied to a tool, it moves the tool toward the measurement position with the

offset still applied, and if a further offset amount is generated as a result of the measurement and calculation,

it provides further compensation of the present compensation amount.

If there is one type of offset amount at this time, and the offset amount is distinguished between tool length

offset amount and wear offset amount, the wear amount will be automatically compensated.

Command format

G37.1 Z__ R__ D__ F__ ; … Automatic tool length measurement command

Z Measuring axis address and coordinates of measurement position ——X,Y,Z, ( is the additional axis)

R This commands the distance between the measurement position and point where the movement is to start at the measuring speed.

D This commands the range within which the tool is to stop.

F

This commands the measuring feedrate. When R_, D_ or F_ is omitted, the value set in the parameter is used instead. («AUTO TLM» on machining parameter screen) — #8004 SPEED (measuring feedrate): 0 to 1000000 [mm/min] — #8005 ZONE r: 0 to 99999.999 [mm] — #8006 ZONE d: 0 to 99999.999 [mm]

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ; G37.1

735

Detailed description

(1) Operation with G37.1 command

(2) The sensor signal (measuring position arrival signal) is used in common with the skip signal.

(3) The feedrate will be 1mm/min if the F command and parameter measurement speed are 0.

(4) An updated offset amount is valid unless it is assigned from the following Z axis (measurement axis)

command of the G37.1 command.

(5) Excluding the delay at the PLC side, the delay and fluctuations in the sensor signal processing range

from 0 to 0.2ms.

As a result, the measuring error shown below is caused.

Maximum measuring error [mm] = Measuring speed [mm/min] * 1/60 * 0.2 [ms]/1000

(6) The machine position coordinates at that point in time are read by sensor signal detection, and the

machine will overtravel and stop at a position equivalent to the servo droop.

Maximum overtravel [mm] = Measuring speed [mm/min] * 1/60 * 1/Position loop gain [1/s]

The standard position loop gain is 33 (1/s).

Op1 : Normal completion as it is measurement within the allowable range.

Op2 : Alarm stop (P607) as it is outside of the measurement allowable range.

Op3 : Alarm stop (P607) as the sensor is not detected.

Op4 : Alarm stop (P607) as it is outside of the measurement allowable range. However if there is no (c) area, normal completion will occur.

(a) Measurement allowable range (b) Compensation amount (d1) Distance

(F1) Speed (f2) Feedrate (d) Measurement range

(r) Deceleration range

Measuring position Stop point Sensor output

(a)

(b)

(f2)(F1)

(d1)

D (d) D (d)

R (r) F (fp)

(c)

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

736

Operation example

For new measurement

[mm]

(Note) A new measurement is applied when the current tool length compensation amount is zero. Thus,

length will be compensated whether or not length dimension by tool compensation memory type

and length wear are differentiated.

When tool compensation is applied

[mm]

(Note) A measurement for the wear amount is applied when the current tool length compensation amount

is other than zero. Thus, length wear will be compensated if length dimension by tool compensation

memory type and length wear are differentiated. If not differentiated, length dimension will be

compensated.

G28 Z0; T01; M06 T02; G90 G00 G43 Z0 H01; G37.1 Z-400. R200. D150. F1; Coordinate value when reached at the measurement position = -300. -300.-(-400.)=100. 0+100.=100. H01=100. (a) Tool length (b) Movement amount by tool length measurement (c) Measuring device

G28 Z0; T01; M06 T02; G43 G00 Z0 H01; G37.1 Z-400. R200. D50. F10; Coordinate value when reached measurement position = -305. -305.-(400.)=95. Thus, H01=95. (c) Measuring device (d) Wear amount

0

— 100

— 200

— 300

— 400

F

R D

D

(a)

(b)

(c)

(Z0)

0

— 100

— 200

— 300

— 400

F

R

D

D

(Z0)

(d)

(c)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ; G37.1

737

Precautions

(1) Program error (P600) occurs if G37.1 is commanded when the automatic tool length measurement

function is not provided.

(2) Program error (P604) will occur when no axis has been commanded in the G37.1 block or when two or

more axes have been commanded.

(3) Program error (P605) will occur when the H code is commanded in the G37.1 block.

(4) Program error (P606) will occur when G43_H code is not commanded prior to the G37.1 block.

(5) Program error (P607) will occur when the sensor signal is input outside the allowable measuring range or

when the sensor signal is not detected even upon arrival at the end point.

(6) When a manual interrupt is applied while the tool is moving at the measuring speed, a return must be

made to the position prior to the interrupt and then operation must be resumed.

(7) The data commanded in G37.1 or the parameter setting data must meet the following conditions:

| Measurement point start point | > R command or parameter r > D command or parameter d

(8) When the D address and parameter d in (7) above are zero, the operation will be completed normally

only when the commanded measurement point and sensor signal detection point coincide. Otherwise,

program error (P607) will occur.

(9) When the R and D addresses as well as parameters r and d in (7) above are all zero, program error

(P607) will occur regardless of whether the sensor signal is present or not after the tool has been

positioned at the commanded measurement point.

(10) When the measurement allowable range is larger than the measurement command distance, it becomes

the measurement allowable range for all axes.

(11) When the measurement speed movement distance is larger than the measurement command distance,

all axes move at the measurement speed.

(12) When the measurement allowable range is larger than the measurement speed movement distance, the

axis moves in the measurement allowable range at the measurement speed.

(13) The automatic tool length measurement command (G37.1) must be commanded together with the

G43H_ command that designates the offset No.

G43 H_;

G37.1 Z_ R_ D_ F_;

(14) If an axis other than Z is specified for the measuring axis in G37.1 while the parameter «#1080 Dril_Z» is

set to «1», the program error (P606) occurs.

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

738

16.2 Skip Function ; G31

Function and purpose

When the skip signal is input externally during linear interpolation based on the G31 command, the machine

feed is stopped immediately, the coordinate value is read, the remaining distance is discarded and the

command in the following block is executed.

Command format

Detailed description

(1) If Ff is commanded as the feedrate in the same block as the G31 command block, command feed f will

apply; if not commanded, the value set in the parameter «#1174 Skip_F» will serve as the feedrate. In

either case, the F modal will not be updated.

(2) The G31 maximum speed will depend on the machine specifications.

(3) When R0 is commanded or the R command is omitted, the step acceleration/deceleration will be applied

to G31 block after the interpolation without performing the automatic acceleration/deceleration.

When R1 is commanded, the automatic acceleration/deceleration will be performed according to the

cutting feed acceleration/deceleration mode set by the parameter «#2003 smgst» with the time constant

set by the parameter «#2102 skip_tL» and «#2103 skip_t1».

Even if G1 constant inclination acceleration/deceleration (the parameter «#1201 G1_acc» is set to «1») is

valid, the time constant acceleration and deceleration will be performed.

G31 X__ Y__ Z__ __ R__ F__ ;

X,Y,Z, Axis coordinate value; they are commanded as absolute or incremental values according to the G90/G91 modal when commanded. is the additional axis.

R

Acceleration/deceleration command R0: Acceleration/deceleration time constant=0 (No automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.) R1: Acceleration/deceleration time constant valid. Accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set with the parameters «#2102 skip_tL» and «#2103 skip_t1». R0 is applied when it is omitted.

F Feedrate (mm/min)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.2 Skip Function ; G31

739

(4) When the R1 is commanded with the acceleration and deceleration command, the automatic

acceleration and deceleration will be performed after the interpolation even if the skip single is input.

Note that if the value of the parameter «#2102 skip_tL» and #2103 skip_t1″ are big, it will not stop

immediately.

Acceleration/deceleration when R0 is commanded or R is omitted

Acceleration/deceleration when R1 is commanded

(5) Command the acceleration/deceleration command (R0/R01) per G31 command. If not, «the acceleration/

deceleration time constant=0 (R0)» will be applied and no automatic acceleration/deceleration will be

performed after the interpolation.

(6) Override is invalid with the G31 command and it is fixed at 100%. Dry run is also invalid. The stop

conditions (feed hold, interlock, override zero and stroke end) are valid. External deceleration is also

valid.

(7) The G31 command is unmodal and it needs to be commanded each time.

(8) If the skip command is input at the start of the G31 command, the G31 command will be completed

immediately.

When a skip signal has not been input until the completion of the G31 block, the G31 command will also

be completed upon completion of the movement commands.

(9) When the G31 command is issued during tool radius compensation, the program error (P608) will occur.

(10) When there is no F command in the G31 command and the parameter speed is also zero, the program

error (P603) will occur.

(11) With machine lock or with the Z axis cancel switch ON when only the Z axis is commanded, the skip

signal will be ignored and execution will continue as far as the end of the block.

Readout of skip coordinates

The coordinate positions for which the skip signal is input are stored in the system variables #5061 (1st axis)

to #506n (n-th axis), so these can be used in the user macros.

(Note) When the parameter «#1366 skipExTyp» is set to «1», the skip coordinate value will be «0», even if

G31 command is issued in the first part system or G31 command is issued in only one of the

multiple part system.

(sk1) Skip signal (tL) Skip time constant

:

G90 G00 X-100. ;

G31 X-200. F60 ; (Skip command)

#101=#5061 ; Skip signal input coordinate position (workpiece coordinate system) is readout to #101.

:

t

sk1 f

f

sk1

(tL)(tL) t

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

740

G31 coasting

The amount of coasting from when the skip signal is input during the G31 command until the machine stops

differs according to the parameter «#1174 skip_F» or F command in G31.

The time between deceleration start and stop after responding to the skip signal is short, so the machine can

be stopped precisely with a small coasting amount. The coasting amount can be calculated from the following

formula.

Stop pattern with skip signal input is shown below.

The relationship between the coasting amount and speed when Tp is 30ms and t1 is 5ms is shown in the

following figure.

0 : Coasting amount (mm)

F : G31 skip speed (mm/min)

Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (position loop gain)-1

t1 : Response delay time (s) = (time taken from the detection to the arrival of the skip signal at the controller via PC)

t2 : Response error time 0.001 (s)

When G31 is used for calculation, the value calculated from the section indicated by 1 in the above equation can be compensated, however, 2 results in calculation error.

(a) Skip signal input (T) Time

(a) Maximum value (b) Average value (c) Minimum value F: Feedrate : coasting amount

0 = Tp+ (t1 t2)60 F

60 F

60 F

60 F= (Tp+t1) t2

1 2

Tp t1 t2 (T)

F (a)

0

Tp=0.03 t1=0.0050.050

F (mm/min)

0.040

0.030

0.020

0.010

(mm)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

(a) (b)

(c)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.2 Skip Function ; G31

741

Readout error of skip coordinates mm

(1) Skip signal input coordinate readout

The coasting amount based on the position loop time constant Tp and cutting feed time constant Ts is

not included in the skip signal input coordinate values.

Therefore, the workpiece coordinate values applying when the skip signal is input can be readout within

the error range in the following formula as the skip signal input coordinate values. However, coasting

based on response delay time t1 results in a measurement error and so compensation must be provided.

Readout error of skip signal input coordinates

Readout error with a 60mm/min feedrate is as shown below and the measurement value is within

readout error range of 1m:

= (60/60) * 0.001 = 0.001 (mm)

(2) Readout of other coordinates

The readout coordinate values include the coasting amount. Therefore, when coordinate values at the

time of skip signal input is required, reference should be made to the section on the G31 coasting

amount to compensate the coordinate value. As in the case of (1), the coasting amount based on the

delay error time t2 cannot be calculated, and this generates a measuring error.

= (F/60) * t 2

: Readout error F : Feedrate t2 : Response error time 0.001 (s) (a) Measurement value

F (mm/min)

+1

0

— 1 60

( m) (a)

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

742

Examples of compensating for coasting

(1) Compensating for skip signal input coordinates

#110 = Skip feedrate;

#111 = Response delay time t1;

(2) Compensating for workpiece coordinates

#110 = Skiop feedrate;

#111 = Response delay time t1;

#112 = Position loop time constant Tp;

Operation example

:

G31 X100.F100 ; Skip command

G04; Machine stop check

#101=#5061 ; Skip signal input coordinate readout

#102=#110*#111/60 ; Coasting based on response delay time

#105=#101-#102 ; Skip signal input coordinates

:

:

G31 X100.F100 ; Skip command

G04; Machine stop check

#101=#5061 ; Skip signal input coordinate readout

#102=#110*#111/60 ; Coasting based on response delay time

#103=#110*#112/60 ; Coasting based on position loop time constant

#105=#101-#102-#103 ; Skip signal input coordinates

:

G90 G00 X-100000 Y0; G31 X-500000 F100; G01 Y-100000; G31 X-0 F100; Y-200000; G31 X-50000 F100; Y-300000; X0;

— 500000 0

— 100000

— 200000

— 300000

— 100000

G01

G31

G31

G31

G01 G01

G01 X

W

Y

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.3 Multi-step Skip Function 1 ; G31.n ,G04

743

16.3 Multi-step Skip Function 1 ; G31.n ,G04

Function and purpose

The setting of combinations of skip signals to be input enables skipping under various conditions. The actual

skip operation is the same as G31.

The G commands which can specify skipping are G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, and G04, and the correspondence

between the G commands and skip signals can be set by parameters.

Command format

Same with G31.2 and G31.3; Ff is not required with G04.

As with the G31 command, this command executes linear interpolation and when the preset skip signal

conditions have been met, the machine is stopped, the remaining commands are canceled, and the next block

is executed.

Detailed description

(1) Command the skip speed by the program command or the parameter. Feedrate G31.1 set with the

parameter corresponds to «#1176 skip1f», G31.2 corresponds to «#1178 skip2f», G31.3 corresponds to

«#1180 skip3f», and G04 corresponds to «#1173 dwlskp». However, F modal will not be updated in each

case.

(2) A command is skipped if it meets the specified skip signal condition.

(3) The feedrates corresponding to the G31.1, G31.2, and G31.3 commands can be set by parameters.

(4) The skip conditions (logical sum of skip signals which have been set) corresponding to the G31.1, G31.2,

G31.3 and G04 commands can be set by parameters.

(5) Other commands work the same as the G31 (skip function) command.

G31.1 X__ Y__ Z__ __ R__ F__ ;

X,Y,Z, Target coordinates

R

Acceleration/deceleration command R0: Acceleration/deceleration time constant=0 (No automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.) R1: Acceleration/deceleration time constant valid. Accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set with the parameters «#2102 skip_tL» and «#2103 skip_t1». R0 is applied when it is omitted.

F Feedrate (mm/min)

Parameter setting Valid skip signal

1 2 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

744

Operation example

(1) The multi-step skip function enables the following control, thereby improving measurement accuracy and

shortening the time required for measurement.

[Parameter settings]

[Program example]

N10 G31.1 X200.0 ;

N20 G31.2 X40.0 ;

N30 G31.3 X1.0 ;

(Note 1) If skip signal 1 is input before skip signal 2 in the above operation, N20 is skipped at that point and

N30 is also ignored.

(2) If a skip signal with the condition set during G04 (dwell) is input, the remaining dwell time is canceled and

the following block is executed.

Skip condition Skip speed

G31.1 : 7 20.0mm/min (f1)

G31.2 : 3 5.0mm/min (f2)

G31.3 : 1 1.0mm/min (f3)

(a) Measurement distance (F) Skip speed (sk1) Input of skip signal 1 (sk2) Input of skip signal 2 (sk3) Input of skip signal 3

(sk1) Skip signal (tL) Skip time constant

N10

f

N20

N30

(f1)

(f2)

(f3)

t

(a)

(F)

(sk3) (sk2) (sk1)

(tL) (tL) (tL) (tL) t

(f1)

(f2) (f3)

(sk3)

(sk2)

(sk1) N10

N20 N30

f

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.4 Multi-step Skip Function 2 ; G31 P

745

16.4 Multi-step Skip Function 2 ; G31 P

Function and purpose

During linear interpolation by the skip command (G31), operation can be skipped according to the conditions

of the skip signal parameter Pp.

If multi-step skip commands are issued simultaneously in different part systems as shown in the left figure,

both part systems perform skip operation simultaneously if the input skip signals are the same, or they

perform skip operation separately if the input skip signals are different as shown in the right figure. The skip

operation is the same as a normal skip command (G31 without P command).

If the skip condition specified by the parameter «#1173 dwlskp» (indicating external skip signals 1 to 4) is

metduring execution of a dwell command (G04), the remaining dwell time is canceled and the following block

isexecuted.

Command format

[Same skip signals input in both 1st and 2nd part systems]

[Different skip signals input in 1st and 2nd part systems]

($1) 1st part system ($2) 2nd part system

(sk1) Skip signal 1 (sk2) Skip signal 2

G31 X__ Y__ Z__ __ P__ R__ F__ ;

X Y Z Target coordinates

P Skip signal command

R

Acceleration/deceleration command R0: Acceleration/deceleration time constant=0 (No automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.) R1: Acceleration/deceleration time constant valid. Accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set with the parameters «#2102 skip_tL» and «#2103 skip_t1». R0 is applied when it is omitted.

F Feedrate (mm/min)

Y1 (sk1)

($1)

Y1

X1 X1

(sk1)

($1)

Y2 (sk1)

($2)

Y2

X2 X2

(sk2)

($2)

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

746

Detailed description

(1) The skip speed is specified by program command or parameter. The feedrate by the parameter is set by

«#1174 skip_F». Note that the F modal is not updated in each case.

(2) The skip signal is specified by skip signal command p. The command range of «p» is from 1 to 255. If

outside the range is commanded, program error (P35) will occur.

(3) The specified skip signal command is a logical sum of the skip signals.

(Example) G31 X100. P5 F100 ;

Operation is skipped if skip signal 1 or 3 is input.

(4) If skip signal parameter Pp is not specified, it works as a skip function (G31), not as a multi-step skip

function. If speed parameter Ff is not specified, the skip speed set by the parameter «#1174 skip_F» will

apply.

[Relations between skip and multi-step skip]

(5) If skip specification is effective and P is specified as an axis address, skip signal parameter P will be

given a priority. The axis address «P» will be ignored.

(Example) G31 X100. P500 F100 ;

This is regarded as a skip signal. (The program error (P35) will occur.)

(6) Other than above, the same detailed description as «Skip function; G31» applies.

Skip signal command P Valid skip signal

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

: : :

253

254

255

Skip specifications

Condition Speed Condition Speed

G31 X100 ; (Without P and F)

Program error (P601) Skip 1 #1174 skip_F

G31 X100 P5 ; (Without F)

Program error (P602) Command value #1174 skip_F

G31 X100 F100 ; (Without P)

Program error (P601) Skip 1 Command value

G31 X100 P5 F100 ; Program error (P602) Command value Command value

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.5 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn

747

16.5 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn

Function and purpose

When the skip signal is detected during linear interpolation by the skip command (G31), the feedrate is

changed.

Command format

G31 X__ Y__ Z__ __ R__ F__ F1 = __ … Fn = __ ; («n» is the skip signal 1 to 8) … Skip command

X,Y,Z, Target coordinates

F Feedrate when starting the cutting feed (mm/min)

R

Acceleration/deceleration command R0: Acceleration/deceleration time constant=0 When the movement is stopped by the skip signal detection, the step stop will occur. R1: Acceleration/deceleration time constant valid. When the movement is stopped by the skip signal detection, it will decelerate with the time constant set with the parameter «#2102 skip_tL» and «#2103 skip_t1». When omitted, R0 will be applied.

Fn=

Feedrate after detecting the skip signal (mm/min) Fn = 0 : Movement stop Fn 0 : Changing the feedrate to fn F1 = Feedrate after inputting the skip signal 1 : F8 = Feedrate after inputting the skip signal 8

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

748

Detailed description

(1) When the skip signal for which the feedrate fn0 is commanded, the speed is changed to the command

speed corresponding to the skip signal.

(2) When the skip signal for which the feedrate fn=0 is commanded, the movement is stopped. If R0 is

commanded or R command is omitted, the step stop will occur without performing the automatic

acceleration/deceleration after the interpolation when the movement is stopped by the skip signal

detection.

When R1 is commanded, the automatic acceleration/deceleration will be performed with the skip time

constant after the interpolation even if the movement is stopped by the skip signal detection.

Note that if the value of the parameter «#2102 skip_tL» and #2103 skip_t1″ are large, it will not stop

immediately.

After the movement is stopped, the remaining movement commands are canceled and the following

block will be executed.

(3) When a skip signal has not been input until the completion of the G31 block, the G31 command will also

be completed upon completion of the movement commands.

(4) When the skip return is valid, the return operation by the skip signal detection is executed after the

movement is stopped.

(5) Even if G1 constant inclination acceleration/deceleration (#1201 G1_acc) is valid, the speed change skip

will be the operation of the time constant acceleration and deceleration.

(6) When the feedrate command (Fn=fn) is not specified after detecting the skip signal, the normal G31 skip

operation will be applied.

(7) If the skip signal is input during the deceleration by the movement command completion, the speed

change will be ignored.

(a) Deceleration section by the movement command completion

(F) Speed (T) Time

(sk1) Skip signal 1 (Movement stop): Valid

(sk2) Skip signal 2 (Speed change) : Invalid

(sk3) Skip signal 3

(sk4) Skip signal 4

f4

f

f3

f2

0

f1

(a)

(F)

(T)

(sk4)

(sk3)

(sk2) (sk1)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.5 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn

749

(8) The skip signal without commanding the feedrate in the program will be ignored.

(9) The speed change or the movement stop is performed when detecting the rising edge of the skip signal.

Note that if several rising edges are input at 3.5ms intervals or less, they may be judged as the

simultaneous input. When they are judged as the simultaneous input, the smaller value will be valid.

(10) If the G31 block is started with the skip signal input, that signal is considered to rise at the same time as

the block starts.

(11) If the skip signals for changing the speed and for stopping the movement are simultaneously input, the

skip signal for stopping the movement will be valid regardless of the size of the number.

(12) If the skip time constant «#2102 skip_tL» is illegal, the «Y51 PARAMETER ERROR 15» will occur, and if

the «#2103 skip_t1» is illegal, the «Y51 PARAMETER ERROR 16» will occur.

(13) Other than above, the same detailed description as «Skip function; G31» applies.

(F) Speed (T) Time

(sk1) Skip signal 1

(sk2) Skip signal 2

(sk3) Skip signal 3

(sk4) Skip signal 4

(sk3+sk4) Skip signal 3+Skip signal 4

f4

f

f3

f2

0

f1

(F)

(T)

(sk3+sk4)

(sk1)

(sk2)

(sk4)

(sk3)

(sk2)

(sk1)

(T)

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

750

Operation example

(1) Example of when R command is not commanded

(2) Example of when R1 is commanded

G31 X100. Ff F1=0 F2=f2 F3=f3 F4=f4 ;

(a) Skip signal constant (b) Position loop time constant

(F) Speed (T) Time

(sk1) Skip signal 1 (sk2) Skip signal 2

(sk3) Skip signal 3 (sk4) Skip signal 4

G31 X100. R1 Ff F1=0 F2=f2 F3=f3 F4=f4;

(F) Speed (T) Time

(sk1) Skip signal 1 (sk2) Skip signal 2

(sk3) Skip signal 3 (sk4) Skip signal 4

(tL) Skip time constant

f4

f

f3

f2

0 f1

(F)

(T) (a) (a)

(sk4)

(sk3)

(sk2)

(sk1)

(b)

f4

f

(F)

(T)

f3

f2

0 (tL) (tL) (tL)

(sk4)

(sk3)

(sk2)

(sk1)

f1

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

16.6 Programmable Current Limitation ; G10 L14 ;

751

16.6 Programmable Current Limitation ; G10 L14 ;

Function and purpose

This function allows the current limit value of the NC axis to be changed to a desired value in the program, and

is used for the workpiece stopper, etc.

The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated current.

Command format

Precautions

(1) If the current limit value is reached when the current limit is valid, the current limit reached signal is

output.

(2) The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current limit is

reached. The external signal determines which mode applies.

[Normal mode]

The movement command is executed in the current state.

During automatic operation, the movement command is executed until the end, and then move to the

next block with the droops still accumulated.

[Interlock mode]

During the occurrence of the droops, it enters to the internal interlock state and the next movement will

not be carried out.

During automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block, and the next block is not

moved to.

During manual operation, the following same direction commands are ignored.

(3) The position droop generated by the current limit can be canceled when the current limit changeover

signal of external signals is canceled. (Note that the axis must not be moving.)

(4) The setting range of the current limit value is 1% to 999%. Commands that exceed this range will cause

a program error (P35).

(5) If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command, only the integer will be valid.

Example) G10 L14 X10.123 ; The current limit value will be set to 10%.

(6) For the axis name «C», the current limit value cannot be set from the program (G10 command).

To set from the program, set the axis address with an incremental axis name, or set the axis name to one

other than «C».

G10 L14 Xn ;

L14 Current limit value setting (+ side/- side)

X Axis address

n Current limit value (%) Setting range: 1 to 999

16 Measurement Support Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

752

753

Appendix 1

Program Errors

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

754

These alarms occur during automatic operation and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors which

occur for instance when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when

programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.

P10 No. of simultaneous axes over Details

The number of axis addresses commanded in a block is exceeds the specifications. Remedy

— Divide the alarm block command into two. — Check the specifications.

P11 Illegal axis address Details

The axis address commanded by the program does not match any of the ones set by the parameter. Remedy

— Correct the axis names in the program.

P20 Division error Details

The issued axis command cannot be divided by the command unit. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P29 Not accept command Details

The command has been issued when it is impossible.

— The normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the modal in which the normal line control is not acceptable.

— The command has been issued during the modal in which the 2-part system synchronous thread cutting is not acceptable.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P30 Parity H error Details

The number of holes per character on the paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for ISO code. Remedy

— Check the paper tape. — Check the tape puncher and tape reader.

P31 Parity V error Details

The number of characters per block on the paper tape is odd. Remedy

— Make the number of characters per block on the paper tape even. — Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.

P32 Illegal address Details

An address not listed in the specifications has been used. Remedy

— Correct the program address. — Correct the parameter settings. — Check the specifications.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

755

P33 Format error Details

The command format in the program is not correct. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P34 Illegal G code Details

The commanded G code is not in the specifications. An illegal G code was commanded during the coordinate rotation command.

Remedy

— Correct the G code address in the program. Details

G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when «#1501 polyax (Rotational tool axis number)» was set to «0». G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the tool axis was set to the linear axis («#1017 rot (Rotational axis)» is set to»0″).

Remedy

— Correct the parameter settings.

P35 Setting value range over Details

The setting range for the addresses has been exceeded. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P36 Program end error Details

«EOR» has been read during tape and memory mode. Remedy

— Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end of the program. — Enter the M99 command at the end of the subprogram.

P37 O, N number zero Details

«0» has been specified for program or sequence No. Remedy

— Designate program Nos. within a range from 1 to 99999999. — Designate sequence Nos. within a range from 1 to 99999.

P38 No spec: Add. Op block skip Details

«/n» has been issued while the optional block skip addition is not in the specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P39 No specifications Details

— A non-specified G code was commanded.

— The selected operation mode is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

756

P45 G-CODE COMB. Details

The combination of G codes in a block is inappropriate. A part of unmodal G codes and modal G codes cannot be commanded in a same block.

Remedy

Correct the combination of G codes. Separate the incompatible G codes into different blocks.

P48 Restart pos return incomplete Details

A travel command was issued before the execution of the block that had been restart-searched. Remedy

— Carry out program restart again. Travel command cannot be executed before the execution of the block that has been restart- searched.

P49 Invalid restart search Details

— Restart search was attempted for the 3-dimensional circular interpolation.

— Restart search was attempted for the mixed control (cross axis control) command (G110).

— Restart search was attempted during the cylindrical interpolation, polar coordinate interpolation, or tool tip center control.

— Restart search was attempted from a block (G68.2) during the inclined surface machining mode or from the inclined surface machining mode cancel command block (G69).

— Restart search was attempted to the program after direct command mode. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Correct the restart search position.

P50 No spec: Inch/Metric change Details

Inch/Metric changeover (G20/G21) command was issued while the function is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P60 Compensation length over Details

The commanded movement distance is excessive (over 231). Remedy

— Correct the command range for the axis address.

P61 No spec: Unidirectional posit. Details

Unidirectional positioning (G60) was commanded while the function is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P62 No F command Details

— No feed rate command has been issued.

— There is no F command in the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation immediately after the G95 mode is commanded.

Remedy

— The default movement modal command at power ON is G01. This causes the machine to move without a G01 command if a movement command is issued in the program, and an alarm results. Use an F command to specify the feed rate.

— Specify F with a thread lead command.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

757

P63 No spec: High-speed machining Details

High-speed machining cancel (G5P0) was commanded while the high-speed machining is out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P65 No spec: High speed mode 3 Details

Remedy

— Check whether the specifications are provided for the high-speed mode III.

P70 Arc end point deviation large Details

— There is an error in the arc start and end points as well as in the arc center.

— The difference of the involute curve through the start point and the end point is large.

— When arc was commanded, one of the two axes configuring the arc plane was a scaling valid axis. Remedy

— Correct the numerical values of the addresses that specify the start and end points, arc center as well as the radius in the program.

— Correct the «+» and «-» directions of the address numerical values. — Check for the scaling valid axis.

P71 Arc center error Details

— An arc center cannot be obtained in R-specified circular interpolation.

— A curvature center of the involute curve cannot be obtained. Remedy

— Correct the numerical values of the addresses in the program. — Correct the start and end points if they are inside of the base circle for involute interpolation. When

carrying out tool radius compensation, make sure that the start and end points after compensation will not be inside of the base circle for involute interpolation.

— Correct the start and end points if they are at an even distance from the center of the base circle for involute interpolation.

P72 No spec: Herical cutting Details

A helical command has been issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check whether the specifications are provided for the helical cutting. — An Axis 3 command has been issued by the circular interpolation command. If there is no helical

specification, move the linear axis to the next block.

P73 No spec: Spiral cutting Details

A spiral command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Issue the G02.1 and G03.1 commands for circular interpolation. — Check whether the specifications are provided for the spiral cutting.

P74 Can’t calculate 3DIM arc Details

The 3-dimension circular cannot be obtained because the end block was not specified during 3- dimension circular interpolation supplementary modal. The 3-dimension circular cannot be obtained due to an interruption during 3-dimension circular interpolation supplementary modal.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

758

P75 3DIM arc illegal Details

An illegal G code was issued during 3-dimension circular interpolation modal. Otherwise, 3-dimension circular interpolation command was issued during a modal for which a 3- dimension circular interpolation command cannot be issued.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P76 No spec: 3DIM arc interpolat Details

G02.4/G03.4 was commanded though there is no 3-dimension circular interpolation specification. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P80 No spec: Hypoth ax interpolat Details

Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P90 No spec: Thread cutting Details

A thread cutting command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P91 No spec: Var lead threading Details

Variable lead thread cutting (G34) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P93 Illegal pitch vaule Details

An illegal thread lead (thread pitch) was specified at the thread cutting command. Remedy

— Correct the thread lead for the thread cutting command.

P100 No spec: Cylindric interpolat Details

A cylindrical interpolation command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P110 Plane select during figure rot Details

Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) was commanded during figure rotation. Remedy

— Correct the machining program.

P111 Plane selected while coord rot Details

Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) were issued during a coordinate rotation was being commanded.

Remedy

— Always command coordinate rotation cancel after the coordinate rotation command, and then issue a plane selection command.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

759

P112 Plane selected while R compen Details

— Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) were issued while tool radius compensation (G41, G42) and nose R compensation (G41, G42, G46) commands were being issued.

— Plane selection commands were issued after completing nose R compensation commands when there were no further axis movement commands after G40, and compensation has not been cancelled.

Remedy

— Issue plane selection commands after completing (axis movement commands issued after G40 cancel command) tool radius compensation and nose R compensation commands.

P113 Illegal plane select Details

The circular command axis does not correspond to the selected plane. Remedy

— Select a correct plane before issuing a circular command.

P120 No spec: Feed per rotation Details

Feed per rotation (G95) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P121 F0 command during arc modal Details

F0 (F 1-digit feed) was commanded during the arc modal (G02/G03). Remedy

— Correct the machining program.

P122 No spec: Auto corner override Details

An auto corner override command (G62) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications. — Delete the G62 command from the program.

P123 No spec: High-accuracy control Details

High-accuracy control command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P124 No spec: Inverse time feed Details

— The inverse time option is not provided. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P125 G93 mode error Details

— The issued G code command is illegal during G93 mode.

— G93 command was issued during a modal for which inverse time feed cannot be performed. Remedy

— Correct the program.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

760

P126 Invalid cmnd in high-accuracy Details

An illegal command was issued during the high-accuracy control mode.

— A G code group 13 command was issued during the high-accuracy control mode.

— Milling, cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded during the high- accuracy control mode.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P127 No spec: SSS Control Details

The SSS control valid parameter has been set although there is no SSS control specification. Remedy

— Check the specifications. Set «#8090 SSS ON» to «0» when there is no SSS control specification.

P128 Machin condtn select I disable Details

Machining condition selection I was commanded during the mode where the selection command is unavailable.

Remedy

— Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during machining condition selection I. If any, cancel that mode.

P130 2nd M function code illegal Details

The 2nd miscellaneous function address, commanded in the program, differs from the address set in the parameters.

Remedy

— Correct the 2nd miscellaneous function address in the program.

P131 No spec: Cnst surface ctrl G96 Details

A constant surface speed control command (G96) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications. — Issue a rotation speed command (G97) instead of the constant surface speed control command

(G96).

P132 Spindle rotation speed S=0 Details

No spindle rotation speed command has been issued. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P133 Illegal P-No. G96 Details

The illegal No. was specified for the constant surface speed control axis. Remedy

— Correct the parameter settings and program that specify the constant surface speed control axis.

P134 G96 Clamp Err. Details

The constant surface speed control command (G96) was issued without commanding the spindle speed clamp (G92/G50).

Remedy

Press the reset key and carry out the remedy below. — Check the program. — Issue the G92/G50 command before the G96 command. — Command the constant surface speed cancel (G97) to switch to the rotation speed command.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

761

P140 No spec: Pos compen cmd Details

The position compensation command (G45 to G48) is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P141 Pos compen during rotation Details

Position compensation was commanded during the figure rotation or coordinate rotation command. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P142 Pos compen invalid arc Details

Position compensation cannot be executed with the issued arc command. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P150 No spec: Nose R compensation Details

— Tool radius compensation commands (G41 and G42) were issued though they are out of specifications.

— Nose R compensation commands (G41, G42, and G46) were issued though they are out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P151 Radius compen during arc mode Details

A compensation command (G40, G41, G42, G43, G44, or G46) has been issued in the arc modal (G02 or G03).

Remedy

— Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid traverse command (G00) in the compensation command block or cancel block. (Set the modal to linear interpolation.)

P152 No intersection Details

— In interference block processing during execution of a tool radius compensation (G41 or G42) or nose R compensation (G41, G42, or G46) command, the intersection point after one block is skipped cannot be determined.

— The compensation amount cannot be calculated during the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining (G41.2,G42.2).

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P153 Compensation interference Details

An interference error has occurred while the tool radius compensation command (G41 or G42) or nose R compensation command (G41, G42 or G46) was being executed.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P154 No spec: 3D compensation Details

A three-dimensional compensation command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

762

P155 Fixed cyc exec during compen Details

A fixed cycle command has been issued in the radius compensation mode. Remedy

— Issue a radius compensation cancel command (G40) to cancel the radius compensation mode that has been applied since the fixed cycle command was issued.

P156 R compen direction not defined Details

A shift vector with undefined compensation direction was found at the start of G46 nose R compensation.

Remedy

— Change the vector to that which has the defined compensation direction. — Change the tool to that which has a different tip point No.

P157 R compen direction changed Details

During G46 nose R compensation, the compensation direction is reversed. Remedy

— Change the G command to that which allows the reversed compensation direction (G00, G28, G30, G33, or G53).

— Change the tool to that which has a different tip point No. — Enable «#8106 G46 NO REV-ERR».

P158 Illegal tip point Details

An illegal tip point No. (other than 1 to 8) was found during G46 nose R compensation. Remedy

— Correct the tip point No.

P159 C-CMP REMAINS Details

One of the followings was commanded while the compensation has not been canceled (the compensation amount remained).

(1) Automatic tool nose R compensation (G143)

(2) Radius compensation (G145)

(3) Plane selection (G17 to G19)

(4) Skip (G31 or G31.1/G31.2/G31.3)

(5) Fixed cycle for drilling (G81 to G89)

(6) Compound type fixed cycle II (G74 to G76) Remedy

— Cancel the compensation (with compensation amount «0») before commanding. — Command the G00 move block before the block with a command among (1) to (6).

P160 G53 CMP. ERR Details

— G53 was commanded during nose R compensation (by G41/G42/G46).

— G53 was commanded to the block where the nose R compensation mode is changed (with G40/ G41/G42/G46).

— G53 was commanded while nose R compensation amount has not been cleared. Remedy

— Correct the program. — When issuing G53 after G40 command, move the compensation plane axis by G00/G01/G02/G03

command before issuing G53.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

763

P161 No spec: 5ax tool R compensate Details

Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is not included in the specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P162 Disable Cmd in 5ax tool R comp Details

A command (G or T command, etc) was issued during tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining, although it is disabled during the compensation.

Remedy

— Cancel the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining.

P163 5 ax tool R comp is disable Details

Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining was commanded in a mode where the command is disabled.

Remedy

— Cancel the mode that disables the command.

P170 No offset number Details

— No compensation No. (DOO, TOO or HOO) command was given when the radius compensation (G41, G42, G43 or G46) command was issued. Otherwise, the compensation No. is larger than the number of sets in the specifications.

— When setting the L system tool life management II, the tool group management program was executed with the tool life management disabled.

Remedy

— Add the compensation No. command to the compensation command block. — Check the number of sets for the tool compensation Nos. and correct the compensation No.

command to be within the number of sets. — When setting the L system tool life management II («#1096 T_Ltyp»=»2»), enable the tool life

management («#1103 T_Life»=»1») to execute a tool group management program.

P171 No spec:Comp input by prog G10 Details

Compensation data input by program (G10) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P172 G10 L number error Details

An address of G10 command is not correct. Remedy

— Correct the address L No. of the G10 command.

P173 G10 P number error Details

The compensation No. at the G10 command is not within the permitted number of sets in the specifications.

Remedy

— Check the number of sets for the tool compensation Nos. and correct the address P designation to be within the number of sets.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

764

P174 No spec:Comp input by prog G11 Details

Compensation data input by program cancel (G11) was commanded though there is no specification of compensation data input by program.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P177 Tool life count active Details

Registration of tool life management data with G10 was attempted when the «usage data count valid» signal was ON.

Remedy

— The tool life management data cannot be registered during the usage data count. Turn the «usage data count valid» signal OFF.

P178 Tool life data entry over Details

The number of registration groups, total number of registered tools or the number of registrations per group exceeded the range in the specifications.

Remedy

— Correct the number of registrations.

P179 Illegal group No. Details

— A duplicate group No. was found at the registration of the tool life management data with G10.

— A group No. that was not registered was designated during the T****99 command.

— An M code command, which must be issued as a single command, coexists in the same block as that of another M code command.

— The M code commands set in the same group exist in the same block. Remedy

— Register the tool life data once for one group: commanding with a duplicate group No. is not allowed. — Correct to the group No.

P180 No spec: Drilling cycle Details

A fixed cycle command (G72 — G89) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications. — Correct the program.

P181 No spindle command (Tap cycle) Details

Spindle rotation speed (S) has not been commanded in synchronous tapping. Remedy

— Command the spindle rotation speed (S) in synchronous tapping. — When «#8125 Check Scode in G84» is set to «1», enter the S command in the same block where the

synchronous tapping command is issued.

P182 Synchronous tap error Details

— Connection to the main spindle unit was not established.

— The synchronous tapping was attempted with the spindle not serially connected under the multiple- spindle control I.

Remedy

— Check connection to the main spindle. — Check that the main spindle encoder exists. — Set 1 to the parameter #3024 (sout).

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

765

P183 No pitch/thread number Details

The pitch or number of threads has not been commanded in the tap cycle of a fixed cycle for drilling command.

Remedy

— Specify the pitch data and the number of threads by F or E command.

P184 Pitch/thread number error Details

— The pitch or the number of threads per inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the fixed cycle for drilling command.

— The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation speed.

— The thread number is too large for the spindle rotation speed. Remedy

— Correct the pitch or the number of threads per inch.

P185 No spec: Sync tapping cycle Details

Synchronous tapping cycle (G84/G74) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P186 Illegal S cmnd in synchro tap Details

S command was issued during synchronous tapping modal. Remedy

— Cancel the synchronous tapping before issuing the S command.

P190 No spec: Turning cycle Details

A lathe cutting cycle command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specification. — Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.

P191 Taper length error Details

In the lathe cutting cycle, the specified length of taper section is illegal. Remedy

— Set the smaller radius value than the axis travel amount in the lathe cycle command.

P192 Chamfering error Details

Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is illegal. Remedy

— Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the cycle.

P200 No spec: MRC cycle Details

The compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I (G70 to G73) was commanded though it is out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

766

P201 Program error (MRC) Details

— The subprogram, called with a compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I command, has at least one of the following commands: reference position return command (G27, G28, G29, G30); thread cutting (G33, G34); fixed cycle skip-function (G31, G31.n).

— An arc command was found in the first movement block of the finished shape program in compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I.

Remedy

— Delete G27, G28, G29, G30, G31, G33, G34, and fixed cycle G codes from the subprogram called with the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I commands (G70 to G73).

— Delete G02 and G03 from the first movement block of the finished shape program in compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I.

P202 Block over (MRC) Details

The number of blocks in the shape program of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I is over 50 or 200 (the maximum number differs according to the model).

Remedy

— Set a 50/200 or less value for the number of blocks in the shape program called by the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I commands (G70 to G73). (The maximum number differs according to the model).

P203 D cmnd figure error (MRC) Details

A proper shape will not obtained by executing the shape program for the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I (G70 to G73).

Remedy

— Correct the shape program for the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I (G70 to G73).

P204 E cmnd fixed cycle error Details

A command value of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76) is illegal. Remedy

— Correct the command value of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76).

P210 No spec: Pattern cycle Details

A compound type fixed cycle for turning machining II (G74 to G76) command was commanded though it is out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P220 No spec: Special fixed cycle Details

There are no special fixed cycle specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P221 No. of special fixed holes = 0 Details

«0» has been specified for the number of holes in special fixed cycle mode. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P222 G36 angle error Details

A G36 command specifies «0» for angle intervals. Remedy

— Correct the program.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

767

P223 G12/G13 radius error Details

The radius value specified with a G12 or G13 command is below the compensation amount. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P224 No spec: Circular (G12/G13) Details

There are no circular cutting specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P230 Subprogram nesting over Details

Over 8 times of subprogram calls have been done in succession from a subprogram.

— A M198 command was found in the program in the data server.

— The program in the IC card has been called more than once (the program in the IC card can be called only once during nested).

Remedy

— Correct the program so that the number of subprogram calls does not exceed 8 times.

P231 No sequence No. Details

The sequence No., commanded at the return from the subprogram or by GOTO in the subprogram call, was not set.

Remedy

— Specify the sequence Nos. in the call block of the subprogram.

P232 No program No. Details

— The machining program has not been found when the machining program is called.

— The file name of the program registered in IC card is not corresponding to O No. Remedy

— Enter the machining program. — Check the subprogram storage destination parameters. — Ensure that the external device (including IC card) that contains the file is mounted.

P235 Program editing Details

Operation was attempted for the file under program editing. Remedy

— Execute the program again after completion of program editing.

P240 No spec: Variable commands Details

A variable command (with #) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P241 No variable No. Details

The variable No. commanded is out of the range specified in the specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications. — Correct the program variable No.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

768

P242 = not defined at vrble set Details

The «=» sign has not been commanded when a variable is defined. Remedy

— Designate the «=» sign in the variable definition of the program.

P243 Can’t use variables Details

An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P244 Invalid set date or time Details

Date or time was set earlier than current date or time in the system variables (#3011, #3012) when the system lock was valid.

Remedy

— Date or time cannot be changed. — Correct the program.

P250 No spec: Figure rotation Details

Figure rotation (M98 I_J_P_H_L_) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P251 Figure rotation overlapped Details

Figure rotation command was issued during figure rotation. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P252 Coord rotate in fig. rotation Details

A coordinate rotation related command (G68, G69) was issued during figure rotation. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P260 No spec: Coordinates rotation Details

A coordinate rotation command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P261 G code illegal (Coord rot) Details

Another G code or a T command has been issued in the block of coordinate rotation command. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P262 Illegal modal (Coord rot) Details

A coordinate rotation command has been issued during modal in which coordinate rotation is not allowed.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

769

P270 No spec: User macro Details

A macro specification was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P271 No spec: Macro interrupt Details

A macro interruption command has been issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P272 NC and macro texts in a block Details

An executable statement and a macro statement exist together in the same block. Remedy

— Place the executable statement and macro statement in separate blocks in the program.

P273 Macro call nesting over Details

The number of macro call nests exceeded the limit imposed by the specifications. Remedy

— Correct the program so that the macro calls do not exceed the limit imposed by the specifications.

P275 Macro argument over Details

The number of argument sets in the macro call argument type II has exceeded the limit. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P276 Illegal G67 command Details

A G67 command was issued though it was not during the G66 command modal. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Issue G66 command before G67 command, which is a call cancel command.

P277 Macro alarm message Details

An alarm command has been issued in #3000. Remedy

— Refer to the operator messages on the diagnosis screen. — Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder.

P280 Brackets [ ] nesting over Details

Over five times have the parentheses «[» or «]» been used in a single block. Remedy

— Correct the program so that the number of «[» or «]» is five or less.

P281 Brackets [ ] not paired Details

A single block does not have the same number of commanded parentheses «[» as that of «]». Remedy

— Correct the program so that «[» and «]» parentheses are paired up properly.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

770

P282 Calculation impossible Details

The arithmetic formula is incorrect. Remedy

— Correct the formula in the program.

P283 Divided by zero Details

The denominator of the division is zero. Remedy

— Correct the program so that the denominator for division in the formula is not zero.

P288 IF EXCESS Details

Over ten times of IF statement nesting have been done. Remedy

Correct the program so that the number of IF statement nesting does not exceed ten.

P289 IF-ENDIF MMC. Details

An IF statement is not ended with ENDIF. THEN/ELSE has been commanded while there is no IF command.

Remedy

— Correct the program so that IF statements are ended with ENDIFs. — Put IF[condition] before THEN/ELSE command.

P290 IF sentence error Details

There is an error in the «IF[ ]GOTO(» statement. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P291 WHILE sentence error Details

There is an error in the «WHILE[ ]DO(-END(» statement. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P292 SETVN sentence error Details

There is an error in the «SETVN(» statement when the variable name setting was made. Remedy

— Correct the program. — The number of characters in the variable name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or less.

P293 DO-END nesting over Details

The number of DO-END nesting levels in the «WHILE[ ]DO(-END(» statement has exceeded 27.

Remedy

— Correct the program so that the nesting levels of the DO-END statement does not exceed 27.

P294 DO and END not paired Details

The DOs and ENDs are not paired off properly. Remedy

— Correct the program so that the DOs and ENDs are paired off properly.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

771

P295 WHILE/GOTO in tape Details

There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the tape during tape operation. Remedy

— Apply memory mode operation instead of tape mode that does not allow the execution of the program with a WHILE or GOTO statement.

P296 No address (macro) Details

A required address has not been specified in the user macro. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P297 Address-A error Details

The user macro does not use address A as a variable. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P298 G200-G202 cmnd in tape Details

User macro G200, G201, or G202 was specified during tape or MDI mode. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P300 Variable name illegal Details

The variable names have not been commanded properly. Remedy

— Correct the variable names in the program.

P301 Variable name duplicated Details

A duplicate variable name was found. Remedy

— Correct the program so that no duplicate name exists.

P310 Not use GMSTB macro code Details

G, M, S, T, or B macro code was called during fixed cycle. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Correct the parameter settings.

P350 No spec: Scaling command Details

The scaling command (G50, G51) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P360 No spec: Program mirror Details

A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command has been issued though the programmable mirror image specifications are not provided.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

772

P370 No spec: Facing t-post MR Details

The facing turret mirror image specifications are not provided. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P371 Facing t-post MR illegal Details

— Mirror image for facing tool posts was commanded to an axis in external mirror image or parameter mirror image.

— The commanded mirror image for facing tool posts enables the mirror image for a rotary axis. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Correct the parameter settings.

P380 No spec: Corner R/C Details

The corner R/C was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications. — Delete the corner chamfering/corner rounding command in the program.

P381 No spec: Arc R/C Details

Corner chamfering II or corner rounding II was commanded in the arc interpolation block though it is out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P382 No corner movement Details

The block next to corner chamfering/ corner rounding is not a travel command. Remedy

— Replace the block succeeding the corner chamfering/ corner rounding command by G01 command.

P383 Corner movement short Details

The travel distance in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was shorter than the value in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command.

Remedy

— Set the smaller value for the corner chamfering/corner rounding than the travel distance.

P384 Corner next movement short Details

The travel distance in the following block in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was shorter than the value in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command.

Remedy

— Set the smaller value for the corner chamfering/corner rounding than the travel distance in the following block.

P385 Corner during G00/G33 Details

A block with corner chamfering/corner rounding was given during G00 or G33 modal. Remedy

— Correct the program.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

773

P390 No spec: Geometric Details

A geometric command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P391 No spec: Geometric arc Details

There are no geometric IB specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P392 Angle < 1 degree (GEOMT) Details

The angular difference between the geometric line and line is 1 or less. Remedy

— Correct the geometric angle.

P393 Inc value in 2nd block (GEOMT) Details

The second geometric block has a command with an incremental value. Remedy

— Issue a command with an absolute value in the second geometric block.

P394 No linear move command (GEOMT) Details

The second geometric block contains no linear command. Remedy

— Issue the G01 command.

P395 Illegal address (GEOMT) Details

The geometric format is invalid. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P396 Plane selected in GEOMT ctrl Details

A plane switching command was issued during geometric command processing. Remedy

— Complete the plane switching command before geometric command processing.

P397 Arc error (GEOMT) Details

In geometric IB, the circular arc end point does not contact or cross the next block start point. Remedy

— Correct the geometric circular arc command and the preceding and following commands.

P398 No spec: Geometric1B Details

A geometric command was issued though the geometric IB specifications are not provided. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

774

P411 Illegal modal G111 Details

— G111 was issued during milling mode.

— G111 was issued during nose R compensation mode.

— G111 was issued during constant surface speed.

— G111 was issued during mixed control (cross axis control).

— G111 was issued during fixed cycle.

— G111 was issued during polar coordinate interpolation.

— G111 was issued during cylindrical interpolation mode. Remedy

— Before commanding G111, cancel the following commands. — Milling mode — Nose R compensation — Constant surface speed — Mixed control (cross axis control) — Fixed cycle — Polar coordinate interpolation — Cylindrical interpolation

P412 No spec: Axis name switch Details

Axis name switch (G111) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P420 No spec: Para input by program Details

Parameter input by program (G10) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P421 Parameter input error Details

— The specified parameter No. or set data is illegal.

— An illegal G command address was input in parameter input mode.

— A parameter input command was issued during fixed cycle modal or nose R compensation.

— G10L70, G11 were not commanded in independent blocks. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P430 R-pnt return incomplete Details

— A command was issued to move an axis, which has not returned to the reference position, away from that reference position.

— A command was issued to an axis removal axis. Remedy

— Execute reference position return manually. — Disable the axis removal on the axis for which the command was issued.

P431 No spec: 2,3,4th R-point ret Details

A command for second, third or fourth reference position return was issued though there are no such command specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

775

P432 No spec: Start position return Details

Start position return (G29) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P433 No spec: R-position check Details

Reference position check (G27) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P434 Compare error Details

One of the axes did not return to the reference position when the reference position check command (G27) was executed.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P435 G27 and M commands in a block Details

An M command was issued simultaneously in the G27 command block. Remedy

— Place the M code command, which cannot be issued in a G27 command block, in separate block from G27 command block.

P436 G29 and M commands in a block Details

An M command was issued simultaneously in the G29 command block. Remedy

— Place the M code command, which cannot be issued in a G29 command block, in separate block from G29 command block.

P438 G52 invalid during G54.1 Details

A local coordinate system command was issued during execution of the G54.1 command. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P450 No spec: Chuck barrier Details

The chuck barrier on command (G22) was specified although the chuck barrier is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P451 No spec: Stroke chk bef travel Details

Stroke check before travel (G22/G23) was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P452 Limit before travel exists Details

An illegal command, which places the axis travel start/end point in the prohibited area or moves the axis through the prohibited area, was detected when Stroke check before travel (G22) was commanded.

Remedy

— Correct the coordinate values of the axis address commanded in the program.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

776

P460 Tape I/O error Details

An error has occurred in the tape reader. Otherwise an error has occurred in the printer during macro printing.

Remedy

— Check the power and cable of the connected devices. — Correct the I/O device parameters.

P461 File I/O error Details

— A file of the machining program cannot be read.

— IC card has not been inserted. Remedy

— In memory mode, the programs stored in memory may have been destroyed. Output all of the programs and tool data and then format the system.

— Ensure that the external device (including an IC card, etc) that contains the file is mounted. — Correct the parameter settings for HD operation or IC card operation.

P462 Computer link commu error Details

A communication error occurred during the BTR operation. Remedy

— «L01 Computer link error» is displayed simultaneously. Take the remedy corresponding to the error No.

P480 No spec: Milling Details

— Milling was commanded though it is out of specifications.

— Polar coordinate interpolation was commanded though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P481 Illegal G code (mill) Details

— An illegal G code was used during the milling mode.

— An illegal G code was used during cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation.

— The G07.1 command was issued during the tool radius compensation. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P482 Illegal axis (mill) Details

— A rotary axis was commanded during the milling mode.

— Milling was executed though an illegal value was set for the milling axis No.

— Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during mirror image.

— Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded before the tool compensation was completed after the T command.

— G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical interpolation was not possible (there is no rotary axis, or external mirror image is ON).

— An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate system axis was commanded during cylindrical interpolation.

Remedy

— Correct the machining program, parameters and PLC interface signals.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

777

P484 R-pnt ret incomplete (mill) Details

— Movement was commanded to an axis that had not completed reference position return during the milling mode.

— Movement was commanded to an axis that had not completed reference position return during cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation.

Remedy

— Carry out manual reference position return.

P485 Illegal modal (mill) Details

— The milling mode was turned ON during nose R compensation or constant surface speed control.

— A T command was issued during the milling mode.

— The mode was switched from milling to cutting during tool compensation.

— Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during the constant surface speed control mode (G96).

— The command unacceptable in the cylindrical interpolation was issued.

— A T command was issued during the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation mode.

— A movement command was issued when the plane was not selected just before or after the G07.1 command.

— A plane selection command was issued during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.

— Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during tool radius compensation.

— The G16 plane in which the radius value of a cylinder is «0» was specified.

— A cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation command was issued during coordinate rotation by program.

Remedy

— Correct the program. — Issue G40 or G97 before issuing G12.1. — Issue a T command before issuing G12.1. — Issue G40 before issuing G13.1. — Specify the radius value of a cylinder other than «0», or specify the X axis’s current value other than

«0» before issuing G12.1/G16.

P486 Milling error Details

— The milling command was issued during the mirror image (when parameter or external input is turned ON).

— Polar coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation or milling interpolation was commanded during mirror image for facing tool posts.

— The start command of the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was issued during the normal line control.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P501 Cross (G110) impossible Details

Mixed control (cross axis control) command (G110) was issued in the following modes.

— During nose R compensation mode

— During pole coordinate interpolation mode

— During cylindrical interpolation mode

— During balance cut mode

— During fixed cycle machining mode

— During facing turret mirror image

— During constant surface speed control mode

— During hobbing mode

— During axis name switch Remedy

— Correct the program.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

778

P503 Illegal G110 axis Details

— The commanded axis does not exist.

— The mixed control (cross axis control) (G110) was commanded to the axis for which the mixed control (cross axis control) is disabled.

— The number of axes included in the mixed control (cross axis control) (G110) command is exceeding the maximum number of axes per part system.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P511 Synchronization M code error Details

— Two or more synchronization M codes were commanded in the same block.

— The synchronization M code and «!» code were commanded in the same block.

— Synchronization with the M code was commanded in 3rd part system or more. (Synchronization with the M code is valid only in 1st part system or 2nd part system.)

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P520 Control axis superimposition/Designated axis illegal Details

An axis which was impossible to superimpose was designated as a master axis or superimposing axis.

Remedy

Correct the program.

P521 Illegal synchronization axis Details

The axis specified as a basic or synchronous axis of synchronization across part systems cannot be synchronized.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P530 DEC. POINT ERR Details

A decimal point was added to the address where the decimal point command is not allowed. («#1274 ext10/bit0 (Type of address enabling/disabling decimal point command)»)

Remedy

Do not add any decimal point to the addresses where the decimal point is not allowed.

P544 No spec: Wk instl err cmp Details

The workpiece installation error compensation function is out of the specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P545 Invld cmd in wk instl err cmp Details

During workpiece installation error compensation, a command impossible to issue (such as G command) was issued.

Remedy

— Check the program. If you wish to issue a command impossible to issue (such as G command) during workpiece installation error compensation, cancel workpiece installation error compensation once.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

779

P546 Wk instl err cmp cmd invalid Details

— Workpiece installation error compensation was commanded in a G modal in which commanding it is not allowed.

— An illegal G command was issued in the block that has a workpiece installation error compensation command.

Remedy

— Check the program. Also check the G modals which were issued at commanding the workpiece installation error compensation, and cancel illegal ones.

— Issue the G command in a separate block.

P547 Illegal wk instl err cmp cmd Details

A command in which the rotary axis’s travel distance exceeds 180 degrees was issued. Remedy

— Divide the travel command so that the rotary axis’s travel distance per block is less than 180 degrees.

P550 No spec: G06.2(NURBS) Details

There is no NURBS interpolation option. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P551 G06.2 knot error Details

The knot (k) command value is smaller than the value for the previous block. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Specify the knot by monotone increment.

P552 Start point of 1st G06.2 err Details

The block end point immediately before the G06.2 command and the G06.2 first block command value do not match.

Remedy

— Match the G06.2 first block coordinate command value with the previous block end point.

P554 Invld manual interrupt in G6.2 Details

Manual interruption was executed in a block that applies the G06.2 mode. Remedy

— Execute the manual interruption in the block that does not apply the G06.2 mode.

P555 Invalid restart during G06.2 Details

Restart was attempted from the block that applies G06.2 mode. Remedy

— Restart from the block that does not apply the G06.2 mode.

P600 No spec: Auto TLM Details

An automatic tool length measurement command (G37) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

780

P601 No spec: Skip Details

A skip command (G31) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P602 No spec: Multi skip Details

A multiple skip command (G31.1, G31.2, G31.3 or G31 Pn) was issued though it is out of specifications.

Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P603 Skip speed 0 Details

The skip speed is «0». Remedy

— Specify the skip speed.

P604 TLM illegal axis Details

No axis was specified in the automatic tool length measurement block. Otherwise, two or more axes were specified.

Remedy

— Specify only one axis.

P605 T & TLM command in a block Details

The T code is in the same block as the automatic tool length measurement block. Remedy

— Specify the T code before the automatic tool length measurement block.

P606 T cmnd not found before TLM Details

The T code was not yet specified in automatic tool length measurement. Remedy

— Specify the T code before the automatic tool length measurement block.

P607 TLM illegal signal Details

The measurement position arrival signal turned ON before the area specified by the D command or «#8006 ZONE d». Otherwise, the signal remained OFF to the end.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P608 Skip during radius compen Details

A skip command was issued during radius compensation processing. Remedy

— Issue a radius compensation cancel (G40) command or remove the skip command.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

781

P610 Illegal parameter Details

— The parameter setting is not correct.

— G114.1 was commanded while the spindle synchronization was selected with the PLC interface signal.

— G110 was commanded while the mixed control (cross axis control) was selected with the PLC interface signal.

— G125 was commanded while the control axis synchronization across part systems was selected with the PLC interface signal.

Remedy

— Correct the settings of «#1514 expLinax (Exponential function interpolation linear axis)» and «#1515 expRotax (Exponential function interpolation rotary axis)».

— Correct the program. — Correct the parameter settings.

P611 No spec: Exponential function Details

There is no specification for the exponential interpolation. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P612 Exponential function error Details

A travel command for exponential interpolation was issued during mirror image for facing tool posts. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P700 Illegal command value Details

Spindle synchronization was commanded to a spindle that is not connected serially. Remedy

— Correct the program. — Correct the parameter settings.

P900 No spec: Normal line control Details

A normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, or G42.1) was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P901 Normal line control axis G92 Details

A coordinate system preset command (G92) was issued to a normal line control axis during normal line control.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P902 Normal line control axis error Details

— The normal line control axis was set to a linear axis.

— The normal line control axis was set to the linear type rotary axis II axis.

— The normal line control axis has not been set.

— The normal line control axis is the same as the plane selection axis. Remedy

— Correct the normal line control axis setting.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

782

P903 Plane chg in Normal line ctrl Details

The plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) was issued during normal line control. Remedy

— Delete the plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) from the program of the normal line control.

P920 No spec: 3D coord conv Details

There is no specification for 3-dimensional coordinate conversion. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P921 Illegal G code at 3D coord Details

The commanded G code cannot be performed during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal. Remedy

— Refer to «MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System)» for usable G commands.

— When the parameter «#8158 Init const sur spd» is enabled, disable the parameter or issue the constant surface speed control cancel (G97) command.

P922 Illegal mode at 3D coord Details

A 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command was issued during a modal for which 3-dimensional coordinate conversion cannot be performed.

Remedy

— Refer to «MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System)» for usable G commands.

P923 Illegal addr in 3D coord blk Details

A G code and G68 was commanded in a block though the G code cannot be commanded with G68. Remedy

— Refer to «MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System)» for usable G commands.

P930 No spec: Tool axis compen Details

A tool length compensation along the tool axis command was issued though it is out of specifications. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P931 Executing tool axis compen Details

There is a G code that cannot be commanded during tool length compensation along the tool axis. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P932 Rot axis parameter error Details

There is an illegal linear axis name or rotary axis name set in the rotary axis configuration parameters. There is an illegal setting in the parameter concerning the configuration of the inclined surface machining axis.

Remedy

— Set the correct value and turn the power ON again.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

783

P940 No spec: Tool tip control Details

There is no specification for tool tip center control. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P941 Invalid T tip control command Details

A tool tip center control command was issued during a modal for which a tool tip center control command cannot be issued.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P942 Invalid cmnd during T tip ctrl Details

A G code that cannot be commanded was issued during tool tip center control. Remedy

— Correct the program.

P943 Tool posture command illegal Details

In tool tip center control type 1, if the signs at the tool-side rotary axis or table base-side rotary axis start and finish points differ, a tool base-side rotary axis or table workpiece-side rotary axis rotation exists for the same block, and does not pass a singular point. In tool tip center control type 2, the posture vector command is incorrect.

Remedy

— Correct the program.

P950 No spec: Tilt face machining Details

Inclined surface machining option is not supported. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P951 Ill cmd in tilt face machining Details

A forbidden command (G command, etc) was issued during inclined surface machining. Remedy

— Check the program. If you want to execute a command (G command, etc) that is unavailable during inclined surface machining, cancel the inclined surface machining.

P952 Inclined face cut prohibited Details

Inclined surface machining was commanded during the mode where the machining is unavailable. Inclined surface machining was commanded during interruption.

Remedy

— Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during inclined surface machining command. If any, cancel that mode.

P953 Tool axis dir cntrl prohibited Details

Tool axis direction control was commanded during the mode where the control is unavailable. Remedy

— Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during tool axis direction control. If any, cancel that mode.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

784

P954 Inclined face command error Details

The address to issue the inclined surface machining command is incorrect. Remedy

— Check the program.

P955 Inclined face coord illegal Details

Impossible to define an inclined surface with the values you specified. Remedy

— Check the program.

P956 G68.2P10 surface not defined Details

The coordinate system for the machining surface selected with G68.2P10 has not been defined. Remedy

— Set the machining surface so that the coordinate system can be defined.

P957 Tool axis dir ctrl cmp amt 0 Details

When the tool axis direction control type 2 (G53.6) was commanded, a tool length compensation No. whose compensation amount is 0 was commanded.

Remedy

— Correct the program. Set the tool length compensation amount, or command a tool length compensation No. whose compensation amount is not 0.

P960 No spec: Direct command mode Details

G05 P4 was commanded while direct command mode option is OFF. Remedy

— Check the specifications.

P961 Invalid during dir cmnd mode Details

— A G code other than G05 P0 was commanded in direct command mode.

— A sequence No. command, F code command, MSTB command or variable command was issued.

— A corner chamfering command or corner R command was issued.

— A travel command was issued to an axis that had not been command in the G05 P4 block. Remedy

— Check the program.

P962 Dir cmnd mode cmnd invalid Details

G05 P4 was commanded in a modal where direct command mode is not available. Remedy

— Check the program.

P963 Illegal direct cmnd mode cmnd Details

The commanded coordinate value was beyond the maximum travel distance in direct command mode. Remedy

— Correct the coordinate value in direct command mode.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

785

P990 PREPRO error Details

Combining commands that required pre-reading (nose R offset, corner chamfering/corner rounding, geometric I, geometric IB, and compound type fixed cycle for turning machining) resulted in eight or more pre-read blocks.

Remedy

— Delete some or all of the combinations of commands that require pre-reading.

Appendix 1 Program Errors

MITSUBISHI CNC

786

787

Appendix 2

Order of G Function Command Priority

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority

MITSUBISHI CNC

788

Upper level: When commanded in the same block indicates that both commands are executed simultaneously

Lower level: When commanded during modal

Command in a separate block when possible

(Note) A program error (P45) will occur if they are commanded in the same block. This error can be

avoided by setting the parameter «#1241 bit0 (No G-CODE COMB. Error)» to «1», but be aware that

one of the G commands is ignored.

(*1) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with the «parameter input by program» command will cause

the error P421.

G02.4 or G03.4 with G11 will cause the error P33.

(*2) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G41 or G42 will cause the error P75.

(*3) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G43 or G44 will cause the error P75.

Commanded G code

G Group

01 G00-G03.4 G33, G06.2

02 G17-G19

03 G90, G91

05 G94, G95

06 G20, G21

07 G40-G42.2

08 G43,G44

G43.1,G43.4 G43.5

G00-G03.4 Positioning/ interpolation

G command commanded last is valid. Group 1 modal is updated.

Also possible during arc modal.

Arc and G41 to G42.2 cause error P151. (*2)

(*2) Tool radius is compensated, and then axes move.

Arc and G43 to G48 cause error P70. (*3)

The G44 movement in the arc modal moves with G01. (*3)

G04 Dwell

Group 1 modal is updated. G04 is executed.

G04 is executed G40 to G42.2 are ignored. (Note)

G04 is executed G43 to G48 are ignored. (Note)

G09 Exact stop check

G10, G11.1 Programmable data setting

(*1) G10 is priority for axis. No movement I, J, K rotation input.

G10 is used for axis, so the selected plan axis will be the basic axis.

G10 to G11 are executed. G40 to G42.2 are ignored.

G10 to G11 are executed. G43 to G48 are ignored.

G17 to G19 Plane Selection

G command commanded last is valid.

Plane axis changeover during radius compensation causes error P112.

G20, G21 Inch/metric changeover

Possible in same block

G27 to G30 Reference position compare/ return

G00 to G03.4 modals are updated. G27 to G30 are executed.

G27 to G30 are executed. G40 to G42.2 are ignored. (Note

G27 to G30 are executed. G43 to G48 are ignored. (Note)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

789

(*4) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G66 or G66.1 will cause the error P75.

(*5) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G51.1 or G62 (Mirror image ON) will cause the error

P75.

Commanded G code

G Group

09 G70 to G89

10 G98, G99

12 G54 to G59

13 G61 to

G64

14 G66 to G67

17 G96, G97

19 G50.1

G51.1, G62

G00 to G03.4 Positioning/ interpolation

Group 1 command is executed. Group 9 is canceled.

G66 to G67 are executed. (*4) G00 to G03.1 modals are updated.

(*4)

(*5) During the arc command, all axis names become mirror center data.

(*5) Movement with mirror shape.

G04 Dwell

G04 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.(Note)

G04 is executed Group 12 is changed.

G04 is executed G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignore.d (Note)

G09 Exact stop check

G10, G11.1 Program data setting

G10 to G11 are executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.

G10 is executed G54 to G59 modals are updated.

G66 to G67 are executed. G10 is ignored.

G10 to G11 are executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.

G17 to G19 Plane Selection

G20, G21 Inch/metric changeover

G27 to G30 Reference position compare/ return

G66 to G67 are executed. G27 to G30 are ignored. (Note)

G27 to G30 are executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.(Note)

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority

MITSUBISHI CNC

790

Upper level: When commanded in the same block indicates that both commands are executed simultaneously

Lower level: When commanded during modal

Command in a separate block when possible

(Note) A program error (P45) will occur if they are commanded in the same block. This error can be

avoided by setting the parameter «#1241 bit0 (No G-CODE COMB. Error)» to «1»,but be aware that

one of the G commands is ignored.

(*1) G02.4 orG03.4 programmed together with G41 or G42 will cause the error P75.

(*2) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G43 or G44 will cause the error P75.

(*3) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G51.1 or G62 (Mirror image ON)will cause the error

P75.

Commanded G code

G Group

01 G00-G03.4 G33, G06.2

02 G17-G19

03 G90, G91

05 G94, G95

06 G20, G21

07 G40-G42.2

08 G43,G44

G43.1,G43.4 G43.5

G31 to G31.3 Skip

Error:P608 Error:P608

G33 Thread cutting

G command commanded last is valid.

G37.1 Automatic tool length measurement

G37.1 is executed. G00 to G33 are ignored. (Note)

G37.1 is executed. G40 to G42.2 are ignored.(Note)

G37.1 is executed. G43 to G48 are ignored.(Note)

G40 to G42.2 Tool radius compensation

Arc and G41 to G42.2 cause error P151. (*1) G41 to G42.2 in arc modal cause error P151. (*1)

Plane axis changeover during tool radius compensation causes error P112.

G command commanded last is valid.

G43, G44, G43.1,G43.4,G43.5 Tool length compensation/tool center point control

Arc and G43, G44 cause error P70. (*2)

G command commanded last is valid.

G50.1 G51.1 , G62 Program mirror image

(*3)

(*3)

G52 Local coordinate system

G52 is executed G40 to G42.2 are ignored. (Note)

G52 is executed. G43 to G48 are ignored. (Note)

G53 Machine coordinate system

G53 is executed G40 to G42.2 are ignored.(Note)

G53 is executed G43 to G48 are ignored.(Note)

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

791

Commanded G code

G Group

09 G70 to G89

10 G98, G99

12 G54 to G59

13 G61 to G64

14 G66 to G67

17 G96, G97

19 G50.1

G51.1, G62

G31 to G31.3 Skip

G33 Thread cutting

Group 1 command is executed. Group 9 is canceled.

G66 to G67 are executed. G33 modal is updated.

G37.1 Automatic tool length measurement

G37.1 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored. (Note)

G66 to G67 are executed. G37.1 is ignored.(Note)

G37.1 is executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.(Note)

G40 to G42.2 Tool radius compensation

Error:P155 Error:P155

G43, G44, G43.1,G43.4,G43.5 Tool length compensation/tool center point control

G66 to G67 are executed. G43 to G48 modals are updated..

G50.1 G51.1, G62 Program mirror image

G66 to G67 are executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.

G command commanded last is valid.

G52 Local coordinate system

G52 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.(Note)

G52 is executed G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.(Note)

G53 Machine coordinate system

G53 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored. (Note)

G53 is executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.(Note)

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority

MITSUBISHI CNC

792

Upper level: When commanded in the same block indicates that both commands are executed simultaneously

Lower level: When commanded during modal

Command in a separate block when possible

(Note) A program error (P45) will occur if they are commanded in the same block. This error can be

avoided by setting the parameter «#1241 bit0 (No G-CODE COMB. Error)» to «1»,but be aware that

one of the G commands is ignored.

(*1) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G66 or G66.1 will cause the error P75.

G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with G67 will cause the error P75.

(*2) G02.4 or G03.4 programmed together with fixed cycle will cause the error P75.

Commanded G code

G Group

01 G00-G03.4 G33, G06.2

02 G17-G19

03 G90, G91

05 G94, G95

06 G20, G21

07 G40-G42.2

08 G43,G44

G43.1,G43.4 G43.5

G54 to G59 Workpiece coordinate system

G61 to G64 Mode selection

G65 Macro call

G65 is executed G00 to G03.1 modals are updated.

G65 is executed G43 to G48 modals are updated.

G66 to G67 Macro call

G66 to G67 are executed. G00 to G03.1 modals are updated. (*1)

(*1)

G66 to G67 are executed. G43 to G48 modals are updated.

G73 to G89 Fixed cycles

G73 to G89 are canceled. G01 to G33 modals are updated.

(*2)

Error:P155 Fixed cycle during compensation Error:P155

G90, G91 Absolute value/ incremental value

Use in same block

G92 Coordinate system setting

G94, G95 Synchronous/ asynchronous

G command commanded last is valid.

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

793

Commanded G code

G Group

09 G70 to G89

10 G98, G99

12 G54 to G59

13 G61 to G64

14 G66 to G67

17 G96, G97

19 G50.1

G51.1, G62

G54 to G59 Workpiece coordinate system

G command commanded last is valid.

G66 to G67 are executed. G54 and G59 modals are updated.

G61 to G64 Mode selection

G command commanded last is valid.

G65 Macro call

G65 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.

Error

G65 is executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.

G66 to G67 Macro call

G66 to G67 are executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.

G66 to G67 are executed. G54 and G59 modals are updated.

G command commanded last is valid.

G66 to G67 are executed. G50.1, G51.1 and G62 are ignored.

G73 to G89 Fixed cycles

G command commanded last is valid.

G66 to G67 are executed. G73 to G89 are ignored.

All axes become mirror center.

G90, G91 Absolute value/ incremental value

G92 Coordinate system setting

G92 is executed. G70 to G89 except G80 are ignored.(Note)

Note that G92 is priority for axis.

G94, G95 Synchronous/ asynchronous

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority

MITSUBISHI CNC

794

Upper level: When commanded in the same block indicates that both commands are executed simultaneously

Lower level: When commanded during modal

Command in a separate block when possible

Commanded G code

G Group

01 G00-G03.4 G33, G06.2

02 G17-G19

03 G90, G91

05 G94, G95

06 G20, G21

07 G40-G42.2

08 G43,G44

G43.1,G43.4 G43.5

G96, G97 Constant surface speed control

G98, G99 Fixed cycle Initial point/ R point return

M700V/M70V Series Programming Manual (M2/M0 Format)

795

Commanded G code

G Group

09 G70 to G89

10 G98, G99

12 G54 to G59

13 G61 to G64

14 G66 to G67

17 G96, G97

19 G50.1

G51.1, G62

G96, G97 Constant surface speed control

G command commanded last is valid.

G98, G99 Fixed cycle Initial point/ R point return

G command commanded last is valid.

Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority

MITSUBISHI CNC

796

Index

Numbers

2nd, 3rd, and 4th Reference Position (Zero point) Return ; G30…………………………………………….688

3-dimensional Circular Interpolation ; G02.4,G03.4…………………………………………….104

3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion ; G68.1/G69.1…………………………………………….575

3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ; G40/ G41,G42………………………………………………….262

A

Acceleration/Deceleration Mode Change in Hole Drilling Cycle ……………………………………. 346

Actual Examples of Using User Macros…………….442 Arc ; G36……………………………………………………… 351 ASCII Code Macro ………………………………………..377 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ……………… 679 Automatic Corner Override …………………………….. 167 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ; G37.1 …… 734

B

Back Boring ; G87…………………………………………. 326 Basic Machine Coordinate System Selection ;

G53…………………………………………………………681 Basic Machine, Workpiece and

Local Coordinate Systems …………………………677 Bolt Hole Cycle ; G34……………………………………..349 Boring ; G85………………………………………………….324 Boring ; G86………………………………………………….325 Boring ; G88………………………………………………….328 Boring ; G89………………………………………………….329

C

Changing of Compensation No. during Compensation Mode ………………………………… 244

Circular Cutting ; G12,G13………………………………475 Circular Cutting ; G75……………………………………..333 Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03 ………………………. 47 Common Variables ………………………………………..383 Compensation Data Input by Program ; G10 ……..291 Compensation Data Input to Variable by Program ;

G11…………………………………………………………296 Constant Lead Thread Cutting ; G33 …………………. 56 Constant Surface Speed Control ; G96,G97……… 187 Control Commands ………………………………………. 433 Coordinate Read Function ; G14 …………………….. 672 Coordinate Rotation by Program ;

G68.1/G69.1…………………………………………….554 Coordinate Rotation Input by Parameter ;

G10 I_ J_/K_ …………………………………………… 562 Coordinate Rotation Parameter ………………………. 406 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis ………………….. 712 Coordinate System Setting ; G92…………………….. 682 Coordinate Systems and

Coordinate Zero Point Symbols …………………….3 Coordinate Words and Control Axes…………………….2 Coordinate Words and Control Axes…………………676

Corner Chamfering Expansion/ Corner Rounding Expansion …………………….. 462

Corner Chamfering Expansion/ Corner Rounding Expansion……………………… 454

Corner Chamfering I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,C_…………….. 450 Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding I ………… 450 Corner Chamfering II ;

G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,C_ ………………………….. 458 Corner Chamfering II / Corner Rounding II ………. 457 Corner Rounding I ; G01 X_ Y_ ,R_ ……………….. 452 Corner Rounding II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Y_ ,R_….. 460 Cutting Feed Constant Inclination Acceleration/

Deceleration……………………………………………. 151 Cutting Feedrate ………………………………………….. 119 Cutting Mode ; G64………………………………………. 173 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1………………………… 72

D

Deceleration Check ………………………………………. 163 Decimal Point Input ………………………………………… 32 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle ; G83……………………….. 310 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle………………………………… 310 Detailed Description for

Macro Call Instruction …………………………….. 375 Details of Operation ………………………………………. 648 Diameter Designation of

Compensation Amount …………………………….. 258 Drilling Cycle with High-Speed Retract…………….. 342 Drilling, Counter Boring ; G82…………………………. 309 Drilling, Spot Drilling ; G81……………………………… 308 Dwell (Time Designation) ; G04………………………. 176

E

End Point Error Check Cancellation ; G69 ……….. 670 Exact Stop Check ; G09 ………………………………… 158 Exact Stop Check Mode ; G61 ……………………….. 162 Exponential Interpolation ; G02.3,G03.3…………….. 86 External Output Commands ; POPEN, PCLOS,

DPRNT…………………………………………………… 436

F

F1-digit Feed………………………………………………… 120 Feed Hold, Feedrate Override, G09 Valid/Invalid

(#3004) ………………………………………………….. 399 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution

(Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed) ; G94,G95 ………………………………………………… 123

Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes …………………………………………… 132

Figure rotation ; G22 I_J_K_…………………………… 358 File Format ……………………………………………………. 14 Fine Boring ; G76………………………………………….. 335 Fixed Cycles ………………………………………………… 304

G

G code …………………………………………………………. 20 G Code Lists ………………………………………………….. 20 G Code Macro Call ………………………………………. 373 G Command Mirror Image ; G50.1,G51.1,G62….. 446

G Command Modals (#4001-#4021, #4201-#4221) …………………… 401

G1 -> G0 Deceleration Check…………………………. 165 G1 -> G1 Deceleration Check…………………………. 166 G41/G42 Commands and I, J, K Designation …… 234 General Precautions for

Tool Radius Compensation……………………….. 243 Geometric …………………………………………………… 464 Geometric I ; G01 A_ …………………………………….. 464 Geometric IB ……………………………………………….. 466 Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of

linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 R_H_ ………………………….. 472

Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of linear — arc intersection) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 P_Q_H_………………………. 469

Geometric IB (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact) ; G02/G03 P_Q_ /R_ ……….. 467

Grid ; G37 ……………………………………………………. 352

H

Helical Interpolation ; G17 to G19, G02, G03 ……… 63 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1,G08…………………. 510 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation ; G61.2 ………. 548 High-speed High-accuracy Control ;

G05, G05.1……………………………………………… 527 High-speed High-accuracy Control I, II …………….. 527 High-speed Machining Mode I, II ;

G05 P1, G05 P2………………………………………. 525 High-speed Machining Mode ………………………….. 525 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Euler Angles……………………………………………. 630 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Projection Angles …………………………………….. 638 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Roll-Pitch-Yaw angles ………………………………. 632 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Three Points in a Plane…………………………….. 634 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Tool Axis Direction …………………………………… 640 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using

Two Vectors ……………………………………………. 636 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation ; G07……………….. 114

I

Inch Thread Cutting ; G33 ………………………………. 61 Inch/Metric Conversion ; G20,G21 ……………………. 30 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3 ………. 629 Index Table Indexing ……………………………………. 183 Indexing Increment ………………………………………….. 8 Initial Point and R Point Level Return ;

G98,G99…………………………………………………. 340 Input Command Increment Tenfold …………………….. 7 Input Setting Unit …………………………………………….. 6 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ;

G10,G11…………………………………………………. 297 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by

G10 L3 Command ; G10 L3,G11 ……………….. 297 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data by

G10 L30 Command ; G10 L30,G11 ……………. 299 Integrating Time (#3001, #3002) ……………………. 398 Interference Check ………………………………………. 249

Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding ……………………………………..462

Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding ………………………………………456

Interrupts during Tool Radius Compensation …….240 Inverse Time Feed ; G93…………………………………127

L

Line at Angle ; G35…………………………………………350 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Y_ A_/,A_ ……..463 Linear Interpolation ; G01………………………………….45 Local Coordinate System Setting ; G52 ……………703 Local Variables (#1 to #33) …………………………….384

M

Machine Zero Point and 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position (Zero point) ………………….678

Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1,G121 ……………………………………………665

Macro Call Instruction …………………………………….367 Macro Interface Inputs/Outputs

(#1000 to #1035, #1100 to #1135, #1200 to #1295, #1300 to #1395) ……………………………………….388

Macro Interruption ; ION,IOF……………………………480 Message Display and Stop (#3006) …………………399 Mirror Image (#3007) ……………………………………..400 Miscellaneous Command Macro Call

(for M, S, T, B Code Macro Call) ………………..374 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits) ………………..180 Modal Call A (Movement Command Call) ;

G66………………………………………………………..370 Modal Call B (for Each Block) ;

G66.1 ………………………………………………………372 Modal, unmodal ………………………………………………20 Multiple-spindle Control II ………………………………..195 Multiple-spindle Control…………………………………..194 Multi-step Skip Function 1 ; G31.n ,G04 …………..743 Multi-step Skip Function 2 ; G31 P…………………..745

N

NC Alarm (#3000) …………………………………………397 Normal Line Control ; G40.1/G41.1/G42.1 (G150/

G151/G152) ……………………………………………..491 Number of Workpiece Machining Times (#3901,

#3902) …………………………………………………….406 NURBS Interpolation ; G06.2 …………………………..109

O

Operation Commands ……………………………………428 Optional Block Skip …………………………………………16 Optional Block Skip Addition ; /n ……………………….18 Optional Block Skip; / ……………………………………..16 Other Commands and Operations during

Tool Radius Compensation ………………………..224 Other Modals (#4101 — #4120, #4301 — #4320) ….402

P

Parameter Input by Program ; G10 L70, G11.1 ….477

Plane Selection ; G17,G18,G19………………………… 54 Polar Coordinate Command ; G16/G15 ………………92 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ; G12.1,G13.1/

G112,G113 ………………………………………………79 Position Command Methods ; G90,G91 …………….. 28 Position Information (#5001 — #5160 + n) ………….403 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) ; G00……………………38 Precautions ………………………………………………….440 Precautions Before Starting Machining ………………24 Precautions for Inputting the

Tool Life Management Data ………………………. 302 Precautions for Using a Fixed Cycle …………………337 Precautions ………………………………………………….. 661 Pre-read Buffers …………………………………………….. 26 Program Format …………………………………………….. 10 Programmable Current Limitation ; G10 L14 ; …… 751

R

R Device Access Variables (#50000 — #50749, #51000 — #51749, #52000 — #52749) ………….421

R Specification Circular Interpolation ; G02,G03……………………………………………………52

Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/ Deceleration …………………………………………… 137

Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration …………………………142

Rapid Traverse Rate ……………………………………… 118 Read/write of the Workpiece Installation Error

Compensation Amounts ……………………………. 427 Reading PLC data

(#100100-#100103,#100110) ……………………. 416 Reading The Parameters (#100000-#100002,

#100010) ……………………………………………….. 413 Reference Position (Zero point) Return ;

G28,G29………………………………………………….684 Reference Position Check ; G27………………………691 Relation with Other Functions …………………………. 658 Reverse Run Information ………………………………..407 Reverse Tapping Cycle ; G74 …………………………. 331 Rotary Axis Basic Position Selection ……………….. 652 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters……………… 407

S

Scaling ; G50/G51…………………………………………. 550 Secondary Miscellaneous Functions

(A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits) ……………….. 182 Setting of Workpiece Coordinates in

Fixed Cycle Mode ……………………………………. 341 Simple Macro Calls ; G65 ………………………………367 Skip Function ; G31………………………………………. 738 Small Diameter Deep Hole Drilling Cycle………….. 311 Special Fixed Cycle; G34, G35, G36, G37 ……….. 348 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn ……………………….. 747 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting ; G92 …………………189 Spindle Functions…………………………………………..186 Spindle/C Axis Control …………………………………… 191 Spiral/Conical Interpolation ; G02.0/G03.1(Type1),

G02/G03(Type2) ……………………………………….. 99 Spline ; G05.1 Q2/Q0……………………………………..539 SSS Control ………………………………………………….533 Start of Tool Radius Compensation and Z Axis Cut

in Operation……………………………………………..247

Stepping Cycle ; G73…………………………………….. 330 Stroke Check Before Travel ; G22.1/G23.1 ………. 730 Subprogram Call ; G22,G23 ………………………….. 353 Subprogram Control; G22, G23………………………. 353 Suppression of Single Block Stop and Miscellaneous

Function Finish Signal Waiting (#3003) ……… 398

T

Tapping Cycle ; G84……………………………………… 313 Tapping Mode ; G63……………………………………… 172 Thread Cutting ……………………………………………….. 56 Time Reading Variables

(#3001, #3002, #3011, #3012) ………………….. 419 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) ; !L …. 618 Timing Synchronization Operation Function Using M

codes ; M*** …………………………………………… 625 Timing Synchronization Operation with

Start Point Designated (Type 1) ; G115………. 621 Timing Synchronization Operation with

Start Point Designated (Type 2) ; G116……… 623 Timing Synchronization Operation…………………… 618 Tool Axis Direction Control …………………………….. 642 Tool Center Point Control ; G43.4/G43.5………….. 590 Tool Change Position Return ; G30.1 — G30.6…… 488 Tool Compensation ………………………………………. 395 Tool Compensation……………………………………….. 200 Tool Functions (T8-digit BCD) ……………………….. 198 Tool Length Compensation in the

Tool Axis Direction ; G43.1/G44 ………………… 207 Tool Length Compensation/Cancel ; G43/G44….. 204 Tool Life Management (#60000 — #64700) ………. 408 Tool Position Offset ; G45 to G48……………………. 283 Tool Radius Compensation ;

G38,G39/G40/G41,G42 ……………………………. 214 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining ;

G40/G41.2,G42.2…………………………………….. 273 Tool Radius Compensation Operation……………… 215 Types of Variables ……………………………………….. 383

U

Unidirectional Positioning ; G60………………………… 70 User Macro Commands; G65, G66, G66.1, G67,

G68(G23) ……………………………………………….. 366 User Macro ………………………………………………….. 366

V

Variable Commands …………………………………….. 361 Variable……………………………………………………….. 381

W

Workpiece Coordinate Changing during Radius Compensation………………………………. 260

Workpiece Coordinate System Compensation (#5201 — #532n) ………………………………………. 396

Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ; G92.1 …. 707 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Offset ;

G54 to G59 (G54.1) …………………………………. 692 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation ;

G54.4 …………………………………………………….. 715

Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Nov. 2008 IB(NA)1500930-A First edition created.

Jan. 2010 IB(NA)1500930-B

— Reviewed «Precautions for Safety». — Corrected the items below. 10.3 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 10.4 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting; G92 — Corrected the mistakes.

Nov. 2011 IB(NA)1500930-C

— Conducted a thorough review. Modified the structures of the following chapters. 3. Program Formats Changed the chapter title. (Previously «Data Formats») Removed 3.1 — 3.3, 3.5, 3.6 in the previous version. Newly created 3.1 and 3.2. Changed the title of 3.4 and divided it into 2 chapters. (Newly created 3.4.1) 4. Pre-read Buffers Changed the chapter title. (Previously «Buffer Register») Removed 4.1 in the previous version. 6. Interpolation Functions The chapter order of 6.3 — 6.7 has been changed 6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00 Made a major change to the structure. 10. Spindle Functions Removed 10.1 in the previous version. 12.7 — 12.9 (previously it was 12.6 — 12.8) The chapter numbers have been change due to new chapter «12.6 Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining» 13.1 Standard Fixed Cycles, 13.2 Special Fixed Cycle The chapter has been divided into each fixed cycle. 13.5.2 Macro Call Command Divided the contents of 13.5.2 into 13.5.2.1 — 13.5.2.6. 13.5.5 Types of Variables Divided the contents of 13.5.5 into 13.5.5.1 — 13.5.5.24. 14. Coordinates System Setting Functions The chapter order of 14.4 — 14.6 has been changed. — Added/Changed the following chapters in order to support the system software H0 version [Added] Handling of our product 12.6 Tool Radius Compensation for 5-axis Machining; G40/G41.2,G42.2 13.5.5.17 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters 13.5.5.23 R Device Access Variables (#50000 — #50749, #51000 — #51749, #52000 — #52749) 13.5.5.24 Read/write of the workpiece installation error compensation amounts 13.9.2 Geometric IB 13.25.2 Waiting-and-simultaneous Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 1) ;G115 13.25.3 Waiting-and-simultaneous Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 2) ;G116 13.25.4 Waiting-and-simultaneous Operation Function Using M codes ; M*** 13.26 Inclined Surface Machining; G68.2, G68.3 14.14 Workpiece Installation Error Compensation; G54.4 [Changed] Precaution for Safety 3.4.2 G Code Lists 5.3 Decimal Point Input 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation ; G07.1 7.3 F1-digit Feed 12.10 Inputting the Tool Life Management Data ; G10,G11 13.1.3 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle ; G83 13.1.4 Tapping Cycle ; G84 13.4 Variable Commands (Continue to the next page)

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

(Continued from the previous page) 13.5.5.14 Position Information (#5001 — #5160 + n) 13.5.5.19 Tool Life Management (#60000 — #64700) 13.5.8 External Output Commands ; POPEN,PCLOS,DPRNT 13.10 Circular cutting ; G12,G13 13.15 High-accuracy control ; G61.1,G08 13.16 High speed machining mode 13.17 High-speed High-accuracy control ; G05, G05.1 13.19 High-accuracy Spline Interpolation ; G61.2 13.24 Tool center point control ; G43.4/G43.5 13.26 Inclined Surface Machining ; G68.2, G68.3 15.2 Skip Function ; G31 15.3 Multi-step Skip Function 1 ; G31.n ,G04 15.4 Multi-step Skip Function 2 ; G31 P 15.5 Speed Change Skip ; G31 Fn Appendix 2 Order of G Function Command Priority — Corrected the mistakes.

Sep. 2013 IB(NA)1500930-D

— Modified the structures of the following chapters. Changed 15. Measurement Support Functions to 16. Measurement Support Functions (Changed the chapter No.) Added 15. Protection Functions and changed 15.7 Stroke Check Before Travel to 15.1 — Added/Changed the following chapters in order to support the system software J2 ver- sion. [Added] 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Multi-step Acceleration/Deceleration 13.1.18 Acceleration/Deceleration Mode Change in Hole Drilling Cycle 13.7.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion 13.7.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding 13.8 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II [Changed] 7.7 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration/Deceleration 13.1.4 Tapping Cycle ; G84 13.7 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I 13.12 Parameter Input by Program 13.15 Normal Line Control 13.16 High-accuracy Control 13.23 Parameter Coordinate Rotation 13.28 Machining Condition Selection — Corrected the mistakes.

Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

Germany Service Center Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-121 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 CINCINATTI, OHIO 45201, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE

TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Minnesota Service Satellite ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI, 7 — CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1

20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A. TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite

VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 — 35129 PADOVA, ITALY Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A. TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Branch

TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. East Region Service Center TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NEW JERSEY 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center

CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420 Pennsylvania Service Satellite 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA 15644, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579 TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531

Poland Service Center Connecticut Service Satellite UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND TORRINGTON, CONNECTICUT 06790, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701 TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531

Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A. mraniye ubesi Turkey Service Center

South Region Service Center ERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775 1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. MRANIYE / ISTANBUL, TURKEY TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519 TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995

Texas Service Satellites Czech Republic Service Center GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A. TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 Russia Service Center

213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Tennessee Service Satellite TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192 Nashville, Tennessee, 37201, U.S.A. TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 Sweden Service Center

STRANDKULLEN, 718 91 FRVI , SWEDEN Florida Service Satellite TEL: +46-581-700-20 / FAX: +46-581-700-75 WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A. TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 Bulgaria Service Center

4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA Canada Region Service Center TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061 4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center

APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE Canada Service Satellite TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721 EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE Mexico Region Service Center TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366 MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +52-55-3067-7500 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 Belarus Service Center

OFFICE 9, NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS Monterrey Service Satellite TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081 MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 South Africa Service Center

P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625 SOUTH AFRICA TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513

BRAZIL

MELCO CNC do Brasil Comrcio e Servios S.A Brazil Region Service Center ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911

ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER) Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU, TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA

TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-2830 Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer 60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Jinan) Service Dealer

China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite NO. 16, JALAN SHAH BANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Center

9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, Philippines Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-3907 SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Beijing) Service Dealer TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417

VIETNAM China (Tianjin) Service Center UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD TIANJIN 300061, CHINA Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017 UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET, DISTRICT 1, China (Shenyang) Service Satellite HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM China (Changchun) Service Satellite TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5947

China (Chengdu) Service Center Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Satellite ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD, SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET, JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630 TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076

China (Shenzhen) Service Center INDONESIA ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,

FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776 Indonesia Service Center China (Xiamen) Service Dealer GEDUNG JAYA 11TH FLOOR, JL. MH. THAMRIN NO.12, JAKARTA PUSAT 10340, INDONESIA China (Dongguan) Service Dealer TEL: +62-21-3192-6461 / FAX: +62-21-3192-3942

THAILAND KOREA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. (THAILAND FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER) Thailand Service Center Korea Service Center BANG-CHAN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE NO.111 SOI SERITHAI 54 1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA T.KANNAYAO, A.KANNAYAO, BANGKOK 10230, THAILAND TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668 TEL: +66-2906-8255 / FAX: +66-2906-3239

Thailand Service Center Korea Taegu Service Satellite 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1, FLOOR 7 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA RAMA III RD., BANGPONGPANG, YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120, THAILAND TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411 TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-9750

INDIA TAIWAN

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER) India Service Center Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center (Central Area) 2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY, NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST., DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN R.O.C. TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399 TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 Ludhiana satellite office Jamshedpur satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center (North Area)

10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN R.O.C. India (Pune) Service Center TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433 EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center (South Area) Baroda satellite office 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN, R.O.C Mumbai satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031

India (Bangalore) Service Center PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2, LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE — 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699 Chennai satellite office Coimbatore satellite office

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD. Australia Service Center 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245

Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this prod- uct.

Duplication Prohibited

This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsub- ishi Electric Corporation.

COPYRIGHT

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the CNC M700V Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User’s Manual for Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User’s Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric CNC M700V, M70V Series User’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Остеохард инструкция по применению цена в алматы
  • Dune hd tv 102 инструкция по применению
  • Лего френдс домик на пляже инструкция
  • Как поменять прописку через госуслуги пошаговая инструкция
  • Мемоплант форте инструкция по применению цена отзывы аналоги